Bizhub PRESS C1100 - C1085 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2015/10/28
Table of Contents
Revision list............................................................................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Version 1.5...........................................................................................................................1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual...................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items.........................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-4
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.......................................................................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention...................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 FUSE.......................................................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 ALL Areas......................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Germany........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 France...........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.4 Denmark........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden............................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.6 Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-20
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine..................................................................................................................................A-20
4.2 Warning indications on the boards..........................................................................................................................................A-35
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-42
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS..................................................................................................B-1
1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL .........................................................................................................B-1
2. PRODUCT NAME.......................................................................................................................................................B-2
3. TRADEMARK .............................................................................................................................................................B-3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES ..............................................................................................................................B-3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS ...............................................................................................................................................................B-3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS........................................................................................................................B-4
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION ........................................................................................................................................B-6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................C-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................C-1
1.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.3 Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
(1) Paper size...........................................................................................................................................................................C-1
(2) Paper weight.......................................................................................................................................................................C-2
(3) Type of paper......................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4 Recommended paper................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4.1 Inch.................................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4.2 Metric..............................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.5 Materials....................................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.6 Print volume..............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.7 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.8 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.9 Scan function.............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.10 Note regarding the specifications ...........................................................................................................................................C-4
2. DF-626........................................................................................................................................................................C-5
2.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-5
2.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-5
2.3 Type of paper............................................................................................................................................................................C-5
2.4 Originals that are not allowed to be fed.....................................................................................................................................C-5
i
2.5 Originals other than the paper feed and the throughput can be guaranteed.............................................................................C-5
2.6 Table of mixed combinations.....................................................................................................................................................C-6
(1) Inch.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-6
(2) Metric..................................................................................................................................................................................C-6
2.7 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-6
2.8 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-7
2.9 Note regarding the specifications .............................................................................................................................................C-7
3. PF-707/708.................................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
(1) Paper feed..........................................................................................................................................................................C-8
(2) Scanner (PF-708 only)........................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.3 Type of paper............................................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.4 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-8
(1) PF-707................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
(2) PF-708................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.5 Operating environment .............................................................................................................................................................C-9
3.6 Note regarding the specifications .............................................................................................................................................C-9
4. HT-506......................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.2 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.3 Operating environment ...........................................................................................................................................................C-10
5. FA-502......................................................................................................................................................................C-11
5.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
5.2 Type of paper..........................................................................................................................................................................C-11
5.3 Machine data...........................................................................................................................................................................C-11
6. RU-516......................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.3 Type of paper..........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.4 Machine data...........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
7. RU-511......................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2 Function ..................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.3 Type of paper..........................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.4 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-13
8. HM-101.....................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.2 Function ..................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.3 Type of paper .........................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.4 Machine data...........................................................................................................................................................................C-14
9. RU-510......................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.3 Paper type...............................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.4 Machine data...........................................................................................................................................................................C-15
10. FS-532....................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(2) Staple sheet......................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(3) Staple position..................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(4) Maximum tray capacity.....................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-17
................................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
10.3.1 Allowable amount of curling........................................................................................................................................C-18
10.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-18
ii
10.5 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-18
10.6 Note regarding the specifications .........................................................................................................................................C-18
11. SD-510....................................................................................................................................................................C-19
11.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-19
11.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-19
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-19
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-19
11.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-19
(1) Saddle stitching mode......................................................................................................................................................C-19
(2) Half-Fold mode.................................................................................................................................................................C-20
(3) Tri-folding mode................................................................................................................................................................C-21
(4) Allowable amount of curling..............................................................................................................................................C-21
11.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-21
12. PK-522....................................................................................................................................................................C-23
12.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-23
12.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-23
12.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-23
12.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-23
12.5 Operating environment .........................................................................................................................................................C-23
13. PI-502 .....................................................................................................................................................................C-25
13.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-25
13.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-25
13.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-25
13.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-25
14. MK-732....................................................................................................................................................................C-27
14.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-27
14.2 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-27
14.3 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-27
15. LS-506.....................................................................................................................................................................C-28
15.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-28
15.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-28
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-28
15.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-28
15.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-29
16. FD-503....................................................................................................................................................................C-30
16.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-30
16.2 Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(2) Maximum tray capacity ....................................................................................................................................................C-30
16.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-31
(1) Punching function ............................................................................................................................................................C-31
(2) Folding functions ..............................................................................................................................................................C-31
(3) PI functions ......................................................................................................................................................................C-32
16.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-32
17. SD-506....................................................................................................................................................................C-33
17.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-33
17.2 Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-33
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-33
(2) Maximum tray capacity ....................................................................................................................................................C-33
17.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-33
(1) Straight/sub tray mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-33
(2) Saddle stitching mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-34
(3) Trimming mode ................................................................................................................................................................C-35
(4) Multi-center folding mode ................................................................................................................................................C-35
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode ..................................................................................................................................................C-36
iii
17.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-36
18. SD-513....................................................................................................................................................................C-38
18.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-38
18.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-38
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-38
(2) Maximum tray capacity ...................................................................................................................................................C-38
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-39
18.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-40
(1) Straight, sub tray mode ...................................................................................................................................................C-40
(2) Saddle stitching mode ....................................................................................................................................................C-41
(3) Trimming mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C-43
(4) Multi folding mode ...........................................................................................................................................................C-44
(5) Allowable amount of curling ............................................................................................................................................C-44
18.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-44
18.6 Note regarding the specifications..........................................................................................................................................C-44
19. CR-101....................................................................................................................................................................C-45
19.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-45
19.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-45
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-45
(2) Applicable mode and number of creases .......................................................................................................................C-45
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-46
19.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-47
19.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-47
20. TU-503....................................................................................................................................................................C-48
20.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-48
20.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-48
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-48
(2) Applicable mode list ........................................................................................................................................................C-48
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-48
20.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-49
(1) Slit mode .........................................................................................................................................................................C-49
20.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-49
21. FD-504....................................................................................................................................................................C-50
21.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-50
21.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-50
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-50
(2) Applicable mode list ........................................................................................................................................................C-50
(4) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-50
21.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-50
21.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-51
22. PB-503....................................................................................................................................................................C-52
22.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-52
22.2 Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-52
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-52
(2) Binding sheets..................................................................................................................................................................C-52
(4) Others...............................................................................................................................................................................C-52
22.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-52
(1) Paper size ........................................................................................................................................................................C-52
(2) Paper weight ....................................................................................................................................................................C-53
(3) Applicable paper in each mode........................................................................................................................................C-54
22.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-55
23. MK-737....................................................................................................................................................................C-56
23.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-56
23.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-56
23.3 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-56
iv
23.5 Connector..............................................................................................................................................................................C-56
23.5.1 Connector housing......................................................................................................................................................C-56
23.5.2 Connector pinning layout............................................................................................................................................C-56
24. IC-602C...................................................................................................................................................................C-58
24.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-58
24.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-58
24.3 Paper ....................................................................................................................................................................................C-58
24.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-58
25. GP-501....................................................................................................................................................................C-59
25.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-59
25.2 Modes of operation................................................................................................................................................................C-59
25.3 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-59
25.4 Software................................................................................................................................................................................C-59
25.5 Electronic...............................................................................................................................................................................C-59
25.6 Inputs.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-59
(1) Media Input from Printer...................................................................................................................................................C-59
(2) Power................................................................................................................................................................................C-60
25.7 Outputs..................................................................................................................................................................................C-60
25.8 Performance..........................................................................................................................................................................C-60
(1) Reliability..........................................................................................................................................................................C-60
25.9 Operation environment, storage, transportation....................................................................................................................C-60
25.10 Safety/Regulatory................................................................................................................................................................C-60
(1) Safety Compliance............................................................................................................................................................C-60
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance............................................................................................................................................C-60
25.11 Appendix A..........................................................................................................................................................................C-61
25.12 Appendix B..........................................................................................................................................................................C-61
25.13 Appendix C..........................................................................................................................................................................C-62
25.14 Glossary of terms................................................................................................................................................................C-63
26. GP-502....................................................................................................................................................................C-64
26.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-64
26.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-64
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-64
(2) Binding sheets..................................................................................................................................................................C-64
(3) Book stock quantity...........................................................................................................................................................C-64
(4) Others...............................................................................................................................................................................C-64
26.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-64
(1) Paper size.........................................................................................................................................................................C-64
(2) Paper weight.....................................................................................................................................................................C-65
(3) Type of paper....................................................................................................................................................................C-65
(4) Recommended paper.......................................................................................................................................................C-65
26.4 Performance specifications...................................................................................................................................................C-65
(1) Input conditions.................................................................................................................................................................C-65
(2) Sticking specifications.......................................................................................................................................................C-66
(3) Book specifications...........................................................................................................................................................C-67
26.5 Materials................................................................................................................................................................................C-67
26.6 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-68
D OVERALL COMPOSITION............................................................................................................D-1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1 System configuration.................................................................................................................................................................D-1
1.2 Configuration for optional device...............................................................................................................................................D-2
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option................................................................................D-2
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option......................................................................................D-2
1.2.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option...............................................................................D-4
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................................................D-5
3. PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................................................................D-6
3.1 Straight paper exit mode...........................................................................................................................................................D-6
3.2 Reversing exit mode..................................................................................................................................................................D-6
3.3 Duplex mode.............................................................................................................................................................................D-7
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM....................................................................................................................................D-8
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS..................................................................................................................................D-9
5.1 Image creation flow and functions.............................................................................................................................................D-9
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)......................................................................................................................................................D-10
v
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step 2)............................................................................................................................................D-10
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)...................................................................................................................................................D-10
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)....................................................................................................................................D-10
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)..................................................................................................................................................D-11
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)....................................................................................................................................................D-11
5.8 Auxiliary discharge (Sub step 1)..............................................................................................................................................D-12
5.9 Drum cleaning (Sub step 2).....................................................................................................................................................D-12
5.10 Exposure before charging (Sub step 3).................................................................................................................................D-13
5.11 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 4)...................................................................................................................D-13
5.12 2nd transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 5).................................................................................................................................D-13
5.13 Toner collection (Sub step 6)................................................................................................................................................D-14
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL................................................................................................................................D-15
7. PROCESS SPEED...................................................................................................................................................D-17
7.1 bizhub PRESS C1100.............................................................................................................................................................D-17
7.2 bizhub PRESS C1085.............................................................................................................................................................D-17
E SERVICE TOOL.............................................................................................................................E-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1 Service material list...................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1.1 Service material list ........................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2 Jig list.........................................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2.1 Jig list..............................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.3 Tool list......................................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.1 Tool list............................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4 Mail remote notification system.................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.2 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.3 Major functions................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.4 Initial setting....................................................................................................................................................................E-4
1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system.........................................................................................E-6
1.4.6 Mail sending....................................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.5 Machine setting data Import......................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5.2 Setting method................................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.6 Job history list............................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.6.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.6.2 Major functions................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.6.3 Setting method................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.7 Counter list acquisition using USB memory............................................................................................................................E-11
1.7.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................E-11
1.7.2 List that can be acquired...............................................................................................................................................E-11
1.7.3 Acquisition method........................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.8 Panel log..................................................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.8.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.8.2 Log acquisition method.................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.9 Management Tool....................................................................................................................................................................E-13
1.9.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................E-13
1.9.2 Installation of Management Tool ..................................................................................................................................E-15
1.9.3 Starting up of Management Tool ..................................................................................................................................E-15
1.9.4 Technician mode...........................................................................................................................................................E-17
1.9.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure.............................................................................................................E-27
1.9.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure....................................................................................................E-29
1.9.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure...........................................................................................E-33
1.9.8 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060 and bizhub PRO C1060L replacement procedure..........................................E-37
1.9.9 bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 replacement procedure...................................................................................................E-41
1.9.10 Backup file...................................................................................................................................................................E-43
1.9.11 Administrator mode ....................................................................................................................................................E-44
1.9.12 Various setting for the software ..................................................................................................................................E-47
1.9.13 Error message list.......................................................................................................................................................E-52
1.10 Machine state log store.........................................................................................................................................................E-53
1.10.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................E-53
1.10.2 Log acquisition............................................................................................................................................................E-53
1.11 Real-time Remote Panel.......................................................................................................................................................E-54
1.11.1 Setting Up Real-time Remote Panel...........................................................................................................................E-54
1.11.2 Installing Web plugin...................................................................................................................................................E-54
1.11.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine......................................................................................................................E-58
1.11.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer.............................................................................................................................E-59
1.11.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings...............................................................................................................................E-60
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................F-1
vi
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM.................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1 Maintenance item......................................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.1 Maintenance types..........................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.2 Procedure of the periodical maintenance........................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.3 Condition of the count......................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2 bizhub PRESS C1100...............................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2.1 Periodical maintenance..................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2.2 Spotted replacement......................................................................................................................................................F-8
1.3 bizhub PRESS C1085...............................................................................................................................................................F-9
1.3.1 Periodical maintenance..................................................................................................................................................F-9
1.3.2 Spotted replacement....................................................................................................................................................F-15
1.4 DF-626.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.4.1 Spotted replacement.....................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.5 PF-707/708 (1st tandem).........................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.5.1 Periodical maintenance.................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.6 PF-707 (2nd tandem)...............................................................................................................................................................F-17
1.7 PF-707 (3rd tandem)...............................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.8 FA-502 (connected to the 1st tandem of PF-707/708)............................................................................................................F-20
1.9 FA-502 (connected to the 2nd tandem of PF-707)..................................................................................................................F-20
1.10 RU-516..................................................................................................................................................................................F-20
1.10.1 Periodical maintenance...............................................................................................................................................F-20
1.11 RU-511/HM-101.....................................................................................................................................................................F-20
1.11.2 Spotted replacement...................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.12 RU-510..................................................................................................................................................................................F-22
1.13 FS-532...................................................................................................................................................................................F-22
1.14 SD-510...................................................................................................................................................................................F-23
1.15 PK-522...................................................................................................................................................................................F-23
1.16 PI-502....................................................................................................................................................................................F-24
1.17 MK-732..................................................................................................................................................................................F-24
1.18 LS-506...................................................................................................................................................................................F-24
1.19 FD-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-25
1.20 SD-506...................................................................................................................................................................................F-26
1.21 SD-513...................................................................................................................................................................................F-28
1.22 CR-101..................................................................................................................................................................................F-31
1.23 TU-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-31
1.24 FD-504...................................................................................................................................................................................F-32
1.25 PB-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-32
1.26 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................F-35
vii
1.27 GP-502..................................................................................................................................................................................F-36
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST..............................................................................................................F-38
2.1 Periodical replacement parts...................................................................................................................................................F-38
2.2 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085..................................................................................................................................................F-38
2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list.......................................................................................................................................F-38
2.2.2 Spotted replacement parts list.......................................................................................................................................F-40
2.3 DF-626.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-40
2.4 PF-707/708..............................................................................................................................................................................F-40
2.5 FA-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.6 RU-516....................................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.7 RU-511/HM-101.......................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.8 FS-532.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.9 SD-510.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.10 PI-502....................................................................................................................................................................................F-42
2.10.1 Spotted replacement parts list.....................................................................................................................................F-42
2.11 LS-506...................................................................................................................................................................................F-42
2.12 FD-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-42
2.13 SD-506...................................................................................................................................................................................F-42
2.14 SD-513...................................................................................................................................................................................F-43
2.15 TU-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-43
2.16 FD-504...................................................................................................................................................................................F-43
2.17 PB-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-43
2.18 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................F-44
2.19 GP-502..................................................................................................................................................................................F-44
3. ORU-M PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................F-45
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts ................................................................................................................................................F-45
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts.............................................................................................................................................F-45
3.2 ORU-M parts list......................................................................................................................................................................F-45
(1) ORU-M parts list................................................................................................................................................................F-45
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing............................................................................................................................................F-48
(1) ORU-M target unit life setting............................................................................................................................................F-48
(2) ORU-M warning icon display.............................................................................................................................................F-48
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter.....................................................................................................................................F-48
(1) Counter display.................................................................................................................................................................F-48
(2) Counter clear.....................................................................................................................................................................F-48
4. LIFE VALUE..............................................................................................................................................................F-49
4.1 Life value of materials/parts.....................................................................................................................................................F-49
4.2 Life value determining condition..............................................................................................................................................F-51
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085..........................................................F-52
5.1 External section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-52
5.1.1 Replacing the dust-proof filter/Rt...................................................................................................................................F-52
5.1.2 Replacing the ozone filter and the dust-proof filter/Rr1.................................................................................................F-52
5.1.3 Replacing the dust-proof filter/Lt, /Rr2, /Rr3, /Rr4.........................................................................................................F-53
5.2 Write section............................................................................................................................................................................F-54
5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof glass........................................................................................................................................F-54
5.3 Photo conductor section..........................................................................................................................................................F-55
5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section ..................................................................................................F-55
5.3.2 Opening and closing the toner hopper unit....................................................................................................................F-55
viii
5.3.3 Cleaning around the toner hopper unit..........................................................................................................................F-56
5.3.4 Pulling out the process unit...........................................................................................................................................F-56
5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit.................................................................................................................................................F-56
5.3.6 Cleaning the drum potential sensor stay/Y, /M, /C, /K...................................................................................................F-60
5.4 Charging section......................................................................................................................................................................F-60
5.4.1 Replacing the charging corona......................................................................................................................................F-60
5.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona........................................................................................................................................F-61
5.5 Developing section .................................................................................................................................................................F-62
5.5.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K...................................................................................................................F-62
5.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K.................................................................................................................F-65
5.5.3 Cleaning around the developing unit.............................................................................................................................F-66
5.6 Toner supply section................................................................................................................................................................F-67
5.6.1 Replacing the developing charge filter/Y, /M, /C, /K......................................................................................................F-67
5.7 Intermediate transfer section...................................................................................................................................................F-67
5.7.1 Removing and reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit..............................................................................................F-67
5.7.2 Reversing the intermediate transfer scraper, replacing the auxiliary cleaner assy.......................................................F-70
5.7.3 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit.......................................................................................................................F-73
5.7.4 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade, transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr, /Rr..............................................................F-75
5.7.5 Replacing the toner collection sheet..............................................................................................................................F-76
5.7.6 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw...................................................................................................................F-76
5.7.7 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt........................................................................................................................F-77
5.7.8 Cleaning the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) and the intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86)....
F-81
5.7.9 Replacing the nip formation roller/Up............................................................................................................................F-82
5.7.10 Replacing the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing.....................................................F-84
5.7.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up...........................................................................................................................F-85
5.7.12 Replacing the thick paper transfer backup guide........................................................................................................F-86
5.7.13 Replacing the intermediate transfer separation claw solenoid (SD4)..........................................................................F-86
5.7.14 Cleaning the IDC sensor/Fr (IDCS/1), /Rr (IDCS/2), the color registration sensor/Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84), /Rr (PS85).....
F-87
5.7.15 Replacing the sensor shutter.......................................................................................................................................F-88
5.8 2nd transfer section ................................................................................................................................................................F-89
5.8.1 Cleaning the pre-fusing guide........................................................................................................................................F-89
5.8.2 Replacing the 2nd transfer unit, cleaning the lower section of the 2nd transfer section................................................F-89
5.8.3 Replacing the separation discharging assy...................................................................................................................F-94
5.8.4 Replacing the 2nd transfer ground plates/1 and /2........................................................................................................F-94
5.8.5 Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and the 2nd transfer pressure unit....
F-96
5.8.6 Replacing the 2nd transfer cleaning blade, the scattering prevention sheet plate/1, the scattering prevention sheet/1,
the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy and the cleaning side seal plate/Fr, /Rr.........................................................................F-98
5.8.7 Replacing the 2nd transfer entrance guide/Up............................................................................................................F-101
5.8.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer belt assy, 2nd transfer process blade assy, and the 2nd transfer cleaning brush............F-101
5.8.9 Replacing the 2nd transfer belt and the connecting stay assy....................................................................................F-103
5.9 Toner collection section ........................................................................................................................................................F-106
5.9.1 Replacing the waste toner box....................................................................................................................................F-106
5.10 Intermediate conveyance section........................................................................................................................................F-106
5.10.1 Replacing the cleaning sheet assy............................................................................................................................F-106
5.10.2 Cleaning the paper dust collecting plate....................................................................................................................F-107
5.11 Registration section ............................................................................................................................................................F-107
5.11.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy.........................................................................................................F-107
5.11.2 Replacing the registration roller and the torque limiter..............................................................................................F-108
5.12 Fusing section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-111
5.12.1 Precautions on maintenance ....................................................................................................................................F-111
5.12.2 Cleaning the fusing entrance guide/Lw.....................................................................................................................F-111
5.12.3 Removing and reinstalling the fusing unit..................................................................................................................F-112
5.12.4 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Lw and the fusing paper exit roller assy/Up...................................................F-113
5.12.5 Replacing the fusing claw assy.................................................................................................................................F-115
5.12.6 Replacing the fusing steering actuator assy..............................................................................................................F-116
5.12.7 Replacing the fusing bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and the lower pressure roller................................F-117
5.12.8 Replacing the fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing heater
lamp assy/5............................................................................................................................................................................F-121
5.12.9 Replacing fusing bearing/1, /2, heat insulating sleeve/1, /2, fusing belt, upper pressure roller, heating roller..........F-128
5.12.10 Cleaning the inlet roller assy, the fusing roller, the upper pressure roller, the fusing belt and the lower pressure roller
...............................................................................................................................................................................................F-133
5.12.11 Replacing the upper pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM8), the fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6). F-134
5.12.12 Replacing the fusing gear/2.....................................................................................................................................F-136
5.12.13 Lubricating the fusing gear/3, /4, /6, /7, /8, /9..........................................................................................................F-137
5.12.14 Replacing the fusing paper separation fan/Fr (FM49), /Md (FM50), /Rr (FM51).....................................................F-138
5.12.15 Replacing the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43), /Md (FM44), /Rr (FM45)..............................................F-140
5.13 Duplex, reverse section.......................................................................................................................................................F-144
5.13.1 Pulling out and reinstalling the duplex section...........................................................................................................F-144
ix
5.13.2 Replacing the de-curler roller....................................................................................................................................F-145
5.13.3 Replacing the exit conveyance driven roller..............................................................................................................F-146
5.13.4 Cleaning the ADU reverce roller, the ADU loop roller...............................................................................................F-147
5.13.5 Cleaning the ADU centering sensor (PS87), ADU centering sensor sheet...............................................................F-148
5.13.6 Cleaning the ADU reverse cleaning assy..................................................................................................................F-150
5.14 Paper exit section ...............................................................................................................................................................F-151
5.14.1 Replacing the paper exit driven roller........................................................................................................................F-151
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-626...........................................................................................F-154
6.1 Paper feed section.................................................................................................................................................................F-154
6.1.1 Cleaning the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller...................................................................................................F-154
6.1.2 Cleaning the separation roller......................................................................................................................................F-154
6.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller.................................................................................................F-154
6.1.4 Replacing the separation roller....................................................................................................................................F-155
6.2 Conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................................F-156
6.2.1 Cleaning the miscellaneous rolls.................................................................................................................................F-156
6.2.2 Cleaning the other rollers............................................................................................................................................F-157
6.2.3 Cleaning the scanning guide.......................................................................................................................................F-158
6.2.4 Cleaning the reflective sensor section.........................................................................................................................F-159
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-707/708....................................................................................F-160
7.1 Precautions on maintenance ................................................................................................................................................F-160
7.2 Paper feed tray section..........................................................................................................................................................F-160
7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw........................................................................................F-160
7.3 Paper feed suction section....................................................................................................................................................F-161
7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutches/1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), and /3 (CL17).....................................................................F-161
7.4 Vertical conveyance section..................................................................................................................................................F-161
7.4.1 Replacing the exit clutches/1 (CL1), /2 (CL2) and the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4), /3 (CL5), and /4
(CL6)......................................................................................................................................................................................F-161
7.5 Horizontal conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................F-162
7.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7) and the horizontal conveyance clutches /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)....................F-162
7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing................................................................F-163
7.5.3 Replacing the horizontal conveyance roller/1, /2, the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1, /2...............................F-164
7.5.4 Replacing the loop roller /Up.......................................................................................................................................F-167
7.5.5 Replacing the roller pressure release motor (M10).....................................................................................................F-167
7.5.6 Cleaning the centering sensor (PS40).........................................................................................................................F-169
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FA-502...........................................................................................F-171
8.2 Tandem conveyance section.................................................................................................................................................F-171
8.2.1 Replacing the tandem conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14)....................F-171
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-516..........................................................................................F-172
9.2 Conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................................F-172
9.2.1 Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven roller.......................................................................................F-172
9.2.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing..........................................................................................................................F-175
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-511/HM-101..........................................................................F-177
10.1 Precautions on maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................F-177
10.2 Entrance conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................F-177
10.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance driven rollers/1 and /2......................................................................................F-177
10.3 Output paper density detection section ..............................................................................................................................F-178
10.3.1 Cleaning the shutter .................................................................................................................................................F-178
10.4 Humidification section..........................................................................................................................................................F-178
10.4.1 Cleaning the humidification section conveyance roller/1...........................................................................................F-178
10.4.2 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller ................................................................F-179
10.4.3 Replacing the water feed filter ..................................................................................................................................F-185
10.4.4 Replacing the pump motor (P1).................................................................................................................................F-186
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-510........................................................................................F-187
11.2 Conveyance section............................................................................................................................................................F-187
11.2.1 Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2........................................F-187
11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the paper
exit conveyance belt..............................................................................................................................................................F-187
11.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley......................................................................................F-188
11.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller/1, /2, paper exit roller, bearing /K and bearing assy...................................................F-189
11.2.5 Replacing the merging section roller and bearing/K..................................................................................................F-190
11.2.6 Replacing the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K.................................................................................................F-191
11.2.7 Replacing the re-feed roller and bearing/K................................................................................................................F-192
11.2.8 Replacing the driven roller.........................................................................................................................................F-193
11.2.9 Replacing the straight gate........................................................................................................................................F-196
11.2.10 Replacing the stack switch motor (M6)....................................................................................................................F-197
12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-532.........................................................................................F-198
x
12.2 Paper conveyance section...................................................................................................................................................F-198
12.2.1 Lubricatiing the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam, the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching gate/
Up..........................................................................................................................................................................................F-198
12.3 Stacker section....................................................................................................................................................................F-198
12.3.1 Replacing the paddle.................................................................................................................................................F-198
12.3.2 Lubricating the stapler shaft and the rear stopper shaft............................................................................................F-199
12.4 Stapler section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-200
12.4.1 Replacing the stapler unit..........................................................................................................................................F-200
12.5 Main tray section..................................................................................................................................................................F-202
12.5.1 Cleaning and lubricating the paper exit alignment plate shaft...................................................................................F-202
13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-510........................................................................................F-204
13.2 Alignment section................................................................................................................................................................F-204
13.2.1 Replacing the paddle/1, /2, /3....................................................................................................................................F-204
13.3 Stapler section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-205
13.3.1 Replacing the stapler unit..........................................................................................................................................F-205
13.3.2 Cleaning and lubricating the staple guide/Up, /Lw....................................................................................................F-208
13.4 Half-fold/folding&staple/tri-folding section............................................................................................................................F-209
13.4.1 Cleaning the folding roller/1, /2..................................................................................................................................F-209
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502 .........................................................................................F-210
14.2 Paper feed section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-210
14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller/Up...................................................................................F-210
14.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/Lw....................................................................................F-211
14.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up....................................................................................F-211
14.2.4 Replacing the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/Lw....................................................................................F-212
14.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch/Up (CL201) and /Lw (CL202).................................................................................F-213
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-506.........................................................................................F-215
15.2 Conveyance section ...........................................................................................................................................................F-215
15.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)........................................................................................................F-215
15.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)............................................................................................................F-215
15.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)...............................................................................................................F-219
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503 ........................................................................................F-222
16.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids/1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)..........................................................................................................F-222
16.3 Punch section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-222
16.3.1 Replacing the punch unit...........................................................................................................................................F-222
16.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board ...........................................................................................F-223
16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section ..........................................................................................................................F-223
16.4 Folding conveyance section................................................................................................................................................F-224
16.4.1 Replacing the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)......................................................................................................F-224
16.5 Main tray section .................................................................................................................................................................F-226
16.5.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)..................................................................................................................F-226
16.6 PI section ............................................................................................................................................................................F-226
16.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)..............................................................................................................F-226
16.6.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)........................................................................................................F-229
16.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage).........................................................................................................F-230
16.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)..............................................................................................................F-231
16.6.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage).........................................................................................................F-232
16.6.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)..........................................................................................................F-232
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506 .......................................................................................F-234
17.2 Right angle conveyance section .........................................................................................................................................F-234
17.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)...........................................................................................................F-234
17.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)......................................................................................F-235
17.3 Saddle stitching section ......................................................................................................................................................F-240
17.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy........................................................................................................................................F-240
17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit............................................................................................................................................F-243
17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit ..........................................................................................................................F-245
17.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit............................................................................................................................F-247
17.4 Bundle processing section ..................................................................................................................................................F-247
17.4.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear.....................................................................................................................F-247
xi
17.4.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit......................................................................................................................F-249
17.5 Trimmer section ..................................................................................................................................................................F-254
17.5.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy ...........................................................................................................F-254
17.5.2 Replacing the trimmer board assy.............................................................................................................................F-254
17.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit.................................................................................................................................F-255
17.5.4 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32).................................................................................................................F-258
17.5.5 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31).................................................................................................................F-259
17.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit.......................................................................................................................................F-263
17.5.7 Lubricating the trimmer unit.......................................................................................................................................F-265
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-513........................................................................................F-267
18.1 Precautions on maintenance...............................................................................................................................................F-267
18.2 Entrance conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................F-267
18.2.1 Replacing the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102)..............................................................................F-267
18.2.2 Cleaning of the paper re-feed roller/Lt.......................................................................................................................F-267
18.2.3 Cleaning of the reverse exit roller/Rt.........................................................................................................................F-267
18.3 Folding conveyance section................................................................................................................................................F-268
18.3.1 Replacing the 1st folding knife motor (M13)..............................................................................................................F-268
18.3.2 Replacing the 2nd folding knife motor (M14).............................................................................................................F-269
18.3.3 Cleaning of the half-folding roller, tri-folding roller.....................................................................................................F-271
18.3.4 Lubrication to the front stopper shaft.........................................................................................................................F-272
18.4 Sub tray, tri-folding tray section...........................................................................................................................................F-272
18.4.1 Cleaning the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3.......................................................................................................F-272
18.5 Saddle stitching section.......................................................................................................................................................F-273
18.5.1 Replacing the staple unit...........................................................................................................................................F-273
18.5.2 Replacing the clincher...............................................................................................................................................F-273
18.5.3 Replacing the booklet holding motor (M17)...............................................................................................................F-274
18.5.4 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate/Rr...............................................................................................F-274
18.5.5 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr.......................................................................................F-275
18.5.6 Replacing the conveyance guide assy/Up.................................................................................................................F-275
18.5.7 Replacing the alignment plate solenoid wiring..........................................................................................................F-276
18.6 Booklet movement section...................................................................................................................................................F-277
18.6.1 Lubrication to the booklet movement unit slide shaft.................................................................................................F-277
18.6.2 Lubrication to the booklet holding unit slide shaft......................................................................................................F-278
18.6.3 Lubrication to the booklet set unit slide shaft.............................................................................................................F-279
18.7 Clamp section......................................................................................................................................................................F-279
18.7.1 Replacing the fore edge stopper motor (M24)...........................................................................................................F-279
18.7.2 Replacing the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore-edge finger gear, and the finger torque limiter......................F-280
18.7.3 Replacing the clamp motor (M23).............................................................................................................................F-282
18.7.4 Replacing the booklet holding wire/1, booklet holding wire/2 and booklet holding wire/3.........................................F-283
18.7.5 Replacing the clamp hanging wire.............................................................................................................................F-288
18.8 Trimmer section...................................................................................................................................................................F-293
18.8.1 Replacing the trimmer blade......................................................................................................................................F-293
18.8.2 Replacing the trimmer board.....................................................................................................................................F-296
18.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit.......................................................................................................................................F-298
18.8.4 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31).................................................................................................................F-304
18.8.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32).................................................................................................................F-305
18.8.6 Lubrication to the press drive screw, the gear...........................................................................................................F-306
18.9 Booklet tray section.............................................................................................................................................................F-307
18.9.1 Replacing the gripper motor (M26)............................................................................................................................F-307
18.9.2 Lubrication to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr, the gripper paper exit gear/Rr............................................................F-308
18.9.3 Lubrication to the gripper lock plate...........................................................................................................................F-308
18.9.4 Lubrication to the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate................................................................................F-309
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CR-101........................................................................................F-310
19.2 Creaser section....................................................................................................................................................................F-310
19.2.1 Cleaning the crease blade.........................................................................................................................................F-310
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE TU-503.........................................................................................F-311
20.2 Conveyance section............................................................................................................................................................F-311
20.2.1 Cleaning the registration roller...................................................................................................................................F-311
20.2.2 Replacing the registration roller.................................................................................................................................F-311
20.3 Slitter section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-312
20.3.1 Lubrication to the slit cutter shaft...............................................................................................................................F-312
20.3.2 Lubrication to the slit cutter drive gear.......................................................................................................................F-312
20.3.3 Replacing the slit cutter assy/Fr, /Rr..........................................................................................................................F-313
20.4 Rotary cutter section............................................................................................................................................................F-317
20.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter assy................................................................................................................................F-317
20.4.2 Cleaning the slit scraps roller/Lt and slit scraps roller/Rt...........................................................................................F-318
21. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-504.........................................................................................F-320
xii
21.2 Clamp section......................................................................................................................................................................F-320
21.2.1 Lubrication to SQF clamp..........................................................................................................................................F-320
21.2.2 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202)..............................................................................................................F-320
21.2.3 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203)...............................................................................................................F-321
21.3 Square-fold sction................................................................................................................................................................F-321
21.3.1 Replacing the SQF roller motor (M201).....................................................................................................................F-321
21.3.2 Replacing the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr, /Rr.........................................................................................................F-322
22. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503 ........................................................................................F-324
22.1.1 Replacing the entrance gate solenoid (SD1), the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4).........................................................F-324
22.2 Sub compile (SC) section ...................................................................................................................................................F-327
22.2.2 Replacing the switchback roller.................................................................................................................................F-327
22.2.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutch/A and /B..............................................F-328
22.2.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)......................................................................................................F-331
22.2.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)...........................................................................................................F-332
22.2.6 Lubricating the sub scan alignment plate shaft.........................................................................................................F-333
22.3 Clamp section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-334
22.3.1 Lubricating the clamp pressing board shaft...............................................................................................................F-334
22.4 Glue tank section ................................................................................................................................................................F-335
22.4.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing....................................................................................................F-335
22.4.2 Lubricating the glue apply roller drive gear................................................................................................................F-337
22.4.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (M4).............................................................................................................F-338
22.4.4 Replacing the glue tank assy.....................................................................................................................................F-338
22.5 Cover paper supply section ................................................................................................................................................F-341
22.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy ...........................................................F-341
22.5.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller...............................................................................................F-344
22.5.3 Replacing the separation roller..................................................................................................................................F-345
22.5.4 Replacing the cover paper pick up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72).............................F-346
22.6 Cover paper table section ...................................................................................................................................................F-347
22.6.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy.......................................................................................................................F-347
22.6.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate ...............................................................F-348
22.6.4 Lubricating the cover paper alignment plate shaft.....................................................................................................F-349
22.7 Book stock section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-350
22.7.1 Lubricating the guide shafts/Rt and /Lt......................................................................................................................F-350
22.8 Framework section .............................................................................................................................................................F-351
22.8.1 Replacing the exhaust filters/A and /B.......................................................................................................................F-351
23. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501........................................................................................F-353
23.1 Caution for maintenance procedure....................................................................................................................................F-353
23.2 Die set service.....................................................................................................................................................................F-353
23.2.1 Die set service...........................................................................................................................................................F-353
23.2.2 Die set life expectancy...............................................................................................................................................F-353
23.2.3 Die set components...................................................................................................................................................F-353
23.2.4 Checking and replacing the die set...........................................................................................................................F-355
23.2.5 Checking and lubricating the die set pins and die set shoulder bolts........................................................................F-355
23.2.6 Inspecting the hole alignment....................................................................................................................................F-356
23.3 Check, cleaning, and lubrication..........................................................................................................................................F-356
23.3.1 Check, cleaning, and lubrication................................................................................................................................F-356
23.3.2 External cleaning.......................................................................................................................................................F-357
23.3.3 Internal cleaning........................................................................................................................................................F-357
23.3.4 Operational inspection...............................................................................................................................................F-357
23.3.5 Internal inspection.....................................................................................................................................................F-357
23.3.6 Cleaning the base......................................................................................................................................................F-357
23.3.7 Cleaning the die guide...............................................................................................................................................F-358
23.3.8 Checking the door latch.............................................................................................................................................F-358
23.3.9 Cleaning and checking the aligner paper path and panels........................................................................................F-359
23.3.10 Cleaning and checking the aligner idler roller..........................................................................................................F-359
23.3.11 Cleaning the aligner (green) drive belt....................................................................................................................F-360
23.3.12 Cleaning and checking the back gauge solenoid....................................................................................................F-360
23.3.13 Cleaning and checking the idler rollers....................................................................................................................F-361
23.3.14 Cleaning and checking the punch idler rollers.........................................................................................................F-363
23.3.15 Cleaning and checking the drive rollers...................................................................................................................F-365
23.3.16 Checking the aligner latch.......................................................................................................................................F-365
23.3.17 Cleaning the optical sensors...................................................................................................................................F-366
23.3.18 Cleaning and checking the bypass paper path........................................................................................................F-367
23.3.19 Cleaning and checking the punch paper path.........................................................................................................F-367
23.3.20 Cleaning and checking the timing belt.....................................................................................................................F-368
23.3.21 Bypass panel...........................................................................................................................................................F-368
xiii
23.3.22 Removing the bypass panel....................................................................................................................................F-369
23.3.23 Aligner panels..........................................................................................................................................................F-370
23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel.....................................................................................................................................F-370
23.3.25 Replacing the aligner idler roller..............................................................................................................................F-371
23.3.26 Replacing the aligner drive belt...............................................................................................................................F-372
23.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller........................................................................................................F-377
23.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism....................................................................................................................F-377
23.3.29 Removing the back gauge.......................................................................................................................................F-378
23.3.30 Replacing the solenoid spring.................................................................................................................................F-380
23.3.31 Back gauge paddle..................................................................................................................................................F-380
23.3.32 Adjusting the back gauge assembly........................................................................................................................F-381
23.3.33 Punch module..........................................................................................................................................................F-381
23.3.34 Removing the punch module...................................................................................................................................F-382
23.3.35 Lubricating to the punch drive cams........................................................................................................................F-384
23.3.36 Replacing the punch clutch.....................................................................................................................................F-384
23.3.37 Replacing and adjusting the punch module brake...................................................................................................F-386
23.3.38 Replacing the punch module brake.........................................................................................................................F-387
23.3.39 Adjusting the punch module brake..........................................................................................................................F-387
23.3.40 Replacing the punch module motor.........................................................................................................................F-387
23.3.41 Replacing the punch module motor drive belt.........................................................................................................F-388
23.3.42 Replacing the punch module drive roller.................................................................................................................F-388
23.3.43 Replacing the belt....................................................................................................................................................F-390
23.3.44 Tools........................................................................................................................................................................F-390
24. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-502........................................................................................F-392
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING............................................................................................G-1
1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT DISASSEMBLE........................................................................................................G-1
1.1 List of Items that you must not disassemble.............................................................................................................................G-1
1.2 Items that you must not disassemble........................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw...............................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards.................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.3 Writing unit cover............................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.4 Photo conductor section.................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.2.5 Intermediate transfer section..........................................................................................................................................G-3
1.2.6 Fusing section.................................................................................................................................................................G-4
2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMBLING.............................................................................................G-8
2.1 Precaution on removing the boards..........................................................................................................................................G-8
3. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................G-9
3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts..............................................................................................................................G-9
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures............................................................................................................................G-10
3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling............................................................................................................G-10
3.2.2 Front cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-10
3.2.3 Filter box cover, filter box, rear cover/Up, /Rt, /Md, /Lw................................................................................................G-10
3.2.4 Left cover/Up1, /Up2, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3........................................................................................................................G-12
3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3............................................................................................................G-13
3.2.6 Upper cover, cover table...............................................................................................................................................G-14
3.2.7 WT-512 (Option)...........................................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.8 Operation panel section................................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.9 Main board unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-16
3.2.10 MFP board (MFPB).....................................................................................................................................................G-18
3.2.11 SSD (SSD)..................................................................................................................................................................G-20
3.2.12 DC power supply unit/2 (DCPS/2), DC power supply unit/5 (DCPS/5).......................................................................G-21
3.2.13 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: VI-507)..............................................................................................................................G-23
3.2.14 Scanner image processing board (IPB/S) (Option: PF-708).......................................................................................G-23
3.2.15 Expansion board (EXPB) (Option: IC-602C)...............................................................................................................G-24
3.2.16 Writing unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.2.17 Scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /C, /K....................................................................................................................................G-27
3.2.18 Process unit................................................................................................................................................................G-35
3.2.19 Image correction unit..................................................................................................................................................G-36
3.2.20 Toner collection pipe...................................................................................................................................................G-38
3.2.21 Duplex unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-42
3.2.22 ADU centering sensor assy........................................................................................................................................G-43
3.2.23 Duplex section............................................................................................................................................................G-50
3.2.24 Lock lever/1, /2............................................................................................................................................................G-53
3.2.25 Fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1), fusing belt temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2)...........................................G-55
3.2.26 Lower pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM3).....................................................................................................G-55
3.2.27 Thermostat assy.........................................................................................................................................................G-56
3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105)..........................................................................................................................G-57
3.2.29 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: IC-602C)..............................................................................................................................G-58
xiv
4. DF-626......................................................................................................................................................................G-59
4.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts............................................................................................................................G-59
4.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ...........................................................................................................G-59
4.2.2 DF.................................................................................................................................................................................G-59
4.2.3 The paper feed cover....................................................................................................................................................G-60
4.2.4 Front cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-61
4.2.5 Rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-62
4.2.6 Original feed tray front cover.........................................................................................................................................G-62
4.2.7 Paper feed motor (M8)..................................................................................................................................................G-63
4.2.8 Registration motor (M2)................................................................................................................................................G-63
4.2.9 Reading motor (M1)......................................................................................................................................................G-64
4.2.10 Reading roller pressure release motor (M4)...............................................................................................................G-64
4.2.11 Glass cleaning motor (M9)..........................................................................................................................................G-65
4.2.12 Glass cleaning roller unit.............................................................................................................................................G-65
4.2.13 Reverse path switching solenoid (SD1)......................................................................................................................G-67
4.2.14 Reverse exit path switching solenoid (SD2)...............................................................................................................G-67
4.2.15 Exit motor (M3)...........................................................................................................................................................G-68
4.2.16 DF control board (DFCB)............................................................................................................................................G-68
4.2.17 Restriction plate positional VR (VR1)..........................................................................................................................G-69
4.2.18 Cooling fan (FM1).......................................................................................................................................................G-70
5. PF-707/708...............................................................................................................................................................G-71
5.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble.....................................................................................................................G-71
5.1.1 CCD unit.......................................................................................................................................................................G-71
5.1.2 Mirror unit and exposure unit........................................................................................................................................G-71
5.1.3 Framework panel/1, framework panel/2........................................................................................................................G-72
5.2 List of disassembling and assembling parts............................................................................................................................G-72
5.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ...........................................................................................................G-73
5.3.2 Right cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-73
5.3.3 Rear cover/Lt4..............................................................................................................................................................G-73
5.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, /Lt3......................................................................................................................................................G-74
5.3.5 Rear cover/Lt1..............................................................................................................................................................G-74
5.3.6 Rear cover/Rt................................................................................................................................................................G-74
5.3.7 Read cover/Fr...............................................................................................................................................................G-75
5.3.8 Upper surface cover/RrRt, /RrLt...................................................................................................................................G-75
5.3.9 Read cover/Lt................................................................................................................................................................G-75
5.3.10 Read cover/Rt.............................................................................................................................................................G-76
5.3.11 Read cover/Rr.............................................................................................................................................................G-76
5.3.12 Original glass assy......................................................................................................................................................G-76
5.3.13 Upper surface cover/Fr, /Lt, /Rt...................................................................................................................................G-77
5.3.14 Front door ..................................................................................................................................................................G-78
5.3.15 Tray front cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G-79
5.3.16 CCD unit.....................................................................................................................................................................G-79
5.3.17 Exposure unit, exposure lamp....................................................................................................................................G-80
5.3.18 Scanner unit................................................................................................................................................................G-81
5.3.19 Removing the scanner wire........................................................................................................................................G-83
5.3.20 Reinstalling the scanner wire......................................................................................................................................G-85
5.3.21 Tray.............................................................................................................................................................................G-88
5.3.22 Lift wire........................................................................................................................................................................G-90
5.3.23 Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12)......G-92
5.3.24 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)........................................................................G-94
5.3.25 Paper lift motor/1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9).....................................................................................................................G-96
5.3.26 Paper feed suction unit...............................................................................................................................................G-99
5.3.27 Paper feed belt..........................................................................................................................................................G-100
5.3.28 Paper suction fans/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), and /6 (FM6)..................................................G-102
5.3.29 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)...................G-103
5.3.30 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)................................G-107
5.3.31 Paper feed check window.........................................................................................................................................G-109
5.3.32 Vertical conveyance unit ..........................................................................................................................................G-110
5.3.33 Horizontal conveyance unit.......................................................................................................................................G-111
5.3.34 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)..........................................................................................................G-112
5.3.35 Centering sensor assy..............................................................................................................................................G-114
6. FA-502....................................................................................................................................................................G-118
6.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts..........................................................................................................................G-118
6.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures..........................................................................................................................G-118
6.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling .........................................................................................................G-118
6.2.2 FA-502........................................................................................................................................................................G-118
7. RU-516....................................................................................................................................................................G-120
xv
7.2.1 Charging control framework unit.................................................................................................................................G-120
8. RU-511/HM-101......................................................................................................................................................G-123
8.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble...................................................................................................................G-123
8.1.1 Color density sensor unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-123
8.3 Disassembling and assembling procedures .........................................................................................................................G-123
8.3.2 Front door ..................................................................................................................................................................G-124
8.3.3 Rear cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-124
8.3.4 Upper cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-125
8.3.5 Humidification unit.......................................................................................................................................................G-125
8.3.6 Water feed tank ..........................................................................................................................................................G-128
8.3.7 Pump motor (P1) ........................................................................................................................................................G-129
8.3.8 Color density sensor unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-129
8.3.9 Shutter .......................................................................................................................................................................G-130
8.3.10 Note for replacing the board.....................................................................................................................................G-130
9. RU-510....................................................................................................................................................................G-132
9.2.2 Front door...................................................................................................................................................................G-132
9.2.3 Rear cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-133
9.2.4 Left cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-133
9.2.5 Upper cover................................................................................................................................................................G-134
9.2.6 Note for replacing the board.......................................................................................................................................G-134
10. FS-532..................................................................................................................................................................G-136
10.1 Items that you must not disassemble or reassemble..........................................................................................................G-136
10.1.1 Red-painted screws..................................................................................................................................................G-136
10.2 List of disassembling and assembling parts........................................................................................................................G-136
10.3 Disassembling and assembling procedures........................................................................................................................G-136
10.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling .......................................................................................................G-136
10.3.2 Front door.................................................................................................................................................................G-137
10.3.3 Rear cover................................................................................................................................................................G-137
10.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1........................................................................................................................................................G-138
10.3.5 Upper cover/Rt2........................................................................................................................................................G-138
10.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1........................................................................................................................................................G-139
10.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2........................................................................................................................................................G-139
10.3.8 Upper cover/Rr..........................................................................................................................................................G-140
10.3.9 Upper cover/Md........................................................................................................................................................G-140
10.3.10 Front cover..............................................................................................................................................................G-140
10.3.11 Sub tray...................................................................................................................................................................G-141
10.3.12 Stacker unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-141
10.3.13 Main tray.................................................................................................................................................................G-143
10.3.14 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy.............................................................................G-143
10.3.15 Note for replacing the board...................................................................................................................................G-145
11. SD-510..................................................................................................................................................................G-147
11.3.2 Front cover................................................................................................................................................................G-151
11.3.3 Stapler unit cover......................................................................................................................................................G-151
11.3.4 SD unit......................................................................................................................................................................G-152
11.3.5 Folding knife assy/1..................................................................................................................................................G-155
11.3.6 Folding knife assy/2..................................................................................................................................................G-157
12. PK-522..................................................................................................................................................................G-161
12.3.2 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-161
13. PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................G-163
13.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts .......................................................................................................................G-163
13.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures .......................................................................................................................G-163
xvi
13.2.2 Upper cover .............................................................................................................................................................G-163
13.2.3 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-163
13.2.4 Operation panel cover ..............................................................................................................................................G-163
13.2.5 PI unit........................................................................................................................................................................G-164
14. LS-506..................................................................................................................................................................G-165
14.2.2 Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................G-165
14.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire .................................................................................................................G-167
15. FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................G-172
15.1.1 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section .....................................................................................G-172
15.3.2 Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr....................................................................................................................................G-173
15.3.3 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr....................................................................................................................................G-173
15.3.4 Upper door ...............................................................................................................................................................G-174
15.3.5 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-174
15.3.6 Left cover/Fr..............................................................................................................................................................G-174
15.3.7 Left cover/Rr.............................................................................................................................................................G-175
15.3.8 Paper exit stopper cover ..........................................................................................................................................G-175
15.3.9 Right cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-175
15.3.10 Left cover/Up...........................................................................................................................................................G-176
15.3.11 Mount cover............................................................................................................................................................G-176
15.3.12 Front door ..............................................................................................................................................................G-176
15.3.13 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) ............................................................................................G-177
15.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) .............................................................................................G-178
15.3.15 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller ................................................................................................................................G-178
15.3.16 Folding conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................G-179
15.3.17 Main tray up/down wire ..........................................................................................................................................G-182
15.3.18 Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)...G-187
15.3.19 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type)......................................................................G-188
15.3.20 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type).......................................................................G-190
16. SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................G-193
16.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ..........................................................................................................G-193
16.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) .....................................................G-193
16.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) .........................................................................................................................G-193
16.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) .......................................................................................................................G-193
16.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) .....................................................G-194
16.1.5 Trimmer press brake ................................................................................................................................................G-195
16.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt ...........................................................................................................G-195
16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt............................................................................................................................................................G-196
16.3.3 Rear cover/Rt............................................................................................................................................................G-196
16.3.4 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-197
16.3.5 Upper cover/Fr..........................................................................................................................................................G-197
16.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3........................................................................................................................................................G-198
16.3.7 Sub tray cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G-198
16.3.8 Front door/Lt.............................................................................................................................................................G-199
16.3.9 Front door/Rt.............................................................................................................................................................G-199
16.3.10 Folding unit ............................................................................................................................................................G-200
17. SD-513..................................................................................................................................................................G-203
17.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling........................................................................................................G-203
17.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt......................................................................................................................................................G-203
17.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3...................................................................................................................................................G-204
17.3.4 Front cover/1, /2, /3...................................................................................................................................................G-205
17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3..............................................................................................................G-206
17.3.6 Left cover/Rr.............................................................................................................................................................G-207
17.3.7 Upper cover/RrRt1, /RrRt2, /RrRt3, /RrRt4, /RrRt5, /RrRt6......................................................................................G-207
xvii
17.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3............................................................................................................................G-209
17.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2..........................................................................................................................................G-210
17.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover..................................................................................................G-211
17.3.11 Opening and closing of the front console................................................................................................................G-212
17.3.12 Front console..........................................................................................................................................................G-213
17.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit............................................................................................................................................G-215
17.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door.....................................................................................................G-217
17.3.15 Moving up and down of the booklet holding............................................................................................................G-218
18. CR-101..................................................................................................................................................................G-220
18.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled...........................................................................................................G-220
18.1.1 Creaser unit..............................................................................................................................................................G-220
18.3.2 Creaser unit..............................................................................................................................................................G-223
19. TU-503..................................................................................................................................................................G-224
19.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled...........................................................................................................G-224
19.1.1 Slitter unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-224
19.3.2 Slitter unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-228
20. FD-504..................................................................................................................................................................G-230
20.3.2 Square-fold unit.........................................................................................................................................................G-230
20.3.3 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (1).....................................................................................................................G-231
20.3.4 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (2).....................................................................................................................G-233
21. PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................G-234
21.2.2 Front door ................................................................................................................................................................G-235
21.2.3 Front cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-236
21.2.4 Booklet door .............................................................................................................................................................G-237
21.2.5 Rear cover/Rt............................................................................................................................................................G-237
21.2.6 Rear cover/Lt............................................................................................................................................................G-238
21.2.7 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-238
21.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr..............................................................................................................................G-239
21.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr..............................................................................................................................G-239
21.2.10 Pellet supply cover .................................................................................................................................................G-239
21.2.11 SC cover/Fr.............................................................................................................................................................G-240
21.2.12 SC cover/Up............................................................................................................................................................G-241
21.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt....................................................................................................................................................G-242
21.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt.....................................................................................................................................................G-242
21.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt....................................................................................................................................................G-242
21.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt.....................................................................................................................................................G-243
21.2.17 Upper cover/Md......................................................................................................................................................G-243
21.2.18 Deodorant unit .......................................................................................................................................................G-243
21.2.19 Pellet supply unit ....................................................................................................................................................G-245
21.2.20 Glue tank unit .........................................................................................................................................................G-246
21.2.21 SC unit ...................................................................................................................................................................G-248
21.2.22 Clamp unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-250
21.2.23 PB left unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-251
21.2.24 Book lift wire ...........................................................................................................................................................G-254
21.2.25 Cart wire .................................................................................................................................................................G-257
21.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw................................................................................................................................................G-258
21.2.27 Relay conveyance unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-259
21.2.28 Cover paper tray ....................................................................................................................................................G-260
21.2.29 Cover paper lift wire ...............................................................................................................................................G-262
21.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function ......................................................................................G-265
21.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)......................................................................................G-266
22. GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................G-269
22.1 Centering punched holes....................................................................................................................................................G-269
22.2 Door latch............................................................................................................................................................................G-271
xviii
22.2.1 Checking the door latch............................................................................................................................................G-271
22.2.2 Adjusting the door latch............................................................................................................................................G-271
22.2.3 Replacing the door latch and switch.........................................................................................................................G-271
22.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service.............................................................................................................................G-272
22.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service...................................................................................................................G-272
22.3.2 Separating the punch from the printer......................................................................................................................G-272
22.3.3 Removing the rear cover...........................................................................................................................................G-272
22.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer.....................................................................................................................................G-272
(1) Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................G-273
(2) Tool Required.................................................................................................................................................................G-273
(3) To level the punch:.........................................................................................................................................................G-273
23. GP-502..................................................................................................................................................................G-274
24. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS................................................................................................................G-275
24.1 Status indicator light............................................................................................................................................................G-275
24.1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................G-275
24.1.2 Connector ................................................................................................................................................................G-275
24.1.3 Procedure.................................................................................................................................................................G-276
24.2 Key counter (KCT)..............................................................................................................................................................G-277
24.2.1 Connector.................................................................................................................................................................G-277
24.2.2 Procedure.................................................................................................................................................................G-277
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION...........................................................................................................H-1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................H-1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.................................................................................................................I-1
1. CHECKPOINTS............................................................................................................................................................I-1
1.1 Checking before you start work..................................................................................................................................................I-1
1.2 Checkpoints when you conduct the on-site service....................................................................................................................I-1
2. UTILITY........................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.1 List of utility menus.....................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.2 Start and exit...............................................................................................................................................................................I-5
2.2.1 Start method ....................................................................................................................................................................I-5
2.2.2 Exit method ......................................................................................................................................................................I-5
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS...................................................................................................................................I-6
3.1 Priority for Adjustment and Setting after you replace parts.........................................................................................................I-6
4. SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................................I-11
4.1 Service mode list.......................................................................................................................................................................I-11
4.2 Start and exit.............................................................................................................................................................................I-15
4.2.1 Start method ..................................................................................................................................................................I-15
4.2.2 Exit method ....................................................................................................................................................................I-15
4.3 Machine Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-15
4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)............................................................................................................I-15
4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)......................................................................I-16
4.3.3 Centering Sensor Gap Adj. (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)......................................................................I-17
4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)..............................................................................I-17
4.3.5 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)......................................................................................................................I-18
4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment).....................................................................................................................I-19
4.3.7 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)........................................................................................................I-20
4.3.8 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)...................................................................................................................I-20
4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment).......................................................................................................................I-21
4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)....................................................................................................................I-21
4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory).........................................................I-22
4.3.12 Cross Direction Initial Pos. (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory).............................................................I-22
4.3.13 Color Registration Auto. Adj. (Printer Adjustment).......................................................................................................I-22
4.3.14 Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment).................................................................................................I-23
4.3.15 PFU Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment).....................................................................................................I-24
4.3.16 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment).............................................................................................................I-25
4.3.17 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)...............................................................................................................I-26
4.3.18 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment)............................................................................................................I-27
4.3.19 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I-28
4.3.20 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment).............................................................................................................I-29
4.3.21 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment).....................................................................................................................I-29
4.3.22 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)......................................................................................................................I-30
4.3.23 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment).............................................................................................................I-31
4.3.24 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)......................................................................................................................I-31
4.3.25 Sensor Check (Scan adjustment).................................................................................................................................I-32
4.3.26 CCD Check (Scan Adjustment)....................................................................................................................................I-32
4.3.27 Line Mag. Setting (Scan Adjustment)...........................................................................................................................I-33
4.3.28 Recall Standard Data (Scan Adjustment).....................................................................................................................I-33
xix
4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)...........................................................I-33
4.3.30 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment).........................................................I-34
4.3.31 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)..........................................................I-35
4.3.32 Printer Gamma Curve Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)...........................................................I-37
4.3.33 Print Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)....................................................I-37
4.3.34 Print. Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)...................................................I-38
4.3.35 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)................................................................................................................I-39
4.3.36 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)....................................................................................................................I-39
4.3.37 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)........................................................................I-39
4.3.38 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)........................................................................I-40
4.3.39 Dot/Text Area Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)...................................................................I-40
4.3.40 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)..........................................................................................................................I-41
4.3.41 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment).................................................................................I-41
4.3.42 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)..........................................................................I-41
4.3.43 Background Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)................................................................................I-42
4.3.44 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) (Quality Adjustment - Tone Adjustment)......................................................................I-42
4.3.45 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)..................................................................................................................I-43
4.3.46 Non-Image Area Erase Check......................................................................................................................................I-43
4.4 Process Adjustment..................................................................................................................................................................I-44
4.4.1 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)...............................................................................................I-44
4.4.2 1-Trans.V Manual Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)...................................................................................................I-44
4.4.3 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual (High Voltage Adjustment).............................................................................................I-44
4.4.4 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)....................................................................................................I-44
4.4.5 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment).......................................................................................................I-44
4.4.6 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment)......................................................................................................I-44
4.4.7 Confirm Guide HV (Manual) (High Voltage Adjustment)................................................................................................I-44
4.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)...................................................................................................................I-44
4.4.9 Charge Potential Auto. Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.).......................................................................................................I-44
4.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)................................................................................................I-45
4.4.11 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)..........................................................................................................I-45
4.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.).......................................................................................................I-47
4.4.13 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)................................................................................................................I-48
4.4.14 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)...............................................................................................................I-48
4.4.15 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)...................................................................................................I-49
4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)............................................................................................................I-49
4.4.17 Surface Potential Sensor (Sensor Output Confirm)......................................................................................................I-69
4.4.18 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)...............................................................................................................I-69
4.4.19 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)...............................................................................................I-69
4.4.20 Drum Surface Potential (Sensor Output Confirm)........................................................................................................I-70
4.4.21 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)..............................................................................................I-70
4.4.22 Toner Charge Quantity Detect (Sensor Output Confirm)..............................................................................................I-70
4.4.23 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)............................................................................................I-71
4.4.24 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)................................................................................................I-71
4.4.25 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment).....................................................................................................I-71
4.4.26 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment).....................................................................................................I-72
4.4.27 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)...................................................................................................I-72
4.4.28 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.).......................................................................................................I-73
4.4.29 Toner Dens. Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)....................................................................................................I-73
4.4.30 M'Trans. Steering Sensor.............................................................................................................................................I-73
4.4.31 Recall Standard Data....................................................................................................................................................I-74
4.5 System Setting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-74
4.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures .............................................................................................................................I-74
4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list............................................................................................................................................I-75
4.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX .............................................................................................................................................I-111
4.5.4 Serial Number Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-111
4.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting........................................................................................................................................I-111
4.5.6 Setting of the toner amount and the replacement count of the toner bottle..................................................................I-112
4.5.7 Remaining staple amount display setting.....................................................................................................................I-113
4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt...................................................................................I-116
4.6 Counter/Data...........................................................................................................................................................................I-118
4.6.1 Maintenance Counter...................................................................................................................................................I-118
4.6.2 Data collection procedures...........................................................................................................................................I-119
4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/Copy/Printer)......................................................................................................................I-120
4.6.4 ADF Counter.................................................................................................................................................................I-121
4.6.5 Coverage Data History ................................................................................................................................................I-121
4.6.6 Paper JAM History .......................................................................................................................................................I-123
4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Sec............................................................................................................................I-123
4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)....................................................................................................................................I-132
4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)....................................................................................................................................I-137
4.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec......................................................................................................................I-142
xx
4.6.11 SC Data of Time Series..............................................................................................................................................I-160
4.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History) ..................................................................................................I-160
4.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History) ..................................................................................................I-160
4.6.14 Each Paper Type Counter..........................................................................................................................................I-161
4.6.15 ORU-M Maintenance History......................................................................................................................................I-162
4.6.16 RFID Information........................................................................................................................................................I-163
4.6.17 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter...................................................................I-164
4.6.18 Special Parts Counter.................................................................................................................................................I-164
4.6.19 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter) .....................................................................................................................I-179
4.6.20 Total Counter History..................................................................................................................................................I-180
4.6.21 Custom Size Counter Threshold Set..........................................................................................................................I-180
4.7 State Confirmation..................................................................................................................................................................I-181
4.7.1 I/O Check Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................I-181
4.7.2 Input check procedures ...............................................................................................................................................I-181
4.7.3 Output check procedures .............................................................................................................................................I-181
4.7.4 IO check mode list........................................................................................................................................................I-182
4.7.5 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type)..............................................................I-254
4.7.6 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type)...............................................................I-255
4.7.7 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)..........................................................I-257
4.7.8 FD, SD-506, SD-513, PB adjustment data EEPROM storage......................................................................................I-259
4.7.9 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage.....................................................................................................I-259
4.7.10 Main image processing board line memory check......................................................................................................I-259
4.7.11 Hard disk check..........................................................................................................................................................I-259
4.7.12 Hard disk replacing procedure....................................................................................................................................I-260
4.7.13 Replacing procedure of the write unit.........................................................................................................................I-260
4.7.14 Procedure when IO35-21 or IO35-25 is used.............................................................................................................I-260
4.8 ADF Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................................I-261
4.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj...................................................................................................................................................I-261
4.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position................................................................................................................................................I-262
4.8.3 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto.............................................................................................................................................I-263
4.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj...........................................................................................................................................I-264
4.8.5 Feed Paper Check........................................................................................................................................................I-264
4.8.6 Sensor Check...............................................................................................................................................................I-265
4.8.7 Read Position Adj.........................................................................................................................................................I-265
4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.................................................................................................................................................I-266
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-267
4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................I-267
4.8.11 Scanning Light Adjustment.........................................................................................................................................I-268
4.8.12 Mixed Original Size Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-268
4.8.13 Line Detection Setting.................................................................................................................................................I-268
4.8.14 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning..................................................................................................................................I-269
4.8.15 Recall Standard Data..................................................................................................................................................I-269
4.9 Finisher Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................I-269
4.9.1 FS-532 Staple Position Adjustment (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.).................................................................................I-269
4.9.2 FS-532 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)......................................................................................I-271
4.9.3 FS-532 FD Alignment Plate Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)......................................................................................I-272
4.9.4 FS-532 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)...............................................................................I-273
4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)..............................................................................I-274
4.9.6 SD-510 Fold&Staple Pitch Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)........................................................................................I-274
4.9.7 SD-510 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)............................................................................I-275
4.9.8 SD-510 Fold&Staple Staple Position (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)...............................................................................I-276
4.9.9 SD-510 Fold&Staple Fold Position (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)..................................................................................I-276
4.9.10 SD-510 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)..............................................................................I-277
4.9.11 SD-510 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)............................................................................I-278
4.9.12 SD-510 Double Fold Plate Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)..........................................................................I-279
4.9.13 SD-510 Half-Fold Strength Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.).....................................................................................I-279
4.9.14 PK-522 Vertical Position Adj. (CD) (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.).............................................................................I-280
4.9.15 PK-522 Horizontal Position Adj. (FD) (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.).........................................................................I-280
4.9.16 PK-522 Registration Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.)................................................................................I-281
4.9.17 PK-522 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.)............................................................................I-281
4.9.18 PI-502 Tray Size Adjustment (Staple Finisher (PI) Adj.).............................................................................................I-282
4.9.19 PI-502 PI Registration Adjustment (Staple Finisher (PI) Adj.)....................................................................................I-282
4.9.20 FD-503 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.).....................................................................................I-282
4.9.21 FD-503 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.)................................................................................I-283
4.9.22 FD-503 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)...........................................................................................I-284
4.9.23 FD-503 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)...............................................................................................I-285
4.9.24 FD-503 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.).............................................................................................I-286
4.9.25 FD-503 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.).......................................................................................I-287
4.9.26 FD-503 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)................................................................................................I-288
4.9.27 FD-503 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)..................................................................................................I-290
xxi
4.9.28 FD-503 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)....................................................................................I-291
4.9.29 LS-506 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)..............................................................................................I-291
4.9.30 LS-506 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)............................................................................................I-292
4.9.31 SD-506 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)....................................................................................I-292
4.9.32 SD-506 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..................................................................................I-293
4.9.33 SD-506 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..................................................................................I-294
4.9.34 SD-506 Half-fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).....................................................................................I-295
4.9.35 SD-506 Tri-fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................................I-295
4.9.36 SD-506 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).....................................................................................I-296
4.9.37 SD-506 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)......................................................................................I-297
4.9.38 SD-506 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)....................................................................................I-298
4.9.39 SD-513 Staple Center Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...............................................................................I-298
4.9.40 SD-513 Staple Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)......................................................................I-300
4.9.41 SD-513 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..................................................................................I-300
4.9.42 SD-513 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...........................................................................I-302
4.9.43 SD-513 Fold Skew Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)....................................................................................I-303
4.9.44 SD-513 Half-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................I-304
4.9.45 SD-513 Fold Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-305
4.9.46 SD-513 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)....................................................................I-306
4.9.47 SD-513 Parallel Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-307
4.9.48 SD-513 Trans. Entrance Paper Width (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-308
4.9.49 TU-503 2-Side Slitting Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...............................................................................I-309
4.9.50 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Half-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...............................I-310
4.9.51 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Tri-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).................................I-311
4.9.52 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - PB Cover Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..............................I-312
4.9.53 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Strength) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................I-313
4.9.54 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Frequency) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-314
4.9.55 FD-504 Spine Fold Line Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................I-314
4.9.56 SD-513 Staple Offset Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)................................................................................I-314
4.9.57 TU-503 Registration Loop Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-315
4.9.58 SD-513 Staple Tip Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).....................................................................................I-316
4.9.59 SD-513 Saddle Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................I-317
4.9.60 SD-513 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................I-318
4.9.61 PB-503 Cover Trimming Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment).............................................................................I-318
4.9.62 PB-503 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)......................................................................................I-319
4.9.63 PB-503 Spine Corner Formimg Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment).............................................................................I-320
4.9.64 PB-503 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)............................................................................................I-320
4.9.65 PB-503 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)..........................................................................................I-322
4.9.66 PB-503 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)..................................................................................I-323
4.9.67 PB-503 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment).............................................................................I-323
4.9.68 PB-503 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)............................................................................I-324
4.9.69 PB-503 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment).........................................................................I-325
4.9.70 PB-503 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)....................................................................................I-325
4.9.71 RU-510 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)...................................................................................I-326
4.9.72 RU-510 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment).................................................................................I-327
4.9.73 External FNS Customize Set......................................................................................................................................I-327
4.9.74 Recall Standard Data..................................................................................................................................................I-328
4.10 Firmware Version..................................................................................................................................................................I-329
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-329
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-329
4.11 CS Remote Care...................................................................................................................................................................I-330
4.11.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................I-330
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail).................................................................................I-330
4.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)..............................................................I-332
4.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)..................................................................I-333
4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system...............................................I-335
4.11.6 Mail initial setting........................................................................................................................................................I-336
4.11.7 http communication setting.........................................................................................................................................I-336
4.11.8 Log forwarding function..............................................................................................................................................I-336
4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care..........................................................................................I-337
4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care...........................................................................................................I-337
4.11.11 Setup confirmation ...................................................................................................................................................I-344
4.11.12 Maintenance call ......................................................................................................................................................I-344
4.11.13 Center call from administrator ..................................................................................................................................I-344
4.11.14 Confirm communication log......................................................................................................................................I-344
4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care ...............................................................................................................I-344
4.11.16 CS Remote Care error code list................................................................................................................................I-344
4.11.17 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................I-346
4.12 List Output ............................................................................................................................................................................I-346
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-346
xxii
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-346
4.13 Test Mode.............................................................................................................................................................................I-347
4.13.1 Running Test Mode....................................................................................................................................................I-347
4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode..........................................................................................................................................I-348
4.13.3 Test pattern number 11 Beam check..........................................................................................................................I-348
4.13.4 Test pattern number 16 Linearity evaluation pattern..................................................................................................I-349
4.13.5 Test pattern number 25 registration mark position check pattern...............................................................................I-349
4.13.6 Test pattern number 33 Linearity evaluation pattern..................................................................................................I-350
4.13.7 Test pattern number 40 Image skew check pattern (full-bleed print of test pattern number 16)................................I-350
4.13.8 Test pattern number 43 Output 12 test patterns at a time..........................................................................................I-351
4.13.9 Test pattern number 49 RU color sensor gamma correction (output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro).I-352
4.13.10 Test pattern number 51 Gradation evaluation pattern (main scan)..........................................................................I-353
4.13.11 Test pattern number 52 Gradation evaluation pattern (sub scan)............................................................................I-353
4.13.12 Test pattern number 53 Overall halftone..................................................................................................................I-354
4.13.13 Test pattern number 54 Gradation evaluation pattern..............................................................................................I-354
4.13.14 Test pattern number 55 5% coverage......................................................................................................................I-355
4.13.15 Test pattern number 58 Stripe check pattern...........................................................................................................I-355
4.13.16 Test pattern number 62 Uneven density check pattern............................................................................................I-356
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 maximum density adjustment pattern.................................................................................I-357
4.13.18 Test pattern number 75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL (Type1/Type2)..........................................................I-358
4.13.19 Test pattern number 76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2)...............................................................I-359
4.13.20 Test pattern number 77 Density correction pattern manual......................................................................................I-360
4.13.21 Test pattern number 80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern.....................................................................................I-360
4.13.22 Test pattern number 88 Chart file output..................................................................................................................I-361
4.13.23 Image Line Confirmation Mode.................................................................................................................................I-361
4.14 Setting Data..........................................................................................................................................................................I-364
4.14.1 Load from External Memory.......................................................................................................................................I-364
4.14.2 Store to External Memory...........................................................................................................................................I-365
4.15 Log Store..............................................................................................................................................................................I-365
4.15.1 Log Store Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-365
4.15.2 Execute Log Storing...................................................................................................................................................I-366
4.15.3 Download of the log from Web Utilities.......................................................................................................................I-367
4.15.4 Acquire the logs for the controller via WebDAV..........................................................................................................I-367
4.16 ORU-M Setting......................................................................................................................................................................I-367
4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life Setting.............................................................................................................................................I-367
4.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting....................................................................................................................................I-368
4.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-369
4.17 HDD Setting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-369
4.17.1 HDD Replace Initial Setting........................................................................................................................................I-369
4.17.2 Format HDD All Data..................................................................................................................................................I-370
4.17.3 Format Controller HDD Data......................................................................................................................................I-372
4.18 Auth. Device Setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-373
4.18.1 Auth. Unit Selection....................................................................................................................................................I-373
4.18.2 Loadable Driver Install................................................................................................................................................I-374
4.19 Startup Setting......................................................................................................................................................................I-374
4.19.1 Package Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-374
4.19.2 Setup Setting 1...........................................................................................................................................................I-374
4.19.3 Setup Setting 2...........................................................................................................................................................I-375
5. IC-602 SERVICE MODE..........................................................................................................................................I-376
5.1 IC Service Mode List...............................................................................................................................................................I-376
5.2 Start and exit of IC service mode............................................................................................................................................I-376
5.2.1 Method to activate the IC service mode.......................................................................................................................I-376
5.2.2 Method to exit IC service mode....................................................................................................................................I-376
5.3 System Setting........................................................................................................................................................................I-376
5.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures........................................................................................................................I-376
5.3.2 IC software DIPSW list.................................................................................................................................................I-377
5.4 CSV File Import/Export...........................................................................................................................................................I-378
5.4.1 OUTLINE......................................................................................................................................................................I-378
5.4.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-378
5.5 Font Backup............................................................................................................................................................................I-379
5.5.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................I-379
5.5.2 Preparation of backup/restore......................................................................................................................................I-379
5.5.3 Backup method.............................................................................................................................................................I-379
5.5.4 Method to restore..........................................................................................................................................................I-380
5.6 HP Tray Mapping....................................................................................................................................................................I-381
5.6.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................I-381
5.6.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-381
5.7 Controller Capture Setting......................................................................................................................................................I-383
(1) OUTLINE..........................................................................................................................................................................I-383
(2) Procedure for acquisition..................................................................................................................................................I-383
xxiii
6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING..........................................................................................................I-385
6.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting list.....................................................................................................................................I-385
6.2 Start/exit .................................................................................................................................................................................I-385
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-385
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-385
6.3 CE Authentication ..................................................................................................................................................................I-385
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-385
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-385
6.4 CE Auth. Password ................................................................................................................................................................I-385
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-385
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-385
6.5 Admin. Authentication ............................................................................................................................................................I-386
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-386
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-386
6.6 Administrator Password .........................................................................................................................................................I-386
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-386
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-386
7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING..................................................................................................................................I-387
7.1 Fee Collection Setting list.......................................................................................................................................................I-387
7.2 Start/exit .................................................................................................................................................................................I-387
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-387
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-387
7.3 Management Function ...........................................................................................................................................................I-387
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-387
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-387
7.4 Manage OpenAPI Auth...........................................................................................................................................................I-387
7.4.1 Restriction Code...........................................................................................................................................................I-387
7.5 Billing Coefficient Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-387
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-387
(2) Function............................................................................................................................................................................I-387
(3) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-387
8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD........................................................................................................................................I-389
8.1 Process adjustment................................................................................................................................................................I-389
8.1.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................I-389
8.1.2 Preset...........................................................................................................................................................................I-389
8.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front) ..................................................................................................................................I-390
8.1.4 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back) ..................................................................................................................................I-390
8.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)....................................................................................................................................I-391
8.1.6 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)....................................................................................................................................I-391
8.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)....................................................................................................................................I-391
8.1.8 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back).....................................................................................................................................I-392
8.1.9 Separation AC(Front)....................................................................................................................................................I-392
8.1.10 Separation AC(Back)..................................................................................................................................................I-393
8.1.11 Separation DC(Front).................................................................................................................................................I-393
8.1.12 Separation DC(Back)..................................................................................................................................................I-393
8.1.13 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Idle)..................................................................................................................................I-394
8.1.14 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Print)................................................................................................................................I-394
8.1.15 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Idle)....................................................................................................................................I-395
8.1.16 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Print)...................................................................................................................................I-395
8.1.17 L-Fus. Press Roller Center (Idle)................................................................................................................................I-395
8.1.18 L-Fus. Press Roller Center (Print)..............................................................................................................................I-396
8.1.19 Lead Edge Erase Quantity..........................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1.20 Rear Edge Erase Quantity..........................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1.21 Toner Amount Save....................................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1.22 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (YMC).........................................................................................................................................I-398
8.1.23 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (K)...............................................................................................................................................I-398
8.1.24 Shorten Tray Change Time (Mixed Weight Job)........................................................................................................I-398
8.1.25 Double Feed Detection...............................................................................................................................................I-398
8.1.26 Mis-centering detect JAM...........................................................................................................................................I-398
8.1.27 Int. Transfer Separation..............................................................................................................................................I-399
8.1.28 Thick BK Mode...........................................................................................................................................................I-399
8.1.29 Feed Correction..........................................................................................................................................................I-399
8.1.30 PFU Paper Float Timing.............................................................................................................................................I-400
8.1.31 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting......................................................................................................................I-400
8.1.32 PFU Suction Air Level Setting....................................................................................................................................I-400
8.1.33 Output Paper Separation Setting................................................................................................................................I-401
8.2 Image quality/improving paper feeding adjustment................................................................................................................I-401
8.2.1 Transfer jitter adjustment..............................................................................................................................................I-401
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.................................................................................I-403
xxiv
9.1 Registration unit tilt adjustment...............................................................................................................................................I-403
9.1.1 Usage...........................................................................................................................................................................I-403
9.1.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-403
9.2 Intermediate transfer belt position adjustment........................................................................................................................I-405
9.2.1 Usage...........................................................................................................................................................................I-405
9.2.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-405
9.3 2nd transfer belt position adjustment......................................................................................................................................I-406
9.3.1 Usage...........................................................................................................................................................................I-406
9.3.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-407
9.4 Height adjustment...................................................................................................................................................................I-407
9.4.1 Usage...........................................................................................................................................................................I-407
9.4.2 Adjustment flow............................................................................................................................................................I-408
9.4.3 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-410
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-626..................................................................................................................I-416
10.1 Height adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-416
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-416
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-416
10.2 Lead skew adjustment..........................................................................................................................................................I-416
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-416
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-416
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-707/708...........................................................................................................I-418
11.1 Scanner motor belt adjustment.............................................................................................................................................I-418
11.1.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-418
11.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-418
11.2 Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror unit.........................................................................................I-418
11.2.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-418
11.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-418
11.3 Paper feed pressure adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-419
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-419
(2) Preparation.......................................................................................................................................................................I-419
(3) Multi-feed adjustment (J-1610, J-1849, J-2049)...............................................................................................................I-419
(4) No feed adjustment (J-1601, J-1602, J-1613, J-1801 to J-1813, J-2001 to J-2013)........................................................I-419
(5) Paper lead edge buckle adjustment.................................................................................................................................I-419
(6) Feed failed jam adjustment (J-1601, J-1602, J-1613, J-1801 to J-1813, J-2001 to J-2013)............................................I-419
11.4 Centering adjustment (for each tray)....................................................................................................................................I-420
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-420
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-420
11.5 Centering Adjustment (PF)...................................................................................................................................................I-420
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-420
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-421
11.6 Height and tilt adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-421
11.6.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-421
11.6.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-421
11.7 Tilt adjustment.......................................................................................................................................................................I-425
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-425
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-426
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-511..................................................................................................................I-427
12.1 Height adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................I-427
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-427
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-427
12.2 Image scratch reduction........................................................................................................................................................I-427
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................I-427
(2) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-427
(3) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-427
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-510..................................................................................................................I-428
13.1 Height adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-428
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-428
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-428
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-532..................................................................................................................I-429
14.1 Staple position adjustment....................................................................................................................................................I-429
14.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-429
14.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-429
14.2 Main tray horizontal adjustment............................................................................................................................................I-430
14.2.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-430
14.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-430
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-510..................................................................................................................I-432
15.1 Adjustment for Staple Clinch Failure.....................................................................................................................................I-432
15.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-432
15.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-432
xxv
15.2 1st folding skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-432
15.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-432
15.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-432
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-522..................................................................................................................I-434
16.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment...................................................................................................................................I-434
16.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-434
16.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-434
16.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position adjustment...........................................................................................................I-434
16.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-434
16.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-434
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502 ..................................................................................................................I-436
17.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected) ...........................................................................................................................I-436
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-436
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-436
17.2 PK punch position centering adjustment...............................................................................................................................I-436
17.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-436
17.2.2 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Up.....................................................................................................I-436
17.2.3 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Lw.....................................................................................................I-437
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-506..................................................................................................................I-439
18.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6).........................................................................................................................I-439
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-439
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-439
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-439
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-439
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-439
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-440
18.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) ............................................................................................................................I-440
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-440
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-440
18.5 Horizontal adjustment...........................................................................................................................................................I-440
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-440
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-441
18.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I-441
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-441
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-442
18.7 Stacker tray height adjustment.............................................................................................................................................I-443
18.7.1 Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................................I-443
18.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-443
18.8 Stacker tray levelness adjustment........................................................................................................................................I-443
18.8.1 Purpose.....................................................................................................................................................................I-443
18.8.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................I-444
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503 .................................................................................................................I-446
19.1 Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment...................................................................I-446
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-446
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-446
19.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment ........................................................................................................I-446
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-446
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-447
19.3 Punch centering adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-447
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-447
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-447
19.4 Horizontal adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I-448
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-448
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-448
19.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray) ..........................................................................................................I-448
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-448
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-448
19.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray) ..................................................................................................................I-449
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-449
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-449
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506 .................................................................................................................I-450
20.1 Horizontal adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I-450
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-450
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-450
20.2 Folding skew adjustment .....................................................................................................................................................I-450
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-450
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-450
xxvi
20.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment..................................................................................................................I-451
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-451
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-451
20.4 Staple position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................I-452
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-452
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-452
(3) Adjustment Procedure/1...................................................................................................................................................I-452
(4) Adjustment Procedure/2...................................................................................................................................................I-453
20.5 Stapler position adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I-453
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-453
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-453
20.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher .......................................................................................................................................I-454
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-454
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-454
20.7 Trimming skew adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-455
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-455
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-456
20.8 Trimming adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................................I-456
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-456
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-457
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-513..................................................................................................................I-458
21.1 Front stopper position adjustment.........................................................................................................................................I-458
21.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-458
21.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-458
21.2 1st folding skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-458
21.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-458
21.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-458
21.3 Horizontal adjustment...........................................................................................................................................................I-459
21.3.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-459
21.3.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-459
21.4 Front console open close caster height adjustment..............................................................................................................I-461
21.4.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-461
21.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-462
21.5 Staple adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-462
21.5.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-462
21.5.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-462
21.6 Clincher position adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-473
21.6.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-473
21.6.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-473
21.7 Saddle stitching alignment plate/Md position adjustment.....................................................................................................I-479
21.7.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-479
21.7.2 Prior check..................................................................................................................................................................I-479
21.7.3 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-482
21.8 Trimmer skew adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-484
21.8.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-484
21.8.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-484
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT CR-101..................................................................................................................I-487
22.1 Creaser unit skew adjustment...............................................................................................................................................I-487
22.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-487
22.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-487
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT TU-503..................................................................................................................I-488
23.1 Slitter unit skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-488
23.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-488
23.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-488
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503 .................................................................................................................I-489
24.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment..................................................................................................................I-489
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-489
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-489
24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment ...............................................................................................................I-489
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-489
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-490
24.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment .....................................................................................................................................I-490
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-490
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-490
24.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I-491
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-491
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-491
24.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I-491
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-491
xxvii
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode..................................................................................................................I-492
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode.................................................................................................................I-493
24.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment ...............................................................................................................................I-493
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-493
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-494
24.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment ......................................................................................................................I-494
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-494
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-495
24.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment ......................................................................................................................I-495
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-495
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-495
24.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment ........................................................................................................................I-496
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-496
(2) Check point......................................................................................................................................................................I-496
(3) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-497
24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment ...........................................................................................................................I-497
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-497
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-498
24.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment ................................................................................................................................I-498
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-498
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-498
24.12 Cover paper table positioning ............................................................................................................................................I-499
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-499
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-499
24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment .................................................................................................................................I-500
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-500
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-500
24.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment .............................................................................................................I-501
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-501
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-502
24.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment .............................................................................................................I-503
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-503
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-504
24.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment .............................................................................................................................I-504
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-504
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-504
24.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment ................................................................................................................I-504
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-504
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-505
24.18 Height adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I-507
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-507
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-508
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.........................................................................................................J-1
1. OUTLINE.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1 Type...........................................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1.1 USB MEMORY ISW.........................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1.2 Internet ISW.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.2 Board to be rewritten and firmware............................................................................................................................................J-1
1.3 Firmware data flow.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.4 Precautions on rewriting the firmware........................................................................................................................................J-2
1.4.1 ISW execution procedures...............................................................................................................................................J-2
1.4.2 DIPSW on the board........................................................................................................................................................J-2
1.4.3 Connect short connector when the firmware is rewrote...................................................................................................J-2
1.5 Error list......................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
1.5.1 Main body error list..........................................................................................................................................................J-3
1.5.2 Troubleshooting procedure for the main body error.........................................................................................................J-3
1.5.3 Operation when firmware abnormality occurs..................................................................................................................J-3
2. ISWTRNS_G................................................................................................................................................................J-5
2.1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................................J-5
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software)...............................................................................................................................................J-5
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G ...................................................................................................................................................J-5
(1) Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................J-5
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G ..........................................................................................................................................................J-6
2.3.1 Firmware checksum check..............................................................................................................................................J-6
2.4 Error list......................................................................................................................................................................................J-7
(1) ISWTrns_G error list............................................................................................................................................................J-7
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................J-7
3. USB MEMORY ISW.....................................................................................................................................................J-8
3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW.................................................................................................................................................J-8
xxviii
3.1.1 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................J-8
3.1.2 Main body error list........................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2 ISW procedure for ADF and the scanner.................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2.1 Preparation....................................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2.2 Procedure for moving to the ISW rewriting screen........................................................................................................J-10
3.2.3 Procedure for rewriting the firmware..............................................................................................................................J-11
3.3 ISW Procedure of GP-502.......................................................................................................................................................J-12
3.3.1 Preparation....................................................................................................................................................................J-12
3.3.2 Procedure of rewriting M1..............................................................................................................................................J-13
4. INTERNET ISW.........................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.1 Outline .....................................................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.2 Operating environment ............................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.3 Usage precautions...................................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.3.1 Notice to administrator...................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.3.2 Power cut during writing.................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.4 Initial setting.............................................................................................................................................................................J-20
(1) Setting from the operation panel.......................................................................................................................................J-20
(2) Setting from the Web browser...........................................................................................................................................J-20
4.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities.........................................................................................................................................J-23
4.5.1 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................J-23
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel....................................................................................................................................J-24
4.6.1 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................J-24
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW ..................................................................................................................J-26
(1) Proxy server......................................................................................................................................................................J-26
(2) Authentication of the proxy server.....................................................................................................................................J-26
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list..........................................................................................J-26
(4) Remark..............................................................................................................................................................................J-26
K TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM INDICATION.......................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 Jam code list..............................................................................................................................................................................K-1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE.............................................................................................................................................K-30
2.1 Trouble reset method .............................................................................................................................................................K-30
2.2 Function to detach defective sections ....................................................................................................................................K-30
(1) User operation..................................................................................................................................................................K-30
(2) DIPSW setting...................................................................................................................................................................K-30
2.3 Malfunction code list................................................................................................................................................................K-30
2.4 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300).....................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.4.1 C-0002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.4.2 C-0004.........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.4.3 C-0105.........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.4.4 C-0108.........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.4.5 C-0109.........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.4.6 C-0110.........................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.4.7 C-0111.........................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.4.8 C-0112.........................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.4.9 C-0113.........................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.4.10 C-0114.......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.4.11 C-0115.......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.4.12 C-0116.......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.4.13 C-0117.......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.4.14 C-0118.......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.4.15 C-0119.......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.4.16 C-0120.......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.4.17 C-0121.......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.4.18 C-0122.......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.4.19 C-0123.......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.4.20 C-0124.......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.4.21 C-0125.......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.4.22 C-0126.......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.4.23 C-0127.......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.4.24 C-0128.......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.4.25 C-0129.......................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.4.26 C-0130.......................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.4.27 C-0131.......................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.4.28 C-0132.......................................................................................................................................................................K-134
xxix
2.4.29 C-0170.......................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.4.30 C-0171.......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.4.31 C-0172.......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.4.32 C-0173.......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.4.33 C-0174.......................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.4.34 C-0175.......................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.4.35 C-0176.......................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.4.36 C-0209.......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.4.37 C-0212.......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.4.38 C-0215.......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.4.39 C-0218.......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.4.40 C-0221.......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.4.41 C-0224.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.4.42 C-0227.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.4.43 C-0228.......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.4.44 C-0229.......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.5 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400).....................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.5.1 C-0301.........................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.5.2 C-0302.........................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.5.3 C-0303.........................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.5.4 C-0304.........................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.5.5 C-0305.........................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.5.6 C-0306.........................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.5.7 C-0307.........................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.5.8 C-0308.........................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.5.9 C-0309.........................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.5.10 C-0310.......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.5.11 C-0311.......................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.5.12 C-0312.......................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.5.13 C-0313.......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.5.14 C-0315.......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.5.15 C-0316.......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.5.16 C-0317.......................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.5.17 C-0318.......................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.5.18 C-0319.......................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.5.19 C-0320.......................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.5.20 C-0321.......................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.5.21 C-0322.......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.5.22 C-0325.......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.5.23 C-0326.......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.5.24 C-0327.......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.5.25 C-0328.......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.5.26 C-0329.......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.5.27 C-0330.......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.5.28 C-0331.......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.5.29 C-0332.......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.5.30 C-0333.......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.5.31 C-0334.......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.5.32 C-0335.......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.5.33 C-0336.......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.5.34 C-0337.......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.5.35 C-0338.......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.5.36 C-0339.......................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.5.37 C-0340.......................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.5.38 C-0341.......................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.5.39 C-0342.......................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.5.40 C-0343.......................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.5.41 C-0344.......................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.5.42 C-0345.......................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.5.43 C-0346.......................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.5.44 C-0347.......................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.5.45 C-0348.......................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.5.46 C-0349.......................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.5.47 C-0350.......................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.5.48 C-0351.......................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.5.49 C-0352.......................................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.5.50 C-0353.......................................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.5.51 C-0354.......................................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.5.52 C-0355.......................................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.5.53 C-0356.......................................................................................................................................................................K-158
xxx
2.5.54 C-0357.......................................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.5.55 C-0358.......................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.5.56 C-0359.......................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.5.57 C-0360.......................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.5.58 C-0361.......................................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.5.59 C-0362.......................................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.5.60 C-0363.......................................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.5.61 C-0364.......................................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.5.62 C-0365.......................................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.5.63 C-0366.......................................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.5.64 C-0367.......................................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.5.65 C-0368.......................................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.5.66 C-0369.......................................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.5.67 C-0370.......................................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.5.68 C-0371.......................................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.5.69 C-0372.......................................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.6 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500).....................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.6.1 C-0405.........................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.6.2 C-0407.........................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.6.3 C-0408.........................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.6.4 C-0409.........................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.6.5 C-0410.........................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.6.6 C-0413.........................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.6.7 C-0414.........................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.6.8 C-0419.........................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.6.9 C-0420.........................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.6.10 C-0421.......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.6.11 C-0422.......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.6.12 C-0423.......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.6.13 C-0424.......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.6.14 C-0425.......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.6.15 C-0426.......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.6.16 C-0427.......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.6.17 C-0428.......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.6.18 C-0429.......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.6.19 C-0430.......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.6.20 C-0431.......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.6.21 C-0432.......................................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.6.22 C-0433.......................................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.6.23 C-0434.......................................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.6.24 C-0435.......................................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.6.25 C-0436.......................................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.6.26 C-0437.......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.6.27 C-0438.......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.6.28 C-0439.......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.6.29 C-0440.......................................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.6.30 C-0441.......................................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.7 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126).....................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.7.1 C-1005.........................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.7.2 C-1006.........................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.7.3 C-1007.........................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.7.4 C-1007.........................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.7.5 C-1009.........................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.7.6 C-1010.........................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.7.7 C-1011.........................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.7.8 C-1012.........................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.7.9 C-1013.........................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.7.10 C-1014.......................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.7.11 C-1018.......................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.7.12 C-1102 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.7.13 C-1103 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.7.14 C-1105 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.7.15 C-1106 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.7.16 C-1109 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.7.17 C-1113 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.7.18 C-1114 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.7.19 C-1115.......................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.7.20 C-1124.......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.7.21 C-1125.......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.8 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230).....................................................................................................................................................K-183
xxxi
2.8.1 C-1127 (PK-522).........................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.8.2 C-1132 (PK-522).........................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.8.3 C-1137 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.8.4 C-1141 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.8.5 C-1144 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.8.6 C-1147 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.8.7 C-1153 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.8.8 C-1154 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.8.9 C-1155 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.8.10 C-1156 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.8.11 C-1157 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.8.12 C-1158 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.8.13 C-1159 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.8.14 C-1170 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.8.15 C-1171 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.8.16 C-1172 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.8.17 C-1173.......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.8.18 C-1174.......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.8.19 C-1175.......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.8.20 C-1176.......................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.8.21 C-1177.......................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.8.22 C-1179 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.8.23 C-1180.......................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.8.24 C-1181.......................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.8.25 C-1201.......................................................................................................................................................................K-194
2.8.26 C-1202.......................................................................................................................................................................K-194
2.8.27 C-1203.......................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.8.28 C-1204.......................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.8.29 C-1205.......................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.8.30 C-1206.......................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.8.31 C-1211.......................................................................................................................................................................K-197
2.8.32 C-1212.......................................................................................................................................................................K-197
2.8.33 C-1213.......................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.8.34 C-1214.......................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.8.35 C-1215.......................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.8.36 C-1216.......................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.8.37 C-1221.......................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.8.38 C-1222.......................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.8.39 C-1223.......................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.8.40 C-1224.......................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.8.41 C-1225.......................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.8.42 C-1226.......................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.8.43 C-1227.......................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.8.44 C-1228.......................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.8.45 C-1229.......................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.8.46 C-1230.......................................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.9 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270) ....................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.9.1 C-1231.........................................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.9.2 C-1232.........................................................................................................................................................................K-205
2.9.3 C-1233.........................................................................................................................................................................K-205
2.9.4 C-1234.........................................................................................................................................................................K-205
2.9.5 C-1235.........................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.9.6 C-1241.........................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.9.7 C-1242.........................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.9.8 C-1242.........................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.9.9 C-1243.........................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.9.10 C-1243.......................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.9.11 C-1244.......................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.9.12 C-1244.......................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.9.13 C-1245.......................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.9.14 C-1245.......................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.9.15 C-1246.......................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.9.16 C-1246.......................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.9.17 C-1247.......................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.9.18 C-1247.......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.9.19 C-1248.......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.9.20 C-1248.......................................................................................................................................................................K-214
2.9.21 C-1249.......................................................................................................................................................................K-214
2.9.22 C-1249.......................................................................................................................................................................K-215
2.9.23 C-1250.......................................................................................................................................................................K-215
xxxii
2.9.24 C-1250.......................................................................................................................................................................K-216
2.9.25 C-1251.......................................................................................................................................................................K-216
2.9.26 C-1251.......................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.9.27 C-1252.......................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.9.28 C-1252.......................................................................................................................................................................K-218
2.9.29 C-1253.......................................................................................................................................................................K-218
2.9.30 C-1253.......................................................................................................................................................................K-219
2.9.31 C-1254.......................................................................................................................................................................K-220
2.9.32 C-1254.......................................................................................................................................................................K-220
2.9.33 C-1255.......................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.9.34 C-1256.......................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.9.35 C-1256.......................................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.9.36 C-1257.......................................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.9.37 C-1258.......................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.9.38 C-1258.......................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.9.39 C-1259.......................................................................................................................................................................K-224
2.9.40 C-1259.......................................................................................................................................................................K-224
2.9.41 C-1260.......................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.9.42 C-1260.......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.9.43 C-1261.......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.9.44 C-1261.......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.9.45 C-1262.......................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.9.46 C-1262.......................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.9.47 C-1263.......................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.9.48 C-1263.......................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.9.49 C-1264.......................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.9.50 C-1264.......................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.9.51 C-1265.......................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.9.52 C-1265.......................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.9.53 C-1266.......................................................................................................................................................................K-231
2.9.54 C-1266.......................................................................................................................................................................K-231
2.9.55 C-1267.......................................................................................................................................................................K-232
2.9.56 C-1267.......................................................................................................................................................................K-232
2.9.57 C-1268.......................................................................................................................................................................K-233
2.9.58 C-1268.......................................................................................................................................................................K-233
2.9.59 C-1269.......................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.9.60 C-1269.......................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.9.61 C-1270.......................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.9.62 C-1270.......................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.10 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400) ..................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.10.1 C-1271.......................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.10.2 C-1271.......................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.10.3 C-1272.......................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.10.4 C-1272.......................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.10.5 C-1273.......................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.10.6 C-1273.......................................................................................................................................................................K-238
2.10.7 C-1274.......................................................................................................................................................................K-238
2.10.8 C-1275.......................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.10.9 C-1275.......................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.10.10 C-1276.....................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.10.11 C-1277.....................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.10.12 C-1278.....................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.10.13 C-1279.....................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.10.14 C-1280.....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.10.15 C-1281.....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.10.16 C-1282.....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
2.10.17 C-1290.....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
2.10.18 C-1291.....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.10.19 C-1292.....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.10.20 C-1293.....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.10.21 C-1294.....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.10.22 C-1295.....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.10.23 C-1296.....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.10.24 C-1297.....................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.10.25 C-1298.....................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.10.26 C-1299.....................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.10.27 C-1302.....................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.10.28 C-1303.....................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.10.29 C-1304.....................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.10.30 C-1305.....................................................................................................................................................................K-248
xxxiii
2.10.31 C-1307.....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.10.32 C-1308.....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.10.33 C-1309.....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.10.34 C-1310.....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.10.35 C-1311.....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.10.36 C-1312.....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.10.37 C-1313.....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.10.38 C-1330.....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.10.39 C-1331.....................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.10.40 C-1332.....................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.10.41 C-1333.....................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.10.42 C-1334.....................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.10.43 C-1341.....................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.10.44 C-1342.....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.10.45 C-1351.....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.10.46 C-1352.....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.10.47 C-1355.....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.10.48 C-1356.....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.10.49 C-1357.....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.10.50 C-1358.....................................................................................................................................................................K-256
2.10.51 C-1359.....................................................................................................................................................................K-256
2.10.52 C-1360.....................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.10.53 C-1361.....................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.10.54 C-1364.....................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.11 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500)...................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.11.1 C-1402.......................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.11.2 C-1403.......................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.11.3 C-1404.......................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.11.4 C-1404.......................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.11.5 C-1406.......................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.11.6 C-1407.......................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.11.7 C-1408.......................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.11.8 C-1409.......................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.11.9 C-1411.......................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.11.10 C-1412.....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.11.11 C-1413.....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.11.12 C-1432.....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.11.13 C-1433.....................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.11.14 C-1433.....................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.11.15 C-1435.....................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.11.16 C-1436.....................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.11.17 C-1437.....................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.11.18 C-1438.....................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.11.19 C-1439.....................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.11.20 C-1440.....................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.11.21 C-1441.....................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.11.22 C-1442.....................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.11.23 C-1443.....................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.11.24 C-1451.....................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.11.25 C-1452.....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.11.26 C-1454.....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.11.27 C-1455.....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.11.28 C-1456.....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.11.29 C-1457.....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.11.30 C-1480.....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.11.31 C-1499.....................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.12 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539) ..................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.12.1 C-1501.......................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.12.2 C-1502.......................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.12.3 C-1504.......................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.12.4 C-1505.......................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.12.5 C-1506.......................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.12.6 C-1507.......................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.12.7 C-1508.......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.12.8 C-1509.......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.12.9 C-1510.......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.12.10 C-1511.....................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.12.11 C-1512.....................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.12.12 C-1513.....................................................................................................................................................................K-273
2.12.13 C-1514.....................................................................................................................................................................K-273
xxxiv
2.12.14 C-1515.....................................................................................................................................................................K-274
2.12.15 C-1516.....................................................................................................................................................................K-274
2.12.16 C-1517.....................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.12.17 C-1518.....................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.12.18 C-1519.....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.12.19 C-1520.....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.12.20 C-1521.....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.12.21 C-1522.....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.12.22 C-1523.....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.12.23 C-1524.....................................................................................................................................................................K-278
2.12.24 C-1525.....................................................................................................................................................................K-278
2.12.25 C-1526.....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.12.26 C-1527.....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.12.27 C-1528.....................................................................................................................................................................K-280
2.12.28 C-1530 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-280
2.12.29 C-1531.....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.12.30 C-1532.....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.12.31 C-1534.....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.12.32 C-1537.....................................................................................................................................................................K-282
2.12.33 C-1538.....................................................................................................................................................................K-282
2.13 Solution 10 (C-1540_1633).................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.13.1 C-1540.......................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.13.2 C-1541.......................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.13.3 C-1542.......................................................................................................................................................................K-284
2.13.4 C-1543.......................................................................................................................................................................K-284
2.13.5 C-1544.......................................................................................................................................................................K-285
2.13.6 C-1545.......................................................................................................................................................................K-286
2.13.7 C-1546.......................................................................................................................................................................K-286
2.13.8 C-1547.......................................................................................................................................................................K-287
2.13.9 C-1548.......................................................................................................................................................................K-287
2.13.10 C-1549.....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.13.11 C-1550.....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.13.12 C-1551.....................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.13.13 C-1552.....................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.13.14 C-1553.....................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.13.15 C-1554.....................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.13.16 C-1555.....................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.13.17 C-1556.....................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.13.18 C-1557.....................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.13.19 C-1558.....................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.13.20 C-1559.....................................................................................................................................................................K-293
2.13.21 C-1560.....................................................................................................................................................................K-293
2.13.22 C-1561.....................................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.13.23 C-1562.....................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.13.24 C-1565.....................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.13.25 C-1566.....................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.13.26 C-1567.....................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.13.27 C-1620.....................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.13.28 C-1621.....................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.13.29 C-1622.....................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.13.30 C-1623.....................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.13.31 C-1625.....................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.13.32 C-1626.....................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.13.33 C-1627.....................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.13.34 C-1628.....................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.13.35 C-1629.....................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.13.36 C-1630.....................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.13.37 C-1632.....................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.13.38 C-1633.....................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.14 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400).................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.14.1 C-2001.......................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.14.2 C-2003.......................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.14.3 C-2004.......................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.14.4 C-2201.......................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.14.5 C-2202.......................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.14.6 C-2203.......................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.14.7 C-2204.......................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.14.8 C-2211.......................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.14.9 C-2212.......................................................................................................................................................................K-305
2.14.10 C-2213.....................................................................................................................................................................K-305
xxxv
2.14.11 C-2214.....................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.14.12 C-2215.....................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.14.13 C-2216.....................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.14.14 C-2217.....................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.14.15 C-2218.....................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.14.16 C-2219.....................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.14.17 C-2220.....................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.14.18 C-2221.....................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.14.19 C-2222.....................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.14.20 C-2223.....................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.14.21 C-2224.....................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.14.22 C-2225.....................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.14.23 C-2226.....................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.14.24 C-2227.....................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.14.25 C-2228.....................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.14.26 C-2229.....................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.14.27 C-2230.....................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.14.28 C-2232.....................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.14.29 C-2233.....................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.14.30 C-2234.....................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.14.31 C-2235.....................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.14.32 C-2236.....................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.14.33 C-2237.....................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.14.34 C-2238.....................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.14.35 C-2239.....................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.14.36 C-2240.....................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.14.37 C-2242.....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.14.38 C-2243.....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.14.39 C-2244.....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.14.40 C-2245.....................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.14.41 C-2246.....................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.14.42 C-2247.....................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.14.43 C-2302.....................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.14.44 C-2303.....................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.14.45 C-2304.....................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.14.46 C-2306.....................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.14.47 C-2307.....................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.14.48 C-2308.....................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.14.49 C-2309.....................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.15 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500).................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.15.1 C-2401.......................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.15.2 C-2402.......................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.15.3 C-2403.......................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.15.4 C-2404.......................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.15.5 C-2411.......................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.15.6 C-2412.......................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.15.7 C-2413.......................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.15.8 C-2414.......................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.15.9 C-2421.......................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.15.10 C-2422.....................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.15.11 C-2423.....................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.15.12 C-2424.....................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.15.13 C-2431.....................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.15.14 C-2432.....................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.15.15 C-2433.....................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.15.16 C-2434.....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.15.17 C-2441.....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.15.18 C-2442.....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.15.19 C-2443.....................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.15.20 C-2444.....................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.15.21 C-2451.....................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.15.22 C-2452.....................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.15.23 C-2453.....................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.15.24 C-2454.....................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.15.25 C-2461.....................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.15.26 C-2462.....................................................................................................................................................................K-330
2.15.27 C-2463.....................................................................................................................................................................K-330
2.15.28 C-2464.....................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.15.29 C-2470.....................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.15.30 C-2475.....................................................................................................................................................................K-331
xxxvi
2.16 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800).................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.16.1 C-2701.......................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.16.2 C-2702.......................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.16.3 C-2703.......................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.16.4 C-2704.......................................................................................................................................................................K-333
2.16.5 C-2711.......................................................................................................................................................................K-333
2.16.6 C-2712.......................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.16.7 C-2713.......................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.16.8 C-2714.......................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.16.9 C-2720.......................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.16.10 C-2721.....................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.16.11 C-2731.....................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.16.12 C-2732.....................................................................................................................................................................K-336
2.16.13 C-2733.....................................................................................................................................................................K-336
2.16.14 C-2734.....................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.16.15 C-2740.....................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.16.16 C-2741.....................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.16.17 C-2742.....................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.16.18 C-2743.....................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.16.19 C-2744.....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.16.20 C-2751.....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.16.21 C-2752.....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.16.22 C-2753.....................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.16.23 C-2754.....................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.17 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000).................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.17.1 C-2801.......................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.17.2 C-2802.......................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.17.3 C-2803.......................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.17.4 C-2804.......................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.17.5 C-2805.......................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.17.6 C-2806.......................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.17.7 C-2807.......................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.17.8 C-2808.......................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.17.9 C-2811.......................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.17.10 C-2812.....................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.17.11 C-2813.....................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.17.12 C-2814.....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.17.13 C-2821.....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.17.14 C-2822.....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.17.15 C-2823.....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.17.16 C-2824.....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.17.17 C-2831.....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.17.18 C-2832.....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.17.19 C-2833.....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.17.20 C-2834.....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.17.21 C-2840.....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.17.22 C-2841.....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.17.23 C-2851.....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.17.24 C-2852.....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.17.25 C-2853.....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.17.26 C-2854.....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.18 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500).................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.18.1 C-3101.......................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.18.2 C-3102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.18.3 C-3103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.18.4 C-3104.......................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.18.5 C-3105.......................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.18.6 C-3106.......................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.18.7 C-3108.......................................................................................................................................................................K-354
2.18.8 C-3109.......................................................................................................................................................................K-354
2.18.9 C-3110.......................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.18.10 C-3304.....................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.18.11 C-3305.....................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.18.12 C-3310.....................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.19 Solution 16 (C-3501_3900).................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.19.1 C-3501.......................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.19.2 C-3502.......................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.19.3 C-3503.......................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.19.4 C-3504.......................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.19.5 C-3505.......................................................................................................................................................................K-358
xxxvii
2.19.6 C-3506.......................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.19.7 C-3520.......................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.19.8 C-3801.......................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.19.9 C-3802.......................................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.20 Solution 17 (C-3901_3999).................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.20.1 C-3901.......................................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.20.2 C-3902.......................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.20.3 C-3903.......................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.20.4 C-3904.......................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.20.5 C-3905.......................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.20.6 C-3906.......................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.20.7 C-3907.......................................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.20.8 C-3908.......................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.20.9 C-3909.......................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.20.10 C-3910.....................................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.20.11 C-3911.....................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.20.12 C-3914.....................................................................................................................................................................K-369
2.20.13 C-3915.....................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.20.14 C-3916.....................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.20.15 C-3917.....................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.20.16 C-3919.....................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.21 Solution 18 (C-4001_5000).................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.21.1 C-4101.......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.21.2 C-4102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.21.3 C-4103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.21.4 C-4104.......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.21.5 C-4302.......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.21.6 C-4501.......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.21.7 C-4502.......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.21.8 C-4503.......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.21.9 C-4504.......................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.21.10 C-4511.....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.21.11 C-4512.....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.21.12 C-4513.....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.21.13 C-4514.....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.21.14 C-4520.....................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.21.15 C-4521.....................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.21.16 C-4522.....................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.21.17 C-4523.....................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.21.18 C-4531.....................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.21.19 C-4532.....................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.21.20 C-4533.....................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.21.21 C-4534.....................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.21.22 C-4541.....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.21.23 C-4542.....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.21.24 C-4543.....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.21.25 C-4544.....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.21.26 C-4601.....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.21.27 C-4602.....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.21.28 C-4603.....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.21.29 C-4604.....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.21.30 C-4611.....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.21.31 C-4612.....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.21.32 C-4613.....................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.21.33 C-4614.....................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.21.34 C-4621.....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.21.35 C-4622.....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.21.36 C-4623.....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.21.37 C-4624.....................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.21.38 C-4631.....................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.21.39 C-4632.....................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.21.40 C-4633.....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
2.21.41 C-4641.....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
2.21.42 C-4642.....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.21.43 C-4643.....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.21.44 C-4644.....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.21.45 C-4661.....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.21.46 C-4662.....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.21.47 C-4663.....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.21.48 C-4670.....................................................................................................................................................................K-391
xxxviii
2.21.49 C-4705.....................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.21.50 C-4709.....................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.21.51 C-4713.....................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.21.52 C-4714.....................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.21.53 C-4715.....................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.21.54 C-4716.....................................................................................................................................................................K-393
2.21.55 C-4717.....................................................................................................................................................................K-393
2.21.56 C-4718.....................................................................................................................................................................K-393
2.21.57 C-4719.....................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.21.58 C-4720.....................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.21.59 C-4721.....................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.21.60 C-4722.....................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.21.61 C-4723.....................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.21.62 C-4724.....................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.21.63 C-4725.....................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.21.64 C-4727.....................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.21.65 C-4728.....................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.21.66 C-4840.....................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.21.67 C-4850.....................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.21.68 C-4860.....................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.22 Solution 19 (C-5001_6000).................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.22.1 C-5001.......................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.22.2 C-5002.......................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.22.3 C-5003.......................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.22.4 C-5004.......................................................................................................................................................................K-399
2.22.5 C-5005.......................................................................................................................................................................K-399
2.22.6 C-5006.......................................................................................................................................................................K-399
2.22.7 C-5007.......................................................................................................................................................................K-400
2.22.8 C-5010.......................................................................................................................................................................K-400
2.22.9 C-5012.......................................................................................................................................................................K-400
2.22.10 C-5013.....................................................................................................................................................................K-401
2.22.11 C-5014.....................................................................................................................................................................K-401
2.22.12 C-5015.....................................................................................................................................................................K-402
2.22.13 C-5016.....................................................................................................................................................................K-402
2.22.14 C-5017.....................................................................................................................................................................K-402
2.22.15 C-5018.....................................................................................................................................................................K-403
2.22.16 C-5019.....................................................................................................................................................................K-403
2.22.17 C-5020.....................................................................................................................................................................K-403
2.22.18 C-5021.....................................................................................................................................................................K-403
2.22.19 C-5022.....................................................................................................................................................................K-404
2.22.20 C-5023.....................................................................................................................................................................K-404
2.22.21 C-5024.....................................................................................................................................................................K-404
2.22.22 C-5025.....................................................................................................................................................................K-405
2.22.23 C-5100.....................................................................................................................................................................K-405
2.22.24 C-5101.....................................................................................................................................................................K-406
2.22.25 C-5102.....................................................................................................................................................................K-406
2.22.26 C-5103.....................................................................................................................................................................K-406
2.22.27 C-5104.....................................................................................................................................................................K-407
2.22.28 C-5105.....................................................................................................................................................................K-407
2.22.29 C-5106.....................................................................................................................................................................K-407
2.22.30 C-5107.....................................................................................................................................................................K-408
2.22.31 C-5109.....................................................................................................................................................................K-408
2.22.32 C-5110.....................................................................................................................................................................K-408
2.22.33 C-5111.....................................................................................................................................................................K-409
2.22.34 C-5121.....................................................................................................................................................................K-409
2.22.35 C-5137.....................................................................................................................................................................K-409
2.22.36 C-5138.....................................................................................................................................................................K-410
2.22.37 C-5150.....................................................................................................................................................................K-410
2.22.38 C-5401.....................................................................................................................................................................K-410
2.22.39 C-5402.....................................................................................................................................................................K-411
2.22.40 C-5403.....................................................................................................................................................................K-411
2.22.41 C-5404.....................................................................................................................................................................K-411
2.22.42 C-5405.....................................................................................................................................................................K-412
2.23 Solution 20 (C-6001_9999).................................................................................................................................................K-412
2.23.1 C-6102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-412
2.23.2 C-6103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-413
2.23.3 C-6105.......................................................................................................................................................................K-413
2.23.4 C-6702.......................................................................................................................................................................K-413
2.23.5 C-6703.......................................................................................................................................................................K-414
2.23.6 C-6704.......................................................................................................................................................................K-414
xxxix
2.23.7 C-6706.......................................................................................................................................................................K-415
2.23.8 C-6707.......................................................................................................................................................................K-415
2.23.9 C-6708.......................................................................................................................................................................K-415
2.23.10 C-6720.....................................................................................................................................................................K-416
2.23.11 C-6725.....................................................................................................................................................................K-416
2.23.12 C-6751.....................................................................................................................................................................K-416
2.23.13 C-6801.....................................................................................................................................................................K-417
2.23.14 C-6F01....................................................................................................................................................................K-417
2.23.15 C-7001.....................................................................................................................................................................K-417
2.23.16 C-8001.....................................................................................................................................................................K-418
2.23.17 C-8002.....................................................................................................................................................................K-418
2.23.18 C-8101.....................................................................................................................................................................K-418
2.23.19 C-8102.....................................................................................................................................................................K-419
2.23.20 C-8103.....................................................................................................................................................................K-419
2.23.21 C-8106.....................................................................................................................................................................K-420
2.23.22 C-8107.....................................................................................................................................................................K-420
2.23.23 C-8302.....................................................................................................................................................................K-421
2.23.24 C-8401.....................................................................................................................................................................K-421
2.23.25 C-9401.....................................................................................................................................................................K-421
2.23.26 C-9402.....................................................................................................................................................................K-422
2.24 Solution 21 (C-C001_C200)................................................................................................................................................K-422
2.24.1 C-C101......................................................................................................................................................................K-422
2.24.2 C-C102......................................................................................................................................................................K-422
2.24.3 C-C104......................................................................................................................................................................K-423
2.24.4 C-C109......................................................................................................................................................................K-423
2.24.5 C-C111......................................................................................................................................................................K-423
2.24.6 C-C112......................................................................................................................................................................K-424
2.24.7 C-C113......................................................................................................................................................................K-424
2.24.8 C-C114......................................................................................................................................................................K-425
2.24.9 C-C116......................................................................................................................................................................K-425
2.24.10 C-C117....................................................................................................................................................................K-425
2.24.11 C-C118....................................................................................................................................................................K-426
2.24.12 C-C119....................................................................................................................................................................K-426
2.24.13 C-C120....................................................................................................................................................................K-426
2.24.14 C-C121....................................................................................................................................................................K-427
2.24.15 C-C123....................................................................................................................................................................K-427
2.24.16 C-C124....................................................................................................................................................................K-428
2.24.17 C-C126....................................................................................................................................................................K-428
2.24.18 C-C131....................................................................................................................................................................K-428
2.24.19 C-C132....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.20 C-C136....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.21 C-C137....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.22 C-C138....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.23 C-C139....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.24 C-C140....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.25 C-C150....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.26 C-C151....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.27 C-C152....................................................................................................................................................................K-431
2.24.28 C-C156....................................................................................................................................................................K-431
2.24.29 C-C170....................................................................................................................................................................K-431
2.25 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100)................................................................................................................................................K-432
2.25.1 C-C201......................................................................................................................................................................K-432
2.25.2 C-C211......................................................................................................................................................................K-432
2.25.3 C-C212......................................................................................................................................................................K-433
2.25.4 C-C213......................................................................................................................................................................K-433
2.25.5 C-C214......................................................................................................................................................................K-433
2.25.6 C-C215......................................................................................................................................................................K-434
2.25.7 C-C216......................................................................................................................................................................K-434
2.25.8 C-C217......................................................................................................................................................................K-434
2.25.9 C-C218......................................................................................................................................................................K-435
2.25.10 C-C219....................................................................................................................................................................K-435
2.25.11 C-D010....................................................................................................................................................................K-436
2.25.12 C-D020....................................................................................................................................................................K-436
2.25.13 C-D030....................................................................................................................................................................K-437
2.25.14 C-D040....................................................................................................................................................................K-437
2.25.15 C-D050....................................................................................................................................................................K-438
2.25.16 C-D060....................................................................................................................................................................K-439
2.25.17 C-D070....................................................................................................................................................................K-439
2.25.18 C-D080....................................................................................................................................................................K-440
2.25.19 C-D0C0...................................................................................................................................................................K-440
xl
2.25.20 C-D0D0...................................................................................................................................................................K-440
2.25.21 C-D0D1...................................................................................................................................................................K-441
2.25.22 C-D0E1....................................................................................................................................................................K-442
2.25.23 C-D0E3....................................................................................................................................................................K-442
2.25.24 C-D0E4....................................................................................................................................................................K-443
2.25.25 C-D0E5....................................................................................................................................................................K-443
2.25.26 C-D0E6....................................................................................................................................................................K-443
2.25.27 C-D0E8....................................................................................................................................................................K-444
2.25.28 C-D0EF...................................................................................................................................................................K-444
2.25.29 C-D0F0....................................................................................................................................................................K-445
2.25.30 C-D0F1....................................................................................................................................................................K-445
2.25.31 C-D0F5....................................................................................................................................................................K-446
2.25.32 C-D0F6....................................................................................................................................................................K-446
2.25.33 C-E001....................................................................................................................................................................K-446
2.25.34 C-E002....................................................................................................................................................................K-447
2.25.35 C-E003....................................................................................................................................................................K-447
2.25.36 C-E004....................................................................................................................................................................K-447
2.25.37 C-E005....................................................................................................................................................................K-448
2.25.38 C-E006....................................................................................................................................................................K-448
2.25.39 C-E007....................................................................................................................................................................K-448
2.25.40 C-E008....................................................................................................................................................................K-449
2.25.41 C-E009....................................................................................................................................................................K-449
2.25.42 C-E013....................................................................................................................................................................K-449
2.25.43 C-E017....................................................................................................................................................................K-450
2.25.44 C-E018....................................................................................................................................................................K-450
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE.....................................................................K-451
3.1 The power of main body does not become active.................................................................................................................K-451
3.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in red..........................K-451
3.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything..............K-451
3.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green...............................................K-451
3.1.4 The operation panel stops on the "Please wait starting system" screen.....................................................................K-452
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF............................................................................................................................................K-452
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option...............................................................................................................K-452
3.3.1 PF-707/PF-708............................................................................................................................................................K-452
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option...................................................................................................................K-453
3.4.1 RU-510........................................................................................................................................................................K-453
3.4.2 RU-511........................................................................................................................................................................K-453
3.4.3 FS-532.........................................................................................................................................................................K-453
3.4.4 LS-506.........................................................................................................................................................................K-454
3.4.5 FD-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-454
3.4.6 SD-506 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-454
3.4.7 SD-513........................................................................................................................................................................K-455
3.4.8 PB-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-455
3.4.9 GP-501........................................................................................................................................................................K-456
4. IMAGE TROUBLE...................................................................................................................................................K-457
4.1 Outline of solution..................................................................................................................................................................K-457
4.1.1 Test pattern print.........................................................................................................................................................K-457
4.2 Solution..................................................................................................................................................................................K-458
4.2.1 Image trouble sample illustrations...............................................................................................................................K-458
4.2.2 White line 1, white band 1, color line 1, color band 1..................................................................................................K-459
4.2.3 White line 2, white band 2, color line 2, color band 2..................................................................................................K-462
4.2.4 White line 3, color line 3..............................................................................................................................................K-464
4.2.5 Uneven density 1.........................................................................................................................................................K-464
4.2.6 Uneven density 2.........................................................................................................................................................K-467
4.2.7 Uneven density 3.........................................................................................................................................................K-470
4.2.8 Gradation error............................................................................................................................................................K-470
4.2.9 Inky backside...............................................................................................................................................................K-471
4.2.10 Color reproduction error............................................................................................................................................K-472
4.2.11 Color registration error..............................................................................................................................................K-472
4.2.12 Gray background.......................................................................................................................................................K-473
4.2.13 Low image density.....................................................................................................................................................K-475
4.2.14 Color spots................................................................................................................................................................K-477
4.2.15 White spots, void areas.............................................................................................................................................K-480
4.2.16 Blurry white spots, blurry color spots.........................................................................................................................K-482
4.2.17 Image erasure at leading edge, image erasure at trailing edge................................................................................K-482
4.2.18 Thick paper trailing edge repelling............................................................................................................................K-483
4.2.19 Blank print, black print...............................................................................................................................................K-484
4.2.20 Ripple unevenness (solid images of R,B,G)..............................................................................................................K-485
4.2.21 Moire.........................................................................................................................................................................K-485
4.2.22 Uneven gloss, trails of rollers....................................................................................................................................K-487
xli
4.2.23 Image memory, size memory....................................................................................................................................K-487
4.2.24 Darker at trailing edge of paper, fain at leading edge of paper.................................................................................K-488
4.2.25 Pitch unevenness......................................................................................................................................................K-489
4.2.26 Periodical white dot, color dot...................................................................................................................................K-490
4.2.27 Poor fusing performance, offset................................................................................................................................K-490
4.2.28 Blurred image............................................................................................................................................................K-491
4.2.29 Brush effect, image bleeding.....................................................................................................................................K-492
4.2.30 Paper crease, bleeding.............................................................................................................................................K-492
5. IC PROTECTOR.....................................................................................................................................................K-494
5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................K-494
5.2 IC protector list......................................................................................................................................................................K-494
5.2.1 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................K-494
5.2.2 PF-707/708..................................................................................................................................................................K-499
5.2.3 HT-506........................................................................................................................................................................K-500
5.2.4 RU-511........................................................................................................................................................................K-501
5.2.5 FS-532.........................................................................................................................................................................K-502
5.2.6 SD-510........................................................................................................................................................................K-502
5.2.7 PK-522........................................................................................................................................................................K-503
5.2.8 PI-502..........................................................................................................................................................................K-503
5.2.9 LS-506.........................................................................................................................................................................K-503
5.2.10 FD-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-504
5.2.11 SD-506......................................................................................................................................................................K-505
5.2.12 SD-513......................................................................................................................................................................K-506
5.2.13 TU-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-507
5.2.14 FD-504......................................................................................................................................................................K-508
5.2.15 PB-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-508
5.2.16 OR-102......................................................................................................................................................................K-510
5.3 IC protector location..............................................................................................................................................................K-510
5.3.1 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................K-510
5.3.2 PF-707/708..................................................................................................................................................................K-516
5.3.3 HT-506........................................................................................................................................................................K-517
5.3.4 RU-511........................................................................................................................................................................K-517
5.3.5 FS-532.........................................................................................................................................................................K-519
5.3.6 SD-510........................................................................................................................................................................K-519
5.3.7 PK-522........................................................................................................................................................................K-520
5.3.8 PI-502..........................................................................................................................................................................K-520
5.3.9 LS-506.........................................................................................................................................................................K-521
5.3.10 SD-506......................................................................................................................................................................K-521
5.3.11 SD-513......................................................................................................................................................................K-523
5.3.12 TU-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-524
5.3.13 FD-504......................................................................................................................................................................K-524
5.3.14 OR-102......................................................................................................................................................................K-524
6. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-602)..............................................................................................................................K-525
6.1 IC malfunction code list.........................................................................................................................................................K-525
6.2 IC solution..............................................................................................................................................................................K-525
6.2.1 00-001.........................................................................................................................................................................K-525
6.2.2 00-002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-525
6.2.3 01-001.........................................................................................................................................................................K-526
6.2.4 01-002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-526
7. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)............................................................................................................................K-527
7.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)...........................................................................................................................................K-527
7.2 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................................................................K-527
7.2.1 Troubleshooting...........................................................................................................................................................K-527
7.2.2 General........................................................................................................................................................................K-527
7.2.3 Back gauge.................................................................................................................................................................K-528
7.2.4 Die set.........................................................................................................................................................................K-528
7.3 Initial service action...............................................................................................................................................................K-528
7.3.1 Initial service action.....................................................................................................................................................K-528
7.4 Mis-feed service action..........................................................................................................................................................K-528
7.4.1 Mis-feed service action................................................................................................................................................K-528
7.5 Final service action................................................................................................................................................................K-531
7.5.1 Final service action......................................................................................................................................................K-531
8. OTHER ABNORMALITIES (ERROR CODES, TROUBLESHOOTINGS)...............................................................K-532
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..................................................................................L-1
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.......................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085....................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.1 Operation panel section...................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.2 Filter box..........................................................................................................................................................................L-1
xlii
1.1.3 Main body rear side 1......................................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.4 Main body rear side 2......................................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.5 SYSBOX..........................................................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.6 Main body upper surface.................................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.7 Inside the main body right side........................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.8 Inside the main body left side..........................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.9 Main body front side........................................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.10 Inside the main body front side 1...................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.11 Inside the main body front side 2...................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.12 Writing section...............................................................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.13 Photo conductor section..............................................................................................................................................L-10
1.1.14 Belt drive section.........................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.1.15 Process unit section.....................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.1.16 Toner supply section....................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.1.17 Intermediate transfer section.......................................................................................................................................L-13
1.1.18 2nd transfer section.....................................................................................................................................................L-14
1.1.19 Registration section top side........................................................................................................................................L-14
1.1.20 Registration section left side........................................................................................................................................L-15
1.1.21 Duplex section front side.............................................................................................................................................L-15
1.1.22 Duplex section top side................................................................................................................................................L-16
1.1.23 Duplex section right side..............................................................................................................................................L-16
1.1.24 Duplex unit...................................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.1.25 Fusing section right side..............................................................................................................................................L-17
1.1.26 Fusing section left side................................................................................................................................................L-18
1.1.27 Reversal section..........................................................................................................................................................L-18
1.1.28 Paper exit section........................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.2 DF-626.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.2.1 Front side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.2.2 Top face side.................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.2.3 Left side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-21
1.2.4 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-22
1.3 PF-707, PF-708, HT-506.........................................................................................................................................................L-23
1.3.1 Front side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-23
1.3.2 Right side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-23
1.3.3 Top side (PF-708 only)..................................................................................................................................................L-24
1.3.4 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-25
1.3.5 Vertical conveyance section front side .........................................................................................................................L-26
1.3.6 Vertical conveyance section rear side ..........................................................................................................................L-27
1.3.7 Vertical conveyance section top side.............................................................................................................................L-28
1.3.8 Horizontal conveyance section bottom side..................................................................................................................L-28
1.3.9 Horizontal conveyance section rear side ......................................................................................................................L-29
1.3.10 Paper feed trays 1 to 3 section ...................................................................................................................................L-29
1.3.11 Paper feed suction section .........................................................................................................................................L-30
1.3.12 HT-506 ........................................................................................................................................................................L-30
1.4 FA-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-31
1.4.1 Tandem conveyance section.........................................................................................................................................L-31
1.4.2 PF-707/708 rear side.....................................................................................................................................................L-31
1.5 RU-516.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-32
1.6 RU-511/HM-101.......................................................................................................................................................................L-32
1.6.1 Right side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-32
1.6.2 Left side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-33
1.6.3 Rear side 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................L-34
1.6.4 Rear side 2....................................................................................................................................................................L-35
1.6.5 Humidification section front side ...................................................................................................................................L-36
1.6.6 Humidification section rear side ....................................................................................................................................L-36
1.6.7 Output paper density detection section ........................................................................................................................L-37
1.7 RU-510.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-37
1.7.1 Right side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-37
1.7.2 Left-side view.................................................................................................................................................................L-38
1.7.3 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-38
1.8 FS-532.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-39
1.8.1 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-39
1.8.2 Right side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-40
1.8.3 Left side 1......................................................................................................................................................................L-41
1.8.4 Left side 2......................................................................................................................................................................L-42
1.8.5 Front side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-43
1.8.6 Upper surface................................................................................................................................................................L-44
1.8.7 Stacker 1........................................................................................................................................................................L-44
1.8.8 Stacker 2........................................................................................................................................................................L-45
1.8.9 Stacker 3........................................................................................................................................................................L-46
xliii
1.8.10 Stapler.........................................................................................................................................................................L-46
1.9 SD-510.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-47
1.9.1 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-47
1.9.2 Front side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-47
1.9.3 Bottom 1........................................................................................................................................................................L-48
1.9.4 Bottom 2........................................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.9.5 Stapler...........................................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.10 PK-522...................................................................................................................................................................................L-50
1.11 PI-502 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L-50
1.12 MK-732..................................................................................................................................................................................L-51
1.13 LS-506...................................................................................................................................................................................L-51
1.13.1 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-51
1.13.2 Upper surface .............................................................................................................................................................L-52
1.13.3 Rear side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-52
1.13.4 Shift unit ......................................................................................................................................................................L-53
1.14 FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-53
1.14.1 Conveyance section front side/right side ....................................................................................................................L-53
1.14.2 Major boards in the power source section ..................................................................................................................L-54
1.14.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side .......................................................................................................................L-54
1.14.4 PI rear side .................................................................................................................................................................L-55
1.14.5 PI upper surface .........................................................................................................................................................L-55
1.14.6 PI lower tray ................................................................................................................................................................L-55
1.14.7 Punch section .............................................................................................................................................................L-56
1.14.8 Folding unit front side/right side ..................................................................................................................................L-56
1.14.9 Folding unit rear side/left side .....................................................................................................................................L-57
1.15 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-57
1.15.1 Horizontal conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................L-57
1.15.2 Right angle conveyance section .................................................................................................................................L-58
1.15.3 Folding section ............................................................................................................................................................L-58
1.15.4 Saddle stitching section ..............................................................................................................................................L-61
1.15.5 Bundle processing section ..........................................................................................................................................L-63
1.15.6 Trimmer section ..........................................................................................................................................................L-64
1.15.7 Left-side view ..............................................................................................................................................................L-65
1.15.8 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-65
1.15.9 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-66
1.16 SD-513...................................................................................................................................................................................L-67
1.16.1 Rear console front side 1.............................................................................................................................................L-67
1.16.2 Rear console front side 2.............................................................................................................................................L-68
1.16.3 Rear console rear side.................................................................................................................................................L-69
1.16.4 Front console...............................................................................................................................................................L-70
1.16.5 Entrance conveyance section......................................................................................................................................L-71
1.16.6 Folding conveyance section........................................................................................................................................L-72
1.16.7 Sub tray/tri-folding tray section 1.................................................................................................................................L-73
1.16.8 Sub tray/tri-folding tray section 2.................................................................................................................................L-74
1.16.9 Saddle stitching section...............................................................................................................................................L-75
1.16.10 Booklet movement section.........................................................................................................................................L-76
1.16.11 Clamp section............................................................................................................................................................L-77
1.16.12 Trimmer section.........................................................................................................................................................L-78
1.16.13 Booklet tray section...................................................................................................................................................L-79
1.17 CR-101...................................................................................................................................................................................L-80
1.18 TU-503...................................................................................................................................................................................L-80
1.19 FD-504...................................................................................................................................................................................L-81
1.19.1 Clamp up down section...............................................................................................................................................L-81
1.19.2 Square-fold section......................................................................................................................................................L-81
1.19.3 SD-513 left side...........................................................................................................................................................L-82
1.20 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-82
1.20.1 SC section ..................................................................................................................................................................L-82
1.20.2 Clamp section .............................................................................................................................................................L-83
1.20.3 Pellet supply section ...................................................................................................................................................L-84
1.20.4 Glue tank section ........................................................................................................................................................L-85
1.20.5 Cover paper supply section ........................................................................................................................................L-86
1.20.6 Cover paper table section ...........................................................................................................................................L-87
1.20.7 Book stock section ......................................................................................................................................................L-88
1.20.8 Conveyance section and framework section ..............................................................................................................L-89
1.20.9 Relay conveyance section ..........................................................................................................................................L-91
1.21 MK-737..................................................................................................................................................................................L-92
1.22 GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................................L-92
1.22.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1..............................................................................................................................................L-92
1.22.2 Rear side 2/Left side....................................................................................................................................................L-93
1.22.3 Right side 2..................................................................................................................................................................L-93
xliv
1.22.4 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-93
1.22.5 Bypass conveyance section........................................................................................................................................L-94
1.22.6 Punch conveyance section..........................................................................................................................................L-94
1.23 GP-502...................................................................................................................................................................................L-95
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD.......................................................................................................L-96
2.1 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085..................................................................................................................................................L-96
2.1.1 MFP board (MFPB)........................................................................................................................................................L-96
2.1.2 Main image processing board (IPB/M)..........................................................................................................................L-96
2.1.3 PH image processing board (IPB/P)..............................................................................................................................L-97
2.1.4 Printer control board (PRCB).........................................................................................................................................L-97
2.1.5 Conveyance drive board (CDB).....................................................................................................................................L-97
2.1.6 AC drive board/1 (ACDB/1)...........................................................................................................................................L-98
2.1.7 AC drive board/2 (ACDB/2) (Only for Europe)...............................................................................................................L-98
2.1.8 Power supply relay board (PSRYB)...............................................................................................................................L-98
2.1.9 DC detection board (DCDTB)........................................................................................................................................L-99
2.1.10 BR board (BRB)...........................................................................................................................................................L-99
2.1.11 DC power supply/1 (DCPS/1)......................................................................................................................................L-99
2.1.12 DC power supply/2 (DCPS/2)....................................................................................................................................L-100
2.1.15 High voltage power supply/1-1 (HVPS/1-1)...............................................................................................................L-101
2.1.16 High voltage power supply/1-2 (HVPS/1-2)...............................................................................................................L-101
2.1.17 High voltage power supply/2 (HVPS/2).....................................................................................................................L-102
2.1.20 Operation board/1 (OB/1)..........................................................................................................................................L-103
2.1.23 Drum potential sensor board /Y, /M, /C, /K (DPSB/Y, /M, /C, /K)..............................................................................L-104
2.1.24 Index board/Y, /M, /C, /K (INDEXB/Y, /M, /C, /K)......................................................................................................L-104
2.1.25 Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K (LASDB/Y, /M, /C, /K)...............................................................................................L-105
2.1.26 Toner drive board (TDB)............................................................................................................................................L-105
2.1.27 Antenna board/1, /2, /3 (ANTB/1, /2, /3)....................................................................................................................L-106
2.1.28 NVRAM board (NVRAM)...........................................................................................................................................L-106
2.1.29 USB relay board (USBRYB)......................................................................................................................................L-106
2.2 DF-626...................................................................................................................................................................................L-107
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB).............................................................................................................................................L-107
2.2.2 Relay board (REYB)....................................................................................................................................................L-107
2.3 PF-707/708/HT-506...............................................................................................................................................................L-108
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB)................................................................................................................................................L-108
2.3.2 AC drive board (ACDB)...............................................................................................................................................L-108
2.3.3 DC power supply /1, /2 (DCPS/1, /2)...........................................................................................................................L-109
2.3.4 Scanner image processing board (IPB/S)...................................................................................................................L-109
2.3.5 Scanner drive board (SCDB).......................................................................................................................................L-109
2.3.6 CCD board (CCDB).....................................................................................................................................................L-110
2.3.7 Inverter board (INVB)...................................................................................................................................................L-110
2.3.8 Multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR)........................................................................................................................L-110
2.3.9 Multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS)........................................................................................................................L-110
2.4 RU-516...................................................................................................................................................................................L-111
2.4.1 High voltage unit (HV)..................................................................................................................................................L-111
2.5 RU-511/HM-101.....................................................................................................................................................................L-111
2.5.1 RU control board (RUCB)............................................................................................................................................L-111
2.5.2 RU drive board (RUDB)...............................................................................................................................................L-112
2.5.3 DC power supply (DCPS)............................................................................................................................................L-112
2.5.4 Color density detection board/Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK).....................................................L-112
2.5.5 Color density control board (CDCB) ...........................................................................................................................L-113
2.5.6 Color density relay board (CDRLB) ............................................................................................................................L-113
2.5.7 Jam indication board (JAMIB) .....................................................................................................................................L-113
2.6 RU-510...................................................................................................................................................................................L-114
2.6.1 RU control board (RUCB)............................................................................................................................................L-114
2.6.2 Jam indication board (JAMIB)......................................................................................................................................L-114
2.7 FS-532...................................................................................................................................................................................L-115
2.7.1 FNS control board........................................................................................................................................................L-115
2.7.2 Jam indication board....................................................................................................................................................L-115
2.8 SD-510...................................................................................................................................................................................L-115
2.8.1 SD control board..........................................................................................................................................................L-115
2.9 PK-522...................................................................................................................................................................................L-116
2.9.1 Punch drive board (PDB).............................................................................................................................................L-116
2.9.2 Paper size sensor board..............................................................................................................................................L-116
2.10 PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................................L-116
xlv
2.10.1 PI drive board (PIDB) ................................................................................................................................................L-116
2.10.2 PI operation board (PIOB) ........................................................................................................................................L-116
2.11 LS-506.................................................................................................................................................................................L-117
2.11.1 LS control board (LSCB) ...........................................................................................................................................L-117
2.11.2 Relay board/1 (RLB/1)...............................................................................................................................................L-117
2.11.3 Relay board/2 (RLB/2)...............................................................................................................................................L-117
2.11.4 DC power supply (DCPS) .........................................................................................................................................L-117
2.11.5 Relay board (RLB) ....................................................................................................................................................L-117
2.12 FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-118
2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-118
2.12.2 Punch drive board (PDB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-118
2.12.3 Folding drive board (FDB) ........................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12.4 PI drive board (PIDB) ................................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12.5 FD operation board (FDOB) .....................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12.6 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ...................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12.7 DC power supply (DCPS) .........................................................................................................................................L-120
2.12.8 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (MFDB1, 2)..............................................................................................................L-120
2.13 SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-120
2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB) .........................................................................................................................................L-120
2.13.2 SD drive board (SDDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-121
2.13.3 SD drive board/2 (SDDB/2).......................................................................................................................................L-121
2.13.4 DC power supply/1 (DCPS1).....................................................................................................................................L-121
2.13.7 Jam indication board/1 (JAMIB/1)..............................................................................................................................L-122
2.13.8 Jam indication board/2 (JAMIB/2)..............................................................................................................................L-122
2.14 SD-513.................................................................................................................................................................................L-123
2.14.1 SD control board (PCB1)...........................................................................................................................................L-123
2.14.2 SD drive board (PCB2)..............................................................................................................................................L-123
2.14.3 Rear console jam indication board (PCB5)................................................................................................................L-124
2.14.4 Front console jam indication board (PCB6)...............................................................................................................L-124
2.15 TU-503.................................................................................................................................................................................L-125
2.15.1 Slitter drive board (TUDB).........................................................................................................................................L-125
2.16 FD-504.................................................................................................................................................................................L-125
2.16.1 SQF drive board (SQFDB).........................................................................................................................................L-125
2.17 PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-126
2.17.1 PB control board (PBCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-126
2.17.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-126
2.17.3 PB drive board/1 (PBDB1).........................................................................................................................................L-127
2.17.6 Jam indication board/1 (JAMB1)................................................................................................................................L-128
2.17.7 Jam indication board/2 (JAMB2)................................................................................................................................L-128
2.17.8 Manual operation board (OB1) .................................................................................................................................L-128
2.17.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2) ........................................................................................................................L-128
2.17.10 DC power supply/1 (DCPU/1)..................................................................................................................................L-128
2.18 MK-737................................................................................................................................................................................L-130
2.18.1 MK relay board (MKRB).............................................................................................................................................L-130
2.19 GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................................L-131
2.19.1 Punch Controller PCB................................................................................................................................................L-131
2.20 GP-502.................................................................................................................................................................................L-131
2.21 OR-102................................................................................................................................................................................L-132
2.21.1 RFID control board (RFIDCB)....................................................................................................................................L-132
2.22 IC-602C................................................................................................................................................................................L-132
2.22.1 Expansion board (EXPB)...........................................................................................................................................L-132
2.23 VI-507..................................................................................................................................................................................L-133
2.23.1 VIF board (VIFB)........................................................................................................................................................L-133
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ..........................................................................................................L-134
3.1 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-134
3.1.1 Right side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-134
3.1.2 Left side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-135
3.1.3 Rear side-1..................................................................................................................................................................L-136
3.1.4 Rear side-2..................................................................................................................................................................L-136
3.1.5 Folding section.............................................................................................................................................................L-137
xlvi
3.1.6 Saddle stitching section-1............................................................................................................................................L-138
3.1.7 Saddle stitching section-2............................................................................................................................................L-138
3.2 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-139
3.2.1 Rear side-1..................................................................................................................................................................L-139
3.2.2 Rear side 2..................................................................................................................................................................L-140
3.2.3 Rear side 3..................................................................................................................................................................L-141
3.2.4 Rear side 4..................................................................................................................................................................L-142
3.2.5 Rear side 5..................................................................................................................................................................L-143
3.2.6 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-144
3.2.7 Sub compile (SC) section............................................................................................................................................L-144
3.2.8 Clamp section..............................................................................................................................................................L-145
3.2.9 Cover paper supply section.........................................................................................................................................L-145
3.2.10 Cover paper table section..........................................................................................................................................L-146
3.2.11 Book stock section.....................................................................................................................................................L-146
3.2.12 Conveyance section..................................................................................................................................................L-147
3.2.13 Pellet supply section..................................................................................................................................................L-147
3.2.14 Relay conveyance section.........................................................................................................................................L-147
M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................M-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................M-1
1.1 Timing chart of turning ON the sub power switch.....................................................................................................................M-1
1.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode...............................................................................................................................................M-1
1.2.1 Operation condition.........................................................................................................................................................M-1
1.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2. DF-626........................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode.............................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1.2 Timing chart diagram......................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode...............................................................................................................................................M-4
2.2.2 Timing chart diagram......................................................................................................................................................M-5
3. PF-707/708.................................................................................................................................................................M-6
3.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode.............................................................................................................................................M-6
3.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4. RU-511/HM-101..........................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.1 Timing chart of the reverse exit mode (Without humidification)................................................................................................M-7
4.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.2 Timing chart of the straight exit mode (With humidification).....................................................................................................M-7
4.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-8
5. RU-510.......................................................................................................................................................................M-9
5.1 Timing chart of the straight exit mode.......................................................................................................................................M-9
5.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-9
5.2 Timing chart of the single sheet reverse/exit mode..................................................................................................................M-9
5.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.3 Timing chart of the double sheets reverse/exit conveyance mode.........................................................................................M-10
5.3.1 Operation condition.......................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.3.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-11
6. FS-532......................................................................................................................................................................M-12
6.1 Timing chart of the straight mode...........................................................................................................................................M-12
6.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-12
6.2 Timing chart of the staple mode..............................................................................................................................................M-12
6.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-13
7. SD-510......................................................................................................................................................................M-14
7.1 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode.................................................................................................................................M-14
7.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-14
7.2 Timing chart of the folding mode.............................................................................................................................................M-14
7.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-15
7.3 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode........................................................................................................................................M-15
7.3.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-16
xlvii
8. PK-522......................................................................................................................................................................M-17
8.1 Timing chart of the punch mode.............................................................................................................................................M-17
8.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-17
9. PI-502 ......................................................................................................................................................................M-18
9.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode ................................................................................................................M-18
9.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-18
10. LS-506....................................................................................................................................................................M-19
10.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ........................................................................................................................................M-19
10.1.1 Operation condition.....................................................................................................................................................M-19
10.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-19
10.2 Timing chart of the shift mode ..............................................................................................................................................M-19
10.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-20
10.3 Timing chart of the sub tray mode .......................................................................................................................................M-20
10.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-21
10.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode .......................................................................................................................................M-21
10.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-22
11. FD-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-23
11.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode .................................................................................................................................M-23
11.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-23
11.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode ...............................................................................................................................M-23
11.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-24
11.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode .............................................................................................................................M-24
11.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-25
11.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode ...................................................................................................................................M-25
11.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-26
11.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode ......................................................................................................................................M-26
11.5.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-27
11.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode ...........................................................................................................................................M-27
11.6.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-28
11.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode ..............................................................................................................M-28
11.7.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-29
11.8 Timing chart of the punch mode ..........................................................................................................................................M-29
11.8.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-30
12. SD-506 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-31
12.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ........................................................................................................................................M-31
12.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-31
12.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode .......................................................................................................................................M-31
12.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-32
12.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode .........................................................................................................................M-32
12.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-33
12.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode ............................................................................................................M-34
12.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-35
13. SD-513....................................................................................................................................................................M-37
13.1 Timing chart of the straight mode.........................................................................................................................................M-37
13.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-37
13.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode........................................................................................................................................M-37
13.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-37
13.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode..........................................................................................................................M-37
13.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-38
xlviii
13.4 Timing chart of the multi half-folding mode...........................................................................................................................M-38
13.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-39
13.5 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode...............................................................................................................................M-40
13.5.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-41
13.6 Time chart of the square-fold mode......................................................................................................................................M-42
13.6.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-43
13.7 Time chart of the crease and slit mode.................................................................................................................................M-43
13.7.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-44
14. PB-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-45
14.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode .......................................................................................................................M-45
14.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-45
14.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply) .....................................................................................M-45
14.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-46
14.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply) .........................................................................M-46
14.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-47
14.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode ........................................................................................................................M-47
14.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-48
N WIRING DIAGRAM........................................................................................................................N-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085.....................................................................................................................................N-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 (1/5)...........................................................................................................................................N-1
1.2 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 (2/5)...........................................................................................................................................N-2
1.3 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 (3/5)...........................................................................................................................................N-3
1.4 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 (4/5)...........................................................................................................................................N-4
1.5 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 (5/5)...........................................................................................................................................N-5
2. DF-626........................................................................................................................................................................N-6
3. PF-707/708.................................................................................................................................................................N-7
3.1 PF-707/708 (1/2).......................................................................................................................................................................N-7
3.2 PF-707/708 (2/2).......................................................................................................................................................................N-8
4. RU-516........................................................................................................................................................................N-9
5. RU-511/HM-101........................................................................................................................................................N-10
6. RU-510......................................................................................................................................................................N-11
7. FS-532......................................................................................................................................................................N-12
8. SD-510......................................................................................................................................................................N-13
9. PK-522......................................................................................................................................................................N-14
10. PI-502......................................................................................................................................................................N-15
11. LS-506.....................................................................................................................................................................N-16
12. FD-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-17
13. SD-506....................................................................................................................................................................N-18
14. SD-513....................................................................................................................................................................N-19
14.1 SD-513 (1/2)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-19
14.2 SD-513 (2/2)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-20
15. CR-101....................................................................................................................................................................N-21
16. TU-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-22
17. FD-504....................................................................................................................................................................N-23
18. PB-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-24
19. MK-737....................................................................................................................................................................N-25
20. GP-501....................................................................................................................................................................N-26
21. GP-502....................................................................................................................................................................N-27
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085...........................................................O-1
1. INTERFACE SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.1 Main body right side........................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.2 Main body left side..........................................................................................................................................................O-2
1.1.3 Main body rear side........................................................................................................................................................O-2
xlix
1.1.4 Operation panel section..................................................................................................................................................O-3
2. WRITING SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................O-4
2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-4
2.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.1 Exposure path.................................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.2 Writing control.................................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.3 Writing area.....................................................................................................................................................................O-6
2.2.4 Color registration control.................................................................................................................................................O-6
2.2.5 Front and back sides skew correction in the main scan direction...................................................................................O-9
2.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction..............................................................................................O-9
2.2.7 Image stabilization control............................................................................................................................................O-10
3. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION ...........................................................................................................................O-11
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-11
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-12
3.2.1 Photo conductor drive...................................................................................................................................................O-12
3.2.2 Lubricant apply brush, toner collection screw drive......................................................................................................O-13
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-13
3.3.1 Auxiliary discharging control.........................................................................................................................................O-13
3.3.2 Drum phase control.......................................................................................................................................................O-13
3.3.3 Drum cleaning, lubricant applying mechanism.............................................................................................................O-14
3.3.4 Erase lamp (EL) control................................................................................................................................................O-15
4. CHARGING SECTION..............................................................................................................................................O-16
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-16
4.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-16
4.2.1 Charging control............................................................................................................................................................O-16
4.2.2 Charging corona cleaning.............................................................................................................................................O-16
5. DEVELOPING SECTION..........................................................................................................................................O-18
5.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-18
5.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-19
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-19
5.3.1 Developer conveyance.................................................................................................................................................O-19
5.3.2 Developing bias control.................................................................................................................................................O-20
5.3.3 Toner spillage prevention control..................................................................................................................................O-20
5.3.4 Developing cooling control............................................................................................................................................O-21
5.3.5 Toner density detection control.....................................................................................................................................O-22
6. TONER SUPPLY SECTION ....................................................................................................................................O-23
6.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-23
6.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-24
6.2.1 Toner bottle drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-24
6.2.2 Toner conveyance drive................................................................................................................................................O-25
6.2.3 Toner hopper drive........................................................................................................................................................O-26
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-26
6.3.1 Toner supply control to the toner hopper......................................................................................................................O-26
6.3.2 Toner supply control to the developing section.............................................................................................................O-26
6.3.3 Remaining toner amount detection control...................................................................................................................O-27
6.3.4 Overflow toner prevention shutter mechanism.............................................................................................................O-27
7. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION .................................................................................................................O-28
7.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-28
7.1.1 Intermediate transfer belt..............................................................................................................................................O-28
7.1.2 Transfer belt cleaning unit.............................................................................................................................................O-29
7.1.3 Sensor assy..................................................................................................................................................................O-29
7.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-30
7.2.1 Intermediate transfer belt conveyance drive.................................................................................................................O-30
7.2.2 Intermediate transfer belt pressure drive......................................................................................................................O-31
7.2.3 Intermediate transfer belt steering drive.......................................................................................................................O-32
7.2.4 Transfer belt cleaning drive...........................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.1 1st transfer roller pressure, release mechanism...........................................................................................................O-33
7.3.2 1st transfer control........................................................................................................................................................O-34
7.3.3 Intermediate transfer belt steering mechanism.............................................................................................................O-34
7.3.4 Intermediate transfer belt steering control....................................................................................................................O-35
7.3.5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism.....................................................................................................................O-36
7.3.6 Intermediate transfer belt blade setting control.............................................................................................................O-37
7.3.7 Intermediate transfer belt drive matching control..........................................................................................................O-37
l
8. 2ND TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION ............................................................................................................O-38
8.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-38
8.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-39
8.2.1 2nd transfer belt drive, 2nd transfer cleaning drive.......................................................................................................O-39
8.2.2 2nd transfer unit pressure release drive.......................................................................................................................O-40
8.2.3 2nd transfer belt steering drive.....................................................................................................................................O-40
8.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-41
8.3.1 2nd transfer belt conveyance control............................................................................................................................O-41
8.3.2 2nd transfer unit pressure release control....................................................................................................................O-41
8.3.3 2nd transfer belt steering control..................................................................................................................................O-43
8.3.4 2nd transfer belt cleaning, lubricant application control................................................................................................O-45
8.3.5 2nd transfer control.......................................................................................................................................................O-46
8.3.6 Paper separation control...............................................................................................................................................O-46
8.3.7 Guide plate bias application control..............................................................................................................................O-47
8.3.8 Blade setting mode (2nd transfer).................................................................................................................................O-47
9. TONER COLLECTION SECTION............................................................................................................................O-48
9.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-48
9.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-49
9.2.1 Toner collecting path.....................................................................................................................................................O-49
9.2.2 Waste toner box............................................................................................................................................................O-50
9.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-50
9.3.1 Toner collecting path.....................................................................................................................................................O-50
9.3.2 Conveyance control inside waste toner box.................................................................................................................O-51
9.3.3 Waste toner box installation detection..........................................................................................................................O-52
9.3.4 Waste toner box full detection.......................................................................................................................................O-52
10. INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANCE SECTION..........................................................................................................O-53
10.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-53
10.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-54
10.2.1 Intermediate conveyance roller drive..........................................................................................................................O-54
10.2.2 Intermediate conveyance roller pressure release drive..............................................................................................O-54
10.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-55
10.3.1 Intermediate conveyance control................................................................................................................................O-55
10.3.2 Intermediate conveyance roller pressure release control...........................................................................................O-55
10.3.3 Intermediate conveyance roller/2 cleaning mechanism..............................................................................................O-56
11. REGISTRATION SECTION ...................................................................................................................................O-58
11.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-58
11.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-58
11.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-58
11.3.1 Loop control................................................................................................................................................................O-58
11.3.2 Paper skew correction control.....................................................................................................................................O-59
11.3.3 Registration control.....................................................................................................................................................O-61
12. FUSING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-62
12.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-62
12.1.1 Fusing unit..................................................................................................................................................................O-62
12.1.2 Parts that are related to the fusing..............................................................................................................................O-63
12.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-64
12.2.1 Lower pressure roller, fusing belt, fusing paper exit roller drive..................................................................................O-64
12.2.2 Fusing belt assist drive, fusing belt brake drive..........................................................................................................O-64
12.2.3 Lower pressure roller pressure release drive..............................................................................................................O-65
12.2.4 Fusing belt steering drive............................................................................................................................................O-66
12.2.5 Fusing unit swing drive...............................................................................................................................................O-67
12.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-67
12.3.1 Fusing roller drive control............................................................................................................................................O-67
12.3.2 Pressure release control.............................................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.3 Fusing temperature control.........................................................................................................................................O-71
12.3.4 Abnormality protection control....................................................................................................................................O-73
12.3.5 Lower pressure roller cooling control..........................................................................................................................O-74
12.3.6 Fusing paper separation control.................................................................................................................................O-75
12.3.7 Fusing belt steering mechanism.................................................................................................................................O-76
12.3.8 Fusing swing control...................................................................................................................................................O-78
12.3.9 Fusing recovery control...............................................................................................................................................O-80
12.3.10 Fusing refresh mode.................................................................................................................................................O-80
13. DUPLEX/REVERSE SECTION..............................................................................................................................O-81
13.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-81
13.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-82
13.2.1 Reverse conveyance drive, paper exit gate drive.......................................................................................................O-82
13.2.2 De-curler roller pressure release drive........................................................................................................................O-83
13.2.3 ADU conveyance drive...............................................................................................................................................O-83
13.2.4 ADU gate drive............................................................................................................................................................O-84
li
13.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-84
13.3.1 Conveyance path switching control............................................................................................................................O-84
13.3.2 Paper reverse control..................................................................................................................................................O-85
13.3.3 Duplex section conveyance control............................................................................................................................O-87
13.3.4 De-curler roller pressure control.................................................................................................................................O-88
13.3.5 Back side centering correction control........................................................................................................................O-89
14. PAPER EXIT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................O-90
14.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-90
14.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-90
14.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-91
14.3.1 Conveyance drive.......................................................................................................................................................O-91
14.3.2 Paper exit cooling mechanism....................................................................................................................................O-92
15. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL......................................................................................................................O-93
15.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................O-93
15.2 Long image stabilization control ...........................................................................................................................................O-93
15.2.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................O-93
15.2.2 Automatic long correction control................................................................................................................................O-93
15.2.3 Manual long correction control....................................................................................................................................O-94
15.2.4 Operation flow of the long correction control..............................................................................................................O-95
15.2.5 Long correction control and Color Density Control (periodical adjustment)................................................................O-97
15.3 Image stabilization control.....................................................................................................................................................O-97
15.3.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................O-97
15.3.2 Dot diameter correction between images...................................................................................................................O-98
15.3.3 Maximum density monitoring control between images...............................................................................................O-98
15.4 Middle image stabilization control.........................................................................................................................................O-98
15.4.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................O-98
15.4.2 Automatic middle correction control............................................................................................................................O-98
15.4.3 Middle correction for the measurement......................................................................................................................O-99
15.4.4 Operation flow of the middle correction control...........................................................................................................O-99
15.5 Other image stabilization controls.........................................................................................................................................O-99
15.5.1 Color registration control.............................................................................................................................................O-99
16. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION .......................................................................................................................O-101
16.1 Image processing in the scanner section ...........................................................................................................................O-101
16.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section..........................................................................................................O-101
16.1.2 Photoelectric conversion...........................................................................................................................................O-101
16.1.3 A/D conversion..........................................................................................................................................................O-101
16.1.4 Shading correction....................................................................................................................................................O-101
16.1.5 RGB gap correction..................................................................................................................................................O-101
16.1.6 Chroma aberration correction...................................................................................................................................O-102
16.1.7 Color space conversion, color conversion, character edge regeneration, color balance adjustment.......................O-102
16.1.8 Area discrimination...................................................................................................................................................O-102
16.1.9 Image distinction.......................................................................................................................................................O-102
16.1.10 AE control...............................................................................................................................................................O-102
16.1.11 Reduction processing in the main and sub scan direction......................................................................................O-102
16.2 Image processing in the write section ................................................................................................................................O-102
16.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section...............................................................................................................O-102
16.2.2 Memory board/1 (MEMB/1), Memory board/2 (MEMB/2), Memory board/3 (MEMB/3), Memory board/4 (MEMB/4),
Memory board/5 (MEMB/5), Memory board/6 (MEMB/6), HDD............................................................................................O-103
16.2.3 Color conversion, ACS process................................................................................................................................O-103
16.2.4 Image compressing (Scanner)..................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner)......................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.6 Magnification processing in the main scan direction.................................................................................................O-104
16.2.7 Magnification processing in the sub scan direction...................................................................................................O-104
16.2.8 Cell average (Scanner).............................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.9 Image compression (IC-602C)..................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.10 Image expansion (IC-602C, IC-308, IC-310)..........................................................................................................O-104
16.2.11 Skeletonization, Outline letter emphasis.................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.12 Outline emphasis....................................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.13 Smoothing...............................................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.14 Toner amount save.................................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.15 Color sensor correction...........................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.16 IC-602 calibration correction (Standard).................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.17 Density balance......................................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.18 Gradation correction gamma..................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.19 G7 calibration correction.........................................................................................................................................O-104
16.2.20 Screen processing, Error diffusion operation..........................................................................................................O-105
16.2.21 Delay control between drums.................................................................................................................................O-105
16.2.22 PWM gamma..........................................................................................................................................................O-105
16.2.23 PWM conversion.....................................................................................................................................................O-105
16.2.24 Write unit/Y, /M, /C, /K............................................................................................................................................O-105
lii
17. POWER SOURCE SECTION ..............................................................................................................................O-106
17.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................O-106
17.1.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-106
17.1.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-106
17.2 Operating parts with the main power switch (SW1) ON .....................................................................................................O-106
17.2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-106
17.2.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-106
17.3 Operating parts with the sub power switch (SW2) ON .......................................................................................................O-107
17.3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-107
17.3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-107
17.4 Power cord .........................................................................................................................................................................O-108
17.4.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-108
17.5 Operating parts with the internal heater switch (SW3) ON ................................................................................................O-108
17.5.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-108
17.5.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-108
18. FAN CONTROL....................................................................................................................................................O-109
18.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-109
18.1.1 Front side..................................................................................................................................................................O-109
18.1.2 Right side..................................................................................................................................................................O-110
18.1.3 Left-side view............................................................................................................................................................O-111
18.2 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................O-111
18.2.1 DC power supply 2 cooling fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) control........................................................................................O-111
18.2.2 Motor cooling fans/1 (FM3) and /2 (FM4) control......................................................................................................O-111
18.2.3 Inside machine cooling fan (FM5) control.................................................................................................................O-112
18.2.4 Developing charge fans/Y (FM7), /M (FM8), /C (FM9), and /K (FM10) control.........................................................O-112
18.2.5 Deodorization fans/1 (FM11) and /2 (FM12) control.................................................................................................O-112
18.2.6 Writing ventilation fans/1 (FM13), /2 (FM14), /3 (FM15) and /4 (FM16) control........................................................O-112
18.2.7 Toner suction fan (FM17) control..............................................................................................................................O-112
18.2.8 Dew condensation prevention fan/Rr (FM18), /Fr (FM20) control............................................................................O-112
18.2.9 Intermediate transfer cleaning cooling fan (FM19) control........................................................................................O-112
18.2.10 Intermediate transfer cleaning exhaust fan (FM21) control....................................................................................O-113
18.2.11 Fusing thermal insulation fans/Fr (FM22) and /Rr (FM23) control..........................................................................O-113
18.2.12 Fusing exhaust fan/1 (FM24), /2 (FM25), /3 (FM26)...............................................................................................O-113
18.2.13 Paper cooling fan/1 (FM27), /2 (FM28), /3 (FM29) control.....................................................................................O-113
18.2.14 Toner collection cooling fan (FM30) control............................................................................................................O-113
18.2.15 ADU exhaust fans/1 (FM31) and /2 (FM32) control................................................................................................O-113
18.2.16 CPU cooling fan (FM33) control..............................................................................................................................O-113
18.2.17 ADU cooling fan/1 (FM36) control...........................................................................................................................O-114
18.2.20 Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43), /Md (FM44), /Rr (FM45) control.......................................................O-114
18.2.21 Image processing cooling fan (FM46) control.........................................................................................................O-115
18.2.22 DC power supply 1 cooling fan/1 (FM47) control....................................................................................................O-115
18.2.23 DC power supply 1 cooling fan/2 (FM48) control....................................................................................................O-115
18.2.24 Fusing paper separation fan/Fr (FM49), /Md (FM50), /Rr (FM51) control..............................................................O-115
18.2.25 HV cooling fan (FM57) control................................................................................................................................O-115
18.2.26 ADU underside exhaust fan/Fr (FM58), /Md (FM59), /Rr (FM60) control...............................................................O-115
18.2.27 Front side inside machine cooling fan/Rt (FM65), /Lt (FM66) control.....................................................................O-115
18.2.28 HDD cooling fan (FM68) control (option)................................................................................................................O-116
18.2.29 Fusing motor cooling fan (FM69) control................................................................................................................O-116
18.2.30 Fusing upper drive cooling fan (FM70) control.......................................................................................................O-116
19. COUNTER CONTROL..........................................................................................................................................O-117
19.1 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-117
20. IC-602C/UK-105...................................................................................................................................................O-118
20.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-118
20.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-118
20.2.1 IC-602C (Option for C1100, C1085).........................................................................................................................O-118
20.2.2 UK-105 (Option for C1100, C1085)..........................................................................................................................O-118
20.2.3 HDD section components.........................................................................................................................................O-119
21. ACS CONTROL....................................................................................................................................................O-120
21.1 Switching from color mode to black and white mode..........................................................................................................O-120
21.1.1 OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................O-120
21.1.2 Sequence of switching from color mode to black and white mode...........................................................................O-120
21.1.3 Sequence of switching from black and white mode to color mode...........................................................................O-120
21.1.4 Timing of switching from color mode to black and white mode.................................................................................O-120
21.2 Count at ACS......................................................................................................................................................................O-120
21.2.1 Black and white mode (1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C released).............................O-120
21.2.2 Color mode (1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, 1st transfer roller/K pressed)..............O-120
22. AUTHENTICATION UNIT.....................................................................................................................................O-121
liii
22.1 AU-201/AU-201S................................................................................................................................................................O-121
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-626..........................................................................................PA-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2.1 Normal original mode....................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2.2 Mixed original mode......................................................................................................................................................PA-2
1.2.3 Z-Folded original mode.................................................................................................................................................PA-4
2. PAPER FEED SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.2.1 Tray up and down drive................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.2.2 Paper feed drive............................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PA-6
2.3.1 Original feed tray ascent and descent mechanism.......................................................................................................PA-6
2.3.2 Original feed mechanism..............................................................................................................................................PA-6
2.3.3 Original set detection....................................................................................................................................................PA-7
2.3.4 Original size detection mechanism...............................................................................................................................PA-7
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.2.1 Registration roller drive.................................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.2.2 Reading roller drive.....................................................................................................................................................PA-10
3.2.3 Reading roller pressure release lever.........................................................................................................................PA-10
3.2.4 Glass cleaning drive....................................................................................................................................................PA-11
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PA-11
3.3.1 Paper feed mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PA-11
3.3.2 Reading section roller pressure release control..........................................................................................................PA-11
3.3.3 DF original glass contamination prevention control....................................................................................................PA-12
4. REVERSE AND EXIT SECTION............................................................................................................................PA-14
4.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.2.1 Reverse and exit drive................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.2.2 Reverse roller pressure release drive.........................................................................................................................PA-15
4.2.3 Conveyance path switching drive...............................................................................................................................PA-15
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PA-15
4.3.1 Original conveyance mechanism................................................................................................................................PA-15
4.3.2 Reverse and exit section switching mechanism.........................................................................................................PA-16
4.3.3 Reverse roller pressure release control......................................................................................................................PA-17
5. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................PA-18
5.1 Open and close detection section.........................................................................................................................................PA-18
5.1.1 DF angle open and close detection mechanism.........................................................................................................PA-18
5.1.2 DF open and close detection mechanism...................................................................................................................PA-18
5.2 Machine internal cooling mechanism....................................................................................................................................PA-18
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-707/708/HT-506.......................................................................PB-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PB-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PB-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PB-1
2. PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION ...............................................................................................................................PB-3
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PB-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
2.2.2 Side guide shutter drive................................................................................................................................................PB-4
2.2.3 Paper leading edge shutter drive .................................................................................................................................PB-5
2.2.4 Paper feed drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PB-5
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PB-6
2.3.1 Up down control............................................................................................................................................................PB-6
2.3.2 Size detection control ...................................................................................................................................................PB-6
2.3.3 Air control .....................................................................................................................................................................PB-7
2.3.4 Paper empty detection control ...................................................................................................................................PB-12
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control ............................................................................................................................PB-12
2.3.6 Tray lock control .........................................................................................................................................................PB-13
3. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION ......................................................................................................................PB-14
3.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PB-14
3.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PB-14
3.2.1 Paper feed drive..........................................................................................................................................................PB-14
3.2.2 Paper feed suction drive.............................................................................................................................................PB-15
liv
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-15
3.3.1 Suction control ...........................................................................................................................................................PB-15
3.3.2 Paper feed belt control................................................................................................................................................PB-15
4. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................PB-17
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PB-17
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-17
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-18
4.3.1 Vertical conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PB-18
5. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PB-19
5.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PB-19
5.2.1 Horizontal conveyance drive.......................................................................................................................................PB-19
5.2.2 Horizontal conveyance roller pressure release drive..................................................................................................PB-20
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-20
5.3.1 Pre-registration control ...............................................................................................................................................PB-20
5.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control....................................................................................................................................PB-20
5.3.3 Horizontal conveyance roller pressure release drive..................................................................................................PB-20
5.3.4 Paper centering correction control..............................................................................................................................PB-21
5.3.5 Multi-feed detection control ........................................................................................................................................PB-21
6. SCANNER SECTION.............................................................................................................................................PB-22
6.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PB-22
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PB-23
6.3.1 Control when the sub power is activated....................................................................................................................PB-23
6.3.2 Control when the start button is turned ON.................................................................................................................PB-23
6.3.3 Original reading area..................................................................................................................................................PB-25
6.3.4 Original size detection control.....................................................................................................................................PB-25
6.3.5 ACS processing..........................................................................................................................................................PB-26
6.3.6 Line detection control..................................................................................................................................................PB-26
6.3.7 The dust removal control............................................................................................................................................PB-26
6.3.8 Image processing........................................................................................................................................................PB-26
7. OTHERS ................................................................................................................................................................PB-27
7.1 Internal heater control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB-27
7.2 Main body assist mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PB-27
7.2.1 Machine internal cooling mechanism .........................................................................................................................PB-27
8. HT-506 (OPTION)...................................................................................................................................................PB-28
8.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PB-28
8.2 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-28
8.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control...................................................................................................................................PB-28
PC THEORY OF OPERATION FA-502..........................................................................................PC-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
2. TANDEM CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................PC-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PC-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.3.1 Tandem conveyance control ........................................................................................................................................PC-3
PD THEORY OF OPERATION RU-516..........................................................................................PD-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PD-2
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.3.1 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PD-3
3. POWER SOURCE SECTION...................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2.2 Operation condition.......................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2.3 Operation timing...........................................................................................................................................................PD-5
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-511/HM-101............................................................................PE-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
lv
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance, de-curler conveyance, humidification conveyance mode...........................................................PE-2
1.2.2 Reverse exit conveyance mode....................................................................................................................................PE-3
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PE-4
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PE-4
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-5
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PE-5
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PE-5
2.3.1 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PE-5
3. DE-CURLER SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PE-6
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PE-6
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-7
3.2.1 De-curler section conveyance drive..............................................................................................................................PE-7
3.2.2 De-curler gate/1 and /2 drive........................................................................................................................................PE-8
3.2.3 De-curler/3 and /4 pressure drive.................................................................................................................................PE-8
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PE-9
3.3.1 Outline of de-curler ......................................................................................................................................................PE-9
3.3.2 De-curler section conveyance control.........................................................................................................................PE-14
3.3.3 De-curlers/1 and /2 control..........................................................................................................................................PE-15
3.3.4 De-curler/3 and /4 control...........................................................................................................................................PE-15
4. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION ............................................................................................PE-16
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-17
4.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PE-17
4.2.2 Shutter drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PE-17
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PE-18
4.3.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................PE-18
4.3.2 Output paper density detection section ......................................................................................................................PE-20
5. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PE-21
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-22
5.2.1 Reverse, exit conveyance drive..................................................................................................................................PE-22
5.2.2 Reverse, exit gate drive..............................................................................................................................................PE-23
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PE-23
5.3.1 Reverse, exit conveyance control...............................................................................................................................PE-23
5.3.2 Reverse, exit gate control...........................................................................................................................................PE-27
6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION.................................................................................................................................PE-28
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-29
6.2.1 Humidification section entrance conveyance drive ....................................................................................................PE-29
6.2.2 Humidification section conveyance drive ...................................................................................................................PE-29
6.2.3 Humidification roller pressure drive (HM-101)............................................................................................................PE-30
6.2.4 Water feed pump drive (HM-101)...............................................................................................................................PE-30
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PE-30
6.3.1 Outline of humidification section.................................................................................................................................PE-30
6.3.2 Humidification section conveyance control.................................................................................................................PE-31
6.3.3 Humidification roller, water feed roller pressure control (HM-101 only)......................................................................PE-32
6.3.4 Water feed control ......................................................................................................................................................PE-35
7. OTHER CONTROLS .............................................................................................................................................PE-37
7.1 Fan control ...........................................................................................................................................................................PE-37
7.1.1 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................................PE-37
7.1.2 Control........................................................................................................................................................................PE-37
7.2 Door detection control ..........................................................................................................................................................PE-38
PF THEORY OF OPERATION RU-510..........................................................................................PF-1

1. OUTLINE...................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2.1 Straight conveyance......................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2.2 Reverse exit conveyance..............................................................................................................................................PF-2
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PF-3
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PF-3
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-3
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PF-3
2.2.2 Straight gate drive.........................................................................................................................................................PF-4
2.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PF-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control...............................................................................................................................PF-4
lvi
2.3.2 Paper feed mechanism.................................................................................................................................................PF-5
2.3.3 Line speed switch control..............................................................................................................................................PF-5
2.3.4 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PF-5
3. STACKER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PF-9
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PF-9
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-9
3.2.1 Assist guide drive..........................................................................................................................................................PF-9
3.2.2 CD alignment drive......................................................................................................................................................PF-10
3.2.3 FD alignment drive......................................................................................................................................................PF-10
3.3 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-10
3.3.1 Conveyance path switching control.............................................................................................................................PF-10
3.3.2 Horizontal alignment control........................................................................................................................................PF-11
3.3.3 Vertical alignment control............................................................................................................................................PF-12
3.3.4 Reverse exit control....................................................................................................................................................PF-14
3.3.5 Stack assist fan control...............................................................................................................................................PF-17
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-532..........................................................................................PG-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PG-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PG-2
3. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION..........................................................................................................................PG-3
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-4
3.2.1 FNS entrance roller drive/conveyance gate drive.........................................................................................................PG-4
3.2.2 Bypass conveyance roller/stacker entrance roller drive...............................................................................................PG-4
3.2.3 Sub tray conveyance roller/PK exit roller/stacker conveyance roller drive...................................................................PG-5
3.2.4 Sub tray exit roller/horizontal conveyance roller drive..................................................................................................PG-5
3.2.5 Bypass gate drive.........................................................................................................................................................PG-6
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
3.3.1 Line speed switch control.............................................................................................................................................PG-6
3.3.2 Conveyance path switching control..............................................................................................................................PG-6
4. SUB TRAY SECTION...............................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.3.1 Sub tray paper exit control............................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.3.2 Sub tray paper full detection control...........................................................................................................................PG-10
5. STACKER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PG-11
5.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PG-11
5.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PG-11
5.2.1 Stacker entrance roller pressure release drive...........................................................................................................PG-11
5.2.2 Rewind paddle pressure release/rewind paddle drive................................................................................................PG-12
5.2.3 Stack assist plate drive...............................................................................................................................................PG-13
5.2.4 Alignment plate/rear stopper drive/bundle exit claw drive..........................................................................................PG-13
5.2.5 Paper pressure drive..................................................................................................................................................PG-14
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PG-14
5.3.1 Paper overlap control.................................................................................................................................................PG-14
5.3.2 Stacker entrance roller pressure release control........................................................................................................PG-16
5.3.3 Stack assist control.....................................................................................................................................................PG-16
5.3.4 Paper stopper control.................................................................................................................................................PG-17
5.3.5 Rear stopper position control......................................................................................................................................PG-18
5.3.6 Paper pressure control...............................................................................................................................................PG-18
5.3.7 Horizontal alignment control.......................................................................................................................................PG-19
5.3.8 Vertical alignment control...........................................................................................................................................PG-20
5.3.9 Small-size paper exit auxiliary control........................................................................................................................PG-21
6. STAPLER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PG-22
6.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PG-22
6.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation control..............................................................................................................................PG-22
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PG-22
6.3.1 Stapler movement control...........................................................................................................................................PG-22
6.3.2 Staple control..............................................................................................................................................................PG-23
7. MAIN TRAY SECTION...........................................................................................................................................PG-25
7.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PG-26
7.2.1 Main tray up-down drive.............................................................................................................................................PG-26
7.2.2 Paper exit roller/paper exit opening drive...................................................................................................................PG-26
7.2.3 Gripper/paper exit pressure drive...............................................................................................................................PG-27
7.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive.................................................................................................................................PG-28
lvii
7.2.5 Main tray shift drive....................................................................................................................................................PG-28
7.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PG-28
7.3.1 Paper exit opening control..........................................................................................................................................PG-28
7.3.2 Gripper control............................................................................................................................................................PG-29
7.3.3 Paper pressure control...............................................................................................................................................PG-30
7.3.4 Main tray up/down control..........................................................................................................................................PG-30
7.3.5 Paper exit alignment control.......................................................................................................................................PG-32
7.3.6 Main tray shift control.................................................................................................................................................PG-32
PH THEORY OF OPERATION SD-510..........................................................................................PH-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PH-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PH-2
2.1 Half-folding/saddle stitching....................................................................................................................................................PH-2
2.2 Tri-folding................................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
3. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION..........................................................................................................................PH-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.3.1 SD entrance conveyance..............................................................................................................................................PH-4
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION............................................................................................................................................PH-5
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PH-5
4.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PH-5
4.2.1 Paddle/Md drive............................................................................................................................................................PH-5
4.2.2 Rear stopper/rear gripper drive.....................................................................................................................................PH-6
4.2.3 Paddle/Lw drive............................................................................................................................................................PH-6
4.2.4 Alignment Plate drive....................................................................................................................................................PH-7
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PH-7
4.3.1 Paper stopper control mechanism................................................................................................................................PH-7
4.3.2 Rear stopper mechanism..............................................................................................................................................PH-8
4.3.3 Alignment mechanism..................................................................................................................................................PH-9
4.3.4 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PH-10
5. STAPLER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PH-13
5.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PH-13
5.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PH-13
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PH-13
5.3.1 Stapler movement control...........................................................................................................................................PH-13
5.3.2 Staple control..............................................................................................................................................................PH-14
6. HALF-FOLD/FOLD&STAPLE/TRI-FOLDING SECTION........................................................................................PH-16
6.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PH-17
6.2.1 Folding roller drive......................................................................................................................................................PH-17
6.2.2 1st Fold knife drive......................................................................................................................................................PH-17
6.2.3 2nd folding knife drive.................................................................................................................................................PH-17
6.2.4 2nd Fold gate drive.....................................................................................................................................................PH-17
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PH-18
6.3.1 1st folding knife control...............................................................................................................................................PH-18
6.3.2 Half-folding/saddle stitching conveyance control........................................................................................................PH-18
6.3.3 2nd folding gate control..............................................................................................................................................PH-19
6.3.4 2nd Folding knife control.............................................................................................................................................PH-20
6.3.5 Tri-folding conveyance control....................................................................................................................................PH-20
7. PAPER EXIT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PH-22
7.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PH-22
7.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PH-22
7.3.1 Paper exit control........................................................................................................................................................PH-22
7.3.2 Output tray lift up control.............................................................................................................................................PH-22
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-522.............................................................................................PI-1

1. OUTLINE....................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.1 Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.2 Paper path................................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
2. PUNCH SECTION......................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.1 Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive.............................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2.2 Punch drive....................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3.1 Punch ready position movement control........................................................................................................................PI-3
lviii
2.3.2 Punch position correction control...................................................................................................................................PI-4
2.3.3 Punch control.................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3. PUNCH-HOLE SCRAPS BOX SECTION................................................................................................................PI-12
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PI-12
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PI-12
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PI-12
3.3.1 Punch scraps dropping.................................................................................................................................................PI-12
3.3.2 Punch scraps box control.............................................................................................................................................PI-12
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502.............................................................................................PJ-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.1 Unit configuration ....................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation) ......................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation) ..........................................................................................................................PJ-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PJ-2
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
2.2.2 Tray lift drive .................................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
2.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
2.3.3 Separation mechanism .................................................................................................................................................PJ-4
2.3.4 Registration control .......................................................................................................................................................PJ-4
2.3.5 Paper size detection control .........................................................................................................................................PJ-5
PK THEORY OF OPERATION MK-732..........................................................................................PK-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.3.1 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PK-2
PL THEORY OF OPERATION LS-506............................................................................................PL-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.1 Unit configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PL-2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PL-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism ........................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism ..............................................................................................................................PL-3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PL-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PL-4
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PL-4
3.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................PL-4
3.3.1 Path switching...............................................................................................................................................................PL-4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ....................................................................................................................................PL-6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism.............................................................................................................................................PL-6
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PL-7
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PL-7
4.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PL-8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PL-8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse).................................................................................................................PL-8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward) ......................................................................................................................PL-9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive .................................................................................................PL-9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive .........................................................................................................................................PL-10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive ...................................................................................................................................PL-10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive .........................................................................................................................PL-11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive ..........................................................................................................................PL-11
4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-11
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance.............................................................................................................................................PL-11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance .................................................................................................................................................PL-16
lix
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance ..................................................................................................................................................PL-16
PM THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503.........................................................................................PM-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PM-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PM-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-2
(1) Straight mode...................................................................................................................................................................PM-2
(2) Sub tray mode..................................................................................................................................................................PM-3
(3) Punch mode (L and S sizes)............................................................................................................................................PM-4
(4) Z-Fold mode.....................................................................................................................................................................PM-5
(5) Letter fold-out mode.........................................................................................................................................................PM-6
(6) Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode......................................................................................................................................PM-7
(7) Gate fold mode................................................................................................................................................................PM-8
(8) Half-fold mode..................................................................................................................................................................PM-9
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PM-10
2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PM-10
2.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-11
2.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PM-11
2.2.2 Gate drive ..................................................................................................................................................................PM-12
2.2.3 Alignment drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PM-12
2.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-13
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching .......................................................................................................................................PM-13
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control .................................................................................................................................PM-16
2.3.3 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PM-16
2.3.4 Gap recovery control .................................................................................................................................................PM-17
3. PUNCH SECTION .................................................................................................................................................PM-19
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-19
3.2.1 Rear registration drive ...............................................................................................................................................PM-19
3.2.2 Punch drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PM-20
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-20
(1) Punch control.................................................................................................................................................................PM-20
(2) Punch hole switching control.........................................................................................................................................PM-20
(3) Punch-hole scraps box control.......................................................................................................................................PM-20
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PM-21
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-21
4.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PM-21
4.2.2 Folding drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PM-22
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-22
4.3.1 Registration control ...................................................................................................................................................PM-22
4.3.2 Conveyance path switching .......................................................................................................................................PM-23
4.3.3 1st folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PM-23
4.3.4 2nd folding control .....................................................................................................................................................PM-24
4.3.5 3rd folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PM-26
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PM-28
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-29
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-29
5.3.1 Main tray up down control..........................................................................................................................................PM-29
6. SUB TRAY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PM-31
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-31
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-31
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control .........................................................................................................................PM-31
6.3.2 Line speed switching .................................................................................................................................................PM-32
7. PI SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................................PM-33
7.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-33
7.2.1 Tray lift drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PM-33
7.2.2 Paper feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................PM-34
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PM-34
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-34
7.3.1 Size detection control ................................................................................................................................................PM-34
7.3.2 Up down control.........................................................................................................................................................PM-35
7.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................PM-36
7.3.4 Separation mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PM-36
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PM-37
7.3.6 Paper empty detection control ...................................................................................................................................PM-37
lx
PN THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506..........................................................................................PN-1
1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-2
(1) Coupling exit/sub tray exit mode......................................................................................................................................PN-2
(2) Overlap tri-folding mode...................................................................................................................................................PN-2
(3) Center folding/saddle stitching mode...............................................................................................................................PN-3
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ..............................................................................................................PN-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PN-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PN-5
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive .........................................................................................................................................PN-5
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................PN-5
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive ..................................................................................................................PN-6
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PN-6
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control .............................................................................................................................PN-6
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control .........................................................................................................................PN-6
2.3.3 Sub tray paper exit control ...........................................................................................................................................PN-7
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control ............................................................................................................................PN-7
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PN-8
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PN-8
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PN-8
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive ............................................................................................................PN-8
3.2.2 Overlap drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PN-9
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PN-9
3.3.1 Paper overlap control ...................................................................................................................................................PN-9
3.3.2 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PN-11
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control .................................................................................................................................PN-12
4. FOLDING SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PN-14
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PN-14
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-14
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive ...............................................................................................................................................PN-14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PN-15
4.2.3 Folding blade drive ....................................................................................................................................................PN-15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive ............................................................................................................................PN-16
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive .................................................................................................PN-16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive ........................................................................................................................................................PN-17
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-17
4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PN-17
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control .........................................................................................................................PN-18
4.3.3 Folding control ...........................................................................................................................................................PN-19
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control ...........................................................................................................................PN-22
4.3.5 Guide shaft control .....................................................................................................................................................PN-23
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ...........................................................................................................................PN-25
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-25
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive ................................................................................................................................PN-25
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive .........................................................................................................................................PN-26
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive ..............................................................................................................................................PN-26
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive ...............................................................................................................................PN-27
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive .................................................................................................................................................PN-27
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive ...........................................................................................................................................PN-28
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive ......................................................................................................................................PN-28
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive .............................................................................................................................................PN-29
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive ........................................................................................................................................................PN-29
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-29
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control .............................................................................................................................PN-29
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control ............................................................................................................................PN-30
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control ......................................................................................................................................PN-31
5.3.4 Clincher up down control ...........................................................................................................................................PN-32
5.3.5 Stapler control ............................................................................................................................................................PN-34
5.3.6 Bundle arm control .....................................................................................................................................................PN-35
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control ..........................................................................................................................................PN-38
5.3.8 Bundle clip control .....................................................................................................................................................PN-39
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION ......................................................................................................................PN-43
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-43
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive .......................................................................................................................................PN-43
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive ...................................................................................................................................PN-44
lxi
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive ............................................................................................................................................PN-44
6.2.4 Bundle press drive .....................................................................................................................................................PN-45
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive ........................................................................................................................................................PN-45
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-46
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control ..........................................................................................................................PN-46
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control ................................................................................................................................PN-48
6.3.3 Bundle press control ..................................................................................................................................................PN-49
6.3.4 Bundle registration control .........................................................................................................................................PN-51
6.3.5 Bundle exit control .....................................................................................................................................................PN-52
7. TRIMMER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PN-57
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-57
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive ...................................................................................................................................................PN-57
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive ...................................................................................................................................................PN-57
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive ..................................................................................................................................................PN-59
7.2.4 Paddle drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PN-59
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-59
7.3.1 Trimmer press control ................................................................................................................................................PN-59
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control ................................................................................................................................................PN-61
7.3.3 Trimmer board control ...............................................................................................................................................PN-63
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control ..............................................................................................................................................PN-63
PO THEORY OF OPERATION SD-513.........................................................................................PO-1

1. Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.1 Entire system..........................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.2 Rear console...........................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.3 Front console..........................................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2. Paper path................................................................................................................................................................PO-3
2.1 Straight mode, sub tray mode.................................................................................................................................................PO-3
2.2 Overlap tri-folding mode.........................................................................................................................................................PO-3
2.3 Multi half-fold mode, fold & staple and trimming mode...........................................................................................................PO-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path of the rear console...........................................................................................................................PO-4
2.3.2 Conveyance path from the rear console to the front console.......................................................................................PO-4
2.3.3 Conveyance path of the front console..........................................................................................................................PO-5
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................PO-6
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PO-6
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PO-7
3.2.1 Entrance gate drive......................................................................................................................................................PO-7
3.2.2 Reverse/exit gate drive.................................................................................................................................................PO-7
3.2.3 Entrance conveyance drive..........................................................................................................................................PO-8
3.2.4 Reverse exit drive, reverse exit roller pressure release drive.......................................................................................PO-9
3.2.5 Paper re-feed drive, paper re-feed roller pressure release drive................................................................................PO-10
3.2.6 CD alignment plate drive............................................................................................................................................PO-11
3.2.7 Front stopper drive.....................................................................................................................................................PO-12
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-12
3.3.1 Conveyance path switching control............................................................................................................................PO-12
3.3.2 Line speed switch control...........................................................................................................................................PO-14
3.3.3 Overlap conveyance control.......................................................................................................................................PO-15
3.3.4 Reverse exit roller pressure release control...............................................................................................................PO-16
3.3.5 Stack assist control.....................................................................................................................................................PO-17
3.3.6 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PO-18
3.3.7 Paper re-feed roller pressure release control.............................................................................................................PO-20
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION....................................................................................................................PO-23
4.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PO-23
4.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PO-24
4.2.1 Horizontal conveyance drive/1...................................................................................................................................PO-24
4.2.2 Sub tray gate drive.....................................................................................................................................................PO-24
4.2.3 Horizontal conveyance drive/2...................................................................................................................................PO-25
4.2.4 Horizontal conveyance pressure release drive/1........................................................................................................PO-25
4.2.5 Horizontal conveyance pressure release drive/2........................................................................................................PO-26
4.2.6 1st folding stopper drive.............................................................................................................................................PO-26
4.2.7 1st folding FD alignment drive....................................................................................................................................PO-27
4.2.8 Folding roller drive, tri-folding conveyance drive........................................................................................................PO-27
4.2.9 1st folding knife drive..................................................................................................................................................PO-28
4.2.10 2nd folding knife drive...............................................................................................................................................PO-29
4.2.11 Folding roller guide drive..........................................................................................................................................PO-29
4.2.12 Half-folding conveyance drive..................................................................................................................................PO-30
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-30
lxii
4.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control...................................................................................................................................PO-31
4.3.3 Horizontal conveyance pressure release control........................................................................................................PO-32
4.3.4 Vertical alignment control...........................................................................................................................................PO-35
4.3.5 1st Fold knife control..................................................................................................................................................PO-36
4.3.6 Folding control............................................................................................................................................................PO-38
4.3.7 2nd Folding knife control............................................................................................................................................PO-40
4.3.8 Half-folding conveyance control.................................................................................................................................PO-42
5. SUB TRAY, TRI-FOLDING TRAY SECTION.........................................................................................................PO-43
5.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PO-44
5.2.1 Sub tray, tri-folding tray paper exit drive.....................................................................................................................PO-44
5.2.2 Tri-folding paper exit gate drive..................................................................................................................................PO-44
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-44
5.3.2 Sub tray, tri-folding tray paper exit control..................................................................................................................PO-45
5.3.3 Sub tray paper, tri-folding tray paper full detection control.........................................................................................PO-46
6. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION............................................................................................................................PO-48
6.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PO-49
6.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Rr............................................................................................................................PO-49
6.2.2 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Md...........................................................................................................................PO-49
6.2.3 Saddle stitching alignment plate release drive...........................................................................................................PO-50
6.2.4 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Fr............................................................................................................................PO-50
6.2.5 Booklet holding drive..................................................................................................................................................PO-51
6.2.6 Stapler head drive......................................................................................................................................................PO-52
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-52
6.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control..............................................................................................................................PO-52
6.3.2 Stapler movement control...........................................................................................................................................PO-55
6.3.3 Booklet holding control...............................................................................................................................................PO-56
6.3.4 Stapler control............................................................................................................................................................PO-57
7. BOOKLET MOVEMENT SECTION........................................................................................................................PO-59
7.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PO-60
7.2.1 Booklet holding unit drive...........................................................................................................................................PO-60
7.2.2 Booklet holding drive..................................................................................................................................................PO-61
7.2.3 Booklet set drive.........................................................................................................................................................PO-62
7.2.4 Book movement drive.................................................................................................................................................PO-63
7.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-63
7.3.1 Booklet holding control...............................................................................................................................................PO-63
7.3.2 Booklet movement control..........................................................................................................................................PO-64
8. CLAMP SECTION..................................................................................................................................................PO-66
8.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PO-67
8.2.1 Clamp up down drive..................................................................................................................................................PO-67
8.2.2 Clamp/Lt drive............................................................................................................................................................PO-68
8.2.3 Clamp/Rt drive............................................................................................................................................................PO-68
8.2.4 Lifter plate drive..........................................................................................................................................................PO-69
8.2.5 Lifter plate up down drive...........................................................................................................................................PO-69
8.2.6 Fore edge stopper drive.............................................................................................................................................PO-70
8.2.7 Fore edge finger drive................................................................................................................................................PO-71
8.2.8 Trimmer booklet holding drive....................................................................................................................................PO-72
8.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-72
8.3.1 Clamp control.............................................................................................................................................................PO-72
8.3.2 Lifter control................................................................................................................................................................PO-76
8.3.3 Fore edge stopper control..........................................................................................................................................PO-77
8.3.4 Trimmer booklet holding control.................................................................................................................................PO-79
8.3.5 Front console lock control...........................................................................................................................................PO-80
9. TRIMMER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PO-82
9.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PO-83
9.2.1 Trimmer press drive....................................................................................................................................................PO-83
9.2.2 Trimmer brake drive...................................................................................................................................................PO-84
9.2.3 Trimmer blade drive....................................................................................................................................................PO-85
9.2.4 Trimmer board drive...................................................................................................................................................PO-86
9.2.5 Trimmer paddle drive..................................................................................................................................................PO-86
9.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-86
9.3.1 Trimmer press control.................................................................................................................................................PO-86
9.3.2 Trimmer blade control.................................................................................................................................................PO-89
9.3.3 Trimmer board control................................................................................................................................................PO-90
lxiii
9.3.4 Trimmer paddle control...............................................................................................................................................PO-91
9.3.5 Trimmer shutter control..............................................................................................................................................PO-92
9.3.6 Trimmer scraps box full detection control...................................................................................................................PO-93
10. BOOKLET TRAY SECTION.................................................................................................................................PO-95
10.1 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PO-95
10.2 Drive...................................................................................................................................................................................PO-96
10.2.1 Grip roller pressure drive..........................................................................................................................................PO-96
10.2.2 Grip roller rotation drive............................................................................................................................................PO-97
10.2.3 Booklet tray paper exit drive.....................................................................................................................................PO-98
10.2.4 Paper exit belt drive..................................................................................................................................................PO-99
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................PO-99
10.3.1 Grip roller control......................................................................................................................................................PO-99
10.3.2 Booklet tray paper exit control................................................................................................................................PO-102
10.3.3 Paper exit belt control.............................................................................................................................................PO-103
10.3.4 Paper exit shutter control........................................................................................................................................PO-104
10.3.5 Booklet tray paper full detection control.................................................................................................................PO-106
PP THEORY OF OPERATION CR-101..........................................................................................PP-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
2. CREASER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.2.1 Creaser drive................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.3.1 Paper conveyance control............................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.3.2 Paper alignment control................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.3.3 Creaser control.............................................................................................................................................................PP-3
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION TU-503..........................................................................................PQ-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.2.1 Conveyance gate drive.................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.2.2 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PQ-3
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-3
2.3.1 Gate open close control................................................................................................................................................PQ-3
2.3.2 Registration control.......................................................................................................................................................PQ-4
3. SLITTER SECTION..................................................................................................................................................PQ-6
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-6
3.2.1 Slitter position shift drive...............................................................................................................................................PQ-6
3.2.2 Slit cutter drive..............................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
3.3.1 Trimmer control............................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
4. ROTARY CUTTER SECTION..................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.2.1 Slit scraps trimmer drive...............................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.3.1 Slit scraps trimmer control............................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.3.2 Slitter shutter control...................................................................................................................................................PQ-11
5. SLIT SCRAPS BOX SECTION...............................................................................................................................PQ-13
5.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-13
5.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-13
5.2.1 Slit scraps box set detection control...........................................................................................................................PQ-13
5.2.2 Slit scraps box full detection control...........................................................................................................................PQ-13
PR THEORY OF OPERATION FD-504..........................................................................................PR-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PR-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PR-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PR-1
2. CLAMP UP DOWN SECTION..................................................................................................................................PR-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PR-2
lxiv
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PR-2
2.2.1 SQF clamp up and down drive.....................................................................................................................................PR-2
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PR-3
2.3.1 SQF clamp up and down control..................................................................................................................................PR-3
3. CLAMP SECTION....................................................................................................................................................PR-5
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PR-5
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PR-5
3.2.1 SQF clamp drive...........................................................................................................................................................PR-5
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PR-5
3.3.1 SQF clamp control........................................................................................................................................................PR-5
4. SQUARE-FOLD SECTION.....................................................................................................................................PR-11
4.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PR-11
4.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PR-11
4.2.1 Square-fold drive........................................................................................................................................................PR-11
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PR-11
4.3.1 Square-fold control.....................................................................................................................................................PR-11
PS THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503..........................................................................................PS-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PS-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PS-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PS-2
1.2.1 Sub tray exit .................................................................................................................................................................PS-2
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode ...................................................................................................................................................PS-2
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode ..............................................................................................................................................PS-4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PS-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PS-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PS-6
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive ......................................PS-6
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive ..................................PS-6
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PS-7
2.3.1 Gate control .................................................................................................................................................................PS-7
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PS-8
2.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control .................................................................................................................................PS-9
2.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control .................................................................................................................................PS-9
2.3.5 Sub tray paper exit release control ..............................................................................................................................PS-9
2.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control ............................................................................................................................PS-9
2.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control .....................................................................................................................PS-9
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION .............................................................................................................................PS-11
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PS-11
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-12
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive ..............................PS-12
3.2.2 Switchback release drive ...........................................................................................................................................PS-12
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive ...............................................................................................PS-13
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive ...............................................................................................................................PS-13
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive ...................................................................................................................................PS-14
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive ...........................................................................................................................................PS-14
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive .....................................................................................PS-14
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-15
3.3.1 SC section operation overview ..................................................................................................................................PS-15
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance ........................................................................................................................PS-17
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PS-17
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control ...........................................................................................................................PS-17
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control ................................................................................................................................PS-20
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control ........................................................................................................................................PS-21
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PS-21
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control ............................................................................................................................PS-22
3.3.9 SC stopper control .....................................................................................................................................................PS-23
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control ..........................................................................................................................................PS-23
4. CLAMP SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................PS-25
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-25
4.2.1 Clamp drive ................................................................................................................................................................PS-25
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive ...................................................................................................................................................PS-26
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive ...............................................................................................................................................PS-26
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-26
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control ............................................................................................................................................PS-26
4.3.2 Clamp control .............................................................................................................................................................PS-27
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control ................................................................................................................................................PS-28
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control ...............................................................................................................................PS-31
lxv
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION .................................................................................................................................PS-33
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-33
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive ......................................................................................................................................................PS-33
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive ...............................................................................................................................................PS-34
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-34
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview ...............................................................................................................................PS-34
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control ............................................................................................................................................PS-35
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control ......................................................................................................................................PS-36
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control .................................................................................................................PS-38
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening and closing detection control...........................................................................................PS-38
6. GLUE TANK SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PS-39
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-39
6.2.1 Drive ...........................................................................................................................................................................PS-39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive ................................................................................................................................................PS-40
6.2.3 Tank up drive .............................................................................................................................................................PS-40
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive .....................................................................................................................................PS-40
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-41
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control ...............................................................................................................................PS-41
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control..............................................................................................................................................PS-41
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control ..............................................................................................................................................PS-42
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control ............................................................................................................................................PS-43
6.3.5 Glue temperature control............................................................................................................................................PS-44
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION .....................................................................................................................PS-46
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-46
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive ...........................................................................................................................................PS-46
7.2.2 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................PS-47
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PS-47
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-48
7.3.1 Up down control..........................................................................................................................................................PS-48
7.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................PS-49
7.3.3 Separation mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PS-49
7.3.4 Paper feed mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PS-50
7.3.5 Air assist mechanism .................................................................................................................................................PS-50
7.3.6 Cover paper empty detection control .........................................................................................................................PS-50
7.3.7 Paper feed assist plate ..............................................................................................................................................PS-50
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION ........................................................................................................................PS-52
8.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-53
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive ..............................................................................................................PS-53
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive ......................................................................................................................................PS-53
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive ..................................................................................................................................PS-54
8.2.4 Book exit drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PS-54
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt drive..................................................................................................................PS-54
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm/Rr and /Lt drive...........................................................................................................PS-55
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive ..................................................................................................................................................PS-55
8.2.8 Cutter drive ................................................................................................................................................................PS-55
8.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-55
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview ...........................................................................................................PS-55
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PS-59
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control .....................................................................................................................................PS-60
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive ......................................................................................................................................PS-60
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control ............................................................................................................................PS-62
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control ...............................................................................................................................PS-63
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control ........................................................................................................................PS-65
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control ......................................................................................................................PS-67
8.3.9 Book paper exit control ..............................................................................................................................................PS-68
8.3.10 Waste paper control .................................................................................................................................................PS-68
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PS-69
9.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PS-69
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive ..............................................................................................................................................PS-69
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive .......................................................................................................................................PS-70
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive ...............................................................................................................................PS-70
9.2.4 Book movement drive ................................................................................................................................................PS-71
9.2.5 Book stopper drive .....................................................................................................................................................PS-71
9.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PS-71
lxvi
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview ......................................................................................................................PS-71
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control ..................................................................................................................PS-72
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control ....................................................................................................................................PS-74
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control ............................................................................................................................PS-74
9.3.5 Book movement control .............................................................................................................................................PS-75
9.3.6 Book stopper control ..................................................................................................................................................PS-76
9.3.7 Book full status detection control ...............................................................................................................................PS-76
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................PS-77
10.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................PS-77
10.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PS-77
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive ...................................................................................PS-77
10.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PS-78
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control ........................................................................................................................................PS-78
11. OTHERS ..............................................................................................................................................................PS-79
11.1 Fan control .........................................................................................................................................................................PS-79
11.1.1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................PS-79
11.2 Door opening and closing control........................................................................................................................................PS-79
PT THEORY OF OPERATION MK-737..........................................................................................PT-1

1. SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION................................................................................................................................PT-1
1.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PT-1
PU THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501..........................................................................................PU-1

1. PREFACE.................................................................................................................................................................PU-1
1.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................PU-1
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations......................................................................................................................................PU-1
1.2 Product positioning.................................................................................................................................................................PU-1
1.3 Long edge feed (LEF) only.....................................................................................................................................................PU-1
2. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PU-2
2.1 Unit configuration diagram......................................................................................................................................................PU-2
2.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PU-3
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PU-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PU-4
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...................................................................................................................................PU-5
4.1 Punch conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PU-5
4.2 Punch operation......................................................................................................................................................................PU-6
4.3 Chip tray control......................................................................................................................................................................PU-7
4.4 Bypass conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................PU-7
5. PUNCH MODULE.....................................................................................................................................................PU-9
5.1 Tools Required........................................................................................................................................................................PU-9
5.2 Procedure...............................................................................................................................................................................PU-9
PV THEORY OF OPERATION GP-502..........................................................................................PV-1

1. THEORY OF OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................PV-1
Q IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................Q-1
1. UNDERSTANDING THE CHARACTER OF THE PAPER..........................................................................................Q-1
1.1 The shrinkage of the paper.......................................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.2 The dimensional accuracy of the paper....................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.3 Precautions on supplying papers..............................................................................................................................................Q-1
2. BOTH SIDES ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.............................................................................................................Q-2
2.1 Preparation................................................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.1.1 Paper..............................................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.1.2 Back Side Magnification Adjustment...............................................................................................................................Q-2
2.2 Adjustment flow.........................................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.3 Adjustment procedure...............................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.3.1 Installing PFU..................................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.3.2 Placing papers................................................................................................................................................................Q-3
2.3.3 Front and back position check........................................................................................................................................Q-5
2.3.4 Skew adjustment of the registration unit.........................................................................................................................Q-6
2.3.5 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.................................................................................................................................................Q-8
2.3.6 FD-Mag. Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................................Q-9
2.3.7 CD-Mag. Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................Q-10
2.3.8 Restart Timing Adjustment............................................................................................................................................Q-11
2.3.9 Centering Auto Adjustment...........................................................................................................................................Q-13
2.3.10 Centering Sensor Gap Adj. (front side).......................................................................................................................Q-13
2.3.11 Centering Adjustment (back side)...............................................................................................................................Q-14
2.3.12 Both sides adjustment.................................................................................................................................................Q-15
lxvii
2.4 Adjustment procedure (supplement).......................................................................................................................................Q-17
2.4.1 Distortion adjustment in the main scan direction..........................................................................................................Q-17
R COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................................R-1
1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION TIMING AND ITEMS.............................................................................................R-1
2. QUALITY ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................................................R-3
2.1 Select screen.............................................................................................................................................................................R-3
2.1.1 Execution timing..............................................................................................................................................................R-3
2.1.2 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................R-3
2.2 Gamma automatic adjustment..................................................................................................................................................R-4
2.2.2 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................R-4
2.3 Density balance adjustment......................................................................................................................................................R-4
2.3.2 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................R-5
2.4 Maximum density initial adjustment.........................................................................................................................................R-29
2.4.1 Execution timing............................................................................................................................................................R-29
2.4.2 Adjustment target value (reference)..............................................................................................................................R-29
2.4.3 Preparation....................................................................................................................................................................R-30
2.4.4 Procedure for the setup.................................................................................................................................................R-31
2.4.5 Procedure for maintenance...........................................................................................................................................R-33
2.4.6 Measure the density with the spectrophotometer.........................................................................................................R-34
2.5 Maximum density auto adjustment (RU).................................................................................................................................R-49
2.5.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-49
2.6 Color Density Control Setting..................................................................................................................................................R-51
2.6.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-51
2.7 Color Density Control (Manual Adjustment)............................................................................................................................R-53
2.7.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-53
2.8 IC-602 Calibration...................................................................................................................................................................R-54
2.8.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000, or FD-5BT)........................................................................................R-55
2.9 Exact Color..............................................................................................................................................................................R-60
2.9.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000, or FD-5BT)........................................................................................R-60
2.10 G7 Calibration.......................................................................................................................................................................R-65
2.10.1 Execution timing..........................................................................................................................................................R-65
2.10.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000, or FD-5BT)......................................................................................R-65
2.11 IC-308/IC-310 Calibration......................................................................................................................................................R-70
2.11.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000).........................................................................................................R-70
2.12 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj...................................................................................................................................................R-73
2.12.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................R-74
2.13 Printer Gamma Offset Auto...................................................................................................................................................R-75
2.13.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................R-75
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE VER.1.8 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)................................S-1

1. IMAGE QUALITY........................................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1 Spot...........................................................................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.1 Cyclic white spot/black spot............................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.2 White or color spots (fish eye).........................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.3 Many white spots.............................................................................................................................................................S-4
1.2 FD Line/Band.............................................................................................................................................................................S-4
1.2.1 FD line due to photoconductor drum ..............................................................................................................................S-4
1.2.2 Paper edge mark on fusing belt......................................................................................................................................S-6
1.2.3 FD lines due to fusing separation claw............................................................................................................................S-6
1.2.4 FD line due to intermediate transfer belt claw (Separation jam at intermediate transfer unit).........................................S-7
1.2.5 FD gloss line due to the paper feed belt..........................................................................................................................S-8
1.3 CD Line/Band..........................................................................................................................................................................S-10
1.3.1 Line like ripple on image................................................................................................................................................S-10
1.3.2 Lighter density band (drum humidity memory) .............................................................................................................S-12
1.3.3 Thick paper trailing edge image abnormality.................................................................................................................S-14
1.3.4 CD line due to fusing belt..............................................................................................................................................S-15
1.3.5 CD lines caused by the trailing edge.............................................................................................................................S-16
1.3.6 Lines or banding on thick paper (shock noise)..............................................................................................................S-17
1.3.7 CD gloss line due to widthof blank space......................................................................................................................S-21
lxviii
1.4 Soilage.....................................................................................................................................................................................S-22
1.4.1 Background/Toner scattering caused by low coverage printing....................................................................................S-22
1.4.2 Toner scattering inside machine/toner spilling at high coverage print...........................................................................S-25
1.4.3 Background while printing high coverage......................................................................................................................S-28
1.4.4 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning failure.....................................................................................................................S-29
1.5 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................S-31
1.5.1 Rough image on thin coated paper...............................................................................................................................S-31
1.5.2 Poor fusing occurs at specific paper type......................................................................................................................S-32
1.5.3 Darker image at trailing edge/lighter at leading edge....................................................................................................S-34
1.5.4 Uneven density at black halfton on thick paper.............................................................................................................S-36
1.5.5 Fine line blurs at the leading edge................................................................................................................................S-38
1.5.6 Aslant banding (density difference)...............................................................................................................................S-39
1.5.7 Wax attachment/Paper dust attachment.......................................................................................................................S-40
1.5.8 Highlight gradation changes daily.................................................................................................................................S-41
1.5.9 Color change at continuous print...................................................................................................................................S-42
1.5.10 Gloss memory.............................................................................................................................................................S-43
1.5.11 Image density is lighter on uncoated paper.................................................................................................................S-44
1.5.12 Thin line is fainted.......................................................................................................................................................S-49
2. PAPER CONVEYANCE FAILURE............................................................................................................................S-52
2.1 Paper conveyance...................................................................................................................................................................S-52
2.1.1 Paper wave/Paper curl..................................................................................................................................................S-52
2.1.2 Fusing wrapping jam.....................................................................................................................................................S-52
2.1.3 Vertical Conveyance jam (J-1619) and corner folded (dog ear)....................................................................................S-53
2.1.4 Corner folded (Dog ear) at ADU (Duplex) ....................................................................................................................S-54
2.2 Paper feed...............................................................................................................................................................................S-57
2.2.1 Small size corner folding (dog ear)................................................................................................................................S-57
2.2.2 Wrinckle at the trailing edge..........................................................................................................................................S-58
2.2.3 Pickup jam clearance workflow.....................................................................................................................................S-58
2.2.4 Skew of small size paper...............................................................................................................................................S-73
2.3 Paper ejection..........................................................................................................................................................................S-75
2.3.1 Paper stick with each other due to static electricity.......................................................................................................S-75
3. MACHINE TROUBLES.............................................................................................................................................S-77
3.1 Control.....................................................................................................................................................................................S-77
3.1.1 Long waiting time for mixed media................................................................................................................................S-77
3.1.2 Dehumidifying indication and unable to start print.........................................................................................................S-77
3.2 Error Code...............................................................................................................................................................................S-78
3.2.1 C-3xxx (Fusing related error)........................................................................................................................................S-78
3.2.2 C-2235 / Density on front side lighter than back side....................................................................................................S-80
3.2.3 Color registration error 2 (Int. Trans. belt damage).......................................................................................................S-82
3.3 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................S-85
3.3.1 Fusing belt breakage/crease.........................................................................................................................................S-85
T CONTROLLER FAQ.......................................................................................................................T-1
1. IC-308, IC-310.............................................................................................................................................................T-1
1.1 Specification..............................................................................................................................................................................T-1
1.2 Features / Function....................................................................................................................................................................T-2
1.3 Service Support.........................................................................................................................................................................T-3
1.4 Printing.......................................................................................................................................................................................T-4
1.5 Driver.........................................................................................................................................................................................T-4
1.6 Network......................................................................................................................................................................................T-5
1.7 Security......................................................................................................................................................................................T-5
1.8 Application / Utility.....................................................................................................................................................................T-6
2. IC-602C.......................................................................................................................................................................T-7
2.1 Controller related.......................................................................................................................................................................T-7
2.2 Printer driver /Printing Related...................................................................................................................................................T-8
2.3 Application Related....................................................................................................................................................................T-9
lxix
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Revision list > bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Version 1.5
Revision list
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Version 1.5
No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date
1 - - - Deletion of information of the Windows XP 2014/10/20
D00012353 C.1.3 Paper Correction of error in writing
2 2 2014/10/20
13
D00012353 C.14.2 Functions Correction of error in writing
3 2 2014/10/20
32
D00012353 C.14.3 Type of paper Correction of error in writing
4 3 2014/10/20
33
D00012660 C.15.3 Type of paper Addition of note of custom size paper
5 7 2014/10/20
03
D00012353 C.18.2 Function Addition of compliant OS for printer driver
6 2 2014/10/20
42
D00012353 E.1.3.4 Initial setting Correction of error in writing
7 2 2014/10/20
58
D00012353 E.1.4.2 Setting method Correction of error in writing
8 2 2014/10/20
62
9 - E.1.9 Machine state log store - Addition of information of machine state log store 2014/10/20
10 - E.1.10 Real-time Remote Panel - Addition of information of real-time remote panel 2014/10/20
D00012354 F.1.16 LS-506 Correction of error in writing
11 2 2014/10/20
01
D00012353 F.1.2 bizhub PRESS C1100 Addition of maintenance items
12 2 2014/10/20
88 Addition of service tool
D00012353 F.1.3 bizhub PRESS C1085 Addition of maintenance items
13 2 2014/10/20
89 Addition of service tool
D00012353 F.1.9 RU-511/HM-101 Correction of error in writing
14 2 2014/10/20
95
D00012354 F.2.2 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Change of actual replacement cycle
15 2 2014/10/20
06 Addition of replacement parts
D00012354 F.2.10 LS-506 Correction of error in writing
16 2 2014/10/20
14
D00012354 F.5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof glass Correction of error in writing
17 2 2014/10/20
26
D00012354 F.5.4.1 Replacing the charging corona Correction of error in writing
18 2 2014/10/20
32
D00012354 F.5.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit / Correction of error in writing
19 2 2014/10/20
57 Y, /M, /C, /K
F.5.7.1 Removing and reinstalling the Addition of notes on the setting toner
D00012354 intermediate transfer unit Correction of error in writing
20 2 2014/10/20
34 Addition of maintenance procedure (New intermediate
transfer unit)
F.5.7.2 Reversing the intermediate Correction of error in writing
D00012354
21 transfer scraper, replacing the auxiliary 2 2014/10/20
35
cleaner assy
D00012354 F.5.7.3 Replacing the transfer belt Correction of error in writing
22 2 2014/10/20
36 cleaning unit Addition of maintenance procedure
F.5.7.4 Replacing the transfer belt Addition of notes on the setting toner
D00012354
23 cleaning blade, transfer belt cleaning 2 2014/10/20
37
seal/Fr, /Rr
D00012354 F.5.7.5 Replacing the toner collection Addition of notes on the setting toner
24 2 2014/10/20
38 sheet
D00012354 F.5.7.6 Replacing the transfer belt Addition of notes on the setting toner
25 2 2014/10/20
39 separation claw
D00012354 F.5.7.7 Replacing the intermediate Addition of notes on the setting toner
26 2 2014/10/20
40 transfer belt
D00012980 F.5.7.8 Replacing the nip formation roller/ Addition of maintenance procedure
27 1 2014/10/20
40 Up
F.5.7.9 Replacing the 1st transfer rollers / Correction of error in writing
D00012354
28 Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller 2 2014/10/20
41
bearing
D00012354 F.5.7.10 Replacing the 2nd transfer Correction of error in writing
29 2 2014/10/20
42 roller /Up
D00012354 F.5.7.11 Replacing the thick paper Correction of error in writing
30 2 2014/10/20
43 transfer backup guide
1

F.5.7.13 Cleaning the IDC sensor/Fr Correction of error in writing
D00012354 (IDCS/1), /Rr (IDCS/2), the color
31 2 2014/10/20
45 registration sensor/Fr (PS83), /Md
(PS84), /Rr (PS85)
D00012354 F.5.7.14 Replacing the sensor shutter Addition of note
32 2 2014/10/20
46
D00012354 F.5.11.2 Replacing the registration roller Addition of note
33 2 2014/10/20
64 and the torque limiter
D00012354 F.5.12.3 Removing and reinstalling the Correction of error in writing
34 2 2014/10/20
66 fusing unit Addition of note
F.5.12.15 Replacing the lower pressure Addition of items
D00012980
35 roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43), /Md 1 2014/10/20
41
(FM44), /Rr (FM45)
D00012231 F.9.3.1 Cleaning the shutter Correction of error in writing
36 4 2014/10/20
73
F.9.4.2 Replacing the humidification Correction of error in writing
D00012355
37 rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed 7 2014/10/20
00
roller
D00012331 F.9.4.4 Replacing the pump motor (P1) Correction of error in writing
38 6 2014/10/20
69
D00012355 G.3.1 List of disassembling and Addition of items
39 2 2014/10/20
07 assembling parts
D00012522 G.3.2.11 SSD (SSD) Addition of note
40 2 2014/10/20
10
D00012355 G.3.2.16 Process unit Correction of error in writing
41 2 2014/10/20
17
D00012980 G.3.2.20 ADU centering sensor assy Addition of items
42 1 2014/10/20
42
D00012379 G.5.2 List of disassembling and Addition of items
43 2 2014/10/20
46 assembling parts
D00012234 G.5.3.33 Horizontal conveyance unit Correction of error in writing
44 2 2014/10/20
21
D00012980 G.5.3.35 Centering sensor assy Addition of disassembling procedure
45 1 2014/10/20
43
D00012234 G.7.3.7 Pump motor (P1) Correction of error in writing
46 4 2014/10/20
42
D00012235 G.13.2.2 Cover Correction of error in writing
47 4 2014/10/20
20
D00012980 G.16.1.3 Procedure Addition of items
48 1 2014/10/20
44
D00012355 I.2.1 List of utility menus Correction of list format
49 2 2014/10/20
77
D00012355 I.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Addition of adjustment item
50 2 2014/10/20
78
D00012355 I.4.1 Service mode list Addition of items
51 2 2014/10/20
79
I.4.3.31 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. Correction of error in writing
D00012356
52 (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma 2 2014/10/20
07
Adjustment)
I.4.3.33 Print Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) Correction of error in writing
D00012356
09
Adjustment)
I.4.3.34 Print. Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) Correction of error in writing
D00012356
10
Adjustment)
D00012356 I.4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Addition of adjustment procedures
55 2 2014/10/20
37 Peculiarity Adj.) Addition of spectrophotometers
I.4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW
DIPSW10-2, DIPSW22-5, DIPSW22-7, DIPSW24-0,
D00012657 DIPSW44-4, DIPSW44-5, DIPSW44-6, DIPSW44-7,
56 2 2014/10/20
96 DIPSW45-7, DIPSW46-3, DIPSW48-4, DIPSW50-3,
DIPSW57-6, DIPSW59-0, DIPSW59-1, DIPSW59-4
D00012980 I.4.5.6 Setting of the toner amount and Addition of items
57 1 2014/10/20
81 the replacement count of the toner bottle
2

D00012357 I.4.6.1 Maintenance Counter Change of count condition
58 2 2014/10/20
85 Addition of note
D00012357 I.4.6.18 Special Parts Counter Correction of error in writing
59 2 2014/10/20
96 Addition of items
D00012658 I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition of the following IO check mode
60 2 2014/10/20
00 IO99-91
D00012986 I.4.13.23 Image Line Confirmation Mode Addition of items
61 1 2014/10/20
21
D00012365 I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting Change of log file saving format
62 2 2014/10/20
65
D00012365 I.4.17.1 HDD Replace Initial Setting Correction of error in writing
63 2 2014/10/20
68
D00012365 I.4.17.2 Format HDD All Data Change of adjustment item name
64 2 2014/10/20
69
D00012980 I.4.17.3 Format Controller HDD Data Addition of items
65 1 2014/10/20
46
66 - I.4.19 Startup Setting - Addition of items 2014/10/20
D00012658 I.5.3.2 IC software DIPSW list Addition of the following IC software DIPSW
67 2 2014/10/20
01 DIPSW 7-5
D00012365 I.5.4 CSV File Import/Export Correction of error in writing
68 2 2014/10/20
76
D00012257 I.5.5.4 Method to restore Correction of error in writing
69 2 2014/10/20
90
D00012365 I.5.7 Controller Capture Setting Addition of information of JDF
70 2 2014/10/20
78
D00012980 I.8.1.29 PFU Paper Float Timing Addition of items
71 1 2014/10/20
50
D00012366 I.8.1.30 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Correction of error in writing
72 2 2014/10/20
04 Setting
D00012980 I.8.1.31 PFU Suction Air Level Setting Addition of items
73 1 2014/10/20
51
D00012258 I.11.4 Centering adjustment (for each Correction of error in writing
74 3 2014/10/20
55 tray)
D00012378 I.11.5 Centering Adjustment (PF) Correction of error in writing
75 2 2014/10/20
78
D00012658 K.1.1 Jam code list Correction of the following jam code
76 2 2014/10/20
02 J-3106
D00012658 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of the following malfunction code
77 2 2014/10/20
03 C-1547, C-2225, C-2244, C-2245, C-2246, C-2247
D00012376 O.6.3.2 Toner supply control to the Correction of error in writing
78 2 2014/10/20
91 developing section
D00012377 O.12.3.10 Fusing refresh mode Addition of automatic operation timing codes
79 2 2014/10/20
55 information
D00012377 O.15.1 Outline Correction of error in writing
80 2 2014/10/20
71
D00012377 O.15.2.1 Outline Correction of error in writing
81 2 2014/10/20
72
D00012377 O.15.2.2 Automatic long correction Correction of error in writing
82 2 2014/10/20
73 control
D00012377 O.15.2.4 Operation flow of the long Correction of error in writing
83 2 2014/10/20
75 correction control
O.15.2.5 Long correction control and Addition of items
D00012980
84 color density control (periodical 1 2014/10/20
52
adjustment)
D00012377 O.15.3.2 Dot diameter correction Correction of error in writing
85 2 2014/10/20
77 between images
D00012377 O.15.4.2 Automatic middle correction Correction of error in writing
86 2 2014/10/20
80 control
D00012980 O.15.4.3 Middle correction for the Addition of items
87 1 2014/10/20
53 measurement
D00012378 O.21.1 Switching from color mode to Change of switch timing
88 2 2014/10/20
59 black and white mode
D00012223 PB.2.3.3 Air control Addition of information
89 3 2014/10/20
26
D00012512 PD.3.3.1 Outline of de-curler Addition of OFF mode to the de-curler paper feed
90 2 2014/10/20
83 pattern
3

Addition of information to the individual setting mode
D00012374 PK.4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance Correction of error in writing
91 2 2014/10/20
25
D00012381 Q.2.2 Adjustment flow Addition of registration loop adjustment to the
92 2 2014/10/20
84 adjustment flow
D00012381 Q.2.3.3 Front and back position check Addition of information of guide mark
93 2 2014/10/20
87
94 - Q.2.3.4 Registration Loop Adj. 1 Addition of items 2014/10/20
D00012381 Q.2.3.13 Both sides adjustment Change of workflow
95 2 2014/10/20
96
R COLOR ADJUSTMENT Addition of information for Maximum density automatic
96 - - adjustment (RU) 2014/10/20
Correction of work flow
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE VER. Addition of information of the TROUBLESHOOTING
97 - - 2014/10/20
1.1 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE VER.1.1 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)
98 - T FAQ - Addition of information of FAQ 2014/10/20
4

1 - - - Correspondence of the SA tool 2015/01/16
2 - C.6. RU-516 - Addition of information of the RU-516 2015/01/16
3 4 2015/01/16
33
D00012353 D.1.1 System configuration Addition of information of the RU-516
4 2 2015/01/16
44
D00012353 D.1.2 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the RU-516
5 2 2015/01/16
45
D00012353 D.3. PAPER PATH Addition of information of the RU-516
6 2 2015/01/16
47
D00012353 E.1.6.2 List that can be acquired Correction of error in writing
7 2 2015/01/16
65
D00012353 F.1.5 PF-707/708 (1st tandem) Addition of maintenace parts
8 2 2015/01/16
91 Change of maintenance cycle
D00012353 F.1.6 PF-707 (2nd tandem) Addition of maintenace parts
9 2 2015/01/16
D00012353 F.1.7 PF-707 (3rd tandem) Addition of maintenace parts
10 2 2015/01/16
D00012353 F.1.8 FA-502 (connected to the 1st Change of maintenance cycle
11 2 2015/01/16
94 tandem of PF-707/708)
D00013664 F.1.9 FA-502 (connected to the 2nd Correction of error in writing
12 1 2015/01/16
63 tandem of PF-707)
D00013664 F.1.10 RU-516 Addition of information of the RU-516
13 1 2015/01/16
64
D00012353 F.1.11 RU-511/HM-101 Deletion of maintenance items
14 3 2015/01/16
95
D00012354 F.2.4 PF-707/708 Addition of maintenace parts
15 2 2015/01/16
D00013664 F.2.6 RU-516 Addition of information of the RU-516
16 1 2015/01/16
65
D00012354 F.4.1 Life value of materials/parts Addition of information of the RU-516
17 2 2015/01/16
21
F.5.12.8 Replacing the fusing inlet roller Correction of error in writing
D00012354 assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the
18 2 2015/01/16
71 fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing
heater lamp assy/5
D00012354 F.7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and Correction of error in writing
19 2 2015/01/16
89 the loop roller bearing/Lw
F.7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt Correction of error in writing
D00012354
20 clutches/1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), and /3 2 2015/01/16
90
(CL17)
F.7.4.1 Replacing the exit clutches/1 Correction of error in writing
D00012354 (CL1), /2 (CL2) and the vertical
21 2 2015/01/16
91 conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4), /
3 (CL5), and /4 (CL6)
F.7.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration Correction of error in writing
D00012354
22 clutch (CL7) and the horizontal 2 2015/01/16
92
conveyance clutches /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)
F.7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration Change of maintenance cycle
D00012354
23 roller and the pre-registration roller 2 Correction of error in writing 2015/01/16
93
bearing
F.7.5.3 Replacing the horizontal Addition of items
D00013664
24 conveyance roller/1, /2, the horizontal 1 2015/01/16
66
conveyance roller bearing/1, /2
D00012354 F.7.5.4 Replacing the loop roller /Up Correction of error in writing
25 2 2015/01/16
94
F.8.2.1 Replacing the tandem Correction of error in writing
D00012354 conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2
26 2 2015/01/16
96 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5
(CL14)
F.9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Addition of information of the RU-516
27 - - 2015/01/16
PROCEDURE RU-516
D00012980 G.5.3.35 Centering sensor assy Addition of note
28 2 2015/01/16
43
29 - G.7. RU-516 - Addition of information of the RU-516 2015/01/16
5

D00012356 I.4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Addition of note
30 3 2015/01/16
37 Peculiarity Adj.)
D00012657
31 3 DIPSW28-6, DIPSW33-2, DIPSW33-3, DIPSW35-6, 2015/01/16
96
DIPSW56-3, DIPSW58-1
D00012357 I.4.6.18 Special Parts Counter Addition of count target parts
32 3 2015/01/16
96 Correction of error in writing
D00012658 I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition of the following IO check mode
33 3 2015/01/16
00 IO69-80
D00012253 I.4.9.2 FS-532 Staple Paper Width Adj. Correction of error in writing
34 2 2015/01/16
05 (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
D00012253 I.4.9.3 FS-532 FD Alignment Plate Adj. Correction of error in writing
35 2 2015/01/16
06 (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
D00012253 I.4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind Paddle Descent Correction of error in writing
36 2 2015/01/16
08 Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
D00012980 I.8.1.31 PFU Suction Air Level Setting Correction of error in writing
37 2 2015/01/16
51
D00013664 I.8.1.32 Output Paper Separation Setting Addition of information of the RU-516
38 1 2015/01/16
46
D00012378 I.9.4 Height adjustment Correction of error in writing
39 2 2015/01/16
77
D00012658 K.1.1 Jam code list Correction of the following jam code
40 3 2015/01/16
02 J-7550
D00012658 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Addition of the following malfunction code
41 3 2015/01/16
03 C-1480
D00013664 L.1.5 RU-516 Addition of information of the RU-516
42 1 2015/01/16
47
43 - L.2.4 RU-516 - Addition of information of the RU-516 2015/01/16
D00013737 N.4. RU-516 Addition of information of the RU-516
44 1 2015/01/16
97
45 - PD THEORY OF OPERATION RU-516 - Addition of information of the RU-516 2015/01/16
46 - Q IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 2 Correction of error in writing 2015/01/16
R COLOR ADJUSTMENT Change of configuration
47 - 1 2015/01/16
Addition of detailed procedure
D00012954 T.1. IC-308, IC-310 Addition of information
48 2 2015/01/16
28
6

1 - - - Addition of C71hc as a machine name 2015/04/01
2 - - - Addition of information of the AU-201S 2015/04/01
3 - - - Correspondence of the SA tool 2015/04/01
D00012353 C.19.2 Function Addition of the printer driver
4 3 2015/04/01
42
F.5.7.2 Reversing the intermediate Correction of error in writing
D00012354
5 transfer scraper, replacing the auxiliary 4 2015/04/01
35
cleaner assy
D00012354 F.5.7.3 Replacing the transfer belt Correction of error in writing
6 3 2015/04/01
36 cleaning unit
D00012980 F.5.7.8 Replacing the nip formation roller/ Correction of error in writing
7 3 2015/04/01
40 Up
F.10.4.2 Replacing the humidification Correction of error in writing
D00012355
8 rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed 8 2015/04/01
00
roller
D00012355 G.1.2.4 Photo conductor section Correction of error in writing
9 2 2015/04/01
03
D00012355 G.1.2.6 Fusing section Correction of error in writing
10 2 2015/04/01
05
D00012355 G.3.1 List of disassembling and Correction of error in writing
11 3 2015/04/01
07 assembling parts
D00012355 G.3.2.9 Main board unit Correction of error in writing
12 2 2015/04/01
14
D00012522 G.3.2.11 SSD (SSD) Addition of note of the replacement for SSD
13 3 2015/04/01
10
D00012522 G.3.2.13 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: Correction of error in writing
14 2 2015/04/01
11 VI-507)
D00012522 G.3.2.14 Scanner image processing Correction of error in writing
15 2 2015/04/01
12 board (IPB/S) (Option: PF-708)
D00014087 G.3.2.15 Expansion board (EXPB) Correction of error in writing
16 1 2015/04/01
02 (Option: IC-602C)
D00012355 G.3.2.27 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, Correction of error in writing
17 2 2015/04/01
26 UK-105)
D00014087 G.3.2.28 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: Correction of error in writing
18 1 2015/04/01
03 IC-602C)
D00012234 G.8.3.2 Front door Correction of error in writing
19 4 2015/04/01
37
D00012355 I.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Addition of note of the replacement for SSD
20 3 2015/04/01
78
D00012356 I.4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Correction of error in writing
21 4 2015/04/01
D00012657 I.4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW
22 4 2015/04/01
96 DIPSW4-4, DIPSW56-0/1, DIPSW56-2
D00012658 I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition of the following I/O check mode
23 4 2015/04/01
00 IO35-21, IO35-22, IO35-23, IO35-24, IO35-25
D00014087 I.4.7.14 Procedure when IO35-21 or Addition of item
24 1 2015/04/01
04 IO35-25 is used
D00012365 I.4.17.2 Format HDD All Data Addition of note of the replacement for SSD
25 4 2015/04/01
69
D00012365 I.5.4 CSV File Import/Export Correction of error in writing
26 3 2015/04/01
76
D00013664 I.8.1.32 Output Paper Separation Setting Change of function and adjustment procedure
27 3 2015/04/01
46
D00012366 J.1.4 Precautions on rewriting the Addition of note of the replacement for SSD
28 2 2015/04/01
19 firmware
D00012366 J.1.5 Error list Addition of note of the replacement for SSD
29 2 2015/04/01
20
D00012658 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of the following malfunction code
30 4 2015/04/01
03 C-C121, C-D060, C-D0F0, C-D0F1
D00012270 K.6.1 IC malfunction code list Correction of the following IC malfunction code
31 3 2015/04/01
31 00-001, 00-002
D00012376 O.5.3.3 Toner spillage prevention control Correction of error in writing
32 2 2015/04/01
82
7

D00012377 O.16.2.1 Image processing flow in the Addition of information
33 2 2015/04/01
94 write section
D00014090 O.16.2.16 IC-602 Calibration correction Addition of item
34 1 2015/04/01
70 (Standard)
D00014090 O.16.2.19 G7 Calibration correction Addition of item
35 1 2015/04/01
71
D00013664 PD.3.2 Operation Correction of error in writing
36 2 2015/04/01
55 Change of the operation condition
D00012381 Q.2.3.12 Both sides adjustment Addition of information of the scan measurement
37 3 2015/04/01
96 adjustment
D00013664 R.1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION Change of the execution timing and items
38 2 2015/04/01
67 TIMING AND ITEMS
D00012217 S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE VER. Addition of information on the TROUBLESHOOTING
39 3 2015/04/01
34 1.7 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE Ver1.7
8

D00012274 A.4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE Addition of information of the SD-513 and the TU-503
1 6 2015/10/30
72 MACHINE
2 3 2015/10/30
42
D00012222 C.11.2 Functions Addition of information of the folding and stitching
3 4 2015/10/30
23 position performance
4 9 2015/10/30
99
5 6 2015/10/30
33
6 - C.18. SD-513 - Addition of information of the SD-513 2015/10/30
7 - C.19. CR-101 - Addition of information of the CR-101 2015/10/30
8 - C.20. TU-503 - Addition of information of the TU-503 2015/10/30
9 - C.21. FD-504 - Addition of information of the FD-504 2015/10/30
D00012223 C.22.4 Machine data Correction of error in writing
10 3 2015/10/30
14
11 - C.23. MK-737 - Addition of information of the MK-737 2015/10/30
D.1.1 System configuration Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
D00012353
12 4 TU-503, the FD-504, and the MK-737 2015/10/30
44
Deletion of information of the UK-206
D.1.2 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
D00012353
13 3 TU-503, the FD-504, and the MK-737 2015/10/30
45
Deletion of information of the UK-206
D00012657 E.1.2.1 Jig list Addition of information of the jig of SD-513
14 2 2015/10/30
98
D00015136 E.1.3.1 Tool list Addition of information of the tool of SD-513
15 1 2015/10/30
37
16 - E.1.9 Management Tool - Update to the latest information 2015/10/30
D00012353 F.1.2 bizhub PRESS C1100 Addition of periodical cleaning parts
17 3 2015/10/30
88
D00012353 F.1.3 bizhub PRESS C1085 Addition of periodical cleaning parts
18 3 2015/10/30
89
D00015136 F.1.21 SD-513 Addition of information of the SD-513
19 1 2015/10/30
40
D00015136 F.1.22 CR-101 Addition of information of the CR-101
20 1 2015/10/30
41
D00015136 F.1.23 TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
21 1 2015/10/30
42
D00015136 F.1.24 FD-504 Addition of information of the FD-504
22 1 2015/10/30
43
D00015136 F.2.14 SD-513 Addition of information of the SD-513
23 1 2015/10/30
48
D00015136 F.2.15 TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
24 1 2015/10/30
49
D00015136 F.2.16 FD-504 Addition of information of the FD-504
25 1 2015/10/30
50
D00012354 F.4.1 Life value of materials/parts Addition of information of the life value changing by
26 3 2015/10/30
21 DIPSW
D00012354 F.5.1.1 Replacing the dust-proof filter/Rt Addition of information of the new model of the dust-
27 2 2015/10/30
23 proof filter/Rt
F.5.7.8 Cleaning the intermediate Addition of cleaning procedure
D00015092 transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) and
28 1 2015/10/30
94 the intermediate transfer steering sensor
(PS86)
F.5.12.7 Replacing the fusing bearing/ Addition of information of the applying amount of the
D00012354
29 Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and 2 Multemp FF-RM 2015/10/30
70
the lower pressure roller
F.5.12.9 Replacing fusing bearing/1, /2, Addition of information of the applying amount of the
D00012354
30 heat insulating sleeve/1, /2, fusing belt, 2 Multemp FF-RM 2015/10/30
72
upper pressure roller, heating roller
F.18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Addition of information of the SD-513
31 - - 2015/10/30
PROCEDURE SD-513
F.19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Addition of information of the CR-101
32 - - 2015/10/30
PROCEDURE CR-101
9

F.20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Addition of information of the TU-503
33 - - 2015/10/30
PROCEDURE TU-503
F.21. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Addition of information of the FD-504
34 - - 2015/10/30
PROCEDURE FD-504
D00012355 G.3.1 List of disassembling and Addition of information of the scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /
35 4 2015/10/30
07 assembling parts C, /K
D00015092 G.3.2.17 Scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /C, /K Addition of disassembling procedure
36 1 2015/10/30
80
D00012234 G.8.3.8 Color density sensor unit Addition of adjustment procedure after replacing
37 4 2015/10/30
43
D00015137 G.17. SD-513 Addition of information of the SD-513
38 1 2015/10/30
01
D00015137 G.18. CR-101 Addition of information of the CR-101
39 1 2015/10/30
19
D00015137 G.19. TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
40 1 2015/10/30
23
D00015137 G.20. FD-504 Addition of information of the FD-504
41 1 2015/10/30
27
D00012355 I.2.1 List of utility menus Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
42 3 2015/10/30
77 TU-503, and the FD-504
D00012355 I.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Addition of information of the SD-513
43 4 2015/10/30
78
D00012355 I.4.1 Service mode list Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
44 4 2015/10/30
79 TU-503, the FD-504, and the MK-737
D00012356 I.4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Correction of error in writing
45 5 2015/10/30
D00012657 DIPSW24-4, DIPSW26-6, DIPSW28-0, DIPSW28-1,
46 5 2015/10/30
96 DIPSW28-2, DIPSW31-2, DIPSW31-3, DIPSW36-5,
DIPSW60-2, DIPSW60-3
D00015092 I.4.5.7 Remaining staple amount display Addition of information of the remaining staple amount
47 1 2015/10/30
81 setting display setting
D00015092 I.4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct Addition of information of the new model of the scatter
48 1 2015/10/30
82 assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt duct assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt
D00012357 I.4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Addition of item
49 2 2015/10/30
89 Sec. Correction of error in writing
D00012357 I.4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2) Addition of item
50 2 2015/10/30
91 Correction of error in writing
D00012357 I.4.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Addition of item
51 2 2015/10/30
92 Individual Sec. Correction of error in writing
I.4.6.18 Special Parts Counter Addition of information of the life value changing by
D00012357 DIPSW
52 4 2015/10/30
96 Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
TU-503, and the FD-504
I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition/correction of the following IO check mode
D00012658
53 5 IO67-0 to IO67-5, IO71-0 to IO71-99, IO79-65 to 2015/10/30
00
IO79-72, IO90-0, IO93-0
D00012357 I.4.7.8 FD, SD-506, SD-513, PB Addition of information of the SD-513
54 2 2015/10/30
99 adjustment data EEPROM storage
I.4.9 Finisher Adjustment Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
55 - - 2015/10/30
TU-503, the FD-504, and the MK-737
D00012253 I.4.9.6 SD-510 Fold&Staple Pitch Adj. Addition of note
56 3 2015/10/30
09 (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
D00012253 I.4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Addition of the following software DIPSW
57 2 2015/10/30
77 Remote Care DIPSW23-0
D00012257 I.4.13.20 Test pattern number 77 Density Correction of error in writing
58 5 2015/10/30
57 correction pattern manual
D00015092 I.8.1.2 Preset Addition of information of the preset
59 1 2015/10/30
83
10

D00012366 I.18.5 Horizontal adjustment Change of adjustment procedure
60 2 2015/10/30
13
D00012378 I.18.7 Stacker tray height adjustment Change of adjustment procedure
61 2 2015/10/30
80
D00012378 I.18.8 Stacker tray levelness adjustment Change of adjustment procedure
62 2 2015/10/30
81
I.21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Addition of information of the SD-513
63 - - 2015/10/30
SD-513
I.22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Addition of information of the CR-101
64 - - 2015/10/30
CR-101
I.23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Addition of information of the TU-503
65 - - 2015/10/30
TU-503
D00012366 J.1.2 Board to be rewritten and firmware Addition of information of the SD-513 and the MK-737
66 2 2015/10/30
17
D00012366 J.1.3 Firmware data flow Addition of information of the SD-513 and the MK-737
67 2 2015/10/30
18
D00012366 J.1.4 Precautions on rewriting the Addition of information of the SD-513 and the MK-737
68 3 2015/10/30
19 firmware
D00012366 J.1.5 Error list Correction of error in writing
69 3 2015/10/30
20
D00012366 J.3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW Addition of information of the MK-737
70 2 2015/10/30
22
D00012366 J.4.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities Addition of information of the MK-737
71 2 2015/10/30
26
K.1.1 Jam code list Addition/correction of the following jam code
D00012658
72 4 J-7107, J-7368 to J-7374, J-7560 to J-7633, J-7701, 2015/10/30
02
J-7702
K.2.3 Malfunction code list Addition/correction of the following malfunction code
C-1007, C-1018, C-1242 to C-1280, C-1312, C-1313,
D00012658
73 5 C-1409, C-1413, C-1443, C-1457, C-1620 to C-1633, 2015/10/30
03
C-2731 to C-2734, C-8001, C-8002, C-C114, C-C126,
C-C139, C-D0E8
D00015140 K.3.4.7 SD-513 Addition of information of the SD-513
74 1 2015/10/30
24
75 1 2015/10/30
87
D00015092 K.5.2.13 TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
76 1 2015/10/30
88
D00015092 K.5.2.14 FD-504 Addition of information of the FD-504
77 1 2015/10/30
89
78 1 2015/10/30
90
D00015092 K.5.3.12 TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
79 1 2015/10/30
91
D00015092 K.5.3.13 FD-504 Addition of information of the FD-504
80 1 2015/10/30
92
81 - L.1.16 SD-513 - Addition of information of the SD-513 2015/10/30
D00015140 L.1.17 CR-101 Addition of information of the CR-101
82 1 2015/10/30
38
D00015140 L.1.18 TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
83 1 2015/10/30
39
84 - L.1.19 FD-504 - Addition of information of the FD-504 2015/10/30
D00015093 L.1.21 MK-737 Addition of information of the MK-737
85 2 2015/10/30
58
86 - L.2.14 SD-513 - Addition of information of the SD-513 2015/10/30
87 - L.2.15 TU-503 - Addition of information of the TU-503 2015/10/30
88 - L.2.16 FD-504 - Addition of information of the FD-504 2015/10/30
89 - L.2.18 MK-737 - Addition of information of the MK-737 2015/10/30
90 - M.13. SD-513 - Addition of information of the SD-513 2015/10/30
D00012273 M.14.2 Timing chart of the perfect Correction of error in writing
91 4 2015/10/30
01 binding mode (PB cover paper supply)
M.14.3 Timing chart of the perfect Correction of error in writing
D00012273
92 binding mode (Main body cover paper 4 2015/10/30
02
supply)
93 - N.14. SD-513 - Addition of information of the SD-513 2015/10/30
11

D00015140 N.15. CR-101 Addition of information of the CR-101
94 1 2015/10/30
62
D00015140 N.16. TU-503 Addition of information of the TU-503
95 1 2015/10/30
63
D00015140 N.17. FD-504 Addition of information of the FD-504
96 1 2015/10/30
64
D00015131 N.19. MK-737 Addition of information of the MK-737
97 1 2015/10/30
37
O.15.2.5 Long correction control and Change of operation timing of the Color Density Control
D00012980
98 Color Density Control (periodical 2 (periodical adjustment) 2015/10/30
52
adjustment)
D00012378 O.20.1 Configuration Deletion of information of the UK-206
99 2 2015/10/30
48
D00012378 O.20.2 Operation Deletion of information of the UK-206
100 2 2015/10/30
50
D00012374 PE.4.3.1 Outline Correction of error in writing
101 2 2015/10/30
14
102 - PO THEORY OF OPERATION SD-513 - Addition of information of the SD-513 2015/10/30
103 - PP THEORY OF OPERATION CR-101 - Addition of information of the CR-101 2015/10/30
104 - PQ THEORY OF OPERATION TU-503 - Addition of information of the TU-503 2015/10/30
105 - PR THEORY OF OPERATION FD-504 - Addition of information of the FD-504 2015/10/30
D00012228 PS.6.3.2 Glue apply roller control Correction of error in writing
106 2 2015/10/30
58
D00012228 PS.6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control Correction of error in writing
107 4 2015/10/30
59
108 - PT THEORY OF OPERATION MK-737 - Addition of information of the MK-737 2015/10/30
D00012381 Q.2.3.12 Both sides adjustment Update the atached file
109 4 2015/10/30
96
D00013664 R.1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION Addition of information
110 3 2015/10/30
67 TIMING AND ITEMS
D00013664 R.2.3 Density balance adjustment Correction of error in writing
111 3 2015/10/30
72
D00013664 R.2.4 Maximum density initial adjustment Correction of error in writing
112 3 2015/10/30
73
D00013664 R.2.10 G7 Calibration Correction of error in writing
113 3 2015/10/30
80
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE VER. Addition of information on the TROUBLESHOOTING
114 - - 2015/10/30
1.8 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE Ver1.8
D00012954 T.1. IC-308, IC-310 Addition of information
115 4 2015/10/30
28
D00012980 T.2. IC-602C Addition of information
116 2 2015/10/30
65
12
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 NOTICE
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
• Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA, INC. (hereafter called KM) strongly
recommends that all servicing be performed only by KM-trained service technicians.
• Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KM does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
• The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly.
• Keep this service manual also for future service.
• Distributors or KM issue password for customer engineers (CE) as necessary. The
password is required for operations or machine settings that are based on this service
manual. These customer engineers (CE) must manage the password carefully. Never leak
the password to a third party.
A-2
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 ITEMS FOR DANGE...
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
CAUTION” are defined as follows.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury
WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury
CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

wound and property damage
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
: Precaution when
servicing the product.
General
Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
: Prohibition when
General Do not touch with Do not
prohibition wet hand disassemble
: Direction when
General
Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.
A-3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 WARNINGS
3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention
WARNING
• Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KM.
• Do not use any part not specified by KM.
• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

specified by KM.
• Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.

Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KM makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
high heat.
• Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from high heat.
• Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from high heat.
A-4
WARNING
• Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from high heat, electric shock, or
injury.
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit the wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is the obligation of the customer engineer (hereafter called the
CE) to attach the appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to
the supply.
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use a power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having
enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for
the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric
shock.
A-5
WARNING
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection
to wall outlet appropriate for the product’s rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire
or electric shock.
• The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in accordance
with the following:
Color of the wire Terminal of the plug
Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
Brown Black
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue White
or colored BLACK
Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

Green-and-Yellow
or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
• Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and
reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply

(1) Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
• If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles kw
and the product and another electrical

appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
• Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire. It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.
A-7
WARNING
• Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.
(2) Ground Connection
WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
• Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk of
electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection
because of a plastic part that is very
often installed midway within the water
pipe.
A-8
(3) Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When a securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KM. Using the damaged power
cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
A-9
WARNING
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.
(4) Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.
A-10
3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(1) Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
(2) When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
A-11
(3) Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
(4) Stability
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.
A-12
3.3.3 After Service

(1) Inspection before Servicing
WARNING
• Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.
CAUTION
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.
A-13
CAUTION
• Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.
(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a
risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.
A-14
CAUTION
• Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.
(3) Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
• Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
• When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
• When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
A-15
WARNING
• Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
• Check wiring for pinched and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be
sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
A-16
WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
• Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or similar substance in and
around the product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the interior
of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.
CAUTION
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.
A-17
CAUTION
• Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.
(4) Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.
(5) Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.
3.4 FUSE
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre.
A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
3.5.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
3.5.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
3.5.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A-19
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 INDICATIONS ON THE ...
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

(Fusing unit left side)
The fusing unit is

very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
A-20
(Fusing unit upper surface/

Duplex section upper surface)
DO NOT hold the fusing unit alone;
otherwise you may be injured.
Be sure to hold the fusing unit by 2
persons or use the optional loading
wagon.
DO NOT put your hand

between the main body
and fusing conveyance
unit;
otherwise you may be
injured.
DO NOT put your hand between

the main body and duplex section;
A-21
(Waste toner box upper surface)
DO NOT throw the waste

toner box into a fire. If it is
thrown into a fire, the weste
toner box may ignite and
cause a dangerous situation.
(Rear side)
A-22
(Toner hopper unit)
(Writning unit)
Do not open the cover

during energization
since the light source of
laser is inside.
A-23

(5
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on the top of printed sheets when
removing them from the primary (main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers squeezed between the main body and
the primary (main) tray going upward. Be sure to hold both
front and rear sides of the stack to remove it from the tray.
CAUTION
NEVER insert your fingers
into the space between the
main body and the primary
(main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause
unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers
squeezed by the primary
(main) tray sliding
sideways. Please be careful
when removing paper from
the tray.
A-24

(5 CAUTION
NEVER put your hand into the hollow
portion inside the finisher.
The finisher mounted with Punch Kit
PK-522 has a hollow portion, in the
back of which is located a motor.
Touching the motor, you may get
burned. Please do not put your hand
deep into the hollow portion when
removing mishandled paper.
(PB-503)
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
A-25
(SD-506)
WARNING
Do not touch the edge of the
trimmer blade.
You get injured.

5&
CAUTION : This unit has more than

one power-supply cord. To reduce the risk
of electric shock disconnect all power
suplly cords before servicing.
VORSICHT : Dieses Gerät verfügt über
mehrere Netzkabel. Um daher der
Stromschlaggefahr vorzubeugen, sind vor
Servicearbeiten alle Netzkabel abzutrennen.
ᴾ දॖᴾᾉᴾ䈖䈱䊡䊆䉾䊃䈲㪉ᧄએ਄䈱㔚Ḯ䉮䊷䊄䉕
૶↪䈚䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯ᗵ㔚䈱ෂ㒾䉕㒐ᱛ䈜䉎䈢䉄䈮䇮
䉰䊷䊎䉴೨䈮䈜䈼䈩䈱㔚Ḯ䉮䊷䊄䉕ಾ䉍㔌䈚䈩
䈒䈣䈘䈇䇯
>PET<
A-26
(SD-513)
When taking out output sheets from

the bundle exit tray, do not put your
hand into the shutter of the outlet.
If you put your hand into the shutter
while sheets are being delivered
onto the bundle exit tray, it may
cause an unexpected accident.
Before removing out output sheets,
make sure that they have all been
delivered onto the bundle exit
tray.
A-27
(SD-513)
When closing the clamp

section, do not put your hand
between the clamp section
and the main body.
Your hand is caught between
them, it may cause an
unexpected accident.
Be careful to close the clamp
section.
(SD-513)
When the clamp section is opened, the
internal unit inside the saddle stitcher
may be located forward. Do not touch the
motor section of the internal unit with
your hand.
The motor section of the internal unit
may be hot. If you touch it with your
hand, you may burn your hand.
Pay special attention to clear jammed
paper inside the main body of the saddle
stitcher.
A-28
(SD-513) WARNING
Before starting the service,
disconnect the power cord.
Otherwise, it may cause an
electric shock.
WARNING
Be sure to connect this product
to an earthed socket outlet only.
Failure to do so and an unlikely
event of leakage could result in
a fire or electrical shock.
A-29
(SD-513)
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, after turning OFF the power switch,
do not touch the DC power supply unit for a specified time.
If the DC power supply unit is faulty, it may take time
before its voltage drops sufficiently.
CAUTION
For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
A-30
(TU-503)
Be sure to hold the specified

position;
If you hold other position, it
may cause an unexpected
accident.
Do not put your hand into the

rotary cutter section;
A-31
(GP-501) WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
A-32

)2
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on
the display panel when
closing the upper part of
the auto ring binder.
Otherwise, you may be
injured. Please be
careful when closing the
upper part of the auto
ring binder.
CAUTION
When the top cover or bypass deck of
the ring binder is opened, be careful
of your head.
Otherwise, you may be injured getting
bumped on your head. Please be
especially careful when removing
mishandled paper.
A-33

)2
WARNING
This safety message means you could get an
electrical shock because disconnecting power
from this section does not cut off power from
adjacent sections of the machine.
WARNING
This safety message means that you might get
seriously hurt or killed if you open the product
and expose yourself to hazardous voltage.
NEVER remove the screws on covers. ALWAYS
refer service requirements
to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch
by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off
or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
A-34
4.2 Warning indications on the boards
WARNING
• To avoid electric shock, after turning OFF the power
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 unit for 30
minutes.
minutes.
A-35
CAUTION
do not touch the DC power supply unit for 6 minutes.
CAUTION Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!

Do not touch power supply unit for 6 min.
after shutting off the machine.
WARNING
WARNING Do not touch power supply unit for 30 min.

Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!
WARNING
minutes.
A-36
WARNING
minutes.
A-37
WARNING

WARNING

A-38
WARNING
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 and the DC
power supply /2 unit for 6 minutes.
(PF-707/708)
CAUTION

WARNING
• Do not open the cover for 50 minutes after turning OFF
the power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
A-39
(RU-511)
WARNING
Do not open the cover for

50 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
CAUTION
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 for 6 minutes.
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/2 for 6 minutes.
A-40
(SD-513)
CAUTION

CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch
by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off
or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
A-41
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 TO TAKE IN CASE OF...
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KM must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KM.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-42
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 HANDLING THIS MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B-1
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085: Copier or Main body
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7 : Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 8: Windows 8
The combination of above OS: Windows XP, Vista
Windows 7, 8
B-2
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA logo, bizhub, and bizhub PRESS are the registered trademarks of Konica Minolta, Inc..
© 2014 KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
B-3
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
Sensor PS IN Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid SD 24V Power to drive the solenoid
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Clutch CL 24V Power to drive the clutch
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Motor M 24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1 Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1 Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
D2 Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Fan FM 24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
Ground SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
B-4
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 SIGNALS
PG, P.GND Power ground

Serial DCD Data carrier detection
communication SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET Data set ready
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
B-5
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation
A4 Transverse feed A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
B-6
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085
1.1 Type
Type Console type
Copying method 4-coupled drum tandem laser electrostatic method
Original stand None*1
Photo conductor type OPC
Writing type 8-beam laser exposure method
Tray capacity PF-707/708 (1390 sheets x 2, 1850 sheets x 1, 80 g/m2)*2
*1 Provided in PF-708 (option)
*2 PF707/708 is an option.
1.2 Functions
Warm-up time 480 seconds or less
Continuous copy/printing speed Simplex 100 sides/minute or 5192 sides/hour (A4, 81/2 x 11)
(C1100)
Duplex 100 sides/minute or 5148 sides/hour (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Continuous copy/printing speed Simplex 85 sides/minute or 4413 sides/hour (A4, 81/2 x 11)
(C1085)
Duplex 85 sides/minute or 4382 sides/hour (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Resolution Scan*1 Main scan: 600 dpi
Sub scan: 600 dpi
Write Main Scan: 1200 dpi (equivalent to 3600 dpi)
Sub scan: 1200 dpi
Image memory Standard of the main body 4 GB
System memory Standard of the main body 4 GB
When the IC-602C is connected 16 GB
(4 GB x 1 (Standard of the main body) + 4 GB x 3 (IC-602C))
When the UK-105 is connected 8 GB
(4 GB x 1 (Standard of the main body) + 4 GB x 1 (UK-105))
HDD When the IC-602C is connected 2.5 TB
(0.5 TB x 5)
When the UK-105 is connected 2 TB
(0.5 TB x 4)
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet connector
Serial port (RS-232C) x 2
Service port (USB Type A) x 4
USB port (USB Type B)
*1: Provided in PF-708 (option)
1.3 Paper
(1) Paper size
Paper size that can be fed PF-707/708*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S*3, ISOB6S*3, A6S*3
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 14S, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100
mm x 139.7 mm*4)
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)*5
Paper size that can be passed Straight paper exit mode SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
through Reversing exit mode*2 ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
Duplex mode 13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 14S, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100
mm x 139.7 mm)
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)*6
*1: PF-707/708 is an option.
C-1
*2: Use RU-511 for reversing paper.

*3: 2nd, 3rd tandem of the PF is not available.
*4: The minimum size of the 2nd, 3rd tandem of the PF is "minimum 139.7 mm x 139.7 mm"
*5: Can be fed only when the tab paper guide is installed.
*6: Reversal output mode and duplex mode is not available.
(2) Paper weight

Weight that can be fed PF-707/708*1 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 (plain, fine, color specific)
81 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 (Coated)
Weight that can be passed Straight paper exit mode 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 (plain, fine, color specific)
through paper Reversing exit mode*2 81 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 (Coated)
Duplex mode
*1: PF-707/708 is an option.
*2: Use RU-511 for reversing paper.
(3) Type of paper

Type of paper PF-707/708 Straight paper exit mode
Reversing exit mode
Duplex mode
Plain ○ ○
Fine ○ ○
Color ○ ○
Coated GL, ML, GO, MO *1 *2 ○ ○
Envelope - -
Label - -
OHP sheet - -
Long paper - -
Tab Paper *3 ○*4 ○ *5
○: Can be fed, -: Cannot be fed
(Coated type) G: Gloss, M: Matte, L: Laser, O: Offset
*1 Paper less than 80 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 HT-506 (option) is required for humidity 55% or more.
*3: Set direction is specified.
*4: Can be fed only when the tab paper guide is installed.
*5: Reversal output mode and duplex mode is not available.
1.4 Recommended paper

1.4.1 Inch
Paper type Product name
Plain Hammermill Tidal MP (75 g/m2)
Color Hammermill Color Copy Photo White (105 g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover (163 g/ m2, 216 g/m2)
Coated-GO Hammermill Color Copy Glossy (120 g/m2)
Kromekote Laser High Gloss C2S 90lb Book (133 g/m2)
1.4.2 Metric
Paper type Product name
Plain Profi (80 g/m2)
Color Mondi Color Copy (90 g/m2, 100 g/m2, 120 g/m2, 160 g/m2, 200 g/m2, 220 g/m2, 250 g/m2, 280 g/m2,
300 g/m2, 350 g/m2)
Coated-GO Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk (135 g/m2, 170 g/m2, 200 g/m2, 250 g/m2)
Mondi Color Copy Coated Glossy (135 g/m2, 170 g/m2, 200 g/m2, 250 g/m2)
1.5 Materials
Parts name Useful life (Reference) Name
Toner bottle/Y 104,000 counts*1*2 TN622Y
Toner bottle/M 92,000 counts*1*2 TN622M
Toner bottle/C 95,000 counts*1*2 TN622C
Toner bottle/K 88,000 counts*1*2 TN622K
C-2
Drum unit 350,000 counts*3 DU-107

Developer/Y 850,000 counts*4 DV616Y
Developer/M 850,000 counts*4 DV616M
Developer/C 850,000 counts*4 DV616C
Developer/K 850,000 counts*4 DV616K
Waste toner box 170,000 counts*2 A1RFR700##
*1: A4 original at each color 5% coverage is the condition to operate.

*2: The sensor automatically detects the actual life.
*3: The print quantity, the running distance of the drum, and the running distance of the lubricant applying brush whichever is earlier determines
the actual life.
*4: The drive distance of the developing roller decides the actual life.
1.6 Print volume

Maintenance cycle Every 200,000 counts*1
Every 175,000 counts*2
Average number of prints*3 160,000 prints/month*1
100,000 prints/month*2
Maximum number of prints *3 Q zone*4 1,000,000 prints/month*1 40,000 prints/day*1
750,000 prints/month*2 25,000 prints/day*2
B, C zone*4 480,000 prints/month*1 24,000 prints/day*1
A zone*4 320,000 prints/month*1 16,000 prints/day*1
*1: C1100
*2: C1085
*3: The number is the sum of the black-and-white and the color.
*4: The zones mean the temp & humidity range that is indicated in the following graph.
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
1.7 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC 208 to 240 V, 24 A, 60 Hz
Metric: AC 220 to 240V, 25 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption Inch: 5,760 W or less (Maximum power value when the power system of the main body including option is
the highest)
Metric: 6,000 W or less (Maximum power value when the power system of the main body including option
is the highest)
Dimension*1 Main body 900 (W*2) x 950 (D*3) x 1,319 (H*4) mm
Main Body + PF-707 + RU-511 + 4,477 (W) × 950 (D*3) × 1,478 (H*5) mm
LS-506 + PB-503
Weight Approximately 430 kg
*1: You need space of 500 mm or more from the rear side, and 100 mm or more from both left side and right side of the machine.
*2: The operation panel section, the powder smoke suction box, and the working table are not included.
*3: Rear side duct is included.
*4: The operation panel section is not included.
*5: The operation panel section is included.
1.8 Operating environment

Temperature 10°C to 30°C
Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
C-3
1.9 Scan function

Scan function is mounted on PF-708. Refer to the product specifications of the PF-708.
1.10 Note regarding the specifications

Note
• The information herein is possibly changed for an improvement without any notice.
C-4
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-626
2. DF-626
2.1 Type
Name Reverse automatic document feeder
Type Paper feed section U-turn and output from top method
Read section Sheet through method
Reversal section Switchback reversal method
Exit section Straight paper output method
Install method Top of the main body rear install method
Document alignment Center
Direction Left side of an image side normal
2.2 Functions
Mode Normal original mode, mixed original mode
Scan speed (A4) Scan resolution: 600 dpi 42 sheets per minute
Scan resolution: 300 dpi 70 sheets per minute
2.3 Type of paper

Type Normal original mode (plain) Simplex original mode: 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m 2
Duplex original mode: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m 2
Mixed original mode (plain) Simplex original mode, duplex original mode: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m 2
Original size Maximum 297.0 mm × 431.8 mm
Minimum 100.0 mm × 140.0 mm
Possible size for detection Normal original mode Inch
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S
11 × 17, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 5 1/2 × 8
1/ S
2
8K, 16K, 16KS
Metric
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S
11 × 17, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S,
8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 8 1/8 × 13 1/4, 8 × 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Mixed original mode Refer to the table of mixed combinations.
Capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2), or 14 mm or less of stacked height
2.4 Originals that are not allowed to be fed

• If you use the following originals, problems likely to occur.
Image Type Predictable Troubles
Stapled or clip-on original Paper feed error, original damaged, or the drive failure which is caused by the jammed clip
Pasted original Paper feed error, original damaged
Book Paper feed error, original damaged
Original whose weight is less than Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
35 g/m2, or over 210 g/m2
Originals that are folded, torn, Paper feed error, original damaged, conveyance trouble
creased
Original with a large amount of Folded corner, jammed original which is caused by the skew
curl (15 mm or more)
OHP Film Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Label Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Offset master Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Gloss original such as the photo Conveyance trouble, original damaged
paper, gloss coated
Clipped, or cutout original Original damaged, conveyance trouble
Cut-and-paste original Folded, or torn cut-and-paste part
2.5 Originals other than the paper feed and the throughput can be guaranteed
• If you use the following originals, the original can be fed partially but problems can occur.
Image Type Predictable Troubles
C-5
Original with a small amount of Folded corner, output error, conveyance trouble
curl (10 mm to 15 mm)
Heat-sensitive paper Folded lead, output error, conveyance trouble
Inkjet paper Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Paper with smooth surface Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
(coated paper)
Blueprint master original Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Paper which just output from the Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
main body
Multi-hole paper (limited to a Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
loose leaf or the like)
Original with 2 holes to 4 holes Conveyance trouble
Original which has trails of half- Paper feed error, conveyance trouble, image distortion
fold, or Z-fold (the floating amount
is 15 mm or less)
Original with a rough surface Paper feed error
(such as a letterhead)
2.6 Table of mixed combinations

(1) Inch
Maximum original width
11 inch 81/2 inch 51/2 inch
11 x 17 81/2 x 11 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S 51/2 x 81/2 51/2 x 81/2S
11 x 17 Same width Same width - - - -
11 inch
81/2 x 11 Same width Same width - - - -
81/2 x 14 ○ ○ Same width Same width Same width -

Mixed Size
81/2 inch 81/2 x 11S ○ ○ Same width Same width Same width -
51/2 x 81/2 × × Same width Same width Same width -
51/2 inch 51/2 x 81/2S × × × × × Same width
(2) Metric
Maximum original width
297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm
A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S
A3 Same Same - - - - - -
width width
297 mm
A4 Same Same - - - - - -
width width
B4 ○ ○ Same Same - - - -
width width
257 mm
B5 ○ ○ Same Same - - - -
width width
Mixed Size
A4S ○ ○ ○ ○ Same Same - -
width width
210 mm
A5 × × ○ ○ Same Same - -
width width
182 mm B5S × × ○ ○ ○ ○ Same -
width
148 mm A5S × × × × × × ○ Same
width
Same width: 1.5% or less of the lead skew
○: Mixed is possible.
×: Mixed is restricted.
-: Impossible to place
2.7 Machine data

Power source DC24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 60 W or less
Dimensions 600 (W) x 575 (D) x 130 (H) mm
C-6
Weight Approximately 16.7 kg

Humidity 10% to 80% RH (with no condensation)

Note
C-7
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PF-707/708
3. PF-707/708
3.1 Type
Type Front loading type suction method 3-tray paper feeder*1
Original stand*2 Fixed
Original alignment*2 Left rear standard
*1 Scanner and DF-626 (Refer to C.2. DF-626) is attached on PF-708.

*2 PF-708 only
3.2 Functions
(1) Paper feed
Number of trays 3 trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 4,630 sheets (80 g/m2)
Tray 1, 2: 1,390 sheets
Tray 3: 1,850 sheets
(2) Scanner (PF-708 only)

Original Sheet, book, solid object
Maximum original size A3 or 11 x 17 (Custom paper: maximum 297 mm x 431.8 mm)
Scanning resolution Main scan: 600 dpi
Sub scan: 600 dpi
Copy magnification Fixed magnification x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154,
x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500
Zoom magnification x 0.250 to x 4.000 (each 0.001 step)
Continuous copy count Up to 9,999 sheets
Number of originals recorded 16452 sheets (A4) *1
*1 When you use HDD (when IC-602C or UK-105 is installed)
3.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S*1, ISOB6S*1,
A6S*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm) *2
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11) *3
Type of paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Paper weight 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
*1 Use the small size guide. Only the 1st tandem is available.
*2 Use the small guide when the width is shorter than 139.7 mm. Only the 1st tandem is available. Minimum size of the 2nd tandem is 140 mm x
140 mm.
*3 The tab paper guide is required. Supported only for single side printings.
3.4 Machine data

(1) PF-707
Power source 12/5/-12VDC, 180 VAC to 264VAC, 50Hz/60Hz common (supplied from the main body)
Inch: 120VAC
Metric: 230VAC
Maximum power consumption*1 DC: 70W or less
AC: 580W or less
Weight 203kg
Dimension 996 (W) x 772 (D) x 1038 (H) mm
*1 Excluding the power consumption of HT-506.
(2) PF-708
Power source 12/5/-12VDC, 180 VAC to 264VAC, 50 Hz 60 Hz common (supplied from the main body)
inch: 120VAC
metric: 230VAC
Maximum power consumption*1 DC: 70W or less
AC: 580W or less
Weight 234 kg
C-8
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PF-707/708

*1 Excluding the power consumption of HT-506.


Note
C-9
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. HT-506
4. HT-506
4.1 Type
Type Fan heater type dehumidifier
4.2 Machine data

Power source (supplied from the 24 VDC, 5 VDC
connected device) Inch: 90 VAC to 132 VAC
Metric: 180 VAC to 264 VAC
Maximum power consumption DC: 6W or less
AC (Inch): 384W or less (per 1 unit)
AC (Metric): 384W or less (per 1 unit)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan unit + air supply and exhaust duct: 293 (W) x 336 (D) x 176 (H) mm
Power source unit: 212 (W) x 106 (D) x 77 (H) mm
Weight 6kg
(Dehumidifier fan unit x 3, air supply and exhaust duct x 3, power source unit x 1)


Note
C-10
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. FA-502
5. FA-502
5.1 Type
Type PF tandem paper conveyance device
5.2 Type of paper

Paper Size Maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 139.7 mm × 139.7 mm
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Weight 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
5.3 Machine data

Power source 24VDC (supplied from PF)
Maximum power consumption 96W or less
Weight Tandem unit: 8 kg
Drive: 1 kg


Note
C-11
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. RU-516
6. RU-516
6.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance unit with charge control function
6.2 Functions
Functions In order to prevent the sticking together of output papers, the RU-516 neutralizes the paper that is output
from the main body.
6.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm *1, Minimum 100
mm x 148 mm *2
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Banner: When you use MK-740, you can use banner function. (Same as the main body specification)*2
Type of paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *1
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *2
*1 C1100, C1085
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
6.4 Machine data

Power source DC24V (supplied from RU-511)*1
DC24V (supplied from RU-509 or FS-531/612) *2
Dimensions 40 (W) x 712.8 (D)*3 x 1,022 (H) mm
Weight 10.0 kg (including all enclosed parts)
*1: C1100, C1085
*2: C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3: When you connect the machine to C1100 or C1085, the connector cover on the rear side is not included.


Note
C-12
7. RU-511
7.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance device with the paper cooling and the de-curler function
7.2 Function
De-curler conveyance mode Reduces paper curl and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
In the straight conveyance mode Feed without the de-curl process and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
Reverse/exit conveyance mode Reverses paper and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
Humidifier conveyance mode Executes humidification of HM-101 (option) and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear
velocity.
Output paper density adjustment Measures the color density of the density patch printed on paper and feeds back to the image stabilization
mode control of the main body.
7.3 Type of paper

13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm)
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Paper weight Straight paper exit 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Reversing exit 55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Acceptable paper curl 30 mm or less
*1 Operation of the paper exit with the tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
7.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC (Japan), 120VAC (North America), 220VAC to 240VAC (Europe)/5VDC (supplied from the main
body)
Dimensions 410 (W) x 735 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 80kg


Note
C-13
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. HM-101
8. HM-101
8.1 Type
Type Paper humidifier kit
8.2 Function
Functions Humidifies the both sides of the paper, and then adjusts curling.
Tank capacity 20L (equivalent to approximately 100,000 copies)
8.3 Type of paper

13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper Maximum 330 mm x 487 mm, minimum 100 mm x 140 mm
Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *1*3
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *2*3
*1 C8000
*2 C1100, C1085
*3 In humidifier ON mode, the coated paper and color paper under 135 g/m2 is unusable.
8.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from RU-511)
Maximum power consumption 60 W
Dimension Humidifier section: 194 (W) x 492 (D) x 83 (H) mm
Water feed tank section: 339 (W) x 646 (D) x 246 (H) mm


Note
C-14
9. RU-510
9.1 Type
Type Paper conveyance unit with paper overlap and reverse functions
9.2 Functions
Double sheets reverse exit Reverses 2 sheets of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU or GP-501 and conveys to the finishing
conveyance mode *1 unit.
Single sheet reverse exit Reverses a single sheet of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU or GP-501 and conveys to the
conveyance mode finishing unit.
Straight conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the main body, PI-PFU or GP-501 to finishing unit without any process.
*1 1250/1250P only
9.3 Paper type

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*5, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*5, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*1*5, A5,
A5S*1, A6S*1
13 x 19*1, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 *1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K*6, 16K*6, 16KS*6
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum 331mm x 488mm*7)
Tab paper*3 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Custom size paper Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 463mm
*1
Minimum 95mm x 133mm*8, Maximum 331mm x 488mm
*2*7
Paper type Plain, Fine, Coated, Tab Paper, OHP Film, Label Paper, PrePrinted, Blank Insert, Embossed2, Book/
News, Embossed, Envelope: same as the main body.
Paper weight 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*1, 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*2
2 pages reverse exit conveyance mode *2 40g/ m2 to 216g/ m2
*1 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only.
*2 1250/1250P/1052 only.
*3 For C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, A4, 81/2 x 11 only.
*4 Default for North America
*5 Default for Europe
*6 For China, Taiwan only
*7 For 1250/1250P/1052: 324mm x 463mm (When using PF-703, LU-410: 324mm x 483mm)
*8 For 1250/1250P/1052: 182mm x 139mm (When using PF-703: 95mm x 133mm. When using PF-706: 95mm x 139mm)
9.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5V DC (supplied from the previous device)
Maximum power consumption 79VA or less
Weight Approx. 35 kg


Note
C-15
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. FS-532
10. FS-532
10.1 Type
Type Staple-cut type multi staple device
10.2 Function
(1) Functions
Sort, group mode
Offset Sort, offset group mode
OffsetStapleMode
Staple mode
(2) Staple sheet

• Combination condition of the paper type, the paper width (in the sub scan direction), the number of sheets for every range of paper weight
Number of staple sheets
Plain Fine Plain paper and the paper that
is not Fine
Less than 400 400 mm or 320 mm or less 321 mm to 400 mm or Less than 400 400 mm or
Paper weight (g/m2) mm more 399 mm more mm more
49 to 49 - - - - - - -
50 to 61 100 50 50 20 - 35 35
62 to 74 100 50 50 20 - 35 35
75 to 80 100 50 30 30 30 35 35
81 to 91 60 50 30 30 30 35 35
92 to 135 50 50 30 30 30 30 30
136 to 162 40 40 30 30 30 25 25
163 to 216 25 25 25 25 25 20 20
217 to 244 25 25 25 25 25 15 15
245 to 300 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
301 to 350 - - - - - - -
(3) Staple position

Staple position 1 in the back (parallel/45 degrees), 1 in the front (parallel), 2 in the center (pitch: 120 mm,
140 mm and 165 mm)
(4) Maximum tray capacity

(a) Sort, group mode
Main tray The main tray quarter position sensor (PS17), the main tray middle position sensor (PS18), the 4000 sheets
sensor (PS19) and the 3000 sheets sensor (PS16) detect the stacked height.
Measure of paper full When SD-510 is not Paper area Sheet
detection (Excluding Z- installed
folding and center folding) (Plain paper 72 g/m2 0.06238 m2 or more 2000 sheets
to 81 g/m2) 0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 4200 sheets

m2
0.03108 m2 or less 750 sheets
When SD-510 is Paper area Sheet
installed
0.06238 m2 or more 2000 sheets
(Plain paper 72 g/m2
to 81 g/m2) 0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 3000 sheets
m2
Z-folding (Paper weight 20 sheets*1
130g/m2 or less)
Center folding (Paper 20 sheets*1
weight 130g/m2 or
less)
Sub tray The sub tray paper full sensor (PS9) detects the stacked height.
Measure of paper full Excluding Z-folding, center 300 sheets
detection folding (Plain paper 80g/
m2)
Z-Folding 20 sheets
C-16
Center folding 40 sheets

*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951: 20 sheets, 30 sheets, 40 sheets, 50 sheets can be selected when you switch DIPSW24-4 and DIPSW24-5.
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085: 20 sheets, 30 sheets, 40 sheets, 50 sheets can be selected when you switch DIPSW31-2
and DIPSW31-3.
(b) Offset Sort, offset group mode

When SD-510 is Paper area Sheet
installed and not
installed 0.06238 m2 or more 1500 sheets
(Plain paper 72 g/m2 0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 1500 sheets

to 81 g/m2) m2
Z-folding (Paper weight 20 sheets*1
130g/m2 or less)
Center folding (Paper 20 sheets*1
weight 130g/m2 or
less)
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951: 20 sheets, 30 sheets, 40 sheets, 50 sheets can be selected when you switch DIPSW24-4 and DIPSW24-5.
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085: 20 sheets, 30 sheets, 40 sheets, 50 sheets can be selected when you switch DIPSW31-2
and DIPSW31-3.
(c) Staple mode

Measure of paper When SD-510 is 2 to 9 sheets (Paper length: 182 150 sets
full detection installed and not mm to 364 mm)
installed 2 to 9 sheets (Paper length: not 75 sets
182 mm to 364 mm)
10 to 20 sheets 50 sets
10.3 Type of paper

(1) Sort/group mode/offset Sort/offset group mode
Paper size SRA3, SRA4*6 *9, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5, ISOB5S, A5S*6 *9,
ISOB6S*1*6 *9, B6S*1*6 *9, A6S*1*6 *9
13 x 19*6 *9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2*2 *9
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S*1*6 *9
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11W, 8 1/2 x
11SW, 5 1/2×8 1/2W)
Tab paper*5*7 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2)
Custom size Max. 324mm x 483mm*3, Min. 95mm x 133mm*4
paper
Max. 330.2mm x 487.7mm*8, Min. 100mm x 148mm*8
Minimum 100 mm × 140 mm*10, maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm*10
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Envelope*1, Embossed, Embossed2, Tab Paper
(same as the main body)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 350 g/m2
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*9
62g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *6
*1 Offset Sort/Offset group mode cannot be used.
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*3 For 1250, 1250P, and 1052+PF-703: 95mm x 133mm, For 951+PF-706: 95mm x 139mm (The machines except for PF-703 and PF-706
conform to each product specification)
*4 For 1250, 1250P, and 1052+PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except for PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*5 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*6 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
C-17
*7 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085: A4 and 81/2 only
*8 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 + PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)
*9 C1100, C1085 only
*10 C1100, C1085+PF-707/708 (The machines except for PF-707/708 conform to each product specification)
(2) Staple mode

Paper size*1 SRA3, SRA4*7 *10, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, A5,
13 x 19*7 *10, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2*2 *10
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11W, 8 1/2 x 11SW,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2W)
Tab paper*6*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2)
Custom size Maximum 324mm x 483mm*4*5, Min. 203mm x 139mm*3
paper
Maximum 330.2mm x 487.7mm*5*9, Min. 203mm x 148mm*9
Minimum 203 mm × 148 mm*11, maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm*5*11
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Embossed, Embossed2, Tab Paper (same as the
main body)
Paper weight 50g/m2to 300g/m2
55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*10
62g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *7
*1 Z-folding staple: Maximum 305mm x 229mm, Minimum 210mm x 210mm (Folded paper size)
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*3 For 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951+PF-706 (The machines except for PF-706 conform to each product specification)
*4 For 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except for PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*5 Rear corner parallel staple: Maximum 320mm for CD direction
*7 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
*8 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085: A4 and 81/2 x 11 only
*9 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 + PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)
*10 C1100, C1085 only
*11 C1100, C1085+PF-707/708 (The machines except for PF-707/708 conform to each product specification)
10.3.1 Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 papers overlapped after printed

a Excluding the OHP paper: Amount of curl: 15 mm or less
OHP paper: Amount of curl: 3 mm or less
10.4 Machine data

Power source 24VDC±10% (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions With the main tray: 798 (W) x 723 (D) x 1070 (H) mm
Without the main tray: 544 (W) x 723 (D) x 1070 (H) mm
Weight Approximately 74kg


Note
C-18
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. SD-510
11. SD-510
11.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the center folding and tri-folding
11.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Saddle stitching mode Exits paper to the output tray after being saddle stitched.
Half-Fold mode Exits paper to the output tray after being center folded on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Tri-folding mode Exits paper to the output tray after being tri-folded on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Paper exit Paper conveyance by the belt conveyor

Folding exit tray Large-size paper (sub- Half-fold 1 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
scanning direction length: Folding & Stapling 2 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
330 mm or longer)
6 to 10 sheets 23 sheets*2
11 to 20 sheets 15 copies *3
Small-size paper: (sub- Half-fold 1 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
scanning direction length: Folding & Stapling 2 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
shorter than 330 mm)
Tri-Fold 1 sheet 50 copies
2 sheets 40 copies
3 sheets 30 copies
*1 20 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for inside paper or cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
*2 15 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
*3 10 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
(3) Performance
Folding and stitching position
performance
Gap in the CD direction a: 1.0 mm or less
11.3 Type of paper

(1) Saddle stitching mode
Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S, ISOB5S
13 x 19*4*6, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper *1 (A3W, A4SW, B4W, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Custom size Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*2, maximum 324 mm x 483 mm*3
Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*5, maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm*5
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Embossed, Embossed2 (same as the main body)
Paper weight Inside paper: 50g/m2 to 216g/m2
Cover: 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Inside paper: 55 g/m2 to 216 g/m2*6
Cover : 55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*6
Inside paper: 62g/m2 to 216g/m2*4
Cover: 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*4
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Paper weight Sheet
C-19
The paper width is 279.4 mm or The paper width is shorter than

longer in the sub scan direction. 279.4 mm in the sub scan
direction.
40g/m2 to 49g/m2 - -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 25 sheets -
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 20 sheets -
75 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 20 sheets 10 sheets
136g/m2 to 162g/m2 5 sheets 5 sheets
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 Cover only -
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 Cover only -
301g/m2 to 350 g/m2 - -
For the paper that is more than 217g/m2, only the cover is adjustable and 1 sheets is counted as a set of
5 sheets.
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (60 mm to 148.5 mm)
*1 Only 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951+PF-706 (The machines except for PF-706 conform to each product specification)
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052+PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except for PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 only
*5C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085+PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)PF-708
can also be installed for C 1100, C1085.
*6 C1100, C1085 only
(2) Half-Fold mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S, ISOB5S
13 x 19*4*6, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper *1 (A3W, A4SW, B4W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Custom size Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*2, maximum 324 mm x 483 mm*3
Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*5, maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm*5
Paper weight Inside paper: 50g/m2 to 216g/m2
Cover: 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Cover: 55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*6
Cover: 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*4
Maximum center folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
The paper width is 279.4 mm or The paper width is shorter than
longer in the sub scan direction. 279.4 mm in the sub scan
direction.
40g/m2 to 49g/m2 - -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 5 sheets -
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 5 sheets -
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 1 sheet 1 sheet
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 1 sheet 1 sheet
C-20
301g/m2 to 350 g/m2 - -
*1 Only 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951

*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951+PF-706 (The machines except for PF-706 conform to each product specification)
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052+PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 only
*5 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085+PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)PF-708
can also be installed for C 1100, C1085.
*6 C1100, C1085 only
(3) Tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated*1, PrePrinted, Book/News, Embossed, Embossed2 (same as the main body)
Paper weight Inside papers: 50g/m2 to 105g/m2
Inside papers: 55 g/m2 to 105 g/m2*2
Inside papers: 62 g/m2 to 105 g/m2*3
Maximum tri-folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
40g/m2 to 49 g/m2 -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 3 sheets
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 3 sheets
92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 1 sheet
106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 -
136g/m2 to 162g/m2 -
163g/m2 to 216g/m2 -
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 -
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 -
301g/m2 to 350 g/m2 -
*1 Maximum tri-folding sheets: 1 sheet

*2 C1100, C1085 only
*3 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 only
(4) Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 sheets are overlapped after printed

a Excluding the OHP paper: Amount of curl: 15 mm or less
11.4 Machine data

Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)
Weight SD-510 itself: Approximately 22.6kg
Output tray: Approximately 3.8kg

C-21

Note
C-22
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. PK-522
12. PK-522
12.1 Type
Type FS built-in type punching operation device
12.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
Number of holes Inch area: 2-Holes/3-Holes
Metric area: 2-Holes/4-Holes
Sweden: 4-Holes
Hole diameter Inch area: φ8.0mm
Metric area: φ6.5mm
Sweden: φ6.5mm
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
Inch area: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.5mm or more
Metric area: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 4.0mm or more
Sweden: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 4.0mm or more
Hole pitch Inch area: 70 mm (2 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)
Metric area: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes)
Sweden: 21, 70, 21mm (4 holes)
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
12.3 Type of paper

Paper size 2 holes A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S*2*3, ISOB4, ISOB5, ISOB5S,
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3, 51/2 x 81/2*1*3, 9 x 11,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13,
8K, 16K, 16KS
3/4 holes A3, B4, A4, B5, ISOB4*4, ISOB5*4,
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 9 x 11,
8K, 16K
Paper weight 60g/m2 to 300g/m2
Punching prohibited paper Label, tab, OHP, second original, punched paper, Envelope, and others which cause troubles on the
operation of the punch unit and the punch blade
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] 5 sheets
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
*3 C1100, C1085 only
*4 4 holes for Sweden and 3 holes only
12.4 Machine data

Dimensions 156 mm (W) x 592 mm (D) x 180 mm (H)
Weight Approximately 4.5kg

C-23
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. PK-522

Note
C-24
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 13. PI-502
13. PI-502
13.1 Type
Type Torque limiter separation type sheet feeding device
13.2 Functions
Automatic sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
(Online operation)
Manual sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the PI operation panel.
(Offline operation) The following 5 types can be selected for the post processing mode.
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch Mode (when PK is installed on FS)
Saddle stitching mode
Tri-Fold mode
Note
The tray/Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
13.3 Type of paper

Paper size Tray /Up A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
9 × 11, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 × 11S, 51/2 × 81/2*1*2 *5
16K, 16KS
Custom size paper
Maximum 324 mm x 297 mm, minimum 182 mm x 139 mm*1
Maximum 330 mm x 297 mm, minimum 182 mm x 140 mm *5
Tray /Lw SRA3*1*4*5, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
13 x 19*4*5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1*2*5
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper*6
Maximum 330 mm x 482 mm, minimum 182 mm x 140 mm *5
Type of paper Plain, Recycle, Color, Special, Coated, Fine
Capacity Tray /Up, /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) or 30 mm or less in height
Paper curl amount
[1]
a
15jft1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] 5 sheets
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*2 C8000 only
*3 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C6000L, and C1060L only
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 + FS-532 only
*5 C1100, C1085 only
*6 The custom size paper is not available for the manual sheet feed.
13.4 Machine data

Weight Approximately 10.5kg
C-25
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 13. PI-502


Note
C-26
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 14. MK-732
14. MK-732
14.1 Type
Type PI paper conveyance unit
14.2 Type of paper

Paper size Maximum 331 mm×488 mm, minimum 182 mm × 139mm
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Coated, Recycled paper
Paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
14.3 Machine data

Weight 3 kg


Note
C-27
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. LS-506
15. LS-506
15.1 Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stacking Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only) *1
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with the tab paper.
15.2 Functions
(1) Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode Exits paper to the stacker tray without any process.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.
Stacker tray sort mode Executes shifting operation (20 mm) and exits to the stacker tray*1
Coupling mode Conveys to the finishing option without any process
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with the tab paper.

Maximum tray capacity Stacker tray • The activation of 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) or 5,000
(Paper weight 80g/m2) sheets
Paper which the length in the sub scan direction is 195 mm to 488
mm
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
2,000 sheets
Paper which the length in the sub scan direction is 148 mm to
194 mm
B5, ISOB5, A5
Sub tray Straight paper exit: 200 sheets
Z-Fold paper: 20 sheets
Half-fold paper: 40 sheets
15.3 Type of paper

Paper size Stacker tray SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*3*4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, A5
13 x 19*3*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
Tab paper*1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom size paper
Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 210 mm x 148 mm*7*3
Sub tray SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*3*4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5,
ISOB5S*3*4, A5, A5S*3*4, B6S*3*4, A6S*3*4
13 x 19*3*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper*2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom size paper
Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 148 mm*7
Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm*3
Paper weight Stacker tray 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *3
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *4
40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *5
C-28
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. LS-506
Sub tray 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *3

62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *4
40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *5
Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 papers that are overlapped after printed
a Other than the OHP paper, the amount of curl is 15 mm or less.
*1 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
*2 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*3 C1100, C1085
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*5 1250, 1250P, 1052
*6 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for PF-703 conform to each product specification.)
*7 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 + PF-707 or MB-506 (The machines except for PF-707 and MB-506 conform to each product specification.)
15.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body)
Dimension 785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm


Note
C-29
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 16. FD-503
16. FD-503
16.1 Type
Type Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
16.2 Functions
(1) Function
Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray or the sub tray.
Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and
exited into the main tray.
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
“a” (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.0mm or more (2 punched holes), 6.5mm or
more (3 punched holes)
Folding functions Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the
following: Z-Fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each
sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-Fold exit to the main tray while in the FS
connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function The PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode The PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray or the main tray. (The
stapling function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

Main tray 2500 sheets: A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11 *12 *13, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *5 *11 *12 *13
*1,
9 x 11*1 *3 *11 *12 *13, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11 *12,
16K*2 *3 *6 *11 *12 *13, 16KS*2 *3 *6 *11 *12 *13
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3,
1500 sheets: SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11 *12 *13, SRA4 *2 *3 *11 *12
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*10)
*13, SRA4S
13 x 19*2 *3 *11 *12 *13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*2*3 *6 *11 *12 *13
500 sheets: A5, A5S*2*3 *11 *13, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *11 *12 *13, ISOB6S*3 *5 *11
*12 *13, 51/ x 81/ *1*3 *13, 51/ x 81/ S*2*3 *11 *12 *13
2 2 2 2
Others: Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11 *12
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*3 *13
Sub tray Folding type: Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double parallel, Gate
(with folder tray) Paper size: A3, B4, ISOB4*1 *3 *11 *12 *13, A4S, SRA4S,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8K*2 *3 *6 *11 *12 *13
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x
279mm)
Paper weight: Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out
50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 130g/m2 *2 *3 *11 *12
55 g/m2 to 130 g/m2 *13
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *11 *12
55 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 *13
Tray capacity of folding paper 30 sets or more
(for all types of folding with 80g/m2 paper)*9
C-30
Sub tray Tray capacity: 200 sheets

(without folder tray)
SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11 *12 *13, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1*3 *5*11 *12 *13,
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2
JISB5S*4, ISOB5S *3 *5 *11 *12 *13, A5, A5S*2 *3 *11 *12 *13, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *5 *11 *12 *13, ISOB6S
*1*10,
*3 *11 *12 *13, A6S*2 *3 *11 *12 *13
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11 *12,
13 x 19*2 *3*11 *12 *13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*1 *3 *11 *12 *13, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3,
x 81/2*1 *3 *13, 51/2 x 81/2S*2 *3 *11 *12 *13
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*10)
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11 *12
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3 *13
*1 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*6 For China, Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*8 C8000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 Paper is stacked in the exiting sequence.
*10 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*12 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
*13 C1100/C1085
16.3 Type of paper

(1) Punching function
Paper size 2-hole: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10 *12, SRA4S, A4, A4S,
JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *9 *10 *12, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *3 *4 *9
*10 *12, A5, A5S *4 *5 *9 *10 *12
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9 *10 *12, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4 *12
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12, 16K*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12
Tab paper *7(A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
3/4-hole: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10 *11 *12, A4, JISB5*1,
ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *9 *10 *11 *12,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9 *10 *12, 81/2 x 11,
8K*4 *5 *6 *9 *10 *12, 16K*4 *5 *6 *9 *10 *12
Tab paper *7(A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Maximum 324mm
x 463mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper, tab paper
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 216g/m2 (2 sheets overlap mode: 50g/m2 to 91g/m2)*3,
64g/m2 to 216g/m2 *4 *5 *9 *10,
55 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 *12
(2) Folding functions

Paper size A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10 *12, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x 279mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper
Paper weight Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold- 50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *3,
out, Z-Fold
64g/m2 to 130g/m2*4 *5 *9 *10,
55 g/m2 to 130 g/m2 *13
C-31
Double parallel, Gate 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *3,

64g/m2 to 91g/m2*4 *5 *9 *10,
55 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 *13
(3) PI functions
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4, SRA4*4 5 *9 *10 *12, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5S*2 *3 *4,
JISB5S*1, A5
13 x 19*4*5 *9 *10 *12, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4 *9 *10 *12, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2 *3 *4 *12,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12, 16K*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9 *10 *12
Custom size paper *8*13
• 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052
Minimum 182mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
• C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
• C8000/C1100/C1085
Applicable paper Plain, Recycle, Fine, Special
Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) x 2 trays
*1 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China, Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*7 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1100/C1085, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 When it is used as the cover in perfect binding mode (Minimum 182mm x 279mm, Maximum 307mm x 483mm)
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*10 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*11 3 holes only
*12 C1100/C1085
*13 The custom size is not available for the manual sheet paper feed.
16.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (supplied from the main body) *1
Maximum power consumption 180VA or less
Dimensions 400 (W) x 723 (D) x 1231 (H) mm (The main tray is not included in the width)
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085: Only 5VDC is supplied from the
main body.


Note
C-32
17. SD-506
17.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the fore-edge trimming and the multi-folding function
17.2 Functions
(1) Function
Sub tray paper exit mode Exit paper to the sub tray without any process.
Coupling paper exit mode Convey paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Saddle stitching mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding, saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding, saddle stitching, trimming operation.
Multi-center folding mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Multi-center folding trimming Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding and the trimming operation on 1 or more sheets
mode of paper.
Overlap tri-folding mode Exit paper to the tri-folding tray after the letter folding operation on 1 or more sheets of paper.

Sub tray 200 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Z-Folding 20 sheets
Center folding 40 sheets
Bundle exit tray Folding & Stapling/trimming Stitching sheets Set
Mode 2 to 10 50 or more
11 to 20 30 or more
21 to 40 20 or more
41 to 50 15 or more
Multi-center folding mode 30 sets
Tri-folding paper exit tray Overlap tri-folding mode 20 sets
17.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight/sub tray mode
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *10 *11 *12, SRA4*4 *5 *10 *11 *12, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1,
ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *10 *11 *12, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2 *4 *10 *11 *12, A5, A5S *4 *5 *10 *11 *12, B6S *4 *5
*10 *11 *12, ISOB5S*4 *10 *12, A6S *4 *5 *10 *11 *12
13 x 19 *4 *5 *10 *11 *12, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *10 *11 *12, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3 *4 *12, 51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *10 *11 *12
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4 *5 *6 *10 *11 *12, 16K*4 *5 *6 *10 *11 *12, 16KS*4 *5 *6 *10 *11 *12
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm *3
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum.330mm x 483mm*5 *10 *11
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm *4 *12
Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*9
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *5 *10 *11
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *12
*1 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China, Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
*10 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*11 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
C-33
*12 C1100/C1085 only

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *8 *9 *10, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *8 *9 *10, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *8 *9 *10
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *8 *9, 55 g/m2 to 244 g/m2 *10
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain, coated, color specific Paper weight Sheet
Plain paper Coated
Color specific *4 *5 *8 *9 *10
50g/m2 to 81g/ 50 *7 30 *7
m2
82g/m2 to 91g/ 30 *7 15 *7
m2
92g/m2 to 20 *7 10 *7
130g/m2
131g/m2 to 15 *7 5 *7
161g/m2
162g/m2 to 10 -
209g/m2
210g/m2 to 5 -
244g/m2
Fine Paper brand 55kg (64g/m2) 70kg (81.4g/m2)
KIMMARI V 50 sheets 50 sheets
RAICHO FINE
KANABISHI
OK PRINCE -
NEW NPi 50 sheets 30 sheets
POD PRINCE
FINE
SHIRAOI
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (90mm to 165mm)
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 2mm

[2] = [Paper Size] /4 ± 2mm
Folding height
[1]
15ant1c011na
Stitching sheets [1] Folding height

A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 x 18 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S (260mm or
11 x 17 less)
(301mm to (261mm to
(401mm or
400mm) 300mm)
more)
2 to 5 35mm or less 40mm or less 45mm or less Not defined
6 to 15 45mm or less 50mm or less Not defined
C-34
16 to 30 50mm or less 55mm or less

31 to 50 60mm or less 65mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*7 1 sheet can be switched to thick paper (200g/m2)
*8 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*9 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*10 C1100/C1085 only
(3) Trimming mode

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Maximum 324mm x
463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *7 *8
55 g/m2 to 244 g/m2 *9
Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets (80g/m2) or 49 sheets (80g/m2) + 1 sheet (200g/m2)
(This is the number of the printed paper before the folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is
double.)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C7000/C7000/C70hc/C6000 only
*8 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*9 C1100/C1085 only
(4) Multi-center folding mode

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4*5 *6 *7 *8 *9, 16KS *4*5 *6 *7 *8 *9
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2*3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4*5 *7 *8, 55 g/m2 to 244 g/m2 *9
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet

Folding precision (for 1 sheet)
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 1.5mm
C-35
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5mm or less

*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*7 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*8 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*9 C1100/C1085 only
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S, 81/2 x 11S
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1, 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *4 *5, 55 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 *6
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet

Folding precision (for 1 sheet) Paper size [1] [2] [3]
A4S 97.5 ± 4mm 102.0 ± 4mm 1.5mm or less
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 4mm 96.1 ± 4mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
*1 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 C7000/C7000/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*5 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*6 C1100/C1085 only
17.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (supplied from the main body) *1
Maximum power consumption 270W
Weight 280kg
Dimensions When the bundle output tray is stored:
1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle output tray is pulled out
1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085: Only 5VDC is supplied from the
main body

C-36

Note
C-37
18. SD-513
18.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the fore-edge trimming and the multi-folding operation device
18.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Saddle stitching mode Exit several sheets to the booklet tray after the half-folding and saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit several sheets to the booklet tray after the half-folding, saddle stitching and trimming operation.
Multi half-fold mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the booklet tray after the process of the half-folding.
Multi half-fold trimming mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the booklet tray after the process of the half-folding and trimming.
Multi tri-folding mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the tri-folding tray after the process of the tri-folding.
Straight mode Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.

Sub tray The sub tray paper full sensor (PS11) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
single sheet
The approximate capacity of Z- 20 sheets (80 g/m2)
folding
The approximate capacity of half- 20 sheets (80 g/m2)
fold
Single sheet with crease 100 sheets (The paper feed stops when 100 sheets are fed in
succession.)
Booklet tray The booklet tray paper full sensor (PS44) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of Stitching sheets Set
saddle stitching mode (Grain 2 to10 sheets 30 sets
short paper, 91 g/m2) 11 to 25 sheets 18 sets
The approximate capacity of 30 sets
multi half-fold mode (5 sheets
overlap)
Tri-folding tray The tri-folding tray paper full sensor (PS81) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of Folding sheets Set
Multi tri-folding mode (80 g/m2) 1 sheet 40 sets
2 sheets 20 sets
3 sheets 13 sets
4 sheets 10 sets
5 sheets 8 sets
C-38
(3) Performance
Paper alignment performance
a b c
>@
d1
d e1 d2
w e w
e2
>@
f g
>@
[1]: Fold position

[2]: Center of paper
Misalignment inside booklet (No a: 1.0 mm or less
trim on both sides) b: 1.0 mm or less
Misalignment between stapling c: 1.0 mm or less (150 mm or more in the main scan direction of the
position and folding booklet)
c: 1.5 mm or less (less than 150 mm in the main scan direction of the
booklet)
Misalignment of stapling position d: (W/4 - 8 mm ±3.0 mm or less)
from the edge (2-point staple)
Staple pitch (2-point staple) e: (W/2 ±3.0 mm or less)
Misalignment of stapling position d1: (W/8 - 8) mm ±3.0 mm or less)
from the edge (4-point staple) d2: (W/8 x 5 - 8) mm ±3.0 mm or less)
Staple pitch (4-point staple) e1: W/4 mm ±3.0 mm or less
e2: W/4 mm ±3.0 mm or less
Misalignment between center of f: 1.0mm or less
paper and folding
Folding skew (2 to 15 sheets) g: 1.5 mm or less
Folding skew (16 to 50 sheets) g: 2.0 mm or less
Multi half-fold performance
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [sub-scanning direction length] / 2 ± 1.5 mm
C-39
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5 mm or less

Multi tri-folding performance
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
Paper size (paper weight) [1] [2] [3]

A4S (80g/m2) 97.5 mm ± 1.5 mm 102.0 ± 3 mm 1.5 mm or less
81/2 x 11S (20lb) 91.6 mm ± 1.5 mm 96.1 ± 3 mm
Trimmer performance
[1]
Paper size (paper type) Stitching sheets [1]

A4 (J paper, KM Profi) 2 to 15 sheets 1.0 mm or less
81/2 x 11 (Hammermill Tidal 16 to 30 sheets 1.5 mm or less
MP) 31 to 51 sheets 1.5 mm or less
Other than the above 2 to 15 sheets 2.0 mm or less
16 to 30 sheets 3.0 mm or less
18.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight, sub tray mode
Paper Size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, SRA4*6*7, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, ISOB5S, B5S, A5, A5S*6*7, B6S*6*7,
A6S*6*7
13 × 19*6*7, 12 × 18, 11 × 17, 9 × 11, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S,
5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2S*6*7 8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, 8 1/8×13 1/4, 8×13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper*8 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 × 18W, 11 × 17W, 8 1/2 × 11W, 8 1/2 ×
11SW, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2W)
Tab paper*1 (A3*8, B4*8, A4, A4S*8, B5*8, B5S*8, 11 × 17*8, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S*8, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2*8)
Custom size*2 (maximum 324 mm x 483 mm, minimum 95 mm x 133 mm)
Custom size*3 (maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm × 148 mm)
Custom size*4 (maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm × 139.7 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, fine, color, coated, preprinted, book/news, embossed, envelope, embossed2, tab paper (same as
the main body)
Weight 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *2*5
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *3*5
C-40
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *4*5

*1 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not guaranteed.
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for PF-703 conform to each product specification)
*3 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 + PF-707 (The machines except for the PF-707 conform to each product specification.)
*4 C1100, C1085 + PF-707, PF-708 (The machines except for the PF-707 and the PF-708 conform to each product specification.)
*5 Paper weight of the sub tray load that is 49 g/m2 or less is not guaranteed.
*6 Only for the system of C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*7 Only for the system of C1100 and C1085
*8 Only for the system of 1250, 1250P, and 1052

Paper Size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 × 18, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11S
8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, 8 1/8×13 1/4, 8×13
8K, 16KS
Wide paper*11 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, 12 × 18W, 11 × 17W, 8 1/2 × 11SW)
Custom size*1*2 (maximum 324 mm x 483 mm, minimum*3120 mm x 257 mm)
Custom size*1*9*10 (maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum*3120 mm × 257 mm)
Weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2
55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *10
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *9
Maximum saddle stitching (2- Plain Body weight Sheet
point staple) sheets*4 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 50 sheets
45 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
19 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2)*5
19 sheets + cover (50 to 256 g/m2)*6
14 sheets + cover (257 to 300 g/m2)*6
162g/m2 to 209g/m2 10 sheet
2 sheets + cover (50 to 300 g/m2) *5
Fine (81.4 g/m2) Paper brand Sheet
KIMMARI V 30 sheets
RAICHO
NEW Npi 29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
OK PRINCE 24 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
SHIRAOI
KANABISHI 50 sheets
C-41
POD PRINCE
Coated, Color paper Body weight Sheet
Grain long paper Body weight Sheet
131g/m2to 161g/m2 5 sheets
162 g/m2 to 300 g/ Not guaranteed
m2
Papers that are less than Body weight Sheet
182 mm in the main scan
direction 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 16 sheets
7 sheets + cover (50 to 216 g/m2)
4-point staple Applicable Paper Size A3, 11 x 17
Custom size*8 (Maximum 297 mm × 483 mm, minimum 279 mm × 257
mm)
Saddle stitching (4-point staple) Plain Body weight Sheet
sheets*4 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 15 to 50 sheets
15 to 45 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
14 to 40 sheets + cover (217 to 300 g/m2)
82g/m2 to 91g/m2 11 to 30 sheets
8 to 19 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 244 g/m2)*5
8 to 14 sheets + cover (244 to 300 g/m2)*5
C-42

Fine (81.4 g/m2) Paper brand Sheet
KIMMARI V 12 to 30 sheets
RAICHO
NEW Npi 12 to 29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
OK PRINCE 11 to 24 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
SHIRAOI
KANABISHI 12 to 40 sheets
POD PRINCE
Coated, color paper Body weight Sheet
*1 When a ratio of the main scan direction to the sub scan direction regarding the custom size paper is less than 0.6 (also 0.78 or more), it is
not guaranteed.
*3 The dimension after the trimming accommodates to the compact disc sleeve size (120 mm × 120 mm).
*4 When the weight differs between each inside paper, define with the heaviest weight.
*5 1250, 1250P, 1052
*6 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
*7 The cover of grain long paper is not guaranteed.
*8 Paper feed is possible, but not guaranteed.
*11 Only for the system of 1250, 1250P, and 1052
(3) Trimming mode

Paper Size Conforms to the saddle stitching mode specification.
Weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Maximum trimming sheets Twice the number of saddle stitching paper
Trimming distance 5 mm to 40 mm
C-43
However, when the booklet length after the trimming becomes shorter than 120 mm, trimming is not
available.
Trimming position Fore edge
Trimmer scraps box capacity Trimmer scraps box full sensor (PS96) detects the full condition.
The scraps box can be pulled out during machine operation.
The approximate capacity of the scraps box is 1,700 sheets.*1
*1 Condition: PROFI (80 g/m2), A3, 10 sheets saddle stitching booklet, trimming amount 5 mm
(4) Multi folding mode

Paper Size Half-fold Same specification as saddle stitching mode
Tri-folding A4S, 81/2 × 11S
Weight Half-fold 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Tri-folding 50g/m2 to 91g/m2
Crease + tri-folding*1 80g/m2 to 216g/m2
Number of overlapped sheets Half-fold *2 Weight Sheet

Tri-folding 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 5 sheets

Crease + tri-folding 80g/m2 to 216g/m2 1 sheet
*1 The position misalignment of the crease line and the fold of paper whose weight is less than 105 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 When the paper weight differs between each multi half fold, define with the heaviest weight.
(5) Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
Curling amount "a" 10 mm or less (49 g/m2 or less)
15 mm or less (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
10 mm or less (92 g/m2 or more)
When the booklet is output, the outward curl is not guaranteed.
18.4 Machine data

Power source Inch: 120VAC, 24/5VDC (some are supplied from the main body)
Metric: 230VAC, 24/5VDC (some are supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 1,241 mm (W) × 1,431 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H) (The width does not include the booklet tray (236 mm).)
Rear console 1,241 mm (W) × 723 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H)
Front console 800 mm (W) × 830 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H)
Rear console 181 kg
Front console 156 kg


Note
C-44
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 19. CR-101
19. CR-101
19.1 Type
Type SD built-in type crease operation device
19.2 Functions
(1) Functions
No-crease mode
Crease mode
Number of creases 1 to 4
Setting unit 0.1 mm
Minimum distance 1.0 mm
between the crease
lines
Prohibited range H1, H2: Crease is unavailable
a: Crease is available
The crease is performed in the order of A, B, C, D.
[1]: Output direction after the paper reverse
[2] Front stopper
[1]
H2
A
B
L a
C
H1
[2]
H1, H2 depends on the paper length in the sub scan direction (L).
Paper length in the sub scan direction (L)
240 mm or longer, less than 336 336 mm or longer, less than 337 337 mm or longer, 488 mm or
mm mm shorter
H1 7 mm 7 mm (L-330) mm
H2 46 mm (L-290) mm (L-290) mm
(2) Applicable mode and number of creases

Number of creases
Mode Cover Only All pages
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ●*1 × × × × × × ×
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ● × × × × × × ×
Tri-folding (SD-513) *2 × × × × × ● × ×
Perfect binding (PB-503) × ● × ● × × × ×
Free crease + sub tray (SD-513, PB-503, × × × × ● ● ○ ○
FS-532)*3
Free crease + straight, shift (main tray of × × × × ● ● ● ○
FS-532)*3
Punch, Staple (FS-532) × × × × × × × ×
●: Recommended (The accuracy is guaranteed)
○: The selection is possible but not guaranteed.
×: Unable
*1 Unable to combine with FD-504 square-fold mode.
C-45
*2 Crease + multi tri-folding exits one sheet each (overlap is released).

*3 When you crease paper which is heavier than 301 g/m2, limit the conditions to the following.
- Crease to the image side
- Paper exit with the face down to the sub tray or the FS-532 main tray
(3) Performance
Crease performance
Skew j-k: ± 0.7 mm or less

Misalignment j or k: ± 0.7 mm or less corresponding to the setting data
j1 j2 j3
k1 k2 k3
Pitch (maximum 4 j1, j2, j3, k1, k2, k3: ± 0.7 mm or less corresponding to the setting data
lines)
a
[2]
[1]
[1]: Fold line
[2]: Crease groove edge
Position a: 1.0 mm or less
misalignment of (Paper weight: 105g/m2 to 216g/m2)
the fold and the
crease line
Folding position a: ± 3.0 mm or less

misalignment on
the crease
operation
C-46
Folding skew on a: ± 2.0 mm or less

the crease
operation
19.3 Type of paper

Paper Size Crease + saddle stitching, multi half-fold, sub tray, Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching, multi half
straight, shift mode mode specification.
Crease + tri-folding mode Conforms to the SD-513 multi tri-folding mode
specification.
Crease + perfect binding mode Conforms to the PB-503 specification.
Weight 80g/m2to 350g/m2 *2*4
80 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *3
However, the maximum paper weight is based on the function that is combined with the crease mode.
Crease + tri-folding mode*1: 80 g/m2 to 216 g/m2
Allowable amount of curling
C
Curling amount "a" 15 mm or less (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
*1 The position misalignment of the crease line and the fold of paper whose weight is less than 105 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
19.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from SD-513)
Weight 6.8 kg or less
Dimensions 211 mm (W) x 460 mm (D) x 137 mm (H) (The depth is to the edge of the creaser drive shaft)


Note
C-47
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 20. TU-503
20. TU-503
20.1 Type
Type SD built-in type top and bottom trimming operation device
20.2 Functions
(1) Functions
No-slit mode
Slit mode
Cut position The top edge and the bottom edge of booklet
Trimming amount 14 mm to 26 mm (50 g/m2 to 61 g/m2)
10 mm to 26 mm (62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
The top and the bottom edge individual setting
However, the difference of cutting amount between the top and the bottom edge is within 10 mm and the length in the
main scan direction after the cutting is 120 mm or longer.
Capacity of the slit The slit scraps box full sensor/1 (PS107) and the slit scraps box full sensor/2 (PS115) detect the full condition.
scraps box The scraps box can be pulled out during machine operation.
The approximate capacity of capacity: 4,000 scraps of 13 mm (W) x 420 mm (L) , PROFI (80 g/m2)
(2) Applicable mode list

Slit
Mode
Cover only*1 All pages
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ○ ●
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ○ ●
Tri-folding (SD-513) × ○*2
Perfect binding (PB-502) ○*3 ×
Sub tray (sub tray of SD-513, PB-503, FS-532) ○ ●
Straight, Shift (main tray of FS-532) ○ ○
Punch, Staple (FS-532) × ×
○: The selection is possible but not guaranteed.
×: Unable to select
*1 When the slit is executed only to the cover, refer to the following prohibition conditions.
· Cover length in the main scan direction after slitting is within ± 1.0 mm in contrast with the inside paper length in the main scan direction
· The length of the cover in the sub scan direction is within ± 80.0 mm compared with the length of the inside papers in the sub scan direction.
(With Fore-edge trimming)
· The length of the cover in the sub scan direction is same as the length of the inside papers in the sub scan direction. (Without fore-edge
trimming)
*2 Slit + tri-folding exits one sheet each (overlap is released).
*3 The top and the bottom edge individual setting is not available for the cutting amount.
(3) Performance
Slit performance
m q
m q
Slit straightness m: 0.5 mm or less (single sheets of 65 g/m2 or more)

m: 1.0 mm or less (single sheets of 64 g/m2 or less)
Width accuracy n: ± 0.5 mm or less corresponding to the setting data (65 g/m2 or more)
n: ± 1.0 mm or less corresponding to the setting data (64 g/m2 or less)
C-48
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 20. TU-503
20.3 Type of paper

(1) Slit mode
Paper Size Slit + saddle stitching, multi half-fold, sub tray, Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching, multi half
straight, shift mode fold mode specification.
However, the length in the main scan direction
after the slit is 120 mm or longer.
Slit+ tri-folding mode Conforms to the SD-513 multi tri-folding mode
specification.
However, define with the paper size before slit.
Slit + perfect binding mode Conforms to the PB-503 specification.
However, the length in the main scan direction
after the slit is 120 mm or longer.
Weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2 *1
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *2
55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *3
However, the maximum paper weight is based on the specification of the function that is combined with
the slit mode.
C
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for the PF-703 conform to each product specification.)
20.4 Machine data

Weight Slitter unit (including the rotary cutter and the scraps shutter): 18.7 kg
Scraps box (2 boxes): 1.0 kg x 2
Dimensions 304 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 381 mm (H) (The depth is from the edge of the shutter lever shaft to the rear
of the bottom.)


Note
C-49
21. FD-504
21.1 Type
Type SD built-in type flattening a fold operation device
21.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Square-fold mode Square-fold + Saddle stitching (SD-513)
(2) Applicable mode list

Mode Square-fold
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ●*1
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ×
Multi tri-folding (SD-513) ×
Perfect binding (PB-502) ×
Sub tray (sub tray of SD-513, PB-503, FS-532) ×
Straight, Shift (main tray of FS-532) ×
Punch, Staple (FS-532) ×
×: Unable
*1 Unable to combine with CR-101 crease mode.

Booklet tray The booklet tray paper full sensor (PS44) detects the full condition.
(Grain short paper, paper weight Stitching sheets The approximate capacity (sets)
91 g/m2 or less) 5 to 10 30 sets
11 to 25 20 sets
26 to 50 10 sets
(4) Performance
Booklet height performance
Stitching sheets (PROFI, no Paper Size

cover) A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 × 18 81/2 × 14 81/2 x 11S (260 mm or
11 × 17 less)
(301 mm to 400 (261 mm to 300
(401 mm or
mm) mm)
more)
5 h: 15 mm or h: 20 mm or h: 25 mm or h: 30 mm or
less less less less
6 to 15 h: 20 mm or h: 25 mm or h: 30 mm or h: 35 mm or
less less less less
less less less less
less less less less
21.3 Type of paper

Paper Size Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching mode specification.
Weight 50 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2*1
62 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2* 2
55 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2* 3
Minimum processing sheets 5 sheets
Maximum processing sheets Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching mode specification.
C-50

C
10 mm or less (92 g/m 2 or more)
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for the PF-703 conform to each product specification.)
21.4 Machine data

Weight Square-fold unit: 11 kg
Clamp up down drive unit: 2 kg
Dimensions 643 mm (W) × 258 mm (D) × 157 mm (H)


Note
C-51
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 22. PB-503
22. PB-503
22.1 Type
Type Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
22.2 Functions
(1) Function
Perfect binding mode Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process
Relay conveyance mode Exits paper to the option (FS-521, FS-532) on the subsequent stage without any process
(2) Binding sheets

Binding sheets Minimum thickness 10 sheets
Maximum thickness Plain: 300 sheets or 30 mm
Color and Coated: 150 sheets or 15 mm
Binding sheets with Z-Fold Simplex printing Number of Z-Fold Maximum number of Total
sheets*1 sheets unfold sheets
Binding sheets*1 Number of Inserted Maximum number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets
Duplex printing Number of Z-Fold Maximum number of Total
sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Maximum number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
Simplex and duplex mixed When 1 or more unfold sheets is single-sided, the specification is the
printing (printer function) same as the simplex print.
When the z-folded sheet is single-sided, the specification is the same
as the duplex print.
*1 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085: Switch DIPSW30-5 from 0 (default) to 1 to release the
limit of the total number of sheets.
1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, and 1051: Switch DIPSW37-2 from 0 (default) to 1 to release the limit of the total number of sheets.

Book stock section Maximum 11 books *1 x 2 rows *2 (book thickness: 30 mm)
10 sheets to 30 sheets book 50 sets
31 sheets to 150 sheets book 35 books or until the upper limit is detected.
151 sheets to 300 sheets book Until the upper limit is detected
PB cover paper tray*3 1000 sheets (82g/m2)
500 sheets (216g/m2)
Sub tray 200 sheets (80g/m2)
*1 The available number of books possibly decreases due to curls of papers.
*2 When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack is automatically moved to the second row on the cart. The pile
of books at the first row continues.
*3 The cover paper supply is selectable from the PB cover paper tray, main body tray, PI or PI-PFU (1200, 1200P, 1051, 1250, 1250P, and
1052 only).
(4) Others
Warm-up time Approximately 20 minutes
Cover trimming Selectable from Trim or Not trim.
22.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Perfect binding mode Inside paper: A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9*10*11, A5, A5S*3*9*10*11, 81/2 x 11,
51/2 x 81/2*3*9*11, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9*10*11, 16K*3*4*9*10*11
Custom size paper (Maximum 307 (W) x 221 (L) mm,
Minimum 139 (W) x 210 (L) mm)
C-52
Z-fold size (A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9*10*11, A4S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x

11S, 8K*3*4*9*10*11)
Cover: Maximum 307mm x 472mm, Minimum 139mm x 279mm
Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide size L mm
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness (book
spine) + 5mm (for trimming)
Sub tray mode SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9*10*11, SRA4*3*9*10*11, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1,
ISOB5*2*3*5*9*10*11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2*3*9*10*11, A5, A5S*3*9*10*11, B6S*3*9*10*11,
ISOB6S*3*9*10*11, A6S*3*9*10*11, 8K*3*4*9*10*11, 16K*3*4*9*10*11, 16KS*3*4*9*10*11
13 x 19*3*9*10*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3*5*11, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9*10*11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Custom size: Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9*10*11, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3*11, 100mm x 148mm*9*10, 95mm x 139mm *5
Finite tab paper *6*7 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Relay conveyance mode *8 Paper which can be used by the subsequent option (FS-521/FS-532)
• Large size: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9*10*11, SRA4*3*9*10*11,
SRA4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 13 x 19*3*9*10*11, 8K*3*4*9*10*11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (Max. 324mm x 460mm)
• Small size: A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9*10*11, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*9*10*11, 16K*3*4*9*10*11, 16KS*3*9*10*11
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
• Minimum size: A5, A5S*3*9*10*11, JISB6S*1*3*9*10*11, ISOB6S*2*3*9*10*11,
51/2 x 81/2*3*5*11, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9*10*11
• Others: Finite tab paper *6*7: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Custom size paper:
Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9*10*11, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3*11, 100mm x 148mm*9*10, 95mm x
139mm *5
(2) Paper weight

Perfect binding mode Inside paper: 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 105g/m2*1*6*11
Cover: 82g/m2 to 216g/m2*2
81g/m2 to 209g/m2*1*6*11
Sub tray mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*11
Relay conveyance mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2*2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*11
*3 C8000 only
*5 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*7 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 Paper can be fed only when the FS-521, FS-532 is connected as the subsequent stage of the PB-503
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*10 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
C-53
*11 C1100/C1085 only
(3) Applicable paper in each mode

Body Cover -
Binding Binding PB tray Main tray Sub tray
mode mode
(1250/1250 (C8000/
P/ C7000/
1052/1200/ C7000P/
1200P/ C70hc/
1051) C6000/
C1070/
C1070P/
C71hc/
C1060/
C1100/
C1085)
Plain Japa J paper 64g/m2 ○ ○ - - ○
n
Nort Tidal MP 20lb (75g/m2) ○ ○ - - ○
h
Amer
ica
Euro Konica Minolta 80g/m2 ○ - - - ○
pe Original
Konica Minolta 80g/m2 - - - - ○
Profi
Recycled Japa NR-A80 64g/m2 - ○ - - ○
paper n
NR-A100 64g/m2 ○ ○ ○
Nort Hammermill Great 20lb (75g/m2) ○ - - - ○
h White
Amer Recycle Eclips
ica 20lb (75g/m2) - - - - ○
Euro Nautilus 80g/m2 ○ - - - ○

pe
Classic White 80g/m2 ○ - - - ○
Color Japa Konicaminolta CF 80g/m2 - ○ - - ○
n paper
Nort Hammermill Color 28lb (105g/m2) - ○ - - ○
h Copy Photo White
Amer Domtor Microprint
ica 28lb (105g/m2) - ○ - - ○
Color Copy
Gilbert Neutech 28lb (105g/m2) - ○ - - ○
Color Copy
Euro Color copy (mondi) 90g/m2 - ○ - - ○
pe
100g/m2 - ○ - - ○
Fine - - Body Cover - - - - -
Japa Kinmari V 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
n
91g/m2
NEW NPi FINE 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
105g/m2 - ○ - - ○
POD prince high 64g/m2 to ○ - ○ ○ ○
quality
91g/m2
OK PRINCE FINE 82g/m2 to
81.4g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
216g/m2
105g/m2 - ○ - - ○
shiraoi 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
High quality 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
KANABISHI 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
Coated *1 Japa JD 98g/m2 - ○ - - ○
n
C-54
NEW AGE 81.4g/m2 - ○ - - ○

NEW AGE BLANC 81.4g/m2 - ○ - - ○
POD GLOSS 64g/m2 to 81g/m2 - - - - ○
COAT
Nort Kromekote Laser 82g/m2 to 130g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
h
Amer HIGH GLOSS 131g/m2 to 161g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
ica Futura Laser 162g/m2 to 216g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
Δ: Available for a paper curled less than 10mm

*1 Regarding Coated, the matt coated paper is only available for the body.
22.4 Machine data

Power source 120VAC (North America), 230VAC (Europe)
5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 1000W or less
Dimensions 1,360 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 755 (D) mm
Binding section 740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 755 (D) mm
Book stock section 620 (W) x 1,020 (H) x 753 (D) mm
Relay conveyance section


Note
C-55
23. MK-737
23.1 Type
Type Mount kit for 3rd Party Option
23.2 Functions
Configuration Case, board, wiring harness, wiring cover
Product that supports MK-737 PF-703: 3rd Party Option (paper feed) *1
LS-505: 3rd Party Option (finisher) *1
LS-506: 3rd Party Option (finisher)
Communication method Between the main body and MK-737: Serial communication or parallel communication
Between MK-737 and the 3rd Party Option: Parallel communication
Overall control 16 bit microcomputer control
*1: 1250, 1250P, and 1052 only
23.3 Machine data

Power source 5.1VDC +/- 5% (supplied from the supported product)
Maximum power consumption 10W
Weight 2.5kg

23.5 Connector
23.5.1 Connector housing
HRS No. (Supplier) No. of Part No. (Supplier) A B C D E

Pin
CL221-0281-1-05 37 CDC-37P-(05) 69.32 63.5 55.47 5.87 1.4
23.5.2 Connector pinning layout
1 19
20 37
Pin signal name Pin signal name

1 must be connected GND 20 NonConecting
2 NonConecting 21 NonConecting
3 must be connected GND 22 S0_Cathode
4 S0_Anode 23 S1_Cathode
C-56
11 S7_Anode 30 C0_Emitter
12 C0_Collector 31 C1_Emitter
19 C7_Collector

Note
C-57
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 24. IC-602C
24. IC-602C
24.1 Type
Type AIO to the engine (option)
24.2 Function
Resolution: Print: 1200 x 1200dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Scan: 200 x 200dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Gradation: RIP: 8bit/256 Gradation, 1bit/2 Gradation (Writing section of the main body: Equivalent to 256bit
Gradation)
Printable Area: Same as the main body.
Number of Print: 1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed: 100ppm (C1100) , 85ppm (C1085)
Page-description language: Adobe PostScript3 (PS3020), PDF direct print (PDF version 1.7), APPE (version 2.6), PDF/VT (version 2),
TIFF direct print (TIFF version 6 compliance), PPML (version 2.2), PCL5c compatible, PCL XL (PCL6
version 3) compatible
Printer Driver: PPD
• Windows Vista, 7, 8, 8.1, Server 2003, Server 2008, Server 2008 R2, Server 2012, and Server 2012 R2
*1
• Linux CUPS
PS Plug-In
• Windows Vista, 7, 8, 8.1, Server 2003, Server 2003 R2, Server 2008, Server 2008 R2, Server 2012, and
Server 2012 R2 *1
• MacOSX 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9 and 10.10 (PPC, Intel)
Printing Method: Pserver (IPX, SPX), LPD and LPR (TCP, IP), IPP (TCP, IP), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), Bonjour (TCP, IP),
Web service printing (TCP, IP), NPrinter and RPrinter (IPX, SPX), Raw Port (TCP, IP), SMB
*1 Includes 64bit.
24.3 Paper
Paper size Same as the main body.
Applicable paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Same as the main body.
24.4 Machine data

CPU Intel Core i5 2400 3.1 GHz
Memory Maximum 16GB
Details: 4GB (Standard of the main body)
+4GB x 3 (IC-602C)
SSD 2GB
HDD Maximum 2.5TB
Breakdown: 500GB x5 (IC-602C)
Interface Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T) with IPv6, USB

Temperature Same as the main body
Humidity Same as the main body

Note
C-58
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 25. GP-501
25. GP-501
25.1 Type
Type Multi-hole punch unit for ring binding
25.2 Modes of operation

Bypass mode The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing through the punch module. In this
mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch The paper moves from the printer to the punch module where it gets punched and then is routed to the
finisher.
25.3 Machine data

Punch unit size 12” (305mm) W x 40” (1016mm) H x 30.5” (775mm) D
Weight 170 lbs (80kg) when it is not packaged,
270 lbs (123kg) packaged (Pallet, Carton, PKG Inserts)
Color Top Cover. Orca Black, Lower covers. Cuttle Gray
AC Power Supply to GP-501 External power cord according to market destination.
DC 5V Supply to GP-501 Supplied by system to PCB contained within GP-501
System Power Supply Lines GP-501 Internal Lead-Through
• On upstream side: Wiring with connectors through cover-recess.
• On downstream side: Lock-style connector panel on the left side cover.
25.4 Software
Communication method i) Start-stop synchronization style, full duplex.
ii) 1 Start Bit, 8bit Data length, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Stop bit. Maximum Frame Length: 128 byte
iii) Hard flow control (CTS/RTS).
iv) Baud rate:
[Standard] 19200 bps
[ISW=Log file Transmissions] 78000 bps
Communication Content According Interface Specification (Also refer to Appendix B)
25.5 Electronic
Required signals to UP & RXD, RTS, CTS, TXD
Downstream connected units
25.6 Inputs
(1) Media Input from Printer
Alignment/ skew variance at pick Center justified ± 4mm
up
Line speed 290 to 1250 mm/s (Fixed speeds within this range)
Speed variance at pick up ± 2%
Sheet frequency 120 ppm maximum
(a) For Punching

Paper weight 20lb bond - 80lb cover
Plain Paper: 75gsm - 216gsm
Other Paper: 120gsm - 216gsm
Exception ProClick: LTR & A4 Limited to 200gsm
Paper type See appendix C
Maximum Sheet size Letter configuration 279 x 216mm
A4 configuration 297 x 210mm
(b) For Bypass

Paper weight 16lb bond - 93lb cover
64gsm - 350gsm
Paper type Coated, Pre-printed, High Quality, Plain, Book, Color, Rough, Label, OHP, Index
Transparency weight 5 -10 mil (0.127mm to 0.254mm)
Maximum bypass sheet size 13” x 24.8” (330 x 630mm)
Minimum bypass sheet size 3.74” x 5.47” (95 x 139mm)
C-59
(2) Power
Supply GP-501 individual power supply and power cord required.
Configurations by market Refer to the following table.
Machine Market Voltage (V) Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Paper size
1 US, Canada 115 +10/-15 % 3 60 81/2 x 11
2 Europe, Australia 220-240 +10/-15 % 1.8 50 A4
25.7 Outputs
Alignment/ skew at delivery ± 2mm or less for the pick up position
Speed variance at delivery ± 1% compared to speed variance at pick up
Chip tray capacity 2500 cycles (based on punched sheet count)
25.8 Performance
Punch accuracy Hole size ± 2%
Alignment ±0.5mm
Back gauge depth ±0.3mm
(1) Reliability
MCBJ: Punch 1 in 15,000 (20lb bond)
MCBJ: Bypass 1 in 65,000 (20lb bond)
25.9 Operation environment, storage, transportation

Normal Operation Temperature 10 °C – 30 °C
Normal Operation Humidity 10% - 80%
Storage Temperature -10 °C – 40 °C
Storage Humidity 10% - 80%
25.10 Safety/Regulatory
Noise emissions (measured to Punch Maximum of 78dBA (punching 216gsm cover)
ISO7779) Bypass Maximum of 70dBA
(1) Safety Compliance

UL & CSA standards CAN/USA-C22.2 No. 60950-01
UL60950-1 First Edition
TUV standards IEC 60950-1:2001
EN60950-1:2001
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance

EMC standards EN55024:1998 Amendments A1:2001 & A2:2003
EN61000-3-2:2000
EN61000-3-3:1995 Amendment A1:2001
EN55022:1998 Amendments A1:2000 & A2:2003
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11
FCC standards Class B
Part 15, Subpart B, Section A 15.107A &15.109a
C-60
25.11 Appendix A
Figure 1.1 Front
Figure 1.2 Entrance
25.12 Appendix B
Number Model Die set type Pins Pinshape Hole size Paper size Label artwork
(WxH or D)
1 DS-501 Ring Binder 3 Round 8mm 81/2 x 11
3Hole (0.316")
2 DS-502 Plastic Bind 19 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm 81/2 x 11

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
3 DS-503 WireBind –3:1 32 Square 4mm x 4mm 81/2 x 11
Square (0.156" x
0.156")
4 DS-504 WireBind –2:1 21 Rectangle 6.4mm x 5.4mm 81/ x 11
2
Rectangular (0.250" x
0.214")
5 DS-505 Color Coil 44 Round 4.4mm 81/2 x 11
(0.174")
C-61
6 DS-506 VeloBind 11 Round 3.2mm 81/2 x 11

(0.125")
7 DS-507 ProClick 32 Rectangle 5mm x 5.5mm 81/2 x 11

(0.197" x
0.217")
8 DS-508 Ring Binder 4 4 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
9 DS-509 Plastic Bind 21 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
10 DS-510 WireBind –3:1 34 Round 4.4mm A4
Round (0.174")
11 DS-511 WireBind –2:1 23 Round 6.38mm A4

Round (0.251")
12 DS-512 Color Coil 47 Round 4.4mm A4

(0.174")
13 DS-513 VeloBind 12 Round 3.2mm A4

(0.125")
14 DS-514 ProClick 34 Rectangle 5mm x 5.5mm A4

(0.197" x
0.217")
15 DS-515 Ring Binder 2 2 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
16 DS-516 Plastic Bind 20 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
17 DS-517 WireBind –2:1 23 Rectangle 6.4mm x 5.4mm A4
Rectangular (0.250" x
(Australia) 0.214")
18 DS-518 WireBind –3:1 34 Square 4mm x 4mm A4
Square (0.156" x
(Australia) 0.156")
25.13 Appendix C
Paper Type for Punching
Destination Paper Name Weight (g/m2) Punch *2
(1) US Hammermill Color Copy Paper - 120 Q-Zone
Photo White
Hammermill Tidal MP 75 All
Hammermill Fore MP 75 All
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 120 Q-Zone
Wausau Exact Gloss Coated 215 Q-Zone
(C1S) *1
Hammermill Color Copy Cover *1 163 Q-Zone
216 Q-Zone
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 160 Q-Zone
(2) EU Konica Minolta Original 80 All
Konica Minolta Profi 80 All
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra 80 All
Mondi Color Copy 200 Q-Zone
*1 For only C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 Q-Zone: Guaranteed only in Q-zone
All: Guaranteed in all environments
*Refer to the following graph
C-62
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
25.14 Glossary of terms

These terms are common to the punch and the bindery industry.
Cerlox The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round holes that are punched in the
document then the ends are cut off and crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5
holes per inch). This type of bind is horizontally flat and even folds around for easy handling of the
document.
Flush-cut covers Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has round corners.
Plastic binding The name that is used to describe most common binding method of GBC.
The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that appear to be the same as Twin Loop
but are slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto finishing devise.
Tabbing (hanging chad) “Tabbing” or “hanging chad” is when a hole is not punched cleanly through the material and a piece of
paper hangs from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and usually result in miss-feeds.
Twin loop Looped wire element that is fed into square or round holes in the document in a similar fashion to Plastic
Binding. The holes are either 2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed together
or crimped to create an attractive bind that is holizontally flat.
Velobind A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for its security and attractive look. The one draw-back for
VeloBind is that it is not a layflat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for its security feature.
C-63
26. GP-502
26.1 Type
Type Automatic Ring Binding Device (Ring Binder)
26.2 Functions
(1) Function
Bind mode Automatically punches and binds papers exited from the previous device and stocks in a book stock
section.
Through conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the previous device to the succeeding device without any process.
(2) Binding sheets

Front cover (g/m2) Back cover (g/m2) Body weight (g/m2) Minimum (sheets) Maximum (sheets)
75 102
80 96
90 85
Sheet 163 to 216 or OHP 163 to 216 1 sheet 100 7 76
paper: 1 sheet
110 70
120 64
(3) Book stock quantity

The full detection sensor detects the limits of the stock quantity. For the 75g/m2 body and the 216g/m2 front cover, refer to the followings.
7 sheets book Equivalent to the 30 sheets book
or until the upper limit is detected
(4) Others
Punch waste capacity Approximately 2,000 punches
*Detected by the full detection sensor and the punch conter
Element stacker Minimum 16 sheets
*Detected by the full detection sensor
Maximum Approximately 100 sheets
*Defined by the position of the label
26.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Bind mode A4, 81/2 x 11
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Requirements for the tab paper
a: Minimum: 5mm
b: Maximum: 13.5mm
b: R Minimum: 4.8mm
[1] [2]
[1] Tab paper with a shoulder: available

[2] Tab paper with no shoulder: unavailable
Through conveyance mode Same as the main body.
C-64
(2) Paper weight

Bind mode Body 75g/m2 to 120g/m2
Cover 163g/m2 to 216g/m2
OHP paper (front cover only)
Insert sheet 75g/m2 to 120g/m2
(3) Type of paper

Bind mode Body Plain, Fine, Coated*1
Cover Plain, Fine, Coated*1, OHP papers*2
Insert sheet Plain, Fine, Coated
*1 Only when it is connected to 1250/1250P/1052
*2 Front cover only. The paper feeding reliability, image, and damage are not assured. Q zone only.
(4) Recommended paper

Paper type Product name Weight Bind mode
Mono Color
Book Cover Book Cover
Inch Bond Hammermill 120g/m2 - - A -
Color Copy
Paper - Photo
White
Hammermill 75g/m2 A - A -
Tidal MP
Hammermill 75g/m2 A - - -
Fore MP
Gloss Wausau Exact 215g/m2 - A - -
Gloss Coated
(CIS)
Hammermill 120g/m2 - - A -
Color Copy
Glossy
Color paper Hammermill 163g/m2 - - - A
Color Copy
Cover 216g/m2 - - - A
Transparency 3M CG3700 - B - B
Metric Business Konicaminolta 80g/m2 A - A -
Original
Konicaminolta 80g/m2 A - A -
Profi
Mondi BIO TOP 80g/m2 A - - -
3 extra
Color paper Mondi Color 100g/m2 - - A -
Copy
120g/m2 - - A -
200g/m2 - A - A
Coated Mondi Color 170g/m2 - - - A
Copy Coated
Glossy
Transparency 3M CG3700 - B - B
* Recommended paper A: Evaluation standard paper for Japan, North America and Europe
Recommended paper B: Paper for original through check. Q zone is recommended
26.4 Performance specifications

(1) Input conditions
Paper grain No limitation
Centering ±8mm around the center
C-65
Paper curl amount

C
a In the bind mode, 10mm or less

In the through conveyance mode, 15mm or less
(2) Sticking specifications

Sticking specifications Peeling strength of the bind element: 8.9N or more
Sticking accuracy
a Finger skew: ±1.6mm

Sticking length Length: 10 steps in accordance with the book thickness
Step Sticking length x Step Sticking
(mm) length x
(mm)
1 38.6 6 25.4
2 36.8 7 22.6
3 34.0 8 19.9
4 30.9 9 16.7
5 28.5 10 15.8
X±1.8 mm X±1.8 mm
The variability among the sticking lengths in each step: x ±1.8mm
C-66
a The variability among the sticking lengths in a single book (The

variability between 9 elements): 5mm or less
(3) Book specifications

Hole position Position
㩷
3.6mm
Paper center
2.3mm
15.7mm 15.5mm
Hole position misalignment
D D
C
C
Paper center
Sub scan direction a: ±0.5 mm or less

Main scan direction b: ±1.5mm or less
Hole quality
Unacceptable-Protuberance too wide
Acceptable-Protuberance
Acceptable-Paper Fiber 1.5mm

3mm
1.0mm
0.38mm
C Zone B Zone A Zone
Unacceptable-Protuberance too long
Acceptable-Fuzziness
A Zone: Unacceptable. But paper fiber is acceptable.

B Zone: Regardless of 1.5mm or less in width.
C Zone: Regardless.
Element damage Grain damage Regardless of the grain damage such as the scratches by the nail.
Edge damage Regardless of 1.0mm x 1.0mm or less in size, and 1.0mm or less in height.
Hole damage (Back Dent of 0.6mm to 0.9mm in Regardless of 100 dents or less for 1 Box
side only) diameter
Dent of 1.0mm or more in diameter Regardless of 1 dent or less for 1 Box
26.5 Materials
Name RB-101 (Ring binder element for GP-502)
Type GBC ellips
Color 4 Colors
Black: WY1, Clear: WY2, White: WY3, Navy Blue: WY4
Thickness 0.36 to 0.43 mm (Base material only)
Service life 1 year after manufacture. Only for the ones that are saved under the following conditions.
Storage ambient condition: Temperature: 12°C to 32°C, Humidity: 25% to 80%
Transportation ambient condition: Temperature: 0°C to 70°C, Humidity: 0% to 90%
Percent defective 2/1000 sheets
* The incidence ratio about
double-stick tape trouble
C-67
26.6 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC 115V, 60Hz
Metric: AC 230V, 50Hz
Maximum power consumption Inch: 200W or less (2.2A or less)
Metric: 190W or less (0.98A or less)
Weight 183kg
Dimensions 655 (W) x 944 (D*1) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 Including the power box.


Note
C-68
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration
[29]
[28] [32]
[27]
[31]
[30] [33]
[26]
[25]
[34]
[24] [5]
[4]
[23]
[22]
[2]
[1] [6]
[21] [36]
[3]
[20] [37] [7]

[8]
[18] [19] [35]
[17] [9]
[16]
[10]
[11]
[14]
[12]
[15]
[13]
[1] Main body [2] IC Card Authentication (AU-201/AU-201S)

[3] Working table (WT-512) [4] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-626) *1
[5] Dehumidification heater (HT-506) [6] Large capacity paper feed unit (Scanner included)
(PF-708)
[7] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-707) [8] Intermediate conveyance unit (FA-502)
[9] Image controller (IC-308) [10] Image controller (IC-310)
[11] ORU kit (OR-102) [12] Image controller (IC-602C)
[13] Upgrade kit (UK-105) [14] Video interface kit (VI-507)
[15] Folding unit (FD-503) [16] Saddle stitch unit (SD-510)
[17] Punch kit (PK-522) [18] PI-502 coupling conveyance kit (MK-732)
[19] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-532) [20] Post inserter (PI-502)
[21] Perfect binder (PB-503) [22] Large capacity stacker handcart (LC-501)
[23] Large capacity stacker (LS-506) [24] Mount kit for 3rd Party Option (MK-737)
D-1
[25] Saddle stitch unit (SD-506) [26] Creaser unit (CR-101)

[27] Saddle stitch unit (SD-513) [28] Folding unit (FD-504)
[29] Trimmer unit (TU-503) [30] Relay conveyance unit (RU-510)
[31] Ring binder element (RB-101) [32] Smart Punch unit (GP-502)
[33] Multi-hole punch unit (GP-501) [34] Die set (DS-***) *2
[35] Humidification unit (HM-101) [36] Relay conveyance unit (RU-511)
[37] Electric charge control unit (RU-516) -
*1 Standard equipment.
*2 Selectable arbitrarily in accordance with the number and shape of pins.
1.2 Configuration for optional device

Note
• The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
• IC-308/310/602C are available with all combinations.
• The options can be connected each other. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
• RU-510 has to be connected for connecting GP-501.
• Install PF-708 when you use the copy function.
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed AC power to be
option connected to
1 PF-707*1 Main body External (PF-707)
2 PF-708*1 Main body External (PF-708)
3 PF-707*1 PF-707*1*2 Main body External (each PF-707)
4 PF-707*1 PF-708*1*2 Main body External (PF-707/708)
5 PF-707*1 PF-707*1*2 PF-707*1*2 Main body External (each PF-707)
6 PF-707*1 PF-707*1*2 PF-708*1*2 Main body External (each
PF-707/708)
*1 HT-506 can be connected arbitrarily to PF-707/708.
*2 Installation of FA-502 is required for PF-707/708.
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected to
1 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 External (RU-511/FD-503)
2 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 FS-532*2 External (RU-511/FD-503)
3 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-506 External (RU-511/FD-503)
4 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/FD-503/SD-513)
5 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 FS-532 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503)
6 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-513*5 PB-503 FS-532 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503/
SD-513)
7 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-506 FS-532 External (RU-511/FD-503)
8 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-513*5 FS-532 External (RU-511/FD-503/SD-513)
9 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 PB-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503)
10 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 PB-503 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503)
11 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503)
12 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-513*5 PB-503 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503/
SD-513)
13 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-511/FD-503)
14 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 External (RU-511/FD-503)
15 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-511/FD-503/SD-506)
16 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/FD-503/SD-513)
17 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/FD-503/PB-503)
18 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 LS-506 External (RU-511/FD-503)
19 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 External (RU-511/LS-506)
20 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-511/LS-506/SD-506)
21 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/LS-506/SD-513)
D-2
22 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/LS-506)

23 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/LS-506/PB-503)
24 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/LS-506/SD-506)
25 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 SD-513*5 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/LS-506/SD-513)
26 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/LS-506/SD-506/
PB-503)
27 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 SD-513*5 PB-503 External (RU-511/LS-506/SD-513/
PB-503)
28 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/LS-506/PB-503)
29 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 LS-506 External (RU-511/upstream LS-506)
30 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-511/upstream LS-506/
SD-506)
31 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 LS-506 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/upstream LS-506/
SD-513)
32 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/upstream LS-506)
33 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/upstream LS-506/
PB-503)
34 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-506 External (RU-511/SD-506)
35 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/SD-513)
36 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/SD-506)
37 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-513*5 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/SD-513)
38 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/SD-506/PB-503)
39 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-513*5 PB-503 External (RU-511/SD-513/PB-503)
40 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-506 PB-503 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/SD-506/PB-503)
41 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 SD-513*5 PB-503 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/SD-513/PB-503)
42 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 PB-503 External (RU-511/PB-503)
43 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/PB-503)
44 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FS-532*3 External (RU-511)
45 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/GP-501)
46 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 FD-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-511/GP-501/FD-503)
47 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 FD-503 SD-506 FS-532 External (RU-511/GP-501/FD-503)
48 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 FD-503 SD-513* FS-532 External (RU-511/GP-501/FD-503/
5 SD-513)
49 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/GP-501/SD-506)
50 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 SD-513*5 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/GP-501/SD-513)
51 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/GP-501/LS-506)
52 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/GP-501/LS-506/
PB-503)
53 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-511/GP-501/LS-506/
SD-506)
54 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-506 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/GP-501/LS-506/
SD-513)
55 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 PB-503 External (RU-511/GP-501/PB-503)
56 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-501 RU-510 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/GP-501/PB-503)
57 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/GP-502)
58 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 FD-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-511/GP-502/FD-503)
59 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/GP-502/SD-506)
60 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 SD-513*5 FS-532*4 External (RU-511/GP-502/SD-513)
61 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/GP-502/LS-506)
62 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-511/GP-502/LS-506/
PB-503)
63 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-511/GP-502/LS-506/
SD-506)
64 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 LS-506 SD-513*5 External (RU-511/GP-502/LS-506/
SD-513)
D-3
65 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 PB-503 External (RU-511/GP-502/PB-503)

66 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-511/GP-502/PB-503)
67 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 FD-503 SD-506 FS-532 External (RU-511/GP-502/FD-503)
68 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 GP-502 FD-503 SD-513*5 FS-532 External (RU-511/GP-502/FD-503/
SD-513)
69 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-506 GP-502 FS-532 External (RU-511/FD-503/GP-502)
70 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 SD-513*5 GP-502 FS-532 External (RU-511/FD-503/GP-502/
SD-513)
71 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 GP-502 FS-532*2 External (RU-511/FD-503/GP-502)
72 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 MK-737 3rd party option External (RU-511/LS-506)
73 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 LS-506 LS-506 MK-737 3rd party External (RU-511/upstream LS-506)
option
74 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 MK-737 3rd party External (RU-511/FD-503)
option
75 Main body RU-516 RU-511*1 FD-503 LS-506 LS-506 MK-737 3rd party External (RU-511/FD-503)
option
*1 HM-101 can be connected arbitrarily to RU -511.
*2 SD-510 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-532.
*3 SD-510, PK-522 or PI-502+MK732 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-532.
*4 PK-522 or PI-502+MK732 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-532.
*5 FD-504, TU-503, or CR-101 can be connected arbitrarily to SD-513.
1.2.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option
Combination of the main body and the IC option AC power to be connected
to
1 Main body IC-602C - - -
2*1 Main body IC-308 VI-507 - External (IC-308)
3*2 Main body IC-308 VI-507 UK-105 External (IC-308)
4*1 Main body IC-310 VI-507 - External (IC-310)
5*2 Main body IC-310 VI-507 UK-105 External (IC-310)
*1 When PF-708 is not connected.

*2 When PF-708 is connected.
D-4
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
[15] [1]
[14]
[13] [2]
[12] [3]
[11]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[8] [6]
[7]
[1] Operation panel section [2] Write section

[3] Developing section [4] Charging section
[5] Registration section [6] Intermediate conveyance section
[7] Toner collection section [8] 2nd transfer, separation section
[9] Duplex section [10] Reversal section
[11] Paper exit section [12] Fusing section
[13] Photo conductor section [14] Toner supply section
[15] Intermediate transfer section -
D-5
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
3.1 Straight paper exit mode
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[2] [1]
[1] PF paper feed [2] Intermediate conveyance section
[3] RU-511 conveyance [4] RU-516 conveyance
[5] Exit conveyance [6] Transfer, fusing conveyance
[7] Registration paper feed (common) -
3.2 Reversing exit mode

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[2] [1]
D-6
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3.3 Duplex mode

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[3] ADU conveyance [4] ADU reverse conveyance
D-7
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
USB USB RS232C LAN

IC I/F I/F I/F I/F
NVRAM DF USBRYB
ANTB HDD OB
CCD IPB/S RFIDCB EXPB
RU
PF IPB/P IPB/M
MFPB
MEMB HDD FS FD LS SD PB GP GP
Write
Section MEMB
RU
PRCB
Fusing
ACDB CDB DCPS HVPS TDB
Unit
BRB M FM SD PS M FM PS FM M CL SD SW PS
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[1] SATA [2] Individual signal line

[3] Other bus [4] UART bus
[5] Clock-synchronized serial bus [6] Image bus
Board name Purpose of board ISW target
MFP board (MFPB) Overall condition control Target
Main image processing board (IPB/M) Image processing control for writing Target
Printer control board (PRCB) Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor Target
PH image processing board (IPB/P) Image processing control for PH Non-target
Scanner image processing board (IPB/S) Image processing control for scanner (option) Non-target
BR board (BRB) Fusing belt brake switching control Non-target
Expansion board (EXPB) You cannot install the expansion board for IC-602 and the VIF board Non-target
at the same time.
D-8
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5.1 Image creation flow and functions
Step Process Functions
Step 1 Charging process Forms a charge layer on the drum.
Step 2 Laser exposure process Forms an electrostatic latent image on the drum.
Step 3 Developing process Makes the electrostatic latent image to the visible image.
Step 4 Intermediate transfer process In order to form an image, composites the
monochromatic (YMCK) visible image on each drum on
the intermediate transfer belt.
Step 5 2nd transfer process Transfers the image on the intermediate transfer belt to
paper.
Step 6 Separation process Separates paper after the toner transfer from the
intermediate transfer belt.
Sub step 1 Assist neutralizing After the 1st transfer, neutralizes the accumulated toner
on the intermediate transfer belt and the surface of the
photo conductor drum.
Sub step 2 Drum cleaning Removes the adhered toner on the photo conductor
drum after the intermediate transfer.
Sub step 3 Exposure before charge Removes the potential remains on the drum after the
drum cleaning.
Sub step 4 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning Removes the adhered toner on the intermediate transfer
belt after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5 2nd transfer belt cleaning Removes the adhered toner on the 2nd transfer belt
after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 6 Toner collection Collects the toner that is removed at the drum cleaning,
the intermediate transfer belt cleaning and the 2nd
transfer belt cleaning. (Not displayed in the following
picture.) )
Sub step 3
Sub step 2 Step 3
[14] Step 2
[13]
[1]
Sub step 4
Step 4 [2]
Sub step 1 [4] [3]
Step 1
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
Step 6
[8]
Step 5
[7]
[5]
[6] Sub step 5
[1] Developing unit [2] Writing unit
[3] Charging corona [4] Erase lamp (EL)
[5] Blade (2nd transfer belt cleaning) [6] 2nd transfer roller/Lw
[7] 2nd transfer belt [8] Separation neutralizing section
[9] 2nd transfer roller/Up [10] Intermediate transfer belt
[11] Blade (drum cleaning) [12] Assist neutralizing section
D-9
[13] Blade (Intermediate transfer belt) [14] Drum
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)

Applies the high DC voltage (negative) to the charging corona with gold coated tungsten wire, and charges the negative charge to the drum by
discharge of wire. The charging corona has the charger control plate, and it makes the charge on the surface of the drum even. The
photoconductor is prepared for 4 colors (YMCK).
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)
[3] Charging corona [4] Charger control plate
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step 2)

The charge on the photo conductor drum has a characteristic that it is neutralized and disappears when the light is exposed. In order to create
an image on the photo conductor drum using this characteristic, exposes the laser beam to the image area. This image is called an electrostatic
latent image. The laser beam which is exposed to each of YMCK drum corresponds to the color data separated into 4 at the image processing
section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] Writing unit [2] Laser beam
[3] Neutralized section [4] Charge (negative)
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)

The non-image points of the electrostatic latent image on the drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized. As the toner is
negatively charged, it is attracted to the image points on the drum. As a result, a visible toner image is created on the drum. This operation is
referred to as "development."
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)

[3] Developing roller -
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)

The toner on each of the Y, M, C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt and composed on it. This toner
transfer from the drums to the intermediate belt is referred to as "intermediate transfer" and it is performed in order of Y, M, C, K.
At the intermediate transfer, a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the 1st transfer roller that is provided on the back surface of the
intermediate transfer belt. Thus, the intermediate transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than a positive potential of the each drum
surface so that the toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt.
D-10
[8] [3]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[4] [3]
[5]
[2]
[1] Drum/Y [2] Drum/M

[3] Charge (negative) [4] Toner/M
[5] 1st transfer roller/M [6] 1st transfer roller/Y
[7] Intermediate transfer belt [8] Toner/Y
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)

The operation to transfer the image that is composed of four colors on the intermediate transfer belt to the paper is referred to as 2nd transfer.
At 2nd transfer, the 2nd transfer belt on the 2nd transfer unit which is mounted on the bottom part of the intermediate transfer belt conveys the
paper while the 2nd transfer belt presses it against the intermediate transfer belt. At this time, the 2nd transfer roller/Up on the back side of the
intermediate transfer belt is applied a DC bias (negative) at high voltage, and the electric field is produced between the 2nd transfer roller/Up
and the 2nd transfer roller/Lw mounted inside the 2nd transfer belt. It moves the toner on the intermediate transfer belt onto the paper.
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller/Lw [4] 2nd transfer belt
[5] 2nd transfer unit [6] 2nd transfer roller/Up
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)

At 2nd transfer, the 2nd transfer roller/Up negatively charges the paper on which is being transferred. It causes the paper and the intermediate
transfer belt to attract each other and the paper is electrostatic absorbed with the intermediate transfer belt and conveyed. The gap of the
D-11
curvature between the intermediate transfer belt and the 2nd transfer belt performs separation. In order to neutralize the charges of the paper
and the 2nd transfer belt, applies the high voltage AC and DC bias to the discharge section.
[1]
[2]
[5] [3]
[4]
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller/Lw [4] 2nd transfer belt
[5] Separation neutralizing section -
5.8 Auxiliary discharge (Sub step 1)

After the 1st transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the drum. The toner is negatively charged and it has the adsorptive property to the
drum surface. It makes removing of it from the drum difficult. To lower its adsorptive property, the auxiliary discharge section neutralizes the
charged potential of the toner. The auxiliary discharge section also neutralizes the potential of the 1st-transferred toner on the intermediate
transfer belt.
In order to perform the auxiliary discharge, apply the AC and DC biases at high voltage to the auxiliary discharge section. In this way, the
potential of the intermediate transfer belt is neutralized.
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]

[1] Drum [2] Remaining toner (neutralized)
[3] Auxiliary discharge section [4] Transferred toner (neutralized)
[5] Intermediate transfer belt [6] Transferred toner (negative)
[7] Remaining toner (negative) -
5.9 Drum cleaning (Sub step 2)

After the 1st transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the drum. The process to remove that toner is referred to as "drum cleaning."
In order to conduct the drum cleaning, scrap the toner adhering to the drum with the edge of the urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Cleaning blade
D-12
[3] Remaining toner -
5.10 Exposure before charging (Sub step 3)

After completion of drum cleaning, no toner remains but a subtle potential remains on the drum surface. With this condition, the charging for the
next print is not performed normally. Therefore, the exposure which is different from the laser exposure is performed to neutralize the potential
on the drum surface completely. This process is referred to as "exposure before charge."
This machine uses the erase lamp (EL) for this process.
[1]
[3] [2]
[1] Drum [2] Erase lamp (EL)
[3] Remained electric charge -
5.11 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 4)

After the 2nd transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the Intermediate transfer belt. The process to remove that toner is referred to as
"intermediate transfer belt cleaning."
In order to conduct the intermediate transfer belt cleaning, scrap the toner adhering to the intermediate transfer belt with the edge of the
urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Remaining toner

[3] Cleaning blade -
5.12 2nd transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 5)

The 2nd transfer belt gets dirty because the toner on the intermediate transfer belt contacts it directly. The process to remove that toner is
referred to as "2nd transfer belt cleaning."
In order to conduct the 2nd transfer belt cleaning, scrap the toner adhering to the 2nd transfer belt surface with the edge of the urethane rubber
plate which is called blade.
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Cleaning blade

[3] Toner [4] 2nd transfer belt
D-13
5.13 Toner collection (Sub step 6)

The toner that is cleaned at the drum cleaning section, the intermediate transfer belt cleaning section and the 2nd transfer belt cleaning section
is collected to the waste toner box via the toner collection screw.
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1] Drum/Y waste toner inlet [2] Drum/M waste toner inlet
[3] Drum/C waste toner inlet [4] Drum/K waste toner inlet
[5] 2nd transfer unit waste toner inlet [6] Waste toner box
[7] Intermediate transfer belt waste toner inlet -
D-14
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL

• The image creation is conducted in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, but the start of the image creation control is when the 2nd
transfer belt motor (M40) becomes active [1]. The intermediate transfer belt motor (M9) also becomes active [1] based on the timing that
M40 becomes active.
• The drum motor/Y (M1), the drum motor/M (M2), the drum motor/C (M3), and the drum motor/K (M4) becomes active at the same time [2]
that is based on the timing that M40 becomes active.
• The 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11) and the 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M41) becomes active based on the timing that
the drum motor becomes active [2].
• The timing that the erase lamp and the charging corona of each color become active is when the drum motor becomes active [2].
• The timing [4] that the developing bias of each color (DC) becomes active is when each charging corona becomes active [3].
• The timing [5] that the developing motor of each color becomes active is when the yellow charging corona becomes active [3].
• The timing to start the writing of each color (1st sheet) [6] is a specified period of time after the charging corona becomes active [3].
• The timing that the developing bias (AC) and the 1st transfer of each color become active [7] [8] is based on the writing start timing (1st
sheet) [6] of each color.
• The timing that the separation becomes active [9] is based on the writing start timing (1st sheet) [6 ] of yellow.
• The timing that the 2nd transfer becomes active [11] [13] is based on each writing start timing [10] [12] of black.
• The timing that the developing bias (AC) of each color become inactive [16] is based on the timing that the writing of the last paper becomes
inactive. [14 ]
• The timing that the 1st transfer of each color becomes inactive [17] is based on the timing that the 2nd transfer becomes inactive. [21]
• The timing that the assist neutralizing of each color becomes inactive [20] is based on the timing that the 1st transfer becomes inactive. [17]
• Deactivates M11 [22] based on the timing that the 1st transfer becomes inactive. [17]
• Deactivates M41 [22] based on the timing that the 2nd transfer becomes inactive. [21]
• The timing that the developing motor of each color becomes inactive [15] is based on the timing that the developing bias (AC) of each color
becomes inactive. [16]
• After a specified period of time since the last paper passes the 2nd transfer and the separation section, the separation charger becomes
inactive.
• Deactivates the charging corona of all colors at the same time that is based on the timing that the 1st transfer becomes inactive [17].
• The timing that the developing bias (DC) of each color becomes inactive [19] is based on the timing that the charging corona of each color
becomes inactive. [18]
• Deactivates the drum motor of each color and the erase lamp at the same time that is based on the timing that the charging corona of each
color becomes inactive [18].
• After a specified period of time after the 1st transfer pressure release and the 2nd transfer pressure release completes, deactivates M40
and M9 [23] [24].
D-15
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
[1][2][3] [4][5] [6] [7][8] [14] [15] [16] [17][18] [19] [20]
Drum motor/Y (M1)

Developing motor/Y (M5)
Erase lamp/Y (EL/Y)
Charging/Y (HVPS/1-1)
Writing/Y (LASDB/Y)
Developing bias/Y (DC) (HVPS/1-1)
Developing bias/Y (AC) (HVPS/1-1)
1st transfer/Y (HVPS/2)
Assist neutralizing/Y (HVPS/3)
Drum motor/M (M2)
Developing motor/M (M6)
Erase lamp/M (EL/M)
Charging/M (HVPS/1-1)
Writing/M (LASDB/M)
Developing bias/M (DC) (HVPS/1-1)
Developing bias/M (AC) (HVPS/1-1)
1st transfer/M (HVPS/2)
Assist neutralizing/M (HVPS/3)
Drum motor/C (M3)
Developing motor/C (M7)
Erase lamp/C (EL/C)
Charging/C (HVPS/1-2)
Writing/C (LASDB/C)
Developing bias/C (DC) (HVPS/1-2)
Developing bias/C (AC) (HVPS/1-2)
1st transfer/C (HVPS/2)
Assist neutralizing/C (HVPS/3)
Drum motor/K (M4)
Developing motor/K (M8)
Erase lamp/K (EL/K)
Charging/K (HVPS/1-2)
Writing/K (LASDB/K)
Developing bias/K (DC) (HVPS/1-2)
Developing bias/K (AC) (HVPS/1-2)
1st transfer/K (HVPS/2)
Assist neutralizing/K (HVPS/3)
Intermediate transfer belt motor (M9)
2nd transfer belt motor (M40)
1st transfer pressure release motor (M11)
2nd transfer pressure release motor (M41)
2nd transfer
Separation(HVPS/4)
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [21] [22] [23] [24]
[1] M40 ON [2] M1 ON

[3] Charger/Y ON [4] Developing bias/Y (DC) ON
[5] M5 ON [6] The writing/Y starts
[7] Developing bias/Y (AC) ON [8] 1st transfer/Y starts
[9] Separation ON [10] Writing/K started (1st sheet)
[11] 2nd transfer started (1st sheet) [12] Writing/K started (2nd sheet)
[13] 2nd transfer started (2nd sheet) [14] Writing/Y completed
[15] M5 OFF [16] Developing bias/Y (AC) OFF
[17] 1st transfer/Y ends [18] Charger/Y OFF
[19] Developing bias/Y (DC) OFF [20] Assist neutralizing/Y OFF
[21] 2nd transfer/Y ends [22] 1st transfer pressure release, 2nd transfer pressure
release completed
[23] M40 OFF [24] M9 OFF
D-16
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7. PROCESS SPEED
7. PROCESS SPEED
7.1 bizhub PRESS C1100
There are three types of process speed for this machine; 460 mm/s, 400 mm/s, and 230 mm/s.
The process speed during printing is 460 mm/s regardless of the paper type or the paper weight.
Paper weight Paper type
Plain, Fine, Color Coated (GL, GO, ML, MO)
55 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 460 mm/s -
81 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 460 mm/s 460 mm/s
Note
• Change setting from [Paper Setting] - [Process Adjustment] - [Shorten Tray Change Time (Mixed Weight Job)] to change the
process speed.
• When you select [Short], the process speed is 400 mm/s.
• When you select [Shorter], the process speed is 230 mm/s.

There are two types of process speed for this machine; 400 mm/s, and 230 mm/s.
The process speed during printing is 400 mm/s regardless of the paper type or the paper weight.
Paper weight Paper type
Plain, Fine, Color Coated (GL, GO, ML, MO)
55 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 400 mm/s -
81 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 400 mm/s 400 mm/s
Note
• Change setting from [Paper Setting] - [Process Adjustment] - [Shorten Tray Change Time (Mixed Weight Job)] to change the
process speed.
• When you select [Short], the process speed is 230 mm/s.
D-17
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085
E SERVICE TOOL
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number Name Shape Remark
- Isopropyl alcohol
50gaf2c142na
- Aceton
50gaf2c142na
000V-19-## Setting powder 25g
50gaf2c143na
A1RFPP00## Setting toner 30g
A50UPP0100 Setting toner number 2 30g
000V-18-## Cleaning pad 10pcs/1 pack
50gaf2c144na
65AA-992## Hydro-wipe 10pcs/1 pack
8050fs3005
00GR0026## Multemp FF-RM (Fluotribo MH) 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0002## Plas guard No.2 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0022## Molykote EM-30L 25g
50gaf2c145na
A0N9PP67## Magnalube-G Teflon Grease 0.75 oz
- WD-40 Company 3-IN-ONE
A4EUPP0000# MH Surf FT-240 30 g
1.2 Jig list

1.2.1 Jig list
9J06PJP1## Color chart (A3) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
E-1

9J06PJP2## Color chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
4040PJP1## Test chart (A3) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
4040PJP2## Test chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
120A9711## Adjustment chart Quantity: 1

For DF
8050fs3005
65AA995## Fusing adjustment paper (16 sheets, A3) Quantity: 1

For multi feed detection
8050fs3005
00VC-2-0## Drum cover Quantity: 4
8050fs3017
00VD-100## Blower brush Quantity: 1
8050fs3018
56UAPJG0## Multimeter Quantity: 1
8050fs3019
A5AWRX00## Loading wagon Quantity: 1
A1RFRX01## Developer ejection jig Quantity: 1
- Management Tool Quantity: 1

Application for ORU-M Use for
managing the counter information
of the unit.
A1RFPJG1## RFID reader/writer Quantity: 1

Other than Europe
9J06PJG1 ## DF reading chart Quantity: 1
E-2

A0H2RX00## Trimmer unit support board Quantity: 1
For SD-506
A4F4PJG1## Staple adjustment jig Quantity: 1

For SD-510
A729PJG0## Staple adjustment jig kit Quantity: 1

For SD-513
A1DUPJG1## Cleaning jig Quantity: 1

For cleaning the inside of the
machine
A4F6PPH2## Generator, Motor Crank-wires Quantity: 1

For GP-502
1.3 Tool list

1.3.1 Tool list
- Wrench (17 mm) Quantity: 1
Thickness: 7.5 mm or less
- Wrench (13 mm) Quantity: 1

Thickness: 4.4 mm or less
1.4 Mail remote notification system

1.4.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the main body with using the Internet
mail (E-mail).
Use of this system dispenses not only with printing the list on the paper but also visiting the users. Send an E-mail with a simple keyword to the
main body, and receive the list prints from the main body by E-mail.
1.4.2 Operating environment

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The operation of the functions is
available while in jams, SC, and a low power mode. Under the condition that the main body is not operating, an E-mail sent to the main body
does not get lost but is handled when the main body is activated again.
1. The main body has a server that can receive an E-mail using POP3 or the IMAP protocol.
2. The copier has a mail server that can send an E-mail using SMTP protocol.
3. In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
• When the main power switch (SW1) is OFF
• When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON
• The copier is in the auto shut-off mode.
• When the "Enhance Security Mode" is active (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
1.4.3 Major functions

To Send a mail with a simple keyword, allows you to use the following functions.
1. You can receive the list print information of the main body that you want to obtain by E-mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 14 lists.
• Mode Memory List
• User Management List
• Font Pattern List
• Machine Management List
• Adjustment Data List
• Parameter List
• Use Management List
• Counter List
E-3
• Coverage Data List

• Communication Log List
• Audit Log Report
• ORU-M Maintenance History
• Maintenance History
• RFID Information List
2. A password that was used for the certification of the mail can be changed.
3. You can receive directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" by using E-mail.
To use the preceding functions, send a mail with a simple keyword (command).
For particulars of the command, refer to "E.1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system".
1.4.4 Initial setting

To use "Mail remote notification system", register the network parameter on the main body and the account on the mail server.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

Place the IP address of the copier from the operation panel to connect the copier to the network. When this setting has been already made,
proceed to "E.1.4.4.(2) Setting from the Web browser".
(a) Procedure
1.Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2.Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3.Press [05 Network Setting].
4.Press [01 NIC Setting].
When IC-602 is installed, press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
6. Restart the main body.
Note
• The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the
network.
Note
• To place the space in all items is not available. The following characters cannot be used for setting an E-mail address.
( ) < > ; : “ [ ]/
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections following the error message. When
not to correct the error, a program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is placed on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the operation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
Note
• If IC-602 is connected, the screen "PAGE SCOPE Web Connection" appears. To display "Main page" of the Web Utilities,
click the icon "Web Utilities" after you logout.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3. "Main page screen"

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the CE password of service mode. (Default: "92729272")
E-4
5. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [E-mail Initial Setting].
6. "E-mail Initial Setting screen"
Setting item Details

Enable E-mail notification When you use the mail remote notification system, select "ON." The default is "OFF."
Time difference The time at which a mail was sent out is calculated based on this value. For the time difference
setting, enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00
minute) to +1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is placed.
(Example: For Japan, enter + 900.)
Sending mail Place the Host Name or IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server When you use SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
SMTP port number Place the port number of the SMTP server. For the default, 25 is placed.
Sending mail (SMTP) server Place the time-out of the SMTP connection. The default is for 5 minutes.
time out
Interval between fetching mails The interval of the main body checking the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
(An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) To take the consideration of
the load on the network, this range is placed at the interval of 10 minutes.
Receiving mail server Place the Host Name or IP address of the receiving mail server.
When you use SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
Kind of mail spool Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For the default, [POP3] is selected.
POP3 (IMAP) Select "Enable default" when you use 110 for POP3, and 143 for IMAP. When you use other than
port number the default, select "Custom" and enter a port number to use.
User name on the server Enter an account name that was assigned to the main body using the receiving mail server.
Password Enter a password to this account name.
E-mail address of this copy Enter the mail address of the main body its own. The address is normally "mail account
machine name@incoming mail server name."
Address
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail who was sent from the main body. No
entry causes no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the main body. The main body
uses this password for the security check.
E-5
Also Notice to the administrator • Not transfer: Default

• Only illegal mail: When a mail received by the main body does not match with this password, or
when the mail size is in excess of a fixed size (10k bytes), transfer the mail.
• all mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote notification system."
Administrator E-mail address When "only illegal mail" or "all mails" is selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay time in replay Choose whether to indicate in the mail the interval (the amount of time required) from the time when
mail a mail is sent to the main body to the time when the main body receives it. The default is "No."
Enable POP (IMAP) After the mail receiving server makes the authentication, a selection is made to decide whether to
before SMTP send out the mail or not. For the default, "Send" is selected.
Retry polling when the machine POP polling option in machine busy state. For the default, "Send" is selected.
is busy
Enable SMTP Authentication Input the user name and the password when you use it. The default is "No".
7. After completion of entry, click [Apply].

8. Conduct the mail sending, receiving test.
• Click "Test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collectively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly
received.
When a test failed, recheck the setting items following the error message.
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail Address for Machine"
that was placed in Step6.
Receiving test A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from "E-mail Address
for Machine" that was placed in Step6.
1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the main body and the details of options, refer to the following table.
Command Option Description
Minimum Minimum
input input
GETLOG G ModeMemory M Send back [Mode Memory List] by mail.
UserSetting U Send back [User Management List] by mail.
FontPattern F Send back [Font Pattern List] by mail.
Management Ma Send back [Machine Management List] by mail.
Adjustment A Sent back [Adjustment Data List] by mail.
Parameter P Send back [Parameter List] by mail.
UseManagement UseM Send back [Use Management List] by mail.
Counter C Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CoverageData Cov Send back [Coverage Data List] by mail.
CommunicationLog Com Send back [Communication Log List] by mail.
Audit Log Au Send back [Audit Log List] by mail.
ORUMaintenance O Send back [ORU-M Maintenance History] by mail.
Maintenance Mai Send back [Maintenance History] by mail.
RFIDinformation R Send back [RFID Information List] by mail.
ALL AL Send back all preceding items by mail.
Not specified Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CHPASS C [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] Change a password that is used for the certification of a
mail.
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP H Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating
instructions of the preceding commands.
1.4.6 Mail sending

• A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input that is listed on the preceding
table.
• The following information are required on the mail.
• To: E-mail address of this copy machine
• Subject: CE password
• Body: Command and option
Note
• The mail software can be used without any discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail using browser.
• Use the mail software in the text mode. The HTML mail is not available.
• For the mail software, as a condition for the reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as the maximum number of
characters that are displayed in a line.
E-6
• One or more spaces or tab are required between a command and an option that are written in the mail. The line break is not
available.
• Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in one-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters). When there is any
other characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent back.
• Start a command that was written in the mail from the line head without space. When there is a space or tab found at the line head,
the line is ignored.
• The maximum number of commands available in a mail is 10. Commands exceeding 10 are ignored.
• Avoid attaching a file to a mail who is sent to the main body. When the attached file size is large, the main body handles that mail
as a nuisance mail.
• Avoid adding a signature to a mail who is sent to the main body. The copier handles a signature on a mail as a command and
send back an error mail.
• In the case the power is shut off while the main body is sending a mail or the main body is printing the list print, the same mail can
be sent back twice.
• The main body can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time. The main body can receive up to mails from the
mail server at the same time.
1.5 Machine setting data Import

1.5.1 Outline
"Machine setting data Import" is a function that imports the following setting data to the machine by using the Web browser.
• The color measurement chart file of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj (Scan Adjustment)"
• The Web setting file of "Job History List".
Note
• For the information about getting each setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the authorized
distributor.
1.5.2 Setting method

(1) Setting from the touch panel
Configure the IP address of the copier from the touch panel and connect the copier to the network.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
1.Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2.Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3.Press [05 Network Setting].
4.Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
When IC-602 is installed, press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
Note
• The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Input the setting on the web browser to import the setting file to the copier. In order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
• When the proxy is placed on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web. For particulars, contact the
network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
• Recommended Web browser: Internet Explorer 8.0 or later
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the touch panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
Note
• If IC-602 is connected, the screen "PAGE SCOPE Web Connection" appears. To display "Main page" of the Web Utilities,
click the icon "Web Utilities" after you logout.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
E-7

Password: Enter the CE password of service mode. (Default: "92729272")
5. Enter the service mode.

Note
• When the copier is not in the service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import] is unavailable.
6. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [Machine setting data Import].
7. "Machine setting data Import screen"

According to the importing data, click "Gray Chart" or "A" to "J".
• "Gray Chart": Color measurement chart file of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj (Scan Adjustment)"
• "A" to "J": Web setting file of "Job History List" (For the detailed procedure, refer to "E.1.6.3 Setting method".)

Click [Browse] and select the setting file.
Note
• No error check is proceeded for the Web setting file. Be careful when the import is proceeded.

Click [Submit].
E-8

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Deactivate and activate the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
Note
• To enable the setting data, switch off and on the SW2 and initialize the HDD.
• Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body and options is completed. The imported setting files are
possibly not take effect when you access the Web Utility soon after the OFF or ON of SW2.
1.6 Job history list

1.6.1 Outline
"Job History List" is the function to refer to the output history of the copier by using Web browser. The job history that is displayed on the
operation panel is stored in the memory and deleted when the SW2 is deactivated. However, with this function, the job history is stored in the
built-in HDD so that the users can refer it even after the SW2 becomes inactive.
1.6.2 Major functions

The job history list allows you to use the following functions.
• Displaying and downloading of job history by 100 data.
• Store of the job history up to 1 million (The number of histories to save is selectable from 100,000, 500,000 or 1 million. Select 0 to
deactivate the job history utility.)
• Up to 10 types (A to J) of setting files can be imported from the CE page.
• The contents that was displayed can be changed for each of the 10 setting files (A to J)
Note
• The history data that is displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is stored in the built-in
HDD. Therefore the data is not stored in case the proof is output or a jam is caused.
• Send History of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to SMB, for example) is not saved.
• If the built-in HDD is damaged, the data cannot be recovered.
• When DIPSW2-0 is "0", "Job History List" is not available.
1.6.3 Setting method

When you use the Job history list in the initialization, the 4 items of the job history are displayed. However import of the customized setting file
can display other items. For the information about getting this setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the
authorized distributor.
The following are the display items of the job history in the initialization
• History number
• Job number
• Mode
• Date and time of occurrence of the job
(1) Setting procedure

1. Display the "Machine setting data Import screen". (Refer to E.1.5.2 Setting method)

Click each symbol (A to J) that is displayed on [Import datatype change] -[Web setting].
E-9
Note
• The setting file that was imported to A is appeared on "Administrator Setting screen" in initial setting, therefore selecting A
is recommended.

When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click [Browse] key, and specify the setting file.
Note
• The setting file name does not need to be [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the main body with names of
joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.

Click [Submit].

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Deactivate and activate the power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
Note
• To enable the setting data, switch off and on the SW2 and initialize the HDD.
• Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body and options is completed. The imported setting files are possibly
not take effect when you access the Web Utility soon after the OFF or ON of SW2.

Click [Machine Manager Setting].
7. Enter the user name and the administrator password on "Administrator Setting Log in" the page, and click "OK".
User name: admin (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the password of the administrator of the copier(default is "00000000".)
E-10
Note
• They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for maintenance
8. "Machine Manager Setting screen"

Click [Job History List].
9. "Job History List screen"
To update the page, you can change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
• In case the customized file is imported to "B".
• When IC-602 is connected, the following is shown.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
10. "Job History List screen"

Click [JobHistory list].
Note
• This operation places the customized item number in the order.
• The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click. However, when IC-602 is connected, "http://
X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi" is shown.
(2) In case the writing of the setting file fails

When the writing of the setting file fails, the following message is displayed. In this case, conduct the following procedure to see if the built-in
HDD has malfunction and requires the replacement of the HDD or not.
1. Conduct the step 1 to step10 of the procedure (a) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. When the import of the
setting file fails after you conduct these processes, conduct the step 2 and the following steps.
"Service Mode menu screen"
Press [05 State Confirmation].
Press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. [I/O Check Mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. Press the Access button.
5. Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6. Press the start button.
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start button and perform the HDD bad sectors check and the recovery again.
When “OK” appears, conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. If the
writing of the setting file fails after you conduct these processes, the trouble of the HDD is considerable. Replace it with new one.
Note
• When the HDD is replaced, execute "Utility" - "Administrator Setting" - "Security Setting" - "HDD Management Setting" -
"HDD Restore/Backup". (Only when the customer has the backed up data)
• The job history data is not restored after the execution of "HDD Restore/Backup".
1.7 Counter list acquisition using USB memory

1.7.1 Outline
Connection of the USB memory to the service port saves the counter list information in the USB memory in the text file format.
1.7.2 List that can be acquired

1. Counter list
2. Mode Memory List
3. User setting list
4. Use management list
5. Audit log report
6. Machine Management List
7. Adjustment Data List
8. Coverage Data List
9. Maintenance History
Note
• When you place DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
• When you select "1" on DIPSW15-0, the ORU-M Maintenance History and RFID Information List are also stored.
• When the security enhance mode is enabled, no file is output when you press [HELP] - [Utility] - [Check Job Setting].
E-11
1.7.3 Acquisition method

(1) Preparation
1. Proceed to [Utility] - [User Setting] - [System Setting] - [Service Port Device Setting] - [Service Port Device] and select [ON].
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [Details Counter].
3. "Details Counter List screen"
Press [HELP] - [Utility/Counter] -[Check Job Setting] on the operation panel.
4. After the following message appears, remove the USB memory.
Note
• Do not remove the USB memory before the message disappears. The data is being output to the file while the message is
displayed. If you remove the USB memory while the message is displayed, you cannot save the file properly.
(3) File storage location

The list print data file is saved to the root directory in the USB memory.
(4) File name

The file name is defined as follows. When the same file name exists, it is overwritten with the new data.
listprint + Machine type + destination code + Serial No. Year_Date_Time.txt
Ex: listprintA1RF001123456_20100107_1010.txt
1.8 Panel log

1.8.1 Outline
The "Panel log" is a function to display the operation history of the main body operation panel and the hard key using Web browser. Because
the panel log is stored in the memory of the main body, it is deleted when the sub power switch (SW2) becomes inactive. However, when Log
Store in "I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting" in the service mode is changed to "ON", the log is stored in the built-in HDD or the USB memory at the time
SC occurs. At this time the panel log is also stored, which helps troubleshooting.
• Items recorded: Touch panel operation, hard key operation
• Items not recorded: Mouse operation, external key board operation
• Maximum storable number: 1024 (deleted by power OFF)
• In security mode: The panel log reference is unavailable as the main body NIC network cannot be connected.
Note
• If the built-in HDD is damaged, the data cannot be recovered.
1.8.2 Log acquisition method

There are 2 methods for storing and using the panel log data.
• Download from Web Utilities to a computer (manual store)
• HDD automatic log store function (auto store)
(1) Download from Web Utilities

1. Display the panel log from the Web Utilities.
2. "Panel log screen"
The following 6 panel log items are displayed.
E-12
• No.: Recorded number (up to 1024)

• scrcode: Screen code at the time it is operated
• kind: Operation kind (hard key or panel pressed)
• detail: Detailed information when it is pressed
• mean: Key type that is pressed
• time: Time that it pressed
3. Click "download" to download it to the computer.
• File type: Tab-delimited text file
(2) HDD automatic log store function

For details on the HDD automatic log store function, refer toI.4.15.1 Log Store Setting.
Note
• The panel log which can be acquired with the HDD automatic log store function is in the JSON format (JavaScript). For details
on the analysis method of this panel log, contact the Support section of the authorized distributor.
1.9 Management Tool

1.9.1 Outline
"Management Tool" is a software to read and reset the parts counter information of the unit.
(1) Operating environment

The following shows the hardware requirements of the Management Tool.
Applicable OS Windows Vista (32 bit, 64 bit) Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, Ultimate (Service
Pack 2 or later versions)
Windows 7 (32 bit, 64 bit) Home Premium, Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate (Service
Pack 1 or later versions)
Windows 8, Windows 8.1 (64bit) Professional, Enterprise (Service Pack 1 or later
versions)
CPU Conform to OS recommended environment
Hard disk capacity 100 MB or more
Memory capacity Conform to OS recommended environment
Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6.0 (Service Pack 1 or later versions)
Library Windows Vista & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows 7 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows 8 & Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1)
Display At resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or more
16 bit color or more
Applicable machine bizhub PRESS C8000
bizhub PRESS C7000
bizhub PRESS C6000
bizhub PRESS 1250
bizhub PRESS 1250P
bizhub PRESS 1052
bizhub PRESS C1070
bizhub PRESS C1070P
bizhub PRESS C71hc
bizhub PRESS C1060
bizhub PRO C1060L
bizhub PRESS C1100
bizhub PRESS C1085
Note
• It is possible that compliant OS is limited depending on the RFID tag reader or writer.
It is possible that compliant OS is changed for the future model development.
(2) RFID tag reader and writer

Management Tool uses the RFID tag reader and writer for reading and writing the RFID tag. The following shows the corresponding RFID tag
reader and writer.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
• "TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
Applicable mode USB
: Transparent Virtual COM Port
V24: Transparent Operation
Note
The driver for the RFID tag reader and writer must be installed to the computer beforehand.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
Vista, 7 dedicated USB driver (Windows Vista, 7)
8 (64 bit) dedicated USB driver (Windows 8)
• "TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
TWN Serial Port driver (Windows XP (32bit only))
• The following shows the port setting of the TWN Serial Port driver.
E-13
Item Value
bit/sec 9600
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control None
(3) Main functions

The following shows the main functions of the Management Tool.
• Reading and writing the RFID tag of the unit (bizhub PRESS C8000, bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The part information is read from the RFID tag of the unit and displayed on the screen. Select the part whose counter information is reset
and write the reset information on the IC tag.
• Reading and writing the data file of the unit (bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, and bizhub PRESS 1250, 1250P, 1052, and bizhub PRESS
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and PRO C1060L)
Reads the part information from the data file of the unit output from the device and displays it on the screen. Select a part for counter
information reset on the screen, and write the reset information to the data file. (Support to read and write automatically from the USB
memory.)
• Work log management
The counter information and the counter reset information that are caught from the replacement work are saved automatically as a log.
On the work log display, the information can be sorted by the read or reset date and searched by the term such as the customer or the
technician who executed the replacement. Therefore, the previous works can be checked.
• Output of work information with CSV file
Outputs the work information and work log of the replacement work in the CSV format file.
• Printing work information
Prints out the work information and work log of the replacement work.
• Association of the user information and the device
The user information can be associated with the device.
• Export and Import
The work log, user information, and technician information can be exported to the file. Also, the exported file can be imported.
• Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000, and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
When the tag is replaced due to the breakage, the new RFID tag can be recognized to the machine.
• Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000, and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be registered.
• Option
Configure each setting of Management Tool.
• Login Mode
To use the Management Tool, login is required.
2 modes are provided for the login; "Administrator mode" and "Technician mode".
[Administrator mode]
Mode for the login as an administrator
[Technician mode]
Mode for the login as an technician. The administrator registers the technician.
The operable function differs depending on the log in mode.
Number Function name Administrator mode Technician mode
1 Replacement work × ○
2 Work log ○ ○
3 Register user ○ ○
4 Register technician ○ ×
5 SetPersonal × ○
6 Administrator Setting ○ ×
7 Unit Serial Number Setting × ○
8 Intermediate transfer steering sensor information × ○
setting
9 Option × ○
10 Version ○ ○
○: operable, ×: inoperable
E-14
1.9.2 Installation of Management Tool

(1) Installation method
Install the Management Tool in the following steps.
Note
• Log on with the user name which has the Administrator authority to install.
• If any application is running on the computer (including anti-virus program), close it.
• Check that "Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)" ("Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5" for Vista or later) has been installed on the
computer before the installation.
Installation steps
1. Double click the installation program "Setup.exe."
2. Select the language and click [OK].
3. Continue the installation following the instructions on screen.

Note
• Product key input
The Management Tool installer displays the screen to input the product key during installation.
The installation continues when the input product key is proper.
(2) Items to be installed

Once the Management Tool is installed, the following items are registered on the Start menu and the desk top.
Items to be registered for start menu
• Program
• Readme
• Manual
Items to be registered on desktop
• Shortcut of program
Note
• The "Readme" of the Start menu can be set not to be installed.
• Select "Custom" on the set up type and check the items to be installed.
• Whether to create the shortcut of the program registered on the desktop can be selected when installing.
(3) Uninstallation
There are following 2 ways to uninstall the Management Tool.
• Use "Add or Remove Programs" ("Programs and Features" for Windows Vista, Windows 7).
• Execute "Setup.exe" again.
Note
• The user information and the data information (Work log, User information, and Technician information) are saved in the
following folder separately from Management Tool.
• Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Since those information cannot be deleted by uninstalling, delete them manually.
When reinstalling it without deleting those information, the Management Tool can be started with the information before
uninstallation.
• When uninstalling the Management Tool, all Management Tool programs need to be closed.
1.9.3 Starting up of Management Tool

(1) Start
There are following 2 ways to start the Management Tool.
• Start from the Start menu of Windows
Click Windows "Start" button - "All Programs" - "KONICAMINOLTA" - "Management Tool" - "Management Tool."
• Start from the shortcut icon on the desktop
Double click "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon that is created on the desktop.
The login screen appears when it starts.
Note
• Whether to create the "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon or not can be selected when you install.
E-15
(2) The login screen

The login screen appears when the Management Tool starts. Select the login mode, enter the required information and log in.
(a) At 1st time of startup
The administrator password has not been registered soon after the installation. Register the administrator password when the password
setting screen appears after you click the [OK] button.
(b) At normal startup
For the replacement work, log in the technician mode. Select [Registered technician name], enter the required information and log in.
Note
• The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(4) Image setting)
• When no technician has been registered, the registered technician name cannot be selected.
For details of registering the technician, refer to E.1.9.11.(2) Register technician.
E-16
(3) Operation screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] Menu bar [2] Navigation

[3] Operation area [4] Login user
1. Menu bar
Specify each function of the Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.9.12 Various setting for the software)
2. Navigation
[1] [2]
[1] Path [2] Image

• Path
The transition of screens from the top screen appears as the path.
• Image
The image can be customized. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(4) Image setting)
3. Login user
The current login user appears.
4. Operation area
The operation panel that is based on the purpose appears.
(4) End
There are following 2 ways to exit the Management Tool.
• Click [Exit] button on the login screen or the top screen
• Select [Exit] from [File] menu
• Click [x] (close) button on the upper right corner of the screen
• Shut down or log off the computer
1.9.4 Technician mode

The operation procedures for the user who logs in as an registered technician is described as follows.
To execute this mode, register the technician information in the administrator mode. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(2) Register technician)
E-17
(1) Top screen
When the login is proceeded successfully, the top screen is displayed.

• To perform unit parts replacement, click the "Replacement work" button. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(2) Replacement work)
• To check the work log, click the "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(3) Work log)
• To register the customer information, click the "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(4) Register user)
• To change the password or edit the memo, click the "Set personal info" button. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(5) SetPersonal)
Note
• The image at the left of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(4) Image setting)
(2) Replacement work

Perform unit parts replacement.
(a) Type of replacement

Depending on the machine type, the form and media of data differ.
Management Tool is applied to the following machines.
• bizhub PRESS C8000 (Refer to E.1.9.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000 (Refer toE.1.9.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS 1250, 1250P, 1052 (Refer to E.1.9.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L (refer to E.1.9.8 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060 and
bizhub PRO C1060L replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 (refer to E.1.9.9 bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 replacement procedure)
(b) Associating customers

When the device serial number and the user information are properly associated, the user information is displayed on the operation
information automatically.
When it is not configured, " (No User Setting)" is displayed.
To modify the association between the unit that is read and the user, conduct the following procedures.
• Click "Change" to display the user setting screen.
• Select the desired user setting and click [OK].
The user setting of the work information is changed.

Note
• For details on user registration, refer to E.1.9.4.(4) Register user.
(c) Export the csv format file

The detailed information of the unit that is currently displayed is exported in CSV format.
1. Specify the location where the file is stored.
E-18
2. Click [Save].
The CSV file is exported to the specified location.
For details on CSV format, refer to E.1.9.12.(6) Export CSV.
(d) Printing the report

The detailed information of the unit that is currently displayed can be printed as report.
1. The print dialog is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The report is printed.
For details on print layout, refer to E.1.9.12.(7) Print Report.
(3) Work log

The work conditions of previous replacement work can be checked.
(a) Procedures to display the work log list

1. Click "Work log" on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "Work log" in "Tool" menu.
2. The work log referring method selection screen appears.
• To select the user and display the work log, click "Select user".
Proceed to step 3.
• To select the technician and display the work log, click "Select technician".
Proceed to step 4.
• To display all the work log, click "All".
Proceed to step 5.
3. The "Select user" screen appears.
E-19
Select the user, check the work log, and click "OK".
Proceed to step 5.
4. The "Select technician" screen appears.
Select the technician, check the work log, and click "OK".
Proceed to step 5.
5. The work log list is displayed.
On the work log list, filtering by conditions or sorting displayed items is available.
You can check the detail of the work log information that is selected, export as CSV, and print the report.
For the display filter, the displayed contents differs depending on the display method that is selected on the work log reference method
in step 2.
When "Select user" is selected:
When "Select technician" is selected:
Note
• Click the item name of the work log list so that items can be sorted in descending or ascending order. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the work log list screen, the items that are displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view". (Refer
to E.1.9.12.(5) Set list view)
E-20
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information that is currently selected in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(6) Export
CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently selected. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(7) Print Report)
(b) Detailed information

The detailed information of the replacement work log selected on the work log list is displayed.
Change the user that is associated or edit the work information memo.
Note
• Click [Back] or [Next] to switch the work log displayed.
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information that is currently displayed in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(6) Export
CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information that is currently displayed. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(7) Print Report)
• For details on user association, refer to E.1.9.4.(2).(b) Associating customers.
(c) Import
Import the work log which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the work log file that is imported.
2. Click [Open].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Enter the password that you configured on the work log file when it was exported.
4. Click [OK].
The work log file is imported.
Note
• Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
• The work log information that exists is not imported.
• The invalid work log information is skipped and the import process continues.
• The work log exported by other computer also can be imported. However, the work log information is possibly overlapped.
(d) Export
Export the work log collectively.
2. Click [Save].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
E-21
Configure the password on the export file.
4. Click [OK].
The export of the work log starts.
Note
• The password that is configured on the export file is required for the import.
• The file format "Work log file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in other
format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(4) Register user

Register, edit or delete the user information.
(a) User list

Click [RegisterUser] on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "RegisterUser" in "Tool" menu.
Note
• Click the item name of the user information list so that the items can be sorted in descending or ascending order. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the user information list screen, the items that are displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view".
(Refer to E.1.9.12.(5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration

Register the user information.
E-22
1. Click [New] on the user list screen.

2. The registration screen is displayed.
3. Enter "User name."
Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
4. Select "Type of business".
5. Enter the following items as necessary.
• Enter "User code". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User ID". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User office location name". Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
• Enter "User office location code". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact person name". Use 0 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
• Enter "Contact person ID no". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact telephone". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Register "Machine list".
Enter "Machine serial number to add". Use 1 to 13 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Click "Add" to add it to
"Machine list".
Select and click the serial number so that the number is deleted from "Machine list".
• Enter "Remark".
6. Click [Register].
The entered user information is registered and the next user information can be registered.
Note
• Register the serial number of the machine of the user to "Machine list" so that the user information is automatically
associated when the unit information is read during the replacement work.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered user information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.
For the procedure to enter each item, refer to E.1.9.4.(4).(b) Initial registration.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the user information.
(d) Import
Import the user information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the user information file that is imported.
2. Click [Open].
The user information file is imported.
Note
• The user information that exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the user information collectively.
E-23
2. Click [Save].
The export of the user information starts.
Note
• The file format "User Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in
other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(5) SetPersonal
Change the password of login technician or edit the comment.
(a) Password Change

1. Click "Password change".
The password change screen is displayed. The password can be changed at this time.
2. Click [OK].
The new Password is configured.
Note
(6) Unit serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The unit serial number is written in the RFID tag.
Note
• When the RFID tag is replaced because of such as physical damage, the new RFID tag can be recognized to the unit.
(a) Procedures of the unit serial number setting

1. Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. The wizard starts up and the unit serial number input screen is displayed.
Enter the unit serial number and click "Write".
E-24
Note
• Serial number setting initializes the RFID tag data.
The initialized data cannot be restored.
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When the writing process is completed, the result screen is displayed.
(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor is written to the RFID tag.
(a) Procedures of the intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

1. Select "Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu.
Note
• When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is
correctly connected.
2. The wizard is activated and the intermediate transfer steering sensor information input screen appears.
E-25
Input the intermediate transfer steering sensor information and click "Write".
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
Note
• Touch the RFID tag in which the data of the intermediate transfer unit is saved.
4. When the writing process is completed, the result screen is displayed.
(8) Option
Configure each setting of Management Tool.
E-26
(a) Display a confirmation message when a part of the following copiers that requires the replacement is selected:
bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
Select whether to display the confirmation message of the target unit after the selection of the part for replacement during the replacement
of the following copiers: bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
(b) Locate automatically the data file of the following copiers in the USB memory: bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000,
1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
Configure the activation mode of the replacement of bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060,
bizhub PRO C1060L.
• When the box is checked, the replacement is activated in USB memory cooperation mode.
• When the box is not checked, the replacement is activated in folder cooperation mode.
1.9.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure

1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "Replacement work" in the "Tool" menu.
connected.
2. A screen to select the machine type appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C8000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
connected.
3. When the unit read screen appears, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When read successfully, the unit information screen appears.

The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
E-27
5. Select the parts to reset the counted value from the unit information read.
Note
• When you select the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit, the intermediate transfer belt information
screen appears.
Be sure to input the reflectance value which is written on the belt.
6. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen appears, contact the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E-28
7. When the count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
8. When you cancel the count reset, Click "Undo reset count."
When the canceling count reset screen appears, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the condition
when it was read.
9. To read the information of another unit, click "Read another."

→ Return to step3.
Note
• Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When the reading information of more than 10 units, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work " on the
top screen again.
• While in the replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
1.9.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure

Note
• Depending on the saving destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub PRESS
C7000 and 6000.
• USB cooperation mode:
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
External Memory" of ORU-M.
• Folder cooperation mode:
Move the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the
counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
• It is activated in the mode of the previous replacement, but the mode can be selected with "Option" (Refer to E.1.9.4.(8) Option).
(Default is the USB cooperation mode.)
E-29

Select "bizhub PRESS C7000/6000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
• When it is activated in the USB cooperation mode and the USB memory in which the data file is saved cannot be recognized,
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the center of the screen.
Note
• When it is activated in the folder cooperation mode, it cooperates with the folder of the previous replacement.
4. Select the data file which includes the replacement unit from the read data files and click the "Select parts".
E-30
Note
• The unit with "blank" is the target unit of the replacement.
• The display of the unit column shows the condition of the unit.
• Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
• Completed editing:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been registered
• Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
• Already imported the device.:
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
• For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the column, the part to be reset the count cannot be selected.
5. Once the reading of the unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
6. Select the unit to replace, select the part to reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
On the parts selecting screen, the unit serial number (alphanumeric characters in 16-digit) can be input.
Blank is also available when the serial number is not needed.
Conduct the same operation to all units you replace.

Note
• Even if you click the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen, data file writing is not executed. Data file writing is
executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
• The unit serial number that is output is reflected when the screen is returned to the writing screen and the writing to the data
file is executed. The display is not updated during the number input or edit. So, the old information before the number input is
E-31
appeared on the following serial numbers: the serial number that is appeared on the button on the left side of the screen; the
serial number that is appeared on the unit information or the machine information.
7. Writing screen appears.

Confirm that the unit with part selected is "Completed editing".
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit you replace.
9. Click "Write" button.
Note
• To switch to the folder cooperate mode, click the "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
• In the next replacement, it is activated in the mode of the previous replacement.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.9.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the "Completed editing" unit is written in the data file of the USB memory or the PC folder.
Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, the USB memory can be removed safely once the replacement completes.
* Pop-up screen in the USB cooperation mode
* Pop-up screen in the folder cooperation mode
Note
• Be sure not to disconnect the USB memory until the writing completes since it takes time to complete writing to the USB
memory in the USB cooperation mode.
E-32
• When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to the data file possibly not complete properly. Confirm that no
other program uses the USB memory and write to the data file again.
• In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when you cooperate with the C7000 and 6000 main
body.
1.9.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure

Note
• Depending on the destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub PRESS
1250/1250P/1052.
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
Move the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the
counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
(Default is the USB cooperation mode.)
Select "bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the upper side in the center of the screen. Also, the unit information of the data files that is selected in the data file list is shown in a list on
the lower side in the center of the screen.
Note
4. Select the data file which includes the replacement unit from the read data files and click the "Select parts".
E-33
Note
• The data file that is regarded as a "Replacement object" in the Unit column of the data file list, includes the units that need the
replacement. (equipped with the parts that are the counter reset object.)
• The display of the unit column shows the condition of the all units which are stored in the data file.
• Blank:
Data file with the unit whose part information has been exported from the device, or the unit which has been written. Even
if there is no target unit of the replacement, you can select the part which requires the count reset and you can also
configure the unit serial number.
• Replacement object:
Among the unit whose part information has been exported from the device and the unit which has been written, the data
file with the target unit of the replacement. The unit whose count to be reset can be selected, and the unit serial number
can be configured.
• The edited parts are included:
Data file which includes the unit that already selected the part for the counter reset and the unit that registered the unit
serial number.
Data File which has the all units whose part information are imported to the device.
• The unit with "blank" on the status column of the unit information list is the target unit of the replacement.
• The status column shows the condition of the unit.
• Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been configured
• Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
• For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the status column in the unit information list, the part cannot be selected
for the counter reset.
5. Once the reading of the unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
E-34
6. Select the unit that you replace, select the part you reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
Conduct the same operation to all units you replace.

Note
• Even if you click the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen, data file writing is not executed. Data file writing is
executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
• The unit serial number that is been output is reflected when the screen is returned to the writing screen and the writing to the
data file is executed. The display is not updated during the number input or edit. So, the old information before the number
input is appeared on the following serial numbers: the serial number that is appeared on the button on the left side of the
screen; the serial number that is appeared on the unit information or the machine information.
7. Writing screen appears.

Check " Unit includes parts which was replaced " on the unit column of the data file whose parts has been selected on the data file list. Also,
check "Completed editing" with the unit whose parts has been selected on the unit information list.
E-35
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit you replace.
Note
• To switch to the folder cooperate mode, click the "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.9.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the unit in the "Completed editing" status is written in the data file of the USB memory or the
PC folder. Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, the USB memory can be removed safely once the replacement completes.
Note
• When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to the data file possibly not complete properly. Confirm that no
• In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when you cooperate with the 1250, 1250P, and 1052
main body.
E-36
1.9.8 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060 and bizhub PRO C1060L replacement procedure
Note
• There are following 2 modes according to the destination to save the cooperated counter data for the replacement on bizhub
PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.
Executes the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
Moves the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC temporarily. Then,
executes the counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
(Default is USB cooperation mode.)
You can also execute the same operation with "Replacement work" from "Tool".
2. The machine selection screen appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L" and click the [OK] button.
Proceed to step 3.
Note
the following warning appears. To activate in the folder cooperation mode, select [Yes (Y)].
3. After the completion of the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a
list on the upper side in the center of the screen. Also, the unit information of the data files that is selected in the data file list is shown in a
list on the lower side in the center of the screen.
Note
4. Select the data file which includes the unit for replacement from the read data files and click "Select parts".
E-37
Note
• The data files of which the unit column in the data file list is "Replacement object" have the target unit (which has a target part
of counter reset).
• The display of the unit column shows the condition of the all units which are stored in the data file.
• Blank:
Data file which has the following unit: The unit whose part information has been output from the device or the unit which
has been written It has no replacement target unit but you can select the part of which you execute the counter reset and
configure the unit serial number setting.
• Replacement object:
Data file which has the replacement target unit among the following units: The units whose part information has been
output from the device or the units which have been written. You can select the part of which you execute the counter
reset and configure the unit serial number setting.
• The edited parts are included:
Data file including the unit of which you have selected the part for the counter reset, or the unit of which you configure the
unit serial number
Data file which has the all units whose part information are imported to the device.
• The unit with "blank" on the status column of the unit information list is the target unit of the replacement.
• The display of the status column means the unit status.
• Blank:
Unit of which the part information is output from the device (replacement target)
Unit of which you have selected the part for the counter reset, or the unit of which you configure the unit serial number
• Already written:
Unit whose part for the counter reset has been written in the data file
Unit of which the part information has been imported to the device
• For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the status column in the unit information list, you cannot select the part for
the counter reset.
5. After the reading of unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
E-38
6. Select the unit that requires the replacement, select the part for the counter reset, and then click "Back to writing screen".
Be sure to conduct the same operation to all units that you execute the replacement.
Note
• Even when you click the "Back to writing screen" button in the part selection screen, the machine does not conduct the
writing to the data file. Writing to the data file is executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
• The unit serial number is reflected when you return to the writing screen and conduct the writing to the data file. The display is
not updated while the number is input or edited. So, the old information before the number is input appears as the following
serial numbers: The serial number on the button on the left side of the screen, the unit information or the main body
information
7. The writing screen appears.

Confirm that the unit whose part is selected is "Completed editing".
E-39
8. Repeat step 4 to step 7 to all data files which include the unit for the replacement.
Note
• To switch to the folder cooperation mode, click "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
The activation mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.9.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the unit in the "Completed editing" status is written in the data file of the USB memory or the
PC folder. Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperation mode, when the replacement completes, the USB memory can be safely removed.
Note
• When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to data file possibly does not complete properly. Confirm that no
• In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when C1070, C1070P, C1060, C1060L is cooperated.
• During the replacement, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
E-40
1.9.9 bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 replacement procedure

Or select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu.
2. A screen to select machine type appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C1100/1085" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
connected.
3. When the unit read screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When the read process is completed, the unit information screen is displayed.
The units that are read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
5. Select the parts and reset the counted value from the unit information that is read.
E-41
Note
• When the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit is selected for the count reset, the intermediate transfer
belt information screen is displayed.
Be sure to input the reflectance value that is written on the belt.
6. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen is displayed, contact the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
7. When the count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
E-42
8. When the count reset requires to be canceled, click "Undo reset count".
When the canceling count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the
condition when it was read.
9. To read the information of another unit, click "Read another".

→ Return to step 3.
Note
• Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When the information of more than 10 units requires to be read, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work
" on the top screen again.
• While in replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
1.9.10 Backup file

For the replacement operation of bizhub PRESS C7000, bizhub PRESS C6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, bizhub PRESS C1070, bizhub PRESS
C1070P, bizhub PRESS C71hc, bizhub PRESS C1060, and PRO C1060L: Back up the data file when you write in the data file.
E-43
Management Tool Management Tool

Machine Machine
Import
Read Read
Output Write Output Write
Writing
folder Backup Backup
Backup
folder
The backup file is created during writing

and saved until next writing.
Note
• If the wrong information is written with Management Tool, take back the backup file to the writing folder to recover the
information.
• When several writings are executed to 1 data file, the data you can recover is the data file which written before the last writing.
• For the backup file in the USB cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the ORU-DATA folder.
• For the backup file in the folder cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the folder that is the
same as the data file.
1.9.11 Administrator mode

Register the required information of the Management Tool.
(1) Top screen
When you log in successfully, the top screen appears.

• To check the work log, click the "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(3) Administrator Setting)
• To register the customer information, click the "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(4) Register user)
• To register a technician, click the "RegisterTech" button. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(2) Register technician)
• To change the administrator password, click "Admin.setting" button. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(3) Administrator Setting)
(2) Register technician

Register, edit or delete the technician information.
(a) Technician list

Click [RegisterTech] on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "RegisterTech" in the "Tool" menu.
E-44
Note
• The items can be sorted in the descending or ascending order when you click the item name of the technician information list.
The mark ▲ indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• The items which appears on the technician information list screen and their display width can be changed via "Set View".
(Refer to E.1.9.12.(5) Set list view)
(b) New resister

Register a new technician information.
The items with "*" must be filled.
1. Enter "Technician name."

Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
2. Enter "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
3. Enter "Country."
4. Enter "Company name."
5. Enter the following items if you need.
• Enter "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Enter "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• "Generate a password"
When you click "Generate a password", a password is generated automatically.
Click "Set password" to register the password which is automatically generated, to the "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Click "Copy" to copy the password which is automatically generated, to the clipboard.
6. Click [Register].
The entered technician information is registered and the next technician information can be registered.
Note
• Registration Number is determined automatically.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered technician information.
E-45
1. Edit the items to be changed.

• Edit "Technician name." Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Country." Use 1 to 128 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company." Use 1 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the technician information.
(d) Import
Import the technician information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the technician information file you import.
2. Click [Open].
The technician information file is imported.
Note
• The existing technician information is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the technician information collectively.
1. Specify the location where you want to store the file.
2. Click [Save].
The export of the technician information starts.
Note
• The file format "Technician Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is
stored in the other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(3) Administrator Setting

Change the administrator password.
E-46
1. Enter the current password and the new password.

2. Click [OK].
The new Password is registered.
Note
1.9.12 Various setting for the software

(1) File menu
(a) Import
• Work log
To load the work log which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "Work log" from "Import" in the "File" menu. (Refer to
E.1.9.4.(3).(c) Import)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
To load the user information which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "User information" from "Import" in the "File"
menu (Refer to E.1.9.4.(4).(d) Import)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
To load the technician information which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "Technician information" from "Import" in
the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(2).(d) Import)
Note
• This menu appears when you log in as an administrator.
• It is available only from the top screen or the Technician information screen.
(b) Export
• Work log
To store the collective work log as a file, select "Work log" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(3).(d) Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
To store the collective user information as a file, select "User information" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(4).(e)
Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
To store the collective user information as a file, select "Technician information" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(2).
(e) Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register technician screen.
(2) Tool menu

The functions in "Tool" are available only from the top screen.
(a) Replacement work

To perform the unit parts replacement, select "Replacement work" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(2) Replacement work)
Note
• This menu appears when you log in to the technician mode.
E-47
(b) Work log

Select "Work log" from "Tool" to check the work log. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(3) Work log)
(c) Register user

Select "Register user" in the "Tool" menu to check, to register, to edit, or to delete the user information. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(4) Register user)
(d) SetPersonal
To change the password of the login technician or to edit comments, select "Set personal info" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(5)
SetPersonal)
Note
(e) Unit Serial Number Setting

To write the unit serial number in the RFID tag, select "Unit Serial Number" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(6) Unit serial number
setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085))
Note
(f) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

The default value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be written in the RFID tag when you select "Intermediate transfer steering
sensor information setting" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub
PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085))
Note
(g) Option
Each item of Management Tool can be configured when you select "Option" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.4.(8) Option)
Note
(h) Register technician

Select "Register technician" in the "Tool" menu to check, to register, to edit, or to delete the technician information. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(2)
Register technician)
Note
(i) Administrator Setting

To change the password of the administrator, select "Administrator Setting" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.9.11.(3) Administrator Setting)
Note
(3) Help menu

(a) Version
To display the version information of the Management Tool, select "Version" in the "Help" menu.
Note
• The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.9.12.(4) Image setting)
(4) Image setting

(a) Navigation
"70 x 40 (pixels)" image display area of is provided in the navigation view area. The users can customize the displayed image.
Item Description
Supported file type GIF, JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
Image size Image size is arbitrary. *1
Display method Enlarge or reduce the displayed custom image to the area size (70 x 40).
File Name Navigation. (extension*2)
Stored location (Install directory)\Images
Remark When a file exists, a custom image appears. *3
*1 70 x 40 (pixels) size is recommended.
*2 For extension, refer to "Supported file type."
When a file does not exist, a default image that is shown above the chart appears.
(b) The login screen

"480 x 90 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the login screen.
E-48
Users can customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
File Name Login.(extension*2)
(c) Top screen

"350 x 365 (pixels)*1" image display area of is provided on the login screen (when the main window size is 800 x 600*2). Users can
customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
File Name TopMenu.(extension*3)
*2 Image size (350 x 365) is default value. Enlarge or reduce the displayed image in accordance with the window size.
(d) Version information screen

"460 x 150 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the version information screen.
Users can customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
E-49

File Name Version.(extension*2)
(5) Set list view

The display items and the display width can be changed.
1. Click [Set list view].
2. The set list view screen appears.
The displayed items differs among screens.
The following figure is the work log set list view screen.
3. Check in the list and configure show or hide of items.

• Items with the check appears.
• The setting can be changed when you click [Show]/[Hide] on the right side of the screen.
4. Configure other conditions if you need.
• Selected column width: Enter the arbitrary value and specify the display width. You can specify it by 0 to 999.
• [Top]:Item display order is moved to top.
• [Bottom]:Item display order is moved to bottom.
5. Click [OK].
The set list view is updated.
(6) Export CSV

The format of the CSV file that Management Tool export is as follows.
Output items
Common information (Replacement work information)
No Item Description
1 User name The user name that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
2 Type of business (user) The type of business that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
3 User code The user code that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
4 User ID The user ID that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
The user office location name that is associated to the replacement work is
5 User office location name (user)
exported.
The user office location code that is associated to the replacement work is
6 User office location code (user)
exported.
7 Contact person name (user) The contact person name that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
The contact person ID number that is associated to the replacement work is
8 Contact person ID no. (user)
exported.
9 Contact telephone (user) The contact telephone that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
10 Technician name The name of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
11 Technician code The code of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
12 Country (technician) The country of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
The company name of the technician who performed replacement work is
13 Company name (technician)
exported.
The company code of the technician who performed replacement work is
14 Company code (technician)
exported.
E-50
The service office name of the technician who performed replacement work is
15 Service office name (technician)
exported.
The service office code of the technician who performed replacement work is
16 Service office code (technician)
exported.
17 Machine name Export the device name.
18 Main Body Serial Number The serial number of the main body is exported.
19 Unit type The unit type is exported.
20 Unit Serial Number The serial number of the unit is exported.
21 Replacement Count The number of times of the unit replacement is exported.
22 Unit removal date The date of the unit removal is exported.
23 Count read date The date when the unit RFID tag is read is exported.
24 Count reset date The date when the count is reset is exported.
25 The last undo reset date The last date when the cancellation of the reset is exported.
26 Number of parts The number of parts in the unit is exported.
Part Information (for each part)
27 Number Assigned from 1 automatically.
28 Replace The replaced parts are outputted as "Changed."
29 Parts name The parts name is exported.
30 Parts Number The parts number is exported.
31 Quantity The quantity of parts is exported.
32 Count The count value of parts is exported.
33 Life cycle The life cycle value of parts is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
34 Supplement 1 transfer belt" with the count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(front)" is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
35 Supplement 2 transfer belt" with the count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(rear)" is exported.
Note
• Break character is "," (comma).
• Each item is enclosed in " " (double quotation marks).
• When no data exist, only " " (double quotation marks) is outputted.
File format
The header (item name) is created on the first row of the file.
For the subsequent rows, each parts information is outputted per one line.
For example, when the unit has 15 parts in it, 15 rows are outputted per replacement work.
1st row Header row (exports the item name)
2nd row Replacement work 1 - part (1)
3rd row Replacement work 2 - part (2)

4th row Replacement work 3 - part (3) N of replaced parts
per replacement work
5th row Replacement work 4 - part (4)
(7) Print Report

Details on the replacement work can be printed as a replacement report.
E-51
Print layout
1.9.13 Error message list

An error message may appear while Management Tool is operating.
The description of error and its error code are displayed.
The error codes and countermeasures are shown below. Follow the countermeasures shown below.
Error code Countermeasures
400-402, 500, 501, 600, 700, 2005-2008, Retry.
2030-2044, 2100-2109, 2130-2140, 2151-2160,
2170-2187, 2194-2196, 2200-2209, 2230-2240,
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2290-2297, 2303-2329,
2331-2343, 2346-2358, 2362, 2363, 2367,
2405, 2409, 2411, 2500-2509, 2516, 2517,
2520-2523, 2762-2766, 2781-2843, 3000-3006,
3008-3014, 3100, 3101
2402, 2403, 2410, 2411, 5001-5011, 5200-5208 Check the RFID tag and retry.
Note
• When the same error occurs even after retrying, remove the RFID tag reader/writer
from a computer once and insert it again, then reboot the Management Tool.
• When the same error still occurs, contact an administrator.
2400, 2406-2408, 5100-5106 Check whether the RFID tag reader/writer is connected to a computer correctly.
E-52
102, 111-113, 800-802, 854, 855, 860-868, Reinstall the Management Tool.
880-884, 2090-2096, 2600-2611, 2622-2633,
2636-2644, 2710-2720, 3000-3006
2100-2121, 2151-2160, 2170-2180, 2200-2221, The file is not supported.
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2303-2319, 2322-2329,
2331-2345, 2359 , 2731, 2760, 2761
100 Non-compliant OS is used.
803-808, 914, 915, 950, 951, 2401, 2404, Reboot the Management Tool.
2721-2723, 2730, 2732-2759, 2767-2775, 5102,
5201
2510-2515 Check the printing environment.
1.10 Machine state log store

1.10.1 Outline
This function stores the operation condition of the machine to HDD. When an error occurs, you can aquire the data to a USB memory.
NOTE
• When DIPSW2-0 is "0" or when DIPSW18-7 is "1", this function is not available.
(1) Function
This function limits the items that are saved by "14 Log Store" on the service mode. Therefore, you can aquire the long term log.
• Correction timing (gamma, patch, registration)
• Paper feed request
• Drawing completion
• Paper exit completion (single paper exit)
• Paper exit completion (bundle paper exit): Status report of the post processing machine
• No paper report: No paper report of the selected tray
• Printer operation status
• DF JAM status change
• DF SC status change
• Machine status report
• Tray condition report
• Start, completion, stop of the job
• Finisher status report
• DF condition report
• Temperature and humidity
(2) Usage
Send this log data to KM when an error occurs.
(3) Specifications
Log storage size Up to 10GB (1 file is approximately 10MB.)
Number of saved files Up to 100 files
Log storage area HDD RAW area
Log storage file type dat type
Required USB memory space Approximately 1.5GB
When the free space is less than 1.5GB, all the log files cannot be saved.
Saved data Private information such as the destination addresses are not saved.
1.10.2 Log acquisition

(1) Preparation
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
1. "Service Mode menu screen"
Stop→0→8→5→9→8→7→Clear
Note
• Do not move the screen from the service mode to other screens during the log acquisition.
• During the log acquisition, connect only 1 USB memory to the service port.
2. Disconnect the USB memory from the service port.

3. Check the log on the USB memory.
The following folder is created at the root directly of the USB memory.
EtrnlLog_(Product number)_(Firmware version)_YYYY(Year)_MM(Month)_DD(Date)_hh(Hour)_mm(Minute)
• EtrnlLog_XXXXXXX-XXXX-XXX-XXXX_YYYYMMDDhhmm
E-53
1.11 Real-time Remote Panel

1.11.1 Setting Up Real-time Remote Panel
To use Real-time Remote Panel, you need a Windows computer installed with a browser recommended as follows, or a computer or mobile
device (such as the iPad) installed with VNC Viewer (VNC client application) that supports RFB protocol version 3.8 or later.
(1) Operating environment

Browser use environment
Operating system Windows 7
Windows 8
Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher
Mozilla Firefox 18 or higher
Google Chrome 24 or higher
NOTE
• In your browser, JavaScript must be enabled.
VNC Viewer use environment
Operating system Windows 7
Windows 8
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion or later
iOS 5 or later
Android ver. 4.0.3 or later
Application VNC Viewer supporting 16 bit color display and RFB protocol version 3.8 or later
The following applications are available:
• Real VNC Viewer (for Windows, Mac OS, iOS, Android)
• Remoter VNC - Remote Desktop (for iOS)
• PocketCloud Remote Desktop RDP/VNC (for iOS, Android)
(2) Setup procedure

To use Real-time Remote Panel in a browser, set up the regular remote panel first before installing the exclusive plugin.
• For details about how to set up the regular remote panel, refer to Setting Up Remote Panel / Remote Monitor / Multi Monitor.
• For details about the installation procedure, refer to E.1.11.2 Installing Web plugin.
To use Real-time Remote Panel with a VNC Viewer, enable the VNC function of the machine. The connection setting of the VNC Viewer is
also required. For details, refer to each of the following pages.
• E.1.11.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine
• E.1.11.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer
Real-time Remote Panel is initially activated and the session timeout time is set to 0 minutes (no timeout). To change these settings, refer to
the following page.
• E.1.11.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings
1.11.2 Installing Web plugin

Files necessary to install the plugin can be downloaded by accessing the download page from Remote Panel of Web Utilities. As downloaded
installation files are compressed, be sure to extract them before installation.
Recommended hardware requirements:
A computer equipped with 32 bit or 64 bit, 1.5 GHz or greater processor and 512 MB or more of RAM
NOTE
• The plugin of Real-time Remote Panel checks the version requested from the machine when Remote Panel is loaded. If the
requested version is newer, a message is displayed to prompt you to install the latest plugin. Keep the latest version installed so
that the plugin functions properly in Remote Panel.
(1) Downloading software

1. Display the [Main page] screen of Web Utilities.
2. Click on [Remote Panel].
Remote Panel is displayed in the browser.

3. Click [Download Page] in the upper right of the screen.
E-54
The [Download Real-time Remote Panel plugin] page is displayed.

4. Click [Download] to save the files in a desired directory.
NOTE
• Two file types are provided on the download page. Click each button to save them in a desired directory of the computer.
Item File Name Type Description
Real-time Remote Panel Setup.exe Installer A file to execute the
Plugin Installer for Windows installation
Real-time Remote Panel RealTime_Remote_Panel_InstallFile.zi Installation file A compressed file including
Plugin InstallFile p the plugin to be actually
installed
(2) Extracting installation file

1. Right-click the installation file, and select [Extract All...] from the pull-down menu.
The [Select a Destination and Extract Files] screen is displayed.

2. As the destination of extraction, specify the folder in which the installer (Setup.exe) is saved, and then click [Extract].
NOTE
• If the location you saved the installation file is not the same as that of the installer, click [Browse...] to specify the folder in
which the installer is saved.
E-55
3. Check the extracted installation file.
Check that the following two folders are saved in the folder specified as the destination of extraction.
[libraries]
[plugins]
NOTE
• Be sure to store the two folders extracted from RealTime_Remote_Panel_InstallFile.zip ([libraries] and [plugins]) and the
installer (Setup.exe) in the same folder. Otherwise, an error message is displayed when the installer is launched.
(3) Installing the plugin

NOTE
• Installing the plugin requires the administrator privilege.
1. Double-click Setup.exe.
The installer starts.
2. Click [Next].
A screen is displayed to prompt you to install Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package.
NOTE
• For the operation of the plugin, Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package is required to be installed on the
computer. If this package has already been installed, proceed to step 5.
3. Install Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package on the computer, and then click [Next].
NOTE
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package can be downloaded from Official Microsoft Download Center.
The [License Agreement] screen is displayed.

4. Select [I accept the agreement] after checking the content, and then click [Next].
E-56
NOTE
• If you disagree, you will not be able to install Job Centro.
• By selecting from the drop-down list, you can change the language of the license agreement.
5. Check the copyright information on the [Information] screen, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Install].
The installation is started.

7. Click [Finish].
E-57
The installation is complete.

NOTE
• When uninstalling the plugin, follow the instructions provided for each OS.
1.11.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine

Set up the VNC Function of the machine in the Machine Manager Setting of Web Utilities.
1. Click on [Machine Manager Setting].
2. Click on [Machine Manager Setting].
The password entry dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter "admin" in the User Name text box, and the 8-character administrator password in the password text box, then click on [OK].
The [Machine Manager Setting ] screen is displayed.
4. Click on [Remote Panel Setting/Job History Setting].
The [Remote panel setting/Job history setting] screen is displayed.

5. Click [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] in the upper left of the screen.
The [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen is displayed.
E-58
6. Set the VNC password composed of 8 characters, and then click [OK].
The VNC password should be composed of 8 characters using upper cases, lower cases, numbers, and symbols (excluding colons (:),
double quotation marks ("), and commas (,)). Setting a password of the content other than specified is rejected with an error message
displayed in the screen.
When the VNC function is enabled, the display of the button changes to [Disable].
NOTE
• Once the VNC function is enabled or disabled, the setting change cannot be accepted for 10 minutes. To reset the setting, hold
steady for 10 minutes or open the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen again after 10 minutes.
1.11.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer

To use the Real-time Remote Panel in the VNC Viewer, enter the IP address of the connection destination (machine) and the VNC password on
the connection setting screen of the application.
The VNC password is required to be set in advance. For details, refer to E.1.11.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine
The following procedure is an example showing how to set up the VNC Viewer for iPad "Remoter VNC."
1. Start Remoter VNC.
2. Tap [Discovery List].
3. Tap [Add Session Manually].
4. Tap [Select] of "Server Type," and then select [VNC/ScreenSharing].
E-59
5. Enter the IP address of the machine for "VNC Hostname," and the VNC password for "VNC Password."
6. Tap [Save] in the upper right of the window.

The connection to the machine is completed. The profile selection screen is displayed.
7. Select the profile of the touch panel of the machine, and then enter your password in the login screen.
8. Tap [Unlock].
Remote Panel is displayed.
1.11.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings

The [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen is provided to disable Real-time Remote Panel or to set the time for the session timeout.
1. Follow the procedure in E.1.11.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine to display the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen.
2. Make desired settings.
To disable Real-time Remote Panel, click [Disable] in the right side area of [Enable or disable Real-time Remote Panel]. The function is
disabled, and the display of the button changes to [Enable].
To set the session timeout time, enter a desired time on the right side of [Session Timeout], and then click [Setting].
NOTE
• Once Real-time Remote Panel or VNC function is enabled or disabled, the setting change cannot be accepted for 10 minutes.
To reset the setting, hold steady for 10 minutes or open the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen again after 10 minutes.
• ■■■■
E-60
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 Maintenance item
1.1.1 Maintenance types
(1) Periodical maintenance
• The periodical maintenance cycle is represented with a value of the total counter under the particular usage condition.
• The periodical maintenance cycle is used for the periodical replacement cycle design, the replacement part preparation, and the
replacement part demand prediction.
• To replace a part, be sure to follow the actual replacement cycle. The actual replacement cycle is represented with a value of the special
parts counter.
(2) Spotted replacement

• Every part has an actual replacement cycle only.
• To replace a part, be sure to follow the actual replacement cycle. The actual replacement cycle is represented with a value of the special
parts counter.
1.1.2 Procedure of the periodical maintenance

Note
• For the procedure of the periodic maintenance, refer to PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085
1.1.3 Condition of the count

Note
• For the condition of the count, refer to I.4.6.18 Special Parts Counter.

1.2.1 Periodical maintenance
(1) Every 170,000 counts
Nu Unit classification Description Qua Implementation classification Remark
mb ntity Cleani Check Lubric Repla
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Toner collection Waste toner box ● Actual replacement: The sensor
section A1RFR700## 1 automatically conducts the full
detection

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Charging section Charging corona/Y 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 100%
A5AWR70M## (special parts counter)
Charging corona/M 1 ● ● F.4 Life value
A5AWR70M## · Service tool: equipped
cleaning jig for charging corona
Charging corona/C 1 ● ● · Be sure to cleaning them at
A5AWR70M## each time of visiting a customer.
Charging corona/K 1 ● ●
A5AWR70M##
2 Developing section Developing unit supply opening/Y, / ● · Service tool: vacuum cleaner
M, /C, /K · Be sure to clean them at each
3 Toner supply section Toner hopper exit/Y, /M, /C, /K ● time of opening the toner
hopper unit.

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Auxiliary cleaner assy ● · Service tool: vacuum cleaner
section · Be sure to clean it at the same
time with the replacement of the
belt cleaning blade.
F-1
Sensor unit ● · Service tool: cleaning pad

· Be sure to clean it at the same
Sensor shutter ● · Service tool: blower brush
IDC sensor/Fr ● · Be sure to clean it at the same
IDC sensor/Rr ● belt cleaning blade.
Color registration sensor/Fr ●
Color registration sensor/Mid ●
Color registration sensor/Rr ●
Toner collection sheet 1 ● Actual replacement: 200,000
65AAR756## counts (special parts counter)
· Service tool: Setting powder
(or setting toner, setting toner
number 2)
Belt cleaning blade 1 ● · Actual replacement: 200,000
A5AWR70P## counts or 100%, whichever is
earlier. (special parts counter)
F.4 Life value
number 2)
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr 1 ● · Actual replacement: 200,000
A1RF5112## counts (special parts counter)
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr 1 ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
A1RF5116## isopropyl alcohol
2 2nd transfer section Pre-fusing guide ● · Service tool: cleaning pad
2nd transfer cleaning blade.
Lower section of the 2nd transfer ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean it at each
time of removing the 2nd
transfer unit.
Scattering prevention sheet plate/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 200,000
A1RFR7N7## counts (special parts counter)
Cleaning side seal plate/Fr 1 ●
A1RFR7N5##
Cleaning side seal plate/Rr 1 ●
A1RFR7N6##
2nd transfer assist scraper assy 1 ●
A1RFR7N8##
2nd transfer process blade assy 1 ●
A5AWR70S##
Scattering prevention sheet/1 2 ●
A1RF5316##
2nd transfer cleaning blade 1 ● · Actual replacement: 200,000
A5AWR733## counts or 100%, whichever is
F.4 Life value
· Service tool: Hydro-wipe,
setting toner (or, setting toner
number 2)
3 Fusing section Fusing entrance guide plate ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Fusing claw assy ● isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean itat the same
Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up ● time with the replacementof the
Fusing paper exit roller/Lw ● 2nd transfer cleaning blade.

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Write section Dust-proof glass/Y ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
Dust-proof glass/M ● Be sure to clean them at the
same time with the replacement
Dust-proof glass/C ● of the drum unit.
F-2
Dust-proof glass/K ●
2 Photo conductor Drum potential sensor stay/Y, /M, / ● · Service tool: blower brush
section C, /K Be sure to clean them at the
of the drum unit.
Drum unit/Y 1 ● · Actual replacement: The
A6DY0Y1 earlier timing of either 350,000
A6DYWY1 counts or 100% (special parts
Drum unit/M 1 ● counter)
A6DY0Y1 F.4 Life value
A6DYWY1 · Service tool: setting toner
Drum unit/C 1 ●
A6DY0Y1
A6DYWY1
Drum unit/K 1 ●
A6DY0Y1
A6DYWY1
3 Developing section Developing unit/Y ● · Service tool: Vacuum cleaner,
Developing unit/M ● hydro-wipe, isopropyl alcohol
Be sure to clean them at the
Developing unit/C ● same time with the replacement
Developing unit/K ● of the drum unit.
Around the developing unit ●

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer scraper ● ● · Actual check and cleaning
section (reverse) cycle: 400,000 counts (special
parts counter)
· Service tool: Vacuum cleaner,
cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
2 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer unit ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Paper conveyance path around the ● isopropyl alcohol
2nd transfer section · Be sure to clean them at the
of the 2nd transfer belt.
2nd transfer belt 1 ● · Actual replacement: 400,000
number 2)
2nd transfer cleaning brush 1 ● Actual replacement: 400,000
Connecting stay assy 1 ●
A1RFR7N3##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Toner supply section Developing charge filter/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 525,000
A1RFR703## counts (special parts counter)
Developing charge filter/M 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing charge filter/C 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing charge filter/K 1 ●
A1RFR703##

er ng ation cemen
t
F-3
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt drive roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
section isopropyl alcohol
1st transfer roller.
Intermediate transfer steering edge ● · Service tool: blower brush
sensor (PS68) · Be sure to clean it at the same
Intermediate transfer steering ● time with the replacement of the
sensor (PS86) 1st transfer roller.
1st transfer roller/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 600,000
A5AW5012## counts (special parts counter)
1st transfer roller/M 1 ●
A5AW5012##
1st transfer roller/C 1 ●
A5AW5012##
1st transfer roller/K 1 ●
A5AW5004##
Nip formation roller/Up 1 ●
A5AW5013##
Thick paper transfer backup guide 1 ●
A5AWR70Q##
2nd transfer roller/Up 1 ●
A1RF5004##
2 Intermediate Paper dust collecting plate ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
conveyance section isopropyl alcohol
3 Duplex section ADU reverse cleaning assy ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
ADU reverse roller ● isopropyl alcohol
ADU loop roller ● time with the replacement of the
ADU centering sensor (PS87) ● · Service tool: cleaning pad
ADU centering sensor sheet ● · Be sure to clean it at the same

er ng ation cemen
t
1 External section Ozone filter 1 ● Actual replacement: 700,000
Dust-proof filter/Rt 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A5AWR70B## (special parts counter)
Dust-proof filter/Rr1 1 ● F.4 Life value
A1RFR745##
Dust-proof filter/Lt 1 ●
A1RFR744##
Dust-proof filter/Rr2 1 ●
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer IDC sensor/Fr ● · Service tool: Blower brush,
section IDC sensor/Rr ● cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean them at the
Color registration sensor/Fr ● same time with the replacement
Color registration sensor/Mid ● of the sensor shutter.
F-4

Sensor shutter 1 ● Actual replacement: 800,000
A5AWR705## counts (special parts counter)
Auxiliary cleaner assy 1 ●
A5AWR70N##
2 2nd transfer section Separation discharging assy 1 ●
A1RFR705##
2nd transfer entrance guide/Up 1 ●
A1RFR729##
2nd transfer belt assy 1 ●
A5AWR704##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Developing section Around the developing unit ● · Service tool: Vacuum cleaner,
hydro-wipe, isopropyl alcohol
developer.
Developer/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A5E7700 (special parts counter)
Developer/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A5E7800
Developer/C 1 ●
A5E7900
Developer/K 1 ●
A5E7600
(11) Every 1,000,000 counts

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate Paper conveyance path around the ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
conveyance section intermediate conveyance section isopropyl alcohol
cleaning sheet assy.
Cleaning sheet assy 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,000,000
A1RFR7G4## counts (special parts counter)
2 Registration section Paper conveyance path around the ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
registration section isopropyl alcohol
time with the cleaning of the
registration cleaning sheet assy.
Registration cleaning sheet assy 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,000,000
A5AWR70R## counts (special parts counter)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Heating roller ● isopropyl alcohol
Fusing paper exit roller/Lw ● same time with the replacement
of the fusing belt.
Fusing gear/1 ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
Fusing gear/5 ● · Be sure to lubricate them at
the same time with the
replacement of the fusing belt.
Heat insulating sleeve/2 2 ● ● · Actual replacement: 1,050,000
· Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
F-5
Heat insulating sleeve/Lw 2 ● ●

A5AW7217##
Fusing bearing/2 2 ● ●
A5AW7452##
Fusing bearing/Lw 2 ● ●
A5AW7218##
Fusing inlet roller assy 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 1,050,000
A5AWR70E## counts (special parts counter)
Fusing belt 1 ● ● · Be sure to clean them when
A5AW7203## they are dirty.
Upper pressure roller 1 ● ●
A5AW7201##
Lower pressure roller 1 ● ●
A5AW7204##
Fusing steering actuator assy 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,050,000
A5AWR70F## counts (special parts counter)
Fusing claw assy 1 ●
A5AWR70G##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt 1 ● · Actual replacement: 1,200,000
section A1RF5060## counts (special parts counter)
Transfer belt cleaning unit 1 ● · Service tool: Setting powder
A5AWR702## (or setting toner, setting toner
number 2)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Reversal section De-curler roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 700,000

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Registration section Torque limiter 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,500,000
65AA4618## counts (special parts counter)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer ground plate/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,600,000
2nd transfer ground plate/2 1 ●
A1RFR720##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Heat insulating sleeve/1 2 ● ● · Actual replacement: 2,100,000
Fusing bearing/1 2 ● ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
A5AW7450##
F-6
Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,100,000

Heating roller 1 ●
A5AW7202##
Fusing paper exit roller/Lw 1 ●
A5AW7601##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer separation 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,975,000
section claw solenoid counts (special parts counter)
A1RFR748##

er ng ation cemen
t
Intermediate transfer Transfer belt separation claw 3 ● · Actual replacement: 3,000,000
section 65AAR753## counts (special parts counter)
number 2)
Transfer roller bearing 8 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Fusing gear/2 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 3,150,000
Fusing gear/3 1 ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
Fusing gear/4 1 ● · Be sure to lubricate them at
Fusing gear/9 1 ● replacement of the fusing gear/
2.
Fusing gear/6 1 ● · Service tool: Molykote EM30L
2.
Fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr 1 ● Actual replacement: 3,150,000
A5AWR70T## counts (special parts counter)
Upper pressure roller temperature 1 ●
sensor
A5AWR70U##
Fusing heater lamp assy/1 1 ●
A5AWM31A##
A5AWM31E##
A5AWM31F##
Fusing heater lamp/4 1 ●
A5AWM34A##
A5AWM34E##
A5AWM34F##
A5AWM31A##
A5AWM31E##
A5AWM31F##
2 Reversal section Exit conveyance driven roller 1 ●
A1RF8950##
F-7
3 Paper exit section Paper exit driven roller 1 ●

A5AW8607##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer unit 1 ● Actual replacement: 3,200,000
A5AWR70A## counts (special parts counter)

er ng ation cemen
t
hydro wipe, isopropyl alcohol
of the developing unit.
Developing unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A5AWR701## (special parts counter)
Developing unit/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A5AWR701##
Developing unit/C 1 ●
A5AWR701##
Developing unit/K 1 ●
A5AWR701##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Registration section Registration roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 6,300,000
1.2.2 Spotted replacement

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Fusing paper separation fan/Fr, / 3 ●
Md, /Rr
A5AWM151##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Lower pressure roller cooling fan/ 2 ●
Fr, /Rr
A5AWM151##
2 Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md 1 ●
A5AWM151##
F-8

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Toner collection Waste toner box ● Actual replacement: The sensor
section A1RFR700## 1 automatically conducts the full
detection

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Charging section Charging corona/Y 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 100%
A5AWR70M## (special parts counter)
Charging corona/M 1 ● ● F.4 Life value
A5AWR70M## · Service tool: equipped
cleaning jig for charging corona
Charging corona/C 1 ● ● · Be sure to cleaning them at
A5AWR70M## each time of visiting a customer.
Charging corona/K 1 ● ●
A5AWR70M##
2 Developing section Developing unit supply opening/Y, / ● · Service tool: vacuum cleaner
M, /C, /K · Be sure to clean them at each
3 Toner supply section Toner hopper exit/Y, /M, /C, /K ● time of opening the toner
hopper unit.
4 Intermediate transfer Auxiliary cleaner assy ● · Service tool: vacuum cleaner
section · Be sure to clean it at the same
Sensor unit ● · Service tool: cleaning pad
Sensor shutter ● · Service tool: blower brush
IDC sensor/Fr ● · Be sure to clean it at the same
IDC sensor/Rr ● belt cleaning blade.
Color registration sensor/Fr ●
Color registration sensor/Mid ●
Toner collection sheet 1 ● · Actual replacement: 175,000
65AAR756## counts (special parts counter)
No.2)
Belt cleaning blade 1 ● · Actual replacement: 175,000
A5AWR70P## counts or 100%, whichever is
F.4 Life value
No.2)
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr 1 ● · Actual replacement: 175,000
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr 1 ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
A1RF5116## isopropyl alcohol
5 2nd transfer section Pre-fusing guide ● · Service tool: cleaning pad
2nd transfer cleaning blade.
Lower section of the 2nd transfer ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean it at each
time of removing the 2nd
transfer unit.
F-9
Scattering prevention sheet plate/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 175,000

A1RFR7N7## counts (special parts counter)
Cleaning side seal plate/Fr 1 ●
A1RFR7N5##
Cleaning side seal plate/Rr 1 ●
A1RFR7N6##
2nd transfer assist scraper assy 1 ●
A1RFR7N8##
2nd transfer process blade assy 1 ●
A5AWR70S##
Scattering prevention sheet/1 2 ●
A1RF5316##
2nd transfer cleaning blade 1 ● · Actual replacement: 175,000
A5AWR733## counts or 100%, whichever is
F.4 Life value
number 2)
6 Fusing section Fusing entrance guide plate ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Fusing claw assy ● isopropyl alcohol
Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up ● time with the replacement of the
Fusing paper exit roller/Lw ● 2nd transfer cleaning blade.

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Write section Dust-proof glass/Y ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
Dust-proof glass/M ● Be sure to clean them at the
Dust-proof glass/C ● of the drum unit.
Dust-proof glass/K ●
2 Photo conductor Drum potential sensor stay/Y, /M, / ● · Service tool: blower brush
section C, /K Be sure to clean them at the
of the drum unit.
Drum unit/Y 1 ● · Actual replacement: 350,000
A6DY0Y1 counts, or earlier timing of
A6DYWY1 100% (special parts counter)
Drum unit/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A6DY0Y1 · Service tool: setting toner
A6DYWY1
Drum unit/C 1 ●
A6DY0Y1
A6DYWY1
Drum unit/K 1 ●
A6DY0Y1
A6DYWY1
3 Developing section Developing unit/Y ● · Service tool: Vacuum cleaner,
Developing unit/M ● hydro-wipe, isopropyl alcohol
Be sure to clean them at the
Developing unit/C ● same time with the replacement
Developing unit/K ● of the drum unit.
Around the developing unit ●
4 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer scraper ● ● · Actual check and cleaning
section (reverse) cycle: 350,000 counts (special
parts counter)
· Service tool: Vacuum cleaner,
cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
5 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer unit ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Paper conveyance path around the ● isopropyl alcohol
2nd transfer section · Be sure to clean them at the
of the 2nd transfer belt.
F-10
2nd transfer belt 1 ● · Actual replacement: 350,000

number 2)
2nd transfer cleaning brush 1 ● Actual replacement: 350,000
Connecting stay assy 1 ●
A1RFR7N3##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt drive roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
section isopropyl alcohol
Intermediate transfer steering edge ● · Service tool: blower brush
sensor (PS68) · Be sure to clean it at the same
Intermediate transfer steering ● time with the replacement of the
sensor (PS86) 1st transfer roller.
1st transfer roller/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 525,000
1st transfer roller/M 1 ●
A5AW5012##
1st transfer roller/C 1 ●
A5AW5012##
1st transfer roller/K 1 ●
A5AW5004##
Nip formation roller/Up 1 ●
A5AW5013##
Thick paper transfer backup guide 1 ●
A5AWR70Q##
2nd transfer roller/Up 1 ●
A1RF5004##
2 Toner supply section Developing charge filter/Y 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing charge filter/M 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing charge filter/C 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing charge filter/K 1 ●
A1RFR703##
3 Intermediate Paper dust collecting plate ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
conveyance section isopropyl alcohol
4 Duplex section ADU reverse cleaning assy ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
ADU reverse roller ● isopropyl alcohol
ADU loop roller ● time with the replacement of the
ADU centering sensor (PS87) ● · Service tool: cleaning pad
ADU centering sensor sheet ● · Be sure to clean it at the same

er ng ation cemen
t
1 External section Ozone filter 1 ● Actual replacement: 700,000
F-11
Dust-proof filter/Rt 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%

A5AWR70B## (special parts counter)
Dust-proof filter/Rr1 1 ● F.4 Life value
A1RFR745##
Dust-proof filter/Lt 1 ●
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##
2 Intermediate transfer IDC sensor/Fr ● · Service tool: Blower brush,
section IDC sensor/Rr ● cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
Color registration sensor/Fr ● same time with the replacement
Color registration sensor/Mid ● of the sensor shutter.
Sensor shutter 1 ● Actual replacement: 700,000
Auxiliary cleaner assy 1 ●
A5AWR70N##
3 2nd transfer section Separation discharging assy 1 ●
A1RFR705##
2nd transfer entrance guide/Up 1 ●
A1RFR729##
2nd transfer belt assy 1 ●
A5AWR704##

er ng ation cemen
t
developer.
Developer/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A5E7700 (special parts counter)
Developer/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A5E7800
Developer/C 1 ●
A5E7900
Developer/K 1 ●
A5E7600

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate Paper conveyance path around the ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
conveyance section intermediate conveyance section isopropyl alcohol
cleaning sheet assy.
Cleaning sheet assy 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,000,000
A1RFR7G4## counts (special parts counter)
2 Registration section Paper conveyance path around the ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
registration section isopropyl alcohol
time with the cleaning of the
registration cleaning sheet assy.
Registration cleaning sheet assy 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,000,000
A5AWR70R## counts (special parts counter)
F-12

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt 1 ● · Actual replacement: 1,050,000
section A1RF5060## counts (special parts counter)
Transfer belt cleaning unit 1 ● · Service tool: Setting powder
A5AWR702## (or setting toner, setting toner
No.2)
2 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Heating roller ● isopropyl alcohol
Fusing paper exit roller/Lw ● same time with the replacement
of the fusing belt.
Fusing gear/1 ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
Fusing gear/5 ● · Be sure to lubricate them at
replacement of the fusing belt.
Heat insulating sleeve/2 2 ● ● · Actual replacement: 1,050,000
Heat insulating sleeve/Lw 2 ● ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
A5AW7217##
Fusing bearing/2 2 ● ●
A5AW7452##
Fusing bearing/Lw 2 ● ●
A5AW7218##
Fusing inlet roller assy 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 1,050,000
A5AWR70E## counts (special parts counter)
Fusing belt 1 ● ● · Be sure to clean them when
A5AW7203## they are dirty.
Upper pressure roller 1 ● ●
A5AW7201##
Lower pressure roller 1 ● ●
A5AW7204##
Fusing steering actuator assy 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,050,000
A5AWR70F## counts (special parts counter)
Fusing claw assy 1 ●
A5AWR70G##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer ground plate/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,400,000
2nd transfer ground plate/2 1 ●
A1RFR720##
2 Reversal section De-curler roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 700,000

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Registration section Torque limiter 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,500,000
65AA4618## counts (special parts counter)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Heat insulating sleeve/1 2 ● ● · Actual replacement: 2,100,000
F-13
Fusing bearing/1 2 ● ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM

A5AW7450##
Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,100,000
Heating roller 1 ●
A5AW7202##
Fusing paper exit roller/Lw 1 ●
A5AW7601##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt separation claw 3 ● · Actual replacement: 2,650,000
section 65AAR753## counts (special parts counter)
No.2)
Transfer roller bearing 8 ● Actual replacement: 2,650,000

er ng ation cemen
t
1 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer unit 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,800,000
A5AWR70A## counts (special parts counter)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer separation 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,975,000
section claw solenoid counts (special parts counter)
A1RFR748##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Fusing gear/2 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 3,150,000
Fusing gear/3 1 ● · Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
2.
Fusing gear/6 1 ● · Service tool: Molykote EM30L
2.
Fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr 1 ● Actual replacement: 3,150,000
A5AWR70T## counts (special parts counter)
Upper pressure roller temperature 1 ●
sensor
A5AWR70U##
A5AWM31A##
A5AWM31E##
A5AWM31F##
F-14
Fusing heater lamp/4 1 ●

A5AWM34A##
A5AWM34E##
A5AWM34F##
A5AWM31A##
A5AWM31E##
A5AWM31F##
2 Reversal section Exit conveyance driven roller 1 ●
A1RF8950##
3 Paper exit section Paper exit driven roller 1 ●
A5AW8607##

er ng ation cemen
t
Developing unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A5AWR701## (special parts counter)
Developing unit/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A5AWR701##
Developing unit/C 1 ●
A5AWR701##
Developing unit/K 1 ●
A5AWR701##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Registration section Registration roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 6,300,000

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Fusing paper separation fan/Fr, / 3 ●
Md, /Rr
A5AWM151##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Fusing section Lower pressure roller cooling fan/ 2 ●
Fr, /Rr
A5AWM151##
2 Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md 1 ●
A5AWM151##
F-15
1.4 DF-626
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Paper feed roller ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
Separation roller ● isopropyl alcohol
2 Conveyance section Miscellaneous rollers and rolls ● same time with the cleaning of
Scanning guide ● the pick-up roller.
Reflective sensor section ● · Service tool: blower brush
same time with the cleaning of
the pick-up roller.

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Replace those three parts at the
2
9J073301## same time.
Paper feed roller ●
1
A00J5636##
Separation roller ●
1
A1085639##
1.5 PF-707/708 (1st tandem)

(1) Every 200,000 counts (When it is connected to C1100), Every 175,000 counts (When it is connected to C1085)
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Horizontal Centering sensor (PS40) ● · Service tool: cleaning pad
conveyance section · Be sure to clean it at the same
transfer belt cleaning blade of
the main body.

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Horizontal Pre-registration bearing 2 ● Actual replacement: 1,000,000
conveyance section A03U8128## counts (special parts counter)
Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A55C7160##
Horizontal conveyance roller 2 ●
bearing/1
A03U8128##
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 1 ●
A55C7162##
bearing/2
A03U8128##
A55C7162##
F-16

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Horizontal Pre-registration clutch (CL7) 1 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
conveyance section A03UM201## counts (special parts counter)
Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 2 ●
(CL8), /2 (CL9)
A03UM201##
Each roller ●
2 Vertical conveyance Each roller ●
section

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch/3 2 ● Actual replacement: 2,000,000
section (CL5), /4 (CL6) counts (special parts counter)
56AA8201##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Horizontal Roller pressure release motor (M10) 1 ● Actual replacement: 5,000,000
conveyance section A55CR702## counts (special parts counter)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), /2 3 ● Actual replacement: 2,000,000
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Exit clutch/1 (CL1), vertical 3 ●
section conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical
conveyance clutch/2 (CL4)
56AA8201##
Exit clutch/2 (CL2) 1 ●
56AA8201##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed tray Loop roller bearing/Lw 2 ●
section A03U8128##
Loop roller/Lw 1 ●
A1RG6075##
2 Horizontal Loop roller/Up 1 ●
conveyance section A1RG7161##
1.6 PF-707 (2nd tandem)

mb ntity
er
F-17
Cleani Check Lubric Repla

ng ation cemen
t
A55C7160##
bearing/1
A03U8128##
A55C7162##
bearing/2
A03U8128##
A55C7162##

er ng ation cemen
t
(CL8), /2 (CL9)
A03UM201##
Each roller ●
section

er ng ation cemen
t
56AA8201##

er ng ation cemen
t
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##

er ng ation cemen
t
section A03U8128##
A1RG6075##
F-18

1.7 PF-707 (3rd tandem)

er ng ation cemen
t
A55C7160##
bearing/1
A03U8128##
A55C7162##
bearing/2
A03U8128##
A55C7162##

er ng ation cemen
t
(CL8), /2 (CL9)
A03UM201##
Each roller ●
section

er ng ation cemen
t
56AA8201##

er ng ation cemen
t
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
F-19

er ng ation cemen
t
section A03U8128##
A1RG6075##
1.8 FA-502 (connected to the 1st tandem of PF-707/708)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Tandem conveyance Tandem conveyance clutch/1 5 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
section (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 counts (special parts counter)
(CL13), /5 (CL14)
A03UM201##
1.9 FA-502 (connected to the 2nd tandem of PF-707)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Tandem conveyance Tandem conveyance clutch/1 5 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
section (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 counts (special parts counter)
(CL13), /5 (CL14)
A03UM201##
1.10 RU-516
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Conveyance section Charging driven roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A8AK1030## (special parts counter)
Charging roller 1 ● F.4 Life value
A8AK1031##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Conveyance section Charging roller bearing 2 ● Actual replacement: 3,150,000
A1RF5089 ## conuts (special parts counter)
1.11 RU-511/HM-101
mb ntity
er
F-20

ng ation cemen
t
1 Entrance Entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
conveyance section De-curler entrance sensor ●
2 Output paper density Color density detection timing ● Service tool: blower brush
detection section sensor
3 Paper exit section Paper exit conveyance sensor ●
Paper exit sensor ●
4 HM-101 Humidification section entrance ●
sensor
Humidification section conveyance ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
roller cleaning pad
Water feed roller ●
Humidification roller/Rt ●
Humidification roller/Lt ●
Control roller ●

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Output paper density Shutter ● · Service tool: blower brush
detection section

er ng ation cemen
t
1 HM-101 Humidification roller/Rt 1 ●
A1TU5001##
Humidification roller/Lt 1 ●
A1TU5002##
Water feed filter 1 ●
A1TU5215##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 HM-101 Water feed roller 2 ●
A1TU5003##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Entrance Entrance conveyance driven roller/1 1 ●
conveyance section A1TT7002##
Entrance conveyance driven roller/2 1 ●
A2A27206##

er ng ation cemen
t
F-21
1 HM-101 Pump motor (P1) 1 ●

A1TUR704##
1.12 RU-510
No. Unit classification Description Qua Implementation classification Remark
ntity Cleani Check Lubric Repla
ng ation ce
1 Preparation Original through check ●
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush
3 Final check Original through check ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/ cleaning pad
1.13 FS-532
er ng ation cemen
t
2 PAPER FNS entrance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
CONVEYANCE cleaning pad
SECTION FNS pass sensor (PS1) ● Service tool: blower brush
Paper overlap sensor/1 (PS32) ●
Paper overlap sensor/2 (PS33) ●
Roller pressure motor home sensor ●
(PS34)
FNS entrance roller conveyance ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
switching cam
FNS entrance roller conveyance ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
switching gate/Up
3 Stacker section Cleaning rollers ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Stacker empty sensor (PS28) ● Service tool: blower brush
Stacker upper sensor (PS43) ●
Staple scraps box cleaning ●
Stacker entrance roller pressure ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
entrance cam
Stack assist plate drive cam ●
Stapler shaft ●
Rear stopper shaft, metal frame ●
sliding position
4 Main tray section Main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) ● Service tool: blower brush
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) ●
The rubber surface at the lower side ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
of the gripper, the winding rubber at cleaning pad
the lower side of the gripper
Up down tray drive section ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
Paper exit alignment plate shaft ● ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, /MH surf, or
Molykote EM-30L
Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

mb ntity
er
F-22

ng ation cemen
t
1 Stacker section Paddle 6 ●
A4F37500##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Stapler section Staple unit 1 ●
A4F3R714##
1.14 SD-510
er ng ation cemen
t
1 PAPER Rollers ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
CONVEYANCE cleaning pad
SECTION
2 Stapler section Staple guide ● ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad /MH surf
3 Half-Fold/ Knives ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Fold&Staple/tri- Folding roller ● cleaning pad
folding section
4 Paper exit section Paper exit belt ●

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Stapler section Staple unit 1 ●
A4F47300##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 ALIGNMENT Paddle/1 2 ●
SECTION A4F4R70D##
Paddle/2 2 ●
A4F4R70E##
Paddle/3 2 ●
A4F4R70F##
1.15 PK-522
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Punch section Cleaning the punch edge ● Service tool: blower brush
Clean the sensor ●
F-23
1.16 PI-502
Nu Unit classification Description Q'ty Implementation classification Remark
mb Cleani Check Lubric Repla
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up, /Lw ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Paper feed roller/Up, /Lw ● cleaning pad
Separation roller/Up, /Lw ●

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller/Up, /Lw 2 ●
13QNR705##
Separation roller/Up, /Lw 2 ●
13QNR704##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up, /Lw 2 ●
50BAR701##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter/Up, /Lw 2 ●
13QN4073##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch/Up, /Lw 2 ●
13QN8201##
1.17 MK-732
er ng ation cemen
t
1 Conveyance section Conveyance roller cleaning ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
1.18 LS-506
mb ntity
er
F-24

ng ation cemen
t
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
cleaning pad

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Conveyance section Paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) 1 ●
15AV8255##
Paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) 1 ●
15AV8252##
Paper press solenoid/2 (SD7) 1 ●
15AV8251##
Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 1 ●
15AV8253##
Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 1 ●
15AV8003##
1.19 FD-503
er ng ation cemen
t
Removing the punch unit
Removing from RU
2 Punch section Punch shaft and the punch support ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
board cleaning pad
Punch drive section ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
3 Post-process Installing the punch unit
Installing to RU

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Punch section Cleaning of each sensor ●
2 PI section Cleaning of each sensor ●
3 Main tray section Cleaning of each sensor ●
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ●
5 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
F-25

er ng ation cemen
t
1 PI section Paper feed rubber 2 ●
50BAR702##
Separation rubber 2 ●
13QNR704##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 PI section Pick-up rubber 6 ●
50BAR701##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Conveyance section Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) 1 ●
15AGR723##
Roller solenoid/2 (SD6) 1 ●
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
2 Punch section Punch unit 1 ●
A0H0R700## (Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702## (Europe)
3 Folding conveyance 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 1 ●
section 15AGR761##
4 Main tray section Tray up down motor (M11) 1 ●
129U-108##
1.20 SD-506
er ng ation cemen
t
Removing the rear cover
Removing the unit
2 Right angle Right angle conveyance sensor/1 ● Service tool: blower brush
conveyance section Right angle conveyance sensor/2 ●
Right angle conveyance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Right angle conveyance roller/2 ● cleaning pad
Right angle conveyance roller/3 ●
Right angle conveyance roller/4 ●
3 Folding section Folding main scan alignment home ● Service tool: blower brush
sensor/Fr1
Folding main scan alignment home ●
sensor/Fr2
Folding entrance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Folding entrance roller/2 ● cleaning pad
F-26
Folding entrance roller/3 ●

4 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching paper sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
section Bundle sensor/1 ●
5 Bundle processing Bundle sensor/2 ●
section
6 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps full sensor ●
Actuator ●
7 Post-process Installing the unit ●
Installing the rear cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
cleaning pad

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Trimmer section Paper holding screw 2 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote EM-30L
A0H26621## · Actual lubrication cycle:
37,500 cuts

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy 1 ●
A0H2B622##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade kit 1 ● ●
A0H2R901##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 1 ●
section 15AN7719##
2 Trimmer section Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●
A0H2M102##

er ng ation cemen
t
F-27
1 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 2 ●

section 15AN-550##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Saddle stitching Slope unit 1 ●
section 15AN-500##
Saddle stitch unit 1 ●
A0H2A720##
2 Bundle processing Bundle press stage unit 1 ●
section A0H2A530##
3 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A0H2A620##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Right angle Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5) 1 ●
conveyance section 15AN8251##
Roller release solenoid/2 (SD6) 1 ●
15ANR710##
Roller release solenoid/3 (SD7) 1 ●
15AN8251##
Right angle conveyance gate 1 ●
solenoid (SD2)
15ANR711##
1.21 SD-513
ng ation ce
2 Entrance Entrance sensor/1 (PS59) ● Blower brush
conveyance section Reverse stacker entrance sensor ●
(PS211)
Entrance sensor/2 (PS60) ●
Horizontal conveyance sensor/1 ●
(PS72)
Reverse stacker empty sensor ●
(PS101)
Slit scraps box set sensor (PS106) ●
Entrance conveyance roller/1 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Entrance conveyance roller/2 ●
Reverse exit roller/Rt ●
Paper re-feed roller/Lt ●
3 Folding conveyance Horizontal conveyance sensor/2 ● Blower brush
section (PS1)
Horizontal conveyance sensor/4 ●
(PS5)
Tri-folding conveyance sensor ●
(PS12)
2nd folding sensor (PS20) ●
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Horizontal conveyance roller/2 ●
F-28

Sub tray conveyance roller/1 ●
Sub tray conveyance roller/2 ●
Sub tray exit roller ●
Horizontal conveyance belt ●
Tri-folding conveyance belt ●
1st Folding Roller ●
2st Folding Roller ●
1st folding stopper slide shaft ● MH Surf
4 Sub tray, tri-folding Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
tray section Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/4 ●
Tri-folding tray exit roller ●
5 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching stacker empty ● Blower brush
section sensor (PS23)
Booklet set unit empty sensor ●
(PS94)
Saddle stitching alignment/Rr guide ● MH Surf
Saddle stitching alignment/Fr guide ●
6 Booklet movement Booklet set unit slide guide shaft ●
section Booklet hold unit offset guide shaft ●
Booklet hold unit slide guide shaft ●
7 Clamp section Clamp empty sensor (PS37) ● Blower brush
Clamp ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
8 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps box full sensor ● Blower brush
(PS96)
9 Booklet tray section Gripper paper sensor (PS38) ●
Booklet tray paper exit sensor ●
(PS43)
Booklet tray exit roller, grip roller ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Paper exit belt ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board 1 ●
A729F624##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Press drive screw ● · Service tool: Molykote
· Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the trimmer
blade.
Trimmer blade 1 ●
A729R901##

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section Clamp motor (M23) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R70G##
F-29

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Gear ● · Service tool: Molykote
· Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the trimmer
press motor (M32).
Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section Fore edge finger motor (M52) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R706##
Finger torque limiter 1 ●
A03X5656##
Fore edge finger gear 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
55VA7903##
Clamp hanging wire 2 ● Only when FD-504 is installed
A65U6908##
2 Booklet tray section Gripper paper exit gear/Fr, /Rr ● · Service tool: Molykote
Gripper lock plate ● · Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the fore edge
finger motor (M52).
Shutter slide shaft ● · Service tool: MH Surf
Shutter slide plate ● · Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the fore edge
finger motor (M52).

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●
A0H2M102##

ng ation ce
1 Entrance Reverse exit roller pressure release 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
conveyance section motor (M102)
A65UR70M##
2 Saddle stitching Staple unit 1 ●
section A65U7779##
Clincher 1 ●
A65U7781##
Conveyance guide assy/Up 1 ●
A729R70S##

ng ation ce
1 Saddle stitching Booklet holding motor (M17) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
section A729R704##
Alignment plate solenoid wiring 1 ●
A65UN165##
2 Clamp section Booklet holding wire/1 2 ●
A65U6290##
Booklet holding wire/2 2 ●
A65U6300##
F-30
Booklet holding wire/3 2 ●

A65U6302##

ng ation ce
1 Folding conveyance 2nd folding knife motor (M14) 1 ●
section A65UR70P##

ng ation ce
1 Folding conveyance 1st folding knife motor (M13) 1 ●
section A65UR70N##

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section Fore edge stopper motor (M24) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R706##
2 Booklet tray section Gripper motor (M26) 1 ●
A4JUM101##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A729F621##
1.22 CR-101
ng ation ce
2 Creaser section Reverse stacker empty sensor ● Blower brush
(PS101)
Crease blade ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
1.23 TU-503
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Registration roller ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Registration driven roller ●
Registration sensor (PS98) ● Blower brush
3 Slitter section Slit cutter drive gear ● Molykote
Horizontal conveyance sensor/1 ● Blower brush
(PS72)
Slit cutter shaft ● ● Cleaning pad/ Molykote
F-31
4 Rotary cutter section Slit scraps roller/Lt, slit scraps roller/ ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Rt
5 Final check Around slit scraps box section ● Perform the maintenance when
the slit scraps are inside the
main body.
Original through check ●

ng ation ce
1 Slitter section Slit cutter assy/Fr 1 ●
A65WF701##
Slit cutter assy/Rr 1 ●
A65WF702##
2 Rotary cutter section Rotary cutter assy 2 ●
A65WF700##
1.24 FD-504
ng ation ce
2 Clamp section SQF clamp plate ● ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
MH Surf

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A65VR705##
SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202) 1 ● ●
A65VR705##
2 Square-fold section SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr 1 ●
A65VR70A##
SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr 1 ●
A65VR70B##

ng ation ce
1 Square-fold section SQF roller motor (M201) 1 ●
A65VR706##
1.25 PB-503
er ng ation cemen
t
2 Conveyance section Entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
F-32
SC entrance sensor ●
Sub tray conveyance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Intermediate conveyance roller ● cleaning pad
Entrance conveyance roller ●
Cover paper conveyance roller ●
3 SC section Switchback assist roller/Rr ●
Switchback assist roller/Fr ●
Sub scan alignment plate shaft ●
4 Clamp section Paper reference plate ●
Clamp pressure plate shaft 1 ●*5 Service tool: plas guard No. 2
5 Pellet supply section Pellet hopper ● Service tool: blower brush
6 Glue tank section Glue tank ● ●*1 Service tool: tweezers, cleaning
pad, Multemp FF-RM
7 Cover paper supply Paper dust removing brush ● Service tool: blower brush
section Paper dust removing roller ●
Conveyance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
8 Cover paper table Cover paper folding plate ●*2 Service tool: tweezers, cleaning
section pad
Book spine backing plate ●*2
Book exit belt/Rr ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Book exit belt/Fr ● cleaning pad
Cover paper conveyance roller/Rt ●
Cover paper conveyance roller/Ft ●
Cover paper table entrance roller ●
Paper dust removing brush ● Service tool: blower brush
Cover paper alignment plate shaft ●*3 Service tool: plas guard No. 2
9 Book stock section Book load limit sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
Book upper limit LED ●
Booklet sensor/1, booklet sensor/2 ●
Guide shaft/Rt, guide shaft/Lt ●*4 Service tool: plas guard No. 2
Book conveyance belt/Rr ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Book conveyance belt/Fr ● cleaning pad
Book movement belt ●
Book movement belt/2 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
10 Relay conveyance Relay conveyance roller/1, relay ● cleaning pad
section conveyance roller/2, relay
conveyance roller/3, relay
conveyance roller/4, relay
conveyance roller/5
Relay paper exit roller/1, relay paper ●
exit roller/2
Relay conveyance entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
Relay conveyance intermediate ●
sensor
Relay conveyance exit sensor ●
cleaning pad
*1 Lubricate to the glue apply roller motor drive connecting gear.
*2 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning. Remove adhered glue as
necessary.
*3 Lubricate to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.
*4 Lubricate to the guide shaft/Rt and guide shaft/Lt.
*5 Lubricate to the clamp pressing board shaft.

(1) Every 750 counts
er ng ation cemen
t
F-33
1 Glue tank section Cover paper glue roller drive gear 4 ●

bearing of glue tank section
A0753799##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Glue tank section Glue tank assy 1 ●
A15XA36A## (100V)
A15XA36E## (120V)
A15XA36F## (240V)

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Cover paper table Roller cutter blade assy 1 ●
section A0756230##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Cover paper supply Pick-up roller 1 ●
section 55VAR750##
Paper feed roller 1 ●
55VAR749##
Separation roller 1 ●
55VAR749##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 SC section Switchback roller 1 ●
13GQ4519##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter/A 2 ●
A15X3017##
Exhaust filter/B 1 ●
A15X3018##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 Pellet supply section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 1 ●
27LA8051##

mb
er
F-34

ng ation cemen
t
1 Conveyance section Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) 1 ●
15ANR714##
2 SC section SC switchback release motor (M13) 1 ●
A0V9M101##
3 Cover paper supply Cover paper feed clutch (CL71) 1 ●
section 56AA8201##
4 Cover paper separation clutch 1 ●
(CL72)
56AA8201##
5 Relay conveyance Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 1 ●
section 15ANR714##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 SC section FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 1 ●
15AA8251##
SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) 1 ●
A075B746##

er ng ation cemen
t
1 SC section One-way clutch/A 1 ●
13GQ7709##
One-way clutch/B 1 ●
13GQ7709##
1.26 GP-501
Nu Unit classification Description Qua Implementation classification Materials
mb ntity Cleani Check Lubric Repla Tools used
er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Pins ● ● 3-IN-ONE (WD-40Company)
Actual lubrication count: 50,000
punches
The use must perform this
maintenance.

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Shoulder Bolts ● ● Magnalube-G
TeflonGreaseActual lubrication
count:
200,000 punches
The use must perform this
maintenance.

er ng ation ce
GP removement, Front door open
F-35
2 Bypass conveyance Paper Path, Bypass ● ● Alcohol

section
3 Punch conveyance Latching Mechanisms aligner ●
4 section Paper Path, Aligner panels ● ● Alcohol
5 Aligner Idler Rollers ● ●
6 Roller energy drive ● ●
7 Bypass, Punch Optical Sensors ● Blower brush
8 conveyance section Timing Belts ● ● Alcohol
9 Idler Rollers ● ●
10 Drive Rollers ● ●
11 Punch section Back Gauge mechanism ● ● Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner
12 Die Guide ● Vacuum cleaner
13 Paper Path, Punch ● ● Alcohol
14 External section Base ● Vacuum cleaner
15 Door Closing Latch ●
16 Post-process Front door close, GP connected
18 Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning
pad

er ng ation ce
1 Punch conveyance Aligner Idler Roller Assembly ● Alcohol
2 section Belt Aligner (Green) 1 ●
3 Punch section Punch drive cams 1 ● Magnalube-G Teflon Grease
Actual lubrication count:
3,000,000 punches

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● The replacement is
recommended when the
hanging chips are generated.

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● The replacement is
recommended if hanging chips
are generated.
Back Gauge mechanism 1 ●
A0N9PP59##
1.27 GP-502
er ng ation ce
1 Bypass section Bypass Rollers ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Entrance sensor ● ● Blower brush
Exit sensor ● ●
2 Vertical conveyance Belts ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section Entrance driven roller ● ●
F-36
Entrance sensor ● ● Blower brush

Intermediate sensor ● ●
3 Die-set Entrance sensor ● ●
Pinch drive section (bearings) ● ● Magnalube-G TeflonGrease/
Nippeco MP No.1
Oiled Felt ● ● WD-40 Company 3-IN-ONE
4 Skew conveyance Belts ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section Entrance drive roller, driven roller ● ●
Exit drive roller, driven roller ● ●
5 Stacker section Paper detection sensor ● ● Blower brush
6 Punch section Punch scraps box ● ● Vacuum cleaner
Around the punch scraps box ● ●
Punch scraps box full sensor ● ● Blower brush
Punch scraps box set sensor ● ●

er ng ation ce
1 Pullback Pad 2 ●
A4F6PP00##
Book Chute Mylar 4 ●
A4F6PPH1##

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Suction Cup 1 ●
A4F6PP03##
2 Punch Unit Die Set Felt 1 ●
A4F6PP01##

er ng ation ce
1 Punch Unit Die Set 1 ●
A4F6PP02##
F-37
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PARTS LIST
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST

2.1 Periodical replacement parts
Note
• For the part number of periodically replaced parts, refer to "Parts guide manual."
• For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub
PRESS C1100/C1085 to PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503.
• The parts count number that is given in the following table represents the number of the special parts count in the service mode.
2.2 bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085

2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list
Nu Classification Parts name Parts number Quantity Actual Parts count
mb replacement number
er cycle
1 External section Ozone filter A1RF1144## 1 700,000 2
2 Dust-proof filter/Rt A5AWR70B## 1 F.4 Life value 3
3 Dust-proof filter/Rr1 A1RFR745## 1 F.4 Life value 4
4 Dust-proof filter/Lt A1RFR744## 1 F.4 Life value 5
8 Photo conductor Drum unit/Y A6DY0Y1 1 F.4 Life value 21, 22
section A6DYWY1
9 Drum unit/M A6DY0Y1 1 F.4 Life value 23, 24
A6DYWY1
10 Drum unit/C A6DY0Y1 1 F.4 Life value 25, 26
A6DYWY1
11 Drum unit/K A6DY0Y1 1 F.4 Life value 27, 28
A6DYWY1
12 Charging section Charging corona/Y A5AWR70M## 1 F.4 Life value 13, 14
13 Charging corona/M A5AWR70M## 1 F.4 Life value 15, 16
14 Charging corona/C A5AWR70M## 1 F.4 Life value 17, 18
15 Charging corona/K A5AWR70M## 1 F.4 Life value 19, 20
16 Developing section Developing unit/Y A5AWR701## 1 F.4 Life value 49, 50
17 Developing unit/M A5AWR701## 1 F.4 Life value 51, 52
18 Developing unit/C A5AWR701## 1 F.4 Life value 53, 54
19 Developing unit/K A5AWR701## 1 F.4 Life value 55, 56
20 Developer/Y A5E7700 1 F.4 Life value 41, 42
21 Developer/M A5E7800 1 F.4 Life value 43, 44
22 Developer/C A5E7900 1 F.4 Life value 45, 46
23 Developer/K A5E7600 1 F.4 Life value 47, 48
24 Toner supply section Developing charge filter/Y A1RFR703## 1 525,000 9
25 Developing charge filter/M A1RFR703## 1 525,000 10
26 Developing charge filter/C A1RFR703## 1 525,000 11
27 Developing charge filter/K A1RFR703## 1 525,000 12
28 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet 65AAR756## 1 200,000 *1 60
section 175,000 *2
29 Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr A1RF5112## 1 200,000 *1 189
175,000 *2
30 Nip formation roller/Up A5AW5013## 1 600,000 *1 37
525,000 *2
31 Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr A1RF5116## 1 200,000 *1 190
175,000 *2
32 1st transfer roller/Y A5AW5012## 1 600,000 *1 63
525,000 *2
33 1st transfer roller/M A5AW5012## 1 600,000 *1 64
525,000 *2
34 1st transfer roller/C A5AW5012## 1 600,000 *1 65
525,000 *2
35 1st transfer roller/K A5AW5004## 1 600,000 *1 66
525,000 *2
36 Thick paper transfer backup guide A5AWR70Q## 1 600,000 *1 67
525,000 *2
F-38
37 2nd transfer roller/Up A1RF5004## 1 600,000 *1 68

525,000 *2
38 Sensor shutter A5AWR705## 1 800,000 *1 104
700,000 *2
39 Intermediate transfer belt A1RF5060## 1 1,200,000 *1 58
1,050,000 *2
40 Transfer belt cleaning unit A5AWR702## 1 1,200,000 *1 59
1,050,000 *2
41 Auxiliary cleaner assy A5AWR70N## 1 800,000 *1 141
700,000 *2
42 Transfer belt separation claw 65AAR753## 3 3,000,000 *1 69
2,625,000 *2
43 Transfer roller bearing A1RF5089## 8 3,000,000 *1 70
2,625,000 *2
44 Intermediate transfer separation claw A1RFR748## 1 2,975,000 103
solenoid
45 Belt cleaning blade A5AWR70P## 1 F.4 Life value 61, 62
46 2nd transfer section Scattering prevention sheet plate/1 A1RFR7N7## 1 200,000 *1 31
175,000 *2
47 Cleaning side seal plate/Fr A1RFR7N5## 1 200,000 *1 32
175,000 *2
48 Cleaning side seal plate/Rr A1RFR7N6## 1 200,000 *1 33
175,000 *2
49 2nd transfer assist scraper assy A1RFR7N8## 1 200,000 *1 34
175,000 *2
50 2nd transfer process blade assy A5AWR70S## 1 200,000 *1 136
175,000 *2
51 Scattering prevention sheet/1 A1RF5316## 2 200,000 *1 140
175,000 *2
52 2nd transfer belt A1RF5204## 1 400,000 *1 72
350,000 *2
53 2nd transfer cleaning brush A1RF5328## 1 400,000 *1 138
350,000 *2
54 Connecting stay assy A1RFR7N3## 1 400,000 *1 192
350,000 *2
55 Separation discharging assy A1RFR705## 1 800,000 *1 75
700,000 *2
56 2nd transfer entrance guide/Up A1RFR729## 1 800,000 *1 76
700,000 *2
57 2nd transfer belt assy A5AWR704## 1 800,000 *1 78
700,000 *2
58 2nd transfer ground plate/1 A1RFR719## 1 1,600,000 *1 79
1,400,000 *2
59 2nd transfer ground plate/2 A1RFR720## 1 1,600,000 *1 80
1,400,000 *2
60 2nd transfer unit A5AWR70A## 1 3,200,000 *1 71
2,800,000 *2
61 2nd transfer cleaning blade A5AWR733## 1 F.4 Life value 73, 74
62 Toner collection Waste toner box A1RFR700## 1 170,000 1
section
63 Intermediate Cleaning sheet assy A1RFR7G4## 1 1,000,000 121
conveyance section
64 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy A5AWR70R## 1 1,000,000 122
65 Torque limiter 65AA4618## 1 1,500,000 124
66 Registration roller A5AW7123## 1 6,300,000 123
67 Fusing section Heat insulating sleeve/2 A5AW7217## 2 1,050,000 90
68 Heat insulating sleeve/Lw A5AW7217## 2 1,050,000 91
69 Fusing bearing/2 A5AW7452## 2 1,050,000 110
70 Fusing bearing/Lw A5AW7218## 2 1,050,000 111
71 Fusing inlet roller assy A5AWR70E## 1 1,050,000 82
72 Fusing belt A5AW7203## 1 1,050,000 84
73 Fusing steering actuator assy A5AWR70F## 1 1,050,000 85
74 Upper pressure roller A5AW7201## 1 1,050,000 86
75 Lower pressure roller A5AW7204## 1 1,050,000 87
76 Fusing claw assy A5AWR70G## 1 1,050,000 89
F-39
77 Heat insulating sleeve/1 A5AW7449## 2 2,100,000 93

78 Fusing bearing/1 A5AW7450## 2 2,100,000 94
79 Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up A5AWR726## 1 2,100,000 83
80 Heating roller A5AW7202## 1 2,100,000 88
81 Fusing paper exit roller/Lw A5AW7601## 1 2,100,000 92
82 Fusing gear/2 A1RF8098## 1 3,150,000 106
83 Fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr A5AWR70T## 1 3,150,000 95
84 Upper pressure roller temperature sensor A5AWR70U## 1 3,150,000 97
85 Fusing heater lamp assy/1 A5AWM31A## 1 3,150,000 98
A5AWM31E##
A5AWM31F##
86 Fusing heater lamp/4 A5AWM34A## 1 3,150,000 99
A5AWM34E##
A5AWM34F##
87 Fusing heater lamp assy/5 A5AWM31A## 1 3,150,000 100
A5AWM31E##
A5AWM31F##
88 Reversal section De-curler roller A1RF8605## 1 700,000 128
89 Exit conveyance driven roller A1RF8950## 1 3,150,000 130
90 Paper exit section Paper exit driven roller A5AW8607## 1 3,150,000 129
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
2.2.2 Spotted replacement parts list

er cycle
1 Fusing section Fusing paper separation fan/Fr, /Md, /Rr A5AWM151## 3 80,000 131
2 Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr, /Rr A5AWM151## 2 300,000 112
3 Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md A5AWM151## 1 300,000 113
2.3 DF-626
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 9J073301## 2 200,000 288
2 Paper feed roller A00J5636## 1 200,000 289
3 Separation roller A1085639## 1 200,000 290
2.4 PF-707/708
er cycle
1 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), /3 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 150, 151, 152,
section (CL17) 162, 163, 164,
175, 176, 177
2 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), /2 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 153, 165, 178
section (CL4), exit clutch/1 (CL1)
3 Exit clutch/2 (CL2) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 154, 166, 179
4 Vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5), /4 56AA8201## 2 2,000,000 155, 167, 180
(CL6)
5 Horizontal Pre-registration bearing A03U8128## 2 1,000,000 157, 170, 183
6 conveyance section Pre-registration roller A55C7160## 1 1,000,000 158, 171, 184
7 Horizontal conveyance roller/1 A55C7162## 1 1,000,000 115, 119, 145
8 Horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1 A03U8128## 2 1,000,000 116, 120, 146
9 Horizontal conveyance roller/2 A55C7162## 1 1,000,000 117, 143, 147
10 Horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2 A03U8128## 2 1,000,000 118, 144, 148
11 Pre-registration clutch (CL7) A03UM201## 1 3,000,000 156, 168, 181
12 Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), /2 A03UM201## 2 3,000,000 156, 168, 181
(CL9)
F-40
13 Roller pressure release motor (M10) A55CR702## 1 5,000,000 149

er cycle
1 Paper feed tray Loop roller bearing/Lw A03U8128## 2 6,000,000 160, 173, 186
2 section Loop roller/Lw A1RG6075## 1 6,000,000 161, 174, 187
3 Horizontal Loop roller/Up A1RG7161## 1 6,000,000 159, 172, 185
conveyance section
2.5 FA-502
er cycle
1 Tandem conveyance Tandem conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 A03UM201## 5 3,000,000 169, 182
section (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), /5 (CL14)
2.6 RU-516
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Charging driven roller A8AK1030## 1 F.4 Life value 225, 226
2 Charging roller A8AK1031## 1 F.4 Life value 227, 228
3 Charging roller bearing A1RF5089## 2 3,150,000 262
2.7 RU-511/HM-101
er cycle
1 Entrance Entrance conveyance driven roller/1 A1TT7002## 1 3,000,000 261
2 conveyance section Entrance conveyance driven roller/2 A2A27206## 1 3,000,000 260
3 HM-101 Humidification roller/Rt A1TU5001## 1 300,000 323
4 Humidification roller/Lt A1TU5002## 1 300,000 324
5 Water feed roller A1TU5003## 2 1,500,000 325
6 Water feed filter A1TU5215## 1 300,000 326
7 Pump motor (P1) A1TUR704## 1 10,000,000 327
2.8 FS-532
er cycle
1 Stacker section Paddle A4F37500## 6 300,000 241
2 Stapler section Staple unit A4F3R714## 1 500,000 240
2.9 SD-510
er cycle
1 Stapler section Staple unit A4F47300## 1 200,000 244
2 ALIGNMENT Paddle/1 A4F4R70D## 2 1,000,000 247
3 SECTION Paddle/2 A4F4R70E## 2 1,000,000 247
4 Paddle/3 A4F4R70F## 2 1,000,000 247
F-41
2.10 PI-502
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller/Up, /Lw 13QNR705## 2 100,000 265, 270
2 Separation roller/Up, /Lw 13QNR704## 2 100,000 266, 271
3 Pick-up roller/Up, /Lw 50BAR701## 2 200,000 264, 269
4 Torque limiter/Up, /Lw 13QN4073## 2 600,000 267, 272
5 Paper feed clutch/Up, /Lw 13QN8201## 2 1,000,000 263, 268
2.11 LS-506
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 15AV8003## 1 5,000,000 219, 224
2 Paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) 15AV8252## 1 5,000,000 215, 220
5 Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 15AV8253## 1 5,000,000 216, 221
2.12 FD-503
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) 15AGR723## 1 5,000,000 208
2 Roller solenoid/2 (SD6) 15AGR723## 1 5,000,000 208
5 Punch section Punch unit A0H0R700## 1 5,000,000 207
(Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702##
(Europe)
6 Folding conveyance 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 15AGR761## 1 5,000,000 209
section
7 Main tray section Tray up down motor (M11) 129U-108## 1 5,000,000 210
8 PI section Separation rubber 13QNR704## 2 100,000 202, 205
9 Paper feed rubber 50BAR702## 2 100,000 203, 206
10 Pick-up rubber 50BAR701## 6 200,000 201, 204
2.13 SD-506
er cycle
1 Right angle Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5) 15AN8251## 1 5,000,000 236
2 conveyance section Roller release solenoid/2 (SD6) 15ANR710## 1 5,000,000 237
3 Roller release solenoid/3 (SD7) 15AN8251## 1 5,000,000 236
4 Right angle conveyance gate solenoid 15ANR711## 1 5,000,000 238
(SD2)
5 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 15AN-550## 2 1,000,000 234, 235
6 section Slope unit 15AN-500## 1 2,500,000 -
7 Saddle stitch unit A0H2A720## 1 2,500,000 -
8 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 15AN7719## 1 500,000 239
9 section Bundle press stage unit A0H2A530## 1 2,500,000 -
10 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy A0H2B622## 1 18,900 230
11 Trimmer blade kit A0H2R901## 1 37,500 229
12 Trimmer press motor (M32) A0H2M101## 1 500,000 231
F-42
13 Trimmer blade motor (M31) A0H2M102## 1 850,000 232

14 Trimmer unit A0H2A620## 1 2,500,000 233
2.14 SD-513
er cycle
1 Entrance Reverse exit roller pressure release A65UR70M## 1 1,000,000 336
conveyance section motor (M102)
2 Folding conveyance 2nd folding knife motor (M14) A65UR70P## 1 1,500,000 338
3 section 1st folding knife motor (M13) A65UR70N## 1 1,700,000 337
4 Saddle stitching Staple unit A65U7779## 1 1,000,000 330
5 section Clincher A65U7781## 1 1,000,000 344
6 Conveyance guide assy/Up A729R70S## 1 1,000,000 362
7 Booklet holding motor (M17) A729R704## 1 1,200,000 339
8 Alignment plate solenoid wiring A65UN165## 1 1,200,000 356
9 Clamp section Clamp motor (M23) A729R70G## 1 400,000 340
10 Fore edge finger motor (M52) A729R706## 1 600,000 341
11 Finger torque limiter A03X5656## 1 600,000 360
12 Fore edge finger gear 55VA7903## 1 600,000 361
13 Clamp hanging wire A65U6908## 2 600,000 345
14 Booklet holding wire/1 A65U6290## 2 1,200,000 357
17 Fore edge stopper motor (M24) A729R706## 1 2,000,000 343
18 Trimmer section Trimmer board A729F624## 1 18,900 332
19 Trimmer blade A729R901## 1 37,500 331
20 Trimmer press motor (M32) A0H2M101## 1 500,000 333
21 Trimmer blade motor (M31) A0H2M102## 1 850,000 334
22 Trimmer unit A729F621## 1 2,500,000 335
23 Booklet tray section Gripper motor (M26) A4JUM101## 1 2,000,000 342
2.15 TU-503
er cycle
1 Slitter section Slit cutter assy/Fr A65WF701## 1 750,000 351
2 Slit cutter assy/Rr A65WF702## 1 750,000 352
3 Rotary cutter section Rotary cutter assy A65WF700## 2 750,000 353
2.16 FD-504
er cycle
1 Clamp section SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203) A65VR705## 1 250,000 348
2 SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202) A65VR705## 1 250,000 347
3 Square-fold sction SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr A65VR70A## 1 250,000 349
4 SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr A65VR70B## 1 250,000 350
5 SQF roller motor (M201) A65VR706## 1 1,000,000 346
2.17 PB-503
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) 15ANR714## 1 3,000,000 307
2 SC section Switchback roller 13GQ4519## 1 600,000 299
F-43
3 SC switchback release motor (M13) A0V9M101## 1 3,000,000 296

4 FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 15AA8251## 1 5,000,000 297
5 SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) A075B746## 1 5,000,000 298
6 One-way clutch/A 13GQ7709## 1 6,000,000 310
7 One-way clutch/B 13GQ7709## 1 6,000,000 311
8 Pellet supply section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 27LA8051## 1 1,500,000 309
9 Glue tank section Cover paper glue roller drive gear A0753799## 4 750 312
bearing of glue tank section
10 Glue tank assy A15XA36A## 1 2,000 308
(100V) A15XA36E##
(120V) A15XA36F##
(240V)
11 Cover paper supply Pick-up roller 55VAR750## 1 500,000 300
12 section Paper feed roller 55VAR749## 1 500,000 301
13 Separation roller 55VAR749## 1 500,000 301
14 Cover paper feed clutch (CL71) 56AA8201## 1 3,000,000 302
15 Cover paper separation clutch (CL72) 56AA8201## 1 3,000,000 303
16 Cover paper table Roller cutter blade assy A0756230## 1 100,000 304
section
17 Relay conveyance Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) 15ANR714## 1 3,000,000 295
section
18 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter/A A15X3017## 2 750,000 305
19 Exhaust filter/B A15X3018## 1 750,000 306
2.18 GP-501
er Cycle
1 Punch section Die Set DS-5## 500,000
2 Back Gauge mechanism A0N9PP59## 1 4,000,000 317
2.19 GP-502
Nu Classification Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual Parts count No.
mb replacement
er Cycle
1 Punch section Pullback Pad A4F6PP00## 2 500,000 318
2 Suction Cup A4F6PP03## 1 1,000,000 319
3 Book Chute Mylar A4F6PPH1## 4 500,000 322
4 Punch Unit Die Set Felt A4F6PP01## 1 1,000,000 320
5 Die Set A4F6PP02## 1 4,000,000 321
F-44
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. ORU-M PARTS
3. ORU-M PARTS
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts
ORU-M stands for "Operator Replaceable Unit Management." This function displays the steps, adjustment setting methods and manages
the data when the educated user replaces the parts.
Install the prescribed option and change DIPSW15-0 to 1to enable this function. For ORU-M corresponding parts, some parts that are
provided as an assy of parts larger than those parts replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement
operation.
3.2 ORU-M parts list

(1) ORU-M parts list
The Allow and Restrict of the ORU-M parts can be selected on I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life Setting in Service Mode individually.
Parts Target of ORU-M Detection of Detection of Required adjustment Life Life Life
number connector RFID (Standard) (Lower limit) (Upper limit)
disconnection connection *1
57 Intermediate transfer Provided Provided Blade Setting Mode (for 200,000 66% 333%
unit intermediate transfer) prints *2
Belt Line Speed Adj. 175,000
Gamma Automatic
prints *3
Adjustment
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Density balance
adjustment
49: Quantity Developing unit/Y Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 2030 km *2 50% 120%
50: TonerDensitySensorInit.Au (Standard x (Standard x
2082 km *3
Distance to (Y) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Color registration auto
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
51: Quantity Developing unit/M Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 2030 km *2 50% 120%
2082 km *3
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
53: Quantity Developing unit/C Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 2030 km *2 50% 120%
2082 km *3
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
55: Quantity Developing unit/K Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 2030 km *2 50% 120%
2082 km *3
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
41: Quantity Developer/Y None None Auto. Developer Charge 507.5 km *2 50% 120%
520.5 km *3
Distance to 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
43: Quantity Developer/M None None Auto. Developer Charge 507.5 km *2 50% 120%
520.5 km *3
F-45
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
45: Quantity Developer/C None None Auto. Developer Charge 507.5 km *2 50% 120%
520.5 km *3
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
47: Quantity Developer/K None None Auto. Developer Charge 507.5 km *2 50% 120%
520.5 km *3
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
71 2nd transfer unit Provided Provided Blade Setting Mode (For 200,000 50% 120%
the 2nd transfer) prints *2 (Standard x (Standard x
Belt Line Speed Adj. 175,000 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
prints *3
Adjustment
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Density balance
adjustment
81 Fusing unit Provided Provided None 1,050,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
21: Quantity Drum unit/Y None None Gamma Automatic Displays the 80% 113%
22: Adjustment largest
Distance Color Registration value
Auto.Adj. among the
Density balance drive
adjustment distance
(LIMIT
*2=148 km,
*3=157 km)
of the drum
motor/Y
(M1), drive
distance
(LIMIT
*2=148 km,
*3=157 km)
of the
lubricant
motor/Y
(M59), and
% display
against the
life end of
350,000
sheets.
23: Quantity Drum unit/M None None Gamma Automatic Displays the 80% 113%
Auto.Adj. among the
adjustment distance
(LIMIT
**2=148 km,
**3=157 km)
of the drum
motor/M
(M2), drive
distance
(LIMIT
F-46
**2=148 km,
**3=157 km)
of the
lubricant
motor/M
(M60), and
% display
against the
life end of
350,000
sheets.
25: Quantity Drum unit/C None None Gamma Automatic Displays the 80% 113%
Auto.Adj. among the
adjustment distance
(LIMIT
**3=148 km,
***3=157
km) of the
drum motor/
C (M*2),
drive
distance
(LIMIT
***2=148
km,
***3=157
km) of the
lubricant
motor/C
(M61), and
% display
against the
life end of
350,000
sheets.
27: Quantity Drum unit/K None None Gamma Automatic Displays the 80% 113%
28: Adjustment larges value
Distance Color Registration among the
Auto.Adj. drive
Density balance distance
adjustment (LIMIT
**4=148 km,
****3=157
km) of the
drum motor/
K (M**2),
drive
distance
(LIMIT
****2=148
km,
****3=157
km) of the
lubricant
motor/K
(M62), and
% display
against the
life end of
350,000
sheets.
13: Quantity Charging corona/Y None None Gamma Automatic 175,000 57% 143%
14: Time Adjustment prints
Density balance 50.3 h *2
adjustment
63 h *3
15: Quantity Charging corona/M None None Gamma Automatic 175,000 57% 143%
adjustment
63 h *3
17: Quantity Charging corona/C None None Gamma Automatic 175,000 57% 143%
50.3 h *2
F-47
Density balance 63 h *3
adjustment
19: Quantity Charging corona/K None None Gamma Automatic 175,000 57% 143%
adjustment
63 h *3
3,4,5,6,7,8 Dust-proof filter (A, B, None None None 700,000 50% 120%
C) prints (Standard x (Standard x
(Dust-proof Filter/Rt, 0.5) 1.2)
dust-proof Filter/Rr1,
dust-proof Filter/Lt,
dust-proof Filter/Rr4
*4)
3 Dust-proof filter (A) None None None 700,000 50% 120%
(Dust-proof Filter/Rt prints (Standard x (Standard x
*4) 0.5) 1.2)
4 Dust proof filter (B) None None None 700,000 50% 120%
(Dust-proof filter/Rr1 prints (Standard x (Standard x
*4) 0.5) 1.2)
5,6,7,8 Dust proof filter (C) None None None 700,000 50% 120%
(Dust-proof filter/Lt, prints (Standard x (Standard x
dust-proof filter/Rr2, 0.5) 1.2)
dust-proof filter/Rr3,
dust-proof filter/Rr4 *4)
9,10,11,12 Developing cooling None None None 525,000 50% 120%
filter prints (Standard x (Standard x
(Developing charge 0.5) 1.2)
filter/Y, developing
charge filter/M,
developing charge
filter/C, developing
charge filter/K *4)
2 Ozone filter None None None 700,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
* The performance of the life upper limit is not guaranteed. It is within the range that CE can configure according to the demand of customers.
*2 C1100
*3 C1085
*4 Special parts counter name
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing

(1) ORU-M target unit life setting
The life of the ORU-M target unit can be selected individually on I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life Setting of Service Mode. Configure the life with
percent.
(2) ORU-M warning icon display

When the life of the ORU-M target unit strays and the following conditions are met, the ORU-M warning icon appears on the Machine Screen.
• ORU-M function is enabled
• Allowed by I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life Setting
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter

(1) Counter display
Press [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] on the Utility screen, and then the ORU-M target part counter appears.
Note
• By setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] appears on the Utility screen.
• The content which appears on [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] reflects the setting ofI.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life Setting.
• When DIPSW37-0 is changed to "1", a password can be changed for [ORU-M(Unit Replace)].
(2) Counter clear

When the user replaces the ORU-M target parts in the ORU-M replacement work mode.
F-48
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. LIFE VALUE
4. LIFE VALUE
4.1 Life value of materials/parts
• For the special parts counter, the actual replacement cycles of the following parts are shown in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
Parts name Replacement cycle (reference) Actual replacement cycle
Dust-proof filter/Rt 700,000 counts (total counter) · 7,000,000 counts (DIPSW5-3=0, DIPSW5-6=0, default)
· 2,800,000 counts (DIPSW5-3=1, DIPSW5-6=0)
· Counted for each color in the way according to the print coverage or
the slide distance of the developer.
Dust-proof filter/Rr1 700,000 counts (total counter) · 7,000,000 counts
Dust-proof filter/Lt 700,000 counts (total counter) · 7,000,000 counts
Charging corona/Y 175,000 counts (special parts Charging time of the charging corona/Y: 50.3 hours (C1100), 63.0
counter) hours (C1085)
Charging corona/M 175,000 counts (special parts Charging time of the charging corona/M: 50.3 hours (C1100), 63.0
Charging corona/C 175,000 counts (special parts Charging time of the charging corona/C: 50.3 hours (C1100), 63.0
Charging corona/K 175,000 counts (special parts Charging time of the charging corona/K: 50.3 hours (C1100), 63.0
Drum unit/Y 350,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The running distance of the drum/Y: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/Y: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
· 350,000 counts
The actual replacement cycle is the earliest timing among the
following.
· 350,000 counts *2
· The running distance of the drum/Y: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/Y: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
Drum unit/M 350,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The running distance of the drum/M: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/M: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
· 350,000 counts
following.
· 350,000 counts *2
· The running distance of the drum/M: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/M: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
Drum unit/C 350,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The running distance of the drum/C: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/C: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
· 350,000 counts
following.
· 350,000 counts *2
· The running distance of the drum/C: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
F-49
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/C: 148 km

(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
Drum unit/K 350,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The running distance of the drum/K: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/K: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
· 350,000 counts
following.
· 350,000 counts *1
· The running distance of the drum/K: 148 km (C1100), 157 km
(C1085)
· The running distance of the lubricant apply brush/K: 148 km
(C1100), 157 km (C1085)
Developer/Y 850,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/Y
counter) : 507.5 km (C1100) / 520.5 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=0,
DIPSW26-6=0, Default)
: 259.3 km (C1100) / 265.5 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=1,
DIPSW26-6=0)
: 179.2 km (C1100) / 183.3 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=0,
DIPSW26-6=1)
: 99.1 km (C1100) / 101.2 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=1,
DIPSW26-6=1)
Developer/M 850,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/M
counter) : 507.5 km (C1100) / 520.5 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=0,
DIPSW26-6=0, Default)
: 300.2 km (C1100) / 307.2 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=1,
DIPSW26-6=0)
: 209.2 km (C1100) / 213.9 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=0,
DIPSW26-6=1)
: 118.2 km (C1100) / 120.5 km (C1085) (DIPSW23-6=1,
DIPSW26-6=1)
Developer/C 850,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/C: 507.5 km (C1100),
counter) 520.5 km (C1085)
Developer/K 850,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/K: 507.5 km (C1100),
counter) 520.5 km (C1085)
Developing unit/Y 3,400,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/Y
counter) : 2,030 km (C1100) / 2,082 km (C1085) (DIPSW24-4=0, Default)
: 627 km (C1100) / 643 km (C1085) (DIPSW24-4=1)
Developing unit/M 3,400,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/M
: 627 km (C1100) / 643 km (C1085) (DIPSW24-4=1)
Developing unit/C 3,400,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/C
: 627 km (C1100) / 643 km (C1085) (DIPSW24-4=1)
Developing unit/K 3,400,000 counts (special parts The running distance of the developing roller/K
: 627 km (C1100) / 643 km (C1085) (DIPSW24-4=1)
Belt cleaning blade · 200,000 counts (special parts The actual replacement cycle is the earliest timing among the
counter) (C1100) following.
· 175,000 counts (special parts · 200,000 counts *1 (C1100), 175,000 counts *1 (C1085)
counter) (C1085) The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 113 km
2nd transfer belt cleaning blade · 200,000 counts (special parts The actual replacement cycle is the earliest timing among the
counter) (C1100) following.
· 175,000 counts (special parts · 200,000 counts *1 (C1100), 175,000 counts *1 (C1085)
counter) (C1085) · Drive distance of the 2nd transfer belt (apply the coefficient
according to the outer temperature): 77 km
Charging roller 350,000 counts (special parts Charging time of the charging driven roller: 25 hours
counter)
Charging driven roller 350,000 counts (special parts Charging time of the charging driven roller: 25 hours
counter)
*1 Counted in all color modes
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode
*2 Counted only in the full color mode
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode
F-50
4.2 Life value determining condition

The replacement cycles (number of prints) are values calculated based on the actual life of parts when the print is executed under the following
conditions. Since the idle running time (when an image is not created) of each part can vary widely depending on the print mode, the actual life
cycle possibly become different between the parts whose replacement cycle (number of sheets) are the same.
Item Description
Printing method Full color 10 copies intermittently (C1100)
Full color 9 copies intermittently (C1085)
Paper size A4
Coverage 5% coverage for each color
Environmental temp, humidity Q zone
F-51
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE bizhub...
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085

5.1 External section
5.1.1 Replacing the dust-proof filter/Rt
Note
• A new model that improves the toner suction performance is introduced for the dust-proof filter/Rt.
• Use of the new model of dust-proof filter/Rt is recommended.
• To distinguish between the new model and the old model, refer to "I.4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct assy and the dust-proof
filter/Rt".
(1) Periodically replaced parts and cycle

• Dust-proof filter/Rt
: Every 700,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4 Life value"))
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. When the PF is connected, open the front door [1] of the PF.
2. While you push the lock lever [1] to the direction of the arrow [2],
release it to the direction of the arrow [3].
3. Remove the dust-proof filter/Rt [4].
[1] [4]
[2] [3]
4. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in

[2] [1] reverse.
Note
• When you install the dust-proof filter/Rt, install it so that
the projection [1] of the dust-proof filter/Rt comes inside
the seal part [2].
• When you activate the main body, be sure to lock the
dust-proof filter/Rt with the lock lever.
5. After you replace the dust-proof filter/Rt, conduct the following

item.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 3
5.1.2 Replacing the ozone filter and the dust-proof filter/Rr1

• Ozone filter
: Every 700,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 700,000 counts (special parts counter))
F-52
• Dust-proof filter/Rr1
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the filter cover/2 [2].
2. Pull the handle [1] and then remove the ozone filter [2].
[1] Note
• When it is hard to insert the ozone filter, apply the setting
powder on the both sides [1] of the ozone filter.
3. Remove the dust-proof filter/Rr1 [2] from the filter cover/2 [1].
reverse.
5. After you replace the ozone filter and the dust-proof filter/Rr1,
conduct following items.
2 • For the ozone filter: Counter reset of the parts counter number
2
• For the dust-proof filter/Rr1: Counter reset of the parts counter
1
number 4
5.1.3 Replacing the dust-proof filter/Lt, /Rr2, /Rr3, /Rr4

• Dust-proof filter/Lt
F-53
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the filter box cover. (Refer to G.3.2.3 Filter box cover,
filter box, rear cover/Up, /Rt, /Md, /Lw)
2. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove 4 filter covers
[2].
[1] [2]
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the dust-proof
filter/Lt, the dust-proof filter/Rr2, the dust-proof filter/Rr3, and the
dust-proof filter/Rr4 [3] from each filter cover [2].
reverse.
5. After you replace the dust-proof filter/Lt, the dust-proof filter/Rr2,
1 the dust-proof filter/Rr3, and the dust-proof filter/Rr4, perform
following items.
• For the dust-proof filter/Lt: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 5
3
1 • For the dust-proof filter/Rr2: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 6
number 7
number 8
5.2 Write section

5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof glass
(1) Periodically cleaned parts and cycle
• Dust proof glass/Y, dust proof glass/M, dust proof glass/C, dust proof glass/K :
Every 350,000 counts (total counter)
*Clean the dust-proof glass/Y, the dust-proof glass/M, the dust-proof glass/C, and the dust-proof glass/K at the same time when you replace
the drum unit.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening and closing
the toner hopper unit)
2. Remove the dust-proof glass/Y [1], dust-proof glass/M [2], dust-
proof glass/C [3], and dust-proof glass/K [4] by pulling them out.
[4] [3] [2] [1]
F-54
3. Place each dust-proof glass [1] on the A3 or 11 x 17 paper [2], and
then clean the glass section [3] with the hydro-wipe.
CAUTION
• When you hold with hands and clean the dust-proof glass,
you possibly get injured by the edge of the glass.
When you clean it, place the dust-proof glass.

reverse.
5. After the dust-proof glass is cleaned, perform adjust in the
following order.
• Gamma automatic adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma
[1] [2] [3] Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• Density Balance Adjustment
5.3 Photo conductor section

5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section
Open the toner hopper unit
Remove the charging corona
Pull out the process unit
Remove the intermediate

transfer unit
Remove the drum unit Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
5.3.2 Opening and closing the toner hopper unit

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door/Rt [1] and front door/Lt [2].
2. Loosen the screw [3]. Hold the handle [4] and then open the toner
hopper unit [5].
Note
• Do not press the toner hopper unit [5] when it is open. The
shape of the hinge [6] on the toner hopper unit is possibly
deformed.
• When you open the toner hopper unit, clean around the
toner hopper unit.
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1]
F-55
3. When you close the toner hopper unit, follow the steps in reverse.
Note
• If the toner hopper unit is left to be open for a long period,
remove the inlet covers [1] from inside the toner hopper
unit and attach the cover to the toner inlet [2] and prevent
the dust from coming in.
• When you remove the inlet cover [1], be sure to return
them to the proper position. Otherwise the toner hopper
unit is not closed.
[1] [2]
5.3.3 Cleaning around the toner hopper unit

• Toner supply opening/Y, toner supply opening/M, toner supply opening/C, toner supply opening/K
:When you open the toner hopper unit
• Toner hopper exit/Y, toner hopper exit/M, toner hopper exit/C, toner hopper exit/K
:When you open the toner hopper unit
(2) Procedure
2. Clean around the toner supply opening/Y [1], the toner supply
opening/M [2], the toner supply opening/C [3], and the toner supply
opening/K [4] with a vacuum cleaner.
3. Clean around the toner hopper exit/Y [5], the toner hopper exit/M
[6], the toner hopper exit/C [7], and the toner hopper exit/K [8] with
a vacuum cleaner.
[8] [7] [6] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4]
5.3.4 Pulling out the process unit

(1) Procedure
Note
• When you pull out the process unit, be sure to remove the charging corona beforehand.
• To prevent the main body from falling, the process unit and the duplex section cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• Be sure to put the duplex section in the main body before you pull out the process unit.
• When the process cannot be pulled out, check to see whether the lock lever/1 and lock lever/2 are distorted. Replace them as
necessary. (Refer to G.3.2.24 Lock lever/1, /2)
2. Remove the charging corona. (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replacing the
charging corona)
3. Push the mount handle/Lt [1] and the process mount handle/Rt [2]
to the inside together to unlock the process unit [3], and pull out
the process unit [3] by holding the handles.
Note
• Be sure to confirm that the 2nd transfer unit is at the
release position before you pull out the process unit [3]. If
the unit is at the pressure position, the machine possibly
get damaged.
[1] [3] [2]
5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit

Note
• 4 drum units are equipped for each color, yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
Each drum unit is a common part. However, toner of each color is adhered to a drum unit that is already used, so do not use the
drum unit for other colors.
• Be careful not to exposure the drum unit to the light.
• When you remove the drum unit, be sure to cover it with the drum cover [1].
• Even when other units are replaced, return the process unit to its original position and close the front door and avoid the drum
from being exposed.
F-56
[1]

• Drum unit
: Every 350,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100%, or the limit value of the drum unit*1 whichever is earlier
(special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value"))
*1 350,000 counts
(2) Procedure for removal

1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.7.1 Removing
and reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
Note
• When you pull out the process unit, be sure to remove the
charging corona beforehand.
2. Hold the edges [2] of the image correction unit [1], and open to the
down side.
Note
• Be sure to open the image correction unit. When the unit
is closed, it is difficult to remove the drum unit/K [3].
[3] [2] [1]

3. Hold the both ends [3] of the drum stay [1] and the neutralizing
corona [2], and remove the drum unit [4].
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the photo conductor
section [5] of the drum unit with bare hands.
[3] [1] [4] [2] [3]
[2] [5]
F-57
Note
[5] [4] • When you install the drum unit [1], install it so that the
drum stay [2] is on the drum attachment block [3].
• When you install the drum unit [1], be sure to install it so
that the triangle marks of the drum unit [4] and the
process mount [5] match.
[3] [1] [2]
[4] [5]
[3] [2]
Note
• When you reinstall the drum unit/K, be careful not to
entangle the sheet [1] of the image correction unit.
[1]
F-58
(3) Procedure for reinstallation

1. Remove the screw [1] 1 each of the new drum unit. Remove the
[2] blade pressure release part [2] 1 each and then let the blade
press.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Apply the setting toner on the surface of the drum [1] evenly with
the hydro-wipe.
3. Rotate the edge of the drum with fingers to the direction of the
arrow [2] until the setting toner disappears.
Note
• When you apply the setting toner, place the setting toner
on the paper. Take the setting toner on the paper a little
with the hydro-wipe.
• Be sure to turn around the drum with the outer flanges [4]
of the edge [3]. Do not touch the image area.
• When you rotate the drum, rotate it with clean hands.
• Be careful not to damage the drum.
• When you rotate the drum, be sure to rotate it to the
direction of the arrow [2]. If you turn it in the reverse
direction, the cleaning blade and the smoothing blade
break.
• The setting toner number 2 can be a substitute of the
setting toner.
[3] [4] a0u0t3c001ca
F-59
4. Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• Be sure to close the image correction unit [2] after you
install the drum unit/K [1].
• When you close the image correction unit [2], be sure to
hold the both edge [3] of the image correction unit.
5. After you replace the drum unit, conduct the following items in the
order.
• Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the
dust-proof glass)
• For the drum unit/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter number
[1] [3] [2] 21 and number 22.
• For the drum unit/M: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 23 and number 24.
• For the drum unit/C: Counter reset of the parts counter number
25 and number 26.
• For the drum unit/K: Counter reset of the parts counter number
27 and number 28.
• Initial drum rotation (Refer to I.4.4.13 Initial Drum Rotation
(Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• Color registration auto adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color
Registration Auto. Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Color registration gap measurement/Manual adjustment (Refer
to I.4.3.14 Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer
Adjustment))
• Maximum density initial adjustment (Recommended to be
conducted) (Refer to I.4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum
Peculiarity Adj.))
5.3.6 Cleaning the drum potential sensor stay/Y, /M, /C, /K

• Drum potential sensor stay/Y, drum potential sensor stay/M, drum potential sensor stay/C, drum potential sensor stay/K
: When you replace the drum unit
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit. (Refer to F.5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit)
Note
2. Remove the developing unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing the

Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K)
3. Clean the upper surface [1] of the drum potential sensor stay/Y,
the drum potential sensor stay/M, the drum potential sensor stay/
C, and the drum potential sensor stay/K with a blower brush.
Note
• Do not touch with hand or scratch with a brush the sensor
face [2] of each drum potential sensor.
• Do not clean them with a vacuum cleaner or a cloth.
The drum potential sensor is possibly damaged due to the
static electricity.
[1] [2]
5.4 Charging section

5.4.1 Replacing the charging corona
• Charging corona :
F-60
(2) Procedure
Note
• The product installs 4 charging coronas one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a
once-used charging corona for another color even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix up
and the print quality degrade.
2. Push down the lever of the charging corona [1] to the lower right,
and then pull out [2] and remove it.
Note
• When you reinstall the charging corona [1], be sure to
check that the projection [3] of the charging corona aligns
with the groove of the ozone duct [4]. Push the charging
corona gently to the rear. This operation makes the
distance appropriate between the drum unit and the
charging corona. Be careful not to push hard, otherwise
the charging corona becomes deformed.
[3] [4]
reverse.
4. After you replace the charging corona, conduct the following items
in the order.
dust-proof glass)
• For the charging corona/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 13 and number 14
• For the charging corona/M: Counter reset of the parts counter
• For the charging corona/C: Counter reset of the parts counter
[1] [2] • For the charging corona/K: Counter reset of the parts counter
Peculiarity Adj.))
5.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona

(1) Cleaned parts, cycle
• Charging corona:
Every 175,000 counts (total counter)
*Be sure to clean the charging corona every time you visit the customer.
(2) Procedure
charging corona)
2. Remove the charging corona cleaning jig [1].
[1]
F-61
3. For the charging wire cleaning, insert the charging corona cleaning
jig [3] from the insertion opening [2] of the charging corona [1] of
[5] each color, and move it back and forth [5] along the guide [4].
Note
• The charging wire [6] is cleaned by being scrubbed with
[2] the velvet section [7] of the charging corona cleaning jig
[3].
[4]
4. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the

[1] [7] removal steps in reverse.
[6] [3]
5.5 Developing section

5.5.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
• Developer/Y, developer/M, developer/C, developer/K
(2) Developer ejection procedures

[5] [4] [3] [1] [2] [6] 1. Remove the cover table. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Upper cover, cover
table)
2. Pull the earth plate [1] to the direction of the arrow [2]. Then,
release it from the shoulder screw [3].
3. Remove the developer charge plate [4] to the direction of the arrow
[5].
Note
• Use the developer charge plate when you charge the new
developer.
4. Remove the developer charge funnel/L [6].

Note
• Use the developer charge funnel/L when you charge the
new developer.
[2] [1] 5. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the rotation jig [2] to the
direction of the arrow.
F-62
[1] [2] Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K)
7. Compose the packing box of the developer into the developing unit
stand.
8. Install the developing unit [1] to the developing unit stand [2].
9. Repeat the following steps 10 and 11 and exit the developer of

each color.
Note
• Do not remove the cover of the developing unit [1] and the
toner inlet [2] when you eject the developer.
10. Hold the developing unit in 1 hand. Then, install the rotation jig [1]
to the coupling [2] on the agitator screw side, and rotate to the
Note
• Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
• When you have the developer ejection jig, use the
developer ejection jig instead of the rotation jig.
[1] [2]
11. Install the rotation jig to the coupling [1] on the developing roller
side, and rotate to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
• When you have the developer ejection jig, use the
developer ejection jig instead of the rotation jig.
• When the developer is replaced, be sure to conduct
"Toner Density Sensor Init." in Service Mode. (Refer to I.
4.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
12. Install all of the developing units which have ejected the developer
[1] to the process unit.
Note
• Be sure to charge the developer while the process unit is
installed to the main body.
(3) Developer charging procedures

1. To prevent the dirt, place a sheet under the toner inlet.
2. Insert the developer charge plate [1] into the shoulder screw [2]
and install it by sliding to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• The shoulder screws are on the top of each developing
unit.
F-63
3. Install the developer charge funnel/L [2] aligning with the groove of
the developer charge plate [1].
Note
• Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge
funnel/L to the toner inlet of the developing unit.
4. Install the included developer charge funnel/U [1] to the developer

charge funnel/L [2].
Note
• Be sure to use the developer charge funnel/U that is
included in each developer. Reuse is prohibited.
• Be sure that the developer charge funnel/L and the
developer charge funnel/U do not have any foreign
material.
5. Perform [Process Adjustment] - [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] - [Auto.

Developer Charge] on service mode.
6. Charge new developer [1] into the developer charge funnel/U [2].
Note
• Before you charge the developer, check that the color that
you charge is selected on the screen.
7. After you charge the developer, press [Cancel].
8. Remove the developer charge funnel/U [1] and the developer

charge funnel/L [2].
[1] [2] [3] 9. Release the earth plate [1] from the shoulder screw [2]. Then,
remove the developer charge plate [3] to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• When you move on to the next color, be sure to clean the
developer charge funnel/L.
10. Repeat the steps 2 to 9 to charge the developer to the other

developing units.
11. Reinstall the parts after that following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• After the developer is replaced, be sure to clean each
dust-proof glass. (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof
glass)
12. After you replace the developer/Y, the developer/M, the developer/
C, and the developer/K, conduct the following items in the order.
dust-proof glass)
• Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.4.12
Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)")
• For the developer/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter
F-64
• For the developer/M: Counter reset of the parts counter
• For the developer/C: Counter reset of the parts counter
• For the developer/K: Counter reset of the parts counter
Peculiarity Adj.))
5.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K

• Developing unit/Y, developing unit/M, developing unit/C, developing unit/K
: Every 3,400,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value"))
(2) Procedure
Note
• Be careful not to fold the teflon sheet that is applied on the top cover of the developing unit on the developing roller side.
• When you clean the developing unit, be sure to use a hydro-wipe that is configured as a CE tool. Use of paper or cloth other
than hydro-wipe causes a white line on the image because of the dust and lint that are stuck in the developing regulation plate
• 4 developing units are provided; one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a once-
used developing unit for another color even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix up and
the print quality degrade.
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.4 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
3. Loosen the screw [2].
[1] [2]
4. Push the left side of the developing pressure material [1]. Remove
it while you slide it to the rear side of the main body.
Note
• When you reinstall the developing pressure material, be
sure to check that the spring which presses the
developing unit is not bended.
5. Remove the developing unit [1] from the process unit [2].
Note
• When you remove the developing unit, be careful not to
touch the developing roller.
• When you remove the developing unit, be careful so that
the developing roller does not touch the process unit.
F-65
reverse.
Note
• When you keep 2 sets of each color of developing unit, be
sure to put the identification labels (A, B) that are
included.
• When you reinstall the developing unit, be sure to align
the triangle mark [1] of the developing unit and the
process unit.
7. After you replace the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the
developing unit/C, and the developing unit/K, conduct the following
[1] items in the order.
dust-proof glass)
• Auto. Developer Charge (Refer to I.4.4.11 Auto. Developer
Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• For the developing unit/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter
• For the developing unit/M: Counter reset of the parts counter
• For the developing unit/C: Counter reset of the parts counter
• For the developing unit/K: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Gamma auto adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma Automatic
Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• Density balance adjustment
• Maximum density initial adjustment (Recommended) (Refer to
I.4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
5.5.3 Cleaning around the developing unit

• Around the developing unit
:When you replace the drum unit, and developer or developing unit.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit. (Refer to F.5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit)
Note

3. Clean the duct [1] of the process unit with a vacuum cleaner or,
hydro-wipe and isopropyl alcohol.
Note
• Clean it with a vacuum cleaner first. When it is still dirty,
use hydro-wipe and isopropyl alcohol.
[1] 4. Clean the stay [2] of the process unit with a vacuum cleaner or,
hydro-wipe and isopropyl alcohol.
Note
[2]
F-66
[1] 5. Clean the upper surface [1] of the developing unit with a vacuum
cleaner or, hydro-wipe and isopropyl alcohol.
Note

reverse.
5.6 Toner supply section

5.6.1 Replacing the developing charge filter/Y, /M, /C, /K
• Developing charge filter/Y, developing charge filter/M, developing charge filter/C, developing charge filter/K
: Every 525,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 525,000 counts (special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening and closing
2. Open the developing cooling fan assy [1].
3. Remove 4 developing charge filter/Y, developing charge filter/M,

developing charge filter/C, and developing charge filter/K [1].
removal steps in reverse.
5. After you replace the developing charge filter, conduct following
items.
• For the developing charge filter/Y: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 9
• For the developing charge filter/M: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 10
• For the developing charge filter/C: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 11
• For the developing charge filter/K: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 12
5.7 Intermediate transfer section

5.7.1 Removing and reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit
(1) Procedure
unit)
2. Push the release button [1] and then open the toner supply cover
[2].
[1] [2]
F-67
3. Remove the connector [1].
4. Loosen 2 screws [2].
Note
• Be sure to loosen 2 screws [2] after you pull out the
process unit.
When the process unit is inserted and you loosen 2
screws [2], the intermediate transfer unit possibly falls
from the process unit.
5. Loosen 2 screws [3]. Then rotate the positioning shaft [4] to the
direction of the arrow and remove it.
Note
[1] [4] [2] • When you install the intermediate transfer unit, be sure to
install in the following order.
1. Insert the process unit to the main body.
2. Install the positioning shaft [4] and tighten 2 screws
[3].
3. Tighten 2 screws [2].
[3]
[1] [3] [2] 6. Lift up the handle [1], and remove the intermediate transfer unit [2]
to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
• Be sure to hold the handle [1] of the intermediate transfer
unit by its ends with both hands.
7. Rotate the supporting base [1] 1 each to the direction of the arrow
[2] and push it to the direction or the arrow [3]. Let the intermediate
[3] fusing unit [4] stand.
reverse.
9. After you install the intermediate transfer unit, conduct the
following items in the order.
dust-proof glass)
• Blade setting mode (Refer to I.4.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
Peculiarity Adj.))
• Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed
[2] [1] [4] Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
Note
• When you reinstall the intermediate transfer belt unit [1],
align 2 guide pins [2] on the front and the rear with the
supporting block/Fr [3] and supporting block/Rr [4], 2
each.
• When you reinstall the intermediate transfer unit, be sure
not to hit the intermediate transfer unit to the drum.
F-68
[1] [2] Note

• When you reinstall the intermediate transfer unit, be sure
to align the mark [1] of the intermediate transfer unit with
the mark [2] of the process unit.
Note
• After you install the intermediate transfer unit [1] to the
process unit [2], be sure to check that the image
correction unit [3] contacts with the intermediate transfer
unit [1].
When it does not contact, hold the both sides [4] of the
image correction unit, and hit to the intermediate transfer
unit [1].
[1] [4] [3] [2]
(2) Installing of a new intermediate transfer unit

1. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and then remove 6 locking materials
[2].
Note
• Installing the intermediate transfer unit with the locking
materials [2] installed damages the main body drive
section.
[1] [2]
2. Install the auxiliary cleaner assy [1]. (Refer to F.5.7.2 Reversing

[1] the intermediate transfer scraper, replacing the auxiliary cleaner
assy)
3. Install the transfer belt cleaning unit [2]. (Refer to F.5.7.3
Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit)
4. Install the separation claw unit [3]. (Refer to F.5.7.6 Replacing the
transfer belt separation claw)
Note
transfer belt with bare hands.
• After you install this unit, be sure to apply the setting
powder to the intermediate transfer belt. After you applied
[2] [3] the setting powder, be sure to rotate the intermediate
transfer belt and scrape off the applied setting powder.
• There are no problems with using the setting toner or the
setting toner No.2 instead of the setting powder.
5. After the replacement of the intermediate transfer unit, conduct the

following items.
dust-proof glass)
6. After you install the intermediate transfer unit, conduct the
F-69
Peculiarity Adj.))
Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
5.7.2 Reversing the intermediate transfer scraper, replacing the auxiliary cleaner assy
• Auxiliary cleaner assy
: Every 800,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 800,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Periodically check, cleaned parts, cycle

• Intermediate transfer scraper
: Every 400,000 counts (total counter) (actual check and cleaning cycle: every 400,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
: Every 350,000 counts (total counter) (actual check and cleaning cycle: every 350,000 counts (special parts counter))*2
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(3) Replacement procedure of the auxiliary cleaner assy

2. Remove the screw [1].
3. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the auxiliary cleaner assy
[3].
Note
• When you install the auxiliary cleaner assy [3], be sure to
install the screw [1] after you install the screw [2].
When you install the screw [1] at first, the auxiliary cleaner
assy [3] is possibly strained and does not operate
normally.
[3] [1]
[2]
F-70
reverse.
Note
• After you install the auxiliary cleaner assy, rotate the
oscillation cam [1] as shown in the picture, and be sure to
move oscillation arm [2] to the central position.
5. After the auxiliary cleaner assy is replaced, conduct the following

step.
6. After the intermediate transfer scraper is reversed, conduct the
following item.
[2] [1] • Counter reset of the parts counter number 142
(4) Reverse procedure of the intermediate transfer scraper

1. Remove the auxiliary cleaner assy. (Refer to F.5.7.2.(3)
Replacement procedure of the auxiliary cleaner assy)
2. While you hold the mounting plate [1], remove the screw [2], 1
each, and then remove the holding side plate/Fr [3] and holding
[4]
side plate/Rr [4].
3. Remove the mounting plate assy [5].
[3] [1]
[2]
[2]
[5]
[4] [7] [6] Note

• When you remove the mounting plate assy [1], be careful
not to loose the spring [2].
When you clean inside of the auxiliary cleaner assy,
remove and keep the spring [2].
• When you reinstall the mounting plate assy [1], adjust the
position of the holes [4] by pressing down the areas of
mounting plate [3] that contact with the spring [2], and
insert the projections [7] of the holding side plate/Fr [5]
[5] [7] [4] and holding side plate/Rr [6] into the holes.
[9] [8]
• When you reinstall the holding side plate/Fr [5] and
holding side plate/Rr [6], be sure to align the projections
[8] of the auxiliary cleaner assy with the holes [9] of the
holding side plate/Fr [5] and holding side plate/Rr [6].
• When you reinstall the mounting plate assy [1], be sure to
confirm that 2 springs [2] touch the mounting plate assy
[1] properly.
• Press in the spring [2] so that the side which is more
[8] [9] [3]
wound is inserted in the boss side.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-71
Note
• When you reinstall the holding side plate/Fr [1] and
holding side plate/Rr [2], be sure to confirm that there is
no gap between the resin section [3] and the holding side
plate/Fr [1] and holding side plate/Rr [2].
[3] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [1] 4. Turn the auxiliary cleaner assy [1] upside down on the paper [2].
Discard the toner inside. Clean the assy with a blower brush or a
vacuum cleaner.
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [2] and the
[1] intermediate transfer scraper [3].
6. Reverse the intermediate transfer scraper [3] and install it following
the step 5 in reverse.
[3] [2]
Note
• The intermediate transfer scraper [1] before being
reversed has a mark (number "1") on the area [2] that is
shown in the illustration. After the reverse, check that the
number is "2".
[2] [1]

[2] reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the intermediate transfer scraper [1],
be sure to align the 2 projections [2] of the mounting plate
[1] with the holes [3] of the intermediate transfer scraper and
the metal plate, 2 each.
• When you reinstall the intermediate transfer scraper [1],
be sure to confirm that there is no bent nor tilt. When it is
bent or tilted, it cannot be cleaned properly.
[3]
F-72
5.7.3 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit

• Transfer belt cleaning unit
: Every 1,200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 1,200,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fixing shaft mounting
plate [2].
Note
• When you install the fixing shaft mounting plate [2], install
it so that the leading edge [3] of the cleaning unit fixing
shaft and the hole [4] of the fixing shaft mounting plate
match.
[1] [2] [3][4]

4. While you hold the transfer belt cleaning unit [2] with your hand,
slide the cleaning unit fixing shaft [3] to the direction the arrow.
Then, release it from the hole [4].
[1]
[2] [4] [3]
5. Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit [1] to the direction of the
arrow.
Note
• Handle the belt cleaner unit gently when you remove the
transfer belt cleaning unit.
The toner that is accumulated in between the toner guide
roller of the transfer belt cleaning unit and the
intermediate transfer belt cleaning pad possibly spill.
The state that the toner is accumulated is normal, since
this toner scrapes off the wax that is applied on the belt.
When the toner is spilled over the separation claw unit,
remove the transfer belt separation claw unit and clean it.
[1] (Refer to F.5.7.6 Replacing the transfer belt separation
claw)
F-73
Note
• When you install the transfer belt cleaning unit, be sure to
insert the guide part [1] of the transfer belt cleaning unit
into the groove of the intermediate transfer unit [2]. Then,
insert the cleaning unit fixing shaft.
[1] [2]
[1] [2]

reverse.
Note
• Before you install the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to the part [1] on the intermediate transfer
belt.
After you applied the setting powder, be sure to rotate the
intermediate transfer belt and scrape off the applied
setting powder.
• You can also use the setting toner or the setting toner
number 2 instead of the setting powder.
• When you rotate the intermediate transfer belt, use the
[1] belt rotation jig. (Refer to I.9.2 Intermediate transfer belt
position adjustment)
F-74
7. After the transfer belt cleaning unit is replaced, conduct the
[1] following items.
Peculiarity Adj.))
Note
• When a new transfer belt cleaning unit is installed, be sure
to remove 2 blade release screws [1] before you install it.
[1]
5.7.4 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade, transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr, /Rr
• Transfer belt cleaning blade
: Every 200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100%, or the limit value of the belt cleaning blade *1 whichever is
earlier (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value"))*2
: Every 175,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100%, or the limit value of the belt cleaning blade *1 whichever is
earlier (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value"))*3
• Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr
• Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr
*1 200,000 counts (C1100), 175,000 counts (C1085)
*2 C1100
*3 C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.7.3 Replacing
[2] [3] the transfer belt cleaning unit)
2. Remove 2 springs [1].
3. Pull out the blade support shaft [2], and remove the belt cleaning
blade [3].
Note
• When you install the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the intermediate
transfer belt to which the transfer belt cleaning unit is
attached.
• Take an extra care not to touch or damage the blade of the
belt cleaning blade [3]. After setting powder is applied,
[1] rotate the transfer belt to brush off all setting powder.
• There are no problems with using the setting toner or the

reverse.
F-75
[2] [3] [1] 5. After you install the belt cleaning blade, replace the transfer belt
cleaning seal/Fr [1] and the transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr [2].
Note
• When you attach the new transfer belt cleaning seal, clean
the attachment side of the transfer belt cleaning unit with
the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
• When you reinstall a new transfer belt cleaning seal, be
sure to check that it contacts the transfer belt cleaning
[4] blade [3] and the part [4].
• When you replace the transfer belt cleaning blade, be sure
to replace the transfer belt cleaning seal.
Otherwise, a gap is created between the transfer belt
cleaning blade and the transfer belt cleaning seal, and
then toner spills out.
6. After you replace the belt cleaning blade, the transfer belt cleaning
seal/Fr, and the transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr, conduct the
following item.
• For the belt cleaning blade: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 61 and number 62.
• For the belt cleaning seal/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 189.
• For the belt cleaning seal/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 190.
• Blade Setting Mode (Intermediate transfer) (Refer to I.4.4.8
Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
5.7.5 Replacing the toner collection sheet

• Toner collection sheet
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
the transfer belt cleaning unit)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the toner collection sheet/2 [2]
and then remove the toner collection sheet [3].
Note
• Do not bend or damage the PET sheet of the toner
collection sheet.
• When you install the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the intermediate
transfer belt to which the transfer belt cleaning unit is
attached. After setting powder is applied, rotate the
transfer belt to brush off all setting powder.
[1] • There are no problems with using the setting toner or the

reverse.
4. After the toner collection sheet is replaced, conduct the following
items.
[2] [3] 8050ma3159
5.7.6 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw

• Transfer belt separation claw
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-76
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the separation claw unit [2].
Note
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
[3] [2] [4]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove 3 transfer belt

separation claws [2].
reverse.
5. After the transfer belt separation claw is replaced, conduct the
following items.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3051
5.7.7 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt

• Intermediate transfer belt
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-77
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the auxiliary cleaner assy. (Refer to F.5.7.2 Reversing the
intermediate transfer scraper, replacing the auxiliary cleaner assy)
Note
• When you install the transfer belt cleaning unit, be sure to
apply the setting powder to the intermediate transfer belt.
After you applied the setting powder, be sure to rotate the
intermediate transfer belt and scrape off the applied
setting powder. (Refer to F.5.7.3 Replacing the transfer
[2] [4] [3] belt cleaning unit)
• You can also use the setting toner or the setting toner
number 2 instead of the setting powder.
4. Remove the transfer belt separation claw. (Refer to F.5.7.6

Replacing the transfer belt separation claw)
5. Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the wiring harness.
6. Remove the screw [2]. Remove the sensor unit [4] while you
release the actuator [3] to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• Be careful not to remove the sensor from the sensor unit
[4], because each sensor is adjusted in a factory.
• When you install the sensor unit [4], be sure to install it
[1] [5][6] while you release the actuator [3] to the direction of the
arrow.
When you do not release it, the actuator possibly
damages the transfer belt.
• When you install the sensor unit [4], install it so that the
projection [5] of the sensor unit is aligned to the hole [6]
of the metal plate.
7. Remove the spring [1], the spring [2].
Note
• The spring [1] and the spring [2] differ in their shapes.
Install the springs so that their hooks are on the tension
regulation plate [3] from outside.
• Hook the round hook side of the spring [1] and the spring
[2] to the installation side of the transfer belt cleaning unit.
[3] [2]
[1] [3]
F-78
8. Remove the screw [1] on the rear side of the handle, and rotate
[5] the handle [2] to the direction of the arrow [3].
9. Match the notch of the shaft [4] and the hole of the metal plate [5].
Then, pull out the shaft [4] to the direction of the arrow [6] and
remove it.
[3] [4]
[1] [2] [6]
10. Remove the tension arm/Fr fixing screw [1] that is mounted on the
front side of the intermediate transfer unit.
[1]
11. Push down the top of the tension arm/Fr [1].

12. Fix the tension arm/Fr [1] by using the tension arm/Fr fixing screw
[1] [2].
Note
• When you loose or tighten the tension arm/Fr fixing screw
[2], be sure to push down the tension arm/Fr [1] so that it
does not touch the tension arm/Fr fixing screw [2].
[2]
Note
• Tighten the tension arm/Fr fixing screw [1] so that 5 mm is
left, and then fix it by hooking the projection [2] of the
tension arm/Fr to the screw.
[1]
[2]
F-79
13. Remove the tension arm/Rr fixing screw [1] that is mounted on the
rear side of the intermediate transfer unit.
[1]
14. Push down the top of the tension arm/Rr [1].

[1] 15. Fix the tension arm/Rr [1] by using the tension arm/Rr fixing screw
[2].
Note
• When you loose or tighten the tension arm/Rr fixing screw
[2], be sure to push down the tension arm/Rr [1] so that it
does not touch the tension arm/Rr fixing screw [2].
[2] • When you reinstall the parts, be sure to remove the
tension arm fixing screws on the front and rear and
confirm that the belt tension roller is tensioned. When the
tension does not work properly, belt mis-centering
occurs.
• When you reinstall the parts, be sure to reinstall the
tension arm fixing screws to the original positions after
they are used.
Note
• Tighten the tension arm/Rr fixing screw [1] so that 5 mm is
left, and then fix it by hooking the projection [2] of the
tension arm/Rr to the screw.
[1]
[2]
16. Place the intermediate transfer unit so that its front side faces
down.
17. Put the supporting base [1] on the rear side to the original position.
[1]
F-80
18. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the power supply cover [2].
19. Remove the intermediate transfer belt [3] while you pull it straight
up.
Note
• Hold the intermediate transfer belt by its both ends within
10 mm from the edge, and do not touch the other areas.
transfer belt with bare hands.

reverse.
Note
[1] [2] • Be sure to install the intermediate transfer belt so that the
lot number comes to the upper side (rear side of
machine).
21. After you replace the intermediate transfer belt, conduct the
following items.
dust-proof glass)
22. After you replace the intermediate transfer belt, conduct the
[3] • Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed
5.7.8 Cleaning the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) and the intermediate transfer steering sensor
(PS86)
Note
• An old model [1] and new model [2] are introduced for the sensor unit.
• The PET sheet [3] and the seal part [4] are installed to the new model of the sensor unit.
To prevent the scattering toner from applying on the sensor which is inside the sensor unit, the PET sheet and the seal part cover
the hole.
[4] [3]
[1] [2]

• Intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68)
: Every 600,000 counts (total counter)*1
*Clean the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
• Intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86)
F-81

*Clean the intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86) at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure (For the old model)

2. Remove the sensor unit. (Refer to F.5.7.7 Replacing the
intermediate transfer belt)
3. While you move the actuator [1], clean the intermediate transfer
steering edge sensor (PS68) [2] and the intermediate transfer
steering sensor (PS86) [3] by using a blower brush.
[1] [2] Note
• Be careful not to remove the sensor from the sensor unit,
because each sensor is adjusted in a factory.
• When the cleaning is finished, check that toner is not
applied to the sensor.
When the toner is applied to the sensor, mis-detection of
the intermediate transfer belt position occurs, and the
intermediate transfer belt possibly gets torn.
• We recommend you to replace it with the new model of
the sensor unit.

reverse.
[3]
(3) Procedure (For the new model)

2. Remove the sensor unit. (Refer to F.5.7.7 Replacing the
intermediate transfer belt)
3. While you move the actuator [1], clean the intermediate transfer
steering edge sensor (PS68) [3] and the intermediate transfer
steering sensor (PS86) [4] by using a blower brush from the hole
[2] [1] [3] [2].
Note
• Be careful not to remove the sensor from the sensor unit,
because each sensor is adjusted in a factory.
• When the cleaning is finished, check that the toner is not
applied to the sensor, through the PET sheet [5].
When the toner is applied to the sensor, mis-detection of
the intermediate transfer belt position occurs, and the
intermediate transfer belt possibly gets torn.

reverse.
[4] [5]
5.7.9 Replacing the nip formation roller/Up

• Nip formation roller/Up
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-82
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.7.7 Replacing
[5] [2] [3] [4] the intermediate transfer belt)
2. Let the intermediate transfer unit stand independently.
3. Remove the screw [1], and move the stopper [2], the spacer [3],
and the bearing [4] to the direction of the arrow [5].
4. Remove the nip formation roller assy/Up [6] to the direction of the
arrow [7].
[6] [1] [7]
Note
[1] [2] [3] • When you install the nip formation roller assy/Up [1], be
sure to install it so that the groove [2] is placed on the
back side.
• When you install the screw [3], be sure to install it so that
it aligns with the groove [2].
F-83
5. Remove the bearing [2], the spacer [3], and the stopper [4] from
the nip formation roller/Up [1].
[4] [3] [2] Note
• Be careful not to lose the spacer [3].
6. Remove the bearing [5] from the nip formation roller/Up [1].
reverse.
8. After you replace the nip formation roller/Up, conduct the following
items.
dust-proof glass)
9. After you replace the nip formation roller/Up, conduct the following
[1]
items in the order.
[5]
5.7.10 Replacing the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing
• 1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, and 1st transfer roller/K
• Transfer roller bearing
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.7.7 Replacing
the intermediate transfer belt)
3. Rotate the transfer drive coupling [1] and align it like the figure.
F-84
4. Remove the C-clip [1].
5. Remove the bearing [2] and lift the pressure shaft [3] to release the
tip of the transfer release arm [4].
6. Slide and remove the 1st transfer roller/K [5].
[6] 7. Remove the 1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M and 1st
transfer roller/C [6], 1 each.
Note
• When you hold the 1st transfer roller, hold the metal shaft
section. Do not touch the roller section.
• Install the 1st transfer roller so that the side with groove
on shaft comes to the front side, and confirm that the
[5] cables are securely fastened and the plastic films on the
cables are not twisted. If the cables are not fastened,
correct by pressing the cables against the metal frame
side. If the plastic films are twisted, move the films to the
[3]
center of the cables.
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2] 8. Remove the claws [1], 2 each, and remove 8 transfer roller
bearings [2].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the springs [3] when you remove the
transfer roller bearings [2].
• Be careful not to break the claw [1].

reverse.
[1] 10. After you replace the 1st transfer roller/Y, the 1st transfer roller/M,
the 1st transfer roller/C, the 1st transfer roller/K, and the transfer
roller bearing, conduct following items in the order.
[3] [2] • Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the
dust-proof glass)
• For the 1st transfer roller/Y: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 63
• For the 1st transfer roller/M: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 64
• For the 1st transfer roller/C: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 65
• For the 1st transfer roller/K: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 66
• For the transfer roller bearing: Counter reset of the special
parts counter number 70
[2]
5.7.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up

• 2nd transfer roller/Up
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-85
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.7.7 Replacing
the intermediate transfer belt)
2. Lift the 2nd transfer roller/Up [1] upward temporarily, and remove
the roller obliquely from the under side.
Note
• When you install the 2nd transfer roller/Up, be sure that
the side with a mark on the edge of the shaft comes to the
front side.
• Never touch the roller of the 2nd transfer roller/Up. When
you handle the 2nd transfer roller/Up, always grasp it by
[1] its metal shaft.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer roller/Up [1].

reverse.
5. After the 2nd transfer roller/Up is replaced, conduct the following
1 item.
dust-proof glass)
6. After you replace the 2nd transfer roller/Up, conduct the following
items in the order.
2 • Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed
[2] [1]
5.7.12 Replacing the thick paper transfer backup guide

• Thick paper transfer backup guide
*1: C1100
*2: C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the 2nd transfer roller /Up. (Refer to F.5.7.11 Replacing
the 2nd transfer roller /Up)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the high voltage power
feed collar/Fr [2].
4. Remove 3 screws [3], and then remove the thick paper transfer
backup guide [4].
Note
• The cushion section [5] of the thick paper transfer backup
guide contacts with the intermediate transfer belt.
[4] [3] [2] [5] [1] Therefore, be careful not to hit and deform or damage it.

reverse.
6. After you replace the thick paper transfer backup guide, conduct
following item.
5.7.13 Replacing the intermediate transfer separation claw solenoid (SD4)

• Intermediate transfer separation claw solenoid (SD4)
: Every 2,975,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 2,975,000 counts (special parts counter))
F-86
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.7.1 Removing
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 2 screws [1] each, and then remove the intermediate

[2] transfer separation claw solenoid (SD4) [2].
[1]
[2] [3] [1] 4. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
• When you install the intermediate transfer separation claw
solenoid (SD4) [1], install it so that the pin [2] turns up.
• When you install the intermediate transfer separation claw
solenoid (SD4) [1], be sure to hit the intermediate transfer
separation claw solenoid (SD4) [1] to 3 projections [3] of
the process unit.
• After you install the solenoid lever, check that the shaft of
intermediate transfer separation claw solenoid (SD4)
slides smoothly.
5. After you replace the intermediate transfer separation claw

solenoid (SD4), conduct the following item.
5.7.14 Cleaning the IDC sensor/Fr (IDCS/1), /Rr (IDCS/2), the color registration sensor/Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84), /Rr (PS85)
• IDC sensor/Fr (IDCS/Fr), IDC sensor/Rr (IDCS/Rr)
*On these 2 cases, clean IDCS/Fr and IDCS/Rr at the same time when you replace the belt cleaning blade.
*On these 2 cases, clean IDCS/Fr and IDCS/Rr at the same time when you replace the sensor shutter.
• Color registration sensor/Fr (PS20), color registration sensor/Md (PS21), color registration sensor/Rr (PS22)
*On these 2 cases, clean PS20, PS21, and PS22 at the same time when you replace the belt cleaning blade.
F-87
*On these 2 cases, clean PS20, PS21, and PS22 at the same time when you replace the sensor shutter.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the sensor shutter. (Refer to F.5.7.15 Replacing the
sensor shutter)
2. Clean the IDC sensor/Fr (IDCS/Fr) [1], the IDC sensor/Rr (IDCS/
Rr) [2], the color registration sensor/Fr (PS20) [3], the color
registration sensor/Md (PS21) [4], and the color registration
sensor/Rr (PS22) [5] with a blower brush.
Note
• When you cannot clean the dirt of the toner with the
blower brush completely, clean with the dry hydro-wipe.
• Be careful not to use the isopropyl alcohol when you
clean. The PET sheet that is attached on the surface of the
sensor possibly comes off.
[5] [2] [4] [1] [3]
reverse.
4. After you replace the IDC sensor/Fr, IDC sensor/Rr, color
registration sensor/Fr, color registration sensor/Md, color
registration sensor/Rr, conduct the following items.
• Cleaning the dust-proof glass.
5. After you replace the IDC sensor/Fr, IDC sensor/Rr, color
registration sensor/Fr, color registration sensor/Md, color
registration sensor/Rr, conduct the following items in the order.
• Printer gamma sensor adjustment (refer to I.4.3.31 Printer
Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma
Adjustment))
• Printer Gamma Offset Auto.(Refer to I.4.3.30 Printer Gamma
Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma
Adjustment))
5.7.15 Replacing the sensor shutter

• Sensor shutter
* Clean the sensor shutter at the same time when you replace the belt cleaning blade.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085

• Sensor shutter
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(3) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.7.1 Removing
2. Slide the sensor shutter [1] to the position where the notch of the
sensor shutter and the projection [2] of the process unit match.
Note
• When the IDC sensor and the color registration sensor are
dirty, clean them. (Refer to F.5.7.14 Cleaning the IDC
sensor/Fr (IDCS/1), /Rr (IDCS/2), the color registration
sensor/Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84), /Rr (PS85))

reverse.
Note
• Install the sensor shutter [1] to the position where the
[2] notch of the sensor shutter and the projection of the
process unit are the same. Then, move the sensor shutter
[1] until it touches the main body front side.
• Check that entire of the sensor shutter [1] is in the
projection [2] of the process unit.
F-88
4. After you replace the sensor shutter, conduct following items.

5.8 2nd transfer section

5.8.1 Cleaning the pre-fusing guide
• Pre-fusing guide plate
*Clean the pre-fusing guide plate at the same time when you replace the 2nd transfer cleaning blade.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out and
reinstalling the duplex section)
2. Clean the surface of the pre-fusing guide plate [1] by using the
hydro wipe.
[1]
5.8.2 Replacing the 2nd transfer unit, cleaning the lower section of the 2nd transfer section
• 2nd transfer unit
*1 C1100
*2 C1085

• Lower section of the 2nd transfer section
* Perform the cleaning every time you remove the 2nd transfer unit.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-89
(3) Procedure for removal and reinstallation

[1] [2] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out and
2. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the pre-fusing guide plate
[2].
Note
• When you install the pre-fusing guide plate, check that the
installation side [3] of the pre-fusing guide plate contacts
with the installation side [4] of the duplex section.
[3]
[4]
[2] [1] 3. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the 2nd transfer cover/Fr
[2].
Note
• When you install the 2nd transfer cover/Fr, insert the
projection [3] to the positioning hole [4] of the duplex
section, and insert the projection [5] to the positioning
hole [6] of the duplex section.
[4]
[3] [6] [5]
F-90
4. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the 2nd transfer cover/Rr
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall the 2nd transfer cover/Rr, be sure to
insert the projection [3] into the positioning hole [4] of the
duplex section.
[2] [1] [3] 5. Disconnect the connector [1].

6. Hold the cover handles [2] on the front and rear, and then remove
the 2nd transfer unit [3].
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the 2nd transfer belt
with bare hands.
7. Clean the lower section of the 2nd transfer section [1] by using the
cleaning pad and the isopropyl alcohol.
Note
• When you remove the 2nd transfer unit, be sure to clean
the lower section of the 2nd transfer section [1].
When you do not clean, the toner spills out on the paper
feed path, and image dirt possibly occurs on the following
points.
• Paper leading edge (Toner flow: Lower section of the
2nd transfer section → Paper feed path → Paper
leading edge
• 44 mm pitch (toner flow: Paper leading edge →
registration driven roller [2] → paper)
[1] [2] • 53 mm pitch (toner flow: Paper leading edge → ADU
driven roller [3] → paper)
[3]
F-91
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the 2nd transfer unit, be sure to check
that the bearings [1] on the front and rear are securely
placed in the frame of the duplex section [2].
• When you reinstall the 2nd transfer unit, be careful not to
hit the other parts with the gear.
• Before you secure the 2nd transfer unit, be sure to check
the mesh of the gears and confirm that there is no trouble
such as running on of the gear. If the mesh of the gears is
not proper, an image trouble such as pitch unevenness
occurs.
[1] 9. After you replace the 2nd transfer unit, conduct the following items
in the order.
• Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer) (Refer toI.4.4.8 Blade
[2] Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
(4) Installing of a new 2nd transfer unit

[2] [1] [2] 1. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and then remove the locking
material [2] 1 each.
F-92
2. Remove the screw [1] 1 each.
[1] [2] 3. Install the removed screw [1] 1 each to the pressure position [2].
[1] [2]
4. Place the 2nd transfer unit as in the figure. Then insert the toner
[1] prevention paper [2] between the 2nd transfer belt and the metal
frame [1].
Note
• Be sure to use the paper which is larger than the width of
the 2nd transfer belt.
5. Apply the setting toner to the hydro-wipe.

Apply the toner on the whole exposed area of the belt [3] so that
you can see the color of the applied toner.
[3] Note
• Do not use the setting powder. The 2nd transfer cleaning
blade peals off and is damaged.
setting toner.
• Be sure not to apply the setting toner on the area 3 mm to
5 mm away from the edges of the 2nd transfer belt. The
2nd transfer cleaning blade does not contact so that the
toner cannot be wiped off completely.
6. Rotate the gear [4], and rotate the belt until the toner that you
apply on the 2nd transfer disappears.
7. Apply the setting toner on the whole exposed area of the belt.
[2] Rotate the belt until the applied toner disappears.
8. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the
normal installation steps.
9. After you replace the 2nd transfer unit, conduct the following items
in the order.
Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
[4]
• Color registration auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.3.13 Color
Registration Auto. Adj. (Printer Adjustment)")
F-93
5.8.3 Replacing the separation discharging assy

• Separation discharging assy
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.8.2 Replacing the 2nd
[3] [2]
transfer unit, cleaning the lower section of the 2nd transfer section)
2. Remove the faston [1].
3. Remove the screws [2] and [3], and then remove the separation
discharging assy [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the separation discharging assy, be
sure to tighten the screw [2] first for positioning, then
tighten the screw [3].

reverse.
5. After the separation discharging assy is replaced, conduct the
following item.
[1] [4]
5.8.4 Replacing the 2nd transfer ground plates/1 and /2

• 2nd transfer ground plate/1
• 2nd transfer ground plate/2
*1 C1100
*2 C1085

[1] transfer unit, cleaning the lower section of the 2nd transfer section)
2. Remove the separation discharging assy. (Refer to F.5.8.3
Replacing the separation discharging assy)
3. Release the wiring harness [1] from 2 cable clamps [2].
[3] [2] [3]
F-94
[5] Note
• Be careful not to touch the collection shutter [2] and the
spring [3] that are mounted on the toner collection pipe [1]
because they easily come off.
• When the collection shutter and the spring come off, keep
them by fitting the stopper [5] of the collection shutter to
[4] the groove [4] on the toner collection pipe.
• Be sure to install the collection shutter and the spring
before you operate.
Otherwise, waste toner possibly spill out from the exit of
the toner collection pipe [6].
[1] [6] [2] [3]
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the cover handle/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3] [1] 6. Disconnect the connector [1].
7. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the earth plate mounting
bracket [3].
[2]
[4] [5] [3] [5] [2] 8. Remove the screws [1] 1 each. Then remove the 2nd transfer
earth plate/1 [3] and 2nd transfer earth plate/2 [4] from the earth
plate mounting bracket [2].
Note
• When you install the earth plate mounting bracket, make
sure that 2 each of contacts [5] of the 2nd transfer earth
plate/1 and the 2nd transfer earth plate/2 touch the shaft
of each roller.
• When there is any contact not touching, remove the earth
plate mounting bracket and adjust the angle of the folds
[6] of the 2nd transfer earth plate/1 and 2nd transfer earth
plate/2.
[6] [1] [6]
9. After you replace the 2nd transfer earth plate/1 and the 2nd
transfer earth plate/2, conduct the following item.
• For the 2nd transfer earth plate/1: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 79
• For the 2nd transfer earth plate/2: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 80
F-95
5.8.5 Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and the 2nd transfer
pressure unit
1. Remove the separate discharging plate assy. (Refer to F.5.8.3
[2] [1] Replacing the separation discharging assy)
2. Remove the earth plate mounting bracket. (Refer to F.5.8.4
Replacing the 2nd transfer ground plates/1 and /2)
4. Install the removed screw [1] 1 each to the release position [2].
Note
• When you perform the installation or the removal without
installing the screw to the release position, the 2nd
transfer cleaning blade is possibly damaged.
• Do not install screws other than the screw [1] to the
release position. When you install screws other than the
screw [1], the shape of the metal plate possibly changes.
[2] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [1].
6. Remove 2 clamps [2], and then release the wiring harness.
7. Remove 2 connectors [3], and then remove the cover handle/Fr
[4].
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
F-96
[10] [9] [6] [3] [4] [5] 9. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the swing shaft/1 assy [3].
10. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the swing shaft/3 assy [5].
11. Lift up the control arm [6].
12. Remove the screw [7], and then remove the swing shaft/2 assy [8].
13. Remove the screw [9], and then remove the swing shaft/4 assy
[10].
14. Remove the 2nd transfer belt unit [11].
[7] [8] [2] [11]
[1] [1]
[2] [3] [1] 15. The 2nd transfer unit consists of 3 parts, 2nd transfer belt unit [1],
2nd transfer cleaning unit [2], and the 2nd transfer pressure unit
[3].

1. Install the 2nd transfer cleaning unit [2] to the 2nd transfer belt unit
[1].
2. Install the swing shaft/3 assy [5] with the screw [3].
Note
• When you install the 2nd transfer cleaning unit [2] to the
2nd transfer belt unit [1], be sure to match 2 holes [7] of
[6] [4] [1] [3] [5]
the 2nd transfer belt unit and 2 projections [8] of the 2nd
transfer cleaning unit.
[2] [8]
[7]
F-97
[1] 4. Place the 2nd transfer belt unit and the 2nd transfer cleaning unit
[3] that are paired in the step 1 to the step 3 on the 2nd transfer
pressure unit [2].
Note
• Be sure to place it so that the metal frame of the 2nd
transfer pressure unit [3] is positioned between the metal
frame [4] of the 2nd transfer belt unit and the metal frame
[5] of the 2nd transfer cleaning unit.
[2]
[4] [3] [5] [5] [3] [4]
5. Install the swing shaft/1 assy [2] with 2 screws [1].

6. Lift up the control arm [3].
removal steps in reverse. (Step 1 to step 8 of the removal
procedure)
[4] [5] [3] [1] [2]
5.8.6 Replacing the 2nd transfer cleaning blade, the scattering prevention sheet plate/1, the scattering prevention
sheet/1, the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy and the cleaning side seal plate/Fr, /Rr
• 2nd transfer cleaning blade
: Every 200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100%, or the limit value of the 2nd transfer cleaning blade*1
whichever is earlier (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value"))*2
: Every 175,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100%, or the limit value of the 2nd transfer cleaning blade*1
whichever is earlier (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value"))*3
• Scattering prevention sheet plate/1
• Scattering prevention sheet/1
• 2nd transfer assist scraper assy
• Cleaning side seal plate/Fr
• Cleaning side seal plate/Rr
*1 200,000 counts (C1100), 175,000 counts (C1085)
*2 C1100
*3 C1085
F-98
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the 2nd transfer cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.8.5 Removing
and reinstalling the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning
unit, and the 2nd transfer pressure unit)
2. Loosen 3 screws [1], and then remove the 2nd transfer cleaning
blade [2].
Note
• Be careful not to hit and deform or damage the blade [3] of
the 2nd transfer cleaning blade [2].
• When you install the 2nd transfer cleaning blade [2], be
sure to match the hole [4] 1 each of the 2nd transfer
cleaning blade [2] and the projection [5] 1 each of the 2nd
transfer cleaning unit.
[4][5] [1] [2] [4][5]
[2] [1] Note
• When you install a new 2nd transfer cleaning blade [1], be
sure to apply the setting toner on the edge area [2] of the
cleaning blade by using the cotton swab.
setting toner.
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the scattering prevention

sheet plate/1 [2].
[2] [1]
Note
• When you install the new scattering prevention sheet
plate/1 [1], attach 2 scattering prevention sheets/1 [3] on
the both edge [2] of the scattering prevention sheet plate/1
[1].
• Be sure to attach the scattering prevention sheet/1 [3]
within the position ± 0.5 mm from the edge [4] of the
scattering prevention sheet plate/1.
[4] • Install the scattering prevention sheet/1 [3] so that it
contacts with the cleaning side seal plate/Fr [5] and the
cleaning side seal plate/Rr [6].
[6] [3]
[1] [2]
[4]
[3] [5]
F-99
4. Remove the E-ring [1] 1 each, and then remove the flange [2] 1
each.
5. Slide the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy [3], cleaning side seal
plate/Fr [4], and the cleaning side seal plate/Rr [5] to the direction
of the arrow. Then remove them.
[2] [1] [3] [4]
[5] [1] [2]
6. Remove the cleaning side seal plate/Fr [2] and the cleaning side
seal plate/Rr [3] from the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy [1] to the
Note
• When you install the cleaning side seal plate/Fr [2] and the
cleaning side seal plate/Rr [3], be sure to match the
projection [4] of the mounting plate and the notch [5] of
the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy.

reverse.
[4][5] [1] [2] 8. After you replace the 2nd transfer cleaning blade, the scattering
prevention sheet plate/1, the scattering prevention sheet/1, the 2nd
transfer assist scraper assy, the cleaning side seal plate/Fr, and
the cleaning side seal plate/Rr, conduct the following item.
• Apply the setting toner on the 2nd transfer belt. (Refer to F.
5.8.2 Replacing the 2nd transfer unit, cleaning the lower
section of the 2nd transfer section)
• For the 2nd transfer cleaning blade: Counter reset of the
special parts counter number 73 and number 74.
• For the scattering prevention sheet plate/1: Counter reset of
the special parts counter number 31.
• For the scattering prevention sheet/1: Counter reset of the
special parts counter number 140.
[3] [4][5] • For the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy: Counter reset of the
• For the cleaning side seal plate/Fr: Counter reset of the special
parts counter number 32.
• For the cleaning side seal plate/Rr: Counter reset of the
Peculiarity Adj.))
F-100
5.8.7 Replacing the 2nd transfer entrance guide/Up

• 2nd transfer entrance guide/Up
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the 2nd transfer pressure unit. (Refer to F.5.8.5
Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd
transfer cleaning unit, and the 2nd transfer pressure unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the 2nd transfer entrance
guide plate/Up [2].
Note
[3] [1]
• When you reinstall the 2nd transfer entrance guide plate/
Up, be sure to place it in the inside step section [3].

4. After the 2nd transfer entrance guide plate/Up is replaced, conduct
the following item.
[1] [2] [3]
5.8.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer belt assy, 2nd transfer process blade assy, and the 2nd transfer cleaning brush
• 2nd transfer belt assy
• 2nd transfer process blade assy
• 2nd transfer cleaning brush
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-101
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the 2nd transfer belt unit. (Refer to F.5.8.5 Removing and
[2] reinstalling the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit,
and the 2nd transfer pressure unit)
2. Lower the control arm [1].
3. Remove 6 screws [2], and then remove the 2nd transfer belt assy
[3].
[3]
[1] [2]
[3] Note
• When you remove or install the 2nd transfer belt assy [1],
move the actuator [2] to the direction of the arrow and
release it from the 2nd transfer belt [3].
• Be careful not to touch or damage the 2nd transfer belt [3]
with bare hands.
[1] [2]
F-102
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the 2nd transfer
processing blade assy [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the 2nd transfer processing blade
assy, be sure to fix it by pressing the regulation plate/Fr
[3] and regulation plate/Rr [4] against the mounting plate/
Fr [5] and mounting plate/Rr [6] of the 2nd transfer unit.
[1] [5] [3]
[2] [4] [6] [1]
5. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[3].
6. Remove the E-rings [4] 1 each, and then remove the bearings [5] 1
[5] each.
7. Remove the 2nd transfer cleaning brush [6] to the direction of the
arrow.
reverse.
9. After you replace the 2nd transfer belt assy, 2nd transfer process
blade assy, and the 2nd transfer cleaning brush, conduct the
following item.
[1] [2] [3] [4] • Apply the setting toner on the 2nd transfer belt. (Refer to F.
• For the 2nd transfer belt assy: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 78.
• For the 2nd transfer cleaning brush: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 138.
• For the 2nd transfer processing blade assy: Counter reset of
the parts counter number 136.
Peculiarity Adj.))
[6] [4] [5] • Gamma auto adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma Automatic
5.8.9 Replacing the 2nd transfer belt and the connecting stay assy
• 2nd transfer belt
F-103
• Connecting stay assy
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
[6] [1] 1. Remove the 2nd transfer belt assy. (Refer to F.5.8.8 Replacing the
2nd transfer belt assy, 2nd transfer process blade assy, and the
2nd transfer cleaning brush)
2. Remove the 2nd transfer process blade assy. (Refer to F.5.8.8
Replacing the 2nd transfer belt assy, 2nd transfer process blade
assy, and the 2nd transfer cleaning brush)
3. Remove the 2nd transfer cleaning brush. (Refer to F.5.8.8
Replacing the 2nd transfer belt assy, 2nd transfer process blade
[1] [2] [3] [4] [3] [2] [5] assy, and the 2nd transfer cleaning brush)
4. Remove the E-ring [1] 1 each. Then remove the tension block/1 [2]
1 each and the spring [3] 1 each.
Note
• When you remove the tension block/1, be careful not to
lose the spring.
5. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the mounting plate/Rr [5].
6. Remove the 2nd transfer belt [6].
Note
• When you install the new 2nd transfer belt, be careful not
to touch except the edge.
• When you install the 2nd transfer belt, be sure to clean
each roller inside it by using the isopropyl alcohol.
Note
• When you get the 2nd transfer belt upright on the
installation, the tension roller [1] falls. In order to prevent
the tension roller [1] from falling, put the side of the
tension roller on the mounting plate/Rr [2].
• Be sure to insert the new 2nd transfer belt so that it
comes to the same level as the side [3] of the 2nd transfer
roller/Lw.
[1] [2] [3]
F-104
7. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacer [2] and the
bearing [3].
8. Remove the E-ring [4], and then remove the bearing [5].
9. Remove 2 screws [6], and then remove the metal plate [7] and the
connecting stay assy [8].
[6] [8]
[4] [5] [6] [3] [2]
[1]
[7]
[1] removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When you install the connecting stay assy, conduct the
following procedures.
• Tighten the screw [1]. Then tighten the screw [2]
temporarily.
• Insert the shaft [3] of each roller to the hole of the metal
plate [4].
• Tighten the screw [2].
11. After you replace the 2nd transfer belt and the connecting stay
assy, conduct the following items in the order.
• Apply the setting toner on the 2nd transfer belt. (Refer to F.
• For the 2nd transfer belt: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 72
• For the connecting stay assy: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 192
Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
[2] • Color registration auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.3.13 Color
[3] [4]
F-105
5.9 Toner collection section

5.9.1 Replacing the waste toner box
• Waste toner box: Every 170,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: the sensor detects its full automatically)
(2) Procedure
1. Open the waste toner box door [1] and pull the waste toner box [2].
[1] [2]
2. Remove the label [2] from the waste toner box [1] and then cover
[2] [3]
the entrance of the waste toner box [3].
reverse.
4. After you replace the waste toner box, conduct the following steps.
[1]
5.10 Intermediate conveyance section

5.10.1 Replacing the cleaning sheet assy
• cleaning sheet assy
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the cleaning sheet assy
[2].
reverse.
4. After you replace the cleaning sheet assy, conduct the following
items.
[2] [1]
F-106
5.10.2 Cleaning the paper dust collecting plate

• Paper dust collecting plate
*Clean the paper dust collecting plate at same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the paper dust collecting
plate [2].
Note
• When paper dust is accumulated on the paper dust
collecting plate [2], clean it.
[2] [1]
[1] 3. Clean the paper dust collecting plate [1] by using the isopropyl
alcohol and the cleaning pad.
reverse.
5.11 Registration section

5.11.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy
• Registration Cleaning Sheet Assy
F-107
(2) Procedure
[2] reinstalling the duplex section)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the cover [2].
[1]
[2] 3. Remove the clamp, and then release the wiring harness.
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the registration cleaning
sheet assy [2].
6. After the registration cleaning sheet assy is replaced, conduct the
following steps.
[1]
5.11.2 Replacing the registration roller and the torque limiter

• Registration Roller
• Torque limiter

2. Remove the 2nd transfer cover/Fr. (Refer to F.5.8.2 Replacing the
2nd transfer unit, cleaning the lower section of the 2nd transfer
section)
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the duplex section cover/
Rt.
[1] [2]
F-108
[3] [2] 4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

5. Remove the C-clip [2] 1 each, and then remove the bearing [3] 1
each.
6. Remove 4 screws [4], and then remove the registration unit [5].
Note
• When you install the registration unit, be sure not to
damage the paper feed side of the guide plate.
[4] [5] [4]
[2] [1] [3]
Note
• When you install a new registration unit [1], configure
DIPSW10-2 to "1". (Refer to DIPSW10-2)
• The label [2] is placed on a new registration unit [1].
Change the configuration of DIPSW44-4, DIPSW44-5, and
DIPSW44-6 according to the number that is marked on the
label [2]. (Refer to DIPSW44-4, DIPSW44-5, and
DIPSW44-6)
• When the configuration of DIPSW is not changed, the
paper possibly gets creased.
[2] [1]
F-109
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the registration gear [2].
8. Remove the E-rings [3], 1 each, and then remove the bearings/K
[4], 1 each.
9. Release the hook [5] of the spring, and then remove the
registration roller assy [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the registration roller assy [6], be sure
to install the hook [5] of the spring to its original position.
[5] [4] [6] [3]
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
[7] [2] [4] [5] [3] 10. Remove the E-ring [2], the spring [3], 2 spacers [4], the registration
regulation plate [5], the torque limiter [6], and the pin [7] from the
registration roller [1].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pin [7].
11. After you replace the registration roller and the torque limiter,
conduct the following items.
• For the registration roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 123
• For the torque limiter: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 124
[1] [6]

1. Install the pin [2] and the torque limiter [3] to the registration roller
[1].
[2] [3] [1]
F-110
[2] [3] [1] 2. Install the registration regulation plate [2], 2 spacers [3], and the
spring [4] to the registration roller [1].
Note
• When you install the spring [4], be sure to install it so that
the hook [5] of the spring [4] is hooked to the hole [6] of
the registration regulation plate [2].
[4] [5][6]
[2] [1] 3. Install the E-ring [2] to the registration roller [1].
5.12 Fusing section

5.12.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• The fusing section [1] is hot immediately after you deactivate the main power switch (SW2) or the sub power switch (SW1) of the
main body. You possibly get burned. To prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down
sufficiently.
[1]
Note
• After you remove the fusing inlet roller assy [1], the fusing belt [2], the heating roller [3], the upper pressure roller [4], and the
lower pressure roller [5], put them on the clean paper. Otherwise, parts possibly get dirty.
[1] [3] [4] [5] [2]
5.12.2 Cleaning the fusing entrance guide/Lw

• Fusing entrance guide/Lw
*Clean the fusing entrance guide/Lw at the same time when you replace the 2nd transfer cleaning blade.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-111
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out and
2. Clean the fusing entrance guide/Lw [1] by using the isopropyl
alcohol.
5.12.3 Removing and reinstalling the fusing unit

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the fusing unit is heavy.
2. Open the reversal section [1].
[1]
3. Loosen the screw [1], and then pull the fusing fixing plate [2] to the
front.
[2] [1]
4. Hold the handle [1] and slide the fusing unit [3] to the front until the
triangle mark [2] matches.
Note
• When you pull out the fusing unit [3] too much, the fusing
unit [3] possibly falls.
5. Hold the handles [1] with 2 persons. Then lift up and remove the
fusing unit [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
F-112
reverse.
Note
• When you install the fusing unit [1], slide the fusing unit
[1] until it hits the rear.
Check that the triangle mark [2] of the fusing unit matches
the triangle mark [3] of the duplex section.
[1] [2] [3]

Note
[2] [1] • When you install a new fusing unit, be sure to remove 2
each of the screws [1] to remove the 2 locking materials
[2].
[2] [1]
5.12.4 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Lw and the fusing paper exit roller assy/Up
• Fusing paper exit roller/Lw
• Fusing paper exit roller assy/Up
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer toF.5.12.3 Removing and
reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Open the fusing paper exit guide assy [1] to the direction of the
arrow.
[1]
F-113
3. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the E-
ring [3].
4. Remove the E-ring [4] 1 each and the bearing [5] 1 each. Then
remove the fusing paper exit roller/Lw [6].
Note
• When you install the gear [2], install it so that the bearing
[7] comes outside.
• When you install the fusing paper exit roller/Lw [6], install
it so that the side with the longer shaft comes front.
[4] [5] [6]
[4] [3] [1]
[5]
[7] [2]
F-114
5. Remove the E-rings [1] 1 each, and then remove the springs [2] 1
each.
6. Remove the E-rings [3] 1 each.
7. Remove the fusing paper exit roller assy/Up [4].
[2] [4] [1] [3]
[1] [2] [3]

reverse.
Note
• When you install the fusing paper exit roller assy/Up [1],
install it so that the shaft with the cut [2] comes rear side.
9. After you replace the fusing paper exit roller/Lw and the fusing
paper exit roller assy/Up, conduct the following item.
• For the fusing paper exit roller/Lw: Counter reset of the special
• For the fusing paper exit roller assy/Up: Counter reset of the
[2] [1]
5.12.5 Replacing the fusing claw assy

• Fusing claw assy
F-115
(2) Procedure
2. Open the fusing paper exit guide assy. (Refer to F.5.12.4
Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Lw and the fusing paper exit
roller assy/Up)
3. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and then remove the fusing claw
assy [2] 1 each.
Note
• When you install the fusing claw assy [2], be sure to
match the projection [3] of the fusing paper exit guide
assy and the hole [4] of the fusing claw assy.
[3][4] [2] [1]
reverse.
5. After you replace the fusing claw assy, conduct the following items.
5.12.6 Replacing the fusing steering actuator assy

• Fusing steering actuator assy
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing cover/Fr [2].
[2] [1]
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the fusing cover/Up [2] to
the direction of the arrow.
Note
• When you remove the fusing cover/Up [2], do not slide it
to the direction other than the direction of the arrow.
When you do so, the fusing steering sensor [3] is possibly
damaged.
F-116
[1] Note
• When you put the fusing cover/Up [1], put it upside down.
When you put it like the picture, the duct inside the fusing
cover/Up is possibly damaged.
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing steering

[5][6] actuator assy [2].
Note
• When you install the fusing steering actuator assy [2],
install it so that the leading edge of the actuator [3] comes
outside of the fusing belt [4].
• When you install the fusing steering actuator assy [2], be
sure to match the projection [5] of the metal plate and the
hole [6] of the fusing steering actuator assy.

reverse.
[1] [2] 6. After you replace the fusing steering actuator assy, conduct the
following item.
[3] [4]
5.12.7 Replacing the fusing bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and the lower pressure roller
• Fusing Bearing/Lw
• Heat insulating sleeve/Lw
• Lower pressure roller:
(2) Procedure
2. Open the fusing paper exit guide assy. (Refer to F.5.12.4
Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Lw and the fusing paper exit
roller assy/Up)
3. Remove the fusing cover/Fr and the fusing cover/Up. (Refer to F.
5.12.6 Replacing the fusing steering actuator assy)
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing entrance guide/
Up [2].
[1] [2]
F-117
5. Remove 2 screws [1]. Then remove the fusing cover/Lw1 [2] and
[1] the fusing cover/Lw2 [3].
[2] [3]
6. Pull out the fusing support stay [1].
[1]
8. Remove the open close pins [3] 1 each while you lift up the handle
[2].
9. Open the fusing unit [4] to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• When you open the fusing unit [4], check that the fusing
support stay [5] is pulled out.
When the fusing support stay [5] is not pulled out, the
fusing unit becomes unbalanced.
[3] [4] [1] [5]
[2] [3] [1]
F-118
10. Remove the screw [1] 2 each, and then remove the fixing plate [2]
1 each.
11. Remove the lower pressure roller assy [3].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [3]
[1] [2] 12. Remove the C-ring [1], and then remove the fusing gear/1 [2].
[1] Note
• When you install the fusing gear/1, apply the Multemp FF-
RM to the shaft of the lower pressure roller [1].
F-119
13. Remove the C-ring [1] 1 each, and then remove the fusing bearing/
Lw [1] each.
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
[1] Note
• When you install the fusing bearing/Lw, be sure to apply
the Multemp FF-RM on the outside the heat insulating
sleeve [1].
(Refer to the figure for the applying amount of the
Multemp FF-RM.)
[1]
F-120
14. Remove the heast insulating Sleeve/Lw [2] 1 each from the lower
pressure roller [1].
Note
• When you install the heat insulating sleeve/Lw [2] be sure
to install it so that the collar [3] comes inside.
• When you install the heat insulating sleeve/Lw [2], apply
the Multemp FF-RM to the shaft of the lower pressure
roller [4].

reverse.
[1] [3] [4] [2] Note
• In order to protect the surface of the roller, the paper is
wrapped on the new lower pressure roller. Remove the
paper after you install all parts.
16. After you replace the fusing bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/
Lw, and the lower pressure roller, conduct the following items.
• For the fusing bearing/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 111
• For the heat insulating sleeve/Lw: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 91
• For the lower pressure roller: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 87
[3] [4] [2]
5.12.8 Replacing the fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing
heater lamp assy/5
• fusing inlet roller assy
• Fusing heater lamp assy/1
• Fusing heater lamp/4
• Fusing heater lamp assy/5
(2) Procedure
[2] reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing steering actuator assy. (Refer to F.5.12.6
Replacing the fusing steering actuator assy)
3. Open the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.12.7 Replacing the fusing
bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and the lower pressure
roller)
4. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the reinforcing stay [2].
[1]
F-121
5. Remove the 2 screws [1], and then remove the reinforcing shaft
[3] [2].
Note
• When you install the reinforcing shaft [2], install it so that
the side with the D cut [3] on the shaft comes front.
[2]
[1]

[3] [7][8] 7. Remove 2 springs [2].
8. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the fixing stay [4].
Note
• When you remove the spring [1] and the spring [2], be
sure to follow the order of the procedure.
When you remove one side of spring [1] and spring [2] at
first, the metal plate is possibly deformed.
• Before you install the spring [1] and the spring [2], be sure
to match the edge of the fusing belt [5] and the groove [6].
• When you install the fixing stay [4], be sure to match the
notch [7] of the fixing stay and the projection [8] of the
support arm.
[6]
[5] [1]
[4] [2]
[3]
[7]
[8]
F-122
[3] [4] [2] [1] 9. Remove the connector [1] and 2 connectors [2]. Then release the
wiring harness.
Note
• 2 connectors [2] have the same form. You can connect
connectors [2] to both connectors, and the machine works
properly in both case.
10. Remove the screw [3], and then open the retaining plate [4] to the
[1] [2] [3] [5] [4] 11. Disconnect the connector [1], the connector [2], and the connector
[3]. Then,release the wiring harness.
Note
• The shapes of the connector [2] and the connector [3] are
the same. When you install the connector [2] and the
connector [3], distinguish them by the length of the
wirings.
The wiring of the connector [2] is shorter.
The wiring of the connector [3] is longer.
12. Remove the screw [3], and then open the retaining plate [4] to the
13. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.

14. Move the fusing inlet roller assy [3] to the direction of the arrow [4]
inside the fusing belt [2]. Then release it from the mounting plate
[5].
15. Lift up the fusing inlet roller assy [3], and then remove it to the
direction of the arrow [6].
[3] [5] [1] [2]
[6] [4]
Note
• When you remove the fusing inlet roller assy [1], be
careful not to damage the fusing inlet roller assy [1], the
inside of the fusing belt [2], and the upper pressure roller
[3].
[3] [1] [2]
F-123
[1] [2] 16. Hold the positioning stay/1 [1]. Then rotate the fusing belt unit [2]
and remove it.
Note
• When you install the fusing belt unit [2], check that the
fusing steering actuator assy is removed.
When you install the fusing belt unit [2] while the fusing
steering actuator assy is installed, the fusing belt is
possibly damaged.
[2] 17. Remove the screw [1] 2 each, and then release the clamp [2] 2
each from the wiring harness.
Note
[1] • When you install the clamp [2], hit the clamp [2] to the
projection [3] of the heater support plate.
[3] • When you install the clamp [2], be sure that the clamp [2]
does not over the projection [3] of the heater support
plate.
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-124
[2] [1] 18. Remove the spring [1], and then remove the plate spring assy [2].
Note
• When you install the plate spring assy [2], check that the
leading section of the plate assy [3] contacts with the
earth plate [4].
• Do not apply strong force on the leading edge of the plate
spring assy [3].
Otherwise, the leading edge is possibly damaged.
[4]
[3]
F-125
[3] [1] 19. Remove the screw [1] 2 each, and then remove the heater support
plate/Fr [2] and the heater support plate/Rr [3].
Note
• When you install the heater support plate/Fr [2] and the
[4] heater support plate/Rr [3], be sure to match the
projections [6] of the fusing heater lamp assy/1 [4] and the
[6] fusing heater lamp assy/5 [5] and the notches [7] of the
[7] support plate.
• The fusing heater lamp assy/1 [4] and the fusing heater
lamp assy/5 [5] are the same. Therefore, both notches [7]
[5] work properly.
[1] [2]
[6]
[7]
[5] [4]
[2] [1] 20. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the heat shield plate [2].
F-126
21. Slide each fusing heater lamp [3] to the direction of the arrow until
the edge [1] of the fusing heater lamp goes inside the heating roller
[2].
Note
• When you slide each fusing heater lamp [3], be sure not to
catch the earth plate [4] with the edge [1].
[1] [4] [2] [3]
[1] [2] 22. Hang such as the precision screwdriver to the claw [2] of the earth
plate [1], and then remove the earth plate [1].
Note
• When you install the earth plate [1], be careful to keep the
surface [2] clean.
When it is dirty, clean it with the isopropyl alcohol.
• When you install the earth plate [1], hit the earth plate [1]
to the heating roller [3] by the following procedures.
• Install the earth plate [1] to the heating roller [3].
• Push the entire surface [2] of the earth plate [1].
• Push each of 6 claws [4] of the earth plate [1] so that it
hits to the heating roller [3].
• Look from the side and check that the earth plate [1]
hits to the heating roller [3].
[3] [1] [2] [4]
[4]
F-127
23. Pull out the fusing heater lamp assy/1 [2], fusing heater lamp/4 [3],
and the fusing heater lamp assy/5 [4] from the heating roller [1].
Then remove them.
Note
• The fusing heater lamp assy/1 [2] and the fusing heater
lamp assy/5 [4] are same parts.
• When you install the fusing heater lamp assy/1 [2], the
fusing heater lamp/4 [3], and the fusing heater lamp assy/5
[4], install them so that the blue connector [5] comes to
the rear side.
[5] [1] [4] [3] [2] 24. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
25. After you replace the fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing heater lamp
assy/1, the fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing heater lamp assy/
5, conduct the following item.
• For the fusing inlet roller assy: Counter reset of the special
• For the fusing heater lamp assy/1: Counter reset of the special
• For the fusing heater lamp/4: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 99.
• For the fusing heater lamp assy/5: Counter reset of the special
5.12.9 Replacing fusing bearing/1, /2, heat insulating sleeve/1, /2, fusing belt, upper pressure roller, heating roller
• Fusing bearing/1
• Fusing bearing/2
• Heat insulating sleeve/1
• Heat insulating sleeve/2
• Fusing Belt
• Upper pressure roller
• Heating roller
F-128
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer toF.5.12.3 Removing and
3. Remove the fusing belt unit. (Refer to "F.5.12.8 Replacing the
fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the fusing
heater lamp/4, and the fusing heater lamp assy/5")
4. Remove the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the fusing heater lamp/4,
and the fusing heater lamp assy/5. (Refer to F.5.12.8 Replacing
the fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the
fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing heater lamp assy/5)
5. Remove the C-ring [1] 1 each, and remove the fusing bearing/2 [2]
1 each.
Note
• When you install the fusing bearing/2 [2], install it so that
the flange [3] comes inside.
[1] [3] [2]
Note
• When you install the fusing bearing/2, be sure to apply the
Multemp FF-RM on the outside the heart insulating sleeve/
2 [1].
Multemp FF-RM.)
[1]
[1]
F-129
[1] [3] [2] 6. Remove the heat insulating sleeve/2 [1] 1 each.
Note
• When you install the heat insulating sleeve/2 [1], apply the
Multemp FF-RM to the shaft of the upper pressure roller
[2].
• When you install the heat insulating sleeve/2 [1], install it
so that the flange [3] comes inside.
[2] [3] [1]
7. Remove the fusing gear/5 [1].

Note
• When you install the fusing gear/5 [1], apply the Multemp
FF-RM to the shaft of the upper pressure roller [2].
8. Remove C-ring [3] 1 each.
[2] [3] [1]
[3]
F-130
[3] [5] [1] 9. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the positioning stay/2 [2].
10. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the positioning stay/1 [4].
11. Remove the retaining plate/Fr [5] and the retaining plate/Rr [6] to
[2]
[1] [6] [4] [3]
[2] [1] 12. Remove the fusing bearing/1 [1] 1 each.

Note
• When you install the fusing bearing/1 [1], install it so that
the flange [2] faces inside.
[1] [2]
F-131
[1] Note
• When you install the fusing bearing/1, be sure to apply the
Multemp FF-RM on the outside the heart insulating sleeve/
1 [1].
Multemp FF-RM.)
[1]
[2] [3] [1] 13. Remove the heat insulating sleeve/1 [1] 1 each.
Note
• When you install the heat insulating sleeve/1 [1], apply the
Multemp FF-RM to the shaft of the heating roller [2].
• When you install the heat insulating sleeve/1 [1], install it
so that the flange [3] of the heat insulating sleeve/1 comes
inside.
[1] [3] [2]
F-132
14. Remove the heating roller [2] and the upper pressure roller [3] from
[5] the fusing belt [1].
Note
• When you install the upper pressure roller [3], install it so
that the side with the installation groove [4] for the fusing
gear/5 comes front.
• When you install the fusing belt [1], install it so that the
side with the lot number [5] comes front.

reverse.
Note
• In order to protect the surface of the belt, the paper is
wrapped on the new fusing belt. Remove the paper after
you install all parts.
16. After you replace the fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing bearing/2,
and the heat insulating sleeve/2, conduct the following item.
• For the fusing bearing/1: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 94
• For the fusing bearing/2: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 110
• For the heat insulating sleeve/1: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 93
• For the heat insulating sleeve/2: Counter reset of the parts
[2] [4] [3] [1] counter number 90
• For the fusing belt: Counter reset of the parts counter number
84
• For the upper pressure roller: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 86
• For the heating roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 88
5.12.10 Cleaning the inlet roller assy, the fusing roller, the upper pressure roller, the fusing belt and the lower
pressure roller
• fusing inlet roller assy
: When it is dirty
• Heating roller
: Every 1,050,000 counts (total counter)*, or when it is dirty
* Clean the heating roller at the same time when you replace the fusing belt.
• Upper pressure roller
: When it is dirty
• Fusing Belt
: When it is dirty
• Lower pressure roller
: When it is dirty
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the fusing inlet roller assy.(Refer to F.5.12.8 Replacing
the fusing inlet roller assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the
fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing heater lamp assy/5)
2. Remove the fusing belt, the upper pressure roller, the heating
roller.(Refer to F.5.12.9 Replacing fusing bearing/1, /2, heat
insulating sleeve/1, /2, fusing belt, upper pressure roller, heating
roller)
3. Remove the lower pressure roller. (Refer to F.5.12.7 Replacing the
fusing bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and the lower
pressure roller)
F-133
[1] 4. Clean the fusing inlet roller assy [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol
and the cleaning pad.
[1] [2] 5. Clean the upper pressure roller [1] by using the cleaning pad.
Note
• Clean only to the 1 direction of the arrow [2]. Otherwise,
dirt possibly remains in the central section.
• Do not to use the isopropyl alcohol. When you use the
isopropyl alcohol, the surface coating of the upper
pressure roller [1] possibly melts.
[1] 6. Clean the heating roller [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the
cleaning pad.
[1] 7. Clean the surface of the fusing belt [1] by using the isopropyl
[1] 8. Clean the lower pressure roller [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol
and the cleaning pad.
reverse.
5.12.11 Replacing the upper pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM8), the fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6)
• Upper pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM8)
• Fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6)
F-134
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer toF.5.12.3 Removing and
4. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
6. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the upper pressure roller
temperature sensor (TEM8) [3].
[1]
[3] [2]
7. Close the fusing unit [1].
[1]
[1]
F-135
9. Remove the screw [2] while you push the lower section [1] of the
sensor stay to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• Check that the fusing belt unit is removed.
When the fusing belt is not removed, you cannot push the
lower section of the sensor stay [1].
10. Remove the fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6) [3].

reverse.
12. After you replace the upper pressure roller temperature sensor
(TEM8) and the fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6), conduct
[3] [2] [1] the following item.
• For the temperature sensor (TEM8) of the upper pressure
roller: Counter reset of the parts counter number 97
• For the temperature sensor (TEM6) of the fusing belt
temperature sensor/Fr: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 95
5.12.12 Replacing the fusing gear/2

• Fusing gear/2
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] [2] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer toF.5.12.3 Removing and
2. Remove the fusing cover/Fr and the fusing cover/Up. (Refer to F.
5.12.6 Replacing the fusing steering actuator assy)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [3] while you hold the edge [2] of the
fusing motor/Lw (M48) [1].
Note
• When you remove 2 connectors [3], be sure to hold the
edge [2]. When you remove the connector [3] without
holding the edge [2], the board possibly bend and the
fusing motor/Lw (M48) [1] is possibly damaged.
[1] [2] [3] 4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the fusing motor/Lw (M48)
[2].
Note
• Do not touch the radiator plate [3] of the fusing motor/Lw
(M48) [2].
The radiator plate [3] is possibly hot.
5. Remove 5 screws [1], and then release the fixing of the motor
[2] [1] mounting plate [2].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the wiring harness.
The motor mounting plate [2] is connected to the fusing
unit with the wiring harness.
[1]
F-136
[1] [2] [3] [4] 6. Remove the spacer [1], and then remove the fusing gear/2 [2].
Note
• When you install the fusing gear/2 [2], be sure to apply the
Multemp FF-RM on the surface [3] of the gear.
• Be careful not to lose the spacer [1] and the spacer [4].

reverse.
8. After you replace the fusing gear/2, conduct the following items.
5.12.13 Lubricating the fusing gear/3, /4, /6, /7, /8, /9

(1) Periodically lubricated parts and cycle
• Fusing gear/3
: Every 3,150,000 counts (total counter)
*Lubricate to the fusing gear/3 at the same time when you replace the fusing gear/2.
• Fusing gear/4
• Fusing gear/6
• Fusing gear/7
• Fusing gear/8
• Fusing gear/9
F-137
(2) Procedure
[4] [5] reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Open the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.12.7 Replacing the fusing
bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and the lower pressure
[3] roller)
3. Apply the Multemp FF-RM to the fusing gear/3 [1], the fusing gear/
4 [2], and the fusing gear/9 [3].
4. Apply the Molykote EM-30L to the fusing gear/6 [4], the fusing
gear/7 [5], and the fusing gear/8 [6].
reverse.
[1] [2]
[6]
5.12.14 Replacing the fusing paper separation fan/Fr (FM49), /Md (FM50), /Rr (FM51)
(1) Spotted replaced parts, cycle
• Fusing paper separation fan/Fr (FM49)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 80,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Fusing paper separation fan/Md (FM50)
• Fusing paper separation fan/Rr (FM51)
F-138
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper exit section. (Refer to F.5.14.1 Replacing the
paper exit driven roller)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
4. Remove screws [2] 4 each, and then remove the cover spacer [3]
1 each.
[1]
[2]
[3]
5. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the fusing exhaust fan unit
[1] [1] [2].
[2]
F-139
[9] [7] [6] [4] [3] [1] 7. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the fusing paper
separation fan/Fr (FM49) [3].
9. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the fusing paper
separation fan/Md (FM50) [6].
11. Remove 2 screws [8], and then remove the fusing paper
separation fan/Rr (FM51) [9].
reverse.
13. After you replace the fusing paper separation fan/Fr (FM49), the
fusing paper separation fan/Md (FM50) and the fusing paper
separation fan/Rr (FM51), conduct the following item.
[8] [5] [2]
5.12.15 Replacing the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43), /Md (FM44), /Rr (FM45)
• Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43)
• Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md (FM44)
• Lower pressure roller cooling fan/Rr (FM45)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.12.3 Removing and
3. Remove the duplex section cover/Lt. (Refer to G.3.2.23 Duplex
section)
5. Remove the faston [1], and then release the wiring harness.
Note
• When you install the faston [1], insert it until it makes a
noise.
[1]
6. Disconnect 2 connectors [2] and the connector [3]. Then release
the wiring harness.
Note
• When you disconnect the connector [3], leave the relay
connectors [4] at the wiring harness [5] side.
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
F-140
Note
• When you connect 3 connectors [1], push the wiring
harness to the direction of the arrow. Be careful that the
wiring harness does not come out from the metal frame
[2].
[2] [1]
8. While you hold the fusing swing motor assy [2], remove 5 screws
[3].
Note
• The wiring harness connects the fusing swing motor assy
[2]. Be careful not to drop the fusing swing motor assy [2].
[3] [3]
[2] [1]
[2] [1] 10. Remove the fusing swing motor assy [2].
F-141
Note
• When you reinstall the fusing swing motor Assy [1], point
the cam [2] to the direction in the picture.
• When you reinstall the fusing swing motor Assy [1], match
the holes [3] and the projections [4] of the fusing swing
motor Assy.
[1] [2] [4] [3]
11. Remove the screw [1], and then release the wiring harness of the
connector assy [2].
[1] [2]
12. Pull out the connector assy [1] from the hole [2] to the direction of
[2] [3] the arrow.
Note
• When you insert the connector assy [1] through the hole
[2], be careful not to damage the wiring harness by the
metal frame [3].
• When you install the connector assy [1], confirm that the
connector [4] is connected.
[1] [4]
F-142
[4] [5] [3] 13. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the metal plate [2].
14. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the metal plate [4].
Note
• When you install the metal plate [4], install it so that the
notch [5] faces up.
15. Remove 4 screws [6], and then remove the fusing positioning plate
assy [7].
Note
• When you install the fusing positioning plate assy [7],
push it to the direction of the arrow. If you do not push the
fusing positioning plate assy [7], the installation position
of the fusing unit tilts.
[2] [7] [1] [6]
[1] 16. Release 3 wiring harnesses [1].

17. Remove 6 screws [2], and then remove the cooling duct assy [3].
[3] [2]
18. Remove the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43) [1], the
lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md (FM44) [2], and the lower
pressure roller cooling fan/Rr (FM45) [3].
[1] [2] [3]
F-143
reverse.
Note
• When you install the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr
(FM43), the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md (FM44),
and the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Rr (FM45), install
each wiring harnesses [1] to the clamp [2] as the picture
shows. Be careful not to nip the wiring harness [1]
between the fan and the metal plate.
• When you install the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr
(FM43), the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md (FM44),
[1] [4] [2] and the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Rr (FM45), match
the projections [3] and the holes [4] of the lower pressure
roller cooling fan.
20. After you replace the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43),
the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md (FM44), and the lower
pressure roller cooling fan/Rr (FM45), conducts the followings.
• For the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Fr (FM43) and the
lower pressure roller cooling fan/Rr (FM45): Counter reset of
the special parts counter number 112.
• For the lower pressure roller cooling fan/Md (FM44): Counter
reset of the parts counter number 113.
[3]
5.13 Duplex, reverse section

5.13.1 Pulling out and reinstalling the duplex section
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front door/Rt [1] and the front door/Lt [2].
2. Rotate the duplex section pull out lever [2] in a counterclockwise

fashion while you release the lock [1].
3. Pull out the duplex section [3].
Note
• In order to prevent the main body from falling down, a
safety mechanism is equipped with the main body.
By the safety mechanism, you cannot pull out the process
unit and the duplex section at a time.
• When you pull out the duplex section, be sure to put the
process unit back to the main body.
• When you cannot pull out the duplex section, check that
the lock lever/1 and the lock lever/2 are not deformed.
[3] [2] [1] Replace them as necessary. (Refer to G.3.2.24 Lock lever/
1, /2)
4. When you reinstall it, push the duplex section and then stand the
duplex section pull out lever.
F-144
5.13.2 Replacing the de-curler roller

• De-curler roller
: Every 1,400,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 700,000 counts (special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
2. Open the reversal section [1].
[1]
3. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the knob [2].
[1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the reverse section cover
[4].
[3] [4]
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the support plate/Fr [2].
[3] 6. Remove the de-curler roller assy [3].
Note
• When you install the de-curler roller assy [3], install it so
that the side with the longer shaft comes front.
[2] [1]
F-145
[8] [9] 7. Remove the E-ring [2], the bearing [3], the E-ring [4], the bearing
[5], the spacer [6], and the bearing [7] from the de-curler roller [1].
Note
• When you install the bearing [3] and the bearing [7], install
them so that their flanges face outside.
8. Remove the E-ring [8] and the bearing [9] from the de-curler roller
[1].
reverse.
10. After you replace the de-curler roller, conduct the following items.
[1]
[7] [6] [5] [4]
[3]
[2]
5.13.3 Replacing the exit conveyance driven roller

• Exit conveyance driven roller
F-146
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the reverse section cover. (Refer to F.5.13.2 Replacing
the de-curler roller)
3. Remove the spring [1] 1 each, the E-ring [2] 1 each, and the
bearing [3] 1 each. Then remove the exit conveyance driven roller
[4].
Note
• When you install the exit conveyance driven roller [4],
install it so that the side with the longer shaft comes front.
• When you install the bearing [3], install it so that the flat
[3] [4] [5] [2] [6] [1] section [5] of the bearing [3] and the flat section of the
hole [6] becomes parallel.

reverse.
5. After you replace the exit conveyance driven roller, conduct the
following item.
[1]
[2]
[6] [5] [3]
5.13.4 Cleaning the ADU reverce roller, the ADU loop roller
• ADU reverse roller
*Clean the ADU reverse roller at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
• ADU loop roller
*Clean the ADU loop roller at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the duplex unit cover. (Refer to G.3.2.21 Duplex unit)
4. Remove the duplex guide [3] while you hold 2 rollers [2].
Note
• When you remove the duplex guide [3], be sure not to
damage 2 rollers [2].
[1] [3] [2]
F-147
Note
• When you install the duplex guide, be sure to match 2
projections [2] of the duplex guide and 2 holes [3] of the
duplex unit.
[2] [3] [1]
5. Clean the ADU loop roller [1] and the ADU reverse roller [2] by
using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
reverse.
[2] [1]
5.13.5 Cleaning the ADU centering sensor (PS87), ADU centering sensor sheet
• ADU centering sensor (PS87)
*Clean the ADU centering sensor (PS87) at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
• ADU centering sensor sheet
*Clean the ADU centering sensor sheet at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the duplex unit cover. (Refer to G.3.2.21 Duplex unit)
4. Remove the duplex guide assy [3] while you open the jam
processing guide [2].
[3] [2] [1]
F-148
Note
[3] • When you install the duplex guide assy [1], be sure to
match 2 projections [2] of the duplex guide assy and 2
holes [3] of the duplex unit.
[2] [1]
6. Remove the ADU centering sensor sheet [3] while you open the
jam processing guide [2].
[3] [2] [1]

Note
• When you remove or reinstall the ADU centering sensor
sheet, be careful not to damage the ADU centering sensor
(PS87) [1].
[1]
Note
• When you install the ADU centering sensor sheet [1], be
sure to match the projection [2] of the ADU centering
sensor sheet and the hole [3] of the duplex unit.
[2][3] [1]
F-149
7. Clean the ADU centering sensor sheet [1] by using the cleaning
pad.
[1]
8. Clean the ADU centering sensor [2] by using the cleaning pad
while you open the jam processing guide [1].
Note
• Do not to use the isopropyl alcohol. When you use the
isopropyl alcohol, the surface of the sensor becomes
fuzzy.
• In case when you use the isopropyl alcohol, wipe off with
the dry cloth.

reverse.
[1] [2]
5.13.6 Cleaning the ADU reverse cleaning assy

• ADU reverse cleaning assy
*Clean the ADU reverse cleaning assy at the same time when you replace the 1st transfer roller.
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Release the jam release lever [1], and then lower the duplex unit
[2].
[2] [1] 3. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the ADU reverse cleaning
assy [2] to the direction of the arrow.
Note
• When you remove the ADU reverse cleaning assy [2], hold
the bottom of it so as not to drop it.
• Paper dust possibly accumulates inside the ADU reverse
cleaning assy [2], so be careful.
F-150
[2] Note
• When you install the ADU reverse cleaning assy, be sure
to match 2 projections [1] of the ADU reverse cleaning
assy and 2 holes [2] of the duplex section.
[1]
[1] 4. Clean the ADU reverse cleaning assy [1] by using the isopropyl
reverse.
5.14 Paper exit section

5.14.1 Replacing the paper exit driven roller
• Paper exit driven roller
F-151
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the left cover/Lw1. (Refer to G.3.2.4 Left cover/Up1, /
Up2, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3)
4. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the cover spacer/2 [3].
[1] [1]
[2] [3]
5. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the paper exit section [2].
[2] [1]
[3] [4] [2] [1] 6. Remove the connector [1].
7. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the exit sensor assy [3].
Note
• When you install the paper exit sensor assy [3], be careful
not to damage the paper exit driven roller [4].
F-152
[2] [3] [1] [5] [6] 8. Remove the spring [1] 1 each, E-ring [2] 1 each, and the bearing
[3] 1 each. Then remove the paper exit driven roller [4].
Note
• When you install the paper exit driven roller [4], install it
so that the side with the shorter shaft comes front.
• When you install the bearing [3], install it so that the flat
section of the bearing [3] and the flat section of the hole
[6] become parallel.

reverse.
10. After you replace the paper exit driven roller, conduct the following
item.
[4] • Counter reset of the parts counter number 129
[6] [5] [1] [3] [2]
F-153
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE DF-626
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-626

6.1 Paper feed section
6.1.1 Cleaning the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
(1) Periodically cleaned parts, cycle
• Pick up roller: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper feed roller: Every 50,000 counts (Special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the paper feed roller together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.4.2.3 The paper feed
[1] cover)
2. Wipe the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] with the
isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[2]
6.1.2 Cleaning the separation roller

• Separation roller: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the separation roller together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
cover)
2. Wipe the separation roller [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and the
cleaning pad.
[1]
6.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
• Pick-up roller
• Paper feed roller
*Replace the pick-up roller, the paper feed roller, and the separation roller at the same timing.
(2) Procedure
[2] cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and the top cover [2].
[1]
F-154
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove 2 springs [2] and 2 pieces
[5] [2] [3] [4] of fixation metals [3]. Remove 2 C-clips [4] and the bearing [5], and
then remove the pick-up roller assy and the paper feed roller assy
[6].
[4] [3] [1] [6]
4. Remove the C-ring [1] and the lever [2].

[6] [4] 5. Remove 3 C-rings [3].
6. Remove 2 pins [4].
[3] [3] 7. Remove the belt [5].
[6] 8. Remove 2 pick-up rollers [6].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pins.
[1]
[5] [2]
9. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

10. Remove the paper feed roller [3].
12. After you replace the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller,
[3] conduct the following steps.
• For the pick-up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
[2] number 288
[1] • For the paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 289
6.1.4 Replacing the separation roller

• Separation roller
*Replace the pick-up roller, the paper feed roller, and the separation roller at the same timing.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the left cover [1].
2. Raise the original feed tray [2].
3. Remove the screw [3] and the mounting plate [4].
Note
• When you remove the mounting plate, be sure to hold the
original feed tray to prevent the tray from falling.
[1] [3] [4] [2]
F-155
4. Hold the section [1] to release the hook [2] of the spring, and then
remove the separation roller assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the separation roller assy, be sure to
hook the spring onto the assy.
[1] [3] [2] [1]

5. Remove the shaft opening the holder [1].
Note
• When you open the holder too much, the holder is
damaged.
[1]
6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the shaft.

Note
• Be careful not to lose the pins.

8. After you replace the separation roller, conduct the following item.
• For the separation roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 290
[1]
6.2 Conveyance section

6.2.1 Cleaning the miscellaneous rolls
• Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the miscellaneous rollers together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Raise the original feed tray.
[1] 2. Wipe the rolls [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1]
F-156
3. Open the left cover.
pad.
5. Open theDF.
pad while you open the before scanning film assy [1].
[2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and the conveyance roll assy [2] while you
[2] open the processing guide.
[1]
8. Wipe the rolls [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1]
6.2.2 Cleaning the other rollers

• Other rollers: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean other rollers together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the glass cleaning roller unit. (Refer to G.4.2.12 Glass
cleaning roller unit)
3. Wipe the roller [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[1]
F-157
[1] 5. Wipe the roller [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[1]
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and the conveyance roll assy [2] while you
[2] open the processing guide.
[1]
7. Wipe the roller [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[1]
8. Wipe the roller [2] with the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad
[1] while you turn the knob [1].
[2]
6.2.3 Cleaning the scanning guide

• Scanning guide: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the scanning guide together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
[1] 2. Open the before scanning film assy [1].
3. Wipe the scanning guide [2] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the
cleaning pad.
[2]
F-158
Note
• Be careful not to damage the film.
6.2.4 Cleaning the reflective sensor section

• Reflective sensor section: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the reflective sensor section together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Clean the sensor [1] by using the blower brush.
[1]

[1] 3. Clean the cloth [1] by using the blower brush.
4. Open the DF.

[1] 5. Clean the cloth [2] by using the blower brush while you open the
before scanning film assy [1].
[2]
F-159
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE PF-707...
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-707/708

7.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
7.2 Paper feed tray section

7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw
• Loop roller/Lw
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 counts (special parts counter))
• Loop roller bearing/Lw
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the tray 3 at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 Procedure
for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the fan cover [2].
[2]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the positioning stay [2].
[3] [5] [4] 4. Remove the E-ring [3].
5. Remove the E-rings [4] one each and slide the loop roller bearing/
Lw [5] into the inside.
[2]
[1]
F-160
6. Slide the pulley [1] to the front and remove the pin [2].
[2] 7. Remove the pulley [1] and the belt [3].
8. Slide the loop roller bearing/Lw [4] and the loop roller/Lw [5] to the
[1] direction of the arrow and remove them.
[3] reverse.
10. After you replace the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw,
[5] [4] conduct the following items.
• For the loop roller/Lw: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 174 (1st tandem), number 187 (2nd tandem),
and number 161 (3rd tandem)
• For the loop roller bearing/Lw: Counter reset of the special
parts counter number 173 (1st tandem), number 186 (2nd
tandem), and number 160 (3rd tandem)
7.3 Paper feed suction section

7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutches/1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), and /3 (CL17)
• Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), /3 (CL17)
: Every 6,000,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)) *1
*1 PF-707 or PF-708 of the 1st tandem
*2 PF-707 of the 2nd tandem
*3 PF-707 of the 3rd tandem
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.5.3.6 Rear cover/Rt)
[4] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the suction belt
clutch/1 (CL15) [4], suction belt clutch/2 (CL16) [5] and suction belt
clutch/3 (CL17) [6].
[5] Note
• When you reinstall the suction belt clutch, be sure to
insert the stopper [7] of the clutch over the projection [8]
of the metal frame.

[6] reverse.
6. After you replace the suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), suction belt
clutch/2 (CL16), and suction belt clutch/3 (CL17), conduct the
following items.
[1] • For the suction belt clutch/1: Counter reset of the special parts
[2] and number 150 (3rd tandem)
• For the suction belt clutch/2: Counter reset of the special parts
[7] counter number 163 (1st tandem), number 176 (2nd tandem),
[8]
• For the suction belt clutch/3: Counter reset of the special parts
[3] counter number 164 (1st tandem), number 177 (2nd tandem),
7.4 Vertical conveyance section

7.4.1 Replacing the exit clutches/1 (CL1), /2 (CL2) and the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4), /3 (CL5),
and /4 (CL6)
• Exit clutch/1 (CL1), exit clutch/2 (CL2)
• Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL4)
F-161
• Vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5), /4 (CL6)
(2) Procedure
[4] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.5.3.6 Rear cover/Rt)
2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
[6] 3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the exit clutch/1
(CL1) [4], exit clutch/2 (CL2) [5], the vertical conveyance clutch/1
(CL3) [6], vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL4) [7], vertical
[7]
conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) [8], and vertical conveyance clutch/4
(CL6) [9].
Note
• When you reinstall the vertical conveyance clutch, be sure
[5] to insert the stopper [10] of the clutch over the projection
[11] of the metal frame.
[8]
[9] reverse.
6. After you replace the exit clutch/1 (CL1), exit clutch/2 (CL2),
vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical conveyance clutch//2
(CL4), vertical conveyance clutch//3 (CL5) and vertical conveyance
[1]
clutch//4 (CL6), conduct the following items.
[2] • For the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), the vertical
conveyance clutch/2 (CL4), exit clutch/1 (CL1): Counter reset
[10] of the special parts counter number 165 (1st tandem), number
178 (2nd tandem), number 153 (3rd tandem.
[11] • For the exit clutch/2 (CL2): Counter reset of the special parts
[3] and number 154 (3rd tandem)
• For the vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5), the vertical
conveyance clutch/4 (CL6): Counter reset of the special parts
7.5 Horizontal conveyance section

7.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7) and the horizontal conveyance clutches /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)
• Pre-registration clutch (CL7)
• Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)
F-162
(2) Procedure
[4] [5] [6] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the pre-
registration clutch (CL7) [4] and the horizontal conveyance clutch/1
(CL8) [5] and horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL9) [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the suction belt clutch, be sure to
insert the stopper [7] of the clutch over the projection [8]
of the metal frame.

reverse.
6. After you replace the pre-registration clutch (CL7), the horizontal
conveyance clutch/1 (CL8) and horizontal conveyance clutch/2
(CL9), conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 168 (1st
[1] tandem), number 181 (2nd tandem), number 156 (3rd tandem)
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing
• Pre-registration roller
• Pre-registration bearing
F-163
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit. (Refer to G.5.3.33
[1] Horizontal conveyance unit)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration
bearing [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the gear [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration roller
bearing [2].
5. Slide and remove the pre-registration roller [3].
reverse.
7. After you replace the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration
roller bearing, conduct the following items.
• For the pre-registration roller bearing: Counter reset of the
special parts counter number 170 (1st tandem), number 183
(2nd tandem), and number 157 (3rd tandem)
• For the pre-registration roller: Counter reset of the special
parts counter number 171 (1st tandem), number 184 (2nd
tandem), and number 158 (3rd tandem)
[3]
7.5.3 Replacing the horizontal conveyance roller/1, /2, the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1, /2
• Horizontal conveyance roller/1
• Horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1
• Horizontal conveyance roller/2
• Horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2
F-164
(2) Procedure
Horizontal conveyance unit)
[2] 2. Remove the screw [1], and then release the claw [2] and remove
the pressure release unit cover [3].
[3]
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the gear [2].

Note
[2] • When you reinstall the gear [2], be careful not to damage
the gear [2] with a driver.
[1]
F-165
4. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove 2 horizontal conveyance
[2] [1] roller bearings/1 [2].
5. Remove the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [3] by sliding it in the
[3]
[2] [1]
[3] [2] [1] Note
• When you reinstall the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1],
insert it in the direction of the arrow [3] while you press
the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1] in the direction of
the arrow [2].
If you do not press the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1]
in the direction of the arrow [2], the shaft of the roller and
the metal frame are in contact. It interrupts the
reinstallation.
6. Remove 1 screw [1], and then remove the gear [2].

Note
[2] • When you reinstall the gear [2], be careful not to damage
the gear [2] with a driver.
[1]
F-166
7. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove 2 horizontal conveyance
[2] [1] roller bearings/2 [2].
8. Remove the horizontal conveyance roller/2 [3] by sliding it in the
reverse.
10. After you replace the horizontal conveyance roller/1, the horizontal
conveyance roller/2, the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1,
and the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2, conduct the
following items.
• For the horizontal conveyance roller/1: Counter reset of the
[3] • For the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1: Counter reset
of the special parts counter number 116 (1st tandem), number
120 (2nd tandem), and number 146 (3rd tandem)
• For the horizontal conveyance roller/2: Counter reset of the
• For the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2: Counter reset
of the special parts counter number 118 (1st tandem), number
144 (2nd tandem), and number 148 (3rd tandem)
[2] [1]
7.5.4 Replacing the loop roller /Up

• Loop roller/Up
(2) Procedure
Horizontal conveyance unit)
[7] 2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pulley cover [2], the
belt [3], the pulley [4] and the pin [5].
Note
[8] • When you reinstall the pulley cover [2], be sure to install it
so that the stepped side [6] comes to the E-ring side [1].
3. Remove 2 E-rings [7] and then remove 2 bearings [8].

4. Slide and remove the loop roller/Up [9].
reverse.
6. After you replace the loop roller/Up, conduct the following items.
tandem), number 185 (2nd tandem), number 159 (3rd tandem)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [9] [2] [6]
[8]
[7]
7.5.5 Replacing the roller pressure release motor (M10)

• Roller pressure release motor (M10)
F-167
(2) Procedure
1. Open the open close cover/1 [1], remove 2 screws [2], and remove
the protective cover/Up [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and release the claw [2] and remove the
pressure release unit cover [3].
[2] [3] [1]
F-168
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 screws [2].
[5][6] [4] 4. Hold the roller pressure release unit [3] and remove 3 screws [4] at
a time, and remove the roller pressure release unit [3].
Note
• Be sure to install the roller pressure release unit [3] so
that the projection [5] matches the hole [6] of PF-707.
• During the installation of the roller pressure release unit
[3], be sure to conduct the following steps: Half tighten 3
screws [4], stick the roller pressure release unit [3] in the
arrowed direction, attach 2 screws [2], and tighten 3
screws [4].
If the screws [4] are fixed first or the screws [2] are
attached without the screws [5] being half tightened, the
roller pressure release unit [3] could deform.
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [1] [3] [2] 5. Remove the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, and
remove 4 screws [2] and remove the roller pressure release motor
assy [3].
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the roller pressure release motor
assy [2].
reverse.
8. After the replacement of the roller pressure release motor (M10),
perform the following items.
tandem)
[2] [1]
7.5.6 Cleaning the centering sensor (PS40)

(1) Periodically cleaned parts/cycle
• Centering sensor (PS40):
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
F-169
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Open the open close cover [2].
[3] 3. Clean the centering sensor (PS40) [3] with a cleaning pad.
Note
• The grease is applied on the positioning shaft [4]. Be
careful not to touch with the cleaning pad.
• When you use alcohol for cleaning, the surface of the
sensor becomes fuzzy. Be sure to clean the sensor only
[4] with a dry cloth.

reverse.
[2] [1]
F-170
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE FA-502
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FA-502

CAUTION
8.2 Tandem conveyance section

8.2.1 Replacing the tandem conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14)
• Tandem conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), /5 (CL14)
*1 Connected to PF-707 or PF-708 of the 1st tandem
*2 Connected to PF-707 of the 2nd tandem
Note
• Replace for 1st tandem and 2nd tandem on 3 tandems, 1st tandem on 2 tandems.When only 1 PF-707/708 is connected, you do
not have to perform the replacement.
(2) Procedure
3. Remove C-clip [2] 1 each, and then remove the tandem
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] conveyance clutch/1 (CL10) [3], the tandem conveyance clutch/2
(CL11) [4], the tandem conveyance clutch/3 (CL12) [5] , the
tandem conveyance clutch/4 (CL13) [6] , the tandem conveyance
clutch/5 (CL14) [7].
Note
• When you install the clutch, be sure to engage the stopper
[8] of the clutch with the projection [9] of the metal plate.

reverse.
5. After you replace the tandem conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), tandem
conveyance clutch/2 (CL11), tandem conveyance clutch/3 (CL12),
tandem conveyance clutch/4 (CL13), tandem conveyance clutch/5
(CL14), perform following items.
tandem), number 182 (2nd tandem).
[2]
[8]
[9]
[1]
F-171
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE RU-516
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-516

CAUTION

9.2.1 Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven roller
• Charging roller
• Charging driven roller
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the screw cover [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the cover [3].
[3] [1][2]
3. Loosen the screw [1], and remove the charging roller assy [2] to
[2] [1]
F-172
[3] [2] Note

• When you reinstall the charging roller assy [1], be careful
that the 2 guide shafts [2] of the charging roller assy align
with the guide rail [3].
[1] [2] [3]
4. Slide the release lever [1] to the direction of arrow [2], and open
[1] [2] [3] the charging roller assy [3].
Note
[3] [2] [1] • Be careful not to open the charging roller assy [1] too
much. When you open the charging roller assy [1] too
much, the gear [2] contacts with the charging driven roller
[3] and possibly gets damaged.
F-173
5. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the shaft [2] in the
[3] [2] [1] direction of the arrow.
6. Remove the roller assy [3].
7. Remove the charging driven roller [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
Note
[2] [1] • When the charging driven roller [1] is hard to remove, use
a screwdriver [2] to remove.
• When you use a screwdriver to remove the charging
driven roller [1], be careful not to damage the shaft of the
roller with the screwdriver.
• Be careful not to touch the roller surface.
8. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the neutralizing parts [2].
[2] [1]
F-174
9. Remove the E-ring [1], the bearing [2], and the spacer [3].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the spacer [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 10. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3], and 2 bearings [4].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pin [3].
• Be careful not to touch the roller surface.
11. Remove the charging roller [5].

reverse.
13. After you replace the charging roller and the charging driven roller,
conduct the following items.
• For the charging roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 227, 228
• For the charging driven roller: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 225, 226
[4] [5]
9.2.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing

• Charging roller bearing
F-175
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [1] 1. Remove the charging driven roller. (Refer to F.9.2.1 Replacing the
charging roller and the charging driven roller)
2. Release the claws [1], 2 each. Then remove the charging roller
bearing [2], 1 each.
Note
• When you remove the charging roller bearing[2], be
careful not to lose the springs [3].
• Be careful not to break the claw [1].
[3] • When you install the charging roller bearing [2], check
that the spring [3] is attached on the projection [4]
[4] straight.
When the springs [3] are curved or tilted, adjust the
position of the springs [3].

reverse.
4. After you replace the charging roller bearing, conduct the following
item.
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
F-176
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE RU-51...
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-511/HM-101

CAUTION
10.2 Entrance conveyance section

10.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance driven rollers/1 and /2
• Entrance conveyance driven roller/1: Every 3,000,000 prints
• Entrance conveyance driven roller/2: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door.
[5] 2. Open the entrance conveyance assy/Lw [1].
3. Open the entrance conveyance assy/Up [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then pull out the shaft [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the fan assy [6].
6. Remove the entrance conveyance assy/Up [2].
[1] [2] [6]
[4]
[3]

[3] 8. Remove 4 C-clips [2].
9. Remove 8 bearings [3].
[2] 10. Remove the entrance conveyance driven roller/1 [4] and then
remove the entrance conveyance driven roller/2 [5].
11. After the entrance conveyance driven roller/1 and the entrance
conveyance driven roller/2 are replaced, conduct the following
items.
For entrance conveyance driven roller/1: Counter reset of the parts
[1] counter number 319
For entrance conveyance driven roller/2: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 318
[5] [4]
F-177
10.3 Output paper density detection section

10.3.1 Cleaning the shutter
• Shutter: Every 600,000 counts (total counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screw covers [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the shutter cover [3].
[1] [2]
[3]
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter stopper [2] in the
arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 4. Pull out the shutter [1] and clean the correction plate [2] with a
blower brush.
Note
• Be careful that the shutter [3] falls down when it is pulled
out too much.
10.4 Humidification section

10.4.1 Cleaning the humidification section conveyance roller/1
• Humidification section conveyance roller/1: Every 300,000 prints
F-178
(2) Procedure
1. Clean the humidification section conveyance roller/1 [1].
[1]
10.4.2 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts, spotted replaced parts, cycle
• Humidification roller/Rt: Every 300,000 prints
• Humidification roller/Lt: Every 300,000 prints
• Water feed roller: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,500,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.8.3.2 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the humidification unit cover [2].
[1] 3. Pull out the humidification unit [3].
[2] [3]
F-179
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover/Lt [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
6. Release the wiring harness, and then pull out the connector [4] to
the outside from the hole [5].
[1] [2]
[5] [3] [4]

[1] [4] 8. Open the open close plate/Lt assy [2] and remove it in the arrow-
marked direction [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the open close plate/Lt assy [2], be
sure to hit the open close plate/Lt assy [2] to the E-ring
[4].
[3] [2]
F-180
[1] [2] [4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover/Rt [2].
11. Pull out the connector [3] to the outside from the hole [4].
14. Open the open close plate/Rt assy [7] and remove in the arrow-
[5] [8] [7] Note
• When you reinstall the open close plate/Rt assy [7], be
sure to hit the open close plate/Rt assy [7] to the E-ring
[9].
[6] [9]
[1] 15. Remove 4 screws [1].
16. Remove the humidification roller assy [2].
[2]
F-181
17. Check point when you reinstall the humidification roller assy
[1] Note
• When you reinstall the humidification roller assy, be sure
to place the projections [1] of the pressure release cam so
that they hit the pressure rollers [2] beforehand. (Execute
this process to all 4 places.)
to turn the gear so that the projection [3] of the gear aligns
with the notch [4] beforehand.
not to miss-align the positions of the projections of the
humidification pressure cam [1] and the gear [3].
[2] [2]
[3]
[4]
F-182
18. Put the humidification roller assy with bottom-up.
[8] [7] [12] [6] [5] [3] 19. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and remove 2 gears [2].
20. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the gear [5] with 2 bearings [4].
21. Remove the spacer [6].
22. Remove the C-clip [7], and then remove the gear [8].
23. Remove the C-clip [9], and remove the gear [10] and the spacer
[11].
24. Remove the gear [12].
[11] [10] [9] [4]
[2] [1] [2]
F-183
25. Remove 2 C-clips [1]. Then remove the humidification pressure
[8] [7] cam/FrRt [2], humidification pressure cam/FrLt [3], and 2 bearings
[4].
26. Remove the C-clips [5], and then remove the humidification
pressure cam/RrLt [6].
27. Remove the humidification pressure cam/RrRt [7] and 2 bearings
[8].
28. Remove the humidification roller/Rt [9] and humidification roller/Lt
[10] in the arrow-marked direction [11].
Note
• Remove the control roller [12] releasing to outside.
[6] [5]
[11] [10]
[12] [9]
[4] [3]
[2] [1]
29. Check point when you reinstall the humidification roller/Rt [1] and
[1] [3]
humidification roller/Lt [2]
Note
• When you reinstall the humidification roller/Rt [1] and
humidification roller/Lt [2], be sure to note the following
points.
The humidification roller/Rt is longer than the
humidification roller/Lt.
The side with the groove on the roller shaft comes to the
front side.
Never touch the roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
F-184
30. Remove the C-clips [1], pressure rollers [2], and bearings [3], 4
[4] [5] [6] each.
31. Remove 2 water feed rollers [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the water feed roller, never touch the
roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
[3] [1]
[1] 32. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the pressure roller, be sure that the
bearing [1] comes inside.
33. After you replace the humidification roller/Rt, humidification roller/

Lt, and the water feed roller, conduct the following items.
The parts counter of the humidification roller/Rt
• Number 333 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 322 (C7000, C7000P, and C70hc)
• Number 323 (C1100, C1085)
The parts counter of the humidification roller/Lt
• Number 334 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 324 (C1100, C1085)
The parts counter of the water feed roller
• Number 335 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 325 (C1100, C1085)
10.4.3 Replacing the water feed filter

(1) Spotted replaced parts and cycle
• Water feed filter: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 counts (Special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then pull out the water feed tank [2].
[1]
F-185
[1] [2] 3. Remove 3 screws [1] and open the filter cap [2].
[1]
4. Remove the water feed filter [1].
reverse.
6. After you replace the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
• Number 380 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 326 (C1100, C1085)
10.4.4 Replacing the pump motor (P1)

• Pump motor (P1): Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 10,000,000 counts (special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
[5] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.8.3.3 Rear cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1,] and then release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the pipe [3] and the pipe [4]. Then remove the pump
motor (P1) [5].
Note
• When you remove the pipe [3] and the pipe [4], be careful
not to come off the connecting part [6] from the pump
motor (P1) [5].
• When you install the pipe [3] and the pipe [4], be careful of
the attachment positions.
The pipe [4] comes in front of the pipe [3].
Install the pipe [3] to the upper side of the pump motor
(P1) [5].
[1] [2] [6] [4] Install the pipe [4] to the lower side of the pump motor
(P1) [5].

reverse.
• Number 381 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 327 (C1100, C1085)
F-186
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-510

CAUTION

11.2.1 Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2
• Re-feed roller drive gear/1, re-feed roller drive gear/2
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 40,000,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to G.9.2.3 Rear cover)
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the re-feed roller drive
gear/1 [2] and the re-feed roller drive gear/2 [3].
reverse.
4. After you replace the re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the re-feed
roller drive gear/2, be sure to reset the special parts counter.
• Number 376
11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the
paper exit conveyance belt
• Entrance motor (M1)
• Entrance conveyance belt
• Paper exit motor (M2)
• Paper exit conveyance belt
(2) Removing the entrance motor assy, Replacement procedure of the entrance conveyance belt
3. Remove the 5 saddles [2] of the entrance motor mounting plate,
[3] [4] [5] and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove 4 screws [3], the entrance motor assy [4] and the
entrance conveyance belt [5].
Note
When it is reinstalled, temporary tighten the 4 screws [3] and
apply the tension to the entrance conveyance belt [5] by own
weight of the entrance motor assy [4]. Then tighten 4 screws
[3].

reverse.
6. After you replace the entrance conveyance belt, be sure to reset
the special parts counter.
• Number 372
[2] [3] [1]
F-187
(3) Removing the paper exit motor assy, Replacement procedure of the paper exit conveyance belt
1. Remove the re-feed roller drive gear/2. (Refer to F.11.2.1
[5] [2] [4] [1] Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-
feed roller drive gear/2)
3. Remove the 3 saddles [2] of the paper exit motor mounting plate,
and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 4 screws [3], the paper exit motor assy [4] and the
paper exit conveyance belt [5].
Note
When you reinstall the paper exit motor assy, temporary
tighten the 4 screws [3] and apply the tension to the paper
exit conveyance belt [5] by own weight of the paper exit motor
assy [4]. Then tighten 4 screws [3].

reverse.
6. After you replace the paper exit conveyance belt, be sure to reset
the special parts counter.
• Number 372
[3]
(4) Replacement procedure of the entrance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor (M2)
1. Remove the entrance motor assy and the paper exit motor assy.
[2] [1] [3] (Refer toF.11.2.2.(2) Removing the entrance motor assy,
Replacement procedure of the entrance conveyance belt, F.11.2.2.
(3) Removing the paper exit motor assy, Replacement procedure
of the paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the E-ring [1].
3. Loosen the 2 screws [2] and remove the pulley gear [3].
4. Remove the 4 screws [4]. Then remove the entrance motor (M1)
and the paper exit motor (M2) [6] from the mounting plate [5].
reverse.
6. After you replace the entrance motor (M1) and the paper exit
motor (M2), be sure to reset the special parts counter.
[5] [4] [6] Entrance motor (M1), paper exit motor (M2)
• Number 374
11.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley
• Paper exit pulley
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 20,000,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Conveyance pulley
F-188
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt,
the paper exit motor (M2), and the paper exit conveyance belt
[3] [4] (Refer to F.11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the paper
exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then 1 paper exit pulley [2].
3. Remove each 1 of the screws [3] at 5 places, and then remove the
5 paper exit pulleys [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper exit pulley [4] be sure that
the gear comes inside.

reverse.
5. After you replace the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley,
be sure to reset the special parts counter.
Paper exit pulley, Conveyance pulley
• Number 373 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 372 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
[2] [1]
11.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller/1, /2, paper exit roller, bearing /K and bearing assy
• Entrance roller/1
• Entrance roller/2
• Paper exit roller
• Bearing/K
• Bearing assy
F-189
(2) Procedure
1. Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt,
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt
[2] (Refer to "F.11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
(M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the
paper exit conveyance belt")
Remove the paper exit pulley, the conveyance pulley.
(Refer to "F.11.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the
conveyance pulley")
2. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.
3. Remove the screw [2], 2 each, and then remove the bearing/K and
the bearing assy [3], 1 each.
*Only the bearing of the paper exit roller [8] is the bearing assy.
Note
• When you reinstall the bearing/K and the bearing assy [3],
be sure that the notch of the bearing/K and the bearing
assy comes in the position [4] as it is shown in the
[3] [1] [6] picture.
• To prevent the notch from opening, when tighten the
screws [2], 1 for each, in counterclockwise order.
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [3] of the entrance roller/
1 [6], entrance roller/2 [7], be sure to apply the Molykote
EM-30L inside the bearing/K [3].
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [3] of the paper exit roller
[8], be sure to apply the Molykote EM-30L on all around of
the spring pins [5] on the front and rear of the shaft.
4. Remove the entrance roller/1 [6], entrance roller/2 [7] and the
paper exit roller [8].
[8] [7] [4] [2] reverse.
6. After you replace the entrance roller/1, entrance roller/2 and the
paper exit roller, bearing/K and bearing Assy, be sure to reset the
parts counter.
Entrance roller/1, entrance roller/2
• Number 366 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Paper exit roller
• Number 369 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Bearing/K and bearing Assy
• Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[2] [1] [3]
[5]
11.2.5 Replacing the merging section roller and bearing/K

• Junction roller
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 20,000,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Bearing/K
F-190
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance
[2] [1] [3] belt. (Refer to F.11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the conveyance pulley. (Refer to F.11.2.3 Replacing the
paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley)
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
4. Remove the screws [3], 2 each, and E-rings [4], 1 each, and then
remove the bearing/K [5], 1 each.
Note
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to that the
notch of the bearing/K comes in the position [6] as it is
[7] [4] [5] shown in the picture.
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to apply the
Molykote EM-30L inside of the bearing/K [7].
5. Remove the merging section roller [7].

reverse.
7. After you replace the merging section roller and bearing/K, be sure
to reset the special parts counter.
Merging section roller
• Number 367 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Bearing/K
[6] • Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[3]
[5] [4]
11.2.6 Replacing the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K

• Stacker entrance roller
• Bearing/K
F-191
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit motor (M1) and the entrance conveyance
[2] [1] [3] [4] belt. (Refer to F.11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the conveyance pulley. (Refer to F.11.2.3 Replacing the
paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley)
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
4. Remove each 1 spring [3].
5. Remove the screw [4], 1 each, and the mounting metal fitting [5], 1
each.
6. Remove the E-ring [6], 1 each, and then remove bearing/K [7], 1
each.
[9] [7] [6] [5] Note
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure that the
notch of the bearing/K comes in the position [8] as it is
shown in the picture.
Molykote EM-30L inside of the bearing/K [7].
7. Remove the stacker entrance roller [9].

reverse.
9. After you replace the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K, be
sure to reset the parts counter.
Stacker entrance roller
[3] [8] [7] • Number 367 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Bearing/K
[5] • Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[4]
[6]
11.2.7 Replacing the re-feed roller and bearing/K

• Paper re-feed roller
• Bearing/K
F-192
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt,
[3] [6] [1] the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance belt.
(Refer to "F.11.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
paper exit conveyance belt")
Remove the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley.
(Refer to "F.11.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the
[2] conveyance pulley")
2. Remove each of the spring [1], 1 each.
3. Remove each of the screws [2], 1 each, and the mounting metal
fitting [3], 1 each.
4. Remove the E-rings [4], 1 each, and then remove 5 bearing/K [5].
Note
[4] [5] [8] • When the bearing/K [5] is reinstalled, be sure that the
notch of the bearing/K [5] comes in the position [6].
Molykote EM-30L inside the bearing/K [5].
5. Remove the paper re-feed roller [8].

reverse.
7. After you replace the paper re-feed roller and bearing/K, be sure to
reset the special parts counter.
Paper re-feed roller
• Number 368 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[5] [1] Bearing/K
• Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[3] • Number 370 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
[2]
[4]
11.2.8 Replacing the driven roller

• Driven roller
F-193
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover.
[6] [5] [8] [3] (Refer to G.9.2.4 Left cover)
Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to G.9.2.5 Upper cover)
2. Remove the 2 open close springs [1].
3. Release the release spring/Rt [2] and remove the screw [3]. Then
remove the locking claw [4] and the release spring/Rt [2].
4. Release the release spring/Lt [5] and remove the screw [6]. Then
remove the locking claw [7] and the release spring/Lt [5].
5. Remove the 3 E-rings [8] and remove the pin [9]. Then pull out the
open close lever Assy [10] in the arrow-marked direction.
[7] [9] [10] [2] [4]
[1]
6. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], remove the saddle and release

[1] the wiring harness.
7. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the open close shaft
Assy/Rt [3].
8. Pull out the straight conveyance guide plate/Up [4] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
F-194
[3] 9. Remove the 1 screw [1] and then remove the open close lever lock
part [2].
10. Remove 10 screws [3] and 3 screws [4].
11. Remove the 3 saddles [5], and release the wiring harness, and
remove the conveyance cover/Up [6].
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
[5] [6]
12. Remove the holding spring [1], 1 each, and remove the 4 driven
[2] [1] rollers [2], 4 each.
F-195
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the driven roller, be sure that the
groove of the drive motor [1] faces down.
14. After you replace the driven roller, be sure to reset the special
parts counter.
• Number 370 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[1]
11.2.9 Replacing the straight gate

(1) Periodically replaced parts, spotted replaced parts and the cycle
• Straight gate
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] [2] 2. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove the saddle [2] of the gate motor mounting plate at 6
places and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 3 screws [3] and then remove the fan motor mounting
plate [4].
[3] [4] [1] [2] [3]
5. Remove the straight gate spring [1].

6. Remove the screw [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3] [5] [4] [3].
7. Remove the E-ring [4] and remove the bearing [5].
[1] [2]
F-196
8. Remove the straight conveyance guide plate [1].
[4] 9. Remove the E-ring [2] and bearing [3], and pull out the straight
[1] gate [4] in the arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
11. After you replace the straight gate, be sure to reset the special
parts counter.
Straight gate
• Number 365 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[3]
[2]
11.2.10 Replacing the stack switch motor (M6)

(1) Periodically replaced parts, spotted replaced parts and cycle
• Stack switch motor (M6)
(2) Procedure
[1] [4] (Refer to G.9.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Remove the saddle [1], and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the stack switch motor (M6)
[4].
[2] [3]

reverse.
Note
• When you install the stack switch motor (M6), be sure to
fit the gear of the stack switch motor (M6) to the belt [1].
6. After you replace the stack switch motor (M6), be sure to reset the
special parts counter.
Stack switch motor (M6)
• Number 375 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[1]
F-197
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE FS-532
12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-532

CAUTION
12.2 Paper conveyance section

12.2.1 Lubricatiing the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam, the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching
gate/Up
(1) Periodic lubrication parts and cycle
• FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam
: Periodical lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1
: Periodical lubrication cycle: Every 750,000 counts (total counter) *2
• FNS entrance roller conveyance switching gate /Up
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the FNS entrance roller
conveyance switching cam [1] and the arm section [2] of the FNS
entrance roller conveyance switching gate/Up.
[1]
[2]
12.3 Stacker section

12.3.1 Replacing the paddle
• Paddle
F-198
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the stacker unit.
2. Remove each E-ring [1] and then remove the paddle [2], 3 each, in
the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When you remove the paddles, be careful not to drop the
E-ring [1] and the axis pin [3].
[3] [2] [1] [1] [2] [3]
3. Remove 3 paddles [2] each from the paddle assy [1].

Note
• When you reinstall the paddles, be sure to install the
paddles in the same direction as they were installed
before.

5. After you replace the paddle, conduct the following steps.
When you connect to 1250, 1250P, and 1052
- Counter reset of the special parts counter number 256
When you connect to 951
[1] [2] [1] [2] - Counter reset of the special parts counter number 170
When it is connected to C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
When it is connected to C1100, C1085
12.3.2 Lubricating the stapler shaft and the rear stopper shaft
• Stapler shaft
• Rear stopper shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on 2 stapler shafts [1].
3. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the rear stopper shaft [2], and
move the rear stopper/Fr [3] and rear stopper/Rr [4].
[2] [3] [4] [1]
F-199
12.4 Stapler section

12.4.1 Replacing the stapler unit
(1) Periodically replaced parts, cycle
• Staple unit
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F-200
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
[2] [4] 5. Remove the screw [2] to remove the ground [3], and then release
the wiring harness.
6. Release the wiring harness from the hole [4], remove the screw
[5].
7. While you remove the screw [6], remove the stapler unit assy [7] in
the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Be sure to remove the screw [5] before you remove the
[3] screw [6]. Otherwise, the stapler unit assy [7] could
deform.
[5] [1] [7]
[6]
[1] Note
• The staple position changes when you remove the stapler
unit assy.
Be sure to record the current adjustment position [1]
before you remove, and then adjust the position again
when you install. (Refer to I.14.1 Staple position
adjustment)
F-201
8. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the staple unit [2].
10. After you replace the staple unit, conduct the following item.
Staple Position Adjustment (Refer to I.14.1 Staple position
adjustment)
Counter reset of the parts counter Number 231
Counter reset of the parts counter Number 167
- Staple unit: counter reset of the parts counter number 295
[1]
12.5 Main tray section

12.5.1 Cleaning and lubricating the paper exit alignment plate shaft
• Paper exit alignment plate shaft
: Periodical cleaning cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1
: Periodical cleaning cycle: Every 750,000 counts (total counter) *2
: Periodic cleaning cycle: Every 700,000 counts (Total counter)*3
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085

• Paper exit alignment plate shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(3) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.10.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rr. (Refer to G.10.3.8 Upper cover/Rr)
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the paper exit cover/Up [2].
4. Clean the paper exit alignment plate shaft [1] with the isopropyl
alcohol and apply the MH surf or Molykote EM-30L.
[2] [1]
F-202
[1]
F-203
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE SD-510
13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-510

CAUTION
13.2 Alignment section

13.2.1 Replacing the paddle/1, /2, /3
• Paddle/1
• Paddle/2
• Paddle/3
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
2. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.11.3.3 Stapler unit
cover)
3. Remove each screw [1], and then remove 2 paddle/1 [2].
F-204
4. Lift up the paper exit guide [1] and remove each screw [2], and
then remove 2 paddle/3 [3]
5. Remove each screw [4], and then remove 2 paddle/2 [5].
7. After you replace the paddle/1, paddle/2 and paddle/3, conduct the
following steps.
- Paddle/1, paddle/2, paddle/3: Counter reset of number 390
[2] [3] When it is connected to C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
[1]
[4] [5]
13.3 Stapler section

13.3.1 Replacing the stapler unit
• Staple unit

1. Fully pull out the SD unit and install the SD support stay. (Refer to
G.11.3.4 SD unit)
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to "G.11.3.2 Front cover")
3. Remove the stapler unit cover. G.11.3.3 Stapler unit cover
4. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the SD unit cover/Lt [1]
to the arrow-marked direction.
[1] [2]
F-205
5. Remove the saddle, and release the wiring harness [1].
6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ground [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
7. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
Note
• When you install the guide plate [2], be sure to match the
hole [3] to the projection [4] of the guide plate.
[3][4] [1]
[2]
[1]
8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the clincher cover [2].

[3] Note
• Remove the clincher cover [2] to the arrow-marked
direction so that the claws [3] are released from the
projection [4]
[4] • When you remove the clincher cover [2], be sure not to
[5] break the paddle [5].
[2]
[1]
F-206
10. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3]. Then remove the stapler
unit assy [4].
Note
[1] • When you remove the screws [3], insert the driver into the
hole [5] and remove them.
[4] [2]
[5] [3]
11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit [2].
[1]
[1] [2]

Note
• When the stapler unit is removed, be sure to adjust the position with the staple adjustment jig.
1. Install the stapler unit [2] with 4 screws [1].
[1]
[1] [2]
F-207
2. Install the connector [1].
3. Install the stapler unit assy [3] with 4 screws [2].
Note
• When you install the stapler unit assy [3], be sure to
[1] match the projection [4] to the hole [5] of the stapler unit
assy.
[3] [2]
[2] [4][5]
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the clincher [1].

[4] [3] Note
• Make sure that 2 injections [3] of the clincher do not come
off from 2 slotted holes [4].
• Be careful that if the 2 screws [2] are too loose, the staple
adjustment jig [6] cannot be inserted.
5. Insert the staple adjustment jig [6] between the stapler unit [5] and
the clincher [1], and adjust the horizontal position of the clincher
[1].
Note
• When you insert the staple adjustment jig [6], be sure to
insert it from obliquely upward as indicated by the allow
mark [7].
[5] [7] [2] [1] [6]
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] to fasten the clincher [1].
7. Pull out the staple adjustment jig [6].
9. After you replace the staple unit, conduct the following item.
13.3.2 Cleaning and lubricating the staple guide/Up, /Lw

• Staple guide/Up and staple guide/Lw
: Periodic cleaning cycle: Every 700,000 counts (Total counter)*3
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085

• Staple guide/Up and staple guide/Lw
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
F-208
*3 C1100, C1085
(3) Procedure
1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
[2] [1] 2. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.11.3.3 Stapler unit
cover)
3. Clean the staple guide/Up [1] and apply the MH Surf at 2 places [2]
of the guide shaft.
Note
• When you move the stapler unit to the right or the left, be
sure to hold the main body of the stapler.
• When the MH surf is not available, perform only cleaning.
4. Remove the SD unit cover/Lt. (Refer to F.13.3.1 Replacing the

stapler unit)
5. Clean the staple guide/Lw [1] and apply the MH Surf at 2 places [2]
of the guide shaft.
Note
• When you move the stapler unit to the right or the left, be
sure to hold the main body of the stapler.
• When the MH surf is not available, perform only cleaning.

[2] [1]
13.4 Half-fold/folding&staple/tri-folding section

13.4.1 Cleaning the folding roller/1, /2
• Folding roller/1, folding roller/2
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the folding knife assy /1. (Refer to G.11.3.5 Folding knife
[4] assy/1)
2. Clean the folding roller/1 [2] and the folding roller/2 [3] with the
isopropyl alcohol while you lift up the conveyance guide plate [1].
Note
• Be careful not to adhere the isopropyl alcohol to the PET
parts [4].

reverse.
[3] [2] [4] [1]
F-209
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE PI-50...
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502

CAUTION
14.2 Paper feed section

14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller/Up
• Pick-up roller/Up
• Paper feed roller/Up
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.13.2.2 Upper cover)
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller Assy/Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c001na
3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
a04hf2c001ca
4. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].
[2]
[1]
a04hf2c002ca
[2] [3] 5. Remove the C-clip [1].

6. Slide 2 roller shafts [2] in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the pick-up roller/Up [3] and the paper feed roller/Up [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to assemble them so that the
blue surfaces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller
and the paper feed roller come to the front side.
[4] [1] a04hf2c003ca
F-210
[2] [5] [1] 7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] from the
one-way clutches [3] and [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the pick-up roller [1], insert the one-
way clutch [3] from the notch [5] side so that the notch [5]
of the pick-up roller matches with the projection [6] of the
one-way clutch.
[7] • When you reinstall the paper feed roller [2], insert the one-
way clutch [4] so that its projection [8] fits to the notch [7]
[4] [3] of the paper feed roller.
[8] [6] a04hf2c004ca 8. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
9. After you replace the pick-up roller/Up and the paper feed roller/
Up, conduct the following steps.
For the pick up roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 264 (C8000)
• Number 264 (C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, and C6000L)
• Number 392 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 190 (951)
• Number 308 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L)
• Number 264 (C1100, C1085)
For the feed roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 265 (C8000)
• Number 393 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 191 (951)
• Number 265 (C1100, C1085)
14.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/Lw
• Pick-up roller/Lw
• Paper feed roller/Lw
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2 to 7 of "F.14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up
and the paper feed roller/Up."
4. After you replace the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/
Lw, conduct the following steps.
For the pick up roller/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
15jff2c004na • Number 269 (C8000)
• Number 397 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 195 (951)
• Number 269 (C1100, C1085)
For the feed roller/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 270 (C8000)
• Number 398 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 196 (951)
• Number 270 (C1100, C1085)
14.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up

• Separation roller/Up
• Torque limiter/Up
F-211
(2) Procedure
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy/Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c005na
[2] 3. Release the hooks on the right and left, and then lift the separation
roller assy/Up [2] to remove it.
[1] 15jff2c006na
[1] [2] 4. Remove the C-clip [1] from the separation roller assy/Up and then
remove the separation roller/Up [2] and the torque limiter/Up [3].
[3]
Note
• Be sure to install the separation roller/Up with its 2
notches [4] on the front and fitted to the projections [5].
[4]
6. After you replace the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/
[5] 15jff2c007na Up, conduct the followings.
For the feed roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 266 (C8000)
• Number 394 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 192 (951)
• Number 266 (C1100, C1085)
For the torque limiter/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 267 (C8000)
• Number 395 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 193 (951)
• Number 267 (C1100, C1085)
14.2.4 Replacing the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/Lw

• Separation roller/Lw
• Torque limiter/Lw
F-212
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
2. Perform steps 2, 3 and 4 of "F.14.2.3 Replacing the separation
roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up."
4. After you replace the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/
Lw, conduct the followings.
For the separation roller/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
15jff2c008na • Number 271 (C8000)
• Number 399 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 197 (951)
• Number 271 (C1100, C1085)
For the torque limiter/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 272 (C8000)
• Number 400 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 198 (951)
• Number 272 (C1100, C1085)
14.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch/Up (CL201) and /Lw (CL202)
• Paper feed clutch/Up (CL201)
• Paper feed clutch/Lw (CL202)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PI Unit. (Refer to G.13.2.5 PI unit)
[2] [1] [3] [5] 2. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.13.2.2 Upper cover)
3. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.13.2.3 Rear cover)
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the clutch fixing cover [2].
Note
• When you install the clutch fixing plate, be sure to install
it so that the spring [3] comes under the fixing plate.
• When you install the clutch fixing plate, be sure to engage
the stopper [4] of the clutch with the fixing plate and
install it.
5. Remove the connector [5], remove the E-ring [6] and remove the
paper feed clutch/Up [7].
Note
[4] [7] • When you install the paper feed clutch/Up [7], be sure to
engage the D-cut [8] of the shaft with the paper feed
clutch/Up and install it.
[6] [8]
F-213
[4] 7. Remove 5 screws [3] and disconnect 2 connectors [4].
8. Release the wiring from the saddle and pull out the PIDB mounting
plate [5] toward you.
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[3]
Note
• When you install the PIDB mounting plate, be sure to
engage the notch [1] of the mounting plate with the
projection [2] of the paper feed clutch/Lw.
[2] [1]
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the conveyance clutch/Lw [2].
Note
• When you install the paper feed clutch/Up [2], be sure to
engage the D-cut [3] of the shaft with the paper feed
clutch/Up and install it.
11. After you replace the paper feed clutch/Up and the paper feed
clutch/Lw, conduct the following steps.
For the paper feed clutch/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 263 (C8000)
[1] [3] [2] • Number 263 (C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, and C6000L)
• Number 391 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 189 (951)
• Number 263 (C1100, C1085)
For the paper feed clutch/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 268 (C8000)
• Number 396 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 194 (951)
• Number 268 (C1100, C1085)
F-214
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE LS-506
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-506

CAUTION

15.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
• Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
: Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.14.2.2 Cover)
[1] [2] [5] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[3] [4]
5. Check points when you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor
[5] (M1)
Note
• When you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1),
be sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with
[4] the gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
you fasten the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], rotate the encoder [5]
counterclockwise to make adjustments.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
reverse.
[3] 8. After you replace the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
• Number 250 or number 257 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 219 or number 224 (C1100, C1085)
[1]
ls502fs2003c
15.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)

• Paper press solenoid/3 (SD8)
(2) Procedure
Note
• When you conduct this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
F-215
1. Remove the LC-501 from the main body while the stacker tray is
placed.
[2] 2 2. Remove the C-clip [1].
3. Move the guide rail [2] on the front side to the arrow-marked
direction and release the fixing.
1
[1]
4. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you can see the
upper surface of it.
Note
• Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10cm to the right in
[1] advance.
• Be careful that the belt [2] does not get pushed down by
the bottom of the shift unit.
5. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the ribbon cable [5] from
[2]
the connector [4].
[4]
[5]
[3] ls502fs2005c
6. How to handle the ribbon cable

Note
• Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the ribbon cable
[1] in the arrow-marked direction and remove the ribbon
cable [3].
[3] When you reinstall the ribbon cable, insert the cable and
then slide the lock in the reverse direction.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c
F-216
8. Move the guide rail [2] on the rear side to the arrow-marked
direction and release the fixing.
9. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4] of the shift unit [3].
[4] [5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1] ls502fs2007c
10. Check point when you reinstall the belt

Note
[2] • When you attach the belt [2] to the stopper section [1],
slide the shift unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction and
[1] engage the stopper section with the belt.
[2]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
[1] [4] 11. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance between the belts
[1].
Note
• When you remove the conveyance unit [2], be careful that
the edge stoppers [3] and the paper pressure arms/3 [4]
do not contact the belt [1].
[2]
[4] [3] ls502fs2009c
F-217
12. Remove the connector [1] and cut the wire binding band.
Note
• When you cut the wire binding band, be careful not to cut
the lead wire.
• When you attach the wire binding band, bundle it at the
same place.

14. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove it.
15. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/3 assy
[4].
[1] [3] [5] [4]
[3]
[3] [2] ls502fs2010c
16. Check point when you reinstall the paper press solenoid/3 assy
Note
• When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/3 assy, be
[1]
sure to insert the pin [2] of the shaft into the slit section
[1] at the tip of the solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
[3] 17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) [2].
reverse.
[2] ls502fs2012c

F-218
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover/Up and front cover/Lw. (Refer to G.14.2.2
[3] [4]
Cover)
[2] 3. Remove the spring [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/1 assy
[4].
Note
[6] • When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/1 assy, be
sure to insert the actuator [6] that is provided at the tip of
the shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
[5] [1] a0h1t3c001ca
from the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) [2].
reverse.
[3] [2]

(2) Procedure
[2] [6] 1. Remove the front cover/Up and front cover/Lw. (Refer to G.14.2.2
[5] Cover)
3. Remove the spring [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/2
(SD7) [4].
[3]
Note
• When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/2 (SD7), be

[1] [4] ls502fs2033c reverse.
15.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

• Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
F-219

[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.14.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
[4].
[1] [4]
from the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [2].
[2] [3]

[1] 1. Install the solenoid mounting plate [3] to the rear stopper solenoid
(SD3) [2] with 2 screws [1].
[2] [3]
[4] [5] 2. Install the rear stopper solenoid assy [3] aligning with the marking-
off line [2] while you press the plunger with 2 screws [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [3], be
• The actuator [5] can deform. Do not touch the actuator [5].
[2] [1] [3]
F-220
[1] [2] Note

• Check that the rear stopper [1] does not project from the
paper feed surface of the guide plate [2].
• Check that the distance "a" is a standard value.
Standard value "a": 1.5 mm or more
• When the position of the rear stopper and the standard
value "a" are not proper, adjust the installation position of
the rear stopper solenoid assy again.
F-221
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE FD-50...
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503

CAUTION

16.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids/1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
• Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) to roller solenoid/4 (SD8)
: Every 10,500,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200, 1200P, and 1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord support board/A
[2].
2. Remove the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft [4].
[2]
[4]
[3] fd501fs2001c

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller solenoid/
1 (SD5) to roller solenoid/4 (SD8) [3].
[1]
[2] • Number 266 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 209 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 208 (C8000)
[3]
• Number 241 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[2] • Number 208 (C1100, C1085)
[1] 7. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.19.1
Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position
adjustment)
fd501fs2002c
16.3 Punch section

16.3.1 Replacing the punch unit
• Punch unit
(2) Procedure
[3] 3. Remove the punch unit [3].
• Number 265 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 208 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 207 (C8000)
• Number 240 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
fd501fs2003c • Number 207 (C1100, C1085)
F-222
16.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board
• Punch shaft
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
: Every 750,000 counts (Total counter)*2
: Every 1,500,000 counts (Total counter)*3
: Every 1,400,000 counts (total counter)*4
• Punch support board
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc and C1060
*4 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
4. Remove the plastic stopper [1], and remove the pin [2].
[2]
5. Remove the punch shaft [3], and clean the periphery. (Isopropyl
alcohol, Cleaning pad)
[1]
[3]
a0h0t3c001ca
6. Clean the inner periphery of the hole [2] of the punch support
[2]
board [1]. (Isopropyl alcohol, Cleaning pad)
[1]
a0h0t3c002ca
16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section

(1) Periodically lubricated parts and cycle
• Punch drive section
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*4 C1100, C1085
F-223
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
[1] 4. Lubricate 2 stopper cams [1] and 8 gears [2]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[2]
a0h0t3c003ca
16.4 Folding conveyance section

16.4.1 Replacing the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
• 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
(2) Procedure
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
F-224

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm/Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm/Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
[1] [2] 5. Open the front door [1] and then remove the screw [2].
6. Pull out the folding unit [3].
[3] a0h0t3c004ca
[1] 7. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left rail and the
right rail, and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[2] 8. Open the guide plate [1].

[3].
[3] [1] a0h0t3c005ca
F-225

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the 2nd folding roller
solenoid (SD18) [3].
• Number 267 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 210 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 209 (C8000)
• Number 242 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 209 (C1100, C1085)
14. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.19.2 2nd
[3] a0h0t3c006ca
folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment)
16.5 Main tray section

16.5.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
• Tray up down motor (M11)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 counts) *3
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
Note
• Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while you support the up down stay with your hands.
[2] 1. Remove the rear cover (refer to G.15.3.5 Rear cover) and the left
cover/Rr (refer to G.15.3.7 Left cover/Rr).
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray up down motor
(M11) [3].
[3] • Number 268 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 211 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[1] • Number 210 (C8000)
• Number 243 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 210 (C1100, C1085)
fd501fs2005c
16.6 PI section
16.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)
• Pick-up rubber
: Every 5,200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 200,000 counts (Special parts counter))*3
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 , C1100, C1085
F-226
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c

[4] [1] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit/Up [3].
Note
• The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the coupling [4].
Be sure to remove the pick-up unit/Up [3] from the front
[3]
side.
• Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of the pick-up
[5] [2] unit/Up.
fd501fs2007c
[1] [2] [4] 5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft [4].
[3] fd501fs2008c
[4] [3] [2] 7. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then remove the shaft [3]
from the mounting plate [4].
[1] fd501fs2009c
9. Remove 2 C-clips [1].
[1] fd501fs2010c
F-227
[1] [2] 10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
[1] [2] [3] 11. Remove the belt [3] from the gears [2] and [4], and then remove
the gears [2] and [4], the pins [1] and [5] from the pick-up roller
shaft [4].
[4]
[5] fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [2].
[1]
[2] fd501fs2013c
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the pick-up rubber [2].
Note
• Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way
clutch [3] (blue) is on the front side.
[3]
[2] [1] fd501fs2014c
[4] [7] 14. Remove the C-clip [1].

16. Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
17. Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then remove the gear
[5] and the pin [6] from the pick-up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [8].
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [1]
fd501fs2015c
F-228
[3] [4] [7] 20. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

21. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then remove the gear
[2] [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [6].
[6] 23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear side, and remove
the pick-up roller assy [7].
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[1] [5] [8] [1]
• Number 259 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 202 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 201 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, and C6000)
• Number 234 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 201 (C1100, C1085)
fd501fs2016c
16.6.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)

• Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 8 of "F.16.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
[8] (Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up roller unit.
[7] 3. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
[3] 4. Remove the spacer [3].
5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[4]
7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[1]
[6] [5] [2]
fd501fs2017c
[2] [3] 8. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the entire paper feed arm
[2] from the paper feed shaft [3].
[1] fd501fs2018c
F-229
[4] [3] [2] [1] 9. Remove the spacer [1].

10. Remove the actuator [2].
fd501fs2019c
[3] [2] [1] 13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].
15. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
fd501fs2020c
[1] 16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the paper feed
[2] rubber [2].
[3] 17. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
Note
fd501fs2021c
• Number 261 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 204 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 236 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 203 (C1100, C1085)
16.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

• Separation rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Perform steps 1 to 4 of "F.16.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit/Up.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] 4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire roller shaft from
the mounting plate while you press the separation roller assy [4]
against the front gear [5].
Note
• Pins are employed on the inside of the separation roller
assy [4] and the gear [5] respectively. When you remove
them, be careful that these pins do not get lost. Leave the
C-clip [6] on the front side of the gear as it is and press
[3] [4] [5] [6] fd501fs2022c the roller onto the gear, so that it prevents the pins from
dropping off.
F-230
[1] [2] 5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the separation roller
[2] and replace it.
• Number 260 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 203 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 235 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 202 (C1100, C1085)
fd501fs2023c
16.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)

• Pick-up rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
Note
• A shaft fixing screw is inserted when you remove the PI tray/Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing screw from the PI tray/Up
after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller/Lw. Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the PI
tray/Up damage to the PI section.
[2] [3] 1. Make sure that the PI lift plate/Up [1] has come down fully. If it has
not come down completely, conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up:
70-11, PI/Lw: 70-13) in the service mode.
2. Perform steps 1 to 4 of "F.16.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit/Up.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate/Up [3].
[2]
[1] fd501fs2024c
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in the shaft fixing
[1] hole [2].
Note
• Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until its stem
section disappears completely.
• After completion of the replacement of the pick-up rubber
(lower stage), be sure to remove the shaft fixing screw [1]
from the position [2] and get it back to the position [1].
Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted
to the position [2] damage to the PI section.
[2] fd501fs2025c
F-231
[5] [3] [1] [2] 5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the separation roller unit
[1] and the PI tray/Up [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI tray/Up [3].
Note
• When you remove the PI tray/Up [2], be sure to pull it
diagonally up to the left.
[4] [4] fd501fs2026c
[3] 8. Disconnect the connector [1].

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit/Lw [3].
10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the pick-up rubber (upper
[1] stage) (steps 4 to 25). (Refer to F.16.6.1 Replacing the pick-up
rubber (Upper stage))
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
[2] [2]
Note
• When you install the PI tray/Up, be sure to remove the
shaft fixing screw and get it back to the original position.
fd501fs2027c
• Number 262 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 205 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 204 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, and C70hc)
• Number 237 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 204 (C1100, C1085)
16.6.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

• Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.16.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)."
2. The subsequent operations are the same as the operations for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (Refer to F.16.6.2 Replacing the
paper feed rubber (Upper stage))
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
• Number 264 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 207 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 239 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 206 (C1100, C1085)
16.6.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

• Separation rubber
: Every 2,200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 counts (special parts counter)) *1
: Every 2,250,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 counts (special parts counter)) *2
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
F-232
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.16.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Lower stage)."
2. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate/2 [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the separation rubber
(upper stage) (steps 2 to 6). (Refer to F.16.6.3 Replacing the
separation rubber (upper stage)
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
[2] • Number 263 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 206 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
fd501fs2028c
• Number 205 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, and C70hc)
• Number 238 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 205 (C1100, C1085)
F-233
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE SD-50...

CAUTION
17.2 Right angle conveyance section

17.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)
• Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove SD from the main body.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c028na
[4] [5] [3] [6] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller release solenoid/
1 (SD5) [3].
Note
• When you install the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5]
is hitched to the plunger [4].
• Install it with the wiring harness [6] that is located on the
guide plate side.
[2] [1]
15anf2c029na
5. While you pull the plunger [1], temporarily hold the new roller
[2] release solenoid/1 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value.
Then fully tighten the screws.
a
Standard value "a": 0 mm to 0.5 mm
• Number 288 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 226 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[1] • Number 239 (C8000)
• Number 270 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
15anf2c030nb
• Number 236 (C1100, C1085)

F-234
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
15anf2c031na

2 (SD6) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to check that the pin [5] has
been inserted into the hole on the plunger [4].
guide plate side.
[1] [6] [2] [3] [4] [5]

15anf2c032na
5. While you pull the plunger [1], temporarily hold the new roller
[2]
release solenoid/2 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value.
a Then fully tighten the screws.
Standard value "a": 0 mm to 0.5 mm
• Number 271 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 237 (C1100, C1085)
[1]
15anf2c033nb
17.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

• Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door/Rt and then remove the screw [1].
3. Remove the hex wrench (short, #2.5) from the trimmer section.
(Refer to F.17.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit)
15anf2c057na
F-235
[3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2] and then remove the belt
[3].
[4]
15anf2c058na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c059nb
[4] [8] [3] 8. Pull the spring [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and release it,
and then open the right angle conveyance guide plate [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the spring [3], hook the long arm [6] on
the position between the frame and the E-ring [7] of the
jam release handle shaft and insert the tip of the short arm
[3] into the hole [8].
[1] [2] [6] [7] [5]

15anf2c130ca
F-236
[1] [3] [3] [1]

9. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the entrance conveyance
unit [2].
Note
• When you reinstall, press it against 2 positioning pins [3]
and then tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c060na
10. Check point when you reinstall the entrance conveyance unit
[1] [2]
Note
• As the positioning pin [1] has anti-drop grooves, be sure
to insert it fully before you tighten the screw.
a0h2t3c043ca

[3] [2] [1]
12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
[3] and the plunger [4].
[4] a0h2t3c044ca
F-237
13. Standard value when you reinstall the entrance gate solenoid
[4]
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to conduct in the following
[2] [1]
conditions before you tighten the screw [4]; with the
plunger of the entrance gate solenoid not being pulled,
the gap between the entrance gate [1] and the guide plate
[2] is at a standard value "a". With the plunger of the
entrance gate solenoid being pulled, the gap between the
a
entrance gate [1] and the guide plate [3] is at a standard
value "b".
Standard value
b a: 2.0 mm ± 0.3 mm
b: 5.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
[3]
a0h2t3c051ca
[6] [5] [2] [4] [3] 14. Disconnect the connector [1].
16. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out the arm [4] from the shaft [5] in
the arrow-marked direction [6]. Then remove the right angle
conveyance gate solenoid assy [7].
Note
• When you reinstall the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy, press the arm [4] against the D-cut of the
shaft [5] and then tighten the screws [2].
[1] [7]
a0h2t3c045ca
17. Standard value when you reinstall the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy
[1] Note
• While you pull the plunger [1], adjust the position so that
the clearance "a" between the right angle conveyance
gate [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a".
Then fully tighten the screws [4].
[4] Standard value a: 4.8 mm ± 0.5 mm
[3]
[2]
a0h2t3c052ca
F-238
18. Remove 2 screws [1], mounting plate [2], arm [3], plunger [4], and
[7] [2] [4] [3] the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [5].
Note
• When you install the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid, make sure that the wires [6] are located on the
other side of the hole [7] in the mounting plate [2].
• Number 272 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 238 (C1100, C1085)
[1] [5] [6]

a0h2t3c046ca

(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt and front door/Lt.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].
15anf2c157ca
[2] [6] [3] [1]

3 (SD7) [3].
Note
• When you install the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5]
is hitched to the plunger [4].
guide plate side.
[4] [5]
15anf2c158ca
F-239
5. While you pull the plunger [1] and slightly tighten the new roller
release solenoid/3, adjust the position so that the gap between the
paper feed surface [2] of the guide plate and the roller surface [3]
falls within the standard value. Then secure the roller release
solenoid/3.
Standard value "a": 1.3 mm to 1.8 mm
[1]
• Number 288 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[3] • Number 226 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[2] a • Number 239 (C8000)
• Number 270 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
15anf2c159ca
• Number 236 (C1100, C1085)
17.3 Saddle stitching section

17.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy
• Stapler assy
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000,
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front door/Lt. (Refer to G.16.3.8 Front door/Lt)
[1]
2. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the back side of the stapler, and
release the wires on the stapler side from the clamps.
15anf2c034na
[3] [2] 4. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
5. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
6. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
Note
• When you move the stapler Assy, be sure to rotate the
rotating knob [3] first to prevent the belt tooth from
skipping. Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
[1] 15anf2c035na
F-240
7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.
[4]
8. Move the stapler/Lt [2] and stapler/Rt [3] forward, and then remove
the pins [4], 2 for each, from each 2 holes [5] on each stapler.
[5] Then remove the stapler/Lt and stapler/Rt downward.
[1] [1]
[2] [3]
a0h2t3c047ca
9. Check point when you remove or reinstall the stapler/Lt

Note
• When you remove or reinstall the stapler/Lt, be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [6].
[6]
a0h2t3c048ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf2c038na

Note
• When you reinstall the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
12. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c039na
F-241
[3] [4] 13. Remove 2 screws [1] each and then remove the 2 connector
covers [2].
Note
• When you remove the connector covers, while you lift up
the clincher/Lt [3] and clincher/Rt [4].
[1]
[1] [2] 15anf2c040na
[5] [4] [6] 14. Remove each 1 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2].
Note
• When you install the grounds, place the wiring harness on
the lower side and fasten the grounds with screws.
15. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].

16. Remove 2 screws [4] each, and then remove the clincher/Lt [5]
and clincher/Rt [6].
Note
• When you install the clinchers, slide them down
completely, and secure them with screws.
[3] [1]
[1] [3] [2] 15anf2c041na
17. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[3] from the clincher [2].
[3] [1] [2] 15anf2c042na
[4] [5] 18. Reinstall the connector following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the wiring harness [4], be sure to wire
the wiring harness to the guide (white) side [5] of the
clincher as you can see in the figure [6].
Do not route the wiring harness to the rear side as you
can see in the figure [7]. Otherwise, the wiring harness
possibly breaks at the clincher operation.
19. Adjust the mounting position of the staplers and the clinchers.
(Refer to F.17.3.1.(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting
position)
• Number 284, 285 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[6]
• Number 222, Number 223 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 234, Number 235 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc,
and C6000)
• Number 265, 266 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[7] 15anf2c043na
F-242
• Number 234, 235 (C1100, C1085)
(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position

[7] [7] 1. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2], and then
check the step edges [4] of the staplers are aligned with the edges
[5] of the clincher in the sub scan direction [6].
Standard value: 0 ± 0.5 mm
2. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[7] each and move the staplers in the sub scan direction for the
adjustment while you rotate the screw [1] counterclockwise to
make the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten
the screws [7].
3. Tighten the screw [1] clockwise until it clicks to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the stapler [3] and lock it. Make sure that the
standard surface of the stapler [8] is located in the rear side in the
[11] [11] main scan direction [10] as compared to the inside plate inner
surface [9] of the clincher.
[4] [6] [10]
Standard value "a": 0.2 mm to 0.3 mm
4. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[8]
A [11] each and move the staplers in the main scan direction for the
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [11].
[9]
Note
a
• After the reinstallation, perform the saddle stitching and
check that the stapling is performed without any problem.
• After the adjustment, be sure to perform the adjustment
between the fold line position and the staple position, and
also the tilt adjustment and the gap adjustment of the
clincher.
[5]
(Refer to I.20.4 Staple position adjustment), (Refer to I.20.6
A
Section A Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher)
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c063nc
17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit

• Slope unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the motor cover [2].
[1] 15anf2c018na
F-243
[1] 2. Remove 2 connectors [1].
15anf2c019na
[2] 3. Hold the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the fulcrum
shaft [2], push them to the rear simultaneously and move the
bundle arms [1] approximately 30 mm.
Note
• When you rotate the bundle arm [1] manually, be sure to
rotate it gently with both hands because the belts on both
sides simultaneously activate the bundle. Otherwise, it
causes the belt tooth skipping.
• Never hold the tip of the bundle arm [1] and rotate it. Be
sure to hold the bundle arm [1] in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2] and rotate it. It causes the deformation.
[1] 15anf2c020na
[2] [4] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3] of the slope unit [1] from the
bottom and top respectively, and then remove the slope unit [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the slope, be sure to align 2
positioning projections [4].

reverse.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c022na
F-244
17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.16.3.8 Front door/Lt)
2. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
3. Remove the wire [1] from the screw [2].
Note
• When you remove the 2nd wire [1], hold it with hands and
prevent the horizontal conveyance guide plate/Lt [3] from
falling.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c014na
[1] [2] [1] 4. Move 2 pins [1] to the direction of the arrow to the notch [2] and
release the fixing. Then, remove the horizontal conveyance guide
plate/Lt [3].
Note
• Before you reinstall the horizontal conveyance guide
plate/Lt [3], adjust the position of the fix shaft [4] and
move the pin [1] from the notch.
[4] [3] [4] 15anf2c015na
5. Remove the screw [1] and move the wiring harness cover [4] to the
rear side. Remove the pin [2] from the hole [3], and then remove
the wiring harness cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
15anf2c016na
F-245
[1]
15anf2c017na
[1]
15anf2c069na
[1] [6] [1] 8. Hold the position of the bundle arm [1] near the fulcrum shaft [2].
Move it to the inside [3] slowly, and then remove the guide shaft [4]
from the hole of the shock absorbing guide [5].
Note
• When you narrow the distance of the bundle arms [1], be
sure to move them evenly and slowly.
• When you reinstall, check that the guide shaft [4] is in the
hole of the shock absorbing guide [5].
9. Rotate the bundle arm [1] to the guide plate [6] on the stapler side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4] [5]
[3]
[5] [4] [2] [1] 15anf2c021na
F-246
[1] [2] [1] 10. Remove 6 screws (with a washer for each) [1]. Hold shafts [2] and
pull out the saddle stitch unit [3].
Note
• When you pull out, be careful not to let the removed
connector touch the SD main body and cut the wiring
harness.

reverse.
[1]
[1] [2] [3] 15anf2c024nb
17.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit

Note
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the saddle stitching unit is heavy.

• Saddle stitch unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[3] [4] [5] 1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove the saddle
stitching unit [5] with 2 people by holding the shafts [3] and [4]
while lift up the shaft [3] slightly and shift the saddle stitching unit
to the front side.
Note
• Be sure to hold the saddle stitching unit at the shafts [3]
and [4].
• When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, check that the
unit is surely placed on the rails [6] before releasing the
unit.

reverse.
[1] [2]
[6]
[1] 15anf2c025na
17.4 Bundle processing section

17.4.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear
• Bundle press stage gear
: Every 20,250,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter) (number of set of
sheets exited to the bundle tray) *2)
*2 Spotted replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000,
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
F-247
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
[2]
• Rear cover/Lt (Refer to G.16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
• Left cover (Refer to G.16.3.4 Left cover)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
• When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
• Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
3. Move the bearing [6] and bearing [7], and then remove the E-ring
[5] and move the gear [8] to the back side.
[8] [7] [3]
[4] [1]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t3c028ca

[2] [3] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the bundle press stage up
down motor (M24).
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pin [3] as it drops off when you
remove the gear [2].
a0h2t3c029ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bundle press stage
gear [2] and 2 bearings [3] on both sides of the gear.
Note
• After you replace the bundle press stage gear [2], be sure
to apply plas guard Number 2 to the gear.

• Number 291 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 229 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 273 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 239 (C1100, C1085)
[1] [2] [3] a0h2t3c030ca
F-248
17.4.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit

• Bundle press stage unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter) (number of set of sheets exited to the
bundle tray)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[2]
• Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.16.3.3 Rear cover/Rt)
• Trimmer unit (Refer to F.17.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
• When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
• Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[3]
[4] [1] a0h2t3c031ca

4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from the clamp [3], and then pull it
[1] out from the hole [4] by following the arrow.
Note
[2] • When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring
[5] [4] [3] harness [2] with the trimmer unit plate [5].
a0h2t3c032ca
F-249
5. Remove 1 each of the screws at 2 places and remove 1 each of
[1] [2] [4]
the up-down wire [2], and then take it out to the front side of the
machine from the trimmer unit plate [3] by following the arrow.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to lubricate Molykote
EM-30L to each 2 shafts [4].
6. Remove 8 screws [5] and then remove the trimmer unit plate [3].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the trimmer scraps guide [6].
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the projection [7].
[7] [3]
[5][6][5]
a0h2t3c033ca
7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wiring harness [2]
[3] [1]
from the clamp [3], and then take it out from the hole [4] of the
metal plate to the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the bracket [6].
9. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the guide plate [8].
[5] [6] [2] [4]
[7] [8]
a0h2t3c034ca
F-250
[1] [3] [2]
11. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the bundle registration
motor (M12) [3].
13. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the bundle press
movement motor (M17) [6].
[6] [5]
[4]
a0h2t3c035ca
14. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[1] [2] [3] [3].
15. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [5] and the pin
[6].
[4] [5] [6] a0h2t3c036ca
F-251
16. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].
[2] [6] [3] [4]
17. Cut the wire binding bands [2] and [3] and remove the wiring
harness [4].
Note
• Be sure to let the wire binding bands [2] and [3] into the
shaft hole [5] and install the wire retaining band [6] on the
[2] side between the bands [2] and [3].
[5]
[1]
a0h2t3c037ca
18. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1].

[7] [5][10] [6] [2] [3] [4] 19. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wire mounting plate/Lt
[3].
Note
• Since the wire/Lt [4] has the tension of the spring, be sure
to remove 2 screws [2] with keeping the wire mounting
plate/Lt [3] and lift it up until the tension is released, and
then take it off gently.
[8] 20. Loosen the screws [5] and pull the wire mounting plate/Rt [6]
downward to move it to the opposite side of the shaft [7], and then
remove it to the space between the side plate [8] and the timing
belt [9].
Note
• Since the wire/Rt [10] has the tension of the spring, be
sure to lift up the wire mounting plate/Rt [6] until the
tension is released, and then take it off gently.
[9] [1]
a0h2t3c038ca
21. Check point when you reinstall the wire

Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the wire [1] on 2
pulleys [2].
[1] [2] a0h2t3c039ca
F-252
22. Push the bundle paper exit tray [1] fully to the back.
[6] 23. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and then remove 2 bearings [3] and the drive
shaft [4].
24. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and then remove the bearings [6].
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
a0h2t3c040ca
25. While keep holding the bundle paper exit assist roller [1]
[3] [2] [1]
horizontally, push the bundle press stage unit [3] to the back with
holding the shaft [2] to release the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper
exit assist roller arm from the regulation bracket [5]. After the
release, put down the bundle paper exit assist roller [1] gently.
Note
• Once the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller
arm is removed from the regulation bracket [5], the bundle
paper exit assist roller drops off. Therefore, be sure to
hold it with hands.
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the roller pin [4] under
the regulation bracket [5].
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c041ca
26. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1] to about half.
[4]
Note
• If the bundle paper exit tray [1] is pulled out too much, the
bundle press stage unit [2] drops off from the tray.
27. Pull out the bundle press stage unit [2] to the position in the picture
with holding the bundle press section [3]. Then, pull it out more to
the back with paying the attention to the contacting places [5], [6],
and [7] on the right side, and remove the arm [8].
Note
• After the installation, rotate the jam cleaning knob and be
sure to check that the bundle press stage unit goes up
[2] [3] [8] [1] and down horizontally.
[5]
[6]
[7]
a0h2t3c042ca
F-253
17.5 Trimmer section

17.5.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy
(1) Procedure
[1] • Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Push the scraps box all the way inside.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer scraps guide
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, check that the scraps box is
inserted all the way and stretch the trimmer scraps guide
[2] tight. When the scraps box is not inserted all the way
and you stretch the trimmer scraps guide, the trimmer
scraps guide is possibly damaged during the operation.
[2] a0h2t3c009ca
4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer paddle assy
[1] [2].
reverse.
[2] a0h2t3c010ca
17.5.2 Replacing the trimmer board assy

• Trimmer board assy
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 18,900 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
F-254
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[7] [1]
Note
• By the output check code "71-97" in the I/O check mode in
the service mode, move the trimmer press board to the
position where the trimmer board is released.
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
(SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug from the power
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.17.5.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
5. Pull the trimmer board assy [1] horizontally to the back side and
remove it.
[4] Note
[3] • When you reinstall it, aligning the slit [2] of the trimmer
[5]
board assy [1] with the pin [3] and insert it between the
trimmer press plate [4] and the hold plate [5].
• When you insert it, be careful not to bend the guide sheet
[6].
• When you push it into the machine, be sure to push the
[6] movement arm receiver [7] and insert it horizontally.
[2]
a0h2t3c017ca
6. Clean the bottom surface of the actuator [1] and the top surface [2]
[1] of the trimmer blade retaining plate which contacts to the bottom
surface.
Note
• When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing differs
and a trimming fault occurs.

8. Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter.
Note
• Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter by
the output check code "71-95" of the I/O check mode of
[2] a0h2t3c067ca the service mode.
• If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid
operating timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing (700/500/300 times
of trimming). (In the first operation only)
• After you replace the trimmer board, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without any problem.
• Number 287 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 225 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 261 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 230 (C1100, C1085)
17.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit

WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you hold the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
• Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
• Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
F-255
[2]
[1] a0h2t3c011ca

• Trimmer blade kit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 37,500 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[3] [2] [1]
Note
• Move the trimmer board to the trimmer press upper limit
sensor (PS52) by the output check code ""71-56" in the I/O
check mode in the service mode.
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.17.5.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
6. Loosen the screws [2] and [3].
[6] WARNING
[7]
• Do not loosen the screws [2] and [3] too much, or the
trimmer blade drops during the operation. Keep the
[4] loosening amount of the screws [2] and [3] to a minimum
requirement for removing the trimmer blade [4].
7. Hold the screws [2] and [3] and slightly lift the screw [3] side. Then
[5] move the trimmer blade [4] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to pull
a0h2t3c012ca
out from the hole [5], and remove it.
8. Put the trimmer blade [4] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade [4].
Never touch the edge [7] of the blade. You get injured.
F-256
9. Insert the #2.5 hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the
[1] [2]
trimmer blade, and then slide it from the right [3] to the left [4]
(viewed from the operator) to clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
• Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
• To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
[5] • The bottom of the slit of the left side [4] (viewed from the
operator) is curved in the same manner as the blade [5].
Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
10. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[4] [3]
a0h2t3c013ca
11. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
[4]
about a half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
• Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
• Install the brand-new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade kit.
[3] [1] [2]
a0h2t3c014ca
12. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade kit and put
the cover on the old trimmer blade.
13. Hold 2 screws [2] of the new trimmer blade and insert it to the hole
[3]. Then insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[2]
[4]
a0h2t3c015ca
F-257
14. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 screws [1]
[1][2] [4] [6]
and [2] downward [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the
bottom, and then press it to the right side [5] (viewed from the
operator).
15. Tighten 2 screws [1] and [2] with the #3 hex wrench [6].
WARNING
• When you tighten 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them
[7] temporarily with the torque that bends the tip of the #3
hex wrench [6] approximately 5 degrees [7]. Then fully
[8]
tighten them with the strong torque that bends it
approximately 15 degrees [8].
Note
• Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.
[3] [5]
Note
• After you replace the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
performed without any problem.
[2] [1]
a0h2t3c016ca • Number 286 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 224 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 260 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 229 (C1100, C1085)
17.5.4 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

• Trimmer press motor (M32)
: Every 20,250,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc,
C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.17.5.6 Replacing the trimming
[2] [3] [6] [4] [2]
unit)
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to tighten 4 screws [2] after
you make the tension of the spring [3] over the mounting
plate [4].
4. Remove 4 screws [6] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[5], and then remove it from the belt [7].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the trimmer press
motor (M32) [5] into the round hole [8].
[7] [8] [6]
[5] [1]
a0h2t3c022ca
F-258
5. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
[1] [2] trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
• Number 292 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 230 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 262 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 231 (C1100, C1085)
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
17.5.5 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

• Trimmer blade motor (M31)
: Every 30,000,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 850,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2)
• Trimmer blade motor (M31)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)*3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and
C1085
*3 Actual replacement cycle of 1250/1250P/1052
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[2] [2]
• Trimmer scraps guide (Refer to F.17.5.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the jig for supporting trimmer unit and then
remove the anti-drop bracket [2].
F-259
4. Align the edge of the jig for supporting trimmer unit [1] with the
[4] [2] [3] [1]
corner [4] of the trimmer unit that is based on the hole [2] of the jig
for supporting trimmer unit [1].

Note
• When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring
harness with the metal plate.
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the stopper [3].

7. Reinstall the anti-drop bracket [5] with 2 screws [4] which have
been removed in step 3.
DANGER:
• Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper [3] is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
[4]
[6]
[5] [6]
F-260
9. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[1] from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
[3] [4] 10. Hold the lower edges [2] of the trimmer unit [1] and pull out the
trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [3] touch to the anti-
drop brackets [4].
Note
• Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
[1] like the electrical parts.
[2]
11. Hold the lower right [2] of the trimmer unit [1], turn it around the
[1] [3]
engaging [3] of the stopper and the anti-drop bracket, and then put
the trimmer unit [1] on the jig for supporting trimmer unit [4].
[2] [4]
[1] a0h2t3c024ca
F-261
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
[1] [2] [1] (M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the wiring harness [3]
comes in the position as you can see in the picture.
[3] a0h2t3c025ca
14. Check point when you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
15. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].
• Number 298 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 231 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 263 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 232 (C1100, C1085)
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[1]
[1] 3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
(M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the wiring harness [3]
comes in the position as you can see in the picture.
[3] [2]
F-262
4. Check point when you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].

• Number 293 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 231 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 263 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 270 (C1100, C1085)
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
17.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.

• Trimmer unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit

[2] [2]
• Trimmer paddle assy (Refer to F.17.5.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
F-263
[2] [1] [2]
Note
harness with the metal plate.

5. Hold the configuration parts [3] of the trimmer unit and pull out the
trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [4] and [5] touch to
the anti-drop brackets [6] and [7].
[5] [7] [6] [4]
[3]
a0h2t3c019ca
(3) Removing and reinstalling the trimmer unit

1. Conduct by the step 4 of the procedure for pulling out the trimmer
[1] unit (Refer to F.17.5.6.(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer
unit)
DANGER:
• Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.

from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
3. Remove each 2 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove the
[1] [3] [2] [1]
stopper/1 [2] and stopper/2 [3].
4. Hold the configuration parts [5] and pull out the trimmer unit [4] to
the back side.
Note
• Lift the trimmer unit [4] slightly and remove or reinstall it.
Be sure to avoid the projection [6] that prevents the falling
off on the trimmer unit plate.
• Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
like the electrical parts.
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because
the trimmer unit is heavy.

• Number 294 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 234 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[5] [4] [5] • Number 233 (C8000)
• Number 264 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 233 (C1100, C1085)
[6]
a0h2t3c021ca
F-264
17.5.7 Lubricating the trimmer unit

• Paper holding screw
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
: Every 1,500,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 counts (Special parts counter)) *2*3
• Drive gear/3, drive gear/4
: Every 20,250,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *2
*1 C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C1100, and C1085
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gear/3 [2] and drive gear/4
[3].
Note
• When you apply the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]
a0h2t3c060ca
F-265
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[3] 1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.17.5.6.(2) Procedure for
pulling out the trimmer unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gear/3 [2] and drive gear/4
[3].
Note
• When you apply the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[1]
F-266

CAUTION
18.2 Entrance conveyance section

18.2.1 Replacing the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102)
• Reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102): Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.17.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2] to remove
the reverse exit roller pressure release motor assy [3].
[2] [1] [3] [4] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102) [2].
Note
• When you install the reverse exit roller pressure release
motor (M102) [2], apply Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of
the motor.

reverse.
5. After you replace the reverse exit roller pressure release motor
(M102), conduct the following item.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 409 (1250/1250P/
1052)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 387 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.2.2 Cleaning of the paper re-feed roller/Lt

• Paper re-feed roller/Lt
: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1*2
: Every 700,000 counts (total counter) *3
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the slitter unit. (Refer to G.19.3.2 Slitter unit)
2. Clean the paper re-feed roller/Lt [1] with the isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
18.2.3 Cleaning of the reverse exit roller/Rt

• Reverse exit roller/Rt
F-267

*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the creaser unit. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Creaser unit)
[1] 2. Clean the reverse exit roller/Rt [1] with the isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
18.3 Folding conveyance section

18.3.1 Replacing the 1st folding knife motor (M13)
• 1st folding knife motor (M13): Every 1,700,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.17.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove the left cover/Rr. (Refer to G.17.3.6 Left cover/Rr)
4. Release the clamp [1].
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the 1st folding knife motor
assy [3].
F-268
Note
[2] • When you install the 1st folding knife motor assy, be sure
to check that the timing belt [2] is engaged to the gear [1]
of the motor.
• When you install the 1st folding knife motor assy, move
the 1st folding knife away from the folding roller.
[1]
[2] [1] 6. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the 1st folding knife motor (M13) [2].
reverse.
8. After you replace the 1st folding knife motor (M13), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[1] [3]
18.3.2 Replacing the 2nd folding knife motor (M14)

• 2nd folding knife motor (M14): Every 1,500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[5] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.17.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
2. Remove the sub tray cover. (Refer to G.17.3.10 Upper cover/
RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness from
[2] the clamp [2].
Note
[1] • When you remove the screw [3], be careful not to drop the
2nd folding knife drive assy [4].
5. Release the claw [5], and remove the 2nd folding knife drive assy
[4].
[3]
[4]
F-269
[4] Note
• When you install the 2nd folding knife drive assy [1], pull
out the arm [2] in the arrowed direction. Hang the claw [5]
on the hole of the metal plate [6] while the 2nd folding
knife [3] is released from the nip of the folding roller [4].
If the 2nd folding knife drive assy is installed with the 2nd
folding knife [3] nipped, the 2nd folding knife [3] could be
distorted.
• When you tighten 5 screws [7], check that the drive
section of the 2nd folding knife drive assy [1] keeps the
arm [2] with the arm pulled out in the arrowed direction.
If you adjust the position of the 2nd folding knife drive
[1] [2] [3] assy [1] after you hang the claw [5] on the hole of the
metal plate [6], the 2nd folding knife [3] could drop off by
its own weight and nipped by the folding roller [4].
[5][6]
[7]
[3] [1] [2] 6. Release the clamp [1].

7. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the 2nd folding knife motor
assy [3].
F-270
Note
[2] • When you reinstall the 2nd folding knife motor assy, be
sure to check the belt [2] is engaged to the gear [1] of the
motor.
[1]
[3] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the 2nd folding knife motor (M14) [2].
reverse.
10. After you replace the 2nd folding knife motor (M14), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[1] [2]
18.3.3 Cleaning of the half-folding roller, tri-folding roller

• Tri-folding roller
• Half-folding roller
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Open the sub tray. (Refer to G.17.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /
RrLt3, sub tray cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and release the wiring harness [2] from the
clamp. Then, remove the folding roller guide home sensor assy [3].
Note
• The folding roller guide home sensor assy [3] is
connected to SD-513 with the wiring harness [2].
When you remove the folding roller guide home sensor
assy [3], be careful not to damage the wiring harness [2].
[2] [1] [3]
F-271
3. Clean the tri-folding roller [1] and 2 half-folding rollers [2] with the
isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
[1] [2]
18.3.4 Lubrication to the front stopper shaft

(1) Periodic lubrication parts/cycle
• Front stopper shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the sub tray cover. (Refer to G.17.3.10 Upper cover/
[1] RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 4 places of the front stopper shaft [1].
reverse.
18.4 Sub tray, tri-folding tray section

18.4.1 Cleaning the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3
• Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.17.3.11 Opening and closing
of the front console)
2. Rotate the lever [1] and open the jam processing guide [2].
[1] [2]
F-272
[1]
4. Open the conveyance guide [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
5. While you lift the rear side of the conveyance guide [1], open the
conveyance guide [1] further to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
6. Clean the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 [1] with isopropyl
alcohol and a cleaning pad.
reverse.
[1]
18.5 Saddle stitching section

18.5.1 Replacing the staple unit
• Staple unit: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
For the replacement procedure of the staple unit, be sure to refer to "I.21.5 Staple adjustment". Then, be sure to perform the replacement of
the staple unit and staple adjustment at the same time.
After you replace the staple unit, be sure to conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 402 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 381 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 330 (C1100, C1085)
18.5.2 Replacing the clincher

• Clincher: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-273
(2) Procedure
For the replacement procedure of the clincher, refer to "I.21.5 Staple adjustment". Then perform the replacement of the clincher and the
stapler adjustment at the same time.
After you replace the clincher, be sure to conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 403 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 395 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 344 (C1100, C1085)
18.5.3 Replacing the booklet holding motor (M17)

• Booklet holding motor (M17): Every 1,200,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, and
remove 2 screws [2]. Then remove the booklet holding motor assy
[3].
[4] [1] [2] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the booklet holding motor (M17) [2].
Note
• When you install the booklet holding motor (M17) [2],
apply Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

reverse.
5. After you replace the booklet holding motor (M17), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.5.4 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate/Rr

• Saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Rr
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
[2] [1] cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal plate [2].
F-274
3. Apply the MH Surf at the 2 places of the saddle stitching alignment
[1] plate shaft/Rr [1].
reverse.
18.5.5 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr

• Saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.17.3.11 Opening and closing
2. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the saddle stitching alignment
plate shaft/Fr [1].
reverse.
18.5.6 Replacing the conveyance guide assy/Up

• Conveyance guide assy/Up: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)

[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/frLt1. (Refer to G.17.3.9 Upper cover/
FrLt1, /FrLt2)
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the conveyance guide assy/Up
[2].
[1]
[2]
F-275

[1] 1. Fasten the conveyance guide assy/Up [2] temporarily with 3
screws [1].
2. Tighten 3 screws [1] at the position where the apex [3] of
conveyance guide/Lw matches the apex [4] of the conveyance
guide assy/Up.
3. After you replace the conveyance guide assy/Up, conduct the
following step.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 433 (1250,
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[1] C1085)
[2] [3][4]
18.5.7 Replacing the alignment plate solenoid wiring

• Alignment plate solenoid wiring: Every 1,200,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the wiring cover [2].
[2] [1]
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the solenoid cover [2].
[2] [1]
F-276
4. Remove the connector [1], and release the alignment plate
solenoid wiring from the clamp.
5. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the cover [3].
Note
• When you install the cover [3], be sure not to catch the
alignment plate solenoid wiring between the cover [3] and
the metal plate.
[3] [2] [1]

6. Remove the wiring band [1] from the metal plate [2].
7. Release the alignment plate solenoid wiring from the hole [4] and
the clamp.
[3] [2] [1] [4]

8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the cover [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[1] [2]
10. Release the alignment plate solenoid wiring [2] from the clamp and
remove the alignment plate solenoid wiring.
reverse.
12. After you replace the alignment plate solenoid wiring, conduct the
following step.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[2] [1] C1085)
18.6 Booklet movement section

18.6.1 Lubrication to the booklet movement unit slide shaft
• Booklet movement unit slide shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
F-277
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] of the front console)
2. Hold the metal plate [1], and pull out the booklet movement unit [2]
to the trimmer unit side.
3. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the booklet movement unit slide

[1] shaft [1].
reverse.
18.6.2 Lubrication to the booklet holding unit slide shaft

• Booklet hold unit slide shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] of the front console)
2. Hold the metal plate [1], and pull out the booklet movement unit [2]
to the trimmer unit side.
F-278
3. Pull out the booklet holding unit [1] to the trimmer unit side.
[1] 4. Apply MH surf at 2 places of the booklet holding unit slide shaft [2].
reverse.
[2]
18.6.3 Lubrication to the booklet set unit slide shaft

• Booklet set unit slide shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] of the front console)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 4 places of the booklet set unit slide shaft [1].
reverse.
18.7 Clamp section

18.7.1 Replacing the fore edge stopper motor (M24)
• Fore edge stopper motor (M24): Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.17.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the fore edge stopper motor
assy [3].
F-279
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the fore edge stopper motor
(M24) [2].
Note
• When you install the fore edge stopper motor (M24) [2],

[1] reverse.
6. After you replace the fore edge stopper motor (M24), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[2] [3]
18.7.2 Replacing the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore-edge finger gear, and the finger torque limiter
• Fore edge finger motor (M52): Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Fore edge finger gear: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Finger torque limiter: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [2] 1. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.17.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 6 screws [2]. While you release the bearing [3], remove
the fore edge finger motor assy [4].
Note
• When you install the fore edge finger motor assy [4], be
sure to match the hole [5] and the bearing [3].
[5] [3]
F-280
[3] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the fore edge finger motor (M52)
[2].
Note
• When you install the fore edge finger motor (M52) [2],
[1]
[1]
[3] [2] 6. Remove E-rings [1] 1 each, spacers [2] 1 each, and bearings [3] 1
each, and remove the finger torque limiter assy [4] in the arrowed
direction.
[4][1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-281
7. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3] and the E-ring [4],
and slide the fore edge finger gear [5] and the finger torque limiter
[6] in the arrowed direction.
8. Remove the pin [7], and remove the fore edge finger gear [5] and
the finger torque limiter [6].
Note
• When you install the fore edge finger gear [5], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the fore edge finger gear [5].

reverse.
10. After you replace the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore edge
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] finger gear, and the finger torque limiter, conduct the following
steps.
• Fore edge finger motor (M52): Counter reset of the special
parts counter No.414 (1250/1250P/1052)
• Fore edge finger gear: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 432 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Finger torque limiter: Counter reset of the special parts counter
number 431 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
parts counter number 392 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
counter number 276 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
number 275 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
parts counter number 341 (C1100, C1085)
counter number 361 (C1100, C1085)
number 360 (C1100, C1085)
18.7.3 Replacing the clamp motor (M23)

• Clamp motor (M23): Every 400,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Replacement procedure when FD-504 is not installed

1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
[3] [2] [4] paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the clamp motor assy [3].
Note
• When you remove the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
that the encoder [4] does not damage the clamp motor
encoder sensor (PS121) [5].
• When you reinstall the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
[1] [5]
F-282
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[4] [3] [1] [2] [3] from the clamp motor (M23) [2].
Note
• When you install the clamp motor (M23) [2], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

reverse.
6. After you replace the clamp motor (M23), conduct the following
item.
(3) Replacement procedure when FD-504 is installed

1. Move the SQF clamp plate to the home position with the output
check 71-94 of the I/O Check Mode.
2. Move the up down position of the lifter plate to the home position
with the output check 71-68 of the I/O check mode.
3. Move the front back position of the lifter plate to the home position
4. Perform the pressure of the SQF clamp plate on output check
71-95 in the IO check mode.
5. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
[1] [3] [2] [4] paper exit unit)
7. Release the wiring harness from 3 clamps [1].
8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the wiring cover [3].
9. Move the SQF roller assy [4] to the arrow-marked direction.
[4] [1] 11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the clamp motor assy [3].
Note
• When you remove the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
• When you reinstall the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
[5] [3] [2]
12. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[4] [3] [1] [2] [3] from the clamp motor (M23) [2].
reverse.
14. After you replace the clamp motor (M23), conduct the following
item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.7.4 Replacing the booklet holding wire/1, booklet holding wire/2 and booklet holding wire/3
• Booklet holding wire/1: Every 1,200,000 counts (Special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
Note
• When you replace the booklet holding wires, be sure not to fold the conveyance guide [1].
F-283
[1]
[3] 1. Open the front console at the maximum. (Refer to G.17.3.11
Opening and closing of the front console)
[1] 2. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.
3. Release the pulley [2], 1 each in the arrow-marked direction [3],
and remove the pulley assy [4], 1 each in the arrow-marked
direction [5].
[4] [2]
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
4. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each, and remove the wire holding [2], 1
[1] each.
[2]
F-284
Note
• When you install the wire holding [1], be sure to align the
projection [2] of the wire holding with the hole [3] of the
metal plate.
[1] [3] [2]

[3] 5. Remove the 3 screws [1], and release the fixing of the wire
retaining plate [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Release the edge [2] of the booklet holding wire from the wire
[2] retaining plate [1].
[1]
F-285
8. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each.
[1]
9. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.17.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
[1] 10. Pull out the shaft [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of the shaft.
F-286
Note
[4] [1] • When you install the shaft [1], be sure to put each wire
into the groove [3] of each pulley [2].
• Be sure not to catch the wire in the gap [4] between
pulleys.
[2][3]
11. Remove the booklet holding wire/1 [2], 1 each, the booklet holding
[1] wire/2 [3], 1 each, and the booklet holding wire/3 [4], 1 each from
the 3 springs [1].
[4] [3] [2]
F-287
reverse.
Note
• The lengths of the booklet holding wire/1 [1], the booklet
holding wire/2 [2], and the booklet holding wire/3 [3] are
different. When you install the booklet holding wire/1 [1],
the booklet holding wire/2 [2], and the booklet holding
wire/3 [3], follow the table to distinguish each wire.
Parts name Length Hook Wire
color color
[3] [2] [1] Booklet holding wire/1 [1] Long Silver Silver
Booklet holding wire/2 [2] Mediu Black Silver
m
Booklet holding wire/3 [3] Short Silver Red
13. After you replace the booklet holding wire/1, the booklet holding
wire/2, and the booklet holding wire/3, conduct the following steps.
• Booklet holding wire/1: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 428 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
counter number 429 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
counter number 430 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[3] [2] [1] [2] [3] • Booklet holding wire/1: Counter reset of the special parts
18.7.5 Replacing the clamp hanging wire

• Clamp hanging wire: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
Note
• Replace the clamp hanging wire only when the FD-504 is installed.
F-288
(2) Procedure
[6] [7] paper exit unit)
3. Lift up the bottom sections [2] of both edges of the clamp unit or
push down the [3] of the square fold unit. This operation adjusts
the height of the square fold unit [4]. Move the square fold unit to
the position where the 2 screw holes of the pulley shaft [6] can be
seen from the 2 holes [5].
4. Install the 2 screws [1] to the 2 screw holes on the pulley shaft [6].
CAUTION
• The strong spring [7] has been installed in the pulley shaft
[6].
Be sure to tighten the screw [1]. If the fixing of the pulley
shaft [6] is released during the replacement, the spring [7]
possibly damages the parts or injury is possibly caused.
[3] [5] [2] [1] [4] [3]
5. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the motor cover [2].

[1]
[1] [2]
6. Remove 1 each of the screws [1], and remove 1 each of the

[1] [2] [2] [1]
rotation levers [2].
F-289
7. Attach the rotation lever [1] to the pulley shaft [2].
[1] [2]
8. Rotate the rotation lever [1] 180 degrees or more to the arrow-
[1] [2][3] [3]
marked direction. Then, fix the rotation lever with the screw [2]
which you removed in step 6. Screw hole of the screw [2] is either
of the 2 screw holes [3].
9. Attach the rotation lever [1] to the pulley shaft [2].

[1] [2]
10. Rotate the rotation lever [1] 180 degrees or more to the arrow-
[1] [3] [2][3]
marked direction. Then, fix the rotation lever with the screw [2]
which you removed in step 6. Screw hole of the screw [2] is either
of the 2 screw holes [3].
F-290
11. Release 1 each of the clamp hanging wires [1] from 1 each of the
[1] hooks [2].
Note
• When you install 1 each of the clamp hanging wires [1] to
[2] 1 each of the hooks [2], be sure to use the precision
screwdriver and hook the clamp hanging wires.
[2] [1] 12. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each, and remove the wire holding [2], 1
each.
F-291
13. Remove the screw [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of the clamp
[1] [2] hanging wire [2].
14. Loosen the screws [3], 2 each, and release the fixing of the pulley
[5] retaining plate [4]. Then pull out the clamp hanging wire [2] from
the hole [5].
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2] [3] [1] 15. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.

16. Remove the screw [2], 1 each, and remove the pulley cover [3], 1
each.
F-292
[3] [2] [1] 17. Slide the spacer [1], 1 each, and the pulley [2], 1 each in the
arrow-marked direction, and remove the clamp hanging wire [3], 1
each.
reverse.
Note
• When you install the clamp hanging wire, check that the
clamp hanging wire is caught in the groove of each pulley.
19. After you replace the clamp hanging wire, conduct the following
item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.8 Trimmer section

18.8.1 Replacing the trimmer blade
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when holding the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
• Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
• Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
[1] [2]

• Trimmer blade: Every 37,500 counts (special parts counter)

1. Conduct the home position search of the trimmer press motor
(M32) with the output check 71-82 of the I/O Check Mode. Then,
move the trimmer press board to the home position.
2. Move the trimmer blade to the home position with the output check
71-79 of the I/O Check Mode.
3. Move up the trimmer booklet holding to the home position with the
output check 71-73 of the I/O check mode.
4. Perform the upper limit search of the trimmer press motor (M32)
on the output check 71-81 of the I/O check mode. Move the
trimmer press board to the release position.
[1] [2] [3] outlet.
6. Release the lock mechanism of the trimmer section and open the
front console. (Refer to G.17.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
7. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.18.8.3 Replacing the
trimming unit)
8. Remove the hexagon socket screw [1].
9. Loosen 2 hexagon socket screws [2].
F-293
WARNING
• If you loosen 2 hexagon socket screws [2] too much, the
trimmer blade [3] possibly falls during the operation. Keep
the loosening amount of 2 hexagon socket screws [2] to a
minimum requirement for removing the trimmer blade [3].
[2] [1] 10. Hold the hexagon socket screw [1] and the hexagon socket screw
[2]. After you pull out the hexagon socket screw [1] a little, slide the
trimmer blade [3] as you pull out from the hole [4] to the direction
of the arrow and remove the trimmer blade.
[3]
[4]
11. Put the trimmer blade [1] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade [1].
Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You possibly get
injured.
[1] [2]
12. Insert the hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer
blade, and then slide the hex wrench from left to right (viewed from
the operator) and clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
• Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
• To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
• The bottom of the slit of the right side [3] (viewed from the
operator) is curved. Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
[3]
13. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[2] [1]
F-294

[2] [4] [3] [1] 1. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
about half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
• Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
• Install the new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade.
2. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade and put that
cover on the old trimmer blade.
[2][4] 3. Hold 2 screws [2] of the new trimmer blade [1] and insert the left
edge of the trimmer blade into the hole [3]. Then insert 2 screws
[2] to the screw grooves [4].
[1]
[3]
4. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press the hexagon
socket screw [1] and 2 hexagon socket screws [2] to the rear side
[3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the rear side. Then press it
to the left side [5] (viewed from the operator).
5. Tighten the hexagon socket screw [1] and 2 hexagon socket
screws [2] with the hex wrench.
WARNING
• When you tighten the screw [1] and 2 screws [2], tighten
them temporarily first. Then, fully tighten them with high
torque.
When the torque is weak, the fixing of the trimmer blade is
possibly released.
[1] [5] [3] [2] [4] Note
• Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.

reverse.
Note
• After replacing the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
performed without problem.
7. After you replace the trimmer blade, conduct the following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
F-295
18.8.2 Replacing the trimmer board

• Trimmer board: Every 18,900 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the home position search of the trimmer press motor
[2] [1] (M32) with the output check 71-82 of the I/O Check Mode. Then,
move the trimmer press board to the home position.
2. Move the trimmer blade to the home position with the output check
71-79 of the I/O Check Mode.
3. Move up the trimmer booklet holding to the home position with the
output check 71-73 of the I/O check mode.
4. Perform the movement to the replacement position of the trimmer
press motor (M32) on the output check 71-84 of the I/O check
mode. Move the trimmer press board to the replacement position.
outlet.
6. Release the lock mechanism of the trimmer section and open the
front console. (Refer to G.17.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
7. Turn the trimmer unit back. (Refer to F.18.8.3 Replacing the
trimming unit)
8. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.18.8.3 Replacing the
trimming unit)
9. Remove the screws [1] 1 each, and then remove the fixing plates
[2] 1 each.
[2] [1]
F-296
10. Release 2 feed racks [2] to the direction of the arrow while you pull
[2] [3] [4] the trimmer board [1]. Then, remove the trimmer board [1].
Note
• When you pull out the trimmer board [1], be sure not to
damage the trimmer board replacement sensor (PS53) [4]
by the actuator [3] of the trimmer board.
[1] [2]
[2] [1] Note

• When you install the trimmer board [1], be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [2].
F-297
Note
[1] [2] • When you install the trimmer board [1], insert it vertically
and straight so that the trimmer board [1] comes inside of
2 hold plates [2].
[1] [2]
11. Clean the actuator [1] and the part [2] of the trimmer blade
[1] retaining plate where the trimmer blade retaining plate touches the
actuator.
Note
• When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing
changes and a trimming fault occurs.

reverse.
Note
• After you replace the trimmer board, perform the saddle
[2] performed without problem.
13. After you replace the trimmer board, conduct the following item.
• Reset the trimmer counter with the output check code "71-78"
of the I/O check mode.
Note
• When the counter is not reset, the trimmer board
moving timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing. (In the first
operation only)

1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit

• Trimmer unit: Every 2,500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.
F-298
1. Open the front console and release the wire. (Refer to G.17.3.11
[2] [1] Opening and closing of the front console)
2. Pull out the trim scrap box [1].
3. Remove the inner box [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the retaining plate assy [2].
[1] [2]
5. Push 2 rails [1] into the inside of SD-513.

[1]
[2] [1] 6. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the trimmer unit cover [2].
F-299
[3] 7. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the fixing plate/Fr [2].
8. Remove 3 screws [3], and remove the fixing plate/Rr [4].
[4]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [2] 9. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the locking material [2].
F-300
[2] 10. Turn the guide plate assy [1] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove 2 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 11. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the guide plate assy [2].
[1] [2] 12. Hold 2 handles [1], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
F-301
[3] [1] [2] Note

• When you perform operations such as a replacement with
the trimmer unit [1] being risen, insert a driver [3] into the
hole [2] to fix the unit so that it does not fall down.
13. Hold the handle [1], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
14. Hold the handle [4], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
[4] marked direction [5].
15. Hold 2 handles [6], and turn the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
[3] [6] [5]
[1] [2] [7]
F-302
[4] 16. Remove screws [1] 1 each, and remove the washers [2] 1 each.
Note
• When you remove screws [1] 1 each, be careful not to lose
washers [2] 1 each.
[1] 17. Remove screws [3] 1 each, and remove the stopper assy [4] 1
[2] each.
[3]
[1][2] [3] [4]

[2] 18. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
19. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the trimmer paddle assy
[3].
Note
• When trimmer scraps wrap around the trimmer paddle
assy [3], be sure to remove the trimmer scraps.
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] 20. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the slide board [2].
F-303
22. Hold 2 handles [2], and raise the trimmer unit [3].
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
23. Hold the handle [1] and the lower position of the front side of the
trimmer unit [2], and hold the handle [3] and the lower position of
the rear side of the unit [4]. Then, remove the trimmer unit [5].
reverse.
25. After you replace the trimmer unit, conduct the following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[2] [1] [5] [4]
18.8.4 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

• Trimmer blade motor (M31): Every 850,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-304
(2) Procedure
trimming unit)
3. Loosen 3 screws [2], and remove the trimmer blade motor assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor assy [3], be
sure to reinstall it so that the wiring harness [4] comes in
the position in the picture.
[3] [2] [4] [1]

Note
[2] [1]
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor assy, be sure
to insert the D-cut [1] on the shaft of the trimmer blade
motor (M31) into the D-cut hole [2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
[3] [2] 4. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2], be
sure to reinstall it so that the label [3] comes in the
position in the picture.

reverse.
6. After you replace the trimmer blade motor (M31), conduct the
following item.
1052)
[1] C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.8.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

• Trimmer press motor (M32): Every 500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
trimming unit)
[1]
F-305
3. Rotate the trimmer unit [1].
[1]
[1] [4] [6] [5] [3] [1] Note
• When you install the trimmer press motor (M32) [2],
tighten 4 screws [1] after you let the tension of the spring
[3] over the mounting plate [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[2], and then remove it from the belt [6].
Note
• When you install the trimmer press motor (M32) [2], be
sure to insert the trimmer press motor (M32) [2] into the
round hole [7].
[5] [2] [7]
6. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
[1] [2] trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
reverse.
8. After you replace the trimmer press motor (M32), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
18.8.6 Lubrication to the press drive screw, the gear

• Gear: Every 500,000 counts (special parts counter)*1
• Press drive screw: Every 37,500 counts (special parts counter)*2
*1 Lubricate the gear at the same time when you replace the trimmer press motor (M32).
*2 Lubricate the press drive screw at the same time when you replace the trimmer blade.
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] 1. Rotate the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.18.8.3 Replacing the trimming
unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the gear [2] from the hole [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to 2 places of the gear [3].
F-306
trimming unit)
5. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to 2 places of the press drive screw
[1].
reverse.
[1]
[1]
18.9 Booklet tray section

18.9.1 Replacing the gripper motor (M26)
• Gripper motor (M26): Every 2,500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [4] [5] [2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the gripper motor assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the gripper motor assy [3], be sure to
check the belt [4] is engaged to the gear [5] of the motor.
[2] [1] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[2].
5. Remove 2 hexagon socket screws [3], and remove the gear [5]
from the gripper motor (M26) [4].
[3] [5] [4]
F-307
[3] reverse.
Note
• When you install the gear [2] to the gripper motor (M26)
[1], install it so that the distance between the leading edge
of the shaft [3] of the gripper motor and the gear is within
the standard value.
Standard value: a = 3.9 ± 0.5 mm
7. After you replace the gripper motor (M26), conduct the following
item.
a 1052)
[2] [1]
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
18.9.2 Lubrication to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr, the gripper paper exit gear/Rr
• Gripper paper exit gear/Fr: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*
• Gripper paper exit gear/Rr: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*
* Lubricate the gripper paper exit gear/Fr and the gripper paper exit gear/Rr at the same time when you replace the fore edge finger motor
(M52).
(2) Procedure
[1] paper exit unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr [1]
and the gripper paper exit gear/Rr [2].
reverse.
[2]
18.9.3 Lubrication to the gripper lock plate

• Gripper lock plate: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*
* Lubricate the gripper lock plate at the same time when you replace the fore edge finger motor (M52).
F-308
(2) Procedure
paper exit unit)
[1] 2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the 2 positions of the gripper lock
plate [1].
reverse.
[1]
18.9.4 Lubrication to the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate
• Shutter slide shaft: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter)*
Shutter slide plate: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter)*
* Lubricate the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate at the same time when you replace the fore edge finger motor (M52).
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit and put it upside down. (Refer
to G.17.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit)
[2] Note
• When you put the gripper paper exit unit upside down, put
it on A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
If you directly put the gripper paper exit unit on a floor or
a desk, the external section of the gripper paper exit unit
is possibly damaged.
[3]
2. Move down the shutter [1]. Apply MH Surf to 2 places to each of
the shutter slide shaft [2] and inside of the shutter slide plate [3].
reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-309
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE CR-101
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CR-101

CAUTION
19.2 Creaser section

19.2.1 Cleaning the crease blade
• Crease blade
: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter)*1*2
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the creaser unit. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Creaser unit)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the conveyance guide [2].
[1] [2]
3. Clean the crease blade [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning
pad.
reverse.
[1]
F-310
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE TU-503
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE TU-503

CAUTION

20.2.1 Cleaning the registration roller
• Registration roller
Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1*2
Every 700,000 counts (total counter) *3
• Registration sensor (PS98)
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the slitter unit. (Refer to G.19.3.2 Slitter unit)
2. Clean the registration roller [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a
cleaning pad.
3. Use the blower brush and clean the registration sensor (PS98) [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
20.2.2 Replacing the registration roller

• Registration driven roller
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Open the open close gate/Up [1].
[1]
F-311
3. Clean the registration driven roller [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a
cleaning pad.
reverse.
[1]
20.3 Slitter section

20.3.1 Lubrication to the slit cutter shaft
• Slit cutter shaft
: Every 1,000,000 counter (total counter)*1*2
: Every 700,000 counter (total counter)*3
*1 1250, 1250P, and 1052
*2 C1070, 1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Displace the slit cutter assy [1] horizontally and clean the slit cutter
shaft [2] with a cleaning pad.
Note
[3] • When you clean the slit cutter shaft [2], clean the slit
cutter shaft groove [3] as well.
• When you clean the slit cutter shaft, do not use alcohol. If
you use alcohol, the oil that is applied on the slit cutter
shaft is removed.
3. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the slit cutter shaft groove [3].
reverse.
[1]
20.3.2 Lubrication to the slit cutter drive gear

• Slit cutter drive gear
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
F-312
(2) Procedure
2. Apply Molykote on the join section [2] of 2 slit cutter drive gears [1].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
20.3.3 Replacing the slit cutter assy/Fr, /Rr

• Slit cutter assy/Fr, slit cutter assy/Rr: Every 750,000 counts (special parts counter)

[1] [2] 1. Remove rotary cutter assy. (Refer to F.20.4.1 Replacing the rotary
cutter assy)
2. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the sensor bracket [2].
Note
[1] • When you install the sensor bracket [1], adjust the gap
between the bottom [2] of the sensor bracket and the
bottom [3] of the conveyance guide/Up within ± 0.5 mm.
[3] [2] [2] [3]
F-313
4. Remove 5 screws [2], and remove the slitter motor assy [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

[1] [2] 5. Remove 2 C-rings [1], and remove 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the gear [2], the pin [3], and
the adjuster ring [4].
[2] [1] [3] [4]

[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 hexagon socket screws [1], and then remove 2 slit
cutter drive gears [2].
[3] [4] [2] [1] 8. Remove the screw [1].

9. Remove 2 C-rings [1], and remove 2 bearings [3] and the spacer
[4].
F-314
10. Move the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter assy/Rr [2] to the
[3][4]
11. Remove 4 screws [3] and 4 spacers [4]. Then, remove the slit
cutter unit [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [1] [5]
[2] [1] 12. Remove the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
13. Remove the slit cutter assy/Rr [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1] [3] [2] Note

• When you hold the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter
assy/Rr [2], be sure not to touch the cutter blade [3]. You
possibly get injured.
F-315
Note
• When you install the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit
cutter assy/Rr [2], reinstall the [5] sections of the slit
cutter shaft/Up [3] and the slit cutter shaft/Lw [4] at the
front side and the [6] sections and the rear side.
[3] [5]
[2] [4] [1]
[6]
F-316

1. Reinstall a new slit cutter assy/Fr and a new slit cutter assy/Rr
following the removal steps in reverse.
2. Remove 1 each of the screws [1], and then remove 1 each of the
slit cutter positioning assy [2].
Note
• The slit cutter positioning assy [2] fixes the positions of
the upper slit cutter and lower slit cutter. Therefore, do not
remove the slit cutter positioning assy [2] until the slit
cutter assy is installed.
If the positions of the upper slit cutter and the lower slit
cutter move, paper cannot be trimmed.
[2] [1] • The upper slit cutter has to be at outside. The lower slit
cutter has to be at inside.
• Be sure to store the slit cutter positioning assy that you
removed.
When you remove the slit cutter assy, be sure to install
the slit cutter positioning assy that you store beforehand.

4. After you replace the slit cutter assy/Fr and the slit cutter assy/Rr,
conduct the following item.
• For the slit cutter assy/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 422 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[1] [2] • For the slit cutter assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 423 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• For the slit cutter assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 351 (1100, 1085P,)
• For the slit cutter assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
20.4 Rotary cutter section

20.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter assy
• Rotary cutter assy: Every 750,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
[2] [1]
3. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness [2]
[1] [4] [2] [3] from the clamp of the stay assy [3].
4. Release the wiring harness [2] from the hole [4].
F-317
5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and remove 4 screws [2]. Then,
[2] [2] release the fixing of the 2 rotary cutter assy [3].
[1] [3] [1] [3]
6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the stay assy [2].
7. Remove 2 rotary cutter assy [3].
Note
• When you hold the rotary cutter assy [3], be careful not to
touch the cutter blade [4]. You possibly get injured.

reverse.
9. After you replace the rotary cutter assy, conduct the following item.
1250P, 1052)
[2] [1] • Counter reset of the special parts counter number 153 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[1] [4] [3] [3]
[4] [3]
20.4.2 Cleaning the slit scraps roller/Lt and slit scraps roller/Rt
• Slit scraps roller/Lt, slit scraps roller/Rt
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
F-318
(2) Procedure
2. Remove rotary cutter assy. (Refer to F.20.4.1 Replacing the rotary
cutter assy)
3. Clean the slit scraps roller/Lt [1] and the slit scraps roller/Rt [2] with
Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning pad.
reverse.
[1] [2]
F-319
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE FD-504
21. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-504

CAUTION
21.2 Clamp section

21.2.1 Lubrication to SQF clamp
• SQF clamp plate
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Move the SQF clamp plate to the home position with the output
[2] check 71-94 of the I/O Check Mode.
[1] with the output check 71-66 of the I/O check mode.
outlet.
paper exit unit)
7. Apply MH surf on the SQF roller scan line [1] and the SQF roller
scan line [2] of the SQF clamp plate.
Note
• When you apply the MH surf, be careful not to let the MH
surf adhere to the booklet press side of the SQF clamp
pressure plate.
• After the lubrication, put back the SQF roller assy [3] to
[2] [3] [1] the home position, rear side of the machine.
When the SQF roller assy is not in the original position, it
contacts with the gripper paper exit unit and the machine
is possibly damaged.
[1] 8. Install the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
9. Connect the power plug to the power outlet and activate the main
power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
10. After the initial operation, open the booklet tray section door.
(Refer to G.17.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section
door)
11. Check 2 booklet press sections [1] on the clamp plate, and wipe off
any MH surf.
21.2.2 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202)

• SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202): Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-320
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the SQF clamp motor/Rr
assy [3].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the SQF clamp motor/Rr
(M202) [2].
Note
• When you install the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202) [2], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the gear of the motor [3].

reverse.
6. After you replace the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202), conduct the
following item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
21.2.3 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203)

• SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203): Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the SQF clamp motor/Fr
assy [3].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203)
[2].
Note
• When you install the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203) [2], apply
the Molykote EM-30L to the gear [3] of the motor.

reverse.
6. After you replace the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203), conduct the
following item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
21.3 Square-fold sction

21.3.1 Replacing the SQF roller motor (M201)
• SQF roller motor (M201): Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-321
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Push down the square-fold unit [1].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the SQF roller motor (M201) [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the SQF roller motor (M201) [4], be
sure to check the belt [6] is engaged to the gear [5] of the
motor.

reverse.
7. After you replace the SQF roller motor (M201), conduct the
[6] [4] [3] following item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[5]
21.3.2 Replacing the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr, /Rr

• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr: Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr: Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Move the SQF clamp plate to the home position with the output
check 71-94 of the I/O Check Mode.
outlet.
paper exit unit)
7. Move the SQF roller assy [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [3] 8. Remove the screw [2], and remove the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr
[3].
9. Remove the screw [4], and remove the SQF roller cleaning assy/
Rr [5].
reverse.
Note
• After you replace the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr and the
SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr, be sure to move the SQF
roller assy to the original position (rear side).
When the SQF roller assy is not in the original position, it
contacts with the gripper paper exit unit and the machine
[5] [4] is possibly damaged.
11. After you replace the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr and the SQF
roller cleaning assy/Rr, conduct the following item.
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr and SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr:
Counter reset of the special parts counter number 421 (1250,
1250P, 1052)
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
F-322
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
F-323
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE PB-50...
22. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503

22.1.1 Replacing the entrance gate solenoid (SD1), the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
• Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
• Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200, 1200P, 1051.
C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
[7]
2. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.21.2.23 PB left unit)
3. Remove the upper cover/FrRt. (Refer to G.21.2.13 Upper cover/
[4]
FrRt)
4. Remove the upper cover/RrRt. (Refer to G.21.2.15 Upper cover/
RrRt)
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
7. Remove 6 screws [3] and disconnect the connectors [4] and [5].
[6] [10] [11]
9. Remove the screws of 3 knobs [7] and remove the knobs.
[9]
10. Remove 2 screws [9] and remove the metal frame [10].
11. Remove 6 screws [8] and remove the conveyance unit [11].
Note
• Put the conveyance unit on a table so that the paper
entrance guide does not contact the floor.
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] [3] a0v9t3c013ca
[1] [2] 12. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each, on the upper cover/Rt, and remove
the upper cover/Rt.
a0v9t3c014ca
F-324
13. Release the wiring harness [1], the wiring harness [2], and the
wiring harness [3] from the clamps.
[3]
[1] [2]
[3] [2] 14. Remove the spring [1].

15. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 16. Disconnect the connectors [1] and [2].

17. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [3].
[3]
F-325
18. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the entrance gate solenoid
(SD1) [2].
[2] [1]

20. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[3].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c015ca
21. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[1] [2] (SD4) [2].
23. After the replacement, be sure to reset the parts counter of the sub
tray exit solenoid (SD4).
• Number 295 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 235 (1200, 1200P, 1051)
• Number 295 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000)
• Number 324 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 295 (C1100, C1085)
a0v9t3c016ca
[1]
24. Standard 1 value when you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid
(SD4)
• When you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust the
[2] position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value with
the plunger [2] being pulled.
a a0v9t3c017ca
F-326
25. Standard 2 value when you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4)
• While you pull the plunger of the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" (the distance between the
paper exit roller and the paper exit driven roller) obtains a
standard value.
Standard value: a = 0 ± 1.5 mm
a a0v9t3c018ca
26. Check point when you reinstall the conveyance unit

a • After you reinstall the conveyance unit, check the points "a"
that is shown in the picture, to see that the conveyance unit
does not contact the upper door. When they are in contact,
loosen 4 fixing screws on the upper cover/Rt and adjust the
position so that the upper door and the upper cover/Rt does
not come in contact.
27. After the replacement, be sure to reset the parts counter of the
entrance gate solenoid (SD1).
• Number 305 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 307 (C8000)
• Number 336 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 307 (C1100, C1085)
a0v9t3c019ca
22.2 Sub compile (SC) section

CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the PB from the power outlet.
• Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from the power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
22.2.2 Replacing the switchback roller

• Switchback roller
: Every 750,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter))
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
*3 1250/1250P/1052
(2) Procedure
[6] [7] [5] [4] [5] 1. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2]. Then close the
upper door [1].
Note
• To keep the SC door open, insert a screwdriver into the
hole [3]. Be sure to remove the screwdriver when you
close the sub clamp door, or the cover gets damaged.
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [4], and slide the 2 bearings [5] into the
inside.
Note
[3] [8] [2] [1] • Before you remove the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet
of paper and so on under the switchback roller assy to
prevent the C-clips from dropping into inside of the
machine.
3. Release the pulley [7] from the belt [6] gently, and remove the
switchback roller assy [8].
a075f2c001ca
F-327
[2] [1] 4. Check point when you reinstall the switchback roller assy
Note
• After you reinstall the switchback roller assy, use a mirror
to check that the belt [1] is properly looped over the pulley
[2] without any slackness. If the belt has come off the
pulley, remove the SC cover/Up to correct that. (Refer to
G.21.2.12 SC cover/Up)
a075f2c002ca
[9] [4] [3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the roller [2] and the pin [3].
6. Remove the bearing [4].
[8] Note
• Be sure to install the bearing [4] so that its collar faces
toward the switchback roller.
[6]
7. Remove the E-ring [5], slide the switchback roller [8] in the
direction of the arrow [6] (toward the pulley) and remove the pin
[7]. Then remove the switchback roller [8] in the direction of the
[5]
arrow [9].
• Number 299 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 239 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 328 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 299 (C1100, C1085)
[7] [2] [1]

a075f2c003ca
22.2.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutch/A and /B
• SC switchback release motor (M13)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 750,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2)
• One-way clutch/B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2)
• One-way clutch/A
*1 Periodical replacement only for 1200/1200P/1051. C8000 is not supported.
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover/Up. (Refer to G.21.2.12 SC cover/Up)
2. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2] and place the
paper [3].
3. Close the SC door [2].
Note
• Before you remove the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet
of paper under the switchback roller assy to prevent the
C-clips from dropping into the machine inside.
a0v9t3c020ca
F-328
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the switchback cam [2].
Note
• The switchback cam [2] is tensioned by the spring [4] via
the switchback arm [3]. When you remove the screw [1],
[2]
the spring [4] pulls the switchback arm [3] and the
switchback cam [2] moves. At this time, be careful not to
[3]
drop the screw [1].
[4]
[1]
a0v9t3c021ca
5. Check point when you reinstall the switchback cam

[2] [1] Note
• When you reinstall the switchback cam [2], be sure to
install it following the positional relation with the actuator
[2] as you can see in the picture.
a0v9t3c022ca
[1] [3] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and remove 2 bearings [2].

[2] a0v9t3c023ca
[1] 8. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the wiring harness from 2
wiring harness clamps [2].
[2] a0v9t3c024ca
F-329
[1] 9. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release

motor assy [2].
[2] a0v9t3c025ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release
motor [2].
[2] a0v9t3c026ca
11. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the one-way clutch/B [2].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c027ca
[1] 12. Check point when you reinstall the one-way clutch/B
Note
• When you reinstall the one-way clutch/B [1], be sure to
install it in the direction that is shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c028ca
[4] [3] [1] [2] 13. Remove the screw [1] and remove the pressure cam [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the one-way clutch/A [4].
• Special parts count of SC switchback release motor (M13)
number 296 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
number 236 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
number 296 (C8000)
number 325 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
a0v9t3c029ca
number 296 (C1100, C1085)
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/A number 339 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/A number 310 (C1100,
C1085)
F-330
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/B number 340 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/B number 311 (C1100,
C1085)
17. Check point when you reinstall the pressure cam
[2] [1]
Note
• When you reinstall the pressure cam [1], be sure to install
it following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as
you can see in the picture.
a0v9t3c030ca
[1] 18. Check point when you reinstall the one-way clutch/A
Note
• When you reinstall the one-way clutch/A [1], be sure to
install it in the direction that is shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c033ca
19. Standard value when you reinstall the SC switchback release

motor assy
Note
• When you reinstall the SC switchback release motor assy,
a b be sure that the distances "a" and "b" become same
value.
Standard value: The difference of distances "a" and "b" =
0.2 mm or less
a0v9t3c004ca
22.2.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)

• SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.21.2.21 SC unit)
Note
• When you put down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Pull out the sub scan alignment unit [1] in the arrow-marked
direction.
a0v9t3c005ca
F-331
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13) [3].
• Number 298 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 238 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 298 (C8000)
• Number 327 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 298 (C1100, C1085)
[2] a0v9t3c006ca
[1] 7. Standard value when you reinstall the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13)
Note
• When you reinstall the SC pressure arm solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard
value with the plunger [1] being pulled, and then fix with
the screw [2].
Standard value: a = 16.4 ± 1 mm
[2]
a a0v9t3c007ca
22.2.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)

• FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.21.2.21 SC unit)
[1]
Note
• When you put down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC door [2].
[3] [2]
a0v9t3c008ca
F-332
3. Put the SC unit with the FD alignment solenoid assy [4] that is
[2] [3] [4]
faced up.
Note
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the SC switchback
release motor assy [3] does not contact the floor.

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out 2 shafts, and then remove the
sub scan alignment plate [2].
[1] a0v9t3c009ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the sub scan alignment arm [2].
7. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the screw [4], and then
[5] remove the FD alignment solenoid assy [5].
Note
• When you remove the FD alignment solenoid assy, be
careful not to drop the pin.
[4] [3] [2]

a0v9t3c010ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2], and then
remove the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the FD alignment solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [4] being pulled.
[4] [3] a0v9t3c011ca
a 9. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the

• Number 297 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 237 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 297 (C8000)
• Number 326 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 297 (C1100, C1085)
a0v9t3c012ca
22.2.6 Lubricating the sub scan alignment plate shaft

• Sub scan alignment plate shaft
: Every 750,000 prints*1
: Every 700,000 prints*2
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 C1100/C1085
F-333
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Md. (Refer to G.21.2.17 Upper cover/Md)
3. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
4. Apply plas guard Number 2 to the 4 sub scan alignment plate
shafts [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c001ca
22.3 Clamp section

22.3.1 Lubricating the clamp pressing board shaft
• Clamp pressure plate shaft
*2 C1100, C1085
F-334
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
2. Apply the plas guard No. 2 positions on the clamp pressing board
shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c122ca
22.4 Glue tank section

22.4.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing
• Glue apply roller drive gear bearing
: Every 30,000,000 counts (total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 750 counts (1 count per 8 hours) (Special parts counter)) *2
F-335
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.21.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the tank cover/Lt [2].
[2] [1] a15xt3c006ca
[2] [3] [1] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [3] from the notch
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to put the gear cover edge [3]
into the notch [2].
a15xt3c007ca
[1] 4. Remove the 4 screws [1].

Note
[2]
a15xt3c008ca
F-336
[1] [5] [4] [2] 5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].
6. Hold the shaft [2] and pull up the glue tank Assy, and remove the
glue apply roller drive gear/1 [3] and glue apply roller drive gear/2
[4] and the bearings [5], 2 for each.
• Number 341 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 312 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 312 (C1100, C1085)
[5] [3] a15xt3c009ca
22.4.2 Lubricating the glue apply roller drive gear

• Glue apply roller drive gear
*2 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] to the front.
Note
• When you move the glue tank unit, hold the metal plate [2]
on the right side of the glue tank unit.
2. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to put the gear cover edge [4]
under the notch [5] on the glue tank.
[5]
[4] [3]
a15xt3c010ca
F-337
3. Apply multemp FF-RM to the glue apply roller drive gear/1 [1] and
[2] [1]
the glue apply roller drive gear/2 [2].
reverse.
a15xt3c011ca
22.4.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (M4)

• Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
: Every 750,000 counts (special parts counter)*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 1,500,000 counts (Special parts counter))*2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.21.2.5 Rear cover/Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply cooling fan
(FM4) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) [3],
be sure to reinstall it to the same direction as you can see
in the picture.
• Be sure not to nip the wiring harness.
• Number 309 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[2] 8050ma3141
• Number 338 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 309 (C1100, C1085)
22.4.4 Replacing the glue tank assy

• Glue tank assy
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
F-338
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.21.2.20 Glue tank unit)
[2].
[2] a15xt3c012ca
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the glue thread cut plate
[1]
[2].
4. Remove 6 screws [3] and remove the tank cover/Lt [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the tank cover/Rt [6].
Note
• When you reinstall it, reinstall it so that the curved part
comes top.
[5] [2] [3]
[4] [6]
[3] [5] a15xt3c013ca
F-339
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [2] of the translucent wiring harnesses of
[1] [3] [2]
the temperature sensor.
Note
• When you reconnect the connector, check the color of the
connector and the number label [3] on the wiring harness,
and connect each connector to the corresponding wiring
harness.
Numbe Color
r
1 White
2 Blue
3 Yellow
4 Black
7. Remove the connector [4] from the metal frame [5].

Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to place the metal wiring
harness [6] toward the metal plate side [7].
8. Remove the square saddle [8] from the metal frame [7] and put the
connector [4] to the inside of the glue tank unit.
[8] [7] [2] [6] [4] [5] a15xt3c014ca
[1] [2] 9. Remove the wiring harness [1] from the 4 wire saddles [2].
[2] a15xt3c015ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the glue tank assy [1].
Note
[3] [3]
a15xt3c016ca
F-340
[3] [1] [2] [3] 11. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to reinstall it with 2 springs
[1] put on the pin [3] on the bottom of the glue tank assy
and on the projection [4] of the glue tank unit.
• After you replace the parts, be sure to conduct the glue
apply roller gap adjustment. (Refer to I.24.4 Glue apply
roller gap adjustment)
• Number 306 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 249 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[4] a15xt3c017ca
• Number 337 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 308 (C1100, C1085)
22.5 Cover paper supply section

22.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy
(1) Procedure
2. Slightly push up the cover paper tray lock [2] with a screwdriver or
[2] a similar tool and unlock it. Then pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c002ca
[2] [3] 3. Turn the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise as seen from the front side) to make the
coupling [2] upright.
Note
• Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller [1] against the
direction of the arrow (clockwise) forcibly, as the roller is
not designed to rotate in that direction.
[1]
a075f2c009ca
F-341
[2] [1]
5. Remove the bearing/Fr [1].
6. Move the bearing/Rr [2] to the rear side.
Note
• When you reinstall them, slightly press down the metal
frame [3] of the pick-up roller assy. Then keep the flat face
[4] of the bearing/Rr [2] horizontally and insert the bearing
into the notch [5] on the metal frame. Then insert the
bearing/Fr [1] in the same manner.
[2] [4]
[5] [3]
a075f2c010ca
[1] [5] [4] 7. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller.
Then remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling
[5].
Note
• When you remove the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful
not to damage the sensor [7] with the metal frame [6].
[3] [2] [6]
[7]
a075f2c011ca
F-342
[3]
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
reverse.
Note
• After you install the pick-up roller assy, rotate the pick-up
roller counterclockwise as seen from the front side.
• Make sure the paper feed roller and the belt rotate
smoothly.
• The pick-up roller rotates in counterclockwise direction
only. Be sure not to rotate it in the opposite direction.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c081ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the entrance guide plate
[2].
[2] a075f2c012ca
a075f2c013ca
F-343
[2]
12. Open the frame [1] of the separation roller assy in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the coupling pin [2] on the rear side from
the joint [3]. Then remove the separation roller assy [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, make sure to engage the coupling pin
[2] with the joint [3].
• When you reinstall the separation roller assy [4], fasten it
[3]
with the screws while you press it down.

reverse.
[1]
[4]
a075f2c014ca
22.5.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
• Pick-up roller
• Paper feed roller
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
Note
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the
paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism on the inside while the collar of the separation roller does not. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly. (Refer to F.22.5.1 Removing/
[4] [2] [1]
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller assy.
3. Slide 2 bearings [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3] together with
the shaft [4].
[3]
a075f2c015ca
F-344
4. Remove the bearing [1] and pull out the pick-up roller [2] from the
[2] [1] shaft [3].
5. Remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [4].
6. Replace the pick-up roller.
[4] [3]
a075f2c082ca
[1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the bearing/Fr [2] from the shaft
[3].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [4] and remove the paper feed roller [5]
together with the shaft [3].
[4] [5] [2] [3] a075f2c086ca

[2] [1] 10. Pull out the paper feed roller [3] from the collar [2].
11. Replace the pick-up roller [3].
[3]
a075f2c087ca
[2] [1] 12. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
Note
• There is no big difference in the appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [1] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [2] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
• Number 300, number 301 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
a075f2c016ca
• Number 300, Number 301 (C8000)
• Number 329, number 330 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 300, number 301 (C1100, C1085)
22.5.3 Replacing the separation roller

• Separation roller
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
F-345
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Remove the separation roller assy. (Refer to F.22.5.1 Removing/
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller [3] together
with the shaft [2].
[1] a075f2c017ca
[2] [3] [4] [1] 3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow.
4. Replace the separation roller [4].
Note
• There is no big difference in the appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [5] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [6] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
[6] [5]
• Number 301 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 241 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 301 (C8000)
• Number 330 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 301 (C1100, C1085)
a075f2c018ca
22.5.4 Replacing the cover paper pick up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
• Cover paper feed clutch (CL71)
• Cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
F-346
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screws, 1 each, attached on the right rail and
the left rail of the cover paper tray and pull out the tray. (Refer to
G.21.2.28 Cover paper tray)
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] and remove the clutch cover [2].
[1] [2]
a075f2c019ca
[4] [2] [3] [5] [6] 3. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the cover paper feed
clutch (CL71) [3] and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to insert the stopper [5] of the
clutch over the tab [6] of the metal frame.

• Number 302, number 303 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 302, Number 303 (C8000)
[5] [6] [1] • Number 331, number 332 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
a075f2c020ca • Number 302, number 303 (C1100, C1085)
22.6 Cover paper table section

Note
• The glue tank unit is hot after you deactivate the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body. To
prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before you perform the maintenance work.
Note
• Before you perform the maintenance work, be sure to carry out the initial operation so that each part or the unit is at the home
position.
22.6.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy

• Roller cutter blade assy
: Every 10,500,000 counts (total counter)*1 (actual replacement cycle: Every 100,000 counts (special parts counter)*2)
C1060, C1100, and C1085
F-347
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
2. Remove the conveyance unit/Lw. (Refer to G.21.2.26 Conveyance
unit/Lw)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and the roller cutter blade Assy [2]. Then
[1] disconnect the connector [3].
Note
• Pull out the cover paper waste box before you remove the
roller cutter assy.
• When you reinstall the roller cutter assy, be sure to route
the wire binding [4] under the cutter motor (M50) [5].
• Push the roller cutter blade Assy [2] against the metal
[2]
plate [6] to reinstall the Assy.

• Number 304 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 244 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 333 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 304 (C1100, C1085)
[6]
[1]
[4] [5] [3] a075f2c007ca
22.6.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
• Cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
*2 C1100, C1085
F-348
(2) Simplified cleaning procedure

[1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the order of following
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) with the cover paper folding plate
opened.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
[2] 2. Clean the cover paper folding plate [1] and the book spine backing
plate [2].
a075f2c004cb
22.6.4 Lubricating the cover paper alignment plate shaft

• Cover paper alignment plate shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*2 C1100, C1085
F-349
(2) Procedure
1. Turn the knob [1] and move the cover paper alignment plate
inside.
2. Apply plas guard Number 2 to the 4 cover paper alignment plate
shafts [2].
Note
• Apply plas guard Number 2 to the outside of the cover
paper alignment plate bearing on both sides.
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
[3]
a075f2c094ca
22.7 Book stock section

22.7.1 Lubricating the guide shafts/Rt and /Lt
(1) Periodic lubrication parts/Cycle
• Guide shaft/Rt, /Lt
*2 C1100, C1085
F-350
(2) Procedure
1. Apply the plas guard No. 2 to 4 positions on 4 positions [1] on the
guide shaft/Rt and guide shaft/Lt.
[1]
a15xt3c067ca
22.8 Framework section

22.8.1 Replacing the exhaust filters/A and /B
• Exhaust filter/A
• Exhaust filter/B
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
[2] [1] 2. Pull the filter holding lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and
then remove the 2 exhaust filter/A [2].
a15xt3c004ca
F-351
[1] 3. Reverse the exhaust filter assy and slide the exhaust filter/B [1] in
the arrow-marked direction to remove it.
• Number 307, number 308 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 305, Number 306 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc,
and C6000)
• Number 334, number 335 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 305, number 306 (C1100, C1085)
a15xt3c005ca
F-352
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURE GP-501
23. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501

23.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR SAFTY
These symbols are used in this documentation alert you to danger or important information.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious Injury.
WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. This warning statement indicates situations where there is a risk of death by electric
shock.
CAUTION: This notice indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
This section contains cleaning and maintenance procedures.
CAUTION
• GP-501 uses screws of inch standard. Therefore, do not mix them with other products (metric standard screws). Otherwise, the
screw hole is damaged.
23.2 Die set service

23.2.1 Die set service
The Die Set assembly is not serviceable other than inspection and periodic lubrication. The one exception is the felt pad on the Twin Loop Die
Set can be replaced. If a Die Set is at its end of life, it will tend to cause mis-feeds due to hanging chips. This is a result of die plate wear, and
not pin wear, which cannot be corrected. When this occurs, the Die Set should be replaced with a new one.
23.2.2 Die set life expectancy

The GP-501 Punch Die Sets have a minimum life expectancy of 500K cycles (sheets of paper punched). With periodic lubrication and optimum
paper types, life can exceed this number. Variables that affect life expectancy:
• Failure to follow the lubrication schedule or using the incorrect lubricant.
• Variety and types of paper being punched
• Cover stocks being punched
• Length of the average job
• Other environmental conditions
23.2.3 Die set components

(1) Die Set Types
The GP-501 Punch uses two types of Die Sets.
Type Description Bindery Style
Felt Pad Retainer Assembly Felt oiler pad on one side (with magnet and retaining DS-501, 503, 504, 506, 508, 510, 511, 513, 515,
plate) 517, 518
Encircled Felt Oiler Pad Felt oiler pad surrounds the punch pins DS-502, 505, 507, 509, 512, 514, 516
(2) Serviceable Components

• Shoulder bolt and spring [1]
• Punch pins [2]
• Felt pad [3]
• Floating pressure bar spring (not shown).
(3) Felt Pad Retaining Assembly

The twin loop Die Set has a removable felt pad assembly. The felt pad [1] provides lubrication to the punch pins under normal usage and
helps keep them clean. The magnet [2] and retainer [3] keeps the felt pad in place during normal handling and operation.
F-353
Note
• The felt pad assembly on the Twin Loop Die Set is the only assembly that can be replaced.
(4) Reassembling the Felt Pad Assembly

The felt pad assembly consists of the felt pad [1], magnet [2], and retainer [3].
(a) To assemble the felt pad retaining assembly:

1. Lay the die assembly on a table so that the open side of the top
bar is facing up.
2. Lay the felt pad [1] along the punch pins so that it spans all pins.
3. If the pad needs oil, apply it along the full length of the pad.
4. Insert the magnet [2] into the retainer [3].
5. Place the magnet and retainer [1] over the pad [2] and lightly
press them against the pad and the Die Set base. Make sure the
assembly is sitting on the base [3] and that the felt pad is against
the punch pins [4].
F-354
(5) Floating Pressure Bar Spring Replacement
Some Die Sets use springs to hold the top plate above the pressure bar [1]. Detentes in the top plate hold the springs in place [2]. Ensure all
springs are in place.
(a) To replace pressure bar springs:

1. Compress the spring and insert between the top bar and pressure bar.
2. Use a flat screwdriver to position the spring so that the detent holds it in place.
3. Compress the top bar to ensure it moves freely and that it returns.
23.2.4 Checking and replacing the die set

(1) Periodically Checked and replaced parts/Spotted Checked and replaced parts/cycle
• Dieset
: Every 2,000,000 counts (Total counter)*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2) *3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060.
*3 Replace as needed. Replacement is recommended if hanging chips are usually generated.
(2) Procedure
Set the Die Set on a table and press the top plate straight down at both ends [1] at the same time and look for a smooth operation. The top
plate and pins should retract fully when you release.
Reinstall the Die Set into the punch and run several sheets of the customer’s paper through the punch. Inspect the holes.
• Holes should be clean and even with no tearing or frayed edges.
• Holes should be punched completely, leaving no chip attached.
• Holes should be straight (no skew) and evenly spaced from the edge of the paper and aligned.
23.2.5 Checking and lubricating the die set pins and die set shoulder bolts
(1) Periodically Checked and lubricated parts/cycle
• Die Set pins
: Every 200,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *1
: Every 210,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *2
• Die Set Shoulder bolts
: Every 800,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *1
: Every 750,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 C8000
(2) Procedure
Inspect the punch pins for signs of wear or mis-alignment. Periodic lubrication extends the life of the Die Sets.
The customer or operator can perform this maintenance between technician inspections.
F-355
(3) To lubricate Die Set pins:

• Lubricate with 3-IN-ONE oil (high quality machine oil).
• Apply oil lightly along the length of the pad [1], but do not over saturate.
• Do not use spray lubricants because they tend to dry up quickly and leave a sticky residue.
For the felt pad retaining assembly instructions, refer to F.23.2.3 Die set components.
(4) To lubricate shoulder bolts:

• Lubricate the shoulder bolts and springs [2] using a brush to apply Magnalube-G Teflon Grease.
• Make sure the grease coats the bolts.
23.2.6 Inspecting the hole alignment

Inspect the hole alignment on the customer’s punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched holes should be
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the punched holes are not aligned, then the Die Set cradle must be
adjusted. For adjustment procedures.
23.3 Check, cleaning, and lubrication

23.3.1 Check, cleaning, and lubrication
If operating properly, the GP-501 will punch the same types of copy paper and cover materials handled by the copier and run at the same
speed. Hole quality will vary between different grades of paper.
The following maintenance should be performed according to the schedule.
(1) Table 3.2 Maintenance Schedule

Description Qty. Part Number Period Check Clean Lubricate Replace Materials, Tools
Used
Aligner belt 12,000K X a soft cloth and
(green belt) counts alcohol
Aligner idler 12,000K X a soft cloth and
roller assembly counts alcohol
Aligner idler 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
rollers counts alcohol
Aligner latching 3,000K X -
mechanisms counts
Back gauge 3,000K X X Blower brush/
solenoid counts vacuum cleaner
Back gauge 1 A0N9PP59## 4,000K X -
mechanism counts
F-356
Base 3,000K X Vacuum

counts cleaner
Die guide 3,000K X Vacuum
counts cleaner
Die set 500K Y -
counts
Punch die (pins) 50K X Oil 3-IN-ONE
counts (WD-40
Company)
Die set shoulder 200K X Grease Magnalube-G
bolts counts Teflon Grease
Door closing 3,000K X -
latch counts
Drive rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
Idler rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
Optical sensors 3,000K X Blower brush
counts
Paper path, 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
Aligner Panels counts alcohol
bypass counts alcohol
punch counts alcohol
Punch drive 3,000K Grease Magnalube-G
cams counts Teflon Grease
Roller energy 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
drive counts alcohol
Timing belts 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
23.3.2 External cleaning

The cover may be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Do not use chemical cleaners or solvents as these may have a harmful effect. Use detergent sparingly to avoid contact with electrical
components.
WARNING:
• Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
23.3.3 Internal cleaning

Occasionally remove the covers and remove paper dust and chips. Paper dust can accumulate throughout the punch including around the
motors and other electrical components. Use a vacuum cleaner if possible. A small paintbrush can also be used but extreme care should be
used around electrical components.
Non-electrical components may be cleaned with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Rollers can be cleaned with alcohol.
WARNING:
• Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
23.3.4 Operational inspection

Make sure the punch operates smoothly and produces the desired holes in the customer’s paper.
23.3.5 Internal inspection

Whenever the cover has been removed for corrective maintenance, visually inspect for defects and problems such as damaged components,
loose screws or nuts, abraded wire insulation, loose terminals, etc. Correct any problems before returning the machine to service.
23.3.6 Cleaning the base

• Base
: Every 3,000,000 counts
(2) Procedure
Chips and paper dust falls to the bottom of the punch. Clean with a vacuum cleaner each time the machine is serviced. The customer can
also do this between the technician’s visits.
F-357
(3) Chip Bin

Remove the Chip bin tray and empty. Vacuum out paper chips and dust from the Chip bin [1], especially at the back around the chip tray
switch.
23.3.7 Cleaning the die guide

• Die guide
(2) Procedure
Remove the Die Set and clean the guide [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
23.3.8 Checking the door latch

The door latch must hold the door closed and ensure that the switch activation tab is depressing the door switch [1]. The switch tab [2] should
press the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming.
(1) Periodically checked parts/cycle

• Door latch
: Every 3,000,000 counts.
(2) Procedure
• Ensure latch holds door closed.
• Ensure switch is activated when the door is closed.
• To adjust the door latch. (Refer to G.22.2.1 Checking the door latch)
F-358
23.3.9 Cleaning and checking the aligner paper path and panels
(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle
• Aligner paper path and panels
(2) Procedure
Inspect for worn or damaged parts. Clean with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water as
needed.
(3) To clean the Aligner Panels:

1. Lift the Aligner latches to open panels.
2. Clean surfaces [1].
3. Clean paper alignment channels [2].
23.3.10 Cleaning and checking the aligner idler roller

(1) Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller
Aligner idler rollers press the paper against the green drive belts and align the paper for punching and exiting. To replace the idler rollers.
(Refer to F.23.3.25 Replacing the aligner idler roller)
(a) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle

• Aligner Idler Roller
(b) Procedure
• Make sure the aligner rollers are clean.
• Ensure that the idler rollers maintain pressure against the green drive belt.
• Inspect for bent or damaged parts.
WARNING:
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this warning could result in death or serious Injury.
(c) To inspect the aligner idler rollers:

1. Press the top of each roller’s bracket [1]. The roller should move
away from the green belt drive and then when released, they
spring back into place.
F-359
2. Ensure the torsion springs [1] are hooked over the bracket [2].
(d) To clean idler rollers:

1. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
2. Inspect the idler rollers for wear patterns or groves. Surface should be evenly textured and clean.
23.3.11 Cleaning the aligner (green) drive belt

• Aligner (Green) Drive Belt
: Every 12,000,000 counts. *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
• Ensure the Aligner Drive Belts are clean.
• Inspect for frayed edges and wear.
(3) To clean the Aligner Drive Belts:

1. Clean Green Drive Belt [1] with a plastic scouring pad.
2. Use the drive knob [2] to turn the belt.
Figure 3.16 Cleaning Green Drive Belt.
To adjust or replace the Aligner Drive Belt. (Refer to F.23.3.26 Replacing the aligner drive belt)
23.3.12 Cleaning and checking the back gauge solenoid

• Back Gauge Solenoid
(2) Procedure
1. Inspect and ensure the Back Gauge solenoid linkage moves freely. Press linkage down and release [1]. Linkage should return.
2. Clean out the solenoid and surrounding area with a vacuum cleaner and canned air [2]. Make sure the solenoid is clean and dry.
Note
• Do not apply lubricants to the solenoid or linkage.
To remove and repair the back gauge. (Refer to F.23.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism, F.23.3.29 Removing the back gauge)
F-360
23.3.13 Cleaning and checking the idler rollers

• Idler rollers
(2) Procedure
Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass [1] or the punch [2].
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface. Where practical, remove the roller
assembly to clean [3].
Please see the reference page about the mainteinence procedure of each roller.
Bypass Idler roller [3].
Punch Idler roller [4]. (Refer to F.23.3.14 Cleaning and checking the punch idler rollers)
(3) Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Idler Rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass. Rollers can usually be serviced without removing the
bypass panel.
1. Separate the punch from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Lift the retaining spring over the end of the idler roller shaft. The illustration shows moving the spring [1] on the bypass plate, which has
been removed from the machine for clarity.
4. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
5. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
6. Ensure the rollers turn freely on the shaft.
7. To install idler roller assemblies reverse the steps.
F-361
Installation Note:
• Make sure the flat surface of the bushing aligns in the fork.
• Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in each fork.
• After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
(4) Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.22.3.2 Separating the punch from the printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.23.3.22 Removing the bypass panel and F.23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel
(a) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
• Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
• Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
F-362
To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
23.3.14 Cleaning and checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.22.3.2 Separating the punch from the printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.23.3.22 Removing the bypass panel and F.23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel
(1) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
• Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
F-363
• Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
(2) To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
F-364
23.3.15 Cleaning and checking the drive rollers

Drive rollers are located opposite the idler rollers.

• Drive rollers
(2) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.
Some drive rollers are not easily accessible. Those that are [1], should be inspected and cleaned when the idler rollers are removed. Where
practical, make sure the rollers are clean. Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol. Refer to also F.23.3.13 Cleaning and checking the idler rollers.
23.3.16 Checking the aligner latch

Latches [1] on both sides of the punch hold the Aligner Panels in place, which in turn keeps even pressure on the idler rollers.

• Aligner Latch
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the latches for worn or damaged parts.
• Open and close the latches and ensure they lock into place when closed.
• Ensure the nylon wheel [2] turns freely on its bearing and that it aligns with its locking.
F-365
23.3.17 Cleaning the optical sensors

• Optical Sensors
(2) Procedure
• Inspect and clean Optical Sensors [1] per the maintenance schedule or as needed.
(3) Supplies Needed

Canned air or vacuum cleaner
F-366
Use canned air to blow the debris off each sensor. The illustration shows examples of three sensors [1].
23.3.18 Cleaning and checking the bypass paper path

• Bypass paper path
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the Bypass panel [1], rollers [2], and entrance guide [3] for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves. The surface should be rough and even. Make sure the rollers are clean. Clean rollers with
a soft cloth and alcohol. (Refer to F.23.3.13 Cleaning and checking the idler rollers, F.23.3.15 Cleaning and checking the drive rollers)
• Raise the panel and ensure the magnet holds it in open [4]. Inspect the path for obstructions. Clean as needed.
• Close the panel and check that it is flat and that paper will pass under it.
• Ensure the bypass diverter moves freely and returns to the bypass position.
23.3.19 Cleaning and checking the punch paper path

• Punch Paper path
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the entire paper path through the punch. Look for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves.
• Open the Aligner Panels [1] and U-channel [2] and make sure there are no obstructions.
• Confirm that the latch [3] holds the U-channel tightly in place. Re-shape it if necessary.
• Clean as needed.
F-367
23.3.20 Cleaning and checking the timing belt

• Timing Belt
(2) Procedure
Inspect all timing belts [1], [2] for wear, missing teeth, frayed edges, and cracks. For replacement, refer to F.23.3.43 Replacing the belt.
Check for proper deflection of belts. The belts should be slightly loose with approximately 1/4” (6.35mm) deflection [1]. Belts that are too loose
will not drive properly and belts that are too tight can wear out prematurely or damage their driven components. Five belts [2] have tensioners,
it is these five belts that should be checked.
23.3.21 Bypass panel

(1) Tools Needed
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
• Needle nose pliers
(2) Procedure
Separate the punch from the printer and remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.22.3.2 Separating the punch from the printer, G.22.3.3 Removing
the rear cover)
F-368
23.3.22 Removing the bypass panel

(1) To remove the Bypass panel:
1. If removing the Bypass panel, remove the side panel cover by
removing the 4 screws [1].
2. Disconnect the grounding strap by removing the screw [1] on the

exit side of the bypass.
3. Unplug the exit side connector [2] at the rear frame.
4. Disconnect the connectors [1] of Enter sensor (S1) and Bypass

sensor (S8).
5. From the rear of the punch, remove one of the E-rings [1] from the
Bypass shaft.
F-369
6. From the side of the punch, slide the shaft towards the end of the
shaft [1] without the E-Ring [2] until the other end of the shaft
clears the nylon bushing and bracket.
7. Lift the opposite end of the shaft [3] and slide it out of the Bypass
panel in the opposite direction of the removed E-Ring [4].
Installation Note
• Make sure the nylon bushing is installed so that it
protrudes through the mounting bracket of the rear frame
into the Bypass panel [5].
8. Rotate the rear of Bypass panel [1] so that it extends past the
entrance side of the punch [2].
9. Remove the Bypass panel.

10. To install the Bypass panel, reverse the steps.
Installation Note
• Position the Bypass panel so that it is outside the shaft
mounting brackets. The nylon bushings go through the
mounting brackets [1], into the Bypass panel [2].
23.3.23 Aligner panels

The entrance side Aligner panel positions the paper in the Back Gauge for punching. The exit side Aligner panel positions the paper for the
finisher. Prior to servicing the Aligner Panels, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer. (Refer to G.22.3.2 Separating the punch from the
printer).
23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel

Removing the Aligner panels provides access to the paper path and the Aligner Green Drive Belt. The procedure is the same for the entrance
and exit Aligner panels except that the exit side has a docking plate which must be removed first.
F-370
(1) To remove the Aligner panel:

1. If removing the exit side Aligner panel, remove the side panel
cover by removing the 6 screws [1].
Note
• The rest of the steps are the same for both Aligner panels.
2. Release the Aligner latch [1].

3. Remove the E-clips from both ends of the Aligner shaft [2].
4. Remove the shaft nylon bushings [3]
5. Slide the shaft out the front of the punch.

6. Remove aligner latch stop by removing screws [1].
7. Unhook the tension spring from the panel [1].

8. Remove the Aligner panel [2] out the front of the punch.
9. Reverse the steps to install the Aligner panel.
23.3.25 Replacing the aligner idler roller

(1) Tools Required
• Flat head screw driver
• Needle nose plyers
F-371
(2) Procedure
1. Pull off E-Clips [1]
2. Remove the pins [2]. During removal of pins hold on to spring with
fingers.
3. Completely remove the springs [3] and then slide roller assembly
[4] down and then out.
Note
• Aligner rollers must be moved downwards. Hence all the
rollers need to be removed.
23.3.26 Replacing the aligner drive belt

(1) Procedure
Before replacing the green drive belts, remove the Aligner panels. (Refer to F.23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel) Then follow the
procedures below for the entrance side or exit side green drive belt service.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screw driver
• Nut drivers, 1/4 and 5/16"
• Hex wrenches, 5/64 and 9/64"
• Snap ring pliers
• E-Ring tool
• Twelve inch metal ruler or similar straight edge
CAUTION
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this caution can result in injury.
Note
• Empty the paper chip bin and replace it. This makes it easier to find small parts that you may drop into the bin.
(3) Paper Entrance Side Green Drive Belt Replacement

1. Disconnect the enter sensor (S1) wire from the side frame [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the front paper chute [1] to
remove the entrance guide [2].
F-372
3. To remove the GP2 aligner latch [1], do the following:
1. Unhook the spring of the GP2 aligner latch on the right end.
2. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-rings
of the GP2 aligner latch on the left end (front Door side).
3. Push the GP2 aligner latch in toward the front door until it
clears the rear frame.
4. Pull the entire GP2 aligner latch, door latch out and set it
aside.
4. To remove Entrance Idler Aligner panel [2] assembly. (Refer to F.
23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel)
5. Remove the fan [7] that prevents access to the flexible cable. To
remove it simply pull it off the shaft.
6. Remove the flexible cable using a hex wrench.
7. Remove the 2 screws [3]
8. Loosen screw from the solenoid link.
9. Remove the solenoid assembly [5] and link from the Diverter
Shaft[6], leave it hanging.
10. Remove the 2 E-Rings of the Entrance Diverter assembly, slide

the Diverter out and set it aside.
11. To remove the Entrance Drive Aligner assembly [7], which is the
large sheet metal assembly that actually contains the green drive
belt and Aligner.
1. Remove the 6 Screws that secure the face of this assembly.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the side
frame.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector [8]
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner assembly up and outward. You can grab the
assembly at the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
• As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor
harness behind the assembly as soon as you are able
to reach it. Failure to observe this notice may damage
the wiring.
12. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by removing
the 4 screws [1].
CAUTION
• Leave the Flex Shaft [2] attached.
(4) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new Belt [3] onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side out. Rotate the Flex Shaft [2] to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 Pan Head Screws with the 4 Lock Washers.
1. Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the Sheet Metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler
works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces.
2. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
Note
• The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.35.
3. As a double check, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal
surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to be even or parallel, and just floating above the
surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:
F-373
1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place,
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the Sensor Bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling Shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the Sensor Harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started you
have good alignment. You may now go back and tighten the
screws until they are snug.
4. Install the Flexible Shaft.
5. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide (item 7) with Idler
Roller 4 Screws. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then
tighten.
6. Connect the Sensor Wire Harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
7. Install the GP2 Shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
8. Close the GP2 Flipper Latch.

Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
9. Attach the GP2 Shaft Spring.
10. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP2.
(5) Entrance Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel. Then insert the punch into the printer and finisher and connect
the power cord.
1. Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:
1. Run10 copies in bypass mode.
2. Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
3. Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
(6) Paper Entrance and Exit Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
1. To remove the GP6 Flipper (C), Door Latch:
1. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-Rings
of the GP6 Flipper on the right end (front door side).
2. Push the GP6 Flipper in toward the front door until it clears the
rear frame.
3. Pull the entire GP6 Flipper, door latch out and set it aside.
F-374
2. To remove the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove 2 E-Rings from the Pivot Shaft.
2. Slide the Shaft all the way out through the front of the GP-501
Punch.
3. Remove the 2 nylon bearings.
4. Remove and set aside the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide
assembly.
3. To remove the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove the 4 screws (2 rear and 2 front) of the curved sheet
metal Exit Paper Guide assembly.
2. Unplug the sensor.
3. Pull the entire sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly out, set
aside.
4. To remove the Rear, Drive Side, and Paper Guide Aligner
assembly. This is the large sheet metal assembly within the
GP-501 Punch that contains the green drive belt Aligner.
CAUTION
• Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the block to the frame. The
Coupler is loose and the rear panel will come out.
2. Remove the 6 screws that secure the face of this assembly.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the top.
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner up and outward. You can grab the assembly at
the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
• Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very
delicate.
Note
• In order to access these screws, you must first remove
the Die Set storage shelf and the cable shield attached
to the Die storage shelf at the paper entrance side.
Moving the Die Storage shelf aside will enable better
access to the 2 screws with a short Phillips screw
driver.
CAUTION
• As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind
the assembly as soon as you are able to reach it.
Failure to do this can damage the unit.
5. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws (S).
CAUTION
• Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
6. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws.
CAUTION
• Leave the Coupler attached.
(7) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new green drive belt onto the Aligner Roller assembly,
green side out.
• Take care when handling the Aligner Roller assembly so as
not to damage the Flex Coupling.
• Rotate the shaft to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 pan head screws
with the 4 lock washers.
Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is
flush with the sheet metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal
ruler works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the
green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces. Adjust
the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure
3.41.
To ensure proper assembly, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly
up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the
sheet metal surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The
green drive belt should appear to be even and just floating above
the surface of the sheet metal.
F-375
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:

1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place:
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the sensor bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the sensor harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started go
back and tighten the screws until they are snug.
CAUTION
• Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
4. Install the 2 screws to secure the bearing block for the pulley
arrangement at the rear of the GP-501 Punch. Press the block to
the top of the punch before tightening.
5. Install the pulley and belt onto the pulley block. Once properly
aligned, check belt and pulley movement. Tighten the set screw.
6. Install the Die Set storage rack with 3 screws front and 3 screws
back. Remember to attach the ground strap at the middle screw on
the rear (belt side). Start each screw to achieve proper alignment,
then go back over each screw and tighten it.
7. Install the Cable Guard on top of the Die Set storage rack (2
Screws).
8. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide with Idler Roller 4
screws.
9. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
10. Connect the sensor wire harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
11. To install the Idler Aligner Paper Guide:
1. Hold it loosely in place.
2. Press the nylon flange bearings into place, through both
pieces of sheet metal, with the flange to the inside.
3. Slide the shaft through the front of the machine, while holding
the nylon flange bearing in place.
4. Secure with 2 E-rings on the inside of the bearing.
5. Inspect by pressing in on the bottom area of the sheet metal
for:
- A slight deflection of each Idler Roller as you press.
- As you press, you can turn the pulleys at the rear of the
GP-501 Punch and see the Idler Rollers rotate smoothly.
12. Bend the small metal tab back into place.
13. Install the GP6 shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
14. Close the GP6 Flipper Latch.
Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of
the Idler Rollers.
15. Attach the GP6 shaft spring.
16. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP6.
(8) Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.23.3.24 Removing the aligner panel. Then insert the punch into the main body and finisher and
connect the power cord.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
F-376
23.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller

(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/ cycle
• Energy drive rollers
: 3,000,000 counts
(2) Procedure
Reference Figure 3.44 Energy Roller as you perform this procedure.
1. Without disconnecting either retaining spring [1], roll one of them
gently to one side to release the Energy Drive Roller shaft from its
mounting bracket.
2. Lift the shaft [2] from the mounting bracket.
3. Using a clean cloth and alcohol, clean the surfaces of the rollers
[3] to remove any paper dust or toner that may have accumulated
over time.
4. Reverse steps 2 & 1 above to replace the shaft into the holder.
5. Ensure the flats of the bearings are seated properly in the
mounting brackets.
6. Ensure the springs are straight on the bearing to apply sufficient
force for the rollers to turn when you rotate the knob at the front of
the machine.
23.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism

The Back Gauge assembly pauses the paper just as the edge has entered the die set. Working properly, the sheet will pause only long enough
for the holes to be punched correctly. The Back Gauge assembly also controls the paper chad falling into the chad bin, significantly reducing the
amount of chad that could flow through the paper path. Some chad falls outside the chad bin and should be cleaned up with a vacuum cleaner
during each servicing.
WARNING
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle

• Back gauge mechanism
: Every 16,000,000 counts (Total counter)*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 4,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085.
(2) Procedure
Remove Back Gauge assembly to clean and service the solenoid or to replace the Back Gauge. Also allows the removal of the Punch
Module.
To repair or replace the Back Gauge, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer and finisher and then remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.
22.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service)
(3) Tools Required

Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
Note
F-377
23.3.29 Removing the back gauge

(1) To remove the Back Gauge assembly:
1. Turn the Punch Cycle knob [1] so that the punch drive indicator [2]
lines up the position indicator [3].
2. Remove the Die Set and Chip Bin.

3. Remove the two Die Set Chip Brush bracket screws [1].
4. On the rear of the punch, unplug the drive punch flag sensor
connector [1].
5. Remove the 2 Die Set Adjustment Bracket screws [2] and pull the
bracket aside [3].
6. Remove the 2 Back Gauge rear mounting screws [1].
F-378
7. Disconnect the Back Gauge connector from the Punch Controller
PCB [1].
8. Cut wire harness ties as needed to free the solenoid wires.

9. Cut the 2 harness ties on the entrance side of the punch.
10. Remove the grommet from the frame [1].

Note
• If you are not replacing the Back Gauge or are removing it
for access to the Punch Module, it is not necessary to pull
the wire through the hole in the frame. The Back Gauge
can be set aside.
11. Feed the connector through the hole in the frame and the grommet
separately [2].
12. Remove one top screw [1] of chip tray full sensor bracket [2] and
pivot the bracket down.
13. Gently slide the Back Gauge assembly to the rear of the punch [1]
so that it extends through the slot [2] and clears the wiring harness
[3].
CAUTION
• Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to
observe this precaution may damage the wiring.
F-379
14. Make sure the left end of the Back Gauge clears the opening on
the front of the punch [1] and pull it out [2] while sliding it to
towards the front.
15. Remove the Back Gauge and rail as an assembly.

16. To install the Back Gauge, reverse these steps.
17. After replacing the Back gauge mechanism, conduct the following
item.
When connecting to C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Counter reset of the parts counter number 317
When connecting to 1250/1250P/1052
When connecting to 951
When connecting to C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
When connecting to C1100/C1085
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge:
1. Install a Die Set.
2. Rotate the punch drive knob to ensure the drive and cams turn easily.
3. Test for proper hole alignment to the paper edge by doing the following.
a. Run 1 page at a time.
b. Run 2 pages at a time.
c. Run 5 pages at a time.
d. Run 10 pages at a time.
e. Run 50 pages at a time.
23.3.30 Replacing the solenoid spring

(1) Procedure
Removal of spring [1] and [2] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the shaft.
Removal of spring [3] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the sheet metal part.
23.3.31 Back gauge paddle

(1) Procedure
First remove Back gauge assembly as described in "F.23.3.29 Removing the back gauge".
Deep or angled deep punches may be caused by a broken weld on the Paddle shaft [1]. Inspect the Paddle and press down on it while
holding the linkage to keep the linkage from moving. If the paddle [2] moves, replace the Back Gauge assembly.
F-380
23.3.32 Adjusting the back gauge assembly

The Back Gauge can be adjusted up and down for optimum operation for specific Die Sets.
The Back Gauge should be at its highest position for VeloBind or PB Die Sets. If it is not, the Back Gauge Paddle may not completely close the
paper path gap. This can result in paper (especially with excessive curl) slipping through the gap created by the Paddle and the top plate of the
Die Set. This causes a deep punch.
Initially, move the assembly to its highest position and then adjust accordingly after testing each Die Set.
Ensure it is easy to insert and remove three hole Die Sets. If the Die Set is too tight, evenly lower the Back Gauge slightly to achieve the
tightness required, while still retaining the PB and VeloBind functionality mentioned above.
(1) To adjust the Back Gauge:

1. Loosen the 3 phillips head screws [1].
2. Move the entire assembly [2] upward or downward as needed
while keeping it even.
3. While holding the assembly up, tighten the 3 screws.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge adjustment:
1. Run a few sheets of paper and check for skew with each Die Set.
2. Adjust the Back Gauge as needed and re-test.
3. Run 200 to 500 sheets of paper and check for mis-feeding, deep
punching, and skew.
23.3.33 Punch module

(1) Tools Required
• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
(2) Procedure
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
• Punch motor
• Drive motor belt
• Punch module brake
• Cams
• Flexible drive coupling
• Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (Refer to F.23.3.36 Replacing the punch clutch).
F-381
WARNING
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
23.3.34 Removing the punch module

The Back Gauge assembly must be removed before removing the Punch Module. (Refer to F.23.3.29 Removing the back gauge).
(1) To remove the Punch Module:

1. Remove the Back Gauge assembly.
2. Use a 5/64” hex wrench to remove the Punch Cycle knob [1].
3. Remove the 4 Punch Module retaining screws [1] from the front
panel.
4. Release the cable ties on the left wiring harness [1] to free the
Punch Module wiring. Remove the connector from flag sensor [2].
Remove harness from brake and clutch as per image below.
5. Remove the belts in the following order.

1. Remove the bottom left and right vertical belts [1] by walking
the belts over the pulleys.
2. Remove the 4 power supply screws [5].
3. Loosen the belt idler rollers [2] and remove the upper vertical
belt [3].
4. Remove the bottom triangular belt [4] after loosening the
respective tensioner.
F-382
6. Remove the two rear Punch Module screws [1].
7. Cut wire harness ties as needed to release the punch wiring.

8. Unplug the punch connector [1] from the control board.
F-383
9. Carefully slide the Punch Module out the back of the punch.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not get caught or prevent
removal of the module.
23.3.35 Lubricating to the punch drive cams

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
• Punch drive cams
: Every 12,000,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 3,000,000 punches)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Back gauge and rail needs to be removed for accessing punch module cams. refer to F.23.3.29 Removing the back gauge for removing back
gauge. Use brush for reach to cams for further cleaning operation.
Installation Note
• Make sure the wires on the rear of the punch are not obstructing the Die Set or Chip Bin.
23.3.36 Replacing the punch clutch

(1) Procedure
Replace if Punch clutch is malfunctioning.
Note
• The Punch clutch can be removed without removing the Punch Module.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
F-384
(3) To remove the clutch:

1. Unplug the punch flag sensor (S9) connector [1].
2. Slide the fan [1] off the shaft.
3. Remove the lower drive belt [1].
4. Loosen the 2 pulley socket head set screws [1].

5. Remove the pulley and its shaft key [2].
F-385
6. Remove the 2 clutch bracket screws [1].
Installation Note
• When installing the clutch bracket, ensure that the fork of
the clutch engages the tab on the bracket [2].
7. Loosen the 2 clutch socket head set screws [1], slide the Punch
clutch [2] off the shaft, and remove the shaft key [3].
Installation Note
• When installing the Punch clutch, be sure to install the
shaft key. Press the Punch clutch against the drive gear
plate. While pressing the clutch against the plate, tighten
the 2 set screws. The assembly does not require a gap
between the Punch clutch and clutch plate.
8. Cut wire ties as needed and unplug the clutch connector [1] from
the Punch Controller PCB.
9. Slide the back portion of the clutch [1] off the shaft.
The motor drive belt [2] can be removed at the same time.
10. To install the clutch, reverse these steps.
23.3.37 Replacing and adjusting the punch module brake

(1) Procedure
To replace the Punch module brake, first remove the clutch and related drives. (Refer to F.23.3.36 Replacing the punch clutch). The Punch
module brake must be adjusted while on drive shaft. To adjust the Punch module brake. (Refer to F.23.3.39 Adjusting the punch module
brake)
(2) Tools Needed

• Feeler gauge, 0.0001" (0.00254 mm)
• Hex wrenches, 0.05" and 3/32"
• Flat blade screwdriver
• Pliers
F-386
23.3.38 Replacing the punch module brake

(1) To replace the Punch module brake
1. Remove the 4 socket head set screws [1].
2. Loosen the 2 set screws [2] until the brake pad [3] slides freely on
the shaft.
Installation Note
• When installing the Punch module brake, ensure that the 2
set screws engage the flats on the shaft. To adjust the
Punch module brake. (Refer to F.23.3.39 Adjusting the
punch module brake)
3. Remove the E-Ring at the opposite end of the shaft [1].

4. Slide the shaft [2] out of the bearing bracket, away from the clutch
end.
5. Slide the Punch module brake assembly off the shaft.
6. To install the Punch module brake assembly, reverse these steps.
23.3.39 Adjusting the punch module brake

(1) Procedure
The Punch module brake can be adjusted without removing the Punch module brake from the shaft. The gap between the brake and the pad
is 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) .
(2) To adjust the Punch module brake

1. Loosen the 2 set screws [1] until the brake pad slides freely on the
shaft.
2. Use a 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) feeler gauge to set the gap between the brake and the brake pad.
3. Tighten the 2 set screws and check the gap.
23.3.40 Replacing the punch module motor

(1) Procedure
Replace motor when it malfunctions.
F-387
(2) To replace the Punch Module motor:

1. Cut any wire ties as necessary to release the motor wires.
2. Unplug motor wire connections from the capacitor [1].
3. Remove the metal spring clip [1] from the fan and slide the fan [2]
off the shaft.
Installation Note
• When installing the fan, be sure to align the flat of the fan
hub with the flat on the shaft. Also, make sure the hub and
spring clip are facing away from the motor.
4. Loosen the 2 socket head set screws[1] on the pulley and slide the
pulley and belt off the shaft.
5. Remove the motor mounting 4 nuts [2].
6. To install the motor, reverse these steps.
23.3.41 Replacing the punch module motor drive belt

(1) Procedure
Replace the belt when it is frayed, missing teeth, or worn out.
(2) To replace the Punch Module drive belts:

1. With the fan removed from the shaft, work the belt [1] off the clutch
gear [2].
2. Install a new belt by looping it over the motor pulley and then work
it onto the clutch gear.
The belt requires no adjustment. It should have slight deflection
when pressed.
23.3.42 Replacing the punch module drive roller

(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
F-388
With the Punch Module out of the machine, the punch entrance side [1] and exit [2] drive rollers can be cleaned or replaced.
(3) To clean the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Remove the idler roller assembly [1].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(4) To replace the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Unplug the sensor [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the idler roller assembly [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the drive roller assembly [3].
4. Remove the E-Ring at the end of the drive roller shaft [1].
5. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E- Ring [1].
6. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module.
(5) To clean the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
F-389
(6) To replace the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Remove the 2 screws at each end of the idler roller assembly [3].
3. Remove the E-Ring [4] at the end of the drive roller shaft.
4. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E-Ring [4].
5. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module [5].
6. Remove the sensor [6].
7. To install the drive roller, reverse these steps.
23.3.43 Replacing the belt

(1) To replace belts:
1. Loosen the screws of the 3 belt idlers [1].
Installation Note
• When setting the belt tension, adjust the belt idlers so that
the belt has approximately 1/4" (6.35mm) of deflection.
2. Remove the belts in order as follows
3. To install and adjust the tension of the belts, reverse these steps.
23.3.44 Tools
Tools (needs to be reviewed by Engineering for current design accuracy)
Tools recommended for service of the GP-501 Punch:
(1) Standard Measure Tools (English as opposed to metric)

• Open end ignition wrench - 1/4" (required only for chad kit installation)
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4” and 5/16" nut drivers
• Hex wrenches, 3/32", 5/64", and 9/64"
(2) Other Recommended Tools and Supplies

• Wire cutters
F-390
• Screw driver, flat head, small
Supply of wire tie wraps
F-391
24. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-502

The descriptions of the periodical maintenance procedure GP-502 are mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
F-392
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 NOT DISASSEMBLE
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING
1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT DISASSEMBLE
1.1 List of Items that you must not disassemble
Note
• The list shows the parts which you must not disassemble in the field.
• For the details of the prohibited actions, refer to "G.1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw" to "G.1.2.6 Fusing section".
Numb Item
er
1 G.1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw
2 G.1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards
3 G.1.2.3 Writing unit cover
4 G.1.2.4 Photo conductor section
5 G.1.2.5 Intermediate transfer section
6 G.1.2.6 Fusing section
1.2 Items that you must not disassemble

1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw
Note
• The screw-lock is applied to prevent the screw looseness.
• When the machine is used or conveyed, some screws have a possibility to loosen by the oscillation and the load. The screw-lock
is applied to the screws.
• When you loosen or remove the screw which has been applied the screw-lock, be sure to apply the screw-lock again after you
tighten the screw.
1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards

Note
• Do not change the volume of the boards whose adjustment procedures are not indicated.
1.2.3 Writing unit cover

(1) Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 4 mounting screws of the writing unit cover/Up
• 6 mounting screws of the writing unit cover/Lw
G-1
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Writing unit cover/Up
[3] Screws which you must not remove [4] Writing unit cover/Lw
(2) Reason of prohibition

The inside of the writing unit is the laser path. Once dust comes into the inside when the cover is opened, it prevents the laser path.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the screws of the writing unit cover/Up and the writing unit cover/Lw.
1.2.4 Photo conductor section

• 1 screw of the stopper plate/Fr1 on the drum unit
• 1 screw of the stopper plate/Rr1 on the drum unit
• 2 screws of the stopper plate/Fr2 on the drum unit
• 2 screws of the stopper plate/Rr2 on the drum unit
G-2
[1] [3] [4]
[6]
[2] [1]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Stopper plate/Fr1
[3] Stopper plate/Rr1 [4] Screws which you must not remove
[5] Stopper plate/Fr2 [6] Stopper plate/Rr2
[7] Drum unit -

The distance between the drum unit and the developing roller is adjusted according to the installation positions of the stopper plate/Fr1 and
the stopper plate/Rr1.
The distance between the drum unit and the charging corona is adjusted according to the installation positions of the stopper plate/Fr2 and
the stopper plate/Rr2.
The installation position of the stopper plate/Fr1, stopper plate/Rr1, stopper plate/Fr2, and stopper plate/Rr2 are adjusted at the factory.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the screws of the stopper plate/Fr1, the stopper plate/Rr1, the stopper plate/Fr2 and the stopper plate/Rr2.
1.2.5 Intermediate transfer section

• 2 screws of the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68)
• 2 screws of the intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86)
G-3
[1]
[3] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86)
[3] Intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) -

The detection accuracy of the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) and the intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86) is
confirmed as factory default. Therefore, the detection accuracy of the disassembled sensors is not guaranteed.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the screws of the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) and the intermediate transfer steering
sensor (PS86) to adjust the sensors.
1.2.6 Fusing section

(1) Thermostat/Md (TS1), thermostat/Fr (TS2)
(a) Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 3 screws of the thermostat/Md (TS1)
• 3 screws of the thermostat/Fr (TS2)
G-4
[3] [4] [1] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Thermostat/Md (TS1)
[3] Screws which you must not remove [4] Thermostat/Fr (TS2)
(b) Reason of prohibition

The installation positions of the thermostat/Md (TS1) and the thermostat/Fr (TS2) are adjusted at the factory. If the thermostats are
disassembled, it disables them to detect temperature correctly.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the screws of the thermostat/Md (TS1) and the thermostat/Fr (TS2).
(2) JAM cleaning knob

• 1 screw of the JAM cleaning knob
[2] [1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] JAM cleaning knob

The screw-lock is applied on the screw of the JAM cleaning knob so that the screw is hardly loosened due to vibration.
If the screw is removed, loosened screw interferes with the fusing motor/Up2 (M64).
Therefore, after the screw of the JAM cleaning knob is removed, be sure to apply the screw-lock again.
G-5
(3) Neutralizing brush assy

• 2 screws of the neutralizing brush assy
[2] [1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Neutralizing brush assy

The installation position of the neutralizing brush assy is adjusted at the factory.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the screws of the neutralizing brush assy.
(4) Temperature sensor cover

• 2 screws of the temperature sensor cover
[1] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Temperature sensor cover

The installation position of the temperature sensor cover is adjusted at the factory. If you disassemble the temperature sensor cover, the
machine cannot detect temperature correctly.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the screws of the temperature sensor cover.
(5) Pressure adjustment screw

• 2 pressure adjustment screws
G-6
[2] [1]
[1] Pressure adjustment screw [2] Lower pressure roller

The pressing performance of the lower pressure roller is adjusted at the factory.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the pressure adjustment screws of the lower pressure roller.
G-7
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 2. WARNING AND
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMB...
2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMBLING

2.1 Precaution on removing the boards
WARNING
• To prevent the electric shock, do not touch the boards on the following table until a prescribed period of time passes after the
power switch is shut down.
There is a possibility of an electrical shock due to the charging voltage.
Board Standby time
Main body DC power supply/1 For 30 minutes
DC power supply/1 of the PF For 6 minutes
DC power supply/2 of the PF For 6 minutes
DC power supply of RU For 50 minutes
CAUTION
• When you remove the boards, check the safety and important warning items and then remove the boards following the removal
procedure.
• The removal procedures from the connector and the board support are omitted.
• Be sure to use the body earth when you touch the element on the board by necessity.
G-8
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 3. bizhub PRESS C1100/
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 C1085

3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts
Note
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and the reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace
(other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers do not require to be disassembled while they
are in normal service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, refer to "F.5.1 External section" to "F.5.15 Fusing section."
Numb Section Parts name
er
1 Cover Front cover
2 Filter box cover
3 Filter box
4 Rear cover/Up
5 Rear cover/Rt
6 Rear cover/Md
7 Rear cover/Lw
8 Left cover/Up1
9 Left cover/Up2
10 Left cover/Lw1
11 Left cover/Lw2
12 Left cover/Lw3
13 Right cover/Up1
14 Right cover/Up2
15 Right cover/Up3
16 Right cover/Lw1
17 Right cover/Lw2
18 Right cover/Lw3
19 Upper cover
20 Cover table
21 WT-512 (Option)
22 Operation panel section Operation panel section
23 Boards Main board unit
24 MFP board (MFPB)
25 SSD (SSD)
26 DC power supply/2 (DCPS/2)
27 DC power supply/5 (DCPS/5)
28 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: VI-507)
29 Scanner image processing board (IPB/S) (Option: PF-708)
30 Expansion board (EXPB) (Option: IC-602C)
31 Write section Writing unit
32 Process section Scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /C, /K
33 Process unit
34 Image correction unit
35 Toner collection section Toner collection pipe
36 Duplex section Duplex unit
37 ADU centering sensor assy
38 Duplex section
39 Lock lever/1
40 Lock lever/2
41 Fusing section Fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1)
42 Fusing belt temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2)
43 Lower pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM3)
44 Thermostat assy
45 HDD HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105)
46 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: IC-602C)
G-9
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures

3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
Note
• When you disassemble or reassemble the parts, be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
3.2.2 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the door of the waste toner box. (Refer to F.5.9.1 Replacing
the waste toner box)
2. Open the front door/Rt and the front door/Lt. (Refer to F.5.3.2
Opening and closing the toner hopper unit)
3. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the front cover [4].
reverse.
3.2.3 Filter box cover, filter box, rear cover/Up, /Rt, /Md, /Lw
(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the filter cover/2. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacing the ozone
filter and the dust-proof filter/Rr1)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then loosen 2 screws [2].
3. Remove the filter box cover [3].
[2]
G-10
[2] [1] 4. Loosen the screw [1].

5. Remove the filter box [2] to the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• The filter box [2] is connected to the main body via the
connector [3] inside the filter box.
When you remove the filter box [2], disconnect the
connector [3] and take a care not to damage the wiring
harness.
[3]
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Up [2].
[2] 7. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
G-11
[1] 8. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Md [2].
[2]
[1]
[2] [1] 9. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lw [2].
reverse.
3.2.4 Left cover/Up1, /Up2, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 18 screws [1], and then remove the left cover/Lw1 [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the left cover/Lw2 [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the left cover/Lw3 [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
G-12
[2] [1] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up1 [2].
[1] [2] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up2 [2].
reverse.
3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove WT-512. (Refer to G.3.2.7 WT-512 (Option))
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Up2 [2].
[2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Up3 [2].
[1] [2] 4. Remove the dust-proof filter/Rt. (Refer to F.5.1.1 Replacing the
dust-proof filter/Rt)
5. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the lock lever assy [2].
G-13
[1] 6. Remove 11 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Up1 [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2] [1] 7. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Lw1 [2].
[1] [2] 8. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Lw1 [2].
reverse.
3.2.6 Upper cover, cover table

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the working table. (Refer to G.3.2.7 WT-512 (Option))
[1] 2. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening and closing
3. Loosen 3 screws [1], and then remove the cover table [2].
[1] [2]
G-14
4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover [2].
reverse.
[2] [1]
3.2.7 WT-512 (Option)

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. When the operation panel is installed on WT-512, remove the
operation panel. (Refer to G.3.2.8 Operation panel section)
2. Remove the thumb nuts [1], 2 each, and then remove the working
table [3].
reverse.
[1]
3.2.8 Operation panel section

(1) Procedure
Note
• The operation panels are installed on WT-512, PF-707, and RU-511.
• On every case, the installation procedure is the same. For example, the following describes when the operational panel is
installed to WT-512.
1. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ground [2].
2. Loosen 2 screws [3] and disconnect the connector [4].
3. Remove the installation screw [5], and remove the operation panel
[6].
reverse.
[6] [5] [1][2] [4] [3]
G-15
(2) Installation place

Note
• The operation panels are installed on WT-512, PF-707, and RU-511.
• Do not install the operation panel to the place that is not described in the following description. When you install the operation
panel on the place that is not described, the operation panel is not fixed and becomes unbalanced.
(a) For WT-512

1. Install the operation panel section to the screw hole [1].
[1]
Note
• The screw cover is installed on the screw hole [1].
When you install the operation panel, remove the screw
cover.
(b) For PF-707

[1]
Note
• The screw cover and the screw are installed on the screw
hole [1].
cover and the screw.
• Do not use the screw hole other than the screw hole [1].
(c) For RU-511

[1]
Note
• The screw cover and the screw are installed on the screw
hole [1].
cover and the screw.
• Do not use the screw hole other than the screw hole [1].
3.2.9 Main board unit

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover/Up, the rear cover/Rt, the rear cover/Md
and the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.3.2.3 Filter box cover, filter box,
rear cover/Up, /Rt, /Md, /Lw)
2. Remove the right cover/Up2 and the right cover/Up3. (Refer to G.
3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3)
3. Remove the HDD cover. (Refer to G.3.2.28 HDD unit (Option:
IC-602C, UK-105))
4. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Upper cover, cover
table)
5. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the connection panel [2].
G-16
[1] [2] 6. Release the wiring harness [2] from 2 clamps [1].
[2] 7. Disconnect 7 connectors [1].

8. Remove 17 screws [2], and then open the board cover [3] in the
arrowed direction.
Note
[3] • Be careful that opening the board cover [3] at 90 degrees
or more have a possibility of damaging the parts.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3] [2] [1] [4] 9. Remove the HDD unit. (Only when IC-602C or UK-105 is
equipped) (Refer to G.3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105))
10. Remove HDD/5 (HDD/5). (Only when IC-602C is equipped) (Refer
to G.3.2.29 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: IC-602C))
11. Remove 4 connectors [1] to release the wiring harness [2], and
take it aside from the main board unit [3].
G-17
13. Close the board cover, and then remove 8 screws [1] to open the
main board unit [2] in the arrowed direction.
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
14. Remove the main board unit [1] in the arrowed direction.
[1]
3.2.10 MFP board (MFPB)

(1) Procedure
Note
• Never touch the memory board that is installed on the MFP board.
[1]
G-18
[1] [1] 1. Open the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.9 Main board unit)
[1]
[1] [3] [2] 3. Remove 4 screws [1].

[1]
[1]
[2] [1] [3] [4] [5] 6. Push 2 edges [3] of the connector to the direction of the arrow
while you hold the CPU cooling fan (FM33) [1] and support the
MFP board (MFPB) [2]. Then, release the connector [4] and
remove the MFP board (MFPB) [2].
Note
• Be careful not to let the wiring harness [5] touch the
board.
G-19
[4] [1] Note

• When HDD Lock Password is disabled and you replace
the MFP board (MFPB), reinstall the SSD (SSD) [2] of the
old MFP board (MFPB) [1] to the new MFP board (MFPB)
[3]. (Refer to G.3.2.11 SSD (SSD))
• When HDD Lock Password is enabled and you replace the
MFP board (MFPB), reinstall the SSD (SSD) [2] and the
EEPROM [4] of the old MFP board (MFPB) [1] to the new
MFP board (MFPB) [3]. (Refer to G.3.2.11 SSD (SSD))
[2] [3]
[4] [2]
Note
A • When you install the EEPROM, be sure to install the
EEPROM so that the "A" part comes in the proper
direction.
A
a04jf2c017ca
[2] [1] [3] [4] 7. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
• On the installation, push 2 edges [3] of the connector to
the direction of the arrow while you hold the CPU cooling
fan (FM33) [1] and support the MFP board (MFPB) [2].
Then, connect the connector [4] and install the MFP board
(MFPB) [2].
If you push the position other than the connector edge [3],
the MFP board (MFPB) possibly gets damaged.
3.2.11 SSD (SSD)

Note
• For how to get or replace the SSD (SSD), contact the service manager of Konica Minolta.
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before you replace the SSD (SSD), be sure to contact the service manager of Konica
Minolta.
G-20
(1) Procedure
1. Open the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.9 Main board unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SSD (SSD) [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• After the SSD (SSD) is replaced, conduct rewriting of the
firmware. (Refer to J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)

reverse.
[1] [2]
3.2.12 DC power supply unit/2 (DCPS/2), DC power supply unit/5 (DCPS/5)

WARNING
• Do not touch the DC power supply/2 for 10 minutes after the main power switch (SW1) is deactivated. There is a possibility of an
electrical shock due to the charging voltage.
• Do not touch the DC power supply/5 for 40 minutes after the main power switch (SW1) is deactivated. There is a possibility of an
electrical shock due to the charging voltage.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the electric elements and patterns on the main power board.
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.3.2.2 Front cover)
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then pull out the front inside cooling fan
assy [2].
[2] [1] 3. Remove the connector [1], and then pull out the front inside
cooling fan assy [2].
G-21
[2] [1] 4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and then release the wiring harness.
5. Remove 6 screws [2], and then remove the power supply cover [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[2] [1] [2] 6. Remove 6 connectors [1] to release the wiring harness, and then
remove 4 screws [2] to remove the DC power supply/2 assy [3].
[2] [3]
[2] [1] 7. Remove 14 screws [1], and then remove the DC power supply/2
(DCPS/2) [2].
[1] [1]
[3] [1] 8. Remove 3 connectors [1], and then remove 3 screws [2] to remove
the DC power supply/5 (DCPS/5) [3].
reverse.
[2]
G-22
3.2.13 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: VI-507)

[1] [3] [2]
2. Remove 4 connector fixing screws [1].
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the VIF board (VIFB) [2].
[1] [3] [2]
Note
• When you install the VIF board (VIFB) [2], push 4 marks [3]
on the board and connect 2 connectors.
5. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [3]
3.2.14 Scanner image processing board (IPB/S) (Option: PF-708)

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.9 Main board unit)
2. Remove 2 connector fixing screws [1].
G-23
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the scanner image
processing board (IPB/S) [2].
[1] Note
• When you install the scanner image processing board
(IPB/S) [2], push 2 marks [3] on the board and connect the
connector.

reverse.
[1] [1] [2]
[3] [3]
3.2.15 Expansion board (EXPB) (Option: IC-602C)

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2]
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the expansion board
(EXPB) [2].
Note
• When you install the expansion board (EXPB) [2], push 2
marks [3] on the board and connect connectors.

reverse.
3.2.16 Writing unit

WARNING
• Do not execute energization while the writing unit is misaligned from the regular installation position.
• Never remove the cover of the writing unit during energization. The laser beam threatens vision.
Note
• Never remove the cover of the writing unit. Also, never loosen the screw.
• When you remove the writing unit, be sure not to touch the dust proof glass. (Not to contaminate the glass)
• Never remove the writing unit for 2 minutes after the main power switch (SW1) is deactivated.
G-24
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the dust-proof filter/Rt. (Refer to F.5.1.1 Replacing the
dust-proof filter/Rt)
2. Remove the right cover/Up1. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, /
Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3)
4. Remove 9 screws [2], loosen 2 screws [3], and then remove the
fan mounting plate/Rt [4].
[2] [3] [2] [3] [2]
[4]
5. Disconnect the connector [1], 1 each, and then release the wiring
harness.
6. Disconnect the connectors [4], 2 each.
[1]
[2]
G-25
[1] [2] 7. Remove the tape [2] that is applied on the new writing unit [1].
[1][3] [2] 8. Use the tape [1] that is removed in the step 7 to fix the wiring
harness [2] at the position [3].
[9] 9. Remove the screw [1], 1 each. Then, slide 4 pressure plate assy
[2] to the right and remove them.
Note
• When you reinstall the pressure plate assy [2], be sure to
align the spring [4] with the guide [3].
10. Remove the writing unit/Y [5], the writing unit/M [6], the writing unit/
C [7], and the writing unit/K [8].
Note
• During the removal of the writing unit/Y [5], be careful that
the unit does not contact the wiring harness [9].
• The writing unit/C, the writing unit/M, the writing unit/Y,
and the writing unit/K are the common units.
reverse.
12. After the writing unit/K is disassembled and assembled, conduct
the following steps.
dust-proof glass)
• Skew initial position memory (refer to I.4.3.11 Skew Initial
Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos.
Memory))
• I/O check mode (Refer to I.4.7.13 Replacing procedure of the
write unit)
• Crosswise direction skew adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.16
[2] [3][4] [1] Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Restart timing adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.1 Restart Timing
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
• Beam pitch adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.17 Beam Pitch
13. After the writing unit/Y, the writing unit/M and the writing unit/C are
disassembled and assembled, conduct the following steps.
dust-proof glass)
• Skew initial position memory (refer to I.4.3.11 Skew Initial
Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos.
Memory))
• I/O check mode (Refer to I.4.7.13 Replacing procedure of the
write unit)
G-26
• Beam pitch adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.17 Beam Pitch
3.2.17 Scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /C, /K

Note
• A new model that improves the toner suction performance is introduced for the scatter duct assy/Y, the scatter duct assy/M, the
scatter duct assy/C, and the scatter duct assy/K.
• Use of the new model of the scatter duct assy is recommended.
• To distinguish between the new model and the old model, be sure to refer to "I.4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct assy and the
dust-proof filter/Rt".

charging corona)
unit)
Note

4. Remove all drum units. (Refer to F.5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit)
[3] [2] [1] 5. Remove all developing units. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing the
7. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the suction duct/Y [3].
Note
• Because the operation space is narrow, you need the
stubby driver (short driver).
[2] [1] 8. Loosen 2 screws [1].

9. Remove the clamp [2].
Note
• Check that the leading edge of the loosened screw [1]
does not project inside the process unit.
[1]
G-27
[1]
Note
• Check that the leading edge of the loosened screw [1]
does not project inside the process unit.
[1]
G-28
[1]
12. Remove the 3 screws [1], and then remove the scatter duct assy/Y
[1] [2].
[2]
G-29
13. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the scatter duct assy/M [2].
Note
• Be sure to remove the scatter duct assy/C [3] and the
scatter duct assy/K [4] by the same procedures as the
scatter duct assy/M [2].
[3] [4]
[2] [1]
(2) Preparation of new model (composition of scatter duct assy/Y)

Note
• The scatter duct assy/Y consists of the scatter duct/Y [1], the scatter seal/1 [2], and the scatter seal/2 [3].
You need to attach the scatter seal/1 [2] and the scatter seal/2 [3] on the scatter duct/Y [1] in the field.
• For the scatter duct assy/M, the scatter duct assy/C, and the scatter duct assy/K, there is no part to attach.
[3] [1] [2]
1. Clean the seal attaching position [2] of the scatter duct/Y [1].
[1] [2]
G-30
2. Attach the scatter seal/1 [2] to the scatter duct/Y [1].
a
Standard value a: 0 mm to 0.5 mm
Note
• Press the scatter seal/1 [2] and attach it firmly.
[2]
[1]
a 3. Attach the scatter seal/2 [2] to the scatter duct/Y [1].

Standard value a: 0 mm to 0.5 mm
Note
• Press the scatter seal/2 [2] and attach it firmly.
[2]
[1]
G-31
(3) Installation procedures of new model

1. Remove the old model of the scatter duct assy/Y, the scatter duct
assy/M, the scatter duct assy/C, and the scatter duct assy/K.
(Refer to G.3.2.17.(1) Procedure for removal)
2. Compose the new model of scatter duct assy/Y. (Attach the scatter
seal/1 and the scatter seal/2 to the scatter duct/Y. ) (Refer to G.
3.2.17.(2) Preparation of new model (composition of scatter duct
assy/Y))
3. Install the scatter duct assy/M [2] with 2 screws [1].
Note
• Be sure to install the scatter duct assy/C [3] and the
scatter duct assy/K [4] by the same procedures as the
scatter duct assy/M [2].
[3] [4]
[2] [1]
Note
• Check that the edge [1] of the scatter duct assy/M comes
the upper side of the suction duct/M [2].
[1] [2]
G-32
4. Install the scatter duct assy/Y [2] with 3 screws [1].
[1]
[2]
Note
• Check that the edge [1] of the scatter duct assy/Y comes
the upper side of the metal frame [2] of the process unit.
• When the scatter duct assy/Y [1] is not correctly installed,
the installation position of the developing unit is
abnormal. An image problem and a malfunction code
possibly occur.
[2] [1]
G-33
5. Install the screw [1].
[1]
6. Tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[2] [1] 7. Tighten 2 screws [1].

8. Install the clamp [2].
G-34
9. Install the suction duct/Y [3] with 1 screw [1] and 2 screws [2].
Note
• Because the operation space is narrow, you need the
stubby driver (short driver).
10. Install all developing units. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing the

11. Install all drum units. (Refer to F.5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit)
12. Install the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.7.1 Removing
13. Insert the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.4 Pulling out the process
[3] [2] [1] unit)
14. Install the charging corona. (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replacing the
charging corona)
3.2.18 Process unit

Note
• Before the process unit is removed, be sure to remove the charging corona, the intermediate transfer unit, the drum unit, and the
developing unit.
• Be sure not to remove the black screw inside the process unit.
(1) Procedure
Note
2. Remove all drum units. (Refer to F.5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit)
3. Remove all developing units. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing the
4. Remove the 4 screws [1].
[7] [8] [6] [1] [5] 5. Push back the process unit [5] until the screw [4] can be seen from
the hole [3] of the guide rail/Rt [2].
Note
• The black screw fixes the pin that holds the process unit.
Be sure not to remove the black screw, or the process unit
falls.
7. Push back the process unit [5] until the screw [8] can be seen from
the hole [7] of the guide rail/Lt [6].
Note
• The black screw fixes the pin that holds the process unit.
Be sure not to remove the black screw, or the process unit
falls.
[2] [1] [4] [3]
G-35
9. Pull out the process unit [1].
Note
• Be sure to remove the process unit with 2 people on both
the left and right sides.
10. Lift the left side of the process unit [1] and push back the guide rail/
Lt [2]. Then, move the process unit [1] to the arrow-marked
direction to release it from the guide rail/Lt [2].
11. Push back the guide rail [2] to the inside of the main body.
12. Lift the process unit [1] to remove it from the guide rail/Rt [3].
[2] [1] [4] Note
• After the process unit [1] is removed, be sure to put it so
that the left side [4] faces down.

reverse.
14. After you install the process unit, conduct the following items.
dust-proof glass)
15. After you install the drum unit, conduct the following items in the
order.
• Initial drum rotation (Refer to I.4.4.13 Initial Drum Rotation
• Printer gamma sensor adjustment (refer to I.4.3.31 Printer
Adjustment))
[3] • Printer Gamma Offset Auto.(Refer to I.4.3.30 Printer Gamma
Adjustment))
Peculiarity Adj.))
3.2.19 Image correction unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.3.2.18 Process unit)
Note
• When you remove the image correction unit assy, turn up
[1] the bottom of the process unit.
G-36
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and then release the wiring harness.
[3] 4. Remove 3 screws [2] and 6 screws [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
[1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the image correction unit
assy [2].
[1] [2]
G-37
7. Remove the supporting bracket/Fr [2] and the supporting bracket/
Rr [3], and then remove the image correction unit [4].
reverse.
9. After the image correction unit is replaced, conduct the following
steps.
dust-proof glass)
[1] [3] • Printer gamma sensor adjustment (refer to I.4.3.31 Printer
Adjustment))
• Printer Gamma Offset Auto.(Refer to I.4.3.30 Printer Gamma
Adjustment))
• Color registration gap measurement/Manual adjustment (Refer
to I.4.3.14 Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer
Adjustment))
[4] [1] [2]
3.2.20 Toner collection pipe

(1) Procedure
Note
• When the SC codes C-2211, C-2212, C-2213, C-2214 (Drum motor abnormality), C-2222 (Waste toner collection motor
abnormality), C-2231 (Filter cleaning motor abnormality), C-2233 (Intermediate transfer cleaning motor abnormality) occur, clean
the toner collection pipe following this procedure.
1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.3.2.18 Process unit)
2. Remove the duplex section. (Refer to G.3.2.23 Duplex section)
3. To prevent the inside of the body from getting contaminated by the
waste toner falling down, put paper [2] under the toner collection
pipe [1].
[2] [1]
[1] [2] 4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the heat shield plate [2].
G-38
[1] [2] 5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the toner collection pipe
cover [2].
[1] [3] [2] [1] 6. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe assy [2] and the vertical conveyance pipe/2 assy [3].

8. Remove 8 screws [2], and then remove the vertical conveyance
pipe/1 assy [3].
Note
[2] • When you reinstall the vertical conveyance pipe/1 assy, be
sure to reinstall it so that the metal plate of the assy is in
contact with the main body. When the metal plate is not in
contact with the main body, the operation error of the
waste toner collection motor occurs.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
G-39
10. Remove the horizontal conveyance pipe assy [2] from the vertical
conveyance pipe/2 assy [1].
[2]
[1]
11. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
[6] pipe/Lt1 [2].
pipe/Lt2 [4].
13. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the collection joint [6].
[2] [1] [4] [3] [5]
14. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3], the spacer [4] and
[3] [5] the bearing [5], and then remove the vertical conveyance pipe/2
[6].
[1] [2] [4] [6]

[2] [3] [1] 15. Remove 2 screws [2] of the vertical conveyance pipe/1 assy [1],
and then remove the antenna board/2 (ANTB/2) (option) [3].
G-40
[3] 16. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and the screw [2], 1 each, and
then remove the drum/Y collection pipe [3], the drum/M collection
pipe [4], the drum/C collection pipe [5] and the drum/K collection
pipe [6].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[6]
17. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the vertical conveyance
pipe/1-5 [2], the vertical conveyance pipe/1-4 [3], the vertical
conveyance pipe/1-3 [4], the vertical conveyance pipe/1-2 [5], and
[6] the vertical conveyance pipe/1-1 [6].
reverse.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
G-41
3.2.21 Duplex unit

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [3] [2] 3. Release the jam release lever [1], and then lower the duplex unit
[2].
4. Loosen the screw [3], 1 each, and then remove the knob [4] and
the knob [5].
Note
• The knob [4] and the knob [5] have the same shapes but
the different labels. Be careful to attach them.
• The knob [4] has the label M11.
The knob [5] has the label M10.
[1]
5. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the duplex unit cover [2].
Note
• Before the removal of the duplex unit cover [2], be sure to
rotate the locking material/Rt [3] and secure a space to
remove it.
[2] [1] [3]

6. Remove 2 screws [1], and then release 2 wires [2].
Note
• When the wires [2] are released, the duplex unit [3] falls.
Be sure to hold the duplex unit [3] by hand securely to
prevent it from falling.
[1] [2] [3]
G-42
7. Close the duplex unit [1], and then remove the C-clip [2].
[2] [1]
8. Open the duplex unit [1], and then remove it in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
• Because the duplex unit [1] is heavy, be sure to hold it by
hand securely to prevent it from falling during the
removal.
[1]
Note
• During the installation of the duplex unit [1], be sure to
insert the pin [2] of the duplex unit to the mounting hole
[3] at the duplex section and the pin [4] to the mounting
hole [5].
[2] [3] [1] [5] [4]
3.2.22 ADU centering sensor assy

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the duplex unit. (Refer to G.3.2.21 Duplex unit)
3. Remove the duplex guide assy [3] while you open the jam
processing guide [2].
[3] [2] [1]
G-43
Note
[3] • When you install the duplex guide assy [1], be sure to
match 2 projections [2] of the duplex guide assy and 2
holes [3] of the duplex unit.
[2] [1]
[2] [1] 4. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the duplex guide/1 [2].
Note
• When you remove the duplex guide/1 [2], be careful not to
damage the roller.
[3] Note
• When you install the duplex guide/1 [1], be sure to match
2 projections [2] of the duplex guide/1 and 2 holes [3].
[2] [1]
G-44
[2] [1] 5. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the duplex guide/2 [2].
Note
damage the roller.
[3] Note
[2] [1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the duplex guide/3 [2].
[2] [1] Note
damage the roller.
G-45
[3] Note
[2] [1]
7. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the ADU conveyance roller
[1] assy/2 [2].
[2]
8. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2].
[2] [1]
G-46

11. Pull out the connector [2] from the hole [3].

13. Release the belt [3] from the ADU loop motor (M57) [2].
[3] [2]
[1] [1]
Note
• When you attach the belt [1], attach it so that the belt [1] is
on the pulley [2].
[2] [1]
G-47
[2] [1] 14. Rotate the ADU loop motor (M57) [1] to the direction of the arrow
[2].
[1] [2] 15. Rotate the ADU loop motor (M57) [1] to the direction of the arrow
[2], and then remove it.
Note
• When you install the ADU loop motor (M57) [1], be sure to
match the projection [2] of the duplex unit and the hole [3]
of the ADU loop motor (M57).
[3] [2] [1]
G-48
16. Release the clamp [1].
17. Remove 2 screws [2] and the screw [3].
18. Move the ADU conveyance roller assy/3 [4] to the direction of the
arrow and release the fixing.
Note
• When you install the ADU conveyance roller assy/3 [4],
tighten the screw [3] first.
• When you install the ADU conveyance roller assy/3 [4], be
careful not to nip the wiring harness by the screw [2].
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
19. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the ADU cooling fan/1
(FM36) [2].
[1] [2] [1]
G-49
[3] [1] [5] 20. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and then release the wiring harness.
21. Remove 6 screws [2], and then remove the ADU centering sensor
assy [3].
Note
• When you remove or reinstall the ADU centering sensor
assy [3], be careful not to damage the sensor face [4].
• When you reinstall the ADU centering sensor assy [3],
push it to the direction of the arrow [5]. If you do not push
the assy to reinstall it, the error detection of centering
occurs.

reverse.
23. After you install the ADU centering sensor assy, conduct the
[2] [4] following adjustment.
• Centering Adjustment (Corrects the installation position error
of the centering sensor of ADU. ) (Refer to I.4.3.4 Centering
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
3.2.23 Duplex section

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out and
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.12.3 Removing and
4. Remove the registration unit. (Refer to F.5.11.2 Replacing the
registration roller and the torque limiter)
5. Remove the screw [1], and then pull out the duplex section pull out
lever [2].
6. Remove 4 screws [3]. Then remove the duplex section cover/Lt [5]
while you open the duplex unit [4].
[5] [4] [2] [1]
G-50
[5] 8. Remove 2 springs [2].
9. Remove 2 C-clips [3], and then release the fix of the retaining
plate/Fr [4] and the retaining plate/Rr [5].
10. Remove the C-clip [6], and then release the bearing [7] in the
11. Remove the E-ring [8], and then release the bearing [9] in the
12. Remove the reverse unit [10].
[3] [9] [8] [2]
[10] [2] [3]
[4]
[6] [7] [1]

[1] [3] [2] 14. Remove the screw [2], and then release the fix of the connecting
arm [3].
G-51
[1] Note
• The black screw fixes the guide pin that holds the duplex
section.
Be sure not to remove the black screw, or the duplex
section falls.
[1]
16. Pull the guide rail/Rt [2] while you lift the bottom of the wiring
[4] [3] mounting cover/Rt [1].
Move each guide pin [3] to the corresponding long hole [4].
[2] [1]
G-52
17. Remove the duplex section [3] from the guide rail/Rt [1] and the
guide rail/Lt [2].
Note
• Be sure to remove the duplex section with 2 people on
both the paper feed side and the paper exit side.
• The worker at the paper feed side must hold the bottom of
the wiring mounting cover/Rt [4] during the removal of the
duplex section.
• The worker at the paper exit side must hold the stay [5]
during the removal of the duplex section.
[3] [5] [2]
[4] [1]
3.2.24 Lock lever/1, /2

Note
• The main body has a risk of falling down when the process unit and the duplex section are pulled out at the same time. The lock
lever/1 and the lock lever/2 are provided to prevent the main body from falling down. The process unit and the duplex section
cannot be pulled out at the same time with the levers.
When the process unit or the duplex section cannot be pulled out independently, a wrong operation possibly deforms the lock
lever/1 and the lock lever/2. In that case, replace the levers.
• Since the lock lever/1 and the lock lever/2 are not the target parts of the routine maintenance, they are installed not to be replaced.
Therefore, conduct the replacement under the indirect vision. Replace the parts following the installation positions of each part on
the pictures.
G-53
(1) Procedure
[6] [5] the toner hopper unit)
2. Pull out the duplex section while you unlock the pull out lever of
the duplex section. Then turn the lever counterclockwise and pull
out the duplex section until the screw [1] can be reached. (Refer to
F.5.13.1 Pulling out and reinstalling the duplex section)
Note
• Depending on the deformed condition of the lock lever/1
[2] and the lock lever/2 [3], the duplex section cannot be
pulled out smoothly. However, press the levers and keep
enough space to access the screw [1].
Note
[3] [5] [1] [2] • When you reinstall the stopper [4], be sure to align the
projection [5] with the positioning hole [6].
[4] 4. Once the stopper [4] is removed, the lock lever/1 [2] and the lock
lever/2 [3] are deactivated. Then, pull out only the duplex section
[7] furthermore.
WARNING
[2] • Do not pull out the process unit since it has a risk of
[3] falling down the main body.
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and then remove the lock lever/2 [3].
[7]
6. Remove the spring [9] from the lock lever/2 [3].
[1] [3] [8]
Note
• During a replacement, be careful about the installation
direction of the spring [9] and the installation position of
the hook.
7. Remove 3 screws [10] and then remove the lever enforcing plate
[9] [11].
8. Remove the E-ring [12] and then remove the lock lever/1 [2].
9. Remove the spring [13] from the lock lever/1 [2].
Note
[12] [10] [11] • When you replace, be careful about the installation
direction of the spring [13] and the installation position of
the hook.
[13]
[2]
G-54
3.2.25 Fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1), fusing belt temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2)
(1) Procedure
4. Remove the wiring mounting cover. (Refer to F.5.12.11 Replacing
the upper pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM8), the fusing
belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6))
[2] [5] [7] [6] 6. Remove the screw [3] while you hold the sensor cover [2].
7. Remove the fusing belt temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2) [4].
Note
• Be careful not to touch the surface [5] of the sensor.
9. Remove the screw [8] while you hold the sensor cover [7].
10. Remove the fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1) [9].
Note
• Be careful not to touch the surface [5] of the sensor.

reverse.
[8] [9] [3] [4] [1]
3.2.26 Lower pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM3)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the fusing cover/Up. (Refer to F.5.12.6 Replacing the
fusing steering actuator assy)
2. Remove the fusing cover/Lw1 and the fusing cover/Lw2. (Refer to
F.5.12.7 Replacing the fusing bearing/Lw, the heat insulating
sleeve/Lw, and the lower pressure roller)
3. Remove the clamp [1], and release the wiring harness.
[1]
4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then release the fix of the fusing
entrance guide/Lw [2].
Note
• The fusing entrance guide/Lw [2] is connected to the
fusing unit via the wiring harness [3].
During the removal of the fusing entrance guide/Lw [2], be
careful not to damage the wiring harness [3].
[3] [1] [2]

Note
• The cooling sheet [2] is equipped with the fusing entrance
guide/Lw [1].
Be sure to install the fusing entrance guide/Lw [1] so that
the cooling sheet [2] comes under the sensor stay [3].
[1] [2] [3]
G-55
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
[2] [1]
6. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the clamp [2].
[2] [1] [3]

8. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the lower pressure roller
temperature sensor (TEM3) [2].
Note
• Be careful not to touch the surface of the sensor.

reverse.
[1] [2]
3.2.27 Thermostat assy

(1) Procedure
4. Remove the fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1) and the
fusing belt temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2). (Refer to G.3.2.25
Fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1), fusing belt
temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2))
[1] [2] [3][4] 5. Remove the fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6). (Refer to F.
5.12.11 Replacing the upper pressure roller temperature sensor
(TEM8), the fusing belt temperature sensor/Fr (TEM6))
6. Push the projections [1], 2 each, and then remove the fastons [2],
2 each.
Note
• When you remove the fastons, be sure to hold its base
and remove it. Be sure not to take the wiring harness by
hand and pull it out.
• When you reinstall the fastens [2], be sure to install them
so that the projections [1] face forward. If the installed
projections [1] face backward, they cannot be pushed so
that the fastons [2] cannot be removed.
7. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground [4].
G-56
8. Release 5 wiring harnesses [1] from the clamp.
9. Remove each E-ring [2], and then remove the thermostat assy [3].
Note
• Be careful not to touch the surface of the thermostat.

reverse.
[1] [2]
[3]
3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105)

Note
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before you replace the HDD unit (HDD/1 (HDD/1) to HDD/4 (HDD/4)), be sure to contact
the service manager of Konica Minolta.
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt, the rear cover/Md, the rear cover/Lw.
(Refer to G.3.2.3 Filter box cover, filter box, rear cover/Up, /Rt, /
Md, /Lw)
2. When IC-602C is connected, remove the connector [1] and
connector [2].
3. When UK-105 is connected, remove the connector [2].
[1] 4. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the HDD cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] 5. Open the board cover. (refer to G.3.2.9 Main board unit)
Note
• Be sure that the number of the wiring harness and the
board match when 4 connectors [1] are installed.
G-57
7. Remove the connector [1], and then take the wiring harness [2]
aside from the main board unit [3].
[3] [1] [2]

[1] [3] [2] 8. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the HDD unit [2].
Note
• When you remove the HDD unit [2], be careful that the
earth plate [3] does not deform.

reverse.
3.2.29 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: IC-602C)

Note
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the HDD/5 (HDD/5) is replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of Konica
Minolta.
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [3] 1. Open the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.9 Main board unit)
3. Release the wiring harness [2] from the clamp.
4. Remove 4 screws [3], and then remove the HDD/5 [4].

reverse.
G-58
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 4. DF-626
4. DF-626
Num
Section Parts name
ber
1 Main body DF
2 Cover Paper feed cover
3 Front cover
4 Rear cover
5 Original feed tray front cover
6 Paper feed section Paper feed motor (M8)
8 Conveyance section Registration motor (M2)
9 Reading motor (M1)
10 Reading roller pressure release motor (M4)
11 Glass cleaning motor (M9)
12 Glass cleaning roller unit
13 REVERSE/EXIT SECTION Reverse path switching solenoid (SD1)
14 Reverse exit path switching solenoid (SD2)
15 Exit motor (M3)
16 OTHERS DF control board (DFCB)
17 Restriction plate positional VR (VR1)
18 Cooling fan (FM1)

CAUTION
4.2.2 DF
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector installation
plate [2].
[2]
[1]
G-59
[2] [4] [1] [2] [3] 3. Open the DF [1].

Note
• If the DF [1] is raised only at angles up to 60 degrees,
remove 3 screws [2], and then change the positions of the
stopper/Lt [3] and the stopper/Rt [4] to the lower side.

5. Remove the DF [2].
Note
• When you hold the DF, be sure to hold the part [3] in the
picture. If you hold the part [4], the DF can be curved.

[2]
[3]
[4]
4.2.3 The paper feed cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the left cover [1].
G-60
[1] 2. Raise the original feed tray [1].
3. Remove 2 shoulder screws [1] and 2 screws [2].

4. Open the paper feed cover [3].
[2]
[3] [1]
Note
• When you tighten the 2 screws [1], be sure to check that
there is no clearance at the craw part [2]. To prevent a
[1] clearance, tighten 2 screws [1] while you press the paper
feed cover [3] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
4.2.4 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
[2] 2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the front cover [2].
reverse.
[1]
G-61
4.2.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
Note
• If you can not open the DF more than 60 degrees, change
the positions of the stopper/Lt [3] and the stopper/Rt [4] to
the lower side. (Refer to G.4.2.2 DF)
[1] [1]

[2] [1] [3] 4. Raise the original feed tray.
5. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
Note
• To prevent any damage, remove the rear cover while you
press the part [3] in the picture.

[1] [2] removal steps in reverse.
Note
• Insert the part [1] in the picture under the paper feed cover
[2].
• Be careful not to damage the rear cover.
4.2.6 Original feed tray front cover

(1) Procedure
G-62
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and remove the original feed tray

front cover [2].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
4.2.7 Paper feed motor (M8)

(1) Procedure
[2] 2. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [1].
[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the paper feed motor assy [2].
[2]
4.2.8 Registration motor (M2)

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 2. Remove the paper feed motor. (Refer to G.4.2.7 Paper feed motor
(M8))
4. Release the wiring harness from 3 clamps [2].
5. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground cable [4].
[2] [4]
G-63
6. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

[2]
[1]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the registration motor assy
[1] [2].
[2]
4.2.9 Reading motor (M1)

(1) Procedure
[2] 2. Remove the paper feed motor. (Refer to G.4.2.7 Paper feed motor
(M8))
3. Remove the registration motor. (Refer to G.4.2.8 Registration
motor (M2))
5. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the reading motor assy [3].
[2] [1]
4.2.10 Reading roller pressure release motor (M4)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.4.2.4 Front cover)
G-64

[3] 4. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2].
5. Remove the reading roller pressure release motor assy [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
4.2.11 Glass cleaning motor (M9)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.4.2.5 Rear cover)
[1] 2. Release the wiring harness from 6 clamps [1].
4. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground cable [4].
[1] [4] [3] [2]
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and the belt [2]. Then remove the glass
[2] [3] cleaning motor assy [3].
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the glass cleaning motor [2].
[1]
4.2.12 Glass cleaning roller unit

1. Open the DF.
[2] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and the bearing [2].
[1]
G-65
3. Shift the bearing [1], and remove the belt [2].

[2]
[1]
4. Remove the glass cleaning roller unit [2] while you open the before
[2] read film assy [1].
[1]

Note
• When you install the glass cleaning roller unit, conduct the following adjustment.
1. Insert the wrench [2] to the hole [1] of the plate and align the
[1] wrench and the oval hole [3] of the pulley.
2. Adjust the position of the cleaning roller so that the flat milled
surface [4] faces directly underneath. Then install the belt.
[2]
[3]
[4]
Note
• When you press the main power switch after the
preceding adjustment, be sure to check that the shaft [1]
is at the correct position (home position).
[1]
G-66
4.2.13 Reverse path switching solenoid (SD1)

(1) Procedure
3. Release the wiring harness from 2 clamps [2] and the clamp [3].
[1] [2]
4. Remove the screw [1] and the spring [2]. Then remove the reverse
[3] [2] [1] path switching solenoid [3].
Note
• When you install the screw [1], align the dowel [2] with the
scale [3] with which the dowel was aligned before the
screw was removed. Then tighten the screw.
[1]
4.2.14 Reverse exit path switching solenoid (SD2)

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the paper feed motor. (Refer to G.4.2.7 Paper feed motor
(M8))
3. Remove the registration motor. (Refer to G.4.2.8 Registration
motor (M2))
[8] [4] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then release the wiring harness guide
[2].
5. Remove the screw [3], and remove the ground cable.
6. Disconnect 2 connectors [4] of the sensor.
[7] [2] [1] [3] 7. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [5].
8. Remove the E-ring [6] and the bearing [7].
9. Remove the 4 screws [8], and remove the plate [9].
[4] [5] [8]

[6] [9]
G-67

[3] [4] [5]
12. Remove the screw [3] and the spring [4]. Then remove the reverse
exit path switching solenoid [5].
[2] [1]
Note
• When you install the screw [1], align the dowel [2] with the
scale [3] with which the dowel was aligned before the
screw was removed. Then tighten the screw.
[1]
4.2.15 Exit motor (M3)

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [1] and 2 clamps [2].
[2]

[3] [2] [4] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the exit motor assy [4].
[2] [1] [2]
4.2.16 DF control board (DFCB)

(1) Procedure
2. Disconnect all 15 connectors from the DF control board.
G-68

[2] [4] 4. Remove 4 screws [2], and remove the DF control board [3].
Note
• When you replace the DF control board, be sure to
perform the following operation.
5. Replace the EEPROM [4].

6. Upgrade the firmware.
7. Conduct the ADF original size adjustment.
[1] [3] [2]
4.2.17 Restriction plate positional VR (VR1)

cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the restriction plate
positional VR cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the restriction plate

[2] positional VR [2].
[1]

1. Open the side edge stop [1] of the original feed tray.
[1]
G-69
2. Reinstall the gear [1].

Note
[1] • Be sure to check the position of the gear and the
restriction plate positional VR.
3. Install the restriction plate positional VR [2] with 2 screws [1].

Note
[2]
• Align the arrows of the gear and the rack gear and install
it.
4. Connect the connector.

[1]
5. Install the restriction plate positional VR cover.
Note
• When you replace the restriction plate positional VR, be
sure to perform the following operation.
6. Perform the original width detection adjustment.

7. Deactivate the main power switch and activate it again. Then
check that the size detection operates normally.
4.2.18 Cooling fan (FM1)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the DF control board. (Refer to G.4.2.16 DF control board
[2] (DFCB))
3. Remove the screw [2], and remove the cooling fan mounting plate
[3].
[1] [3]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the cooling fan [2].

[1]
G-70
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 5. PF-707/708
5. PF-707/708
5.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble
5.1.1 CCD unit
(1) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 7 positioning screws of the CCD unit installation reference plate
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
[1] Screws that you must not remove [2] CCD unit installation reference plate
[3] CCD unit -

The CCD unit installation reference plate serves as a reference position to install the CCD unit. Removal of this plate can shift the optical axis
of the CCD unit off the correct position. Therefore, be sure not to remove the mounting screws of the lens reference plate assy.
5.1.2 Mirror unit and exposure unit

• Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
[2] [1]
[1] Exposure unit [2] Mirror unit
G-71

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original that is read in the sub scan direction.
Therefore, adjusting the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit arbitrarily is not allowed. However, when the exposure
unit and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts must be reinstalled to the defined position.
5.1.3 Framework panel/1, framework panel/2

• 8 mounting screws of the framework panel/1
• 22 mounting screws of the framework panel/2
[1]
[2]
[2] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Screws which you must not remove

The framework panel/1 and the framework panel/2 are the parts of the PF framework parts. Therefore, removing the panels has a risk of a
scanning image trouble or a paper feed trouble. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the framework panel/1 and the framework panel/2.

er
1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover/Lt4
3 Rear cover/Lt3
4 Rear cover/Lt2
5 Rear cover/Lt1
6 Rear cover/Rt
7 Read cover/Fr
8 Upper surface cover/RrLt
9 Upper surface cover/RrRt
10 Read cover/Lt
11 Read cover/Rt
12 Read cover/Rr
13 Original glass assy
14 Upper surface cover/Rt
15 Upper surface cover/Lt
16 Upper surface cover/Fr
17 Front door
18 Tray front cover
19 SCANNER SECTION CCD unit
20 Exposure unit, exposure lamp
21 Scanner unit
22 Scanner wire
23 Tray section Tray
24 Lift wire
25 Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1
(FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12)
26 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)
27 Paper lift motor/1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)
28 Paper feed suction unit
G-72
29 Paper feed belt

30 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6)
31 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
32 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3
(SD16)
33 Paper feed check window
34 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
35 Horizontal conveyance unit
36 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)
37 Centering sensor assy

CAUTION
5.3.2 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1] [1]
5.3.3 Rear cover/Lt4

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt4 [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
G-73
5.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, /Lt3

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt4. (Refer to G.5.3.3 Rear cover/Lt4)
[1] 2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt2 [2].
reverse.
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
5.3.5 Rear cover/Lt1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.5.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, /Lt3)
reverse.
[2]
5.3.6 Rear cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
G-74
5.3.7 Read cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw caps [1].
[3] 2. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the read cover/Fr [3].
reverse.
[1] [2]
5.3.8 Upper surface cover/RrRt, /RrLt

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [5] 1. Remove 2 screw caps [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover/RrRt [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the upper cover/RrLt [6].
reverse.
[3] [6]
5.3.9 Read cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/RrLt. (Refer to G.5.3.8 Upper surface
cover/RrRt, /RrLt)
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the read cover/Lt [3].
reverse.
[3]
G-75
5.3.10 Read cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/RrRt. (Refer to G.5.3.8 Upper surface
[1] [2] cover/RrRt, /RrLt)
3. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the read cover/Rt [3].
reverse.
[3]
5.3.11 Read cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the read cover/Lt. (Refer to G.5.3.9 Read cover/Lt)
2. Remove the read cover/Rt. (Refer to G.5.3.10 Read cover/Rt)
3. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the read cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
[2]
5.3.12 Original glass assy

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the read cover/Rr. (Refer to G.5.3.11 Read cover/Rr)
[2] 2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the scanner cover/Lt [2].
[1]
G-76
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove 2 original glass mounting

[1] [2] [3] brackets [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the original glasse/Lt [4].
[1] [2] [3] [4]
5. Remove the original glass assy [1].

Note
• When you remove the original glass assy [1], be sure to
hold the position [2] and the position [3].

reverse.
7. When the original glass assy is replaced, be sure to conduct the
following item.
• Scan Gradation, Color Adj. (Refer to )I.4.3.23 Scan Gradation/
Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)
[2] [1] [3]
5.3.13 Upper surface cover/Fr, /Lt, /Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the read cover/Fr. (Refer to G.5.3.7 Read cover/Fr)
[3] 2. Remove the read cover/Lt. (Refer to G.5.3.9 Read cover/Lt)
3. Remove the read cover/Rt. (Refer to G.5.3.10 Read cover/Rt)
4. Remove the screw cap [1], and then remove the screw [2].
5. Remove 3 screws [3], and then remove the upper cover/Rt [4].
[4] [1] [2]
G-77
6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover/Lt [2].
[1]
[2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover/Fr [2].
reverse.
[2]
5.3.14 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] and the
washer [4], and then remove the front door [1].
CAUTION
• The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when you
remove it.

reverse.
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
G-78
5.3.15 Tray front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1], disconnect the connector [2], and then
remove the tray front cover [3].
Note
• Be noted that the shape of the front cover of the tray 1
differs from the rest.

reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
5.3.16 CCD unit

1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.5.3.12 Original glass
[1] [1] assy)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the CCD board protective
shield [2].
[1] [2]
3. Remove 2 connectors [1].

[1]
G-79
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD board unit [2].
[2] [1]
[1]

1. Install the CCD board unit so that the unit comes at the center of
the division and install it with 4 screws.
3. Activate the main power and the sub power.
4. Select [Service Mode] - [CD-Mag. Adjustment] and conduct the
adjustment. When the value is not within the standard value,
loosen the mounting screw on the CCD board unit and move the
CCD board unit in the sub scan direction and adjust it. (Refer to I.
4.3.24 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment))
Note
• Be sure to move the CCD board unit by hand. Do not stick
and move the CCD board unit with a driver or other tools.
It is because the distance between the CCD sensor and
the lens could change.
5.3.17 Exposure unit, exposure lamp

(1) Procedure
assy)
2. Remove 2 sheets at the referred positions in the illustration [1]
[1]
3. Move the exposure unit [1] to the position where the sheets have
[2]
been removed in the step 2 (where the screw is touchable with the
point of the driver).
[1]
G-80
5. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1] and remove the
[2] connector [2].
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the
[1] exposure unit.
Note
• When you remove the exposure unit, be sure not to
damage the exposure lamp.

8. Select [Service Mode] - [ADF Adjustment] - [Read Position Auto
Adj.]. (Refer to I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.)
[2]
5.3.18 Scanner unit

[2] 2. Remove the rear cover/Lt3 and the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.
5.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, /Lt3)
5. Release the ferrite core [1], and then remove the harness holder
[2].
[1]
6. Remove 9 clamps [1].

[1] [1]
G-81
7. Remove 4 clamps [1].

8. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the reinforcing stay/Fr [3]
[1] [3] [4] [1] and the reinforcing stay/Rr [4].
[2] [2]
9. Remove 2 clamps [1] and disconnect 4 connectors [2].

[1]
[2]
10. Remove 12 screws [1], and then remove the scanner unit [2].
reverse.
[1]
[1]
[2] [1]
G-82
5.3.19 Removing the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
assy)
2. Remove the exposure unit and the exposure lamp. (Refer to G.
5.3.17 Exposure unit, exposure lamp)
3. Remove the scanner unit. (Refer to G.5.3.18 Scanner unit)
4. Remove the connector [1], and then remove the harness from 2
clamps [2] and the 2 edge covers [3].
[1] [3]
[2] [3]
5. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the angle sensor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the ADF plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2] 7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 3 screws [2].
[1]
G-83
8. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and then remove the
[2] [1]
scanner motor assy [3].
[3]
9. Remove the spring [1] at the side where there is a hook of the
scanner wire.
[1]
10. Remove the scanner wire at the bead side from the adjustment
anchor.
[1]
[1]
11. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the scanner drive gear [2].
[3] 12. Remove the bearing [3].
[1] [2]
13. Remove the C-clip [1], and then remove the bearing [2].
[2] [1]
G-84
14. Remove the wires [2] from each pulley [1].

15. Remove each screw [3] and then remove 2 pulleys [1] from the
shaft.
[1] [3] [1]
[2]
5.3.20 Reinstalling the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
(a) Overall view
(b) Procedure for reinstallation

(Rear side) 1. Install the rounded bead [1] of the scanner wire (silver) into the
hole that locates at the referred position in the pulley [2]
[3]
[2]
illustration.
Note
• Make sure that the bead is fixed in the hole of the pulley.
2. Loop the wire in the bead side [3] around the pulley 4 times
according to the illustration.
3. Loop the wire in the hook side [4] around the pulley 4 times
Note
[4]
• Make sure that the scanner wire is not curled too tightly
[1] or does not run on the outside of the pulley.
(Front side) 4. Install the rounded bead [1] of the scanner wire (black) into the
hole that locates at the referred position in the pulley [2]
[3]
[2] illustration.
Note
• Make sure that the bead is fixed in the hole of the pulley.
5. Loop the wire in the bead side [3] around the pulley 4 times
6. Loop the wire in the hook side [4] around the pulley 4 times
Note
[4] • Make sure that the scanner wire is not curled too tightly
[1]
or does not run on the outside of the pulley.
G-85
(Same for both the front and rear) 7. Apply the tape and then fix the wire around the wire pulley [1]
[1]
(Same for the front and rear side) 8. Equip the front and rear pulleys [1] on the shaft [2] and then fix
them with the screw [3], 1 each.
Note
• Install the pulley in the referred direction in the
illustration.
• Fix the pulley at the referred position in the illustration.
• Apply the screw lock around the screw.
• Be sure to insert the shaft into the hole of the scanner
unit before the pulley [1] is installed.
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[3] [3]
(Same for the front and rear side) 9. Install the shaft [1] and the shaft bearing [2].
10. Install the gear [4] with the screw [3].
[4] [1] Note
[3] [2]
(Same for the front and rear side) 11. Remove the C-clip [1], and then remove the bearing [2].
Note
[2] [1]
G-86
(Front side) 12. Loop the scanner wire [1] in the bead side around the pulley B [2]
and the pulley C [3] in the order, and then hook the fixing bead on
[1] [2]
the adjustment anchor [4].
Note
[3] • Be sure to loop the wire around the groove on the inside
of the pulley C.
[4]
(Front side) 13. Loop the scanner wire [1] in the hook side around the pulley D [2]
and the pulley C [3] in the order.
Note
• Be sure to loop the wire around the groove on the
[3] outside of the pulley D [2].
[1]
[2]
(Front side) 14. Insert the wire through the pulley C [1] into the hole [2] at the left
frame of the scanner.
[1]
[2]
(Front side) 15. Hook the spring [1] on the wire, and then hook the spring on the
hook [2] at the left frame of the scanner.
[1]
[2]
(Rear side) 16. Install the wire in the same procedure as the front side.
17. Hook the spring [2] on the hooks of the front and rear wires.
[2]
[1]
G-87
[2] 18. Remove the tapes that fixes the wire pulleys at the front and rear
sides.
19. Temporarily tighten the scanner motor assy [1] with 3 screws [2],
and then connect the connector [3].
[1] [3]
20. At the position where the fixing screw [1] of the scanner drive
[1] [4] gear is at the right side, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the
left 3 times. Check that the motor assy moves to the initial
position by the spring [3] force.
21. Rotate the pulley, and check that the belt does not run on the
cogs of the pulley.
22. Tighten and fix the scanner motor assy [2] with 3 screws [4].
I.11.1 Scanner motor belt adjustment
[3]
24. Conduct the adjustment that decides the position of the exposure
[4] [4] unit and the mirror unit.
[2] I.11.2 Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror
unit
25. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Scan
Adjustment] - [FD-Mag. Adjustment].
I.4.3.22 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
26. Select [Service Mode] - [ADF Adjustment] - [Read Position Auto
Adj.].
I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.
5.3.21 Tray
(1) Procedure for pulling out the tray
2. Insert a driver into the hole [2] and pull out the tray [4] while you lift
[2]
[3] up a little the tray lock lever [3].
[4]
[1]
a0gdt3c048ca
(2) Procedure for pulling out the tray at the maximum

CAUTION
• Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Avoid pulling out more than 2 trays at once. It causes the PF to turn over.
G-88
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling
out the tray)
3. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling out
the tray)
reverse.
[1] [2]
(3) Procedure for removing the tray

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
[3] 1. Pull out the tray completely. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure for
pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.5.3.15 Tray front cover)
3. IF the option FA-502 is equipped, remove it. (For the tray 2 only)
4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, from the left rail and the right rail.
5. Hold the specified area [3] and bring it up. Remove the tray [2].
Note
• When you remove the tray, be sure to hold the specified
area [3] and never hold the parts easily deformed. It
possibly causes damage or the paper feed jam.
[1] [2]

reverse.
Note
• 2 screws [1] for the FA-502 installation are installed on the
tray 2. Be sure to put down the tray 2 quietly after the
removal, or the plate on which the screws are attached
can deform. After the tray 2 is put down, be sure not to
drag it along the ground.
[1]
G-89
Note
[2] [3] [1] • When you reinstall the tray, be sure to insert the 4 knobs
[1] on the rail to the shallow groove [2] for tray 1 and tray
2. For tray 3, be sure to insert the knobs to the deep
groove [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5.3.22 Lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.5.3.21 Tray)
[4] [5] [3] 2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.5.3.15 Tray front cover)
3. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.5.3.23
Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3
(FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12))
4. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.5.3.25.(1) Removing
procedure of the paper lift gear assy)
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, insert the screwdriver to the
quadrilateral hole [3]. Rotate the gear [4] to go through the
hole [5] of the gear [4]. Reinstall the gear [2] with the
aligned position.
[2] [1] a0gdt3c096ca
G-90
6. Remove 4 E-rings [1] and then remove 1 each of the pulley covers
[7] [2] [1]
[2].
7. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift
wires/Rt [4] back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [5]
and [6].
[6] [5] [1] [2] 8. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift
wires/Lt [7] back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [6].
Note
• When you hook the lift wire to the pulley, be sure to hook
the shorter lift wire/Lt [7] to the inside and the longer lift
wire/Rt [4] to the outside.
• When you install the wires, make sure that the lift wires
are properly routed inside the wire covers and are not
crossed each other.
[4]
9. Remove the pulleys [5] and [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the pulley, be sure that the metal
bearing comes to the outside.
[3]
a0gdt3c097ca
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and move the bearing [2] into the inside.
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
11. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the gear [4] in to the inside and
then remove the pin [5].
12. Remove the E-ring [6] and move the bearing [7] into the inside.
a0gdt3c098ca
13. Move the pulley [1] into the inside [2] and remove the lift wire/Lt [3]
[2] [1] [4] [3] [5] [6]
from the shaft hole [4]. Move the pulley [5] and remove the lift wire/
Rt [6].
Note
• Be sure to put the shorter lift wire/Lt [7] to the inside and
the longer lift wire/Rt [4] to the outside.
a0gdt3c099ca
G-91
14. Pull out the lift wire/Rt and the lift wire/Lt [3] from the hole [2] of the
[2] [1] [3] [4]
lift plate arm [1] to downward.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the circular cylindrical
shape wire end [4] from the downside of the hole [2].
• Be sure to install the shorter lift wire/Lt to the lift plate arm
[5] and the longer lift wire/Rt to the lift plate arm [6].
• When you pull or install it, be sure to pull out carefully and
be careful not to damage it with the corner of the metal
plate.
[5] [6]
a0gdt3c100ca
5.3.23 Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12)
Note
• The height inside the trays differ for Tray1, Tray2, and Tray3.
Therefore, remove the tray before you remove the paper leading edge separation fan of Tray1 and Tray2.
For Tray3, you can remove the paper leading edge separation fan while it is installed to the PF.
(1) Procedure for Tray1 and Tray2

[1] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.5.3.21 Tray)
[2]
a0gdt3c006ca
G-92
[2] [3] [2] 3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

4. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the 2 wiring harness clamp
[3].
[1] a0gdt3c135ca
[5] [4] [7] [1] [2] 5. Remove the 3 screws [1] and move the paper leading edge
separation fan/Fr1 and the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr2
[2] in the arrow-marked direction.
6. Remove the 3 screws [4] and move the paper leading edge
separation fan/Rr1 and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr2
[6] [5] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to remove.
Note
• When you reinstall the paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr1, the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr2, the paper
[3] leading edge separation fan/Rr1, and the paper leading
edge separation fan/Rr2 [5], be sure to press them against
the air duct [7]. Secure the screws so that there is no
space between the contacting section [8].
[8]
a0gdt3c007ca 7. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
(2) Procedure for Tray3

[1]
1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer
to G.5.3.21 Tray)
[2]
a0gdt3c008ca
G-93
[5] [4] [7] [6] [2] [3]

4. Remove the 3 screws [2] and remove the paper leading edge
separation fan/Fr3 [3].
5. Remove 3 screws [4] and remove the paper leading edge
separation fan/Rr3 [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr3 [3] and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr3 [5],
be sure to press them against the air duct [6]. Secure the
screws so that there is no space between the contacting
section [7].

a0gdt3c009ca
5.3.24 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)

(1) Procedure
Note
• The following pictures for the explanation are for the tray1 but the procedure is the same for the trays 2 and 3.
[7] [5] 1. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.5.3.23
Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3
(FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12))
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the air duct [3] obliquely
downward [5] along the metal plate [4].
[4] Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the 2 fins [6] of the
air duct [3] with the notch [7] of the metal plate.
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c001ca
G-94
[1] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and the connector [2], and then remove the
upper limit sensor mounting plate [3].
[2] a0gdt3c002ca
[1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1], tilt the fan mounting plate [2], and then
remove it in the arrow-marked direction [3].
[3] [2] a0gdt3c003ca

7. Remove the E-ring [2] and then pull out from the shaft [3].
8. Remove the 2 screws [4] and then remove the paper leading edge
shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), the paper leading edge shutter
solenoid/2 (SD14), and the paper leading edge shutter solenoid/3
(SD18) [5].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to install so that the wiring
harness [6] of the paper leading edge shutter solenoid is
in the direction in the picture.
[1] [4] [3] [2]

a0gdt3c004ca
G-95
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to install the air duct [1]
temporary and fix it with the screws [4] and pull the
plunger [2]. Be sure that the gap A of the plunger gets to
the standard value at the position where the shutter [3]
contacts to the air duct [1].
• Standard value: A = 0.2 mm to 0.7 mm
[4] [1]
a0gdt3c005ca
5.3.25 Paper lift motor/1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)

(1) Removing procedure of the paper lift gear assy
Note
• The removing and installing procedure of the paper lift gear assy is common between the trays 1, 2, and 3 but the installation
position is different at some part. This section shows the procedure for the tray 1 and the different parts are described in the
procedure.
1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure
[1] for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.5.3.15 Tray front cover)
[2] a0gdt3c104ca
4. Remove 4 screws [2] (in the case of the trays 1 and 2 [1]) or 4
screws [4] (in the case of the tray 3 [3]), and then remove the
[1]
reinforcing plate [5].
[2] [5]
[3]
[4]
a0gdt3c105ca
G-96
[1] a0gdt3c106ca
6. Remove 5 screws [1], the E-ring [2], and the bearing [3] and then
[1] [4]
remove the paper lift gear assy [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c107ca
(2) Removing procedure of the paper lift motor

1. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.4.3.24 (1) Removing
[2] procedure of the paper lift gear assy)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the support bracket [2].
[1] a0gdt3c108ca
G-97
Note
[2] [3] [1] • When you reinstall it, be sure to put the pin [2] of the arm
[1] into the hole [3] and the pin [4] into the hole [6] of the
support bracket [5].
[4] [6] [5] a0gdt3c109ca
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].

[5] [1] [2] [4]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the bearing [3] on
the opposite side.

[5]
[3]
a0gdt3c110ca
6. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the top of the paper lift
[1]
gear assy [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align 3 D-cut [3] positions
of the shaft and then tighten the screw [1].
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c111ca
G-98
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the paper lift motor [2].
[2] [1]
a0gdt3c112ca
5.3.26 Paper feed suction unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.5.3.21.(1) Procedure for pulling out
[1] the tray)
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the paper feed suction unit
[1] [2] [2] in the arrow-marked direction.

Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed suction unit, be sure to
align the positioning pin [1] with the hole [2].
[1]
[2]
G-99
5.3.27 Paper feed belt

[2] 1. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.5.3.26 Paper feed
suction unit)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the neutralizing parts/Fr [2].
[1]
[1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the neutralizing parts assy/
Rr [2].
[2]
4. Remove the screw [1] two each and release the sensor assy [2].
[1] [2] Release the wiring harnesses from the clamp.

[1]

[1]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the suction duct assy [2] and
[3] [2] [1] the wiring harness [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
G-100
Note
[2] [1] • The shaft [1] and the 2 bearings [2] are installed on the
suction duct. However, they are not fixed.
Be careful not to loose them.
[3] 8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
[5] 9. Move the bearing [3] and then pull out the belt drive roller assy [4]
from the paper feed belt [5].
Note
• Be sure to check that the paper feed belt is not tilt against
the roller and rotates smoothly.
10. Remove the screw [1] one each and then remove the neutralizing
parts/Fr [2], and the neutralizing parts/Rr [3].
[1] [4] [2]
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
G-101
11. Remove 1 each of the E-rings [1] and the bearings [2] and then
[1] [2] [3] remove the 2 belt driven roller assy/A [3].
12. Remove the E-ring [4] and the bearing [5] and then remove the belt
driven roller assy/B [6].
[6]
[4] [5]
[5] 13. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the bearing [4] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• When you remove or install the E-ring [3], be sure not to
convert the bearing support bracket [5].
[1] [2] [3] [4]

15. Slide the belt driven roller assy/C [1] to the arrow-marked direction
and the remove it. Remove 4 paper feed belts [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed belt [2], be sure to install
it so that the white line mark comes to the inside.
[1] [2]
5.3.28 Paper suction fans/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), and /6 (FM6)
(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2] [4] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.5.3.21.(3) Procedure for removing
the tray)
2. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.5.3.26 Paper feed
suction unit)
3. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from
the clamps.
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the protecting sheet [3], the
paper suction fan/1 (FM1), the paper suction fan/3 (FM3), and the
paper suction fan/5 (FM5) [4].
G-102
[3] [1] [2] [4] 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from
the clamps.
paper suction fan/2 (FM2), the paper suction fan/4 (FM4), and the
paper suction fan/6 (FM6) [4].
5.3.29 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
(1) Removing procedure of the side guide assy
1. Pull out the tray completely. (Refer to G.5.3.21 Tray)
2. Loosen 1 each of the screws [1] of the side guide/Fr and the side
guide/Rr.
[6] 3. Remove each of the screws [2], 2 each, and shorten the
reinforcing plate [3].
[5] [4] 4. Remove the screws [4] and remove the reinforcing hinge [5] from
the pin [6].
Note
• Be careful that the screw [4] is the stepped screw.
[2] [3] [1] [2]

5. Remove 1 each of the screws [1] at the 2 positions, and then
[5] remove 1 each of the mounting metal fittings [2].
6. Lift up the cover/Fr [3] and the cover/Rr [4] and remove them.
Note
• When you remove or install the cover/Fr and the cover/Rr,
be sure to push the flap slightly into the side guide and
not to damage it.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2] a0gdt3c072ca
G-103

[6] [4] 8. Remove 1 screw [1] and 2 screws [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, tighten the screws [2] and [3]
temporary and check the parallelism between the side
guide/Fr and the side guide/Rr with the paper, and then
tighten the screws fully.
9. Remove the side guide/Rr [4].

10. While you press the side guide lock lever [5], remove the side
guide/Fr [6].
[3] [3] [1]
[2]
[5]
[1]
(2) Removal procedures of the paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), the paper feed assist fan/Fr2 (FM15), the paper feed
assist fan/Fr3 (FM19).
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2], [3].
[5] [6] [7] [3] [2] Note
• The covers [2], [3] have the projection on the bottom, be
sure to put it into the positioning hole on the side guide.
• Be sure to check that the slide knob [4] moves smoothly
after you install the cover [3].
2. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the side guide fixed plate
[6].
3. Remove 2 screws [7], and then press the side guide lock lever [9]
slightly to remove the lever cover [8].
[8] [9] [1] [4]
4. After removing 9 screws [1], rotate the small size guide [2], release
[1] [4] the magnet, and then remove the cover [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be careful that the cover does not
press the E-ring [4].
[1]
[1]
[3] [1] [2]
G-104
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the supporting bracket [2]
[2] and the side guide lock lever [3].
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca

[1]
a0gdt3c102ca
[3] [2] [1]
paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), the paper feed assist fan/Fr2
(FM15), and the paper feed assist fan/Fr3 (FM19) [3].
Note
harness comes to the position in the picture.
• Be sure to install so that the protecting sheet does not
slack.

a0gdt3c103ca
G-105
(3) Removal procedure of the paper feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), the paper feed assist fan/Rr2 (FM16), and the paper
feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20)
[2] [1] Note
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then press the side guide lock lever [7]
slightly and remove the lever cover [6].
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] a0gdt3c074ca
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca
4. Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing hinge [2].
[1] [2]
a0gdt3c101ca
G-106

[1]
a0gdt3c102ca
[3] [2] [1]
paper feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), the paper feed assist fan/Rr2
(FM16), and the paper feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20) [3].
Note
harness comes to the position in the picture.
• Be sure to install so that the protecting sheet does not
slack.

a0gdt3c103ca
5.3.30 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the side guide assy/Fr. (Refer to G.5.3.29 Paper feed
[2] [1] assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20))
Note
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and then press the side guide lock lever [7]
slightly and remove the lever cover [6].
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] a0gdt3c074ca
G-107
4. After you remove 10 screws [1], rotate the small size guide [2].
[1] [4] Release the magnet and remove the cover [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be careful that the cover does not
press the E-ring [4].
[1]
[1]
[3] [1] [2] a0gdt3c075ca
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca

[1] [5] [3]
7. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the shutter
solenoid/Fr1 (SD4), the shutter solenoid/Fr2 (SD6), and the shutter
solenoid/Fr3 (SD8) from the plunger [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the body [3] of the shutter solenoid/Rr,
be sure to install so that the wiring harness [5] is in the
direction in the picture.
[4]
[2]
a0gdt3c077ca
G-108
8. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and then pull out the pin [2] and remove the
[3] [1] [2]
plunger [3].
a0gdt3c078ca

[1] [2] [3]
Note
a. • When you reinstall it, pull the plunger [1]. Be sure to
install so that the gap A is the standard value at the
position where the shutter [2] contacts to the metal plate
[3].
Standard value "a": = 0.2 mm to 0.7 mm
a0gdt3c079ca
5.3.31 Paper feed check window

(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.5.3.21 Tray)
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed check
window [2].
[2] a0gdt3c126ca
G-109
5.3.32 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
3. Disconnect the connector [3] and then remove the wiring harness
from the clamp [4].
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance

unit [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the vertical conveyance unit [2], be
sure to install it so that its projection [3] and the slit [4] are
aligned to the slit [5] and the projection [6] of PF.

reverse.
[6] [4] [1] [3] [5]
[2]
[1]
G-110
5.3.33 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
2. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.5.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, /Lt3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
4. Disconnect the 3 connectors [3] and remove the clamp and
[3] release the wiring harness.
[1] [2]

from 4 clamps [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Pull out the wiring harness [1] to the inside from the hole [2], and
[1] [2] then release the wiring harness.
G-111
[1] 8. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit [1].

reverse.
5.3.34 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)

Note
• When you replace the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection
board (PF). (Refer to I.4.3.15 PFU Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the open close cover [1].
G-112
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the claw [2], and then remove
the protective cover/Up [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]

4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection
board/R (MFDBR) [3].
5. Remove the screw [1]. Pull the protective cover/Lw [2] frontward
and remove it.
[3] Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws [3] of the
protective cover/Lw [2] into the holes [4] of the horizontal
conveyance unit.
[4]
[4] [3]
[1] [2]
G-113

7. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board/
[1] [2] [3] S (MFDBS) [3].
reverse.
5.3.35 Centering sensor assy

(1) Procedure
[1] section cover [2].
[2]
[1] Note
• When you reinstall the horizontal conveyance section
cover [1], tighten 2 screws [2] first.
[2]
G-114
2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and then release the wiring harness.

[1]
4. Raise the centering sensor mounting plate [1] in the direction of

the arrow [2], and then move it in the direction of the arrow [3].
[3] [2] [1]
G-115
[2] Note
• When you reinstall the centering sensor mounting plate
[1], match 2 projections [2] and 2 holes [3] of the centering
sensor mounting plate.
[1]
[3]
[2] 5. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the centering sensor assy
[2].
Note
• When you remove or reinstall the centering sensor assy
[2], be careful not to damage the sensor surface [3].
• When you reinstall the centering sensor assy [2], push it
in the direction of the arrow. If you do not push the assy
to reinstall it, the error detection of centering occurs.
• When you reinstall the centering sensor assy [2], check
that the wire binding bands [4] comes outside of the metal
frame.
[1] [3]
[4]
G-116
[2] Note
• When you reinstall the centering sensor assy [1], match 6
projections [2] and 6 holes [3] of the centering sensor
assy.
[1]
[3]
[1] [5] [4] [2] 6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

7. Remove 2 screws [2]. Then remove the paper leading edge sensor
(PS25) [4] and the horizontal conveyance sensor/1 (PS19) [5] from
the centering sensor assy [3].
reverse.
9. After you reinstall the centering sensor assy, conduct the following
adjustment.
• Centering Sensor Gap Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.3 Centering Sensor
Gap Adj. (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
[3]
G-117
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 6. FA-502
6. FA-502
Num Section Parts name
ber
1 FA-502 FA-502

CAUTION
6.2.2 FA-502
(1) Procedure
NOTE
• FA-502 is heavy so that this procedure must be performed with 2 people.
1. Pull out the tray 2 at the maximum. (Refer to G.5.3.21 (2)
Procedure for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the connector [1] under the tray, and then remove the
wiring harness from the clamp [2].
4. Insert a half of the tray 2 back that has been pulled out.
Note
• Make sure that the tray 2 is inserted back into the PF in
[3] [2] [3] [1] half, and remove the screws [4].If you remove the screws
[4] while the tray 2 is pulled out, FA-502 can deform.
[4]
[1] 6. Hold FA-502 [1] and pull out the tray 2. Then, remove FA-502 [1]
in the lower direction.
NOTE
• When you pull out the tray 2, be sure to hold FA-502 [1].If
you pull out the tray 2 while FA-502 [1] is not held, FA-502
[1] can fall and lead to an injury.
G-118
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 6. FA-502

reverse.
Note
[3] [2] • When you reinstall FA-502 [1], be sure to insert 2 notches
[2] to each screw [3] at the tray side.
• When you reinstall FA-502 [1], be sure to insert the
projections [4] at 2 places to each hole [5] at the tray side.
[1]
[5] [4]
[5] [4]
G-119
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. RU-516
7. RU-516
ber
1 Framework section Charging control framework unit

7.2.1 Charging control framework unit
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the charging roller assy. (Refer to F.9.2.1 Replacing the
charging roller and the charging driven roller)
2. Remove screws [1] 2 each, and then remove the option mounting
plate/FrLw [2] and the option mounting plate/RrLw [3].
[1] [3]
G-120
[2] [1] [3] 3. Remove screw [1] 1 each.

4. Loosen screw [2] 1 each. Then remove the option mounting plate/
FrUp [3] and the option mounting plate/RrUp [4] to the direction of
the arrow.
Note
• Be careful not to remove or loosen screw [2] 1 each too
much. Otherwise, the charging control framework unit [5]
falls.
5. Remove the charging control framework unit [5] in the direction of

the arrow.
[2] [1] [5] [4]

[2][3] [1] [2][3] reverse.
Note
• When you install the charging control framework unit [1],
be sure to hook the 2 holes [2] of the charging control
framework unit to the 2 screws [3] that have been
loosened in step 4.
G-121
Note
[1][2] [1][2] • When you install the charging control framework unit to
another main body, refer to the following steps. When you
do not install the unit as follows, the charging control
framework unit skews. Therefore, installation possibly
fails or jam possibly occurs.
• Hook the 2 holes [1] of the charging control framework
unit to the 2 screws [2] of the main body.
• Loosen the circled 18 screws.
• Install the option mounting plate/FrUp and the option
mounting plate/RrUp in the reverse order of step 3, 4.
• Install the option mounting plate/FrLw and the option
mounting plate/RrLw in the reverse order of step 2.
• Tighten the circled 18 screws.
• Reinstall the charging roller assy. (Refer to F.9.2.1
Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven
roller)
G-122
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 8. RU-511/HM-101
8. RU-511/HM-101
8.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble
8.1.1 Color density sensor unit
• Mounting screws of the color density detection board/Y, the color density detection board/M, the color density detection board/C, the color
density detection board/K, 2 each
[2]
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Color density sensor unit

The color density detection board detects the color density by the light reflected off the paper. When its position is moved, the density read
value changes.
Do not change the mounting position of the color density detection board. If you misalign the position, the color density detection board has a
risk of detecting the color density improperly.

ber
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover
4 Humidification section (HM-101) Humidification unit
5 Water feed tank
6 Pump motor (P1)
7 Conveyance section Color density sensor unit
8 Shutter
9 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
G-123
8.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the door support bracket [3] and
the front door [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
remove it.

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall, check that the front door [1] closes
securely.
[1] [2]
[3]
8.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1] [2]
reverse.
[1] [1] [1]
G-124
8.3.4 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the upper cover [3].
reverse.
[2] [3]
8.3.5 Humidification unit

(1) Procedure
3. Pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1] [2]
G-125
4. Release 4 clamps [1].
[1]
[1] [1]
[3] [1] 5. Cut off the connection of the pipes [3] and [4] while you press the
brackets [1] and [2].
Note
• Discharge water inside the cut pipe [4] to the proper
container, otherwise water leaks when you cut off the
connection of the pipe [4].
[2] [4]
G-126
6. Remove 2 connectors [1] from the board.

7. Disconnect 2 relay connectors [2].
[1]
8. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the ground.
9. Remove the screw [4] and then cut off the connecting arm.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [1] from the right rail and left rail.
11. Remove the humidification unit [2].
Note
• When you remove the humidification unit [2], never hold
the parts easily deformed such as the Jam clearing lever.
• When you reinstall the humidification unit [2], be sure to
fit the groove on the left side of the unit [3] to the rail [4]
before you put the entire unit on the rail.
[1] [3]
[4]
G-127
Note
• When you put down the humidification unit, put a table or
something under it not to damage the clamp [1] or the
pipe [2].
[1]
8.3.6 Water feed tank

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.8.3.2 Front door)
4. Release the wiring harness from all clamps [2].
Note
• Be sure to put the removed connector in the water feed
tank tray [3].
[4] [1] [2] [3]
[1] [3] 6. Pull out the humidification unit and remove 2 pipes. (Refer to G.
8.3.5 Humidification unit)
7. Pull out the water feed tank. (Refer to F.10.4.3 Replacing the water
feed filter)
Note
• Be sure to put the pipe to the left [1] beforehand so that it
does not get stuck inside.
8. Put the humidification unit to the original position.

Note
• Be sure to pull out the water feed tank before you put
back the humidification unit so that the pipe does not get
stuck inside.
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the water feed tank [3].
[2]

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the water feed tank, be sure to place
the positioning hole to the projection of the water feed
tank tray [1].
[1]
G-128
8.3.7 Pump motor (P1)

(1) Procedure
[5] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.8.3.3 Rear cover)
4. Remove the pipe [3] and the pipe [4]. Then remove the pump
motor (P1) [5].
Note
• When you remove the pipe [3] and the pipe [4], be careful
not to come off the connecting part [6] from the pump
motor (P1) [5].
• When you install the pipe [3] and the pipe [4], be careful of
the attachment positions.
The pipe [4] comes in front of the pipe [3].
Install the pipe [3] to the upper side of the pump motor
(P1) [5].
[1] [2] [6] [4] Install the pipe [4] to the lower side of the pump motor
(P1) [5].

reverse.
8.3.8 Color density sensor unit

Note
• When you replace the color density sensor unit, replace the shutter at the same time.
(1) Procedure
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the color density sensor
unit [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
G-129

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the unit, press the color sensor unit
while you pull the shutter [1] in the arrow-marked
direction [2]. Be sure to place the projection of the
mounting plate in the hole [3].
5. After you replace the color density sensor unit, perform the
following adjustments. (Delete all the registered adjustment values,
and then conduct the readjustments again.)
1. Max Density Initial Adjjustment (Refer to R.2.4.4 Procedure for
the setup)
• Perform the procedure for the setup.
• Prepare a standard paper.
2. Each Paper Type Color Sensor Adjjustment (Refer to the
User's Guide)
3. Color Density Control (Manual Adjustment) (Refer to R.2.7
Color Density Control (Manual Adjustment))
4. Any of the following adjustments.
• Exact Color (when IC-602 and Exact Color is used) (Refer
to R.2.9 Exact Color)
• G7 calibration (when IC-602 and the G7 calibration is
used) (Refer to R.2.10 G7 Calibration)
• IC-308/IC-310 calibration (when IC-308 or IC-310 is used)
[2] [1]
(Refer to R.2.11 IC-308/IC-310 Calibration)
8.3.9 Shutter
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer toG.8.3.4 Upper cover)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
3. To remove the shutter [3], pull out it in the arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
[1] [2]
8.3.10 Note for replacing the board

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
• When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC33).
G-130
1. Install EEPROM (IC33) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
Note
• Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC33)
in the same direction.
• After you replace the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
[1]
[2]
G-131
9. RU-510
No. Section Parts name
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover
5 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
9.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the screw [2] and release the
wire [3].
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove the 3 screws [4] and then remove the door support
bracket [5] and the front door [1].
Note
remove it.

reverse.
[4]
[5] [4]
G-132
9.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1] [2] 2. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
[1]
9.2.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 10 screws [1] and then remove the left cover [2].
[2] reverse.
[1] [1]
G-133
9.2.5 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the upper cover [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
[3]

1. When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace
the EEPROM (IC19).
Install EEPROM (IC19) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
G-134
Note
A • Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC19) in
the same direction.
• After replacing the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
A rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
a04jf2c017ca
G-135
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. FS-532
10. FS-532
10.1 Items that you must not disassemble or reassemble
10.1.1 Red-painted screws
Note
• Screws that are difficult to adjust in the field are painted in red to prevent them from being removed.
• Do not remove or loosen red-painted screws in the field.
(1) For the old type

Note
• The following screw is not painted in red for the old type FS-532.
The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen the screw in the field.
(a) 1 adjustment screw of the PI paper feed path
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove -

The installation position of the PI paper feed path is adjusted before the shipment.
If the position of the PI paper feed path shifts, the paper that is fed from the PI is likely to be tilted. Therefore, the installation position must not
be changed.

ber
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover/Rt1
4 Upper cover/Rt2
5 Upper cover/Fr
6 Upper cover/Rr
7 Upper cover/Md
8 Front cover
9 Sub tray
10 Stacker section Stacker unit
11 Main tray section Main tray
12 Main tray up down motor (M11)
13 Main tray up down drive assy

CAUTION
G-136
10.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove the screw [2] and release the wire [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the door support bracket
[5] and the front door [1].
Note
remove it.
• When you install the front door [1], be sure to install so
[3] that the shaft [4] is inserted into the hole [5] of the front
door.

[1] reverse.
[4]
[5]
10.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and then remove the rear cover [3] in the
reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
G-137
10.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1 [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
[2] [1]
10.3.5 Upper cover/Rt2

(1) Procedure
3. Open the front door [2], remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the
upper cover/Rt2 [4].
reverse.
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
G-138
10.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr1 [2].
reverse.
[2]
10.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.10.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
3. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.10.3.2 Front door)
[1] [2]
5. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr2 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
G-139
10.3.8 Upper cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.10.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
10.3.9 Upper cover/Md

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.10.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.10.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2)
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Md [2].
reverse.
[2] [1]
10.3.10 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the 5 screws [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the front cover [2].
reverse.
G-140
10.3.11 Sub tray

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1.
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr.
3. Remove the upper cover/Rr.
4. Remove the upper cover/Md.
5. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the sub tray [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
10.3.12 Stacker unit

(1) Procedure
[2] [1]
G-141
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then disconnect 9 connectors [2].

[3] 6. Remove 3 saddles [3] inside the metal frame, and release the
wiring harness.
7. Remove the stopper [4] and then pull out the shaft [5] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• Fix the connector installation plate and the stacker arm to
the back of the stacker unit with tape.
[2] [1]
[5] [2]
[4]
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker unit [2] from the
rail [3].
reverse.
[3] [1] [2]
[3] [1]
G-142
10.3.13 Main tray

Note
• After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), lower the main tray [1]
blocking the light of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) [2]
[3] during up and down operation of the main tray. Deactivate the
main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
2. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove then main tray [1] in the
reverse.
[1] [3]
10.3.14 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy
(1) Procedure
Note
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), and block the light of the tray
[3] [2] [1]
upper limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up and down operation of the
main tray [1]. Then, lower the main tray until it does not bother the
removal of the paper exit cover [3].
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch
(SW1) of the main body.
5. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4.(1) Procedure for fully
pulling out the SD unit)
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] and remove the screw [1]. Then
remove the saddle arm.
[1] [2]
G-143

[3] [2] [4] [5] [4] 8. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the connector mounting
plate [3].
9. Remove the 4 screws [4], and remove the main tray up down
motor [5].
[2] [4] [1] [4]
10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the main tray cover/Rr [2].
11. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr3 [4].
[2] 12. Remove 3 screws [5], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr2 [6].
13. Remove the 5 screws [7], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr1 [8].
[7]
[1]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
14. Remove the 2 screws [1], and then remove the exterior mounting
plate/1 [2].
[1] [2] [1]

15. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddle and remove 2
screws [2], and then remove the exterior mounting plate/2 [3].
[3] [1] [2]
G-144
[1]
17. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2] [1]
18. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the main tray up-down
[1] drive assy [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Be sure to remove the main tray up-down drive assy [2]
while you hold the main tray by hand.
If not to do so, the main tray drops off.

reverse.
[1]
[2] [1] [1]
[1]

CAUTION
• When the FNS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
G-145
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
A 2. Check points when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC70)

Note
• Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC70) in
A the same direction.
• After you replace the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
fd501fs2078c
G-146
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. SD-510
11. SD-510
Note
(1) For the old type

Note
• The following screw is not painted in red for the old type SD-510.
The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen the screw in the field.
(a) 6 attaching screws of the folding knife/1
[2] [3]
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Folding knife assy/1
[3] Folding knife/1 -
(b) 2 attaching screws of the folding knife/2
[2] [3] [1]

[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Folding knife assy/2
[3] Folding knife/2 -
G-147
(c) 2 fixing screws of the folding roller position fixation metal/Fr, 2 fixing screws of the folding roller position
fixation metal/Rr
[8] [1]
[7] [2]
[6] [5] [4] [3]
[1] Rear side [2] Folding roller mounting metal/Rr

[3] Folding roller position fixation metal/Rr [4] Screws that you must not remove
[5] Screws that you must not remove [6] Folding roller position fixation metal/Fr
[7] Folding roller mounting metal/Fr [8] Front side
(d) 2 fixing screws of the timing belt fixing part for stapler
[1]
[2]
[1] Timing belt fixing part for the stapler [2] Screws that you must not remove
G-148
(e) 3 fixing screws of the stopper motor (M105) assy
[1]
[2]
[1] Stopper motor (M105) assy [2] Screws that you must not remove
(f) 1 fixing screw of the adjustment plate assy/Fr, 1 fixing screw of the alignment plate assy/Rr
[3]
[2] [1]
[1] Adjustment plate assy/Fr [2] Adjustment plate assy/Rr

[3] Screws which you must not remove -
G-149
(g) 1 fixing screw of the timing belt fixing part for the adjustment plate assy
[2]
[1]
[1] Timing belt fixing part for the adjustment plate assy [2] Screws that you must not remove
(h) 1 fixing screw of the adjustment plate assy/Fr, 1 fixing screw of the alignment plate assy/Rr
[1]
[2]
[1] Entrance conveyance motor (M101) [2] Screws that you must not remove

er
1 Cover Front cover
2 Stapler unit cover
G-150
3 SD unit SD unit
4 Folding section Folding knife assy/1

CAUTION
11.3.2 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the front cover [2].
reverse.
11.3.3 Stapler unit cover

(1) Procedure
[2][3] 1. Pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
3. Release 2 claws [2] from the 2 holes [3], and remove the staple
unit cover [4].
reverse.
[1] [4]
G-151
11.3.4 SD unit
(1) Procedure for fully pulling out the SD unit
[3] [1] [2]
3. Pull out the SD unit [1].

4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the SD support stay/Lt1
[3].
5. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the SD support stay/Rt
[5].
6. Remove the screw [6] to remove the 2 connectors [7], and then
remove the SD arm [8].
[7]
[6] [8]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
G-152
7. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Rt [1] into the hole of
the SD unit [2].
8. Install the SD support stay/Rt [4] using the screw [3] that is
removed in step 4.
[1][2] [4] [3] [1][2]

9. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Lt1 [1] into the hole of
the SD unit [2].
10. Install the SD support stay/Lt1 [4] using the screw [3] that is
removed in step 3.
Note
• When you install the SD support stay/Lt1, be sure to place
the projection [5] to the hole [6] of the SD support stay/
Lt1.
• When you do not install the SD support stay and remove
the SD unit, the rail is deformed or the SD unit falls down.
When you pull out the SD unit, be sure to install the SD
support stay.
[7] [6] [1]
11. Remove the stopper screw [7], and then remove the SD unit.
Note
• When you pull out the SD unit, lift the SD unit upward
[2] slightly.
[4]
[3]
[5]
12. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the SD support stay/Lt2
[2].
[1] [2]
13. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Lt2 [1] into the hole of
the SD unit [2].
14. Install the SD support stay/Lt2 [4] using the screw [3] that is
removed in step 11.
Note
• When you install the SD support stay/Lt2, be sure to place
the projection [5] to the hole [6] of the SD support stay/
Lt2.
[6] [1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
G-153
(2) Procedure for removing the SD unit

1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4.(1) Procedure for fully
[4] [2] pulling out the SD unit)
2. Remove the front cover of the FS. (Refer to G.10.3.10 Front cover)
4. Hold 2 handles [2] and then remove the SD unit [3] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• When you remove or reinstall the SD unit, do not hold the
connecting bracket [4] of the stapler and clincher.
• When you reinstall the SD unit, be sure to place the mark
[5] of the SD unit to the metal frame [7] of the rail [6].
[2]
[1] [5] [3]
[7]
[6]
[2] [1] Note

• When you reinstall the SD unit, be sure to place the rail [1]
of the SD unit on the rail [2] of the finisher.
G-154
11.3.5 Folding knife assy/1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4.(2) Procedure for
removing the SD unit)
[4] 3. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.11.3.3 Stapler unit
cover)
[3] 4. Rotate the folding knife drive shaft [1] to adjust the position of the
clunk arm assy [2].
[2] 5. Remove the screw [3], 1 each, release the crank arm assy [2], and
remove the bearing [4], 1 each.
6. Remove the folding knife drive shaft [1 ] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
Note
[6] [5] [2] [7] [1] • When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be sure to install
it so that the clunk arm [2] faces [3] the opposite direction
[5] to the actuator [4].
• When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be sure to install
the screw [7], 1 each, to prevent the clunk arm [2] from
coming off from the folding knife drive shaft [6].
• When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be careful that
the leading edge of the folding knife assy/1 does not bend
by the contact with the 1st folding roller.
[4] [1] [2] [7] [3]
G-155
7. Remove each E-rings [1], and remove each crank arm assy [2],
[4] the bearings [3], 2 each, and each collar [4].
[3] [1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
8. Remove the folding knife assy/1 [1] in the arrow-marked direction
[6] [1] [2] [2].
9. Remove 2 screws [3] and the assy stay/Fr [4] in the arrow-marked
direction [6].
10. Disconnect the collar [5].
Note
• When you remove the assy stay/Fr, be careful not to drop
the collar [5].
[5] [3] [4]
11. Lift the conveyance guide plate [1], and remove the folding knife
assy/1 [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When you remove the folding knife assy/1 [2], be careful
not to drop the collar [3].
[2] [1] [3]
G-156
[2] [1] [3] 12. Disconnect the collar [1].

13. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the assy stay/Rr [3] in the
reverse.
11.3.6 Folding knife assy/2

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
3. Remove the SD support stay/Rt and tilt the SD unit [1] in the
arrow-marked direction. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
4. Remove the SD support stay/Lt. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit guide/1 [2].
7. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the cover [5].
8. Release the spring/1 [6] and the spring/2 [7].
9. Remove the C-clip [8] and pull out the shaft [9] in the arrow-
marked direction, and then remove the spring/1 [6], the spring/2 [7]
and the paper exit guide/2 [10].
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [9] [10]
[6]
[7]
[8]
G-157
10. Remove each spring [1] and then remove each C-clip [2].
[1] 11. Slide the 2 each bearings [3] to the inside, and remove the paper
exit driven roller [4].
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2] [1] [4]
[3]
12. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the bearing [2].
13. Remove the C-clip [3] and the belt holding material [4], and
[2] remove the belt [7] from the pulley [5] and the paper exit drive gear
[6].
14. Remove the pulley [5] and the bearing [8], and remove the paper
exit roller [9].
[1]
[9]
[4] [6] [7] [5] [8]
[3]
G-158
[3] 15. Mark [2] the mounting position of the folding knife assy/2 mounting
plate [1] with a pencil or something.
16. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the folding guide [4].
17. Remove the screw [5], and remove the paper exit guide lock part
[6].
[4] [5] [2] [1]
[6]
[3]
[1] [2] 18. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness,
remove 5 screws [2] and a screw [3], and remove the folding knife
assy/2 mounting plate [4].
Note
• When you install the folding knife assy/2 mounting plate
[4], be sure to install it according to the mark [5] that has
been marked in the step 15.
The 2nd folding misalignment occurs when the mounting
plate is not placed in the right place.
19. Remove the folding knife assy/2 [6] in the arrow-marked direction.
[6] [4] [2]

[3]
[5]
[2]
G-159

reverse.
Note
• When you install the folding knife assy/2, be sure not to
grab the blade [1] or not to hit it against other parts.
It could lead to the skew or the damage of the blade.
[1]
G-160
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 12. PK-522
12. PK-522
Note

ber
1 Punch unit Punch unit

CAUTION
12.3.2 Punch unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the punch scraps box [1].
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the shooter [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[2] [1]
3. Remove the rear cover of FS-532. (Refer to G.10.3.3 Rear cover)
[2] [1] 4. Remove the connector from the punch drive board (PDB) [1] and
release the wiring harness, and then remove the relay connector
[2].
G-161
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 12. PK-522
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit cover [2].
[1] [2]
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the clamp and

[2] [1] [2] [3] release the wiring harness.
7. Remove 6 screws [2], and remove the punch unit [3].
Note
• When you remove the punch unit, be careful not to
damage the conductive PET [4].

reverse.
9. After you reinstall the punch unit, conduct the following items in the
order.
Punch unit mounting position adjustment
(Refer to I.16.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position
adjustment)
[4] [2]
G-162
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 13. PI-502
13. PI-502
ber
1 Cover Upper cover
2 Rear cover
3 Operation panel cover
4 PI unit PI unit

CAUTION
13.2.2 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the cap [2] of the upper cover [1].
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the upper cover [1].
reverse.
[1]
15jff2c009na
13.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.13.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
[4] 3. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[1] reverse.
[2]
[3]
15jff2c010na
13.2.4 Operation panel cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.13.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the relay connector [2], and then remove
the operation panel assy [3].
reverse.
[3] 15jff2c011na
G-163
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 13. PI-502
13.2.5 PI unit
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the connector cover [2].
[2] [1]
2. Remove the connector [1] and remove the spring [2].

[1] [2]
3. Open the front door of FS and remove the 2 screws [1].

[1]
4. Move the PI unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction, release 2 locks

[2] [2] of the positioning screw, and remove the PI unit [1].
reverse.
[1]
G-164
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 14. LS-506
14. LS-506
ber
1 Cover Cover
2 Conveyance section Stacker tray up down wire

CAUTION
14.2.2 Cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Up [2].
[1] [1] 2. Remove 6 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover/Lw [4].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and move the front cover/Up [2] to the upper
side.
5. Remove the front cover/Up [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
G-165
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3] 8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 knobs [2].
10. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the front cover/Lw [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
G-166
[2] 11. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover [2].
[1]
[1]
ls502fs2037c

13. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front door [1].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
14.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire

Note
• When you conduct this operation, be sure to place the stacker tray at the home position (the upper most position) before the
operation.
(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover/Up and the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.
14.2.2 Cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
G-167
5. Check points when you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor
[5] (M1)
Note
• When you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1),
be sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with
[4] the gear [1]. Then you can engage it with the gear [3]
before you fasten the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], to make adjustments, you can
rotate the encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
[2] [1] [1] [2] 7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
ls501f2c001a
G-168
8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
[2] [1] [1] [2] ls501f2c002a
[4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire retaining bracket [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and remove the pulley assy [4].
11. Remove the hexagon socket screw [6] and remove the tip [7] of
the wire/1 [5].
[1] Note
• On the paper exit side, loosen 4 screws [3], bring down
the pulley assy [4] and release the tension of the wire/2 [5]
before you start the operation.
• When you reinstall it, the positions of the pulley assy on
[2] the paper feed side and the paper exit side become
important. Be sure to check the marked position of the
[5] pulley assy on the paper exit side before you remove it.
[7]
[6]
ls501f2c003a
[1] [2] [4] 12. Release the winding of the wire/1 [2] from the pulley [1].
13. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pulley [1] from the
shaft [4].
[3] ls502fs2027c
G-169
14. Remove the wire retaining bracket [2] from the wire/1 [1].
[1] Note
• When you install the wire retaining bracket [2], install it to
the wire/1 [1] so that the bracket comes to the rear side.
[2]
ls501f2c004a
[1] [2] 15. Remove the wire/1 [2] from the pulley [1].
16. Reinstall a new wire/1 following the preceding steps 6 to 12 in
reverse.
ls502fs2028c
[2] 17. Check point 1 when you reinstall the wire

Note
• When 2 wires at both sides are removed at the same time,
the stacker tray comes down. So, be sure to replace the
wires one at a time (The remaining wire holds the stacker
tray in place.) )
• When you attach the pulley to the shaft, be sure to align
the groove [1] of the pulley with the pin [2] that has been
inserted into the shaft.
• Be sure to place it with the bead placement portion [3].
[1] [3] ls502fs2029c
[1] [2] 18. Check point 2 when you reinstall the wire
Note
• When you wind the wire around the pulley, be sure to
wind it 8 turns [3] so that the direction of drawing-out [1]
comes to the rear panel side [2].
• The direction of drawing-out of the wire/1 is symmetrical
to that of the wire/2.
[3] ls502fs2030c
G-170
19. Check point 3 when you reinstall the wire

Note
• When you fix the pulley assy [1] on the paper exit side, be
sure to fix it at the same position as it was removed from.
20. Replace the wire/2 with a new one following the preceding steps 6
to 13.
21. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 6 in reverse.
[1] ls501f2c005a
G-171
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 15. FD-503
15. FD-503
15.1.1 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section
Note
• Do not remove or loosen the screws [1], screws [2], screws [3] of the folding and the conveyance switching position adjustment
section on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are used in the
factory.
[1] [3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c

ber
1 Cover section Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr
2 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr
3 Upper door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover/Fr
6 Left cover/Rr
7 Paper exit stopper cover
8 Right cover
9 Left cover/Up
10 Mount cover
11 Front door
12 Folding conveyance section 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
13 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
14 3rd folding roller
15 Folding conveyance section
16 Main tray section Main tray up down wire
17 PI section Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board/1,
multi feed detection board/2
18 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (new type)
19 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (old type)

CAUTION
G-172
15.3.2 Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover/Fr [5] to the front side
while you raise it together with the upper cover/Fr [4].
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] fd501fs2029c
[1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI cover/Fr [3]
together with the upper cover/Fr [2].
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
15.3.3 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover/Rr [4] to the rear
side while you raise it together with the upper cover/Rr [3].
[4]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2031c
G-173
15.3.4 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr, the PI cover/Fr, the upper cover/Rr
and the PI cover/Rr.
[5] 2. Close the upper door [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the bearing [4] of the
upper door open close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] that is shifted to the front side, remove the
upper door [1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
15.3.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Lw [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
15.3.6 Left cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
G-174
15.3.7 Left cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] fd501fs2035c
15.3.8 Paper exit stopper cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit stopper
[2]
cover [2].
[1]
fd501fs2036c
15.3.9 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2037c
G-175
15.3.10 Left cover/Up

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr, the PI cover/Fr, the upper cover/Rr
and the PI cover/Rr.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
15.3.11 Mount cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the mount cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
15.3.12 Front door

Note
• When you remove the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.
G-176
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screws [2].
3. Remove the mount cover [3].
[2] 4. Remove 3 screws [4] while you push up the front door so that it
does not fall down, and then remove the support plate [5].
5. Remove the front door [1].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2040c
15.3.13 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
15.3.12 Front door)
[1]
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [3].
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
G-177
15.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[1] 15.3.12 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [1].
[1]
fd501fs2043c
15.3.15 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[2] [1]
15.3.12 Front door)
2. Remove the stand cover. (Refer to G.15.3.11 Mount cover)
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1]. Remove them from
the shaft [1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove 2 springs [2], the support
[5] plate [4] and the guide plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
G-178
[1] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
15.3.16 Folding conveyance section

CAUTION
• The folding conveyance section is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm/Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm/Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
G-179
[1] 5. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left rail and the
right rail and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[1] 6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left rail and right rail.
[1]
fd501fs2050c
G-180
7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the specified places [1]
and [2] and remove it while you lift it up.
[3] CAUTION
• Be careful of your posture when you remove it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
[1] • When you lift up the folding conveyance section, be sure
to hold the shaft at the places [1] and [2]. When you hold it
at other places such as the roller shaft or the guide plate,
the deformation occurs.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
8. Keep the folding conveyance section [1] stand upright when it has
[1] been removed, or lay it down on the right-side [2].
Note
• Be careful not to lay it with the left side [3] down. The
[2] guide plate gets deformed.
[3]
fd501fs2052c
[2] 9. Check points when you reinstall the folding conveyance section
Note
• When you install the folding conveyance section, make
sure that all 4 hooks [1] of the rails have engaged the
attaching holes [2] of the folding conveyance section.
• Push the top to the right and engage the upper rail and
[1] push the bottom to the left to engage the lower rail.
[1]
[2] fd501fs2053c
G-181

reverse.
Note
• When you install the folding conveyance section, pull out
[2]
the rail further than the length of the stopper [1]. Use the
stopper screw [2] to fasten it tentatively at its fully pulled-
[1] out position and fix the rail on the opposite side with the
tape [3]. It prevents the rail from moving to inside for an
easy and smooth operation.
[3] fd501fs2054c
15.3.17 Main tray up/down wire

(1) Procedure
1. Check points when you remove or reinstall the main tray up and
down wire
[1] Note
• The following procedure for replacing the up down wire
shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and
the winding of wires on the front side are symmetrical to
wires on the rear side.
• There are 2 types of up down wires that are provided, one
[1] on the front side and the other [3] on the rear side. Be
[2] sure to use the wire with the correct wire mounting plate
direction when you install it. The direction of the wire
mounting plate distinguished between these 2 wires when
the shorter wire [2] is placed under the longer wire.

Rear cover (Refer to G.15.3.5 Rear cover)
Left cover/Fr (Refer to G.15.3.6 Left cover/Fr)
Left cover/Rr (Refer to G.15.3.7 Left cover/Rr)
Front door (Refer to G.15.3.12 Front door)
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
G-182
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the
gear box [4] together with the up down motor (M11) [3].
[3] CAUTION
• When the gear box is removed, the up down stay is
possibly fall down. So, when you remove the gear box, be
[1] sure to support the stay with your hands.
[4]
[2]
fd501fs2057c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
[2] of the up down wire/Rr [2] from the up down stay [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
G-183
[5] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [3] together with
[5] the 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [6] together with
[4] the 2 bearings [5].
7. Remove the E-ring [7] and then remove the gear [8] and the pin
[9].
Note
[6] • When you remove the gear [8], be careful not to drop the
pin [9].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7] [9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
8. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2060c
G-184
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up down pulley/RrLw
[2] and the pin [3].
Note
• When you remove the up down pulley/RrLw [2], be careful
not to drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
10. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of a new up down
wire/Rr [1] to the up down stay [3] with 2 screws [4].
Note
• Place the shorter wire below the longer one with the wire
supporting part of the mounting plate outside to install the
up down wires.
[1]
• There are 2 types of up down wires, one for the front side
[4]
and the other for the rear side. These 2 wires are different
[2] in the direction of the wire mounting plates. Be sure to
use a wire that fits with the direction of a wire mounting
[3] plate.
fd501fs2062c
11. Fasten the new up down wire/Rr [1] with the wire end [3] that is
provided on the inside of the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and insert it
into the shaft [6]. Rotate the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and wind it
5.5 turns clockwise from inside to outside around the up and down
pulley with no slack. Then insert the up down pulley/RrLw [2] fully
[1] onto the shaft so that it coincides with the pin [4] and fasten it with
[2]
the E-ring [5]. If the angle does not coincide with the pin [4], move
up and down the front side of the up down tray to change the angle
of the shaft [6].
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
G-185
12. Hook up the up down wire/Rr [1] onto the up down pulley/RrUp [3]
through the relay pulley/Rr [2].
[3] [1]
[2]
fd501fs2064c
13. Wind the up down wire/Rr [1] 2 turns counterclockwise from inside
to outside around the up down pulley/RrLw [2] with no slack and
fasten it with the wire end [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
14. The route along which the up down wire/Rr passes

The route along which the up down wire/Rr passes is, on the
whole, as the drawings are shown in the left.
fd501fs2066c
G-186
15. Pull up the wire tensioner [1] upward with a designated force "A,"
with a tension gauge or a spring balance. Fasten it with the 3
screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
16. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
fd501fs2068c
17. With the up down stay [1] that is held in a horizontal position,
[4]
tighten the 2 screws [3] of the wire mounting plate [2].
[1] Note
• Move the up and down stay up and down and check to see
if it moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, adjust
[5] it again so that it becomes horizontal.
• Check the up down wire [4] if it gets behind the actuator
plate [5]. If it gets behind the douser, an unnecessary load
[3] [2] is applied to the up down wire [4] when the up down stay
[1] goes up.

reverse.
fd501fs2069c
15.3.18 Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
Note
• Both of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/2) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) have the new type [1] and the old
type [2].
• Each of the new and old types of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) has
different mounting metal frames and PI drive boards (PIDB) that correspond to each detection board. Therefore the new and old
types of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) are incompatible.
G-187
[1]
[2]
15.3.19 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type)
Note
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board
(PI). (Refer to I.4.7.5 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type) )
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi feed detection
board/1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

board/1 (MFDB/1) [3].
[3] [2] [1]
G-188
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate/2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board/1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2]
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate/2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board/2 cover [3].
Note
• When you turn it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

reverse.
[3] [2] [1]
G-189
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2)
• The shape of multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) [1] and Multi
[2] feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) [2] are different. When you
reinstall them, be sure to place them at the proper positions.
[1]
15.3.20 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type)
Note
• When you replace the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board
(PI). (Refer to I.4.7.6 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type))
(1) Procedure
board/1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

[1]
[3] [2] fd501fs2071c
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate/2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c
G-190

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board/1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2] fd501fs2073c
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate/2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board/2 cover [3].
Note
• When you turn it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

reverse.
[3] [2] [1] a0h0t3c007ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2)
[2] • The multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed
detection board/2 (MFDB/2) are installed on the same type board.
Be careful not to confuse one with the other when you install them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when you install it.
Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) [1]: 15AG
Multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) [2]: 56UA
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection board/
1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2). So,
even if it is installed, the connector cannot be connected.
[1] fd501fs2076c

CAUTION
• When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-191
control board [2].
Note
• Be sure to place the SW3 [3] same as the old FDCB. (Refer
to L.2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB))
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c
A 2. Check points when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC68)

Note
After you replace the FD control board (FDCB), conduct
fd501fs2078c
G-192
16. SD-506
16.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled
16.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
• 1 fixing screw of the mounting plate on each trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) and trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
a0h2t3c061ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed [2] Mounting plate

[3] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [4] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed
[5] Mounting plate [6] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

• The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) detects the home position of the trimmer blade. Once the home position is out of alignment, the
trimmer blade gets out from the trimmer press plate. It prevents the paper from entering to the trimmer section and causes the trimming
error or damages the trimmer blade retaining plate. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
• The trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit of the trimmer blade after the completion of the trimming. Once the
upper limit detection is out of alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed because the trimmer blade stops before the completion. The
trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to
change the installation position of PS51.
16.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) mounting plate
[3] [2] [1]
a0h2t3c062ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screws which you must not adjust and remove
[3] Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) -

• The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) detects the completion of the trimming. Once the timing of the trimmer completion is out of
alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed or the trimmer blade. The trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the
trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
16.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

• 1 fixing screw of the wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) mounting plate
G-193
(a) Previous trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]

a0h2t3c063ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screws which you must not adjust and remove
[3] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) -
(b) New trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]
[1] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) [2] Mounting plate

[3] Screws which you must not adjust and remove -

• The wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) detects the slack of the winding wire on the trimmer blade. Once the detection position is out of
alignment, the wire is removed from the winding pulley and damages the trimmer unit. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation
position of PS66.
16.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) mounting plate
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) actuator
[4] [5] [6]
[3] [2] [1] a0h2t3c064ca
[1] Screws which you must not adjust and remove [2] Actuator
[3] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [4] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
G-194
[5] Screws which you must not adjust and remove [6] Mounting plate

• The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) detects the home position of the trimmer press plate. Once the home position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. The paper fails to enter to the trimming section and a error occurs. Therefore, be sure
not to change the position of the actuator of PS53.
• The trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) detects the upper limit of the trimmer press. Once the upper limit position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. As a result, the paper fails to enter to the trimming section and an error occurs, or the
opening is not enough for replacing the trimmer blade. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS52.
16.1.5 Trimmer press brake

• 1 gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake
[2] [1] a0h2t3c065ca
[1] Trimmer press brake [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed

• The trimmer press brake pushes the timing belt and prevents the trimmer press motor (M32) from rotating too much which caused by the
inertia of the trimmer press board. Once the gap between the trimmer press brake and the timing belt changes, it damages the timing belt
or disables the brake. Therefore, be sure not to adjust the gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake.
16.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt

• All screws which fix the driving system of the trimmer press
[1] [2]
a0h2t3c066ca
[1] Screws which you must not adjust and remove (all screws [2] Screws that you can remove
that are shown in the picture)

• The right paper holding screw and the left paper holding screw drives the trimmer press plate through the timing belt. Once the part such
as a gear of the driving system is removed, the parallelism of the trimmer press plate is not guaranteed because of the belt tooth skipping.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the attaching screw of the cover which fixes the driving system and the bearing fixing screw.

ber
1 Cover Rear cover/Lt
2 Rear cover/Rt
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover/Fr
G-195
5 Upper cover/Rr3
6 Sub tray cover
7 Front door/Lt
8 Front door/Rt
9 Folding section Folding unit

CAUTION
16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
reverse.
[1] [2] 15anf2c002na
16.3.3 Rear cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
reverse.
[2] [1] 15anf2c003na
G-196
16.3.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1], slide the bottom of the left cover [2] to the
outside, and remove it to the bottom.
reverse.
[2] [1] 15anf2c004na
16.3.5 Upper cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 1.
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] on the front, 2 screws [2], 1 screw [3] on
the left, and 3 screws [4] under the cover.
3. Loosen a screw [5].
4. Lift up and remove the upper cover/Fr [6].
Note
[1] • When you remove the upper cover/Fr [6], pull the screw
[5] to the front to so that the tip of the screw does not
catch the upper cover/Fr [6].

reverse.
[6]
[4] [5] 15anf2c005nb
G-197
16.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Remove 2 screw caps [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
4. Loosen the screw [4] and then remove the upper cover/Rr3 [5].
Note
• When you remove the upper cover/Rr3 [5], pull the screw
[4] to the front so that the tip of the screw does not catch
the upper cover/Rr3 [5].

reverse.
[5]
[3] [3] [3]
[4] 15anf2c006na
16.3.7 Sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr. (Refer to G.16.3.5 Upper cover/Fr)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rr3. (Refer to G.16.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the sub
tray cover [3].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the sub tray cover [3], pull the screw
[4] to the outside.
[3] [1] [4] [1]
15anf2c007na
G-198
16.3.8 Front door/Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door/Lt [1].
[6] [5] [4]
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper/Lt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and slide the hinge [5] upward to remove the
fulcrum [6], and then remove the front door/Lt [1].
Note
• Support the front door/Lt [1] with your hand so that it does
not fall down When you remove the screw [4].

reverse.
[3] [2]
[1]
15anf2c008na
16.3.9 Front door/Rt

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [6] 1. Open the front door/Rt [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper/Rt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4]. Slide the hinge [5] upward to remove the
fulcrum [6], and remove the front door/Rt [1].
Note
• Support the front door/Rt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when you remove the screw [4].

reverse.
[2] [3]
[1] 15anf2c009na
G-199
16.3.10 Folding unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the folding unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the front door/Rt. (Refer to G.16.3.9 Front door/Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 clamps [2] from the rear of the folding
unit.
Note
• Be sure not to drop the clamps [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and the ground [4].

6. Remove the clamp and fall drop the wiring harness [7] from the
hole [6] on the wiring harness guide.
[3] [1] [6] [7] [1]
15anf2c010na
7. Pull out the folding unit.

8. Pull out the folding unit. Remove 2 screws [1], separate the notch
[2] from the hole [3] and remove the lower cover/2 [4].
9. Loosen the screw [5], remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the
lower cover/1 [7].
10. Remove 2 screws [8], separate the notch [10] from the shaft [9]
and remove the lower cover/3 [11].
[8] [11] [1] [4] [6] [7]
[2] [9] [10] [3] [5]
15anf2c011na
G-200
11. Check points when you reinstall the lower cover/3

Note
• Install the lower cover/3 [11] between 2 pins [2] of the
shaft [1]. If it is installed at an improper position, other
parts are damaged in storing the folding unit.
[1] [2] 15anf2c071na
[1] 12. Remove 4 screws [1], and then lift up and remove the folding unit
[2] with 2 people.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the positioning pin
[3] with the hole.
[3] [2]
[3]
[1] 15anf2c012na
[7] [6]
[5]
reverse.
Note
• When you hold the folding unit, be sure to hold the shafts
[4] at the front and rear or the upper top of the side plate
[5]. Never hold the jam release lever [6] or the handle [7].
They get damaged.
• When you place the folding unit, place it on the table not
to contact the guide plate [8] on the front with the floor.
Because it is projected from the bottom of the unit.
[8] [4]
15anf2c013na
G-201

CAUTION
• When the SD control board (SDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old SD control board (SDCB)
[1] and install it into the new SD control board (SDCB) [2].
Note
the same direction.
• Be sure to place the SW3 [3] same as the old SDCB. (Refer
to L.2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB))
• After you replace the SD control board (SDCB), conduct
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
[1]
[2]
A
[3]
a0g6f3c053ca
G-202
17. SD-513
Note

1 Cover Rear cover /Rt
2 Rear cover /Lt
3 Right cover/1
4 Right cover/2
5 Right cover/3
6 Front cover/1
7 Front cover/2
8 Front cover/3
9 Left cover/Fr1
10 Left cover/Fr2
11 Left cover/Fr3
12 Left cover /Rr
13 Upper cover/RrRt1
19 Upper cover/FrRt1
22 Upper cover/FrLt1
23 Upper cover/FrLt2
24 Upper cover/RrLt1
27 Sub tray cover
28 Paper exit load section Gripper paper exit unit
29 Front console Front console

CAUTION
17.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
[1] [2]
G-203
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the power cord cover [2].
[1] 3. Remove the power cord [3].
[3] [2]
4. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
[2] [1]

Note
• 2 PET sheets [2] are attached on the back side of the rear
cover/Lt [1].
Be sure to reinstall the rear cover/Lt and the rear cover/Rt
to the original position.
[2] [1]
17.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt1, the upper cover/FrRt2, and the
upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.17.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /
FrRt3)
G-204
[2] [1] [1] 4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/1 [2].
[1]
[1] [2] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/2 [2].
[3] [2] [1] 7. Pull out the trim scrap box [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 5 screws [2] and then remove the right cover/3 [3].
reverse.
17.3.4 Front cover/1, /2, /3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrLt2. (Refer to G.17.3.9 Upper cover/
FrLt1, /FrLt2)
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.17.3.8 Upper cover/
FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3)
4. Remove the left cover/Fr1 and the left cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.
17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
5. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/1 [2].
G-205
[2] [1] 6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/2 [2].
[1] [2] 7. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/3 [2].
reverse.
[1]
17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrLt2. (Refer to G.17.3.9 Upper cover/
FrLt1, /FrLt2)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the left cover/Fr3 [2].
[1] [2]
G-206
[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the saddle stitching section door [1].
reverse.
17.3.6 Left cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
17.3.7 Upper cover/RrRt1, /RrRt2, /RrRt3, /RrRt4, /RrRt5, /RrRt6

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 3 screw covers [1].
[1] [2] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/RrRt1 [2].
G-207
G-208
reverse.
17.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrRt1 [2].

[2] [1]

[1]

[2] [1]
G-209

[2] [1] 6. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
17.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrLt1 [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrLt2 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
G-210
17.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/RrLt1 [2].

[2] [1]
3. Hold the handle [1], and open the sub tray [2] in the arrow-marked
[2] [1] direction.
[1] 4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the sub tray cover [2].
[2] [1]
G-211
[2] [1]
[1]
reverse.
[2] [1]
17.3.11 Opening and closing of the front console

(1) Procedure
1. Open the entrance door [1].
[3] 2. Remove the screw cover [2].
3. Insert a driver into the hole [3] vertically, and then move the lock
[4] board [4] in the arrow-marked direction and release the lock.
4. Hold the handle [5] with the lock released, and open the front
console [6] a little in the arrow-marked direction.
5. Pull out a driver from the hole [3].
[5]
[2] [6] [1]
G-212
6. Insert a driver into the hole [1] vertically, and then rotate the sub
[1] lock [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release the lock.
7. Hold the handle [3] and open the front console [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
Note
[1] • If SD-513 is not terminated normally and the trimmer press
unit is left open, the front console cannot be opened
because the lock mechanism of the trimmer section [1]
works.
When you open the front console in this condition,
remove the screw cover [2] and turn the screw [3] in the
arrow-marked direction to release the lock mechanism [1].
WARNING
• When you release the lock mechanism [1] to open the
front console, be careful not to put your hands in a
gap of the trimmer press unit.
If you touch the trimmer blade, you could get injured.
[3] [2]
[1] [2] 8. When you open the front console further, remove 2 screws [1] and
release 2 wires [2].
17.3.12 Front console

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
[1] [1]
G-213
3. Remove 4 screws [1] each and remove the coupling plate/1 [2] and
[2] [1] the coupling plate/2 [3].
[2] [1]
5. Remove 3 screws [1] each and remove the coupling plate/3 [2] and
the coupling plate/4 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-214
6. Close the front console [1]. Then, separate the front console [1]
and the rear console [4] while you pull out the wiring harness [3]
from the hole [2].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the wiring harness [3] with the
edge of the hole [2] or the caster.
• Before you move the removed front console, be sure to lift
the open close caster to the highest position.
When the open close caster is moved down and you move
the front console, the open close caster possibly contacts
with steps on the floor and is damaged. (Refer to I.21.2 1st
folding skew adjustment)
[4] [2] [1]
reverse.
[3]
17.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt1, the upper cover/FrRt2 and the
upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.17.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /
FrRt3)
3. Move down the clamp unit [1] to the position where the bottom [2]
of the clamp unit [1] is lower than the metal plate [3].
Note
• If you do not move down the clamp unit [1], the clamp unit
[1] contacts the gripper paper exit unit and the gripper
paper exit unit cannot be removed.
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] [3] Note
• When you have not installed the FD-504, hold the [2]
section of the clamp unit [1] from the downside and lift it
down.
• To prevent the booklet from being damaged and got dirty,
be careful not to touch the tape [3] of the clamp unit [1].
G-215
Note
• When you have installed the FD-504, push down the [1]
section of the FD-504.
[1]
[1]

5. Remove 7 screws [2], and remove the gripper paper exit unit [4]
while you hold the handle [3].
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
G-216
Note
[1] • When you put the gripper paper exit unit [1] upside down,
put it on A3 or 11 x 17 paper [2].
If you directly put the gripper paper exit unit [1] on a floor
or a desk, the external section of the gripper paper exit
unit [3] is possibly damaged.
[2] [3]

[2] reverse.
Note
• When you install the gripper paper exit unit [1], be sure
not to damage the connector [3] of the paper exit motor
(M28) [2].
[3] [1]
17.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door

Note
• The booklet tray section door is equipped with the lock mechanism so that the door does not open during the machine operation.
When the machine completes the operation normally, the lock mechanism is released. However, when the machine does not
complete the operation normally, the lock mechanism becomes active and the booklet tray section door does not open.
In order to open the booklet tray section door when the machine does not complete the operation normally, release the lock
mechanism by following procedures.
G-217
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.17.3.8 Upper cover/
[2] FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3)
2. Insert a driver into the screw [1] and rotate in the direction of the
arrow.
3. Release the lock mechanism [2] and open the booklet tray section
door [3].
[1] [3]
17.3.15 Moving up and down of the booklet holding

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.17.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
2. When you turn the encoder [1], the booklet holding/Fr [2] and the
booklet holding/Rr [3] move down.
Note
• When you rotate the encoder [1], be sure to hold and
rotate the encoder [1] with your arms form the left side of
the machine.
The encoder possibly rotates when the booklet holding
moves down and you could get injured.
3. When you turn the encoder [1] further, the booklet holding/Fr [2]
moves up.
4. When you turn the encoder [1] further, the booklet holding/Rr [3]
moves up.
Note
• When you move up the booklet holding, rotate the
encoder [1] until no load is applied on the encoder.
When you get your hands off of the encoder with the load,
the booklet holding falls down and the encoder rotates in
the reverse direction and you possibly get injured.

Note
• When the SD control board (PCB1) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
G-218
A 2. Check the point when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC70)

Note
• After you replace the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
fd501fs2078c
G-219
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 18. CR-101
18. CR-101
18.1.1 Creaser unit
(1) Crease blade fixing plate
• 4 screws that fix the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw
[1] [3]
[3] [2] [4]

[1] Crease blade fixing plate/Up [2] Crease blade fixing plate/Lw
[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Crease blade

The install positions of the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw are adjusted during the production process.
If you remove 4 screws that fix the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw, the position of the crease blade moves
and the crease error occurs.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw is not
allowed.
(2) Crease guide

• 8 screws that fix the crease guide
G-220
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1] Crease guide [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The install position of the crease guide is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When you remove 2 screws that fix each crease guide, the interval of the crease guide changes and crease error occurs.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the crease guide is not allowed.
(3) Trimmer receiver

• 4 screws that fix the trimmer receiver
• 3 screws that keep the position of the trimmer receiver
G-221
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1] Trimmer receiver [2] Screws not allowed to be removed (Screws that fix the
trimmer receiver)
[3] Screws that you must not remove (screws that keep the -
position of the trimmer receiver)

The install position of the trimmer receiver is adjusted during the production process.
When you remove 4 screws that fix the trimmer receiver and the 3 screws that hold the trimmer receiver, the position of the trimmer
receiver changes and crease error occurs.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the trimmer receiver is not allowed.

1 Creaser unit Creaser unit

CAUTION
G-222
18.3.2 Creaser unit

(1) Procedure
[5] [3] [2] [1] 1. Open the entrance door [1].
2. Remove the screw [6], and remove the knob (number: SD6) [3].
Note
• A unique number is printed on the knob [3] for the
reference when you release the jam.
When you install the knob [3], be sure not to mistake other
knobs for the knob [3].
3. Remove 4 screws [4], and remove the creaser cover [5].
[4]
[4] 4. Rotate the crank [1], and close the crease blade [2].
6. Remove 4 screws [4], and pull out the creaser unit [5].
reverse.
[1] [2] [3] [5]
G-223
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 19. TU-503
19. TU-503
19.1.1 Slitter unit
(1) Slitter rail
• 6 screws that fix the slitter rail
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Slitter rail [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] Slit cutter Assy /Fr [4] Slit cutter Assy /Rr

The install position of the slitter rail is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When you remove 6 screws that fix the slitter rail, the slitter rail that regulates the movement of the slit cutter assy tilts. The slit position
possibly changes.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the slitter rail is not allowed.
(2) Actuator
• 1 screw that fixes the actuator of the slit cutter assy/Fr
• 1 screw that fixes the actuator of the slit cutter assy/Rr
G-224
[1] [2] [1] [2]
[4] [3]
[1] Actuator [2] Screws not allowed to be removed


The install position of the actuator is adjusted during the production process.
When you remove each screw that fixes the actuator, the position of the actuator possibly moves and the home position cannot be detected
properly. Then, the slit position possibly misaligned.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the actuator is not allowed.
(3) Pulley shaft

• 2 screws that fix the pulley shaft
G-225
[2] [4] [4] [2]
[1] [3] [3] [1]
[6] [5]
[1] Pulley shaft [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] Pulley [4] Belt

The install position of the pulley shaft is adjusted during the production process.
When you remove 1 screw that fixed each pulley shaft, the position of the pulley changes and the tension of the belt changes. The slit
position possibly changes.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the pulley shaft unit is not allowed.
(4) Slit cutter assy coupling screw

• 2 screws that couple the upper section and the lower section of the slit cutter assy/Fr
• 2 screws that couple the upper section and the lower section of the slit cutter assy/Rr
G-226
[4] [4]
[3] [2] [1] [3]

[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Slit cutter

The coupling position of the slit cutter assy is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When you remove the screw that couples the upper section and lower section of the slit cutter assy, the position of the upper slit cutter and
the lower slit cutter changes. The trimming operation possibly becomes unavailable.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the slit cutter assy is not allowed.
(5) Slitter unit positioning pin assy

• 2 screws that fix the slitter unit positioning pin assy
[1]
[2]
[1] Positioning pin assy [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The installation position of the positioning pin assy is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When the position of the positioning jig changes, the slitter unit and the slit possibly tilt.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the positioning pin assy is not allowed.
G-227

1 Slitter unit Slitter unit

CAUTION
19.3.2 Slitter unit

(1) Procedure
[4] [5] [2] [3] 1. Open the entrance door [1].
5. Remove 6 screws [6], and remove the slitter cover [7].
Note
• Depending on the installation place of the slitter cover [7],
the slit scraps box could not be removed. Therefore, when
you reinstall the slitter cover [7], move the slitter cover [7]
to the right side.
[6] [1]
[7] [6]
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [1], and remove 6 screws [2].
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
7. Pull the handle [1].
[1] [2]
G-228
8. Hold the handle [1], and pull out approximately two thirds of the
slitter unit [2].
[1] [2]
9. Hold the positions [1], and remove the slitter unit [2].
[1]
Note
• When you remove the slitter unit [1], do not push the
handle [2].
When the handle [2] is pushed, the slit scraps shutter [3]
opens. Then, you cannot push the slitter unit [1].
• When you put the slitter unit [1] with the slit scraps
shutter [3] opened, the slit scraps shutter [3] or the handle
[2] is possibly damaged.
[2] [3] [1]

10. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the TU support stay [2].
[2] [1]
11. Install the TU support stay [2] with the screw [1] that you removed
on the step 9.
reverse.
[1] [2]
G-229
20. FD-504
Note

1 Square-fold unit Square-fold unit

CAUTION
20.3.2 Square-fold unit

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [4] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.17.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
Note
• When you remove the square-fold unit [1], be sure not to
move the SQF roller assy [2] to the inside beyond the
specified position [3].
The booklet pressure section of the SQF roller assy [2]
and the SQF clamp plate [4] possibly contact and the
booklet pressure section is possibly damaged.
2. Remove 2 connectors [1].

[1]
[2] [1] 3. Remove 7 screws [1], and remove the metal frame [2].
G-230
4. Remove 5 screws [1], and then release the fixing of the square-
fold unit [2].
[1] [2]
5. Install the 4 screws [1] and 2 handles [2] that were used at the
[2] installation.
Note
• After you install the square-fold unit [3], be sure to remove
the handle [2].
If the unit is operated with the handle is installed, the
machine could damaged.
[1] [3]
6. Hold the handle [1] and remove the square-fold unit [2].
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [1] reverse.
Note
• When you install the square-fold unit, lift up the sub lock
[1] of the SD-513 to move away and insert the driver [3]
into the hole [2] to fix the sub lock [1].
If the sub lock [1] is not moved away, you cannot install
the square-fold unit.
20.3.3 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (1)

(1) Procedure
Note
• When you remove FD-504 from the system configuration, be sure to perform following procedure and install the coupling screw.
When the coupling screw is not installed, the clamp section of SD-513 is possibly damaged.
G-231

paper exit unit)
2. Remove the coupling screw [1].
[1]
[3] 3. Adjust the height of the square-fold unit [3] so that the D-cut side
[2] of the pulley [1] turns down and is horizontal.
[1]
[2]
Note
• When you adjust the height of the square-fold unit [1], be
sure not to touch the booklet pressure side [2] of the SQF
clamp plate.
• Adjust the height of the square-fold unit [1] so that the
height of the front and rear becomes flat.
[2] [1]
G-232
4. Check that the hole [2] of the pulley [1] turns up.
[2] [1] Note
• When the hole [2] does not turn up, adjust the height of
the rear side [3] of the square-fold unit and let the hole [2]
turn up.
Be careful not to change the height of the front side [4] of
the square-fold unit so as not to change the position of
the D-cut that you adjusted on the step 3.
[3] [4]
5. Install the coupling screw that you removed on the step 1 to the
screw hole [1].
Note
• When the screw hole [1] does not turn down, repeat the
step 3 and the step 4.
[1]
20.3.4 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (2)

(1) Procedure
Note
• When you remove the FD-504 from the system configuration, be sure to use the following screws to install the guide plate.
If you use incorrect screws, the screws contact the drive section and the clamp section of the SD-513 could be damaged.
[4] [3] 1. Use 2 long silver screws [1] and install the booklet fixing plate [3]
to the clamp/Lt [2].
2. Use 2 short black screws [4] and install the booklet fixing plate [3]
to the clamp/Rt [5].
[5] [2] [1]
G-233
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 21. PB-503
21. PB-503
ber
1 Cover Front door
2 Front cover
3 Booklet door
4 Rear cover/Rt
5 Rear cover/Lt
6 Left cover
7 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr
8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr
9 Pellet supply cover
10 SC cover/Fr
11 SC cover/Up
12 Upper cover/FrRt
13 Upper cover/FrLt
14 Upper cover/RrRt
15 Upper cover/RrLt
16 Upper cover/Md
17 Others Deodorant unit
18 Pellet supply section Pellet supply unit
19 Glue tank section Glue tank unit
20 SC section SC unit
21 Clamp section Clamp unit
22 Others PB left unit
23 Book stock section Book lift wire
24 Cart wire
25 Conveyance section Conveyance unit/Lw
26 Relay conveyance section Relay conveyance unit
27 Cover paper supply section Cover paper tray
28 Cover paper lift wire

CAUTION
G-234
21.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the front door [1] from the
lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] on the front door [1].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the wire [3], tighten the screw at the
position in the picture. (To prevent the wire from
contacting with the tab.)
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c018ca
G-235
21.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
2. Lift the lever [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
4. Release the notches [3] at 2 positions from the screws [4] and pull
out the projection [5] from the hole [6], and then remove the front
cover [7].
reverse.
[5]
[2] [7]
[3] [4] [1] a15xt3c019ca
G-236
21.2.4 Booklet door

(1) Procedure
[1] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the booklet door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the booklet door [1] from
the lower pin [6]. Do not remove the mounting bracket [5] from the
booklet door [1].
4. Remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
reverse.
[6] a15xt3c020ca
21.2.5 Rear cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.21.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
Note
• When you install the rear cover, make sure to attach the
metal plates [3] to the bottom of the rear cover.

reverse.
[3] a15xt3c021ca
G-237
21.2.6 Rear cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.21.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to place it with the
projection [3] put into the notch of the upper cover/RrLt
[4], and with its bottom [5] put on the metal frame [6].

reverse.
[1] [2] [1]
[5] [6] a15xt3c022ca
21.2.7 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
reverse.
[1] a15xt3c023ca
G-238
21.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover/Fr [2].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the claw of the plate
in the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr.
[1] a15xt3c024ca
21.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put it in the hole of the
relay conveyance gear cover/Rr.
[1] a15xt3c025ca
21.2.10 Pellet supply cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.21.2.18 Deodorant unit)
RrRt)
3. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr. (Refer to G.21.2.9
Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch/Rr [2].
[1] [2] a15xt3c026ca
G-239

[4]
7. Open the pellet supply door [3]. Remove the pellet supply cover [5]
in the arrow-marked direction [6] carefully so as not to damage the
wire harness [4].
Note
• When you remove or installing the glue supply cover, be
careful not to cut or damage the wire binding [4].

reverse.
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1] a15xt3c027ca
21.2.11 SC cover/Fr
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr. (Refer to G.21.2.8
[2]
Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch/Fr [2].
[1]
a15xt3c028ca
G-240
3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the SC cover/Fr [2] to the
[4] [3]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws on the upper
side [3] into the holes [4], and put the claw on the lower
side [5] to the inside of the metal frame.

reverse.
[2]
[1]
[6] [5] a15xt3c029ca
21.2.12 SC cover/Up
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.21.2.19 Pellet supply
[1]
unit)
2. Remove the SC cover/Fr. (Refer to G.21.2.11 SC cover/Fr)
3. Slightly lift up the circled part [2] to remove 4 screws [1] and
remove the SC cover/Up [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4].
reverse.
[3] [4]
[1] [2] a15xt3c030ca
G-241
21.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt

(1) Procedure
[4] [2] [1] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.21.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Open the upper door [1].
4. Pull the left part of the upper cover/FrRt [3] in the arrow-marked
direction [4]. Then release the cover from the projection [5] and
disconnect it from the connector [6].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the connector [6]
under the upper cover/FrRt [3] properly. Be careful not to
let the cables get caught between the cover and the frame.

reverse.
[3]
[6] [5] a15xt3c031ca
21.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr. (Refer to G.21.2.8
Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr)
4. Open the relay conveyance door.
6. Remove 7 screws [4] and then remove the upper cover/FrLt [5].
Note
[5] [4] harness [6].

reverse.
[3] [2] [1] [6] a15xt3c032ca
21.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover/RrRt [3].
reverse.
[2] a15xt3c033ca
G-242
21.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr. (Refer to G.21.2.9
[1]
Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr)
4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/RrLt [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1] a15xt3c034ca
21.2.17 Upper cover/Md

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.21.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Md [2].
reverse.
a15xt3c035ca
21.2.18 Deodorant unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
G-243
[1] [2] 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and tilt the deodorant unit [2]. Disconnect the
connector [3] and then remove the deodorant unit [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws [2] in the
holes [5].
[4] [5]
[3] a15xt3c036ca

[3] reverse.
Note
[2] • When you connect the loop connector [1] to the connector
[2], the operational check with no error indication without
connecting the deodorant unit is enabled. After the
operation, be sure to remove the loop connector [1] and
put it inside [4] of the rear cover/Lt [3].
[4] • After you install it, be sure to check that the deodorant
fans/1 (FM97) and the deodorant fans/2 (FM98) of the
deodorant unit are rotating.
[1]
a15xt3c037ca
G-244
21.2.19 Pellet supply unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.21.2.5 Rear cover/Rt)
2. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.21.2.10 Pellet supply
cover)
[2] a15xt3c045ca
G-245
[2] [3] [1] 5. Loosen 2 screws [1].

6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply unit [3] upward.
Note
• When you remove the unit, be careful not to spill the
pellet.

reverse.
[2] a15xt3c046ca
21.2.20 Glue tank unit

CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is hot after the deactivation of the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
To prevent burn injuries, perform the maintenance work after the temperature of the unit downs.
G-246
(1) Procedure
[2]
RrRt)
3. Remove the screw [1], disconnect 2 connectors [2], and then
remove the suction unit [3].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and pull out the pin [6] straight up to release
the coupling arm [7].
[3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6] [7]

a15xt3c047ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then uncouple the belt coupling bracket
[2].
a075f2c119ca
G-247
7. Pull out the glue tank unit [1] and remove 4 screws [2].
[2] [2]
Note
• When you move the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by
the metal frame [3] on the right side of the unit.
• When you remove the screw [2], be careful to avoid an
injury from sharp metal edges around the screw.
8. Pull out the glue tank unit [1].

9. Remove the roller [5] from the rail [4] and remove the glue tank
unit.
reverse.
Note
• After you install the glue tank unit, make a test print.
Check that no glue is squeezed out of the top and bottom
edges of the created book and no pages come off the
cover when you open the book.
[4] [5] [1] [3] a15xt3c048ca
[1] Note
• Never loosen or tighten the 2 screws because they are
keeping the levelness and the vertical position of the glue
tank unit.
a15xt3c049ca
21.2.21 SC unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.21.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover/Md. (Refer to G.21.2.17 Upper cover/Md)
3. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.21.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the SC cover/Up. (Refer to G.21.2.12 SC cover/Up)
5. Remove the upper cover/FrRt. (Refer to G.21.2.13 Upper cover/
FrRt)
6. Disconnect 5 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the wires [3] that are connected to the SC unit [2] from
saddles.
[1] a15xt3c050ca
G-248
[1]
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the wire [3] and the knob [4].
Then remove the belt [5].
Note
• After you install the belt [5], check that the lug belt is
properly installed with no slack and turns smoothly when
the knob is turned.
10. Hold the metal frames [6] on the rear and the front side of the unit,
and remove the SC unit [7] to the arrowed direction.
[6] [7] [6]
[1]
[4]
[5] [3] [2]

a15xt3c051ca

reverse.
Note
• When the SC unit [1] is removed, the lock arm [2] is
released from the stopper [3]. Therefore, when you install
the SC unit, be sure to put the lock arm [2] under the
stopper [3] while you lift and tilt the unit in the direction of
the arrow [4].
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
a075f2c042ca
G-249
21.2.22 Clamp unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.21.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and pull out the pin [3] down to release the
coupling arm [4].
5. Release the wiring harness [5] between the connector [1] and the
coupling arm [4] from the saddles.
[3] [2]
[4] [5] a15xt3c052ca
G-250
[2] [3] 6. Pull out the clamp unit [1] carefully watching the wire binding and
the coupling arm on the rear of the unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the lock bracket [3].
9. Hold the left metal frame and the right metal frame [5] to lift the
clamp unit [1]. Release the 4 notches [6] from the hooks [7] and
remove the clamp unit.
Note
• When you reinstall the clamp unit, make sure that the 4
hooks [7] are properly fitted in the notches [6] of the unit.

reverse.
Note
[5] [4]
• After you install the clamp unit, make a test print and
binding to check that the cover and inside papers are
neatly aligned without skewing.
[1]
[6] [7]
a15xt3c053ca
21.2.23 PB left unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.21.2.6 Rear cover/Lt)
5. Remove 2 screws (with washer) [1].
[1]
a15xt3c054ca
G-251
a15xt3c055ca
a15xt3c056ca
[1] 8. Loosen 4 screws [1].
a15xt3c057ca
G-252
9. Remove the screws [1] at 2 positions, 2 each.

Note
• As the screw [1] is longer than other screws, be careful
when you reinstall.
[1]
a15xt3c058ca
[1] 10. Remove the clamps [1] at 4 positions.
[1] a15xt3c059ca
G-253
[2] [7] [1] [6] [3] 11. Rotate the PB left unit [2] around the wiring harness section [1] on
the rear side and remove it from the PB right unit [3].
Note
• The PB left unit [2] is rotated up to about 90 degrees.
• When you rotate the PB left unit [2], be sure to rotate it
around the wiring harness section [1] and be careful not
to damage the wiring harness.
• When you reinstall it, put the bottom of the PB left unit [5]
on the brackets [4] on the lower side and then put the pins
[6] on the upper side into the holes [7].

reverse.
[5] [4] a15xt3c060ca
21.2.24 Book lift wire

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Perform the I/O check in the service mode in the following order of
the output check code. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2)
and the main power switch (SW1) after you move the carriage
section to its lowest position.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
4. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddles and remove 2
screws [2] and then remove the wiring harness bracket [3].
[2] a15xt3c066ca
G-254
[3] [2] [3] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the 4 mounting brackets [2] on
the front and rear of the book stock unit.
Note
• When you reinstall, route the book lift wires/Fr [3] and/Rr
[1] [1] [4] between 2 screws and a screw [1], and secure them
with the mounting brackets [2].
6. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the tension bracket/Fr [5].

Note
• When you install the tension bracket/Fr [5], be sure to
[5] [6]
tighten the screws [6] while you pull down the bracket by
the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
7. Loosen the 2 screws [8] of the tension bracket/Rr [7].

Note
• When you install the tension bracket/Rr [7], be sure to
tighten the screws [8] while you pull down the bracket by
the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8] [7] [2]

a15xt3c038ca
G-255
[11] 8. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
Then remove the book lift wire/Fr [5].
[4]
Note
[2] • Install the book lift wire/Fr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower right [6] of the pulley [2].
Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[1] [9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
[5]
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
end [4] into the pulley.
[3]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c039ca
[5] 9. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the washers [2] and [3], spring
[4], and the gear [5].
[3] 10. Remove the coupling [6] and the pin [7].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c040ca
G-256
11. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
[4] [2] [1] [3] Then remove the book lift wire/Rr [5].
Note
• Install the book lift wire/Rr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower left [6] of the pulley [2].
[5] Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
[11] end [4] into the pulley.
reverse.
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c041ca
21.2.25 Cart wire

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the mounting plate/Rr [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to open the registration
plate/Fr [3] and the registration plate/Rr [4] fully and then
install the mounting plate/Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the mounting plate/Fr [6].
Note
• When you reinstall it, temporarily hold the mounting plate/
Fr [6] and hook the tension gauge on the hole [7]. Then
pull it in the arrow-marked direction [8] with the standard
[3] [4] value and then fully tighten it.
Standard value: 1kgf to 1.5kgf
• Check that the wires are not crossed or they do not
contact the metal frame.
[8] [7] [5] [6]

a15xt3c061ca
G-257
[1] [2] [4] [3] [6] [5] 3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the mounting metal fitting/
Rr [2].
4. Remove the wire [3] from the pulley [4] and release it from the
saddles [5].
Note
• When you install the wire [3] on the pulley [4], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [6] with the mounting plate/Rr on the
upper side.
5. Remove the screw [7] and remove the mounting metal fitting/Fr [8].
6. Remove the wire [9] from the pulley [10] and release it from the
saddles [11].
Note
• When you install the wire [9] on the pulley [10], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [12] with the mounting plate/Rr on
the upper side.
[10] [7]
[8]
[11] [9]
[12]
a15xt3c062ca
[2] [4] [3] [1] 7. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the edge part [3]
between the projections [4].

reverse.
a15xt3c063ca
21.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw

(1) Procedure
[7] [5] [7] 1. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the wire binding from 6
saddles.
2. Remove the screw [2] and slide the coupling [3] into the arrow-
marked direction.
4. Release the conveyance unit/Lw [6] from the hooks [5] and remove
[4] [4]
the unit.
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to align it to the projection [7].

reverse.
[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c063ca
G-258
21.2.27 Relay conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2]
2. Remove the upper cover/FrLt. (Refer to G.21.2.14 Upper cover/
FrLt)
3. Remove the upper cover/RrLt. (Refer to G.21.2.16 Upper cover/
RrLt)
5. Remove the E-rings [1] at 2 positions and remove the spacer [2],
and then release the arm [3].
Note
• When you release the arm [3], the conveyance guide plate
[4] falls. Hold it by your hand during the operation.
[4]
6. Put down the conveyance guide plate [4].

[5] a15xt3c064ca

9. Hold 2 shafts [2] and remove the relay conveyance unit [3].
Note
• When you remove the relay conveyance unit [3], insert a
thin driver into the hole [5] so that the relay conveyance
[6] door [4] does not close. When you move down the relay
conveyance door [4] lower than the horizontal position,
the gear [6] comes off from the dumper gear [7] and the
[7] dumper adjustment is misaligned.

reverse.
[5] [4] [2] [1]
[1] [3]
[2] a15xt3c065ca
G-259
21.2.28 Cover paper tray

CAUTION
• As the cover paper tray is heavy, be sure to perform the following work with 2 people.
Note
• When you lift the cover paper tray, be sure to hold it by the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
2. Slightly push up the cover paper tray lock lever [2] with a
screwdriver or a similar tool and pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c042ca
3. Remove the 2 stopper screws [2], 1 for each right rail and the left
rail [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
[2] [1]
a075f2c065ca
G-260
4. Remove 4 screws [1], 2 for each left rail and the right rail, hold the
cover paper tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it
straight up.
Note
• When you install the cover paper tray, make sure that the
4 knobs [3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches
[4] of the cover paper tray.
• When you lift the cover paper tray, be sure to hold the
specified positions [5] by 2 people. Do not hold the part
[6] as the part can easily become deformed, which
adversely affects the paper feed resulting in a paper jam.
reverse.
[2] [1] [5]

[3] [4]
a075f2c066ca
G-261
21.2.29 Cover paper lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.21.2.28 Cover paper
[2] tray)
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[1] [1] [3]
a075f2c067ca
[5] [3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the knob [2] and the belt [3].
5. Remove 6 screws [4] and remove the gear cover [5].
[4]
a075f2c068ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1].
a075f2c069ca
G-262
[3] [2] 7. Change the position of the pulley [1], and pull out the wire ends of
the lift wire/Fr1 [2] and the lift wire/Fr2 [3] from each hole of the
shaft [4].
Note
• The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole that is near the frame of the
[1]
cover paper tray. The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/
Fr2 [3], must be inserted into the shaft hole that is near
the frame of the cover paper tray.
• When you install the pulley, lift the cover paper lift plate
slightly to loosen the wires and insert the wire ends one
by one into the shaft holes. Then secure them with the
pulley [1].
[4]
a075f2c070ca
8. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[2] [2].
9. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Fr1 [4] and the cover paper lift
wire/Fr2 [5] from each pulley [3].
[4] Note
• When you install the wires, make sure that the wires are
[1]
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
[5]
[3] crossed each other.
[4] [5]
a075f2c071ca
10. Pull out each wire end [2] through each hole of the cover paper lift
plate arm [1].
Note
• When you pull out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not
to damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c072ca
G-263
11. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the gear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c073ca
[3] [2] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the bearing [3].
[1] a075f2c074ca
[3] [4] 13. Remove the bearing [1] and the E-ring [2], and then remove the
gear [3].
Note
• When you remove the gear [3], be careful not to drop the
pin [4].
[1] [2] a075f2c075ca
[1] 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop the
bearing [3].
[3] [2] a075f2c076ca
G-264
[1] [3] 15. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the pin [3].
[2] a075f2c077ca
[1] [2] [3] 16. Remove the E-ring [1].

17. Pull out the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [2] and the cover paper lift
wire/Rr2 [3] from the shaft holes in the same manner as step 7.
a075f2c078ca
[2] [1] 18. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [1] and the cover paper lift
wire/Rr2 [2] in the same manner as step 8 to step 10.
reverse.
Note
• When you pull out the wire end [3] of the cover paper lift
wire/Rr2 [2], lift the cover paper lift plate until the cover
paper lift plate arm [4] appears.
• The wire/Fr is gray in color and the wire/Rr is black.
• When the installation is completed, make sure that the lift
plate is horizontal.
[3] [4]
a075f2c079ca
21.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function

• When a problem occurs at the clamp section or the cover paper table section, the binding can be checked with the manual operation.
Note
• Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB) after the check. (Manual operation forbidden state)
G-265
(1) Procedure
2. Connect the connector [2] to the connector (CN5) [1] on the PB
control board (PBCB).
[2] [1] a15xt3c043ca
3. Press the button/1 [1].

[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the front door and pull out the clamp unit.
5. Place the inside paper in the clamp unit.
6. Adjust the clamp alignment plate/Fr and the clamp alignment plate/
Rr to the inside paper edge on the shorter side by hand.
8. Place the clamp unit.
Note
• Place the clamp unit gently. When you place it roundly,
the misalignment of inside papers occurs because the
clamp alignment plate is widened.
9. Close the front door.

Note
• Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board
(PBCB) after the check.
a15xt3c044ca
21.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

Note
• When you replace the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board.
(Refer to I.4.7.7 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB))
G-266
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the conveyance unit/Lw [1]. (Refer to G.21.2.26
Conveyance unit/Lw)
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed
detection board/S (MFDBS) [3].
[2]
[3] a075f2c095ca

[1] [2]
4. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board/
S (MFDBS) [3].
[3]
a075f2c096ca
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed
detection board/R (MFDBR) [2].
[1]
[2] a075f2c097ca
G-267

[1] [2]
board/R (MFDBR) [3].
reverse.
[3]
a075f2c098ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) and the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR)
• The multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) and the multi feed
[2]
detection board/R (MFDBR) are installed on the same type board.
Be careful not to confuse one with the other when you install them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when you install it.
Multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) [1]: 56UA
Multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) [2]: 15AG
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection board/
S (MFDBS) and the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR). So,
even if it is installed, the connector cannot be connected.
[1] a075f2c099ca
G-268
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 22. GP-501
22. GP-501
22.1 Centering punched holes
Die Set Position Cradle Adjustment, The die set position cradle is set in the factory; however, because of the punched-hole spacing on the PB
die sets, there is a minimal amount of paper on each edge of the punched paper. The die set position cradle may have to be fine adjusted to
center the punched-hole pattern in the paper. Listed below are the step-by-step instructions to adjust the die set to the proper position.
1. The punched-hole alignment must be checked on a piece of
punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the
[1] punched-holes should be aligned evenly along the edge and
[2]
centered between the ends [2]. If the punched-holes are not
aligned, then the die set cradle must be adjusted to align the
punched holes.
Note
• The paper path is always constant, if the holes are not
centered, you must adjust the die set cradle.
2. The two back covers on the GP-501 Punch must be removed to
access the die set position cradle [1]. (Refer to G.22.3.3 Removing
the rear cover.)
3. Before adjusting the die set position cradle, you must first note what
direction the die set cradle [1] must move.
G-269
4. Loosen the lock-down screw [1].

5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw [2]
clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the die set position cradle.
6. Observe the punched paper. If the punched-holes are too close to

the rear of the machine, then you must turn the adjustment screw
counter-clockwise [1].
7. If the punched-holes are too close to the front of the machine, then
you must turn the adjustment screw clockwise [1].
Note
• Seven full turns of the adjustment screw result in a 1/4"
(6.35 mm) change in the punched hole position.
8. Before tightening the lock-down screw [1], tilt or bias the assembly
towards the bottom of the machine [2] and tighten the lock-down
screw. This will ensure positive engagement between the locking
lever and the die set.
9. Run a test sample of punched paper and recheck paper alignment.
Re-adjust if necessary.
G-270
22.2 Door latch

22.2.1 Checking the door latch
(1) Procedure
1. Ensure the door latch holds the door closed and that the activating
bracket tab [1] depresses the door switch [2]. The tab should press
the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming out.
22.2.2 Adjusting the door latch

(1) To adjust the door latch:
2. Loosen the two adjustment screws [1] on the door latch.
3. Do one of the following.
• To move the door in, move the latch towards the front of the
door.
• To move the door out, move the latch away from the front of
the door.
4. Tighten the 2 screws [1] and close the door.
5. Test its operation.
22.2.3 Replacing the door latch and switch

(1) To replace the door latch:
G-271
(2) To replace the door switch:

3. Unplug connectors from switch [2].
22.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service

22.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service
Most service requires that the GP-501 Punch be separated from the printer and finisher and the rear cover be removed.
WARNING
• Disconnect the unit from power and maintain the cord in your possession. Failure to observe this warning can result in injury or
electrical shock.
(1) Procedure
• Unplug the unit from power.
• Disconnect the communication cable
• Empty Chip Bin
22.3.2 Separating the punch from the printer

Follow the instructions as described in Installation Manual.
22.3.3 Removing the rear cover

Separate the punch from the printer and finisher first. (Refer to G.22.3.2 Separating the punch from the printer.)
Note
• It is not necessary nor recommended that you remove the top cover.
(1) Procedure
(2) Tool Required

• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" hex head nut driver
(3) To remove the rear cover:

1. Remove the 5 screws on the entrance side [1] and remove the 6
rear cover screws [2].
2. Slide the cover out from under the top cover. Do not remove the
top cover.
22.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer

The punch must be level and in line with the printer and finisher. If the printer and GP-501 Punch are moved or relocated, the system must be
re-leveled.
Note
• It is important that the punch is not twisted or skewed. It must be level front to back and side to side.
G-272
(1) Procedure
Raise or lower the GP-501 Punch’s castors to level it.
(2) Tool Required

• 2 3/8" open ended wrenches
• Level
(3) To level the punch:

1. Remove the rear cover and put the punch back in line with the
printer and finisher.
2. Place the level on a flat surface of the top [1] and determine which
castor needs adjustment.
3. Loosen the locking nut [1] of the castor.

4. From below the frame and at the top of the castor [2], adjust the
height of the castor as needed.
5. Check the level and adjust as necessary.
6. Tighten the locking nut [1].
7. Ensure punch is level and in line with main body and finisher.
8. Install rear cover.
G-273
23. GP-502
The descriptions of the disassembling and reassembling procedure GP-502 are mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
G-274
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 24. COMMERCIALLY
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 AVAILABLE PARTS
24. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

24.1 Status indicator light
24.1.1 Configuration
[2] [1]
[1] Screws (2) [2] Status indicator light
24.1.2 Connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
[1] CN888 -
(2) Connector specifications

Connector Pin Number Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
888 1 PAT1_DR Light ON signal L signal output when the printing is available Open collector
2 PAT2_DR L signal output during the scanning or printing
operation
3 PAT3_DR L signal output when an abnormal stop occurs
due to jams, error codes, no paper, or no toner
4 PAT4_DR L signal output when the toner supply message
is displayed
5 24V 24 VDC source At all times 24V, 500mA
6 GND Ground - -
G-275
24.1.3 Procedure
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 2. Pull out the CN181 [1] from the hole [2].
3. Match the screw hole [1] and the screw hole [2], and then install the
[1] [4]
status indicator light [3] with 2 screws.
4. Connect the connector [5] of the status indicator light to the CN181
[4].
[2] [5] [3]
G-276
24.2 Key counter (KCT)

24.2.1 Connector
[1]
[2]
[1] CN887 [2] Jumper connector (CN887R)
24.2.2 Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[1] [2] 2. Remove the cover table and the upper cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6
Upper cover, cover table)
3. Remove the filter cover/2. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacing the ozone
filter and the dust-proof filter/Rr1)
4. Remove the transfer panel. (Refer to G.3.2.9 Main board unit)
5. Remove the jumper connector [1].
6. Connect the key counter to the connector [2].
Note
• Be sure to insert the wiring harness of the key counter to
the hole of the connector cover that has been removed in
the step 1.
G-277
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H-1
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. CHECKPOINTS
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. CHECKPOINTS
1.1 Checking before you start work
When you conduct the claims in the field, it is necessary to check the following points first:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Did you properly install the ground line to the power supply?
3. Any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity is connected to the same power supply? (for example: Electric noise sources
such as elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, and so on.
• Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones at their life? (for example: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, and so on)
10. Is toner filled?
1.2 Checkpoints when you conduct the on-site service

When you repair the machine, be sure to pay due attention to the following items.
1. Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet. Also, when you operate the machine during the power distribution, be careful of the
scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section is hot. Be careful not to get burned for handling it.
3. The developing unit is magnetized strongly. Be careful not to bring a watch and an instrument near to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I-1
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. UTILITY
2. UTILITY
2.1 List of utility menus
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NVRAM).
Note
• For details on the utility, refer to "User's guide."
• Some items on the following list are not displayed at the default setting.
• In order to display items that are not displayed at the default settings, change the optional configurations or each setting.
• 01 Scan Address Register
• 01 Address Edit
• 02 E-mail Title Setting
• 03 E-mail Text Setting
• 02 User Setting
• 01 System Setting
• 01 Language Setting
• 02 Unit Setting
• 03 Feed Tray Setting
• 01 Paper Setting
• 02 Auto Tray Selection Setting
• 03 Type Selection for Auto Paper
• 04 Dehumidify Fan Heater
• 04 Reset Setting
• 01 Auto Reset Setting
• 02 Job Reset Setting
• 05 Default Screen Setting
• 06 Set Zoom Ratio Setting
• 07 Power Save Setting
• 01 Power Save Function Setting
• 02 ErP Setting
• 08 Date/Time Setting
• 09 Operation/Info.Sound Setting
• 01 Volume Setting
• 02 Info. sound item setting
• 10 Key Response Time
• 11 Shortcut Key Register
• 01 Application Setting
• 02 Quality Adj. (copy)
• 03 Quality Adj. (scan)
• 04 Quality Adj. Area Setting
• 05 Output Setting
• 12 Service Port Device Setting
• 13 Mouse Setting
• 02 Initial Setting
• 01 Copy Initial Setting
• 02 Scan Initial Setting
• 03 Common Setting
• 04 Copy Setting
• 05 Scan Setting
• 06 Printer Setting
• 01 Outline Process
• 02 Select Prior Output Tray
• 07 Image Quality Setting
• 01 Original Density Shift
• 02 ACS Adjustment
• 08 Change Password
• 03 Administrator Setting
• 01 Power Save Setting
• 01 Power Save Function Setting
• 02 ErP Setting
• 03 Weekly Timer Setting
• 01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
• 02 Time Setting
• 03 Date Setting
• 04 Select Time for Power Save
• 05 Password Non-Business Hours
• 04 Restrict User Access
• 01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory
• 01 Copy Mode Memory
• 02 Scan Mode Memory
• 02 Change Restrict Setting
• 03 Scan Restrict Setting
• 04 Restriction for Sample Print
• 05 Expert Adjustment
• 01 Auto Background Dens.Adj.
I-2
• 02 Erase Correction
• 01 Non-Image Area Erase
• 02 Erase Operation Setting
• 03 ADF Frame Erase
• 03 Printer Adjustment
• 01 Restart Timing Adjustment
• 02 Centering Adjustment
• 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment
• 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
• 05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• 06 Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Pre-registration Adj.
• 08 Print Job JAM Setting
• 04 Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Finisher(Main) Adj.
• 01 Staple Position Adjustment
• 02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
• 03 FD Alignment Plate Adj.
• 04 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
• 05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.
• 06 Rewind Function Operation
• 07 Upper Gripper Operation
• 08 Output Alignment Operation
• 02 Staple Finisher(Fold) Adj.
• 01 Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment
• 02 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj.
• 03 Fold&Staple Staple Position
• 04 Fold&Staple Fold Position
• 05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Tri-Fold Adjustment
• 01 Tri-fold position adjustment
• 02 Double fold plate adjustment
• 07 Half-Fold Strength Adj.
• 03 Staple Finisher(Punch) Adj.
• 01 Vertical Position Adj.(CD)
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj.(FD)
• 03 Registration Adjustment
• 04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adj.
• 01 PI Registration Adjustment
• 02 Multi Folder Adjustment
• 01 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
• 01 Paper width adjustment
• 02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
• 01 2-Hole Punch
• 02 3-Hole Punch
• 02 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
• 01 Half-Fold Position Adj.
• 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
• 03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
• 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
• 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Gate Position Adj.
• 03 Stacker adjustment
• 01 Paper Width Adjustment
• 02 Paper Length Adjustment
• 04 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Center Position
• 03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
• 05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
• 07 Trimming Adjustment
• 08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
• 01 2 Position Staple
• 02 4 Position Staple(Front 2)
• 03 4 Position Staple(Rear 2)
• 05 Fold Skew Adjustment
I-3

• 08 Fore-edge Trimming Adj.
• 09 Parallel Trimming Adjustment
• 10 2-Side Slitting Adjustment
• 11 Crease Position Adjustment
• 01 Half-Fold Crease Position
• 02 Tri-Fold Crease Position
• 03 PB Cover Crease Position
• 12 Flattening a Fold (Strength)
• 13 Flattening a Fold (Freq.)
• 14 Staple Offset Adjustment
• 15 Staple Tip Adjustment
• 05 Perfect binder adjustment
• 01 Cover Trimming Adj.
• 02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
• 03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
• 04 Glue Start Position
• 05 Glue Finish Position
• 06 Temperature Adj.
• 07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
• 08 Clamp CD Width Adj.
• 09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
• 10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
• 06 Relay stacker adjustment
• 05 Scan Adjustment
• 06 Process Adjustment
• 01 Front & Back Density
• 02 Toner Density Sensor Speed
• 03 Maximum Density Adjustment
• 04 1st Trans. Dis-elec. Output
• 05 Scattering Filter Cleaning
• 07 Quality Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• 02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
• 03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
• 04 Stabilization Adj. Setting
• 05 Custom Screen
• 06 Controller Image Com. Set
• 07 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
• 08 Printer Gamma Sens. Adj. (RU)
• 09 Tone Curve Each Tag Setting
• 08 Execute Adjust Operation
• 09 ADF Adjustment
• 01 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Adj.
• 02 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto
• 04 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment
• 05 Line Detection Setting
• 10 Corner Staple(Back) Angle Setting
• 06 List/Counter
• 07 Size Setting
• 01 Detect Orig. Size on Glass
• 02 K Size
• 03 ADF/Orig. Glass Priority
• 04 A4 Tab Width Setting
• 08 Annotation Setting
• 09 Perfect Binder Setting
• 01 Usable Paper Weight Select
• 02 Paper Count Limit for PB
• 03 Unfitting Cover Stop
• 10 Operation Screen Customize
• 01 Font Weight Setting
• 02 Copy Screen Customize Set
• 03 Scan Screen Customize Set
• 04 Machine Function Key Setting
• 02 Administrator Registration
• 03 Scan Address Register
• 01 Address Edit
• 02 E-mail Title Setting
• 03 E-mail Text Setting
• 04 User Auth./Account Track
• 01 Authentication Method
I-4
• 02 User Authentication Setting

• 01 Management Setting
• 02 User Registration
• 03 User Counter
• 03 Account Track
• 01 Account Track Registration
• 02 Account Track Counter
• 04 Print without Authentication
• 05 Auth. Device Setting
• 01 Auth. Unit Selection
• 06 External Server Setting
• 07 User/Account Common Setting
• 05 Network Setting
• 01 NIC Setting
• 02 E-mail Initial Setting
• 03 http Communication Setting
• 06 Common Setting
• 07 Copy Setting
• 08 Scan Setting
• 09 System Connection
• 01 Administrator Call
• 10 Security Setting
• 01 Administrator Password
• 02 HDD Management Setting
• 01 HDD Lock Password
• 02 Delete Temp. Data Setting
• 03 Delete All Data Setting
• 04 Delete hold Job
• 05 Delete HDD Job
• 06 HDD Restore/Backup
• 01 HDD ALL Backup
• 02 HDD ALL Restore
• 03 HDD BOX Backup
• 04 HDD BOX Restore
• 05 Controller Backup
• 06 Controller Restore
• 07 HDD Encryption Setting
• 07 Hold Job Auto Delete Period
• 03 Enhanced Security Mode
• 11 OpenAPI Auth. Management
• 04 Touch Panel Adjustment
2.2 Start and exit

2.2.1 Start method
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 appears.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
Utility screen appears.
*1 Default is [Machine Screen].
2.2.2 Exit method

1. "Utility screen"
Press [Exit] to return to the ordinary operation screen.
2. The new settings become effective.
I-5
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

3.1 Priority for Adjustment and Setting after you replace parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when you replace the parts on the list. Proper operation and image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustments after the parts replacement.
Note
• When the user replace main image processing board (IPB/M) due to the damage, be sure to use the NVRAM board (NVRAM) that
was installed on the damaged IPB/M on the new IPB/M. Contact the service manager of KM if it is considered that NVRAM is also
damaged.
• The NVRAM board (NVRAM) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when you replace the
NVRAM, perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correction (Drum, developer, cleaning
blade). For details, contact the service manager of KM.
• When you replace a board due to PB control board (PBCB), SD control board (SDCB), SD control board (PCB1), FD control board
(FDCB), RU control board (RUCB) or FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, be sure to use the non-volatile memory
(EEPROM) that was installed on the damaged control board on the new control board. Install the new EEPROM and perform all
adjustments for the PB, SD, FD, RU or FS if it is considered that the EEPROM is also damaged.
Classification Replacement parts and Others Adjustment Items
After PM Implementation PM cycle setting counter reset
Writing section Writing unit/K Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
(Refer to G.3.2.16 Writing unit) Skew Initial Position Memory
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.
Restart Timing Adjustment
Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Color Registration Auto. Adj.
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Density Balance Adjustment
Writing unit/Y, /M, /C Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
(Refer to G.3.2.16 Writing unit) Skew Initial Position Memory
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Dust proof glass/Y, /M, /C, /K Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Refer to G.3.2.16 Writing unit) Density Balance Adjustment
Photo conductor section Drum unit/Y, /M, /C, /K Setting toner application
(Refer to F.5.3.5 Replacing the drum unit) Drum unit installation position (align the triangle marks)
Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Initial Drum Rotation
Max density initial adjustment (execution is recommended)
Charging section Charging corona/Y, /M, /C, /K Charging corona mounting position
(Refer to F.5.4.1 Replacing the charging Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
corona)
Developing section Developing unit/Y, /M, /C, /K Auto. Developer Charge
(Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing the Developing Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
unit /Y, /M, /C, /K)
Toner Density Sensor Init.
Developer/Y, /M, /C, /K Auto. Developer Charge
(Refer to F.5.5.1 Replacing the developers / Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
Y, /M, /C and /K)
I-6

Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer unit Setting powder application
section (Refer to F.5.7.1 Removing and reinstalling Intermediate transfer unit installation position (align the triangle
the intermediate transfer unit) marks)
Blade Setting Mode (intermediate transfer)
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Intermediate transfer belt Intermediate transfer unit installation position (align the triangle
(Refer to F.5.7.7 Replacing the intermediate marks)
transfer belt) Setting powder application
Transfer belt cleaning unit Setting powder application
(Refer to F.5.7.3 Replacing the transfer belt Special parts counter (reset)
cleaning unit)
Transfer belt cleaning blade Setting powder application
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr
(Refer to F.5.7.4 Replacing the transfer belt Blade Setting Mode (intermediate transfer)
cleaning blade, transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr, /
Rr)
Nip formation roller/Up (Refer to F.5.7.9 Nip formation roller/Up installation direction (groove on the shaft
Replacing the nip formation roller/Up) is on the front side)
1st transfer roller/Y, /M, /C, /K 1st transfer roller installation direction (groove on the shaft is on
Transfer roller bearing the front side)
(Refer to F.5.7.10 Replacing the 1st transfer Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller
bearing) Special Parts Counter (Reset)
2nd transfer roller/Up 2nd transfer roller/Up installation direction (groove on the shaft is
(Refer to F.5.7.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer on the front side)
roller /Up) Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
Image correction unit Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing section)
(Refer to G.3.2.19 Image correction unit) Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
I-7
Printer Gamma Offset Auto.

IDC sensor/Fr (IDCS/Fr), /Rr (IDCS/Rr) Dust proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Color registration sensor/F (PS20), /Md Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(PS21), /Rr (PS22) Color Registration Auto. Adj.
Total process mount Charging corona, drum unit, developing unit, Setting toner application (drum unit)
intermediate transfer unit, image correction Drum unit installation position (align the triangle marks)
unit
Setting powder application (intermediate transfer)
Intermediate transfer unit installation position (align the triangle
marks)
Charging corona mounting position
Auto. Developer Charge
Initial Drum Rotation
2nd transfer section 2nd transfer unit Setting toner application
(Refer to F.5.8.2 Replacing the 2nd transfer Special Parts Counter (Reset)
unit, cleaning the lower section of the 2nd
transfer section) Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
2nd transfer belt assy Setting toner application
2nd transfer process blade assy Special Parts Counter (Reset)
2nd transfer cleaning brush
(Refer to F.5.8.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
belt assy, 2nd transfer process blade assy, Belt Line Speed Adj.
and the 2nd transfer cleaning brush) Gamma Automatic Adjustment
2nd transfer belt Setting toner application
Connecting stay assy Special Parts Counter (Reset)
(Refer to F.5.8.9 Replacing the 2nd transfer
belt and the connecting stay assy) Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
2nd transfer cleaning blade Setting toner application
Scattering prevention sheet plate/1 Special parts counter (reset)
Cleaning side seal plate/Fr
Cleaning side seal plate/Rr Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
2nd transfer assist scraper assy Belt Line Speed Adj.
Scattering prevention sheet/1 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Refer to "F.5.8.6 Replacing the 2nd transfer
cleaning blade, the scattering prevention
sheet plate/1, the scattering prevention sheet/ Density Balance Adjustment
1, the 2nd transfer assist scraper assy and the
cleaning side seal plate/Fr, /Rr")
Fusing section Fusing belt Fusing belt installation direction (with rot number on the front
side)
I-8
(Refer to "F.5.12.9 Replacing fusing bearing/ Special parts counter (reset)

1, /2, heat insulating sleeve/1, /2, fusing belt,
upper pressure roller, heating roller")
Upper pressure roller Upper pressure roller installation direction (groove for the fusing
(Refer to "F.5.12.9 Replacing fusing bearing/ gear/5 installation is on the front side)
1, /2, heat insulating sleeve/1, /2, fusing belt, Special parts counter (reset)
upper pressure roller, heating roller")
Lower pressure roller Lower pressure roller installation direction (the short shaft is on
(Refer to "F.5.12.7 Replacing the fusing the front side)
bearing/Lw, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw, and Special parts counter (reset)
the lower pressure roller")
Fusing heater lamp assy/1, fusing heater Installing direction of fusing heater lamp assy (with blue
lamp/4 (L4), fusing heater lamp assy/5 connector in rear)
(Refer to "F.5.12.8 Replacing the fusing inlet Special parts counter (reset)
roller assy, the fusing heater lamp assy/1, the
fusing heater lamp/4, and the fusing heater
lamp assy/5")
Boards Main image processing board (IPB/M) NVRAM board (NVRAM) replacement
MFP board (MFPB) Machine NIC setting
(Refer to G.3.2.10 MFP board (MFPB)) When HDD Lock Password is disabled:
SSD replacement
When HDD Lock Password is enabled:
SSD replacement
EEPROM replacement
SSD Rewriting of firmware
Note
·For how to get or replace the SSD, contact
the service manager of Konica Minolta.
(Refer to G.3.2.11 SSD (SSD))
Printer control board (PRCB) Rewriting of firmware
HDD/1 (HDD/1), /2 (HDD/2), /3 (HDD/4), /4 Format the data of HDD
(HDD/4), /5 (HDD/5) HDD replace initial setting
(Refer to G.3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C,
UK-105))
PF-707 Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.5.3.34 Multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS))
PF-708 Scanner image processing board (IPB/S) Rewriting of firmware
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.5.3.34 Multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS))
CCD unit FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(Refer to "G.5.3.16 CCD unit") CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
Exposure unit The positioning adjustment of the exposure unit and the mirror
(Refer to "G.5.3.17 Exposure unit, exposure unit
lamp") Read Position Adjustment (ADF Adjustment)
FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Exposure lamp (L201) Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
(Refer to "G.5.3.17 Exposure unit, exposure
lamp")
Original glass Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
(Refer to "G.5.3.12 Original glass assy") Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Scanner wire Scanner motor belt adjustment
(Refer to G.5.3.19 Removing the scanner The positioning adjustment of the exposure unit and the mirror
wire, G.5.3.20 Reinstalling the scanner wire) unit
Read Position Adjustment (ADF Adjustment)
FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
First slider, second slider, scanner wire, Read Position Auto Adjustment, Read Position Adjustment
scanner assy, DF original glass, glass
movement unit, step sheet
DF-626 DF control board (DFCB) Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to "G.4.2.16 DF control board (DFCB)") EEPROM replacement
ADF Original Size Adj.
I-9
ADF Org. Stop Pos. Auto, ADF Org. Stop Position

ADF Registration Loop Adj.
Feed Paper Check
Sensor Check
Read Position Auto Adjustment, Read Position Adjustment
FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment, FD-Mag. Adjustment
Scanning Light Adjustment
Mixed Original Size Adj.
Restriction plate positional VR (VR1) ADF Original Size Adj.
(Refer to "G.4.2.17 Restriction plate positional
VR (VR1)")
RU-511 RU control board (RUCB) Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to G.8.3.10 Note for replacing the EEPROM replacement
board)
RU-510 RU control board (RUCB) Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to G.9.2.6 Note for replacing the board) EEPROM replacement
FS-532 FNS control board (FNSCB) Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to "G.10.3.15 Note for replacing the EEPROM replacement
board")
SD-510 SD control board (SDCB) Rewriting of firmware
Stapler unit Clincher positioning (require the jig)
(Refer to "F.13.3.1 Replacing the stapler unit")
PK-522 Punch drive board (PDB) Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
Paper size sensor (PS305) Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
LS-506 LS control board (LSCB) Toggle switch setting
Rewriting of firmware
Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
Paper width adjustment
FD-503 FD control board (FDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
(Refer to G.15.3.21 Note for replacing the Rewriting of firmware
board)
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board (MFDB) Double feed detection board adjustment
(Refer toG.15.3.19 Multi feed detection board/
1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type), G.
15.3.20 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/
1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type))
PI drive board (PIDB) Double feed detection board adjustment
SD-506 SD control board (SDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
(Refer to G.16.3.11 Note for replacing the Rewriting of firmware
board)
EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O Check Mode (trimmer board solenoid operation counter
(Refer to F.17.5.2 Replacing the trimmer reset)
board assy)
SD-513 SD control board (PCB1) EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O Check Mode (trimmer board movement operation counter
(Refer to F.18.8.2 Replacing the trimmer reset)
board)
Staple unit Staple positioning adjustment
(Refer to F.18.5.1 Replacing the staple unit)
Clincher
(Refer to F.18.5.2 Replacing the clincher)
PB-503 PB control board (PBCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Double feed detection board adjustment
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Double feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.21.2.31 Multi feed detection
boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR))
I-10
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. SERVICE MODE
4. SERVICE MODE
4.1 Service mode list
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data that is adjusted and set with this mode is stored in NVRAM
board (NVRAM).
NOTE
• Some items on the following list are not displayed at the default setting.
• In order to display items that are not displayed at the default settings, change the optional configurations or each setting.
• 01 Machine Adjustment
• 01 Printer Adjustment
• 01 Centering Auto Adjustment
• 02 Centering Sensor Gap Adj.
• 05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• 06 Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Pre-registration Adj.
• 08 Belt Line Speed Adj.
• 09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory
• 01 Skew Initial Position Memory
• 02 Cross Direction Initial Pos.
• 10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.
• 11 Color Regist. Gap Measurement
• 12 PFU Double Feed Detect Adj.
• 13 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.
• 14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
• 15 Color Regist. Manual Adj.
• 16 Recall Standard Data
• 02 Scan Adjustment
• 04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
• 06 Sensor Check
• 07 CCD Check
• 08 Line Mag. Setting
• 03 Quality Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• 02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
• 03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
• 04 Printer Gamma Curve Adj.
• 05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
• 06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)
• 02 Sharpness Adjustment
• 03 Contrast Adjustment
• 04 Image Distinction Level
• 01 Dot Detect Adjustment
• 02 Color Text Adjustment
• 03 Dot/Text Area Adjustment
• 05 ACS Adjustment
• 06 Density Adjustment
• 01 AE(AES) Adjustment
• 02 Copy Density Adjustment
• 03 BackgroundRemoval
• 07 Tone Adjustment
• 01 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC)
• 04 Non-Image Area Erase Check
• 02 Process adjustment
• 01 High Voltage Adjustment
• 01 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj.
• 02 1-Trans.V Manual Confirm
• 03 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual
• 04 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
• 05 HV Adj. (Separation AC)
• 06 HV Adj.(Separation DC)
• 07 Confirm Guide HV (Manual)
• 02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.
• 01 Blade Setting Mode
• 02 Charge Potential Auto. Adj.
• 03 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
I-11
• 04 Auto. Developer Charge

• 05 Toner Density Sensor Init.
• 06 Initial Drum Rotation
• 07 Toner Density Revert
• 08 Toner Density Sensor Speed
• 09 Max Density Initial Adj.
• 03 Sensor Output Confirm
• 01 Surface Potential Sensor
• 02 IDC Sensor Output
• 03 Toner Density Sensor Output
• 04 Drum Surface Potential
• 05 Humidity/Temperature Output
• 06 Toner Charge Quantity Detect
• 04 Process Fine Adjustment
• 01 Background Margin Fine Adj.
• 02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
• 03 Develop AC Frequency
• 04 Toner Density Fine Adj.
• 05 Interval/Quantity Adj.
• 01 Drum Small Rotation Interval
• 02 Automatic refresh interval
• 03 Toner Dens. Sensor interval
• 06 M'Trans. Steering Sensor
• 01 Software DIPSW Setting
• 02 Service Center TEL/FAX
• 03 Serial Number Setting
• 04 Setup Date/Business Setting
• 04 Counter/Data
• 01 Maintenance Counter
• 02 Collecting Data
• 01 Paper Size Counter(Total)
• 02 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
• 03 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
• 04 ADF Counter
• 05 Coverage Data History
• 06 Paper JAM History
• 07 JAM Counter
• 08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
• 08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
• 10 SC Counter
• 11 JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• 12 SC Counter Individual Sec.
• 13 SC Data Of Time series
• 14 Maintenance History
• 01 Maintenance Counter Reset
• 02 Parts History in Time Series
• 15 Each Paper Type Counter
• 16 ORU-M maintenance history
• 17 RFID Information
• 03 Parts Counter
• 01 Special Parts Counter
• 01 All Items
• 02 Waste Toner / Filter
• 03 Charging Corona / Drum
• 04 Developing
• 05 Intermediate Transfer
• 06 2nd Transfer
• 07 Fusing
• 08 Paper Transportation
• 09 Process Unit
• 10 ADF
• 11 PFU
• 12 RU
• 13 HM
• 14 GP
• 15 FD
• 16 LS
• 17 SD
• 18 PB
• 19 FS
• 20 Others
• 02 Voluntary Part Counter
• 04 Total Counter History
• 05 Custom Counter Threshold Set
• 05 State Confirmation
• 01 I/O Check Mode
I-12
• 06 ADF Adjustment
• 01 ADF Original Size Adj.
• 02 ADF Orig. Stop Position
• 03 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto
• 04 ADF Registration Loop Adj
• 05 Feed Paper Check
• 06 Sensor Check
• 07 Read Position Adj.
• 08 Read Position Auto Adj.
• 10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment
• 11 Scanning Light Adjustment
• 12 Mixed Original Size Adj.
• 13 Line Detection Setting
• 14 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning
• 07 Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Finisher(Main) Adj.
• 01 Staple Position Adjustment
• 03 FD Alignment Plate Adj.
• 04 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
• 05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.
• 02 Staple Finisher(Fold) Adj.
• 01 Fold&Staple Pitch Adj.
• 02 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj.
• 03 Fold&Staple Staple Position
• 04 Fold&Staple Fold Position
• 05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Tri-Fold Adjustment
• 01 Tri-fold position adjustment
• 02 Double Fold Plate adjustment
• 07 Half-Fold Strength Adj.
• 03 Staple Finisher(Punch) Adj.
• 01 Vertical Position Adj.(CD)
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj.(FD)
• 03 Registration Adjustment
• 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor
• 04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adj.
• 01 Tray Size Adjustment
• 02 PI Registration Adjustment
• 02 Multi Folder Adjustment
• 01 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
• 02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
• 01 2-Hole Punch
• 02 4-Hole punch
• 02 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
• 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
• 03 Tri-fold-out Pos. Adj.
• 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
• 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Gate Position Adj.
• 07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.
• 03 Stacker adjustment
• 07 Trimming Adjustment
• 08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
I-13

• 05 Fold Skew Adjustment
• 08 Fore-edge Trimming Adj.
• 09 Parallel Trimming Adjustment
• 10 Trans. Entrance Paper Width
• 11 2-Side Slitting Adjustment
• 12 Crease Position Adjustment
• 01 Half-Fold Crease Position
• 02 Tri-Fold Crease Position
• 03 PB Cover Crease Position
• 13 Flattening a Fold (Strength)
• 14 Flattening a Fold (Freq.)
• 15 Spine Fold Line Adjustment
• 16 Staple Offset Adjustment
• 17 Registration Loop Adjustment
• 18 Staple Tip Adjustment
• 19 Saddle Position Adjustment
• 20 Trimmer Recover Adj.
• 05 Perfect binder adjustment
• 01 Cover Trimming Adjustment
• 02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
• 03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
• 04 Glue Start Position
• 05 Glue Finish Position
• 06 Temperature Adjustment
• 07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
• 08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
• 09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
• 10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
• 06 Relay Stacker Adjustment
• 07 External FNS Customize Set.
• 08 Firmware Version
• 09 CS Remote Care
• 01 CS Remote Care
• 02 Log FW Address Setting
• 03 Log Forwarding Time Setting
• 10 List Output
• Coverage Data List
• Parameter List
• Font Pattern
• Communication log list
• Memory Dump List
• 11 Test Mode
• 01 Running Test Mode
• 02 Test Pattern Output Mode
• 03 Image Line Confirmation Mode
• 12 ISW
• 01 ISW
• 13 Setting Data
• 01 Load from External Memory
• 02 Store to External Memory
• 14 Log Store
• 01 Log Store Setting
• 02 Execute Log Storing
• 15 ORU-M Setting
• 01 ORU-M Item / Life Setting
• 02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting
• 03 ORU-M Password Setting
• 16 HDD Setting
• 01 HDD Replace Initial Setting
• 02 Format HDD All Data
• 03 Format Controller HDD Data
• 17 Auth. Device Setting
• 01 Auth. Unit Selection
• 02 Loadable Driver Install
• 18 Startup Setting
• 01 Package Adjustment
I-14
• 02 Setup Setting 1
• 02 Setup Date/Business Setting
• 03 Service Center TEL/FAX
• 03 Setup Setting 2
• 02 Serial Number Setting
• 03 Non-Image Area Erase Check
• 04 NIC Setting
NOTE
• Service Mode of GP-502 is mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
4.2 Start and exit

4.2.1 Start method
You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
Note
• Do not let people who is not concerned in the service know how to enter the service mode.
• When you leave the site during the service mode operation, unauthorized changes could occur for any values. When you finish
the setting of the service mode, or when you have to leave the site during the operation, be sure to press [Exit] to the basic
screen.
(1) Start-up from power ON

2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
When the CE password has been configured, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
3. "Service Mode Menu screen"
The service mode appears.
*1 Default is the [MACHINE] screen.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While you press the [Utility/Counter] button, activate the sub power switch (SW2).
The service mode appears.
4.2.2 Exit method

Exit methods differ according to the condition of the power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
(2) When the power is OFF

Deactivate the SW2.
2. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
4.3 Machine Adjustment

4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjusts the image position on the paper in the sub scan direction.
(Changes the restart timing of the registration roller.)
(2) Usage
Use this function when you adjust the image position on the sub scan direction.
Note
• Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.5 FD-Mag.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Adjustment].
3. "Printer Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
I-15
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Restart Timing Adjustment]

4. "Restart Timing Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item that you want to adjust. Then press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small), and the paper type (plain paper or the
thick paper) respectively.
Note
• Large size: Paper size 300 mm or more in the sub scan direction
• Small size: Paper size less than 300 mm in the sub scan direction
• Paper thickness: Paper weight 106 g/m2 or more
5. "PRINT MODE screen"

Configure the print setting according to the selected item. Then press the start button and output the test pattern (number 16 or number
33).
6. Check the image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 20 ± 0.5 mm
20
57gaf3c007na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode].
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
• Setting Range
: -60 (shorter) to +60 (longer)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)

(1) Function
Measures the paper position in the main scan direction for each paper feed tray. Adjusts the correction range of the centering correction
control automatically according to the paper position.
(2) Usage
Adjust when you install the main body, PF, or the mis-centering amount is large on particular feed tray.
Note
• Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted beforehand. (Refer to I.4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
• To adjust the centering adjustment, usually perform this adjustment. When you want to perform the fine adjustment, perform "I.
4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)".
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 Centering Auto Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Auto Adjustment]
5. "Centering Auto Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large, or small, 8 1/2× 5 1/2 (ADU)), and paper
type (plain paper or thick paper (ADU)) respectively.
I-16
Note
• Thick: Paper weight 106 g/m2 or more

33).
Note
• 5 sheets are printed for the test pattern. (The configured quantity can be changed, but print 5 sheets normally.)
• After the adjustment, the correction value is applied to the current value. (Configuration value: 1 step = 0.01 mm)
7. Press [Exit PrintMode].

8. "Centering Auto Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value is within -200 to +200.
Note
• When the current value is not within -200 to +200, the installation position of the paper feed tray or the PFU is possibly
incorrect. Adjustment of the installation position of the paper feed tray or PFU is recommended.
4.3.3 Centering Sensor Gap Adj. (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)

(1) Function
Correct the installation position error of the centering sensor of PFU.
(Adjusts image writing position of the front side according to the amount of installation position error of the centering sensor.)
(2) Usage
Adjust when you install the main body, PFU, or clean or replace the centering sensor of PFU.
Note
• Be sure that the centering adjustment (printer adjustment- centering adjustment) has been adjusted before this adjustment.
(Refer to I.4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Sensor Gap Adj.].
[Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Centering Adjustment] - [Centering Sensor Gap Adj.]
5. "Centering Sensor Gap Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select Tray1, and then press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction. Then measure how much the left line and right line misalign from
each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
9. "Centering Sensor Gap Adj. screen"
• Setting Range : -100 (image in front) to +100 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)

(1) Function
• When other than "ADU" is selected in step 5
Adjusts the image position on the paper in the main scan direction.
I-17
(Change the laser writing timing and adjust the image writing position.)
• When "ADU" is selected in step 5
Corrects the installation position error of the centering sensor of ADU.
(Adjusts image writing position of the back side according to the amount of installation position error of the centering sensor.)
(2) Usage
• Perform this adjustment when you want to perform the fine adjustment.
• Adjust when you install PFU, or clean or replace the centering sensor of ADU.
Note
Adjustment))
• Be sure that the centering adjustment (printer adjustment- centering adjustment) has been adjusted before this adjustment.
(Refer to I.4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
• To adjust the mis-centering, use the "I.4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)" normally.
Perform this adjustment when you want to perform the fine adjustment.
(3) Procedure
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment]
5. "Centering Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size ( common, large, or small, 8 1/2× 5 1/2 (ADU)), and paper
type (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note
• Thick: Paper weight 106 g/m2 or more
• When you perform the fine adjustment, select other than "ADU".
• When you install PFU, or clean or replace the centering sensor of ADU, select "ADU".

33).
7. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction. Then measure how much the left line and right line misalign from
each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
• Setting Range : -40 (image in front) to +40 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.5 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
(Change the speed of the polygon motor.)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in the sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration roller or the paper
shrinkage by heat.
Use this adjustment when you finely adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction.
I-18
Note
• There are following 2 ways to adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction. Be careful when you adjust.
1. FD-Mag. adjustment (printer adjustment)
Use this adjustment when you finely adjust the magnification.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Use this adjustment when you roughly adjust the magnification.
• When the [Utility] - [User Setting] - [Common Setting] - [Back Side Magnification Adjustment] is [OFF], the magnification in the
back side cannot be adjusted. (Default is [ON])
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [FD-Mag. Adjustment]
4. "FD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust, and then press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (Number 16 or number 33).
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
• Standard value
: ± 0.5% or less (in life-size)
: 205.7 ± 1 mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
Select the item that you want to adjust.
• Setting Range
Printer FD-Mag. (both sides at a time): -100 (short) to +100 (long)
The others: -80 (short) to +20 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the image position on the paper in the main scan direction.
(Change the laser exposure pitch by changing the image processing.)
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you adjust the image magnification in the sub scan direction.
Note
• When the [Utility] - [User Setting] - [Common Setting] - [Back Side Magnification Adjustment] is [OFF], the magnification in the
back side cannot be adjusted. (Default is [ON])
(3) Procedure
Press [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [CD-Mag. Adjustment]
4. "CD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust, and then press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
6. Check the magnification in the main scan direction.
• Standard value
: 190 ± 1 mm or less
I-19
190
57gaf3c004na
Select the item that you want to adjust.
• Setting range: -100 (shorter) to +100 (longer)
• 1 step = 0.01%
4.3.7 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure (deleted) quantity of the leading edge is not within the standard value.
Note
• This adjustment is valid when PF-708 is connected. When PF-708 is not connected, it cannot be adjusted.
• Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted beforehand. (Refer to I.4.3.5 FD-Mag.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Lead Edge Erase Adjustment]
4. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place the test chart on the original glass. Select a paper A3 or 11x17, and then press the start key.
6. Check the leading edge erasure amount.
• Standard value "a": 4 mm or less
a
57gaf3c029nb
8. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
• Setting Range
: -20 (smaller) to +40 (larger)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.8 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section.
(2) Usage
When paper skew, crease, or paper jam in the registration section occur, perform this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
I-20

Press [06 Registration Loop Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Registration Loop Adj.]
4. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small, 150 mm or less of width), and paper type (plain
paper, thick paper).
Note
• Paper thickness: Paper weight 106 g/m2 or more

Perform the print setting according to the selected item. Press the start key, and then output the test pattern (Number 16).
6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
• Setting range: -99 (short) to +99 (long)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate value is obtained.
4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration roller section.
(2) Usage
When paper skew, crease, or paper jam in the registration section occur, perform this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Pre-registration Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Pre-registration Adj.]
4. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU) and paper size (large, small).
Note

Select A3 paper. Press the start key, and then output the test pattern (Number 16).
7. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
• Setting range: -99 (short) to +99 (long)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
(Changes the line speed of the intermediate transfer belt.)
(2) Usage
When you replace the intermediate transfer belt unit, perform this adjustment.
Use this adjustment when you roughly adjust the image magnification in the sub scan direction.
Note
• There are following 2 ways to adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction. Be careful when you adjust.
1. FD-Mag. adjustment (printer adjustment)
Use this adjustment when you finely adjust the magnification.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Use this adjustment when you roughly adjust the magnification.
(3) Procedure
I-21

Press [08 Belt Line Speed Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Belt Line Speed Adj.]
4. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
• Standard value
: 205.7 ± 1 mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
8. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
• Setting Range : -100 (shorter) to +100 (longer)
• 1 step = 0.01%
Note
• Setting range is available from -100 to +100, but the optimum value is from -5 to -35. When you enter the value that is not
within the optimum value, an error code possibly occurs.
4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Function
Store the initial position of the skew adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the NVRAM board (NVRAM).
(2) Usage
Execute only when the write unit is replaced to the new one.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory].
4. "Writing Initial Pos. Memory screen"
Press [01 Skew Initial Position Memory].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Writing Initial Pos. Memory] → [Skew Initial Position Memory]
5. "Skew Initial Position Memory screen"
Select the color of the replaced write unit and press [Start].
4.3.12 Cross Direction Initial Pos. (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
4.3.13 Color Registration Auto. Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
The machine automatically adjusts the color registration misalignment of Y, M, and C relative to K.
• Main Scan (misalignment in the main scan direction)
• Sub Scan (misalignment in the sub scan direction)
• Horiz.(All) (magnification in the main scan direction)
• Horiz.(Part) (partial magnification in the main scan direction)
• Skew (skew in the main scan direction)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
• Perform this adjustment when the malfunction code C-4520 occurs.
(3) Procedure
I-22

Press [10 Color Registration Auto. Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Color Registration Auto.Adj.]
4. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Press [Start].
5. The color registration adjustment starts, and then a message "Completed" is shown in about 2 minutes. If the error message appears,
perform an error correction referring to the following.
• Error 1: The pattern of the prescribed number has not been detected.
The patch density possibly be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the Gamma Automatic Adjustment. Then conduct
this adjustment again.
• Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much.
Check the installation position of the write unit.
Output the test pattern to check the image density. When the image density is abnormal, perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
• Error 3: Other
A malfunction code other than the auto color registration adjustment possibly occurs. In order to check the malfunction code, restart
the main body in the normal mode.
6. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Misalignment amounts of Y, M, and C of "Main Scan", "Sub Scan", "Horizontal", and "Skew" relative to K are displayed on the panel. (unit:
pixel)
4.3.14 Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
The machine displays the color registration misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K.
• Main Scan (misalignment in the main scan direction)
• Horiz.(All) (magnification in the main scan direction)
• Horiz.(Part) (partial magnification in the main scan direction)
• Sub Scan (misalignment in the sub scan direction)
• Skew (skew in the main scan direction)
• Scan Bend (bend in the main scan direction)
(2) Usage
Check misalignment quantity when there is the color registration misalignment.
Note
• This adjustment is valid when PF-708 is connected. When PF-708 is not connected, this adjustment cannot be performed.
• When PF-708 is not connected, be sure to perform "Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ".
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Color Regist.Gap Measurement].
[Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Color Regist.Gap Measurement]
4. "Color Regist. Gap Meas., Manual Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [2] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [3], and close the DF.
Note
• When you place the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face down)
and the position.
• Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is configured to 255. If not, it causes an
error.
I-23
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011

Press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Color Regist. Gap Meas., Manual Adj. screen"
Press [Start] to scan the test pattern by using the scanner.
8. Shows the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", "Horiz.(All)", "Horiz.(Part)", "Sub Scan", "Skew", and "Scan
Bend" at "Rest" section on the touch panel. (unit: pixel)
9. Make sure that the screen displays "OK" for all the items. If the value is out of standard, "NG" and an error code appears.
Note
• If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Horiz.(All)", "Horiz.(Part)", "Sub Scan", or "Skew", perform the Color Registration
Auto.Adj. again. (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color Registration Auto. Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• When "NG" appears for the "Sub Scan" even after Color Registration Automatic Adjustment is conducted, perform the color
registration manual adjustment. (Refer to I.4.3.18 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
Error code Description Cause
Error 1 Cannot detect the chart pattern Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 13 Measurement error Chart misplacement or chart failure
4.3.15 PFU Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the ultrasonic sensor sensitivity of the multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS).
(2) Usage
When you replace the multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS) of PF or the PF drive board (PFDB), perform this adjustment.
When multi feed is not detected properly due to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, and thick paper),
perform this adjustment.
Note
• Output of the sensor varies due to the temperature of the sensor surface. Therefore, perform this adjustment when a
temperature is close to the environment in which the copier is used (20 °C to 30 °C).
• When you brought a new part from outdoors, perform this adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface becomes
same as the room temperature.
(3) Procedure
I-24

Press [12 PFU Double Feed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the PF front door [1], and then open the open close cover/1 [2] of the horizontal conveyance section.
[1]
[2]
5. Insert a sheet of paper [1], and then close the open close cover/1 [2].
Note
• Be sure to use the fusing adjustment paper. (Refer to: E.1.2 Jig list)
• When there is no fusing adjustment paper, use paper whose weight is 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2.
• To adjust the PFU of the 1st tandem, insert a paper into the PFU of the 1st tandem.
• To adjust the PFU of the 2nd tandem, insert a paper into the PFU of the 2nd tandem.
• To adjust the PFU of the 3rd tandem, insert a paper into the PFU of the 3rd tandem.
[1]
[2]
6. "PFU Double Feed Detect Adj. screen"

Press [Start].
7. If the multi feed detection adjustment is normally completed, "Completed" is displayed. If the adjustment abnormality occurs, "Error" is
displayed. When the error message is displayed, repeat steps 4 to 6.
Note
• When an error occurs, the adjustment data is not written but the data before the adjustment remains.
8. Pull out the paper that is inserted in step 5.

9. Enter the I/O check mode.
10. Enter "18" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "18-00" is displayed on the message display area.
12. Enter "04" with the numeric keys (for the 1st tandem), "06" (for the 2nd tandem), or "08" (for the 3rd tandem). Check the message display
and confirm that "18-04" (for the 1st tandem), "18-06" (for the 2nd tandem), or "18-08" (3rd tandem) is displayed
13. Insert a sheet of paper that the customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2) to the position of the paper that is inserted in
step 5. Then, press the Start key and confirm that "0" appears on the input check display.
14. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" is displayed on the input check display.
15. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
4.3.16 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Correct the image distortion of K in the main scanning direction.
(Adjust the G5 lens of the writing unit/K.)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when skew occurs in the main scan direction.
Note
• The color registration adjustment cannot correct the image distortion of K in main scanning direction. (Adjust YMC only.)
• The image distortion of K in the main scanning direction is also changed in [Chart Adjustment] of [Both Side Adj.] in the User
Mode.
(3) Procedure
I-25

Press [13 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Ceosswise Dir. Skew Adj.]
4. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (Number 16 or Number 33).
Note
• When the start key is pressed, G5 lenses of YMCK are adjusted. Then the color registration adjustment (for approximately 2
minutes) is automatically started. When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (number 16 or number 33) is printed.
6. Check the skew in main scanning direction.

• Standard value: ± 0.3% or less (difference between 280 mm diagonal lines "a. b" is 0.84 mm or less)
a03uf3c001ca
8. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
• Setting range: -30 to +30
• 1 step = 0.01 mm
4.3.17 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the beam pitches of LD1 to LD8.
(Changes the write clock.)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after you replace the write unit.
Note
• Be sure to complete "I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)" and "I.4.3.13 Color
Registration Auto. Adj. (Printer Adjustment)" before you conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Beam Pitch Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Beam Pitch Adjustment]
4. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value of [Y] is "0".
When it is other than 0, select [Y] and enter "0" through the numeric buttons. Then press [SET].
Change all the current values for each color to "0" in the same way. Then press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105 g/m2 or less), and then press the start key.
6. Check the beam pitch misalignment on the 3rd column of the test chart.
The outputted charts shows in descending order the conditions with the values +10, +5, ±0, -5, and -10 to or from the current value of
each color.
I-26
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] Current +10 [2] Current +5

[3] Current [4] Current -5
[5] Current -10 -
7. When the moires on the top and bottom are even or there is no moire [1] or when the white thin line and the black thin line on the left and
right are even or there is no thin line [4]: No need to adjust.
When the moire on the bottom is strong [2] or when the white thin line appears on the left side and the black one on the right side [5]:
Adjust in "+" direction.
When the moire on the top is strong [3] or when the black thin line appears on the left side and the white one on the right side [6]: Adjust
in "-" direction.
[2] [3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6]
[1] The moires on the top and bottom are even or there is [2] The moires on the bottom is strong
no moire
[3] The moires on the top is strong [4] The white thin line and the black thin line on the left and
right are even or there is no thin line
[5] Left side is the white thin line. Right side is the black [6] Left side is the black thin line. Right side is the white
thin line. thin line.
8. If there are any abnormalities, press [Exit PrintMode].

9. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
• Setting range: -100 to +100
4.3.18 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Manually adjust the offset value in the sub scan direction for the color registration misalignment amount.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is an offset on the misalignment amount of each color in the sub scan direction after the "Color
Registration Auto Adjustment (printer adjustment)".
I-27
[1]
[2]
[1] The test pattern for manual adjustment of color [2] Misalignment amount for color M.
registration
Note
Adjustment))
• Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted beforehand. (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Color Regist. Manual Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Color Regist. Manual Adj.]
4. "Color Regist. Manual Adj. screen"
Select the color that you want to adjust.
5. Enter a value through the numeric buttons as necessary, and press [SET].
• Setting range: -80 (the picture moves to the paper feed direction) to +80 (the picture moves to the opposite of the paper feed
direction)
• 1 step = 1.3μm
• Default setting value: Y = 0, M = 0, C = 0
6. Check the measured misalignment amount in the sub scan direction of "Color Registration Manual Adjustment (printer adjustment)".
Otherwise, check the image. When the misalignment amount does not converge, repeat the step 4 to step 5.
4.3.19 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the printer adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
User can change some parts of the printer adjustment. Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized
because of the erroneous operation by the user.
Note
• Adjustment data of "Color Registration Auto.", "Color Registration Manual", "PFU Dfeed detect Adj.", and "CD-Mag. Skew Adj."
are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Recall Standard Data].
I-28
4. "Recall Standard Data screen"

Press [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Initial Data].
Note
• When you select [Factory Initial Data], this adjustment recalls the factory initial data.
• When you select [Installation initial data], this adjustment recalls the adjustment values that are stored when you conduct
the code "91-00" of the I/O check mode.
5. Press [Yes] to restore standard data.

Press [No] to cancel the operation.
4.3.20 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the read start timing in the sub scan direction when you scan original.
(2) Usage
When you adjust the image leading edge timing of the original glass mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
• Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before you perform this adjustment. (Refer to I.
4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
• This adjustment is valid when PF-708 is connected. When PF-708 is not connected, this adjustment is not required.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Scan Adjustment].
3. "Scan Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. [Restart Timing Adjustment screen]
Press [Print Mode].
Place the test chart on the original glass. Select A3 or 11x17 paper, and then press the start key.
6. Check the scan image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 0 ± 1.5 mm
• Setting Range : -30 (image slow) to +30 (image fast)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.21 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the centering of images in the main scan direction when you scan from the original glass.
(2) Usage
Adjust an image mis-centering in the main scan direction when you scan from the original glass.
Note
• Be sure the Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted beforehand. (Refer to I.4.3.4 Centering Adjustment
(Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
I-29

Select "Original Glass Centering" and press [Print Mode].
5. "Copy screen"
Place the test chart on the original glass. Select a paper A3 or 11x17, and then press the start key.
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left line and right line misalign from
each other.
• Standard value
: 0 +/- 1.5 mm or less
• Setting Range : -57 (image in back) to +57 (image in front)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.22 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction in original grass mode. This adjustment changes scan speed.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction in original grass mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [Print Mode].
Place the test chart on the original glass. Select A3 or 11x17 paper, and then press the start key.
• Standard value
: 200 ± 1 mm or less
200
57gaf3c005na
• Adjustment range: +990 (shorter) to +1010 (longer)
• 1 step = x 0.001
I-30
4.3.23 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)

Note
• In this adjustment, use the special chart and the gradation data. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for
acquiring these items.
(1) Function
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
(2) Usage
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the "Gamma Automatic Adj." of the "Process Adjustment".
When color reproduction is in a poor condition (especially in a highlighted area) after you replace the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L201), original
glass, or each scanner mirror, perform this adjustment.
CAUTION
• Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at the factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value when the [Reset Adjustment Data] in the "Scan Gradation, Color Adj. screen" is pressed.
• Once [Reset Adj. Data] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
Note
(3) Procedure
1. After you replace the parts, place a "Color chart" on the original glass. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and then press the start key.
Note
• Press the hard key on the operation panel, not the soft key on the touch panel.
2. Check if there is no image background or problem in color balance.

3. If there is abnormality, enter Service mode.
Press [04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Scan Adjustment] → [Scan Gradation/Color Adj.]
7. "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen"
Press [Reset Adj. Data].
CAUTION
• Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at the factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data
is overwritten to the average value when the [Reset Adjustment Data] in the "Scan Gradation, Color Adj. screen" is pressed.
• Once [Reset Adj. Data] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
8. Press the [YES] key when you overwrite the scanner gradation data to the average value.
Press [No] to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
4.3.24 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the magnification of the scanner section in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you replace the CCD unit.
Note
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [05 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
Place the color chart to the original glass and choose the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the start key.
6. Check the difference between "A" on the color chart and "A" on the output test print.
I-31
Enlarged view of the color chart
• Standard value
: +/- 1.0 mm
• When the value is too short: Change the setting value to the plus.
• When the value is too long: Change the setting value to the minus.
• Adjustment range: 990 to 1010
• 1 step = x 0.001
4.3.25 Sensor Check (Scan adjustment)

(1) Function
Check the sensor output of sensors which is related with the scanner.
(2) Usage
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Sensor Check].
4. "Original Size Search Sensor Adjustment screen"
ON or OFF indicates the condition of following detection sensors.
• Scanner home sensor 1: Scanner home sensor (PS201)
• Original size detection cover: DF open close switch (SW201)
• Original size search 20 degrees: APS timing sensor (PS202)
• Original size detection 1: APS sensor/1 (PS203)
• Original size detection 2: APS sensor/2 (PS204)
4.3.26 CCD Check (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Displays the status of the CCD.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you handle the trouble about the CCD sensor.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [07 CCD Check].
4. "CCD Check screen"
The highest value and the lowest value for each of the clamp and the gain are shown.
• The following table shows the range of the normal value.
<CCD>
• Clamp: The output value have to be within the value on the following table.
Clamp management value The lowest value The highest value
R 600 1500
G 600 1700
B 600 1600
I-32
• Gain: The output value have to be within the value on the following table.
Gain management value The lowest value The highest value
R 20 238
G 10 222
B 70 247
4.3.27 Line Mag. Setting (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Select whether you use the adjustment value which is specified at the factory. You can also check the current magnification adjustment value.
(2) Usage
• After you replace the CCD unit, select "OFF".
The line magnification calibration value that is adjusted for each unit changes to control the differences in the reading performance on
each scanner (CCD). So after you replace the CCD unit, perform the setting of the default generic value.
• You can disable the original calibration adjustment value when the image failure and other problems whose cause is the individual CCD
performance difference occurs.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Line Magnification Setting].
4. "Line Mag. Setting screen"
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note
• When you change the setting, the function becomes available after you deactivate and activate the main power switch (SW1)
again.
4.3.28 Recall Standard Data (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the setting values of scanner adjustment to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
• Data of the sensor check, CCD check, and line magnification setting is not restored.
• Data of the scan gradation and color adjustment is restored only when you select the installation initial data.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you select [Installation initial data], this adjustment recalls the adjustment values that are stored with the code "91-00"
of the I/O check mode.

4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
In order to adjust the gradation and the background density in a highlight area, change the printer gamma curve.
Note
• This adjustment can only be applied to IDC sensor gamma corrections. When Color Density Control is being used, this
adjustment is not necessary.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the color reproduction of the highlighted gradation is not good.
I-33
Note
• Be sure the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
• When PF-708 is connected, adjust the printer gamma offset on "I.4.3.30 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment -
Printer Gamma Adjustment)" normally.
• Perform this adjustment when a fine adjustment of the printer gamma offset is required or when PF-708 is not connected.
• You do not have to conduct this adjustment when you use "Color Density Control".
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment].
4. "Printer Gamma Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Offset Adj.]
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen you want to adjust.
Note
• Screen 1, screen 2, and stochastic correspond to the screen names in the user mode.
• Contone is a screen that is used in the character section of the screen.
• Contone does not require the adjustment.
6. Press [Print Mode].

7. Select the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. Check the printed test pattern.
• Make sure that the highlight density starting sections of Y, M, C, and K are uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
[1]
Y
M
C
K
9. If they are not even, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press the button of a color (C or K) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric button and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
4.3.30 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the gradation in a highlight area and the background density automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
Note
(2) Usage
Note
• When you conduct this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
• In order to adjust the printer gamma offset, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma offset is
required, perform "I.4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)".
• This adjustment is valid when PF-708 is connected. When PF-708 is not connected, use "I.4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
(Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)".
• You do not have to conduct this adjustment when you conduct "Color Density Control".
(3) Procedure
I-34

Press [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Offset Auto.]
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Auto. screen"
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK that is displayed are the current values. They are linked with the "Printer
Gamma Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes]. To cancel the operation, press [No].
Note
• When the adjustment value greatly differs from 0, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0. Then
press [Readjust].

Place A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the start key, and then print a test pattern.
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when test pattern is printed.
plate/Rr [4].
Note
• Place the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c030ca
10. Place 10 copy papers (white) on the test pattern and close the DF.
Note
• Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
11. Press [Start].

12. The test pattern is scanned and the current YMCK values are updated.
Note
• Because the scanned result at the first scan is not examined, a "Completed" message does not appear after the first scan.
• The quality examination of the value is made from the second scan. Make sure to repeat steps 8 to 11 several times until the
message "Completed normally" appears.

Press [Print Mode].
14. Perform the steps 8 to 11.
15. Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
If the message other than "Completed normally" is displayed, repeat steps 13 to 14.
4.3.31 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
In order to read the pattern on the transfer belt, the printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC
sensor. Therefore, the correction possibly be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. In order to enable precise
printer gamma correction, this adjustment corrects the IDC sensor by using the scanner.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a color reproduction is in a poor condition because of a replacement of the IDC sensor.
Do not conduct this adjustment unless the IDC sensor is replaced.
Note
• When you conduct this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
• When you press [Reset Adj. Data] and [Yes], the adjusted Adjustment of Printer Gamma Sensor is reset to the main body ROM
initial setting data (average value). Press [No] not to reset the data.
I-35
• This adjustment is valid when PF-708 is connected.

• When PF-708 is not connected, execute the calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.]
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment screen"
Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note

7. Select the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. "Place output image on original glass...screen"
plate/Rr [4].
Note
• Place the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. Place 10 copy papers (white) on the test pattern and close the DF.
Note
• Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
10. Press [Start].

11. If the scanned chart is normal, the machine conducts the gamma sensor adjustment and the printer gamma correction. Then "Completed"
message is displayed.
12. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
11.
Error code Error Descriptions
Error 1 A crossmark cannot be detected Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 RGB data abnormalities Chart is different, or software bug
Error 13 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 31 Sensor value error Readjust
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
Error 52 Sequential number overflow Software bug
I-36
Error 53 Regression order error Software bug

Error 54 Select screen information error Software bug
Error 55 Color information error Software bug
4.3.32 Printer Gamma Curve Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjusts the halftone characteristics of the engine to the gamma curve of the IC controller (IC-310/308).
(2) Usage
Use when a tone jump occurs on the sequential tone when you print on IC-310/IC-308 after the calibration.
Note
• After you perform this adjustment, re-create the target of the color density control.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Printer gamma curve adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Curve Adj.]
5. "Printer gamma curve adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
• Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Note
• Be sure to change only the IDC sensor side.
• When you change the RU side, be sure to delete all the table of the color density manual control.
4.3.33 Print Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the gradation in a highlight area and the background density automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
Note
(2) Usage
Note
• Be sure to confirm that each setting value of Y, M, C, and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0"
before this adjustment. When any of the setting value Y, M, C, or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
• Do not use colored paper or embossed paper for this adjustment. When you use colored paper or embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
• In order to adjust the printer gamma offset, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma offset is
required, perform "I.4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)".
• You do not have to conduct this adjustment when you conduct "Color Density Control".
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Print Gamma Offset Auto.(RU)]
Note
• The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK that is displayed are the current values. They are linked with the "Printer
Gamma Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes]. To cancel the operation, press [No].
I-37
Note
• When the adjustment value greatly differs from 0, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0. Then
press [Readjust].

Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
• Each set of test patterns to measure the color and to check result is outputted in twice.

The color of the test pattern is measured and the current YMCK values are updated.
Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
10. When a message other than "Completed normally", an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following
and repeat steps 7 to 9.
Error code Error Countermeasures
Error 5 Standard value cannot be obtained. Readjust
(Readjust)
Error 14 The startup is out of the adjustment Readjust
standard
Error 18 Output paper sensor value abnormality Readjust or replace the output paper
density sensor
4.3.34 Print. Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
In order to read the pattern on the transfer belt, the printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC
sensor. Therefore, the correction possibly be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. This adjustment corrects the
IDC sensor with the color value that the output paper color density sensor of the RU-511 measures.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a color reproduction is in a poor condition because of a replacement of the IDC sensor.
Do not conduct this adjustment unless the IDC sensor is replaced.
Note
• Be sure to confirm that each setting value of Y, M, C, and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0"
before this adjustment. When any of the setting value Y, M, C, or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
• Do not use colored paper or embossed paper for this adjustment. When you use colored paper or embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
• To reset the data to factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data. Press [No] to keep the current data.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.(RU)]
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment screen"
Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note

7. Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. If the measured test pattern is normal, the machine conducts the gamma sensor adjustment and the printer gamma correction. Then
"Completed" message is displayed.
9. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
8.
Error 4 Input sensor value abnormality Check the size of the test pattern, check the
output paper density sensor
Error 31 Acquired sensor value abnormality Readjust
(gradation reverse)
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
I-38
4.3.35 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the sharpness and reduce the moire.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the sharpness adjustment in user mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
• This adjustment reflects only to the scanned image.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Sharpness Adjustment].
4. "Sharpness Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Perform the Tray Setting and place a chart on the original glass. Then press the start key.
Setting range: -5 (soft, less moire) to +5 (sharp, more moire)
4.3.36 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the contrast.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the contrast adjustment in user mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Contrast Adjustment].
4. "Contrast Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Perform the Tray Setting and place a chart on the original glass. Then press the start key.
Setting range: -5 (contrast decrease) to +5 (contrast increase)
4.3.37 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the dot detection threshold value of original image.
(2) Usage
When the dot detection result differs from the original, perform this adjustment.
Note
• The scanned original is judged to the text, picture, dot, or colored text by the image processing. The image processing to use is
decided according to the result.
• Use this adjustment for raising the judgment precision of the original on which the area is misjudged.
• To widen the judgment area of the picture, adjust it in the user mode.
(3) Procedure
I-39
Press [04 Image Distinction Level].

4. "Image Distinction Level screen"
Press [01 Dot Detect Adjustment].
5. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Perform the Tray Setting and place an original that you want to adjust on the original glass. Then press the start key.
7. Dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original image is judged.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
• Black section: Distinguished as black text
• Magenta section: Distinguished as colored text
9. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons as necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (dot area decrease) to +5 (dot area increase)
4.3.38 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the color text distinction threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the color text distinction function in user mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Color Text Adjustment].
5. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Color text detect pattern is printed.
9. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (color text area decrease) to +5 (color text area increase)
4.3.39 Dot/Text Area Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the dot distinction and text distinction threshold values of the original image.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the text photo distinction function in user mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
I-40

Press [03 Dot/Text Area adjustment].
5. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Dot/Text detection pattern is outputted.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
9. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area increase, text area decrease) to +5 (dot area decrease, text area increase)
4.3.40 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the distinction threshold value of the color original or the black and white original.
(2) Usage
When ACS (Automatic color selection) function does not work properly, perform this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [05 ACS Adjustment].
4. "Place original and touch [Scan] screen"
Place an original that the ACS does not work properly on the original glass, and then press [Scan].
5. Next to the "Judge:", the result "Color" or "Black" is displayed.
Setting range: -2 (black) to +2 (color)
4.3.41 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the thickness of the output density of the automatic background removal function.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value for the automatic background removal function in user mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Density Adjustment].
4. "Density Adjustment screen"
Press [01 AE(AES) Adjustment].
5. "AE(AES) Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [Set].
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 + (dark)
6. Select [Auto] on [Background Removal] of the copy mode. Output a copy and check the density.
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 6 until an appropriate density is obtained.
4.3.42 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the thickness reproduction of the center value of the copy density.
I-41
(2) Usage
Adjust the density for copying.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Copy Density Adjustment].
5. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode that you want to adjust and perform the tray setting. Then place a chart on the original glass and press the Start key.
9. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
4.3.43 Background Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the thickness reproduction of the center value of the background removal.
(2) Usage
Adjust the background density (density of highlighted area) for copying.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Background Removal].
5. "Background Removal screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode that you want to adjust and perform the tray setting. Then place a chart on the original glass and press the Start key.
9. "Background Removal screen"
4.3.44 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) (Quality Adjustment - Tone Adjustment)

(1) Function
In order to improve the gray balance, adjust the tone for the copy and scanner image finely.
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not required in the field because this adjustment is completed at the factory. However, the tone of the gray balance of the
scanner image can be adjusted.
Note
(3) Procedure
3. "Quality Adjustment screen"
I-42
Press [07 Tone Adjustment].

4. "Tone Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Tone Adjustment(RGB/YMC)].
5. "Tone Adjustment(RGB/YMC) screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select [Full Color], and place a "Color chart" on the original glass. Then press the Start key.
8. "Tone Adjustment(RGB/YMC) screen"
Select the color for adjusting the gray balance from R, G, B, Y, M, C.
Input the adjustment value and press [Set].
4.3.45 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the quality adjustment configuration values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you select [Factory Initial Data], each configuration value returns to the factory initial data.
• When you select [Installation initial data], each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code
"91-00" of the I/O check mode was conducted.
5. Press [Yes] to restore the standard data.

4.3.46 Non-Image Area Erase Check

(1) Function
When you conduct the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function under a bright light source, the function could not operate normally. In that case,
check the level of the external light and check whether the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function operates normally.
The results are shown in the following patterns.
OK NORMAL adjustment selected.
The machine is set to appropriate parameters for Non-Image Area Erase.
NG1 Performed normally, however the data which has possibility that Non-Image Area Erase cannot
function correctly was found.
It tend to be failed with dark density originals.
Please refer the Service Manual.
NG2 The data which has possibility that Non-Image Area Erase cannot function correctly was found.
Please refer the Service Manual.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you install a new machine or move a installation location.
Use this function when the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function does not operate correctly since the environment of the installation location
changes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Non-Image Area Erase Check ].
3. "Non-Image Area Erase Check screen"
Press [Start].
Note
• When you start this check, confirm that ADF opens fully. Also, confirm that there are no scratches or no dirt on the original
glass.
I-43
4. The check is conducted, and the message "OK" appears for the normal condition. For "NG1" and "NG2", reinstall the machine so that the
external light does not come in, and then conduct the check again.
4.4 Process Adjustment

4.4.1 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)
4.4.2 1-Trans.V Manual Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.3 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.4 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.5 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.6 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.7 Confirm Guide HV (Manual) (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Prevent the belt and the cleaning blade from damage.
(Create the toner band, and supply toner to the intermediate transfer cleaning blade and the 2nd transfer cleaning blade. Stabilize a holding
state of the cleaning blade.)
(2) Usage
When you replace the intermediate transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade, perform this adjustment.
When you replace the 2nd transfer belt and the 2nd transfer cleaning blade, perform this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Process Adjustment].
2. "Process Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.].
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Blade Setting Mode].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Blade Setting Mode]
4. "Blade Setting Mode screen"
Press [Int.Trans.Belt] or [2nd Trans. Belt]. The adjustment finishes in about 15 seconds, and then the message of the completion is
displayed on the screen.
4.4.9 Charge Potential Auto. Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Optimize the drum potential.
(Measures the drum charge potential, and adjust the charging grid voltage.)
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not necessary in the field. (This adjustment is included in Gamma Automatic Adjustment.)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Charge Potential Auto. Adj.].
4. "Charge Potential Auto. Adj. screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 10 seconds then the charger potential for each process speed (1/1 speed, 3/4 speed, 1/2 speed) and
each color (Y, M, C, K) appears, and then the message of completion appears on the screen.
I-44
4.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Executes the image stabilization control (long image stabilization control) on arbitrary timing. (Refer to: Long image stabilization control)
(2) Usage
Perform this function after each periodically replaced part is replaced. (Refer to I.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS)
Perform this function after each process adjustment is changed. (Refer to I.4.4.23 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) to
I.4.4.26 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment))
Perform this function when an image trouble occurs. (Refer to: IMAGE TROUBLE)
Execute this function before color calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Gamma Automatic Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Gamma Automatic Adjustment]
4. "Gamma Automatic Adj. screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 2 minutes then the charger DC bias value for each process speed (1/1 speed, 3/4 speed, 1/2 speed)
and each color (Y, M, C, K) appear. Then the message of completion appears on the screen
Note
• An error code is displayed when there is any trouble. Correct the error following the following list.
Error 1: Unable to execute the gamma correction because of the gamma sensor output abnormality. When the error occurs,
it is controlled by using the previous correction value.
4.4.11 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Puts the developer automatically into the developing unit.
(2) Usage
When you put in the new developer, perform this adjustment.
Note
• Be sure not to open the cover of the developing unit. Dust in the unit causes the image trouble.
(3) Procedure
1. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening and closing the toner hopper unit)
2. Press the button [1], and open the toner bottle door [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the right side cover.

4. Remove the screw [3] of the cover table [2].
5. Loosen 2 screws [4] of the cover table [2]. Pull and lift the cover table, and remove it.
I-45
6. Remove the developer charge plate [1] and the developer charge funnel/Lw [2].
7. Insert the developer charge plate [1] into the shoulder screw [2] and install it by moving to side.
Note
• The shoulder screws are on top of the developing unit of each color (YMCK).
8. Install the developer charge funnel/Lw [2] to the developer charge plate [1].
Note
• Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge funnel/Lw [2] to the toner supply opening of the developing unit.
I-46
9. Install the included developer charge funnel/Up [1] to the developer charge funnel/Lw [2].
Note
• The developer charge funnel/Up [1] is included in each developer, so be sure not to reuse it.

Press [04Auto. Developer Charge].
[Service Mode] - [Process Adjustment] - [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] - [Auto. Developer Charge]
14. "Auto. Developer Charge screen"
Select the color of developer.
15. Press [Start], and then put the new developer to the developer charge funnel/Up.
16. Confirm that the charge of developer is completed and then press [Cancel].
17. When you charge another developer, repeat the steps 7 to 16.
Press [Automatic Adjustment].
19. "Register Replacement Unit"
Check the color of the developer that you replaced.
20. Press "Next".
21. The message "Selected unit counter reset Yes/No? " is displayed.
22. Press [Yes].
Note
• When you press [Yes], the counter of the selected developer is reset.
23. "Automatic Adjust screen"

Press [Start]. [Toner Density Sensor Initial Adjustment], [Gamma Adjustment], and [Color Registration Adjustment] are adjusted
automatically. Then the screen moves to the [Density Balance Adjustment] screen.
24. Perform "Density Balance Adjustment". (Refer to "User's Guide" for details of the density balance adjustment) Press "Next" after the
adjustment completes.
25. The message "Adjustment after unit replacement is completed" appears.
26. Press "Close" to back to "Drum Peculiarity Adj. screen."
27. Replace the parts that have been installed.
4.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Decides the standard value of the TCR sensor for the new developer. The toner is supplied based on the standard value.
I-47
(The TCR sensor measures the toner density of the new developer in the developing unit. The standard value is calculated from the
measurement.)
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment after new developer is set.
Note
• Be sure to perform the adjustment after new developer is set. Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, and the
developers must be replaced.
• Be sure not to perform the adjustment in the other cases. Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, and the
developers must be replaced.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Toner Density Sensor Init.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Toner Density Sensor Init.]
4. "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen"
Select the color of a developer that has been newly charged and then press the [Start].
5. A message "Completed" is displayed.
Note
• The value that is displayed on the screen is a calculated standard value.
4.4.13 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Prevent the drum and the cleaning blade from damage.
(Rotates the drum at low speed to lubricate by the lubricant applying.)
(2) Usage
Perform this function after the drum unit is replaced.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Initial Drum Rotation].
[Service Mode] - [Process Adjustment] - [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] - [Initial Drum Rotation]
4. "Initial Drum Rotation screen"
Press [Start]. The adjustment finishes in about 10 seconds, and then the message of the completion is displayed on the screen.
4.4.14 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
When the toner density is low, the machine supplies toner until the standard toner density is obtained.
(2) Usage
Perform this function when the toner density is low.
Perform this function when the SC of the toner density lowering occurs. (Service mode activation)
Note
• When the toner density is high, output the test pattern in the following conditions. Then, check the toner density again.
• Test Pattern: number 1
• Gradation: Target color (128), other colors (0)
• Quantity: 10 sheets
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Toner Density Revert Mode].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Toner Density Revert]
4. "Toner Density Revert Mode screen"
Select the colors that you want to recover the toner density.
5. Press [Start] to supply toner to the developing unit with lower than the standard density value. When the toner concentration reaches to
the standard value, the main body stops.
Note
• Output: Measurement value of the TCR sensor (current toner density)
• Target: Standard value of the TCR sensor (standard toner density)
I-48
• State: State of the toner supply control
4.4.15 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the standard value for the TCR sensor at 3/4 speed or 1/2 speed. The toner is supplied based on the standard value.
(The TCR sensor measures the toner density in the developing unit at each speed. The standard value at each speed is calculated from the
measurement.)
(2) Usage
When the unstable toner density causes an error (image background, toner scatter) at 3/4 speed and 1/2 speed, perform this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Toner Density Sensor Speed].
[Service Mode] - [Process Adjustment] - [Process Fine Adjustment] - [Toner Density Sensor Speed]
4. "Toner Density Sensor Speed screen"
Press [Start].
It stops automatically after completion of the adjustment.
Note
• The value that is displayed on the screen is an adjusted standard value at each speed.
4.4.16 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
The check and the optimization for the maximum density for each YMCK color is available.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the density which the spectrophotometer measured is not target density. Perform this adjustment mainly after
the change of the machine status such as the installation or the maintenance.
Note
• Maximum density initial adjustment is already adjusted at the factory setting.
(3) Adjustment target value (reference)

The following shows the target density according to the spectrophotometer and the standard paper.
Acceptable target density range of each color Y, M, C: -5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%
(a) Spectrolino (recommended)

Standard paper Type of Y M C K
paper
POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (coated, for Japan) Coated- 1.04 1.53 1.77 1.97
GL
MOHAWK EVERYDAY DIGITAL COATED SILK WHITE Coated- 1.02 1.50 1.75 1.95
118 (coated, for North America) GL
Konica Minolta Semi Gloss Reference 130 (coated, for Coated- 0.99 1.45 1.65 1.85
Europe) GL
Mondi Color Copy 90 g/m2 (Plain) Plain 0.93 1.37 1.53 1.74
(b) FD-7, FD-5BT (recommended)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
(c) ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, and i1Pro2 (with UV filter)

Note
· Absolute value: This value (density) includes the density of the paper
· Relative value: This value (density) excludes the density of the paper
I-49
Absolute value
paper
GL
Europe) GL
Relative value (Relative)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
(d) i1iSis XL
paper
GL
Europe) GL
(4) Preparation
1. Prepare a standard paper.
Note
• When there is no standard paper, do not change the maximum density initial adjustment at the installation.
When there is the standard paper, perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the
standard paper in advance.
2. Prepare one of the following spectrophotometers.

• Spectrolino (recommended), FD-7, FD-5BT (recommended)
• ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (one of the spectrophotometers that EFI controller recommends)
• Other spectrophotometers (such as i1iSis XL)
3. Specify one paper for the daily density management.
Note
• Standard papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper, counsel with the user and decide the paper.
• Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the paper for the density management
in advance or before the record of target density.
I-50
(5) Procedure for the setup or the update of the target value for the density management
(a) Adjustment flow
Measure and adjust the maximum density
1.Reset the maximum density adjustment value.
2.Perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
When there is no standard paper When there is a standard paper
3.Output the image for measurement.
4.Measure the density.
When the density is within the target: When the density is not within the target:
5.Change the maximum density

initial adjustment value.
Register the target density.
Completed
Record the target density
(b) Measurement and adjustment procedures of the maximum density

1. Press [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [03
Maximum Density Adjustment].
2. "Maximum Density Adjustment screen"
Select "0" for all adjustment values of YMCK and press [OK].
3. Enter the service mode and perform the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
Peculiarity Adj.))
4. Select Screen1 (Dot190) in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode and output the test pattern number 69. (Refer to I.
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
• Use standard papers.
When there is no standard paper, proceed to (c) Recording the target density. (Refer to I.4.4.16.(5).(c) Registering the
target density)
When there is the standard paper, perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and
the standard paper in advance.
5. Measure the density on the test pattern number 69 that you output.
The method differs depending on the spectrophotometer that you use.
• Measure the density with Spectrolino (Refer to I.4.4.16.(7).(a) Measure the density with Spectrolino)
• Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT (Refer to I.4.4.16.(7).(b) Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT)
I-51
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (Refer to I.4.4.16.(7).(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000,
i1-Pro, i1Pro2)
• Measure the density with i1iSis XL (Refer to I.4.4.16.(7).(d) Measure the density with i1iSis XL)
Note
• For the method to measure the density with other spectrophotometers, refer to the manual of each spectrophotometer.
6. Check the result of each color.

Compare the result with the adjustment target value (reference). When the density is within the target, the operation is complete. When
the density is not within the target density, perform the following adjustments.
7. Go back to the top screen of the service mode.
Press [09 Max Density Initial Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Density Initial Adj.]
11. "Maximum Density Initial Adjustment screen"
Adjust the value according to the result of each color. Then, press [OK].
• The result is lower than the target density: increase the value of the target color.
• The result is higher than the target density: decrease the value of the target color.
Setting range: -10 to +10
Note
• The change differs according to the paper type.
(Reference) The change for POD gloss coat 128 g/m2 (Spectrolino)
• Y: Changes for Δ0.012 by one step
• M: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
• C: Changes for Δ0.026 by one step
• K: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
12. Perform the step 3 to step 6, and check the measurement result.
When the density is not within the target density, perform the following adjustments again.
(c) Registering the target density

1. Specify a paper for the daily density management and place the papers on the tray.
Note
• Standard papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper, counsel with the user and decide the
paper.
• Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the paper for the density
management before the record of target density.

Press [Print Mode].
Select the paper for the density management. Press the start key and output the chart.
Press [Confirm Target Density].
5. "Confirm Target Density screen"

Press [Register Target Density].
Note
• The information of the registered target density is displayed on the "Registered Data" column.
• The density data that you measured on the step 3 is displayed on the "Measured Data" column.
• The paper type that you used on the step 3 is displayed on the "Paper Type" column.
I-52
6. "Register Target Density screen"

Input the registered name of the target density data.
7. Press [OK] and register (update) the target density data.
Note
• When you press [Cancel], the target density data is not registered (updated).

Press [Confirm Target Density], and check that the information on "Registered Data" is updated.
(6) Procedure for maintenance

(a) Adjustment flow
1.Reset the maximum density adjustment value.
2.Measure the density with RU-511.
3.Compare with the registered target value.
When the density is within the target: When the density is not within the target:
Completed 4.Change the maximum density

initial adjustment value.
(b) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [03
Maximum Density Adjustment].
2. "Maximum Density Adjustment screen"
Select "0" for all adjustment values of YMCK and press [OK].
3. Select [Service Mode] - [02 Process Adjustment] - [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] - [09 Max Density Initial Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
Place a paper for the density management, that you specify on the step 1 of the target density registration, on the tray. Then, change
the paper setting of the tray to the setting that is the same as the paper setting on the target density registration.
Note
• Conduct the tray select of the print mode on [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05 Expert
Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [06 Max. Density Auto Adj. (RU)]. You can change the paper setting of the tray to
I-53
the same paper setting as the setting on the target density registration. (Refer to R.2.5 Maximum density auto adjustment
(RU))
Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the standard paper or Dot190
(screen) and the paper for the density management in advance.
6. Select the paper for the density management. Press the start key and output the chart.
Note
• At this time, the color sensor of the RU measures the color of the chart.

Press [Confirm Target Density].
9. "Confirm Target Density screen"

Compare the "Registered Data" and the "Measured Data".
Note
• The information of the registered target density is displayed on the "Registered Data" column.
• The density data that you measured on the step 4 is displayed on the "Measured Data" column.
• The paper type that you use on the step 4 is displayed on the "Paper Type" column.
10. When the "Measured Data" is not within the standard range (Y, M, C:-5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%) compared with the "Registered
Data", change the adjustment value according to the measurement result of each color. Then, repeat step 4 to step 7.
• When the measurement result is lower than the target density: Increase the value of the target color.
• When the measurement result is higher than the target density: Decrease the value of the target color.
11. When the Y, M, C, K values on the "Measured Data" are within the standard values, press [Close].
Note
• If you press [Register Target Density], the registered data of the target density value is updated. Therefore, do not press
[Register Target Density].
(7) Measure the density with the spectrophotometer

(a) Measure the density with Spectrolino
Measure the averaged density of the 5 patches for CMYK.
I-54
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[1] Measurement patch 1 [2] Measurement patch 2

[5] Measurement patch 5 -
The color measurement condition of Spectrolino
· The light source of the measurement: D50
· White standard: Abs
· The visual field of the measurement: 2 degrees
· Filter: UV Cut
· Density: ANSI T
· Measurement mode: Reflectance
(b) Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT

1. Activate FD-5BT.
2. Use the up down move button [1] on the home screen, and move the cursor to [Sheet] or [Sample].
[1] [2] [3]

[1] Up Down move button [2] Return button
[3] OPTION button -
3. Press the OPTION button and display the option screen.

4. Move the cursor to [Menu] on the option screen, and press the OPTION button.
I-55
5. Move the cursor to [Density Options] on the menu screen, and press the OPTION button.
6. Change the following items to the configurations mentioned in the table.

Setting item Configurations
Means. Cond. M2 (UV Cut)
Den. White Ref. Absolute value
Density Status T
Density Filter Auto
Note
• For detailed information on the configuration, refer to the manual attached to FD-7 or FD-5BT.
I-56
7. Press the return button and the menu screen is displayed.

8. Move the cursor to [Calibration] on the menu screen, and press the OPTION button.
9. Press the FD-5BT on the white calibration plate [1], and perform the white calibration.
[1]
[1] White calibration plate -
10. When "Calibrating..." is no longer displayed, take the FD-5BT away from the plate.
11. Press the return button twice, and the menu screen is displayed.
12. After you move the cursor to [Sample], move the opening of the FD-5BT [6] on the patch that you measure.
Press the FD-5BT and measure the density of CMYK patches [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] on the test pattern number 69.
I-57
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]

[5] Measurement patch 5 [6] Opening
13. Calculate the average of the maximum density for each of C, M, Y, and K by the 5 patch densities of CMYK which you measured. Use
Excel or another application for the calculation.
(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1-Pro, i1Pro2

1. The following procedure describes how to measure the density using ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation) as an example.
2. Start "ColorPort".
Note
• ColorPort is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its measurement
accuracy.
• Color Port can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.xrite.com/product_overview.aspx?Action=support&ID=719
3. Create a target.
1. Select [i1Pro] on [Device].
2. Select [CMYK] on the [Color Space].
3. Select [New] on [Patch Set].
4. The "Customize Screen" appears. Enter any name on [Name].

5. Click [+] until [Total Patches] reaches to [20].
6. Click [Save] and save the target to any directory. Select TIFF for [Files of Type].
I-58
4. Adjust the setting of the measurement condition

1. Click [Measure Target] tab.
2. Select the target that you created on [Target].
3. Select [i1Pro] on [Device].
4. Select [Spot] on [Measurement Mode] [1] of the "Configuration Screen". Click [Calibrate].
[1]
5. Follow the instructions on the screen and perform the calibration.
6. Measure the target

1. Measure all the maximum density patches of K (5 places).
Then measure the maximum density patches of C (5 places), the maximum density patches of M (5 places), and the maximum
density patches of Y (5 places) by color.
I-59
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]

[5] Measurement patch 5 -
7. Check the result
1. Select the patch that you want to check.
2. Click [1].
I-60
[1]
3. Click [Measurement Info] on the "Info Screen".
[1]
4. Select [Density] on the "Info Screen". Select [T] for [Status].

5. Check the result.
8. Save the data

1. Click [Save Data] [1].
I-61
[1]
2. Select the format that you want to output on [Format].

3. Be sure that all the items on [Device] and [Colormetric] are not checked.
4. Check [VCMY] on [Density]. Select [T] on [Status].
5. Click [Save].
9. Open the saved CSV file in Excel.
I-62
10. Calculate the average maximum density [1] of each of the 5 colors (Y, M, C, K).
[1]
Note
• When you measure and calculate the maximum density average values with the procedure above, be sure to compare the
absolute value of the adjustment target value (reference) with the maximum density average values.
(d) Measure the density with i1iSis XL

1. Start the ProfileMaker Measure tool.
Note
• ProfileMaker is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its measurement
accuracy.
• ProfileMaker5 can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.xrite.com/product_overview.aspx?ID=757&Action=support
2. Prepare the script data for the test pattern number 69.
I-63
Note
• Be sure to obtain the script data from CSES.
CSES ID: DLBT1412496JP (Japanese), CSES ID: DLBT1412496EN (English)
3. Connect the USB dongle to the PC.

Note
• When there is no USB dongle, you cannot measure density.
4. Click [Instrument Configuration].

5. Select [Eye-One iSis] at the [Instrument] and select [Reflection].
When [OK] is displayed, close [Instrument Configuration].
6. Click [Chart] and display [Test Chart Measurement].

Select [Open...] from [Test Chart].
7. Select the script data (iSis_8c_100_50_10.txt) for i1iSis.

Note
• Be sure to obtain the script data from CSES.
CSES ID: DLBT1412496JP (Japanese), CSES ID: DLBT1412496EN (English)
I-64
8. Click [Start...].
9. Insert the test pattern number 69 to i1iSis XL.
I-65
10. When the measurement normally finishes and the following message is displayed, click [Close].
11. Click the [Optical density] tab.
I-66
12. Check [Offset Data], and then select [ANSI T] at [Filter Standard].
13. Select a desired color from C, M, Y, or K at the [Color Channel].
I-67
14. Click [Export Density...] and save the text file (.txt).
Note
• When you move the mouse on the patch, you can confirm the positioning information [1] and the density information [2] of
the patch.
[1] [2]
[1] Positioning information of the patch [2] Density information of the patch
I-68
15. Open Excel. Select the saved text file (.txt) from [File] - [Open].
16. Calculate the average of the 5 maximum density patch for each color: Y, M, C, and K.
• Maximum density patch position of Y: B4, B18, H11, N4, N18
• Maximum density patch position of M: B3, B17, H10, N3, N17
• Maximum density patch position of C: B2, B16, H9, N2, N16
• Maximum density patch position of K: B1, B15, H8, N1, N15
4.4.17 Surface Potential Sensor (Sensor Output Confirm)

4.4.18 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

4.4.19 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Measures the toner density in the developing unit with the TCR sensor. Displays the measurement.
(2) Usage
Check the toner density in the developing unit for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [03 Toner Density Sensor Output ].
4. Press [Next] or [Previous], and then select the processing speed that you want to confirm.
• Line speed 1: 1/1 speed
5. Select the color that you want to check.
6. Press [Start] to display the following items.
• Output: Measurement value of the TCR sensor (current toner density)
• Target: Standard value of the TCR sensor (standard toner density)
• Conversion: Value that is calculated from difference between the output and target (current toner density)
Note
• When the value is smaller, the toner density is lower.
I-69
7. Press [STOP] to end the check.

8. When you check another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
4.4.20 Drum Surface Potential (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Measures the drum potential with the drum potential sensor. Displays the measurement.
(2) Usage
Check the drum surface potential for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Drum Surface Potential].
4. "Drum Surface Potential screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous], and then select the processing speed that you want to confirm.
5. Select the color that you want to check.
6. Press [Start] to display the following items.
• V0 potential output value: Charge potential of the drum
• Vi potential output value: Exposure potential of the drum
8. When you check another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
4.4.21 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Measures the temperature and humidity inside and outside the machine with each sensor. Displays the measurement.
(2) Usage
Check the temperature and humidity inside and outside the machine for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Humidity/Temperature Output].
4. "Humidity/Temperature Output screen"
Press [Start] to display the humidity and temperature value of the following items.
• Humidity/Temperature sensor 1: Process temperature sensor (TEM/HUM2)
• Humidity/Temperature sensor 2: Temp/humidity sensor (TEM/HUM1)
• Fusing T-belt center temperature sensor: Fusing belt temperature sensor/Md (TEM1)
• Fusing T-belt edge temperature sensor: Fusing belt temperature sensor/Rr (TEM2)
• Lower fusing pressure roller center temperature sensor (Center): Lower pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM3)
• Upper fusing pressure roller contact temperature (edge): Upper pressure roller temperature sensor (TEM8)
4.4.22 Toner Charge Quantity Detect (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Measures the toner charge quantity. Displays the measurement.
(Creates the toner patch and measures the toner adhesion quantity with the IDC sensor. Calculates the toner charge quantity from the toner
adhesion quantity and the process condition as the patch is created.)
(2) Usage
Check the toner charge quantity for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Toner Charge Quantity Detect].
4. "Toner Charge Quantity Detect screen"
I-70
Press [Start] to display the following items.

• Toner Charge (Init): Toner charge quantity when the developer is replaced with the new one
• Toner Charge (Cur.): Current toner charge quantity
4.4.23 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the covered margin (potential difference between the charging potential of the drum and the developing bias).
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the image background, white spot image, or carrier scattering occurs.
Note
• Be sure that it is the trade-off between the "image background prevention" and "white spot image and carrier scattering
prevention".
• Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. It is possible that the image background, white spot image, or carrier
scattering occurs.
• There are several adjustments to reduce the image background. As a priority of the adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1. Develop AC Frequency
2. Background Margin Fine Adj.
3. Toner Density Fine Adj.
• After you change the configuration, conduct the auto gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma Automatic
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Process Fine Adjustment].
3. "Process Fine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Background Margin Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Background Margin Fine Adj.]
4. "Background Margin Fine Adjustment screen"
Select the colors that you want to adjust. Enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons, and then press [SET].
• Adjustment range: -5 (carrier scattering prevention, white spot image prevention) to + 5 (image background prevention)
5. Press [Default] to restore the default settings.
4.4.24 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the developing AC bias.
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the noisy image, white spot image, or low developing ability occurs.
Note
• Be sure that it is the trade-off between the "noisy image and white spot image prevention" and "low developing ability
improvement".
• Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. It is possible that the noisy image, white spot image, or developing
ability occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.]
4. "Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. screen"
• Adjustment range: -5 (noisy image and white spot image prevention) to + 5 (developing ability improvement)
4.4.25 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change frequency of the developing AC bias.
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the image background or the white spot image reproducibility deterioration occurs.
Note
• Be sure that it is the trade-off between the "white spot image reproducibility improvement" and "image background prevention".
I-71
• Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. It is possible that the image background or the white spot image
reproducibility deterioration occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Develop AC Frequency].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Develop AC Frequency]
4. "Develop AC Frequency screen"
• Adjustment range: -5 (white spot image reproducibility improvement) to + 5 (image background prevention)
4.4.26 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the standard value for the TCR sensor.
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the image background, toner scattering, carrier scattering, or white spot image occurs.
Note
• Be sure that it is the trade-off between the "image background and toner scattering prevention" and "carrier scattering and
white spot image prevention".
• Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. It is possible that the image background, toner scattering, carrier
scattering, or white spot image occurs.
• To reflect the change immediately, perform the toner refresh mode. ([MACHINE Screen] - [Adjustment] - [Execute Adjust
Operation])
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Toner Density Fine Adj.]
4. "Toner Density Fine Adj. screen"
• Adjustment range: -5 (image background, toner scattering prevention) to + 5 (carrier scattering, white spot from carrier prevention)
4.4.27 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Changes the interval of the drum small rotation control *1.
*1: Rotates the drum periodically to keep the drum sensitivity even.
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the image trouble occurs due to the uneven drum potential.
Note
• When you shorten the interval, the drum life is shortened.
• When you lengthen the interval, image failures tend to occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Interval/Quantity Adj.].
3. "Interval/Quantity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [01 Drum Small Rotation Interval].
I-72
[Service Mode] - [Process Adjustment] - [Process Fine Adjustment] - [Interval/Quantity Adj.] - [Drum Small Rotation Interval]
4. "Drum Small Rotation Interval screen"
Select an interval and press [OK].
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
4.4.28 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Changes the activation status, interval, and toner consumption quantity of the automatic toner refresh mode *1.
*1: When the low coverage image is printed, it is possible that toner in the developer deteriorates and an image trouble occurs. To prevent the
image trouble, discharge the deteriorated toner in the developer and replace it with the new toner.
(2) Usage
Change the configuration when rough image, overflow toner, or white spot image occurs during the low coverage print.
Note
• When the auto toner refresh mode is active, the productivity reduces.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Automatic Refresh Interval].
[Service Mode] - [Process Adjustment] - [Process Fine Adjustment] - [Interval/Quantity Adj.] - [Automatic Refresh Interval]
4. "Automatic Refresh Interval screen"
Specify the settings of each adjustment item, "Execution existence", "Execution frequency" and "Refresh quantity", and press [OK] to
enable the new settings.
• "Execution ON/OFF"
OFF (default)
ON
• "Execution frequency"
[Small] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 2,600 prints (default)
[Middle] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 1,500 prints
[Large] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 900 prints
• "Refresh quantity"
[Small] - Equivalent to A3 solid 3 sheets
[Middle] - Equivalent to A3 solid 5 sheets (default)
[Large] - Equivalent to A3 solid 8 sheets
Note
• The execution frequency varies depending on the environmental temperature and print mode.
• When "Execution ON/OFF" is "OFF", the toner refresh mode cannot be activate regardless the configuration of "Execution
Frequency" and "Refresh Quantity".
4.4.29 Toner Dens. Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
The standard values of the TCR sensor at 3/4 speed and 1/2 speed are adjusted periodically. Changes the interval of the control.
(2) Usage
Perform the adjustment when there is a claim that the image stabilization control is too much.
Perform the adjustment when the toner density at each speed is unsteady.
Note
• When you shorten the interval, the frequency of the image stabilization control is increased.
• When you lengthen the interval, the toner density variation tends to occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Toner Dens. Sensor Interval].
[Service Mode] - [Process Adjustment] - [Process Fine Adjustment] - [Interval/Quantity Adj.] - [Toner Dens. Sensor Interval]
4. "Toner Dens. Sensor Interval screen"
Select an interval and press [OK].
4.4.30 M'Trans. Steering Sensor

This adjustment is not necessary in the field.
I-73
4.4.31 Recall Standard Data

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Note
• Items that can be recalled
• 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj.
• 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual
• 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
• HV Adj. (Separation AC)
• HV Adj.(Separation DC)
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you select [Installation initial data], this adjustment recalls the adjustment values that are stored when you conduct
the code "91-00" of the I/O check mode.

4.5 System Setting

4.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) OUTLINE
Configure the software DIPSW.
Note
• Do not change any switch that is not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 System Setting].
2. "System Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
[Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]
3. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press [▲] / [▼] or numeric buttons after you press the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On (1)] or [Off (0)] to configure the selected bit number ON/OFF.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] DIPSW data (indicates the 8bit values of the selected [2] DIPSW number
DIPSW numbers in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.)
[3] Bit number (0 to 7) [4] Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
I-74
[5] Numeric buttons [6]
4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list

Default setting
DIPSW Bit Function Set value
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Display of process adjustment on user screen • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1 Note display when the fusing JAM occurs • 1: Enabled 0 0 0
Displays the handling for the fusing JAM on
"Paper Setting" screen - [Change IndividualSet].
To enable this setting, enable the DIPSW1-0
Process adjustment user screen display.
2 Print stop method after the display of the toner • Stops after you eject the paper 1 1 1
3 supply or the waste toner full. in the machine: 1-3=0, 1-2=0 0 0 0
(Decide the copier operation when the machine • Stops at a break between the
detects no toner or the waste toner full.) ) copy set: 1-3=0, 1-2=1
• Stops at the end of the current
job: 1-3=1, 1-2=0
• Does not stop: 1-3=1, 1-2=1
4 Print prohibition when the maintenance count is • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
reached • 1: Enabled
5 Number of the allowed print quantity after the • 1,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=0 0 0 0
6 machine reaches the maintenance count • 2,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 3,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
7 • 4,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 5,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=1
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=1
2 0 Hard disk drive connection recognition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
1 Toner amount save level setting (for the image • 0: Normal 0 0 0
area) • 1: Strong
· Function: Switches the control level for the
image tag area when you select [ON] for "Paper
Setting" - "Process Adjustment" - "Toner Amount
Save". When you select "1" on this setting, the
limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you
select [ON] for "Toner Amount Save" but the
paper wrap error is not improved well.
Note
· Change only DIPSW2-2 but not this setting
when you want to reduce the effect on the
color reproduction of the image area.
2 Toner amount save level setting (for the text or 0 0 0
the graphic area)
· Function: Switches the control level for the
text or the graphic area when you select [ON] for
"Paper Setting" - "Process Adjustment" - "Toner
Amount Save". When you select "1" on this
setting, the limit becomes stronger.
select [ON] for "Toner Amount Save" but the
paper wrap error is not improved well.
Note
· Change this setting in priority to DIPSW2-1.
3 Selection of the degree of the color text blur 0 0 0
prevention (for image area)
· Function: Switches the control level when
"Text, Graphics, Image" of "Color Text Blur
Prevention" becomes active for the driver setting
on the printer output. The setting switches the
control level for the image tag area. When you
select "1" on this setting, the limit becomes
stronger. However, select "Text, Graphics,
Image" to enable "Color Text Blur Prevention".
· Usage: Use this function when you activate
"Color Text Blur Prevention" with "Text,
Graphics, Image" is selected but the toner
spillage of the image range (high contrast
pattern in a graphic) is not improved well. To
improve the smudge by the toner spillage, select
"1" on this setting.
I-75
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Selection of the degree of the color text blur 0 0 0
prevention (for text or graphic area)
· Function: Switches the control level when
"ON" is selected on "Text, Graphics" of "Color
Text Blur Prevention" for the driver setting on the
printer output. When you select "1" on this
setting, the limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Use this function when you activate
"Text, Graphics, Image" or "Text, Graphics" of
"Color Text Blur Prevention" but the toner
spillage is not improved well. The smudge by the
toner spillage on the thin lines is more improved
likewise the character area. Select "1" on this
setting to improve the smudge by the toner
spillage in the area.
5 Density balance 255 value correction • 0: ON 0 0 0
· Function: When you select "0" on this setting, • 1: OFF
the density balance adjustment is performed in
the maximum density area of the screen
"Dot190", "Dot175", and "Dot150". When you
select "1" on this setting, the density balance
adjustment is not performed in the maximum
density area of any screen.
· Usage: Likewise the C7000, select "1" on this
setting when you do not want to perform the
density balance adjustment in the maximum
density area.
6 Bar code leaving function for the density valance • 0: Not Leave 0 0 0
chart (i1iSis XL, i1Pro) • 1: Leave
· Function: Prints the bar codes depending on
values which are printed in the density valance
chart.
· Usage: You can enter the value on the i1iSis
XL or i1Pro by bar cords.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 0 PF Air-blow adjustment • 0: Not display the air-blow 0 0 0
Specify the setting to "1" so that it enables the adjustment button
air blow adjustment without feeding sheets when • 1: Display the air-blow
a jam occurs due to the paper feed from PF. adjustment button
(When confirming how much the paper is floated
and performing the air-blow adjustment in the
halt condition after a jam)
· Procedure
On the Machine Screen, select [Adjustment] -
[PFU Air Assist Adjustment] to select the tray
that needs the adjustment.
Select [Manual].
By pressing [Start] on the screen that is shown,
the air starts blowing. Then, change each setting
as needed.
Press [Stop] or [Close] when the air level is
proper.
· Adjustable items
Lead Edge Air Level Setting (Following the
setting changes, the air level changes)
Side Air Level Setting (Following the
configuration changes, the air level changes)
(When performing the air-blow adjustment
without canceling the job after cleaning the jam)
· Procedure
After you clean the JAM, press "Paper Setting"
on the screen where "Press [Start] to restart is
shown..
Select the tray that needs the adjustment and
select [Change Setting] - [Air-blow].
Change each setting as needed and press [OK].
Note
· Blow-out of the air cannot be checked.
· Adjustable items
Lead Edge Air Level Setting
Side Air Level Setting
I-76
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Malfunction code latch (C1540 to 1562, C3501 • 0: Latch released 0 0 0
to 3919) • 1: Latched
2 Reverse de-curler roller preliminary rotation • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 The maximum stacking capacity selection in • 0: Stops at the tray middle 0 0 0
small-size (longer side 250 mm to 319 mm) of position sensor (PS6) (loading
FS in the shift mode 1500 sheets)
• 1: Stops at the tray lower limit
sensor (PS3) (loading 3000
sheets)
6 I/O check mode output15 memory clear • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
7 Carrying over the job for next day • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Switches the function of carrying over the job for • 1:Disabled
next day
4 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 0 0 1
4 EQUIOS linkage • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Notifies to the controller whether the • 1: Enabled
job is a sample print job or a job that is specified
to delete after output.
· Usage: Configure to "1" to save the confirmed
print job temporarily that is sent from EQUIOS.
Notification to EQUIOS when a job is output is
performed as follows.
- [Sample Output]: Nothing is noted to EQUIOS.
- [Output]: Notes that the print is performed, and
notes the total record of printing and sample
output.
- [With Job Delete]: Notes that the job has
completed, and notes the printing record (not the
job deletion).
Note
· The memory switch number 113 of the
controller must be configured to "1"
(Enabled).
5 APS when change magnification • 0: Enabled 0 1 0
• 1:Disabled
6 Operation when stores the maximum hold job • 0: Not deleted automatically 0 0 0
(for the job list screen) • 1: Deleted automatically
· Function: This DIPSW configures the
operation of when the stored hold job has
reached the maximum number. When the stored
hold job has reached the maximum number, you
cannot save the new job. In this case, normally,
you need to delete the unnecessary jobs
manually. When this setting is "1", the oldest job
is automatically deleted.
· Usage: When you save the new job when the
stored hold job reaches the maximum number: If
you want to delete the oldest job automatically,
change this setting to "1".
Note
· This DIPSW changes the operation of when
you conduct the following operation in the
job list screen.
- [Job Ticket] - [New Store]
- [Page Edit] - [New Store]
- [Comb.]
- [Copy]
· When you save the new job from the PC,
configure the operation with DIPSW23-1.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-77
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 0 Granularity priority setting • 0: Enabled (The noisy image 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the prevention has priority.)
developing conditions during printing. To prevent (Granularity Priority = ON)
the noisy image (granular deterioration) or the • 1: Disabled (The darker at
darker at trailing edge, This DIPSW changes the trailing edge prevention has
developing conditions. priority.) (Granularity Priority =
· Usage: To prevent the darker at trailing edge, OFF)
Note
· It is the trade-off between the noisy image
and the darker at trailing edge.
· When this setting is "1", the adjustment
value of the develop AC frequency fine
adjustment is disabled. The develop AC
frequency is always the fixed value.
· This DIPSW operates simultaneously with
[Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] -
[Expert Adjustment] - [Process Adjustment] -
[Granularity Setting] - [Granularity Priority].
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 Dust-proof filter/Rt life change 1 • 0: Life 1 (DIPSW5-6=0) or life 3 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the life of the (DIPSW5-6=1)
dust-proof filter/Rt. • 1: Life 2 (DIPSW5-6=0) or life 4
<Life of the dust-proof filter/Rt> (DIPSW5-6=1)
- Life 1: Near life (6,300,000 counts), life
(7,000,000 counts) (DIPSW5-3=0, DIPSW5-6=0)
· Usage: When the user prints frequently the
high coverage image, select the life 2 or the life
4. (Reference: Coverage: 20%, number of prints
(A3): 100,000 prints per month) When the high
coverage image is printed continuously, the
toner scattering amount increases and the toner
collection amount of the dust-proof filter/Rt
exceeds the acceptable amount. To prevent the
toner from scattering, replace the dust-proof
filter/Rt at an early date.
Note
· The selection of the life 2 and the life 4
depends on the configuration of the dust-
proof filter/Rt and the scatter duct assy.
(Refer to I.4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct
assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt)
· The life 3 is the auxiliary setting.
· When you change this DIPSW, the life of the
dust-proof filter/Rt shortens.
· Be sure to refer to both DIPSW5-3 and
DIPSW5-6.
4 Fusing jam blank paper cleaning • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
To clean the toner on the fusing belt, a screen to • 1:Disabled
select whether to feed the blank paper or not
appears on the touch panel at printing after the
fusing related jam process.
The blank paper is output to the tray other than
during printing.
5 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
I-78
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Dust-proof filter/Rt life change 2 • 0: Life 1 (DIPSW5-3=0) or life 2 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the life of the (DIPSW5-3=1)
dust-proof filter/Rt. • 1: Life 3 (DIPSW5-3=0) or life 4
<Life of the dust-proof filter/Rt> (DIPSW5-3=1)
high coverage image, select the life 2 or the life
4. (Reference: Coverage: 20%, number of prints
toner scattering amount increases and the toner
collection amount of the dust-proof filter/Rt
exceeds the acceptable amount. To prevent the
toner from scattering, replace the dust-proof
filter/Rt at an early date.
Note
· The selection of the life 2 and the life 4
depends on the configuration of the dust-
proof filter/Rt and the scatter duct assy.
(Refer to I.4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct
assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt)
· The life 3 is the auxiliary setting.
dust-proof filter/Rt shortens.
DIPSW5-6.
7 Printing at reaching life of dust-proof filter • 0: Allow 0 0 0
• 1:Restrict
6 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold, punch function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: FD main tray paper exit • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: FD post insert function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: FS staple function 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: FS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
5 Faulty part isolation: FS 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(1st)
7 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(2nd)
7 0 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 saddle 0 0 0
stitch
1 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 multi 0 0 0
center fold
2 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 multi tri- 0 0 0
fold
3 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 trimming 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: SD-506 straight 0 0 0
conveyance and sub tray paper exit, SD-513
straight conveyance
5 Faulty part isolation: PB cover paper insertion 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: PB binder function 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: PB 0 0 0
8 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
I-79
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 Custom size counter threshold setting • 0: Not display 0 0 0
When you configure the DIPSW to 1, the custom • 1: Display
size threshold of the counter per size can be
configured. Change the threshold from "Service
Mode" - "04 Counter, Data" - "Custom Counter
Threshold Setting."
Note
· For the custom size paper, sometimes it is
counted as 2 even when the paper length in
the sub scan direction is shorter than the
value that is adjusted in DIPSW33-2, 3 TC
double count size setting.
This case occurs when this configuration
value is included in the threshold configured
the range of DIPSW8-7.
9 0 Printer resolution change • TAG mode:9-1=0, 9-0=0 0 0 0
1 · Function : Enabled for a 600dpi printer image. • Simple:9-1=0, 9-0=1 0 0 0
When you change the 600dpi image resolution • Printer resolution change:
to 1200dpi, this function polish the edge. 9-1=1, 9-0=0
· Usage: Choose "Simple" when you avoid to • Printer resolution change:
cut off the edge as a side effect. When you 9-1=1, 9-0=1
choose "Resolution change", this process is
enabled not only for texts and lines, but also for
bitmapped images.
2 Duplex mode • Auto: 9-3=0, 9-2=0 0 0 0
3 Reverse de-curler pressure setting • Strong: 9-3=0, 9-2=1 0 0 0
You can change the curling amount on the front • Middle: 9-3=1, 9-2=0
side in duplex printing. • Weak: 9-3=1, 9-2=1
The default pressure volume differs depending
on the print mode. Change the setting when the
curling amount on the front side is strong in
duplex printing.
4 Copy quantity limit • No limit: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 0 0 0
5 9-4=0 0 0 0
• 1 sheet: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
6 9-4=1 0 0 0
7 • 3 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1, 0 0 0
9-4=0
• 5 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• 9 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• 10 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• 20 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• 30 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• 50 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• 99 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
10 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Hard disk image memory • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
I-80
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Deactivation setting of the paper skew sensor • 0: Use non-volatile value (When 0 0 0
initial value you use a registration unit
· Function: To correct the installation position of which is mounted normally.)
the paper skew sensor, a correction value is • 1: Non-volatile value is disabled
input to the non-volatile. When you install a new (Use the setting value of
registration unit, you need to change the DIPSW44-4, DIPSW44-5, and
correction value by using DIPSW44-4, DIPSW44-6.) (When you use a
DIPSW44-5, and DIPSW44-6. This DIPSW new registration unit.)
selects either non-volatile or DIPSW44-4,
DIPSW44-5, and DIPSW44-6 to use as a
correction value.
· Usage: When you install a new registration
unit, configure this setting to "1".
Note
· When you configure this setting to "1", be
sure to change DIPSW44-4, DIPSW44-5, and
DIPSW44-6.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Display the finisher name on the "Machine" • 0: OFF 0 0 0
screen. • 1: ON
· Function: In the "Machine" screen in the user
mode, switches names of finisher options that
are displayed.
· Usage: When many finisher options are
installed, use this function to clear option types
in the "Machine" screen.
5 Custom size tolerance setting • 0: ± 2 mm 0 0 0
• 1: ± 10 mm
6 Image rotation for the custom size paper and • 0: Rotate 0 0 0
large size paper • 1: Not rotate
7 Ticket edit reset confirm screen • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: This function switches to display the • 1: ON
confirmation pop-up screen or not, when you
push the "Cancel" button in the ticket edit and
the page edit.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
display the confirmation pop-up screen for the
prevention of improper operations.
11 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 Release the limitation for SD-506, SD-513 multi • 0: Limited 0 0 0
half-fold • 1: Not Limited (Up to 50 sheets)
Note
· If "1" is selected for this setting, a jam or
folding error could occur.
3 Automatic restart of the job under suspension • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
4 Switch of the message on the malfunction code • 0: Please turn on power again 0 0 0
screen. • 1: Please call service
Function: Switches the message when the
malfunction code occurs.
Usage: You can recover some malfunction
codes by the reboot of the power, so the
message "Please turn on power again" is
displayed on the default setting. Select "1" to let
the user call service on any malfunction codes.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Automatic paper supply • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
7 Jam code display • 1: Enabled 1 1 1
12 0 Counter per mode (2) • 0: Number 1 to Number 9 Not 0 0 0
display the count per color
mode
• 1: Number 1 to Number 9
Display the count per color
mode
1 OFF setting of auto low power and auto shut off • 0: One is possible 0 0 0
• 1: Both are possible
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-81
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 Erratic pagination detection • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Select 0 on this setting and the machine detects • 1: Disabled
the erratic pagination during the job and the print
operation is stopped. The following patterns can
be detected; page missing, page switching,
page disorder, page overlapping, and the miss-
inserted number of the blank page.
7 Konica Minolta logo when the power switch • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
activates • 1:Disabled
13 0 Faulty part isolation: Multi punch function (GP) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: PB-503 subsequent stage • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
FNS
2 Faulty part isolation: RU-511 humidifier function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: RU-511 color sensor unit 0 0 0
4 GP-502 Ring bind unit isolation • 0: Usable 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
5 Switches the exit tray for waste paper • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: When this setting is changed to "1", • 1: Enabled
outputs any waste paper (sample print, AE
(AES) adjustment chart, waste tab) in a sub tray
that is the nearest to the main body and
available.
· Usage: When the machine outputs the inside
paper in a sub tray, this function outputs and
classifies the waste paper into the other tray.
6 Black-and-white quality adjustment of Network 0 0 0
scanner
The purpose of this setting is to improve the
gradation of the black-and-white 2-value scan.
When you select "1" on this setting, the error
diffusion operation is performed in the black-
and-white mode of the Network scanner. Also,
"Quality Adjustment" in "Scan Settings" can be
adjusted.
Note
· This setting is enabled only when the
IC-602 is connected. When the other
controller is connected, do not select "1" on
this setting.
· When this setting is selected to "1", the
recognition rate of OCR is decreased.
7 Staple jam recovery operation setting • 0: Page recovery 0 0 0
The missing pages or uneven stapling occurs • 1: Copy recovery
when the staple jam in the finisher occurs, or the
operator removes the paper remaining inside the
stacker. To prevent the missing pages or
uneven stapling, select "1" on this setting to
display an additional message for the jam
cleaning.
14 0 Recall the previous job when you reserve the • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
next job • 1: Enabled
The setting condition for the copy can be kept
for the next job by "Pre-Job Recall."
1 Utility counter display switchover • 0: Normal display 0 0 0
• 1: Counter display per size
2 Printer 1200dpi compression mode • Standard (image area 0 0 0
Use this mode when the image deterioration resolution priority): 14-3=0,
occurs on the border of the image area or the 14-2=0 (Controller image
jaggy occurs on the outlines of the letters or compression setting: Same as
lines of the image area. "Resolution Priority")
Configure to the standard compression (image • Anti-aliasing compression
area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=0, so that (image area resolution priority):
the image area is also processed in 1200dpi. 14-3=0, 14-2=1
Note • Standard (image area gradation
· This setting is associated with "Utility" - priority): 14-3=1, 14-2=0
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" - (Controller image compression
I-82
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 "Expert Adjustment"- "Image Quality Setting setting: Same as "Gradation 1 1 1
"- ""06 Controller Image Compression." Priority")
• Anti-aliasing compression
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1
4 For copitrak • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Configure to 1 when you connect the billing • 1: Enabled
management device from copitrak. The interface
specification is as follows.
· RS232C
· Baud rate 9600
· Bits 8
· No parity
· No flow control
5 ISO Metric mode • 0: JIS 0 0 1
Note • 1:ISO
· Regardless of this DIPSW setting, the
original size is always JIS series.
6 HDD Encryption button display • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Displays [Encrypt] button with [Utility] - • 1: Enabled
[Administrator Setting] - [Security Setting] -
[HDD Management Setting].
Validate when you want to encrypt the hold job
that is stored in HDD.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
15 0 ORU-M operator release setting • 0: ORU-M unavailable 0 0 0
• 1: ORU-M available
1 Switch of the parts counter display on the • 0: Display parts counter 0 0 0
counter list. • 1: Not display parts counter
Function: Disables the display of the parts
counter on the counter list.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not want users to output the parts counter
information.
2 Display change setting for the life warning and • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
icon • 1:Disabled
· Function: Changes the display for the life
warning of the replacement parts and the icon
that are shown in the operation section. When
you change this setting to "1", user can use the
parts unless there are any problems in the
image quality even the parts reach their life in
the counter display. The purpose of this function
is to reduce the down-time and the cost.
The following items are the target to change the
display.
<Details Counter screen>
· Photo conductor life (YMCK)
· Developer life (YMCK)
· Transfer belt cleaning life
· Charging corona (YMCK)
· Developing unit(YMCK)
· 2nd transfer cleaning blade
· Ozone filter
<Icon>
· Maintenance icon
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not display the life warning and icons.
Note
· When you change this setting to "1",
change DIPSW1-4 to "0" to desable the "Print
prohibition when the maintenance count is
reached".
3 Finishing option alarm stop • Stops immediately after 0 0 0
Select the alarm stop condition. Alarm stop detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=0
means to detect the next function. • Stops at a break between the
FD, FS, and LS tray lower limit, FD, FS, LS, and print that is configured after
SD tray paper full, FD and PK punch scraps full, detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=1
FS staple scraps full, SD trimming scraps full • Does not stop during the print:
15-4=1, 15-3=0
• Does not stop during the print:
15-4=1, 15-3=1
I-83
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 0 0 0
5 CS Remote Care recognition • 0: Disabled 0 1 0
· Function: To use the CSRC function, change • 1: Enabled
this setting to "1".
6 Address reset after the scan 0 0 0
7 IP scanner allow setting without a key counter • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
This setting allows to use the scanning function • 1: Allow
without key counter inserted.
16 0 Scanner magnification setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
1 Color density control (periodical control) • 0: Not perform 0 0 0
switching when Fiery controller calibration is • 1: Perform
performed
· Function: Switches whether to perform the
periodic adjustment of color density control
before output of the chart of the Fiery controller
calibration.
· Usage: When the color density control is used,
performing the control before Fiery calibration is
necessary. Select "1" on this setting to perform
the color density control before the Fiery
calibration automatically.
Note
When [ON] is selected to [Periodical Adj.
Execution] for the color density control, this
DIPSW is valid.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 Count of the key counter in printer mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Decide whether to count the printer • 1: Enabled
output on the key counter or not when you use
the key counter.
· Usage: To count on the key counter, select "1"
in this setting.
4 Utility menu mode installation date display • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 Dehumidification heater temperature control • Environment temperature + 6 0 0 0
6 (PF) °C: 16-6=0, 16-5=0 0 0 0
When you connect the option dehumidifier • Environment temperature + 8
heater of PF and when you configure the °C: 16-6=0, 16-5=1
dehumidifier fan heater control to [Compulsive • Environment temperature +10
ON] in the Utility mode, this switch is used to °C: 16-6=1, 16-5=0
configure the control temperature. • Environment temperature + 6
°C: 16-6=1, 16-5=1
7 ORU-M developing unit counter setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
User can enter the life counter (distance and the • 1: Enabled
quantity) of the developing unit.
17 0 Faulty part isolation: PI-502 function (FS-532) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: SD-510 fold & staple, multi • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
half fold, Multi tri-fold function
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning tab paper • Brightness level 80: 17-6=0, 0 0 0
5 (Configure the background optical density at 17-5=0, 17-4=0 0 0 0
scanning tab paper.) ) • Brightness level 40 (weakest):
6 17-6=0, 17-5=0, 17-4=1 0 0 0
• Brightness level 60: 17-6=0,
17-5=1, 17-4=0
17-5=1, 17-4=1
17-5=0, 17-4=0
17-5=0, 17-4=1
17-5=1, 17-4=0
• Brightness level 255
(strongest): 17-6=1, 17-5=1,
17-4=1
I-84
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 Default change for the tray humidifier setting • 0: ON 0 0 0
Switch the default value of humidifier ON and • 1: OFF
OFF (which is selected automatically based on
the paper type) for the plain or the fine paper on
the paper setting of the tray.
18 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Print during dehumidification heater temperature • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
control (PF) • 1: Allow
· Function: Select whether to print or not during
the dehumidification operation when the
dehumidification is attached to the PF.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting so that the
printing becomes available when the machine
does not accept the printing during the
dehumidification.
Note
· When you select "1" on this setting under
the high-humidity condition, the no feed jam
easily occurs.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: HDD • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
19 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Background margin change • 0: The background margin 1 1 1
· Function: This DIPSW decreases the back decreases.
ground margin (potential difference between the • 1: Normal
charging potential of the drum and the
developing bias) of Y, M, and C.
high coverage image, change this setting to "0".
(Measure: Coverage: 20%, number of prints
toner charge quantity decreases and the toner
scattering increases. To prevent the toner from
scattering, the machine decreases the
background margin and makes the low charged
toner easier to exit on the image.
Note
· When you change this setting to "0", the
image fogging possibly occurs.
· After the change of the setting, conduct a
test print and confirm whether there is no
image fogging. When the image fogging
occurs, conduct the background margin fine
adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.23 Background
Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment))
I-85
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Stamp print outside the original image for printer • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
job • 1: Enabled
· Function: This DIPSW changes the print
position and the print method of the printer job
stamp. (Stamp: Date/Time, Page Number, Set
Numbering)
<For DIPSW19-2=0>
· Date/Time, Page Number
- Print position: Based on paper (when the crop
mark is not in use), based on crop mark (when
the crop mark is in use)
- Print method: Overwrite method
· Set Numbering
- Print position: Based on original
- Print method: Overlay method
<For DIPSW19-2=1>
· Date/Time, Page Number, Set Numbering
- Print position: Based on paper
- Print method: Overwrite method
· Usage: To print the stamp outside the original
image, change this setting to "1".
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Switch alignment speed of the SD-513 FD • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
alignment claw • 1: Low speed control
∙ Function: Switches the alignment speed of the
FD alignment claw (fold alignment claw).
∙ Usage: Select "1" when the FD alignment claw
mark is left at the trail edge (fore edge) side in
the paper exit direction of fold & staple, half-fold,
or tri-fold output.
Note
∙ When "1" is selected, the productivity of
fold & staple, half-fold, or tri-fold (simplex
print) are lowered.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
20 0 0 0 0
1 Image scanning area with image shift • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Original priority
2 Total page number standard in stamp mode • 0: Based on original 0 0 0
• 1: Based on transfer paper
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 Curl adjustment setting after auto reset • 0: Not reset 0 0 0
Reset the value of "Paper Setting" - "Curl • 1: Reset
Adjustment" to 0 at the auto reset and configure
whether to reset the humidifier setting to default
or not.
Note
· The default (ON or OFF) of the humidifier
setting differs depending on the paper type
and the paper weight.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
21 0 PB perfect binding limit number switchover • 0: Fine, Color, Coated table 0 0 0
• 1: Plain table
1 PB warm-up control switchover (effective by • 0: Warm-up during power ON 1 1 1
power OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1: No warm-up during power
ON
2 PB heater control switchover (effective by power • 0: Heater activates 0 0 0
OFF or ON after the setting change) automatically in 1 minute after
perfect binding finish.
• 1: Heater does not deactivates
automatically in 1 minute after
perfect binding finish.
3 301 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 paper exit with its face up • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
• 1: Allow
I-86
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 SD-510 paper exit tray book feed amount • 0: Auto 0 0 0
· Function: When this setting is change to "1", • 1: 1 copy output
outputs the bundle of papers by 1 copy and do
not store them on the paper exit tray.
· Usage: Use this function for a user who has a
device that conveys the books by 1 copy to the
following procedure. Change this setting to "1"
when the paper exit tray belt is connected to the
paper exit opening and conveys a book.
5 Enable or disable the FS-532 overlap • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
conveyance of the 92 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 papers. • 1: Enabled
· Function: For the paper overlap conveyance
of FS-532, switches whether to apply the
conveyance for thick papers or not. In the status
of the factory default, the overlap conveyance of
the thick paper is not executed in order to
reduce the switch back sound.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to increase
the productivity of the paper between 92 g/m2 to
216 g/m2 in the staple mode or the punch staple
mode.
6 Number of PK-522 punch holes • 2 holes: 21-7=0, 21-6=0 0 1 0
7 Note • 2 holes or 3 holes: 21-7=0, 0 0 1
· The number of punch holes is configured 21-6=1
automatically before the shipment from the • 2 holes or 4 holes: 21-7=1,
factory so that there is no need to change it 21-6=0
in the field. However, change the number in • 4 holes (Sweden): 21-7=1,
the case of connecting the punch unit which 21-6=1
is different from the destination.
22 0 Machine NIC setting • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
1 - • 0: - 1 1 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 1
3 Image position for the custom size original • 0: Based on user selection 0 0 0
(when using DF) • 1: Based on APS at DF
4 Power save key function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 Release of the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button of • 0: Not displayed 0 0 0
the SD-506 and the SD-513 for users • 1: Displayed
· Function: This DIPSW switches whether to
deslpay the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button in
"MACHINE screen" - "Adjustment" - "Finisher
Adjustment" - "Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.".
· Usage: To display the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.]
button, change this setting to "1".
6 Operation when staple empty of FS • 0:Staple supply request 0 0 0
• 1: Selecting between staple
supply or staple release
7 Auto execution of refreshing the photo conductor • 0: Execute 0 0 0
and the lubricant apply brush • 1: Not execute
· Function: To improve the image stripes in the
FD direction due to the uneven application of the
lubricant, the photo conductor refreshing control
and the lubricant apply brush refreshing control
are regularly conducted automatically. Enable or
disable these controls.
· Usage:
- When the low coverage image is printed: If the
productivity has the most priority, select "Not
execute".
Note
· When you select "Not execute", image
stripes in the FD direction due to cleaning
fault easily occur. "Execute" is
recommended.
23 0 Switches to Russian font for WebLCD display • 0: Not use Russian font 0 0 0
· Function: Displays Russian font (new font) for (conventional font)
Web LCD. • 1: Use Russian font (new font)
· Usage: Select "1" for DIPSW23-0 when Fiery
by EFI is connected and Russian is not
I-87
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
displayed properly on the Fiery setting change
screen (Web LCD).
Note
· Select "1" for DIPSW23-0 when the machine
is installed in Russia.
1 Operation when stores the maximum hold job • 0: Not delete automatically 0 0 0
500 hold jobs can be stored at maximum. This (restrict to receive the copier
function configures the operation when 500 jobs hold job or the printer hold job)
are stored. • 1: Delete the oldest hold job
and receive the new job
2 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction (during printing) • 1: Fine
Change the accuracy of the color registration
correction that is performed periodically during
printing. If the fine is selected, the registration
accuracy improves by approximately 0.5 pixels,
but the correction time takes 2 minutes longer.
3 Control of the color registration automatic • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
correction (periodical correction) • 1:Disabled
Disable the color registration correction that is
performed periodically and reduce the down
time during the continuous printing. (Power ON
correction operates when the fusing temperature
is lower than the specified temperature.)
4 Image rotation function when the custom size • 0: Not rotate (including the in- 0 0 0
document data is exported by house production controller job)
PageScopeDirectPrint • 1: Rotate (only in-house
· Function: Prohibits image rotation when the production controller job)
custom size document data exported by
PageScopeDirectPrint outputs in the custom
size paper or larger paper than the document
size. (DIPSW23-4=0: Default)
· Usage: Select "0" for DIPSW23-4 when
images on the data output by
PageScopeDirectPrint is rotated. To rotate
images, select "1" for DIPSW23-4.
Note
· The image can be rotated in the
DIPSW23-4=1 setting only when the in-house
production controller job is used.
5 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
I-88
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Developer/Y, /M life change 1 • 0: Life 1 (DIPSW26-6=0) or life 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the life of the 3 (DIPSW26-6=1)
developer/Y and the developer/M. • 1: Life 2 (DIPSW26-6=0) or life
<The life of the developer/Y (the running 4 (DIPSW26-6=1)
distance of the developing roller/Y)>
- Life 1: 507.5 km (C1100), 520.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 2: 259.3 km (C1100), 265.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 3: 179.2 km (C1100), 183.3 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=1)
- Life 4: 99.1 km (C1100), 101.2 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=1)
<The life of the developer/M (the running
distance of the developing roller/M)>
- Life 1: 507.5 km (C1100), 520.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 2: 300.2 km (C1100), 307.2 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 3: 209.2 km (C1100), 213.9 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=1)
- Life 4: 118.2 km (C1100), 120.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=1)
high coverage image, select the life 3.
(Reference: Coverage 20%, number of prints
developer charge quantity decreases and the
toner scattering increases. To prevent the toner
from scattering, replace the developer at an
early date.
Note
· The life 2 and the life 4 are the auxiliary
settings.
developer/Y and the developer/M shorten.
DIPSW26-6.
7 Punch auto switching (PK, FD) (effective by • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
power OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1: Enabled
24 0 Switch the applicable environment of line reduce • 0: Applied to all environments 0 0 0
1 and line reduce 2 • 1: Applied only to low humidity
· Function: Select the environment that applies environments
line reduce 1 and line reduce 2 which is selected
in DIPSW53-0 and DIPSW54-1 (not applied to
standard and line reduce 3).
· Usage: When "Applied to all environments
(Default)" is selected to line reduce 1 and line
reduce 2, the life of the drum unit possibly
shortens. When you select "1", line reduce is
applied only to a low humidity environment.
Therefore, the shortening of the life of the drum
unit is reduced.
I-89
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Image stabilization control during idling • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Switches the image stabilization control during • 1: Enabled
idling.
When the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level while this setting is
disabled, the image stabilization control is
executed before you start the next job.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
at the start of the job after the idling, there is a
waiting time at the start of printing.
While this setting is enabled, the image
stabilization control is executed when the
environmental humidity during idling reaches the
specified level.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
when the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level, there is a fewer
waiting time at the start of printing. However,
since the number of executing the image
stabilization control increases under the
environment with the large humidity gap, the
lives of the developer and drum are shorten.
2 Image stabilization control • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Developing unit life change • 0: Life 1 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the life of the • 1: Life 2
developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the
developing unit/C, and the developing /K.
<The life of the developing unit (the running
distance of the developing roller)>
- Life 1: 2030 km (C1100), 2082 km (C1085)
(DIPSW24-4=0)
- Life 2: 627 km (C1100), 643 km (C1085)
(DIPSW24-4=1)
developing roller in the developing unit
deteriorates and the toner scattering increases.
To prevent the toner from scattering, replace the
developing unit at an early date.
Note
developing unit shortens.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Color registration automatic correction control • Enabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=0 0 0 0
4 Change the timing of the periodical color • Disabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=1 0 0 0
registration correction control or disable the • No performed during printing:
correction. 25-4=1, 25-3=0
Enabled: Suspend the print at every specified • -: 25-4=1, 25-3=1
print to perform the correction.
Disable: Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the machine cannot be
used with the malfunction code related to the
IDC sensor.
No performed during printing: Correction that is
performed by the suspension of print at every
specified print is performed after the print job to
reduce down time.
I-90
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction • 1: Speed priority
Change the accuracy of the color registration
correction that is performed automatically. If the
speed preference is selected, the correction time
can be shorten. Correction time of "speed
preference" is approximately 30 seconds.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
26 0 Trigger judgment of the color registration • 0: Process mount temperature 0 0 0
automatic correction • (Execute the color registration
Configure the standard and judge the timing correction when the process
when to execute the color registration correction. mount temperature changes
more than the specified level
from the previous correction.)
• 1: Number of print pages
• (Execute the color registration
correction after printing
specified pages from the
previous correction.)
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 Multi feed detection (PI, FD) (effective by power • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1:Disabled
4 Printer auto centering correction (PF) • 0: Enable 0 0 0
5 Printer auto centering correction (ADU) • 1: Disable 0 0 0
6 Developer/Y, /M life change 2 • 0: Life 1 (DIPSW23-6=0) or life 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the life of the 2 (DIPSW23-6=1)
developer/Y and the developer/M. • 1: Life 3 (DIPSW23-6=0) or life
<The life of the developer/Y (the running 4 (DIPSW23-6=1)
distance of the developing roller/Y)>
- Life 1: 507.5 km (C1100), 520.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 2: 259.3 km (C1100), 265.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 3: 179.2 km (C1100), 183.3 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=1)
- Life 4: 99.1 km (C1100), 101.2 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=1)
<The life of the developer/M (the running
distance of the developing roller/M)>
- Life 1: 507.5 km (C1100), 520.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 2: 300.2 km (C1100), 307.2 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=0)
- Life 3: 209.2 km (C1100), 213.9 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=0, DIPSW26-6=1)
- Life 4: 118.2 km (C1100), 120.5 km (C1085)
(DIPSW23-6=1, DIPSW26-6=1)
developer charge quantity decreases and the
toner scattering increases. To prevent the toner
from scattering, replace the developer at an
early date.
Note
· The life 2 and the life 4 are the auxiliary
settings.
developer/Y and the developer/M shorten.
DIPSW26-6.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
27 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
I-91
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 RU-516 connection detection • 0: Unconnected 0 0 0
· Function: Configure the connection status of • 1: Connected
the RU-516.
· Usage: When you connect the RU-516, select
"1" on this setting.
Note
· When this setting is "0" while the RU-516 is
connected, the jam (J-7550) possibly occurs.
· When this setting is "1" while the RU-516 is
not connected, the malfunction code
(C-1480) occurs.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 FNS pre-purge enable or disable • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches enable and • 1:Disabled
disable of the pre-purge mode of the finisher.
· Usage: To disable the pre-purge mode, use
this DIPSW.
1 FD-503 pre-purge enable or disable 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches enable and
disable of the pre-purge mode of the FD-503.
· Usage: To prevent the machine from
outputting the non-folded paper to the sub tray
which is the folded paper tray, use this DIPSW.
· Note
When the DIPSW28-0 is "0", this DIPSW is
enabled.
2 During the ring bind mode of GP-502, enable or 0 0 0
disable the control for the sheet number
limitation due to the paper weight.
· Function: In the ring bind mode of GP-502, it
has a limit for the number of sheets; 102 sheets
for 75 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 paper and 72 sheets for
92 g/m2 to 135 g/m2. When this setting is
changed to "1", the limitation becomes invalid.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to increase
the maximum number of sheets in the ring bind
mode of GP-502.
Note
· As a protection when the quantity limitation
is disabled, change DIPSW28-3 to enabled (1)
so that the hard limit works.
· When this switch is "1", an error possibly
occurs in the finish.
3 Enable or disable the alarm of the booklet • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
thickness over in the ring bind mode of GP-502 • 1: Enabled
· Function: Switches the method for detecting
the upper limit of loaded booklet in the ring bind
mode of GP-502. There are 2 methods for
detecting the upper limit of the loaded booklet;
number count by the weight and the thickness
detection sensor. As the default, only the
number count is enabled. Use the setting and
enable or disable the thickness detection
sensor.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to enable the
thickness detection sensor.
Note
· When the number limitation is disabled (1)
with DIPSW28-2, change this setting to "1"
so that the hard limit works.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 Default switch on the ticket edit screen • 0: Current Sheet 0 0 0
• 1: All Sheet
I-92
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
Configure where to reflect the default with
"Paper Setting" - "Paper Type" on the job ticket
edit screen.
1 LS main tray paper exit limit switchover • 0: Limit by weight 0 0 0
• 1: 5000 sheets uniformly
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 Switches the shift direction for the 2nd page • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
during the reverse 2 repeat • 1: Enabled
· Function: Switches the shift direction for the
2nd page (right image and left image) during the
reverse 2 repeat.
· Usage: When this setting is changed to "0",
this function is executed based on the images
(shifts to the right and the left in reverse). When
this setting is changed to "1", this function is
executed based on the paper (shifts to the right
and the left).
4 Malfunction code of the Color Density Control • 0: Enable (When the error is 0 0 0
· Function: When the error of the Color Density detected at 3 times, the
Control is detected, the malfunction code malfunction code occurs.)
occurs. • 1: Disable (When the error is
detected, no malfunction code
occurs.)
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 PB perfect binding minimum number of the • 0: Follow the setting of the 0 0 0
inside paper Utility menu
• 1: 6 sheets (81 g/m2 to 91 g/
m2, 92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 106
g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
7 Switches the print operation to other sheets • 0: Prints on other sheets (back 0 0 0
during the tray setting difference on the front and side is blank)
back, or the size setting difference of the • 1: Prints on the same sheets
transfer paper
· Function: Switches the operation during the
duplex print when the paper size differs on the
front side and the back side.
· Usage: Change this setting and the operation
is switched.
30 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Restriction of the display of the service mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
"List output" • 1: Enabled
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 PB perfect binding limit (includes Z-Fold) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
6 Control the display of "Classified copy count by • 0: Display 0 0 0
paper size" on the counter list • 1: Hide
· Function: Switches whether to show
"Classified copy count by paper size" on the
counter list of the list print.
· Usage: "Classified copy count by paper size"
operates in the different specific from the
threshold of "TC double count size setting" by
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3.To avoid the
confusion when TC is used for billing, change
this setting to "1" so that "Classified copy count
by paper size" is not appeared.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
31 0 • 1: - 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
2 Z-fold and center folding maximum paper exit • 50 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=0 1 1 1
capacity: FS-532 main tray • 40 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=1
Z-fold and center folding maximum paper exit • 30 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=0
capacity: FD-503 main tray • 20 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=1
I-93
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 · Function: You can configure the setting of Z- 1 1 1
fold and center folding maximum capacity of the
paper which exits to the FS-532 and the FD-503
main tray.
· Usage Use this setting to respond to the
request of the user to increase the number of
loading sheets. However, when you increase the
number of loading sheets too much, a jam
possibly occurs by the bend of the folding, or
sheets possibly fall from the main tray. (effective
by power OFF or ON after the setting change)
4 FS-532 Z-fold + Staple number limit • 5 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=0 0 0 0
5 Enter the maximum number of FS-532 Staple Z- • 8 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=1 0 0 0
Folded paper included in 50 sheets (A3 size). • 10 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=0
• 3 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=1
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
2 Guide mark printing on the test pattern number • 0: Not print the guide mark. 1 1 1
16 and number 33 • 1: Print the guide mark.
· Function: The machine prints the guide mark
which indicates the tray information, the printing
side information, and the printing direction on
the test pattern number 16 and number 33.
· Usage: When you adjust with the test pattern
number 16 and number 33 for each tray, print
the tray information, the printing side
information, and the printing direction on the
output test pattern.
· Output tray: Indicated by the number of the
guide marks.
· Printing side: The guide mark is printed only on
the front side. (No guide mark on the back side)
· Printing direction: The guide mark is printed
from the leading edge of the printing direction.
Here are the relations between the tray and the
number of guide marks.
Upper tray of PF-707, PF-708 (1st tandem): 7
Middle tray of PF-707, PF-708 (1st tandem): 8
Lower tray of PF-707, PF-708 (1st tandem): 9
Upper tray of PF-707 (2nd tandem): 13
Middle tray of PF-707 (2nd tandem): 14
Lower tray of PF-707 (2nd tandem): 15
Upper tray of PF-707 (3rd tandem): 16
Middle tray of PF-707 (3rd tandem): 17
Lower tray of PF-707 (3rd tandem): 18
3 Toner near empty sound alert • 0: Sound alert OFF 0 0 0
Function: When the toner is near empty, alerts • 1: Sound alert ON
by the sound.
Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when you
want to be alerted the toner near empty by the
sound.
4 Erratic pagination detection notification • 0: Not display the error code 0 0 0
Function: When the erratic pagination is (Exit papers when the erratic
detected, displays the error code and the pop-up pagination occurs).
message without exiting the paper. • 1: Displays the error code (C-
Usage: Use this setting when the erratic E018) and the notification of the
pagination occurs and you want to stop printing erratic pagination
with the error code (C-E018) without exiting the
paper.
When this setting is configured to "1" and the
erratic pagination occurs, a pop-up message is
displayed. When you press the OK button, the
notification to reboot the machine is displayed.
I-94
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Display of the message to remove papers when • 0: Exits the paper in the stacker 0 0 0
FS or SD job is canceled or capacity limit is forcibly and releases the mode.
over. • 1: Displays the message that
Function: Displays the pop-up message when a directs to remove the remained
job of staple or saddle stitch is canceled or the paper without exiting the
capacity limit is over. remained paper in the stacker
Usage: When a job is canceled or the limit is forcibly.
over, a user can select whether to exit papers
forcibly or to remove papers.
When this setting is configured to "1", the
message to select whether to exit papers
forcibly or remove papers is displayed.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
33 0 TC black and white large size count method • 0: 1 count 0 1 0
Configure the count number to the double count • 1: 2 count
size paper which is configured with DIPSW33-2
and DIPSW33-3 in black and white printing.
1 TC color large size count method 0 1 0
Configure the count number to the double count
size paper which is configured with DIPSW33-2
and DIPSW33-3 in color printing.
2 TC double count size setting • 330 mm or more in the sub 1 0 1
3 Configure the threshold of the double count size scan direction: 33-3=0, 33-2=0 0 1 0
in the sub scan direction. • 355 mm or more in the sub
Paper whose length in the sub scan direction is scan direction (except for the
more than the specified length is counted as the U.S): 33-3=0, 33-2=1
double count size with the combination of • 420 mm or more in the sub
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3. scan direction (the U.S):
Note 33-3=1, 33-2=0
- In the case of the custom size paper, it is • All size is counted as a small
possibly counted as 2 even when the paper size: 33-3=1, 33-2=1
length is shorter than this configuration
value.
This case occurs when this configuration
value is included in the threshold
configuration range of DIPSW8-7.
· Reflected to the large size of the counter in
PageScope Web Connection and "Copy
count of each paper size" during list print.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 Billing counter display • 0: Display the billing count 0 0 0
Change the billing count display in “Billing Total • 1: Do not display the billing
Counter” setting. count
6 Counter display when the bill counter setting is • 0: Display items other than the 0 0 0
adjusted billing total counter
When you select "1" on this setting, the counter • 1: Display the billing total
items other than "Billing Total Counter" are not counter only
shown on the "Utility" screen.
Note
· This setting is valid when the DIPSW33-7 is
adjusted to "1".
7 Charge count setting • 0:Disabled 0 0 0
When you configure this setting to 1, "Total • 1: Enabled (displays "Billing
Counter" in the utility mode is changed to "Billing Total Counter")
Total Counter."
34 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
35 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray 1 (PF) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray 2 (PF) • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: Tray 3 (PF) 0 0 0
I-95
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Faulty part isolation: High voltage power supply 0 0 0
of RU-516
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
36 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 Enable or disable the fusing swing control • 0: No control 1 1 1
· Function: Enable or disable the swing • 1: Control
operation of the fusing unit.
When you feed the large size paper after the
small size paper, gloss lines which the small
size paper edge makes could occur in the paper
edges. "1" (Control) is selected in the default to
prevent this trouble.
· Usage: For users who feed only 1 size paper,
when sickly gloss lines are shown in the paper
edges, select "0" (No control) in this setting.
2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
3 • 1: - 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 Switch of the timing for enabling the start • 0: Enable when the operation 0 0 0
direction of the FS-532 FS button stops by the FS button only
• 1: Enable at all times
6 Control to enable or disable the HDD extended • 0: Standard configuration 0 0 0
configuration • 1: Extended configuration
· Function: Select the configuration information
of the HDD.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when 5
HDDs are in a configuration. In other cases,
7 Format HDD mode • 0: Standard format mode 0 0 0
· Function: Specify the format HDD mode • 1: Forced format mode
- Standard format mode: Backup and format the
authentication information which is saved to the
HDD. An error occurs when the backup of the
information fails.
- Forced format mode: Delete and format the
authentication information which is saved to the
HDD.
· Usage: Select "0" in this setting when you want
to leave the authentication information during
the format HDD. When "0" is selected and an
error occurs, or when you want to delete the
authentication information, select "1" in this
setting.
37 0 ORU-M password authentication setting • 0: password authentication 1 1 1
Activate the password authentication in entering invalid
the ORU-M mode. • 1: password authentication
valid
1 ORU-M print mode display setting • 0: Display 0 0 0
Configure whether to display the sample output • 1: Not display
button on the ORU-M mode.
2 ORU-M replace reason input setting • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Configure whether to input the reason when you • 1:Disabled
replace the parts in the ORU-M mode.
I-96
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 ORU-M printer gamma offset adjustment priority • 0: Scanner automatic 0 0 0
setting adjustment priority
Perform the printer gamma offset adjustment • 1: RU automatic adjustment
after completion of the replacement of the priority
developing unit or developer in the ORU-M
mode. This setting configure the printer gamma
offset automatic adjustment method with both
RU and the scanner connected.
Note
· The priority of the adjustments varies
depending on whether the scanner and RU
are connected.
· When the RU is connected while the
scanner is not, RU automatic adjustment is
performed.
· When RU is not connected but the scanner
is connected, the scanner automatic
adjustment is performed.
· When both RU and scanner is not
connected, manual adjustment is selected.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 Output the hold job for specified number • 0: OFF 0 0 0
This setting displays the pop-up screen to input • 1: ON
the number of copies when the machine outputs
the hold job. With this setting, the number of
copies to output can be changed.
6 Increasing the limit number of SD-510 saddle • 0: Not increase (The limit 0 0 0
stitching number is 5.)
· Function: Increase the limit number of the • 1: Increase (The limit number is
SD-510 saddle stitching from 5 to 16 under the 16 or 12.)
following conditions.
-Paper weight: 92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
-Paper size in the sub scan direction: 279.4 mm
or more
· Usage: When you want to increase the limit
number on the preceding conditions, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· The saddle stitching that is available when
this setting is "1" is not guaranteed.
· When the paper weight of the cover is 217
g/m2 to 300 g/m2, the limit number is 12.
(The cover page whose paper weight is 217
g/m2 or more is counted as 5 pages for 1
page.)
7 1 to N and face up print at 2-sided printing • 0: 1 to N and Face down 0 0 0
· Function: When you use IC-602, this DIPSW • 1: 1 to N and Face up
changes the paper exit setting when the Plug-in
driver setting is configured as follows.
- Select [2-Sided].
- Select [Face Up].
- Do not select [N to 1].
When this setting is configured to "0", the
machine prints as 1 to N and face down which
differs from the setting. When this setting is
configured to "1", the machine prints as 1 to N
and face up as configured in the setting.
· Usage: When you want to print as 1 to N and
face up during 2-sided printing, configure this
setting to "1".
38 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray 7 (PF) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray 8 (PF) • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-97
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Prohibition release of humidifier setting • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
· Function: Normally, humidifier setting cannot • 1: No prohibition
be used for color paper and coated paper under
135 g/m2. This DIPSW releases the prohibition.
· Usage: When you want to use the humidifier
setting for color paper and coated paper under
135 g/m2, change this setting to "1".
Note
· When you activate the humidifier setting for
color paper and coated paper under 135 g/
m2, moisture possibly remains on the paper
surface. In that case, wrapping jam to the
conveyance roller possibly occurs.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Process stop during the option standby • 0: Process stop operation 0 0 0
· Function: Stop the main body operation when • 1: No process stop operation
the option operation takes time.
· Usage: To improve the productivity a little,
Note
· If you select "1" in this setting, the
durability of the materials such as the drum
or the developer gets worse.
39 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
1 Main body disposal mode • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
SW that allows you to delete all HDD data and • 1: Allow
the part of the data on the NVRAM board
(NVRAM) and SSD when you dispose the
machine.
Note
· Setting this mode to "1" and executing the
following step disable restoring the NVRAM
board (NVRAM) and reusing the machine.
Therefore, do not execute the steps except
when you throw away the machine.
"Utility" - "03 Administrator Setting" - "10
Security Setting" - "02 HDD Management
Setting" - "03 Delete All Data Setting" -
"Execute Deletion" on "Mode 1" to "Mode 8"
· Meet the following conditions to enable
"Delete All Data Setting".
· "1" is selected on DIPSW40-1.
· The security enhance mode is deactivated.
· The condition of the HDD is Ready.
· After you change the setting of DIPSW40-7,
reboot the power.
2 Forced ISW mode • 0: The normal ISW mode 0 0 0
· Function (when this setting is "1"): The • 1: The ISW mode which
operation starts in the scanner and the DF ISW enables the rewriting of the
mode when you activate the machine. scanner and the DF programs
· Usage: Use when an error occurs on the
normal scanner and DF ISW, and you cannot
rewrite the firmware.
3 Alert send setting without key counter • 0: Send 0 0 0
This setting does not allow alert to be sent to the • 1: Send the alert only when the
client machine even when the vendor machine is printer setting is adjusted
not Ready.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
I-98
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 0 0 0
7 IC-602 controller connection • 0: Not connected 0 0 0
· Function: Switch the connections of the KM • 1: Connected
controllers and the outsourced controllers.
connect the IC-308 or IC-310 to the C1100 or
C1085. Select "1" on this setting when you
connect the IC-602.
41 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
42 0 Fusing nip measure mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Stops the paper conveyance when • 1: Fusing nip measure mode
the paper reaches the fusing nip. After a
specified period of time, the paper conveyance
starts again.
· Usage: This mode is used in the test pattern
output mode. If this setting is configured to "1",
the nip width and the nip abutting state can be
confirmed from the nip mark on the image
Note
· Be sure to use this function in the following
conditions.
- Test pattern: number 1
- Paper size: A4 or 81/2 x 11
- Weight: 81 g/m2 to 135 g/m2
- Line speed: No speed down
- Print quantity: 1 sheet
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
2 Part patch control • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Change this setting to 1 when the memory • 1: Enabled
image (vertical band of the previous print)
occurs on the full half-tone image after you print
the same pattern such as vertical band.
When you configure it to 1, writing patch on the
area other than vertical band image supplies
toner over the photo conductor. It makes the
attrition of the photo conductor and the blade
even to prevent the memory image.
Note
· If this setting is set to "1", the toner
consumption increases.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-99
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Halftone Text Enhancement level setting • 0: Display in 5 levels 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches the level of • 1: Display in 3 levels
the Halftone Text Enhancement in [User Setting]
- [Printer Setting] - [Outline Process] - [Halftone
Text Enhancement]. All the enhancement levels
are available with the display in 5 levels.
<Level of the Halftone Text Enhancement (The
larger the value becomes, the stronger the
Halftone Text Enhancement becomes.)>
- [Weak+]=1 (DIPSW42-4=0), 3 (DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Normal]=2 (DIPSW42-4=0), 4 (DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Strong+]=3 (DIPSW42-4=0), 5
(DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Strong(+1)]=4 (DIPSW42-4=0), not displayed
(DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Strong(+2)]=5 (DIPSW42-4=0), not displayed
(DIPSW42-4=1)
· Usage: When this setting is configured to "1"
on Ver.1.8, the display in 3 levels is also applied
after the firmware version is upgraded. However,
our recommendation is to configure to "0".
Note
· When you strengthen the level of the
Halftone Text Enhancement, minuscule
outline letters possibly are not printed
clearly.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Draw method of the numbering text section • 0: Overlay method 0 0 0
· Function: Switch the draw method of the • 1: Overwrite method
overlay text section.
The overlay method of "0" is the existing model
type. The original information remains on the
background.
For the overwrite method of "0", the original
information does not remain on the background
(only the stamp color remains).
· Usage: To prevent the stamp peeling when
you add the overlay stamp (numbering) for the
original which has the dark-colored background,
use this function.
7 Toner band control for the transfer belt cleaning • 0: Normal 0 0 0
blade • 1: For low coverage
· Function: Creates the toner band to prevent
the damage of the intermediate transfer cleaning
blade. Also, adjusts the creation frequency of
the toner band.
· Usage: If the low coverage images are printed
continuously, the durability of the intermediate
transfer cleaning blade is possibly degraded and
the cleaning malfunction occurs. In this case,
change this configuration to "1".
Note
· If this setting is set to "1", the productivity
decreases and the toner consumption
increases.
43 0 Toner band control for the development • Toner save top priority: 43-1=0, 0 0 0
1 stabilization (also refer to DIPSW43-2) 43-0=0 1 1 1
· Function: When the low coverage image is • Toner save priority: 43-1=0,
printed, the toner band is created for the 43-0=1
developer stabilization. This function changes • Development stability priority:
the condition of the toner band creation. 43-1=1, 43-0=0
· Usage: To reduce the toner consumption, • -: 43-1=1, 43-0=1
change DIPSW43-2 first. When it is not enough,
change this setting.
Note
· When you change this setting, the image
background and the toner scattering
possibly occurs when you print the low
coverage image.
I-100
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Toner consumption reduction mode for the toner • 0: Toner consumption reduction 1 1 1
band control for the development stabilization mode (Toner save priority)
(Refer to DIPSW43-0, DIPSW43-1 also) • 1: Normal mode (Development
· Function: This DIPSW switches active or stability priority)
inactive of the toner consumption reduction
mode. This DIPSW changes the condition of the
toner band creation.
· Usage: To reduce the toner consumption,
Note
· When you change this setting, the image
background and the toner scattering
possibly occurs when you print the low
coverage image.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
44 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Default setting at the registration unit • ±0 (When the number of the 0 0 0
5 replacement label is 0): 44-6=0, 44-5=0, 0 0 0
· Function: When you install a new registration 44-4=0
6 unit, you need to change the installation position • -5 (When the number of the 0 0 0
correction value of the paper skew sensor. This label is -1 to -5): 44-6=0,
DIPSW configures the correction value. 44-5=0, 44-4=1
· Usage: A label is pasted on a new registration • -10 (When the number of the
unit. Change this configuration according to the label is -6 to -10): 44-6=0,
number that is marked on the label. 44-5=1, 44-4=0
Note • -15 (When the number of the
· When you install a new registration unit, label is -11 to -15): 44-6=0,
configure DIPSW10-2 to "1". 44-5=1, 44-4=1
· For the pasting position of the label, refer to • +5 (When the number of the
"F.5.11.2 Replacing the registration roller and label is +1 to +5): 44-6=1,
the torque limiter". 44-5=0, 44-4=0
• +10 (When the number of the
label is +6 to +10): 44-6=1,
44-5=0, 44-4=1
label is +11 to +15): 44-6=1,
44-5=1, 44-4=0
label is +16 to +20): 44-6=1,
44-5=1, 44-4=1
7 Display the "Highest Speed" button • 0: Not display 1 1 1
· Function: This DIPSW switches whether to • 1: Display
display the "Highest Speed" button in the
"Utility"-"02 User Setting"-"03 Common
Setting"-"Fusing Stability" or not.
· Usage: In order to hide the "Highest Speed"
button for the users who prefer the quality to the
speed, change this setting to "0".
45 0 Faulty part isolation: Scanner • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
I-101
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Prohibit timer of the print job reception setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
after the gamma automatic adjustment • 1: Enabled
Function: This setting prohibits the reception of
the print job from IC to the engine during
"Gamma Automatic Adjustment".
Usage: On the daily color proof, when the print
job is received during "Gamma Automatic
Adjustment", the job is output after the gamma
automatic adjustment. When you perform the
paper density adjustment after the "Gamma
Automatic Adjustment" and you do not want to
output the print job, configure this setting to "1".
Note
· The time of the printer prohibit timer can be
configured on "UTILITY" - "Copy Setting" -
"Printer Prohibit Timer".
· This function is available only when the
configuration includes the scanner.
4 Output all to USB memory on the system • 0: Not display 0 0 0
information screen • 1: Display
Function: Displays the "Output All to USB"
button on "System Information" screen.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
want to output the list print information
collectively during the print output and check the
setting information of the engine.
5 Staple pitch adjustment value setting on SRA3 • 0: Adjustment range: -20 to +20 0 0 0
Function: Changes the staple pitch adjustment • 1: Adjustment range: -49 to +20
range on SRA3 when the saddle stitching option
(SD-506) is attached.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
want to narrow down the staple pitch on the
saddle stitching on SRA3.
Note
staple pitch adjustment is out of the
specification.
display on the touch panel is not changed
from "Adj. Range: -20 to +20 1step = 1.0mm".
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 Business card scan setting • 0: Smallest size "100mm x 0 0 0
Function: Change the smallest size that can be 148mm"
scanned. • 1: Smallest size "55mm x
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you 55mm"
want to scan the business card size.
Note
When you change this setting to "1", the item
that is displayed on "UTILITY" -
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" -
"Size Setting" - "Original Glass Small Size" is
not changed.
46 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Sample print setting • 0: 1 sheet 0 0 0
· Function: Switch whether to print 1 sheet, or • 1: 1 set
to print 1 set for sample print.
· Usage: When the dirt occurs during mass
printing but not every time, switches to sample
print by sets, and confirms dirt on sample print.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
47 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
I-102
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
48 0 Enabling the Paper Setting to be changed any • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
time • 1: Enabled
· Function: Normally, while the machine is
printing, you cannot change the Paper Setting of
the trays which are used for job. This DIPSW
abolishes the restriction. When this setting is "1",
you can change the Paper Setting any time.
Note
· If you change the settings other than the
Both Sides Adjustment, malfunctions such
as a paper mismatch and a jam possibly
occur. Be careful of the content and timing of
the setting change.
1 Release the combination restriction of "Frame/ • 0: Do not release the restriction 0 0 0
Fold eraser" and "2 repeat" • 1: Release the restriction
Release the combination restriction of "Frame/
Fold eraser" and "2 repeat" of "Application
Setting" in copy function.
Note
· Enable only for copy function
· 4 repeat is not included
2 Release the combination restriction of "high 0 0 0
accuracy, rimless copy" and "binding margin"
When you select the booklet layout (high
accuracy, rimless copy) mode with the job from
IC, "Binding margin" cannot be used with the job
ticket edit of the main body.Configure to "1" to
release this restriction.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Setting of the display of the toner amount and • 0: OFF 0 0 0
the replacement count of the toner bottle • 1: ON
· Function : Display "Toner Info." on the
machine screen to display the toner amount of
each color and the replacement count of the
toner bottle.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when the user
wants to check the remaining toner amount and
the replacement count of the toner bottle. Count
the number of times of the toner bottle
replacement and correct the count information
on CSRC and manage the stock of the toner
bottle.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Morning fusing speed down mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: In the morning, in order to stabilize • 1: Morning fusing speed down
paper posture, air volume of the fusing paper mode
separation fan is increased. In order to ensure
the fusibility, decreases the process speed from
460 mm/s to 400 mm/s and increases the fusing
temperature.
· Usage: If the noise that is caused by the paper
trailing edge occurs on the thick paper during
the morning printing, change this setting to "1".
Stabilizes the position of the paper and prevents
noise that is caused by the paper trailing edge.
Note
· If you change this setting to "1", the
productivity reduces.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
49 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
I-103
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
50 0 Details counter list switch (also refer to • Both the details counter and the 0 0 0
1 DIPSW15-2) icon are displayed: 50-1=0, 0 0 0
· Function: When DIPSW15-2 is "0", switches 50-0=0
whether to display the details counter or the icon • The details counter is displayed
respectively. only: 50-1=0, 50-0=1
· Usage: When either the details counter or the • The icon is displayed only:
icon must be hidden, change this setting. 50-1=1, 50-0=0
Note • -: 50-1=1, 50-0=1
· When DIPSW15-2 is "1", both the details
counter and the icon are not displayed.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 Scanner character blur improvement filter setting • 0: Improve character blur. 0 0 0
Function: Switch to the filter which is • 1: Improve the dotted moire
appropriate to the image quality of the scanned image quality.
document.
Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when
character blur does not occur but when dotted
moire occurs.
Note
When you change the setting to "1", the
dotted moire is reduced. However, the
resolution of the character becomes low.
(Trade-off)
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 Spine setting of Perfect Bind 2-in-1 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Normally, when you select [Cover • 1: Enabled
Print 2 in 1] during perfect bind printing, the
spine becomes blank. When this setting is "1",
the machine outputs the image of the front cover
and the back cover without making a gap.
Therefore, the spine does not become blank.
· Usage: In order not to make the spine blank
when you print in [Cover Print 2 in 1], configure
this setting to "1".
Note
· When you configure this setting to "1", be
sure to change the software switch 98 of the
controller to [ON].
([Controller Administrator Setting Menu] -
[System Setting] - [Software Switch Setting])
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 Color registration correction control execution • 0: Normal threshold (put priority 0 0 0
judgment temperature on the prevention of the color
· Function: When the temperature change of registration error)
the process temperature sensor (TEM/HUM2) • 1: Increase the threshold (put
becomes larger than the prescribed priority on the productivity)
temperature, the color registration correction
control is performed. This setting changes the
threshold value of the temperature change.
· Usage: When you select "1" on this setting, the
threshold value of the temperature change
increases. Therefore, the frequency of the
correction control decreases. If the productivity
has higher priority, select "1" on this setting.
(Remark: The frequency of the correction control
differs depending on the environment or modes.
When you select "1" on this setting, the
correction control decreases for 1 time per hour
on the low temperature and low humidity
condition. 1 correction control is completed
within a minute.)
Note
color registration error is possibly worsened.
51 0 Extending the suction time of PF-707 and • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
PF-708 paper feeding (Top of the 1st tandem) • 1: Enabled (extend)
I-104
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
· Function: Extends the suction time of the
paper feed suction section to an extent that does
not effect the productivity and stabilizes the
paper movement at the suction section.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when a no-
feed jam occurs with a paper (such as the small-
size thick paper) for which suction is not stable.
1 Extending the suction time of PF-707 and 0 0 0
PF-708 paper feeding (Middle of the 1st tandem)
2 Extending the suction time of PF-707 and 0 0 0
PF-708 paper feeding (Low of the 1st tandem)
3 Extending the suction time of PF-707 paper 0 0 0
feeding (Top of the 2nd tandem)
feeding (Middle of the 2nd tandem)
feeding (Low of the 2nd tandem)
feeding (Top of the 3rd tandem)
feeding (Middle of the 3rd tandem)
I-105
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
52 0 Extending the suction time of PF-707 paper 0 0 0
feeding (Low of the 3rd tandem)
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
53 0 FD lines prevention configuration • Standard: DIPSW53-1=0, 0 0 0
1 · Function: To apply the lubrication effectively DIPSW53-0=0 0 0 0
and prevent FD lines, switch the lubrication • Line reduce 1: DIPSW53-1=0,
applied amount depending on the coverage DIPSW53-0=1
status. • Line reduce 2: DIPSW53-1=1,
· Usage: When an image with a vertical band DIPSW53-0=0
prints continuously, lubrication application • Line reduce 3: DIPSW53-1=1,
becomes uneven on the photo conductor, and DIPSW53-0=1
FD line possibly occurs.
Therefore, when you select DIPSW according to
the coverage condition, applies lubrication
effectively and prevents FD lines.
- Normal: No increasement in rotation speed of
the lubrication application brush.
- Line reduce 1: When continuous vertical band
image is judged automatically, the lubrication
application brush rotates in a 15 % increase.
When vertical band image continues to lack, the
rotation speed does not increase.
- Line reduce 2: When you print many images
which contain vertical bands, select this mode
and configure the lubrication application brush
rotation speed in across-the-board 15 %
increase. (When you print images which contain
a few vertical bands, normal is recommended.)
- Line reduce 3: When you print higher coverage
images (50% or more is recommended), select
this mode and configure the lubrication
application brush rotation speed in across-the-
board 30% increase.
Note
· When DIPSW other than Standard (Default)
is used for many times, the life of the drum
unit shortens.
· When you print more than 5,000 images
with a vertical band continuously,
configuration other than normal is
recommended.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
I-106
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Activation conditions of the middle correction • 0: Activates the middle 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the activation conditions of correction under the control of
the middle correction. the maximum density
· Usage: If the setting is "1", the activation times monitoring between images.
of the middle correction decrease. If the • 1: Activates the middle
productivity has higher priority, change this correction under the control of
setting to "1". the dot diameter correction
Note between images.
· If you change this setting to "1", it is
possible that the maximum density stability
decreases.
· The maximum density stability and the
activation times of the middle correction
differ depending on the machine usage
condition.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
54 0 SD-513 non-staple detection function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: When the non-staple is detected for • 1:Disabled
the SD-513 saddle stitching, displays a jam code
and stops the job.
· Usage: When you do not want to stop the job
by non-staple detection, change this setting to
"1".
1 Switch of SD-513 fore-edge trim scrap box • 0: Default value (control 0 0 0
capacity according to the sheet number
∙ Function: Switches the allowance number of of booklet and the amount of
trimming times that changes the machine status trimming)
to the trimmer restriction from the fore-edge • 1: Extend (twice as the default
trimmer scraps box full. value)
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to extend the
period in which the "Fore-edge trimmer scraps
box full" display turns to the trimmer restriction
(time for the trimmer scraps disposal).
Note
∙ Booklets are possibly exited with fore-edge
trimmer scraps. Press marks of trimmer
scraps are possibly left on booklets. Trimmer
scraps are possibly caught in the trimmer
shutter and they possibly causes an error
code.
2 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 entrance section • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
reversal stacker
4 Switch of the number of overlapped coated • 0: Always 1 sheet 0 0 0
paper at the SD-513 entrance conveyance • 1: Control according to weight
section (1 to 3 sheets)
• Function: Switches the number of overlapped
coated paper at the entrance conveyance
section when the saddle stitching or multi half
that uses coated paper is conducted.
• Usage: Select "1" when you want to increase
the productivity of the saddle stitching or multi
half that uses coated paper.
Note
• Overlapped paper fails to fall to the reverse
exit section due to electrostatic suction, and
a jam possibly occurs.
5 Switch of TU-503 slit cutter rotation speed • 0: Normal Rotation 0 0 0
∙ Function: Switches the rotation speed of the • 1: High speed rotation
slitter motor (M108).
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to improve
the slit straightness.
Note
∙ The life of the slit cutter and the slit motor
(M108) is possibly shortened.
6 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 sub tray exit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
Note • 1: Unusable
· This setting is valid when the DIPSW7-2 is
"1".
7 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 non-staple 0 0 0
detection
I-107
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
55 0 SD-513 input unit • 0: Fixed to mm 0 0 0
· Function: Configures the unit of each input • 1: Interlocked with the unit
value that is related to SD-513. setting
· Usage: To change the unit to inch, configure
this setting to "1". Then, select [Inch(Decimal
Point)] in [Utility] - [User Setting] - [System
Setting] - [Unit Setting].
Note
·When you select " Inch(Fraction)", operates
in " Inch(Decimal Point)".
1 G7 calibration switching • 0: Exact Color is used 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the calibration mode when • 1: G7 calibration is used
the IC-602 is used.
· Usage: To use the G7 calibration, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· The following data has no reciprocal usage
between G7 calibration and Exact Color.
- ICC profile (Printer profile and device link
profile)
- Spot color table
· After you switch the mode, deletion of the
old data is recommended.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 Stamp outside print of printer job • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: When a printer job is output, prints a • 1: Enabled
stamp on the outside when the stamp is
configured under the following conditions.
- Stamp type: Page number
- Print position: Other than the center
- Output setting: Booklet, Adhesive binding,
perfect bind, ring bind
4 Paper size minimum input unit • 0: 0.1 mm/0.005 inch (when 0 0 0
· Function: Changes the minimum input unit for you use the IC-602)
the paper size. • 1: 1 mm/0.025 inch (when you
· Usage: The minimum input unit of the paper use the Fiery controller)
size differs between the Fiery controller and the
main body. Therefore, the paper size that you
registered for the paper profile is possibly
changed when you deactivate and activate the
power switch.
In order to prevent that problem, change this
setting to "1" when you use the Fiery controller.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Proof copy function setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Configure the output operation on • 1: Enabled
the proof copy.
· Usage: When you press the Proof copy button
on the COPY screen, "Hold + Print" is applied
automatically. Then the screen moves to the
hold job list screen.
After one set is output and the job is hold, Job
Ticket Edit screen opens automatically.
After the operator checks the output, the
operator edits the ticket, outputs the sample
again, or saves and outputs as necessary.
56 0 Both sides adjustment default display tab switch • [Scan Meas.] ([Gap] when 0 0 0
1 · Function: This DIPSW switches the tab that is PF-708 is not installed): 56-0=0, 0 0 0
displayed as default in the Both Sides 56-1=0
Adjustment screen. • [Gap]: 56-0=0, 56-1=1
· Usage: Use to change the tab that is displayed • [Front]: 56-0=1, 56-1=0
as default. • [Front]: 56-0=1, 56-1=1
I-108
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Shows Color Density Control OFF Setting (each • 0: [OFF] does not appear. 0 0 0
tray) • 1: [OFF] appears.
· Function: Shows [OFF] in "Each Paper Type
Color Adj. Data" from [Paper Setting] - [Color
Density].
· Usage: When you want to manage the ON and
OFF of Color Density (periodical control) by
each tray, configure to "1". [OFF] is displayed in
"Each Paper Type Color Adj. Data" of [Paper
Setting]. When a job is output from the tray that
[OFF] is selected, Color Density (periodical
control) is not performed during the output.
Note
· If you reset the Paper Setting of the tray
when "1" is configured, Color Density
Control of each tray becomes [OFF].
3 Tone Curve Adjustment screen switch • 0: Depends on how to enter the 0 0 0
· Function: There are 2 adjustment screens (for adjustment screen
touch and for mouse) for the tone curve • 1: Always the adjustment
adjustment of the job ticket edit. This DIPSW screen for a mouse
configures how to display the adjustment
screen.
<When this setting is "0">
When you click [Tone Curve Adj.] with a mouse,
an adjustment screen for the mouse appears.
When you touch [Tone Curve Adj.], an
adjustment screen for touching appears.
<When this setting is "1">
When a mouse is connected, the adjustment
screen for the mouse always appears regardless
of how to enter the adjustment screen.
· Usage: When you always want to display the
adjustment screen for a mouse, change this
setting to "1".
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Display of the remaining staple amount • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the staple • 1: ON
icon on the MACHINE screen and enables you
to check the remaining amount. This DIPSW
displays the [Amount Info.] button on the
MACHINE screen.
· Usage: Use this DIPSW when you check the
remaining staple amount of the FS-532, the
SD-506, and the SD-513.
Note
*For the details of the parts, refer to "I.4.5.7
Remaining staple amount display setting".
57 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 1 1 1
3 0 0 0
4 Paper setting switch after the Maximum Density • 0: Keep the paper setting after 0 0 0
Auto Adjustment (RU) the adjustment.
· Function: When you enter the printing mode • 1: Return to the paper setting
from [Utility Menu] - [03 Administrator Setting] - before the adjustment.
[01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] -
[06 Process Adjustment] - [03 Max. Density Auto
Adj. (RU)], the paper setting of the tray switches
automatically to the setting of the Maximum
Density registration. Configure whether you
keep the paper setting which is switched
automatically as the paper setting of the tray,
even after the Maximum Density Auto
Adjustment (RU) completes.
· Usage: When you want to limit the keeping of
the paper setting which is switched automatically
to only during the Maximum Density Auto
Adjustment, configure this setting to "1".
I-109
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Maintenance counter counting condition • 0: Threshold 337.9 mm 1 1 1
· Function: Change the counting condition of the • - To 337.9 mm: 1 count
maintenance counter. • - 338 to 487.7 mm: 2 counts
Note • 1: Threshold 388 mm
· Do not change this setting on the field. • - To 388 mm: 1 count
• - 388.1 to 487.7 mm: 2 counts
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
58 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 Displays the shortcut button of color density • 0: Do not display the shortcut 0 0 0
control (periodical adjustment) ON/OFF setting button
· Function: Displays a shortcut button of • 1: Display the shortcut button
[Adjustment] - [Color Density Control] - [Basic
Setting] - [Periodical Adj. Execution] in the
"MACHINE" screen.
· Usage: When you want to activate and
deactivate the periodic adjustment of the color
density control frequently, change this setting to
"1".
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
59 0 Timing threshold of the intermediate transfer belt • 600m: DIPSW59-1=0, 0 0 0
1 reverse control DIPSW59-0=0 0 0 0
· Function: Rotates the intermediate transfer • 270m: DIPSW59-1=0,
belt in the reverse direction according to the DIPSW59-0=1
drive distance timing of the intermediate transfer • 135m: DIPSW59-1=1,
belt which is configured with DIPSW. DIPSW59-0=0
· Usage: Increases the frequency of the • 67.5m: DIPSW59-1=1,
intermediate transfer belt reverse rotation when DIPSW59-0=1
a go-through occurs at the intermediate transfer
belt, and reduces the transfer belt cleaning
blade go-through.
Note
· When you configure DIPSW59-1=1,
DIPSW59-0=1, the productivity is slightly
lowered.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Paper weight unit change setting • 0: lb Cover 0 0 0
· Function: On "Paper Setting" - "Weight" - • 1: A Book-kg
"Change Unit", change "lb Cover" to "A Book-
kg".
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when users
use the paper whose weight unit is "A Book-kg".
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
60 0 Switch of SD-513 fore-edge trimmer width • 0: Minimum 5 mm 0 0 0
∙ Function: Switches the minimum value of the • 1: Minimum 2 mm
fore-edge trimmer width.
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to configure
5 mm or less as the fore-edge trimmer width.
Note
∙ Trimmer scraps are possibly attached on
booklets due to electrostatic.
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-110
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Switch the SD-513 loading limit detection of the • 0: Continuously output 8 sets 0 0 0
tri-fold tray (only 5 sheets set) • 1: Same with 1- to 4-sheet set
∙ Function: Switches how to detect the loading (Some sheets are exited after
limit of the tri-fold tray (only 5 sheets set). the paper full sensor is
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to output 9 or activated.)
more sets of the tri-fold tray in succession.
Note
∙ Loading 9 sets of the tri-fold tray (5 sheets
set) is not guaranteed. The tri-fold set
possibly falls from the exit tray.
3 Switch of the maximum number of SD-513 • 0: 50 sheets , 49 sheets + cover 0 0 0
saddle stitching sheets (55 g/m2 to 256 g/m2), 44
• Function: Switches the maximum number of sheets + cover (257 g/m2 to
saddle stitching sheets (other than color paper,
300 g/m2)
coated paper) whose weight is 62 g/m2 to 91 g/
• 1: 40 sheets, 39 sheets + cover
m2 and 182 mm or more in the FD direction.
• Usage: Select "1" when staple buckling occurs (55 g/m2 to 256 g/m2), 40
at saddle stitching of paper (other than color sheets + cover (257 g/m2 to
paper, coated paper) whose weight is 62 g/m2 300 g/m2)
to 91 g/m2 and 182 mm or more in the FD
direction.
Note
∙ Before you change this setting, conduct the
staple adjustment (Mechanical adjustment).
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX

(1) Usage
Register the telephone number and the fax number of a service center that appears in the help information or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Service Center TEL/FAX].
3. "Service Center TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either [Service Center TEL (16)] or [Service Center FAX (16)] you want to configure.
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number you register through the numeric buttons.
Note
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen (-) to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register the data.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the updating.
4.5.4 Serial Number Setting

(1) Usage
Configure and display the serial number of the main body and options.
Note
• The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Serial Number Setting].
3. "Serial Number Setting screen"
Select the option, then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a serial number using the alphanumeric buttons.
4. Press [OK] to register the data.
4.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting

(1) Usage
Adjust the starting date of the total counter that is shown on the utility mode and the type of business of the client that CSRC notifies.
I-111
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Setup Date/Business Setting].
3. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen "
Select the type of the business. Not to select the type of the business, select [Unknown].
4. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen "
Enter an installation date with the numeric buttons. Press [Set] to highlight the Year, Month, and Date you want to enter.
5. Press [OK] to update the data.
4.5.6 Setting of the toner amount and the replacement count of the toner bottle
(1) Function
• Displays "Toner Info." button on the Machine Screen.
• When the toner amount is 25% or less, the toner display becomes yellow and blinks.
[2] [1]
[1] Toner Info. [2] Blinking yellow
(2) Usage
• When you select "1" on DipSW48-4, the replacement count of the toner bottle, the toner amount are displayed on the toner info screen.
Users can check the information.
When the toner amount is 25% or less, the toner display becomes yellow and blinks.
• Counter of Each Copy Mode (2) manages the number of times of the toner bottle replacement. You can correct the count information on
CSRC and manage the stock of the toner bottle. (Refer to I.4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2))
Note
• The replacement count of the toner bottle is counted when the main body detects the toner near empty or that the toner is
removed and placed. The counter does not count when you press [Complete Replacement] button.
• Counter of Each Copy Mode (2) manages the replacement count of the toner bottle regardless of the setting of DipSW48-4.
• The toner amount displays 6 steps: 0%, 1%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%.
The toner amount is reset when the main body detects that the toner is placed after the toner is removed.
• The drive time of the toner supply motor calculates the toner amount display of 25% to 100 %.
1 % is displayed when the near empty is detected. 0 % is displayed when no toner is detected.
• When you replace the toner that is not empty, press the [Complete Replacement] button and reset the toner amount.
• When you use IC-602, the toner amount is notified to the controller. For the details, refer to the user's guide.
I-112
[1] [2] [3]

[1] Replacement count of the toner [2] Toner amount
[3] Complete Replacement -
4.5.7 Remaining staple amount display setting

(1) Outline
• When the DIPSW56-7 "Display of the remaining staple amount" is "1", the following information appears in the MACHINE screen.
• Remaining amount indicator of the staple
• [Amount Info.] button
(When you press the [Amount Info.] button, the Amount Information screen appears.)
• User can check the remaining staple amount with the remaining amount indicator and the Amount Information screen.
• Target finisher: FS-532, SD-506, SD-513
Note
• When you attach the new staple cartridge, be sure to reset the remaining amount count. (Refer to I.4.5.7.(3) Operation of staple
cartridge replacement)
I-113
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Remaining amount indicator [2] [Amount Info.] button

[3] Amount Information screen -
(2) Remaining amount detection of the staple

• The machine counts the used staple amount and calculates the remaining staple amount.
("Remaining staple amount" = "number of staples of full staple cartridge" - "used staple amount")
• The remaining staple amount is displayed in 4 steps in the remaining amount indicator and the Amount Information screen.
• When several finishers are connected:
• Remaining amount indicator: The information of the finisher which has a smaller remaining amount is displayed.
• Amount Information screen: The information of all the connected finishers is displayed.
Staple display
Amount
Remaining staple Remainin Informatio
amount Lamp g amount Letter n screen
indicator
2501 to 5000 None 3 steps White 3
(white)
501 to 2500 None 2 steps White 2
(white)
500 or less None 1 step Red 1
(red)
0 Red None Red 0
I-114
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
[2]
[1] Staple display [2] Amount Information screen
[3] Lamp [4] Remaining amount indicator
[5] Letter -
(3) Operation of staple cartridge replacement

Note
• When you attach the new staple cartridge, be sure to reset the remaining amount count. When you do not reset the remaining
amount count, the remaining amount is not correctly displayed.
• When you attach the partly used staple cartridge, the remaining amount is not correctly displayed.
1. Attach the new staple cartridge.
2. "MACHINE screen"
Touch [Amount Info.] and display the Amount Information screen.
Note
• If you replace the staple cartridge when the remaining staple amount is empty, the Amount Information screen appears
automatically.
• If you replace the staple cartridge when the power source is deactivated, the Amount Information screen does not
automatically appear.
3. "Amount Information screen"

Touch [Complete Replacement] and display the confirmation screen.
4. "Confirmation screen"
Press [OK]. The remaining amount count is reset.
I-115
4.5.8 New model of the scatter duct assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt
(1) Outline
• The process unit [1] is equipped with the scatter duct assy/Y [2], the scatter duct assy/M, the scatter duct assy/C, and the scatter duct
assy/K [3].
The main body is equipped with the dust-proof filter/Rt [4] on the right side.
• The new models that improve the toner suction performance are introduced for the scatter duct assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt.
• When the user prints frequently the high coverage image, the user must change the life of the dust-proof filter/Rt with DIPSW5-3 and
DIPSW5-6.
• Reference: Coverage: 20%, number of prints (A3): 100,000 prints per month
• When the high coverage image is printed continuously, the toner scattering amount increases and the toner collection amount of the
dust-proof filter/Rt exceeds the acceptable amount. To prevent the toner from scattering, replace the dust-proof filter/Rt at an early
date.
• The DIPSW settings differ depending on whether the scatter duct assy and the dust-proof filter/Rt are new models or old models.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[1] Process unit [2] Scatter duct assy/Y

[3] Scatter duct assy/M, /C, /K [4] Dust-proof filter/Rt
I-116
(2) How to distinguish between the new model and the old model
(a) Scatter duct assy/Y
• The shape of the parts differs between the new model and the old model.
• The configuration of the parts differs between the new model and the old model.
• New model: Scatter duct/Y (part number: A5AW3419), scatter seal/1 (part number: A1RF3434), scatter seal/2 (part number:
A1RF3435)
• Old model: No aftermarket part
[1] [2]
[1] New model [2] Old model

Note
• The scatter duct assy/Y consists of the scatter duct/Y, the scatter seal/1, and the scatter seal/2.
You need to attach the scatter seal/1 and the scatter seal/2 on the scatter duct/Y in the field.
• For the replacement procedure of the scatter duct assy, refer to "G.3.2.17 Scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /C, /K".
(b) Scatter duct assy/M, /C, /K

• The shape and the configuration of the parts differ between the new model and the old model.
• New model [1]: With mylar [3]
• Old model [2]: Without mylar
• The configuration of the parts differs between the new model and the old model.
• New model: Part number: A5AWR743
• Old model: No aftermarket part
[3]
[1] [2]

[3] Mylar -
Note
• The scatter duct assy/M, the scatter duct assy/C, and the scatter duct assy/K are the same parts.
• For the replacement procedure of the scatter duct assy, refer to "G.3.2.17 Scatter duct assy/Y, /M, /C, /K".
(c) Dust-proof filter/Rt

• The configuration differs between the new model and the old model.
• New model [1]: With regulating plate [3]
I-117
• Old model [2]: Without regulating plate
[3]
[1] [2]

[3] Regulating plate -
Note
• For the replacement procedure of the dust-proof filter/Rt, refer to "F.5.1.1 Replacing the dust-proof filter/Rt".
(3) DIPSW setting

• When the user prints frequently the high coverage image, select the life 2 or the life 4 with DIPSW5-3 and DIPSW5-6.
• Reference: Coverage: 20%, number of prints (A3): 100,000 prints per month
• The selection of the life 2 and the life 4 depends on the configuration of the dust-proof filter/Rt and the scatter duct assy.
Configuration of the scatter duct assy and the DIPSW setting Remark
dust-proof filter/Rt
Scatter duct assy/Y, / Dust-proof filter/Rt DIPSW5-3 DIPSW5-6 Setting value (life of
M, /C, /K the dust-proof filter/
Rt)
- - 0 0 Life 1 Default
(7,000,000 counts)
New Old 1 0 Life 2 For high coverage
(2,800,000 counts)
- - 0 1 Life 3 For high coverage
(1,400,000 counts) (auxiliary setting)
New New 1 1 Life 4 For high coverage
(6,000,000 counts)
4.6 Counter/Data
4.6.1 Maintenance Counter
(1) OUTLINE
Setting or resetting of the maintenance counter cycle.
I-118
Note
• You can select the maintenance cycle by the paper count or the belt cleaning blade distance (km) of the transfer belt cleaning
unit of the intermediate transfer unit. For default, the drive distance is selected.
• The count condition of the paper count differs depending on the paper size in the sub scan direction.
• To 388 mm: 1 count
• 388.1 to 487.7 mm: 2 counts
(2) Counter reset

After the maintenance is completed, reset the maintenance count using this mode.
Note
• Be sure to reset the maintenance counter after the periodic maintenance (every 113,000 m).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and the icon do not disappear.
• You cannot reset the value of [Accumulate].
• When you select "1" on the software DIPSW15-2, the periodic maintenance alert message and the icon are hidden. You can use
the parts unless there are any problems in the image quality even the parts reach their life in the counter display. Change the
setting and reduce down time and the cost.
(a) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data].
2. "Counter/Data Menu screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
3. "Maintenance Counter screen"
Press [Counter Clear] to reset the maintenance counter.
4. "Reset confirm screen"
Press [Yes] to reset the counter.
The counter is reset, and the start date is automatically inputted.
Press [No] to cancel.
(3) Maintenance cycle setting

Configure the maintenance counter.
Note
• The maintenance counter is predetermined. Be sure not to change the count value normally. The default is as follows.
• C1100: Distance 113 km, Quantity 200,000
• 1085: Distance 113 km, Quantity 175,000
(a) Procedure
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
Enter high digits of the cycle with the numeric buttons.
Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
4.6.2 Data collection procedures

Display the following counter and data of the main body on the touch panel.
The counter and the data also can be checked through the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail remote notification system.
• Paper Size Counter (Total)
• Paper Size Counter (Copy)
• Paper Size Counter (Printer)
• ADF Counter
• Coverage Data History
• Paper JAM History
• JAM Counter
• Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
• Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
• SC Counter
• JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• SC Count Individual Sec.
• SC Data of Time Series
• Maintenance Counter Reset
• Parts History in Time Series
• Each Paper Type Counter
• RFID Information
(1) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data]
I-119
Press [02 Collecting Data].

3. "Collecting Data Menu screen"
Press the counter or the data item that you want to check.
4. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Counter/Data screen" pages.
Note
• [Counter Clear] appears on each screen of [Jam Counter Individual Sec.] and [SC Counter Individual Sec.]
"Count Reset screen" appears when [Counter Clear] is pressed. Press [Yes] to reset the sectional count. Press [No] to
cancel the count reset.
Reset these data when you visit customers for the maintenance so that you can check the number of the jam and the
malfunction that is counted after the last visit.
• On the individual confirmation screen of [ORU-M Maintenance History] and [RFID Information], select the item that you want
to check and press [Information View] to check the information of the item that you selected.
4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/Copy/Printer)

Confirm the number of printings of each paper size.
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• 1 count is made for the paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
Num CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark
ber
01 P1 00 Others
02 P1 01 A3
03 P1 02 A4 SEF
04 P1 03 A5
05 P1 04 A6
06 P1 05 B4
07 P1 06 B5 SEF
08 P1 07 B6
09 P1 08 12 x 18
10 P1 09 11 x 17
11 P1 0A 8.5 x 14
12 P1 0B 8.5 x 11 SEF
13 P1 0C 7.25 x 10.5
14 P1 0D 5.5 x 8.5
15 P1 0E F4
16 P1 0F Postcard 100 mm x 148 mm
17 P1 10 4x6
18 P1 11 8K
19 P1 12 16K
20 P1 13 Longer paper
21 P1 14 A2
22 P1 15 SRA3
23 P1 16 SRA4
24 P1 17 13x19
25 P1 18 Inf. 1 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 196 mm or less*1
26 P1 19 Inf. 2 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
27 P1 1A Inf. 3 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
28 P1 1B Inf. 4 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
29 P1 1C Inf. 5 (***mm) Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 391 mm to 487 mm
30 P1 1D A4 LEF
31 P1 1E B5 LEF
32 P1 1F 8.5 x 11 LEF
33 P1 25 Total count (Total *2
copy count of each
paper size)
34 P1 26 A4/8.5 x 11 - like *2
Color Count
35 P1 27 A4/8.5 x 11 - like *2
B&W Count
I-120
Num CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark

ber
36 P1 28 A3/11 x 17 - like *2
Color Count
37 P1 29 A3/11 x 17 - like *2
B&W Count
*1 When DIPSW 8-7 is 0. When DIPSW8-7=1, follow the setting of the I.4.6.21 Custom Size Counter Threshold Set.
*2 Number 33 to number 37 are not displayed on the operation panel.
4.6.4 ADF Counter

Confirm the number of originals that are fed in each DF mode.
Note
• Number 01 and Number 02 counter do not double count with other counters.
• 1 count for single-sided, 2 counts for double-sided.
Number CSRC parameter Item Remark
01 F0 00 Number of originals that are fed in ADF mode (1 side)
02 F0 01 Number of originals that are fed in ADF mode (2 sides)
03 F0 07 Number of mixed original fed in ADF (1 side)
04 F0 08 Number of mixed original fed in ADF (2 sides)
05 F0 0A Number of 1-sided Z-folded original fed
06 F0 0B Number of 2-sided Z-folded original fed
4.6.5 Coverage Data History

Confirm the average coverage of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K.
Note
• This coverage is a calculated value that is based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is different from the toner
consumption of the actual printing.
• Up to 30 most recent coverage data are stored and deleted in the chronological order.
Number CSRC parameter Printer counter Coverage (%)
01 V0 00 B/W accumulated coverage rate (00.0 to 99.9)
02 V0 01 B/W section 1 coverage rate
11 V0 0A B/W section 10 coverage rate
12 V0 0B B/W section 11 coverage rate
13 V0 0C B/W section 12 coverage rate
14 V0 0D B/W section 13 coverage rate
15 V0 0E B/W section 14 coverage rate
16 V0 0F B/W section 15 coverage rate
27 V0 1A B/W section 26 coverage rate
28 V0 1B B/W section 27 coverage rate
29 V0 1C B/W section 28 coverage rate
30 V0 1D B/W section 29 coverage rate
31 V0 1E B/W section 30 coverage rate
32 V0 1F
I-121

33 V0 20 Yellow accumulated coverage rate
34 V0 21 Yellow section 1 coverage rate
43 V0 2A Yellow section 10 coverage rate
44 V0 2B Yellow section 11 coverage rate
45 V0 2C Yellow section 12 coverage rate
46 V0 2D Yellow section 13 coverage rate
47 V0 2E Yellow section 14 coverage rate
48 V0 2F Yellow section 15 coverage rate
59 V0 3A Yellow section 26 coverage rate
60 V0 3B Yellow section 27 coverage rate
61 V0 3C Yellow section 28 coverage rate
62 V0 3D Yellow section 29 coverage rate
63 V0 3E Yellow section 30 coverage rate
64 V0 3F
65 V0 40 Magenta accumulated coverage rate
66 V0 41 Magenta section 1 coverage rate
75 V0 4A Magenta section 10 coverage rate
76 V0 4B Magenta section 11 coverage rate
77 V0 4C Magenta section 12 coverage rate
78 V0 4D Magenta section 13 coverage rate
79 V0 4E Magenta section 14 coverage rate
80 V0 4F Magenta section 15 coverage rate
I-122

91 V0 5A Magenta section 26 coverage rate
92 V0 5B Magenta section 27 coverage rate
93 V0 5C Magenta section 28 coverage rate
94 V0 5D Magenta section 29 coverage rate
95 V0 5E Magenta section 30 coverage rate
96 V0 5F
97 V0 60 Cyan accumulated coverage rate
98 V0 61 Cyan section 1 coverage rate
107 V0 6A Cyan section 10 coverage rate
108 V0 6B Cyan section 11 coverage rate
109 V0 6C Cyan section 12 coverage rate
110 V0 6D Cyan section 13 coverage rate
111 V0 6E Cyan section 14 coverage rate
112 V0 6F Cyan section 15 coverage rate
123 V0 7A Cyan section 26 coverage rate
124 V0 7B Cyan section 27 coverage rate
125 V0 7C Cyan section 28 coverage rate
126 V0 7D Cyan section 29 coverage rate
127 V0 7E Cyan section 30 coverage rate
128 V0 7F
4.6.6 Paper JAM History

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm the jam code, the total count, the date of the occurrence, the time of the
occurrence, the tray, the paper size, the magnification, the paper type, and the paper weight.
4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Sec.

Confirm the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
Note
• Maximum count: 999,999
• (The stationary jam is not included in the count.)
• Jam code appears on the user mode screen when you change the DIPSW11-7 to 1.
Numb CSRC Item
er Parameter (jam code)
001 J0 00 J-1601
002 J0 01 J-1602
003 J0 02 J-1610
004 J0 03 J-1613
005 J0 04 J-1614
006 J0 05 J-1615
007 J0 06 J-1616
008 J0 07 J-1617
009 J0 08 J-1618
I-123
Numb CSRC Item

010 J0 09 J-1619
011 J0 0A J-1620
012 J0 0B J-1621
013 J0 0C J-1622
014 J0 0D -
015 J0 0E J-1624
016 J0 0F J-1625
017 J0 10 J-1626
018 J0 11 J-1627
019 J0 12 J-1628
020 J0 13 J-1631
021 J0 14 J-1632
022 J0 15 J-1633
023 J0 16 J-1634
024 J0 17 J-1635
025 J0 18 J-1636
026 J0 19 J-1637
027 J0 1A J-1638
028 J0 1B J-1639
029 J0 1C J-1640
030 J0 1D J-1641
031 J0 1E J-1645
032 J0 1F J-1701
033 J0 20 J-1702
034 J0 21 J-1708
035 J0 22 J-1709
036 J0 23 -
037 J0 24 J-1711
038 J0 25 J-1801
039 J0 26 J-1802
040 J0 27 J-1803
041 J0 28 J-1804
042 J0 29 J-1805
043 J0 2A J-1806
044 J0 2B J-1807
045 J0 2C J-1808
046 J0 2D J-1809
047 J0 2E J-1810
048 J0 2F J-1811
049 J0 30 J-1812
050 J0 31 J-1813
051 J0 32 J-1814
052 J0 33 J-1815
053 J0 34 J-1816
054 J0 35 J-1817
055 J0 36 -
056 J0 37 J-1821
057 J0 38 J-1822
058 J0 39 J-1823
059 J0 3A J-1834
060 J0 3B J-1835
061 J0 3C J-1836
062 J0 3D J-1837
063 J0 3E J-1838
064 J0 3F J-1839
065 J0 40 J-1840
066 J0 41 J-1849
I-124
Numb CSRC Item

067 J0 42 J-1903
068 J0 43 J-1904
069 J0 44 J-1905
070 J0 45 J-2001
071 J0 46 J-2002
072 J0 47 J-2003
073 J0 48 J-2004
074 J0 49 J-2005
075 J0 4A J-2006
076 J0 4B J-2007
077 J0 4C J-2008
078 J0 4D J-2009
079 J0 4E J-2010
080 J0 4F J-2011
081 J0 50 J-2012
082 J0 51 J-2013
083 J0 52 J-2014
084 J0 53 J-2015
085 J0 54 J-2016
086 J0 55 J-2017
087 J0 56 -
088 J0 57 J-2021
089 J0 58 J-2022
090 J0 59 J-2023
091 J0 5A J-2049
092 J0 5B J-3101
093 J0 5C J-3102
094 J0 5D J-3103
095 J0 5E J-3104
096 J0 5F J-3105
097 J0 60 J-3106
098 J0 61 J-3149
099 J0 62 J-3201
100 J0 63 -
101 J0 64 -
102 J0 65 J-3204
103 J0 66 J-3205
104 J0 67 -
105 J0 68 -
106 J0 69 J-3209
107 J0 6A J-5101
108 J0 6B J-9201
109 J0 6C J-9202
110 J0 6D -
111 J0 6E J-9345
112 J0 6F J-9401
113 J0 70 J-9402
114 J0 71 J-6603
115 J0 72 J-6613
116 J0 73 J-6623
117 J0 74 J-6633
118 J0 75 J-6605
119 J0 76 J-6615
120 J0 77 J-6604
121 J0 78 J-6614
122 J0 79 J-6624
123 J0 7A J-6634
I-125
Numb CSRC Item

124 J0 7B J-6601
125 J0 7C J-6611
126 J0 7D J-6621
127 J0 7E J-6606
128 J0 7F J-6607
129 J0 80 J-6698
130 J0 81 J-6699
131 J0 82 J-7101
132 J0 83 J-7102
133 J0 84 J-7103
134 J0 85 J-7104
135 J0 86 J-7105
136 J0 87 J-7107
137 J0 88 J-7108
138 J0 89 J-7109
139 J0 8A J-7110
140 J0 8B J-7111
141 J0 8C J-7216
142 J0 8D J-7217
143 J0 8E J-7218
144 J0 8F J-7220
145 J0 90 J-7221
146 J0 91 J-7222
147 J0 92 J-7223
148 J0 93 J-7224
149 J0 94 J-7225
150 J0 95 J-7226
151 J0 96 J-7227
152 J0 97 J-7228
153 J0 98 J-7229
154 J0 99 J-7230
155 J0 9A J-7231
156 J0 9B J-7235
157 J0 9C J-7236
158 J0 9D J-7237
159 J0 9E J-7243
160 J0 9F J-7248
161 J0 A0 J-7249
162 J0 A1 J-7250
163 J0 A2 J-7251
164 J0 A3 J-7265
165 J0 A4 J-7266
166 J0 A5 J-7272
167 J0 A6 J-7281
168 J0 A7 J-7290
169 J0 A8 J-7401
170 J0 A9 J-7402
171 J0 AA J-7403
172 J0 AB J-7404
173 J0 AC J-7405
174 J0 AD J-7406
175 J0 AE J-7407
176 J0 AF J-7408
177 J0 B0 J-7409
178 J0 B1 J-7410
179 J0 B2 J-7411
180 J0 B3 J-7412
I-126
Numb CSRC Item

181 J0 B4 J-7431
182 J0 B5 J-7432
183 J0 B6 J-7433
184 J0 B7 J-7434
185 J0 B8 J-7435
186 J0 B9 J-7436
187 J0 BA J-7437
188 J0 BB J-7438
189 J0 BC J-7439
190 J0 BD J-7440
191 J0 BE J-7441
192 J0 BF J-7442
193 J0 C0 J-7501
194 J0 C1 J-7502
195 J0 C2 J-7503
196 J0 C3 J-7504
197 J0 C4 J-7505
198 J0 C5 J-7506
199 J0 C6 J-7507
200 J0 C7 J-7508
201 J0 C8 J-7509
202 J0 C9 J-7510
203 J0 CA J-7511
204 J0 CB J-7512
205 J0 CC J-7513
206 J0 CD J-7514
207 J0 CE J-7515
208 J0 CF J-7516
209 J0 D0 J-7517
210 J0 D1 J-7518
211 J0 D2 J-7519
212 J0 D3 J-7520
213 J0 D4 J-7521
214 J0 D5 J-7522
215 J0 D6 J-7523
216 J0 D7 J-7524
217 J0 D8 J-7530
218 J0 D9 J-7531
219 J0 DA J-7532
220 J0 DB J-7533
221 J0 DC J-7535
222 J0 DD J-7550
223 J0 DE J-7551
224 J0 DF J-7552
225 J0 E0 J-7553
226 J0 E1 J-7554
227 J0 E2 J-7555
228 J0 E3 J-7556
229 J0 E4 J-7557
230 J0 E5 J-7558
231 J0 E6 J-7561
232 J0 E7 J-7562
233 J0 E8 J-7563
234 J0 E9 J-7564
235 J0 EA J-7565
236 J0 EB J-7566
237 J0 EC J-7567
I-127
Numb CSRC Item

238 J0 ED J-7568
239 J0 EE J-7569
240 J0 EF J-7570
241 J0 F0 J-7571
242 J0 F1 J-7572
243 J0 F2 J-7573
244 J0 F3 J-7574
245 J0 F4 J-7575
246 J0 F5 J-7576
247 J0 F6 J-7577
248 J0 F7 J-7578
249 J0 F8 J-7579
250 J0 F9 J-7580
251 J0 FA J-7581
252 J0 FB J-7582
253 J0 FC J-7583
254 J0 FD J-7584
255 J0 FE J-7585
256 J0 FF J-7586
257 J1 00 J-7621
258 J1 01 J-7622
259 J1 02 J-7623
260 J1 03 J-7624
261 J1 04 J-7625
262 J1 05 J-7626
263 J1 06 J-7590
264 J1 07 J-7591
265 J1 08 J-7592
266 J1 09 J-7593
267 J1 0A J-7594
268 J1 0B J-7595
269 J1 0C J-7596
270 J1 0D J-7597
271 J1 0E J-7601
272 J1 0F J-7602
273 J1 10 J-7603
274 J1 11 J-7604
275 J1 12 J-7605
276 J1 13 J-7606
277 J1 14 J-7607
278 J1 15 J-7608
279 J1 16 J-7611
280 J1 17 J-7612
281 J1 18 J-7660
282 J1 19 J-7661
283 J1 1A J-7662
284 J1 1B J-7663
285 J1 1C J-7664
286 J1 1D J-7665
287 J1 1E J-7666
288 J1 1F J-7667
289 J1 20 J-7668
290 J1 21 J-7669
291 J1 22 J-7670
292 J1 23 J-7671
293 J1 24 J-7672
294 J1 25 J-7673
I-128
Numb CSRC Item

295 J1 26 J-7674
296 J1 27 J-7675
297 J1 28 J-7676
298 J1 29 J-7677
299 J1 2A J-7678
300 J1 2B J-7679
301 J1 2C J-7680
302 J1 2D J-7681
303 J1 2E J-7682
304 J1 2F J-7683
305 J1 30 J-7684
306 J1 31 J-7685
307 J1 32 J-7686
308 J1 33 J-7687
309 J1 34 J-7688
310 J1 35 J-7689
311 J1 36 J-7690
312 J1 37 J-7691
313 J1 38 J-7692
314 J1 39 J-7693
315 J1 3A J-7694
316 J1 3B J-7695
317 J1 3C J-7696
318 J1 3D J-7697
319 J1 3E J-7698
320 J1 3F -
321 J1 40 -
322 J1 41 -
323 J1 42 -
324 J1 43 -
325 J1 44 -
326 J1 45 -
327 J1 46 J-9302
328 J1 47 -
329 J1 48 -
330 J1 49 -
331 J1 4A -
332 J1 4B J-7589
333 J1 4C J-7633
334 J1 4D J-7560
335 J1 4E J-7627
336 J1 4F J-7628
337 J1 50 J-7629
338 J1 51 J-7630
339 J1 52 J-7631
340 J1 53 J-7632
341 J1 54 -
342 J1 55 -
343 J1 56 -
344 J1 57 -
345 J1 58 -
346 J1 59 -
347 J1 5A J-3251
348 J1 5B J-3252
349 J1 5C J-3254
350 J1 5D J-7634
351 J1 5E J-7635
I-129
Numb CSRC Item

352 J1 5F J-7701
353 J1 60 J-7702
354 J1 61 J-7587
355 J1 62 -
356 J1 63 -
357 J1 64 -
358 J1 65 -
359 J1 66 -
360 J1 67 -
361 J1 68 -
362 J1 69 -
363 J1 6A -
364 J1 6B -
365 J1 6C -
366 J1 6D -
367 J1 6E -
368 J1 6F -
369 J1 70 -
370 J1 71 -
371 J1 72 -
372 J1 73 -
373 J1 74 -
374 J1 75 -
375 J1 76 -
376 J1 77 -
377 J1 78 -
378 J1 79 -
379 J1 7A -
380 J1 7B -
381 J1 7C -
382 J1 7D -
383 J1 7E -
384 J1 7F -
385 J1 80 -
386 J1 81 -
387 J1 82 -
388 J1 83 -
389 J1 84 -
390 J1 85 -
391 J1 86 -
392 J1 87 -
393 J1 88 -
394 J1 89 -
395 J1 8A -
396 J1 8B -
397 J1 8C -
398 J1 8D -
399 J1 8E -
400 J1 8F -
401 J1 90 -
402 J1 91 -
403 J1 92 -
404 J1 93 -
405 J1 94 -
406 J1 95 -
407 J1 96 -
408 J1 97 -
I-130
Numb CSRC Item

409 J1 98 -
410 J1 99 -
411 J1 9A -
412 J1 9B -
413 J1 9C -
414 J1 9D -
415 J1 9E -
416 J1 9F -
417 J1 A0 -
418 J1 A1 -
419 J1 A2 -
420 J1 A3 -
421 J1 A4 -
422 J1 A5 -
423 J1 A6 -
424 J1 A7 -
425 J1 A8 -
426 J1 A9 -
427 J1 AA -
428 J1 AB -
429 J1 AC -
430 J1 AD -
431 J1 AE -
432 J1 AF -
433 J1 B0 -
434 J1 B1 -
435 J1 B2 -
436 J1 B3 -
437 J1 B4 -
438 J1 B5 -
439 J1 B6 -
440 J1 B7 -
441 J1 B8 -
442 J1 B9 -
443 J1 BA -
444 J1 BB -
445 J1 BC -
446 J1 BD -
447 J1 BE -
448 J1 BF -
449 J1 C0 -
450 J1 C1 -
451 J1 C2 -
452 J1 C3 -
453 J1 C4 -
454 J1 C5 -
455 J1 C6 -
456 J1 C7 -
457 J1 C8 -
458 J1 C9 -
459 J1 CA -
460 J1 CB -
461 J1 CC -
462 J1 CD -
463 J1 CE -
464 J1 CF -
465 J1 D0 -
I-131
Numb CSRC Item

466 J1 D1 -
467 J1 D2 -
468 J1 D3 -
469 J1 D4 -
470 J1 D5 -
471 J1 D6 -
472 J1 D7 -
473 J1 D8 -
474 J1 D9 -
475 J1 DA -
476 J1 DB -
477 J1 DC -
478 J1 DD -
479 J1 DE -
480 J1 DF -
481 J1 E0 -
482 J1 E1 -
483 J1 E2 -
484 J1 E3 -
485 J1 E4 -
486 J1 E5 -
487 J1 E6 -
488 J1 E7 -
489 J1 E8 -
490 J1 E9 -
491 J1 EA -
492 J1 EB -
493 J1 EC -
494 J1 ED -
495 J1 EE -
496 J1 EF -
497 J1 F0 -
498 J1 F1 -
499 J1 F2 -
500 J1 F3 -
501 J1 F4 -
502 J1 F5 -
503 J1 F6 -
504 J1 F7 -
505 J1 F8 -
506 J1 F9 -
507 J1 FA -
508 J1 FB -
509 J1 FC -
510 J1 FD -
511 J1 FE -
512 J1 FF -
4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
Num CSRC Item Count conditions
ber Parameter
001 F1 00 1-1 mode
002 F1 01 1-2 mode
003 F1 02 2-1 mode
004 F1 03 2-2 mode
I-132

ber Parameter
005 F1 04 ADF 1-1 mode
006 F1 05 ADF 1-2 mode
007 F1 06 Mixed original mode
008 F1 07 Tab original
009 F1 08 Z-Folded original mode
010 F1 09 LEF: Portrait, SEF: Landscape (Reg.)
011 F1 0A LEF: Landscape, SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
012 F1 0B LEF: Portrait, SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
013 F1 0C LEF: Landscape, SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
014 F1 0D -
015 F1 0E -
016 F1 0F -
017 F1 10 -
018 F1 11 Custom Size Original
019 F1 12 1 point staple (upper left)
020 F1 13 1 point staple (upper right)
021 F1 14 2 points staple (left bind)
022 F1 15 2 points staple (top bind)
023 F1 16 Right & left bind (output)
024 F1 17 2 points staple (right bind)
025 F1 18 Top bind (output)
026 F1 19 Tri-folding
027 F1 1A Saddle stitch
028 F1 1B Stacker 5000 sheets full alarm
029 F1 1C Group
030 F1 1D Offset group
031 F1 1E Sort
032 F1 1F Offset sort
033 F1 20 Face down
034 F1 21 Face up
035 F1 22 1toN
036 F1 23 Nto1
037 F1 24 -
038 F1 25 Cover sheet
039 F1 26 Trim
040 F1 27 Real size copy
041 F1 28 Fixed Zoom Ratio E4
042 F1 29 Fixed Zoom Ratio E3
043 F1 2A Fixed Zoom Ratio E2
044 F1 2B Fixed Zoom Ratio E1
045 F1 2C Fixed Zoom Ratio R4
046 F1 2D Fixed Zoom Ratio R3
047 F1 2E Fixed Zoom Ratio R2
048 F1 2F Fixed Zoom Ratio R1
049 F1 30 Arbitrary zoom 1
052 F1 33 ZOOM
053 F1 34 -
054 F1 35 Maximum ZOOM
055 F1 36 Minimum ZOOM
056 F1 37 APS
057 F1 38 AMS
058 F1 39 EE
059 F1 3A Arbitrary density 1
060 F1 3B Arbitrary density 2
061 F1 3C Interrupted copy
I-133

ber Parameter
062 F1 3D Cancel Automatic Image Rotation
063 F1 3E -
064 F1 3F -
065 F1 40 Combine 1 Sheet
066 F1 41 Booklet
067 F1 42 Adhesive Binding
068 F1 43 -
069 F1 44 -
070 F1 45 Page copy
071 F1 46 -
072 F1 47 Non-image area auto erase
073 F1 48 -
074 F1 49 -
075 F1 4A -
076 F1 4B Standard-size repeat
077 F1 4C Frame Erasure
078 F1 4D Center erasure
079 F1 4E Original paper position adjustment
080 F1 4F All-image area
081 F1 50 Shift
082 F1 51 -
083 F1 52 -
084 F1 53 -
085 F1 54 -
086 F1 55 Date and time
087 F1 56 Page
088 F1 57 Numbering
089 F1 58 Print quantity: 1
090 F1 59 Print quantity: 2 to 5
091 F1 5A Print quantity: 6 to 10
092 F1 5B Print quantity: 11 or more
093 F1 5C Time while the power remote 1 is on
094 F1 5D Time while the power remote 2 is on
095 F1 5E -
096 F1 5F -
097 F1 60 Time in the LOW-POWER mode
098 F1 61 Time in Warm-up
099 F1 62 Time during the front door is open
100 F1 63 Operation time in 1 side straight exit
101 F1 64 Operation time in 1 side reverse exit
102 F1 65 Operation time in 2 sides print
103 F1 66 Operation time in ADF mode
104 F1 67 Morning correction count
105 F1 68 Number of paper inserter
106 F1 69 -
107 F1 6A -
108 F1 6B Number of saddle stitching job
109 F1 6C Saddle stitcher tri-folding tray full alarm
110 F1 6D Number of ADF NF occurred
111 F1 6E -
112 F1 6F -
113 F1 70 -
114 F1 71 Number of the scanner scanned
115 F1 72 Number of electrode cleaned
116 F1 73 Number of memory overflow
117 F1 74 Number of the fusing alarm occurred
118 F1 75 Number of no toner stop occurred
I-134

ber Parameter
119 F1 76 -
120 F1 77 -
121 F1 78 Mis-centering correct error
122 F1 79 -
123 F1 7A -
124 F1 7B Compression memory overflow
125 F1 7C -
126 F1 7D -
127 F1 7E Staple finisher main tray alarm
128 F1 7F Staple finisher staple alarm
129 F1 80 Saddle stitcher trash full alarm
130 F1 81 -
131 F1 82 Auto Y toner refresh mode count
132 F1 83 Auto M toner refresh mode count
133 F1 84 Auto C toner refresh mode count
134 F1 85 Auto K toner refresh mode count
135 F1 86 -
136 F1 87 -
137 F1 88 Saddle stitcher staple alarm
138 F1 89 -
139 F1 8A -
140 F1 8B -
141 F1 8C -
142 F1 8D -
143 F1 8E Hole-Punch
144 F1 8F Z-Folding
145 F1 90 Multi folder trash full alarm
146 F1 91 Hold the job number (copy)
147 F1 92 Hold + output job number (copier)
148 F1 93 Hold the job number (printer)
149 F1 94 Hold + output job number (printer)
150 F1 95 Number of output hold job
151 F1 96 Number of output hold job (the job is deleted after the output)
152 F1 97 HDD Store job (Hold → HDD Store)
153 F1 98 HDD Store job read print job
154 F1 99 HDD Store job read hold job
155 F1 9A HDD Store job read print + hold job
156 F1 9B -
157 F1 9C -
158 F1 9D -
159 F1 9E -
160 F1 9F -
161 F1 A0 -
162 F1 A1 -
163 F1 A2 -
164 F1 A3 -
165 F1 A4 -
166 F1 A5 -
167 F1 A6 -
168 F1 A7 -
169 F1 A8 -
170 F1 A9 -
171 F1 AA -
172 F1 AB -
173 F1 AC -
174 F1 AD -
175 F1 AE -
I-135

ber Parameter
176 F1 AF -
177 F1 B0 -
178 F1 B1 -
179 F1 B2 -
180 F1 B3 -
181 F1 B4 -
182 F1 B5 -
183 F1 B6 -
184 F1 B7 -
185 F1 B8 -
186 F1 B9 -
187 F1 BA -
188 F1 BB -
189 F1 BC Perfect bind (cover blank)
190 F1 BD Perfect bind (cover print 1-in-1)
191 F1 BE Perfect bind (cover print 2-in-1)
192 F1 BF Perfect bind (cover print 3-in-1)
193 F1 C0 Perfect binder cover tray mode
194 F1 C1 Number of sets for perfect bind
195 F1 C2 Number of sets for the perfect bind (With the cover trim)
196 F1 C3 Number of sets for the perfect bind (Without the cover trim)
197 F1 C4 Number of perfect binder sub tray output paper
198 F1 C5 Number of perfect binder sub compile output paper
199 F1 C6 Times of pulling out PB cover tray
200 F1 C7 The number of perfect binder front door open and close
201 F1 C8 The number of stacker cover of perfect binder open and close
202 F1 C9 -
203 F1 CA -
204 F1 CB -
205 F1 CC -
206 F1 CD -
207 F1 CE -
208 F1 CF -
209 F1 D0 -
210 F1 D1 -
211 F1 D2 -
212 F1 D3 -
213 F1 D4 -
214 F1 D5 -
215 F1 D6 -
216 F1 D7 -
217 F1 D8 Sample print sheets
218 F1 D9 Sample print sheets in printer job
219 F1 DA Sample print sheets in printer job (large size)
220 F1 DB -
221 F1 DC -
222 F1 DD Output offset mode by designated job
223 F1 DE Offset mode by specified numbers
224 F1 DF Output offset mode by specified pages
225 F1 E0 Number of offset job for 1 set + set pages
226 F1 E1 Continued job for next day
227 F1 E2 Corner crop mark setting
228 F1 E3 Center crop mark setting
229 F1 E4 Tab paper used job
230 F1 E5 Number of needless tab paper exit job
231 F1 E6 Number of job ticket edit
232 F1 E7 Sample output number
I-136

ber Parameter
233 F1 E8 600 dpi output quantity
234 F1 E9 Multi punch
235 F1 EA -
236 F1 EB -
237 F1 EC -
238 F1 ED -
239 F1 EE -
240 F1 EF -
241 F1 F0 -
242 F1 F1 -
243 F1 F2 -
244 F1 F3 Colored Paper: White
245 F1 F4 Colored Paper: Blue
246 F1 F5 Colored Paper: Goldenrod
247 F1 F6 Colored Paper: Gray
248 F1 F7 Colored Paper: Green
249 F1 F8 Colored Paper: Ivory
250 F1 F9 Colored Paper: Orange
251 F1 FA Colored Paper: Pink
252 F1 FB Colored Paper: Red
253 F1 FC Colored Paper: Yellow
254 F1 FD Colored Paper: Cream
255 F1 FE Colored Paper: Others
256 F1 FF Colored Paper: User definition
4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
ber parameter
001 F2 00 ACS
002 F2 01 Full color
003 F2 02 Black and white
004 F2 03 Single color (Y)
005 F2 04 Single color (M)
006 F2 05 Single color (C)
007 F2 06 Single color (R)
008 F2 07 Single color (G)
009 F2 08 Single color (B)
010 F2 09 Original Type: Text/Photo (Print)
011 F2 0A Original Type: Text/Photo (Photo)
012 F2 0B Original Type:Photo(Print)
013 F2 0C Original Type:Photo(Photo)
014 F2 0D Original Type:Copied
015 F2 0E Original Type:Inkjet
016 F2 0F -
017 F2 10 Screen:Auto
018 F2 11 Select screen: Screen 1
019 F2 12 Select screen: Screen 2
020 F2 13 Select screen: Stochastic
021 F2 14 Original Type: Text
022 F2 15 Original Type: Map
023 F2 16 -
024 F2 17 Density shift
025 F2 18 Background Removal
026 F2 19 Red adjustment
027 F2 1A Green adjustment
I-137

ber parameter
028 F2 1B Blue adjustment
029 F2 1C Hue adjustment
030 F2 1D Saturation adjustment
031 F2 1E Brightness adjustment
032 F2 1F Color balance adjustment
033 F2 20 Sharpness adjustment
034 F2 21 Contrast adjustment
035 F2 22 Image distinction level
036 F2 23 Paper type select: Plain
037 F2 24 Paper type select: Coated-ML
038 F2 25 Paper type select: Colored paper
039 F2 26 Paper type select: Fine
040 F2 27 Paper type select: Coated-GL
041 F2 28 Paper type select: Tab original
042 F2 29 Paper type select: Color specific
043 F2 2A Paper type select: Coated-GO
044 F2 2B Paper type select: Coated-MO
045 F2 2C Paper weight select: 1
046 F2 2D Paper weight select: 2
047 F2 2E Paper weight select: 3
048 F2 2F Paper weight select: 4
049 F2 30 Paper weight select: 5
054 F2 35 Main tray: face up output
055 F2 36 Number of no toner stop occurred (Y)
056 F2 37 Number of no toner stop occurred (M)
057 F2 38 Number of no toner stop occurred (C)
058 F2 39 Number of no toner stop occurred (K)
059 F2 3A Number of waste toner recovery box full
060 F2 3B Number of color registration auto adjustment
061 F2 3C N of Auto Stability Control
062 F2 3D Paper weight select: 10
063 F2 3E Paper weight select: 11
064 F2 3F -
065 F2 40 -
066 F2 41 -
067 F2 42 -
068 F2 43 Polygon motor operation time
069 F2 44 Develop motor operation time (color)
070 F2 45 Develop motor operation time (black)
071 F2 46 ON Time of PCL (Color)
072 F2 47 ON Time of PCL (Black)
073 F2 48 -
074 F2 49 -
075 F2 4A -
076 F2 4B -
077 F2 4C -
078 F2 4D Auto Y toner refresh mode count
079 F2 4E Auto M toner refresh mode count
080 F2 4F Auto C toner refresh mode count
081 F2 50 Auto K toner refresh mode count
082 F2 51 Manual toner refresh mode count
083 F2 52 -
084 F2 53 -
I-138

ber parameter
085 F2 54 -
086 F2 55 -
087 F2 56 -
088 F2 57 Right & left bind (originals)
089 F2 58 Upper binding (original)
090 F2 59 Inside print multi tri-fold
091 F2 5A Outside print multi tri-fold
092 F2 5B Inside print tri-fold-in
093 F2 5C Outside print tri-fold-in
094 F2 5D Inside print tri-fold-out
095 F2 5E Outside print tri-fold-out
096 F2 5F Inside print double parallel
097 F2 60 Outside print double parallel
098 F2 61 Inside print gate
099 F2 62 Outside print gate
100 F2 63 Multi half fold
101 F2 64 Inside print half-fold
102 F2 65 Outside print half-fold
103 F2 66 Main tray exit
104 F2 67 Stacker tray output
105 F2 68 Stacker pile setting permit
106 F2 69 Fold & staple tray output
107 F2 6A Tri-fold tray output
108 F2 6B Folding sub tray job number
109 F2 6C Stacker sub tray output
110 F2 6D Fold & staple sub tray output
111 F2 6E Staple sub tray paper exit
112 F2 6F Number of main tray output job
113 F2 70 Stacker tray output job number
114 F2 71 Fold & staple tray output job number
115 F2 72 Tri-fold tray output job number
116 F2 73 Folding sub tray job number
117 F2 74 Stacker sub tray job number
118 F2 75 Fold & staple sub tray job number
119 F2 76 Staple sub tray job number
120 F2 77 Multi half fold job number
121 F2 78 Inside print half-fold job number
122 F2 79 Outside print half-fold job number
123 F2 7A -
124 F2 7B -
125 F2 7C -
126 F2 7D -
127 F2 7E -
128 F2 7F -
129 F2 80 -
130 F2 81 -
131 F2 82 -
132 F2 83 -
133 F2 84 -
134 F2 85 -
135 F2 86 Number of paper inserter
136 F2 87 Number of perfect bind (copy) job
137 F2 88 Number of perfect bind (printer) job
138 F2 89 Color density control
139 F2 8A Color density control (Large)
140 F2 8B -
141 F2 8C S.M.A.R.T (0) Start/Stop Count
I-139

ber parameter
142 F2 8D S.M.A.R.T (0) Load Cycle Count
143 F2 8E S.M.A.R.T (0) Reallocated Sector Count
144 F2 8F S.M.A.R.T(0) Power On Hours
145 F2 90 S.M.A.R.T (1) Start/Stop Count
146 F2 91 S.M.A.R.T (1) Load Cycle Count
147 F2 92 S.M.A.R.T (1) Reallocated Sector Count
148 F2 93 S.M.A.R.T (1) Power On Hours
151 F2 96 S.M.A.R.T (2) Reallocated Sector Count
152 F2 97 S.M.A.R.T (2) Power On Hours
155 F2 9A S.M.A.R.T (3) Reallocated Sector Count
156 F2 9B S.M.A.R.T (3) Power On Hours
157 F2 9C S.M.A.R.T (4) Start/Stop Count
158 F2 9D S.M.A.R.T (4) Load Cycle Count
159 F2 9E S.M.A.R.T (4) Reallocated Sector Count
160 F2 9F S.M.A.R.T (4) Power On Hours
161 F2 A0 -
162 F2 A1 -
163 F2 A2 -
164 F2 A3 -
165 F2 A4 Toner save inactive
166 F2 A5 Toner save minimum
167 F2 A6 Toner save middle
168 F2 A7 Toner save maximum
169 F2 A8 Number of ADF grain detection execution
170 F2 A9 Total number of ADF grain detection
171 F2 AA Number of the ADF glass cleaning
172 F2 AB Separation print job number
173 F2 AC Square fold
174 F2 AD Number of crease: 1 line
175 F2 AE Number of crease: 2 line
176 F2 AF Number of crease: 3 line
177 F2 B0 Number of crease: 4 line
178 F2 B1 Crease Saddle stitch, multi half fold
179 F2 B2 Crease Multi tri-fold
180 F2 B3 Crease position Spine
181 F2 B4 Crease position Cover gutter
182 F2 B5 Crease position Spine + Cover gutter
183 F2 B6 Staple Saddle stitch 4 ports staple
184 F2 B7 2-Side Slitting Only (All Sheets)
185 F2 B8 2-Side Slitting Only (Cover Sheet Only)
186 F2 B9 Fold&Staple/Multi Half-F 2-Side Slit(All)
187 F2 BA Fold&Staple/Multi Half-F 2-Side Slit(Cover)
188 F2 BB Multi Tri-Fold 2-Side Slitting
189 F2 BC Perfect Bind 2-Side Slitting
190 F2 BD Spine Corner Forming Job Number
191 F2 BE Crease Job Number
192 F2 BF 2-Side Slitting Job Number
193 F2 C0 4 Position Staple Job Number(Fold&Staple)
194 F2 C1 External finisher
195 F2 C2 Main SW Off Count
196 F2 C3 -
197 F2 C4 -
198 F2 C5 -
I-140

ber parameter
199 F2 C6 -
200 F2 C7 -
201 F2 C8 -
202 F2 C9 -
203 F2 CA -
204 F2 CB -
205 F2 CC -
206 F2 CD -
207 F2 CE -
208 F2 CF -
209 F2 D0 -
210 F2 D1 -
211 F2 D2 -
212 F2 D3 -
213 F2 D4 -
214 F2 D5 -
215 F2 D6 -
216 F2 D7 -
217 F2 D8 -
218 F2 D9 -
219 F2 DA -
220 F2 DB -
221 F2 DC -
222 F2 DD -
223 F2 DE -
224 F2 DF -
225 F2 E0 -
226 F2 E1 -
227 F2 E2 -
228 F2 E3 -
229 F2 E4 -
230 F2 E5 -
231 F2 E6 -
232 F2 E7 -
233 F2 E8 -
234 F2 E9 -
235 F2 EA -
236 F2 EB -
237 F2 EC -
238 F2 ED -
239 F2 EE -
240 F2 EF -
241 F2 F0 -
242 F2 F1 -
243 F2 F2 -
244 F2 F3 -
245 F2 F4 -
256 F2 F5 -
247 F2 F6 -
248 F2 F7 -
249 F2 F8 -
250 F2 F9 -
251 F2 FA -
252 F2 FB -
253 F2 FC -
254 F2 FD -
255 F2 FE -
I-141

ber parameter
256 F2 FF -
4.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.

SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.
Note
• When the service mode DIPSW 3-1 is 1 (Latched), C35## to C39## are not counted.
Number CSRC Item
Parameter (SC Code)
001 E0 00 C-0002
002 E0 01 -
003 E0 02 C-0004
004 E0 03 -
005 E0 04 C-0101
006 E0 05 C-0104
007 E0 06 C-0105
008 E0 07 C-0107
009 E0 08 C-0108
010 E0 09 C-0109
011 E0 0A C-0110
012 E0 0B C-0111
013 E0 0C C-0112
014 E0 0D C-0113
015 E0 0E C-0114
016 E0 0F C-0115
017 E0 10 C-0116
018 E0 11 C-0117
019 E0 12 C-0118
020 E0 13 C-0119
021 E0 14 C-0120
022 E0 15 C-0121
023 E0 16 C-0122
024 E0 17 C-0123
025 E0 18 C-0124
026 E0 19 C-0125
027 E0 1A C-0126
028 E0 1B C-0127
029 E0 1C C-0128
030 E0 1D C-0129
031 E0 1E C-0130
032 E0 1F C-0170
033 E0 20 C-0171
034 E0 21 C-0172
035 E0 22 C-0173
036 E0 23 C-0174
037 E0 24 C-0175
038 E0 25 C-0176
039 E0 26 C-0201
040 E0 27 C-0202
041 E0 28 C-0203
042 E0 29 C-0209
043 E0 2A C-0212
044 E0 2B C-0215
045 E0 2C C-0218
046 E0 2D C-0221
047 E0 2E C-0224
048 E0 2F C-0227
049 E0 30 C-0228
I-142
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
050 E0 31 C-0229
051 E0 32 C-0301
052 E0 33 C-0302
053 E0 34 C-0303
054 E0 35 C-0304
055 E0 36 C-0305
056 E0 37 C-0306
057 E0 38 C-0307
058 E0 39 C-0308
059 E0 3A C-0309
060 E0 3B C-0310
061 E0 3C C-0311
062 E0 3D C-0312
063 E0 3E C-0313
064 E0 3F C-0315
065 E0 40 C-0316
066 E0 41 C-0317
067 E0 42 C-0318
068 E0 43 C-0319
069 E0 44 C-0320
070 E0 45 C-0321
071 E0 46 C-0325
072 E0 47 C-0326
073 E0 48 C-0327
074 E0 49 C-0328
075 E0 4A C-0329
076 E0 4B C-0330
077 E0 4C C-0331
078 E0 4D C-0332
079 E0 4E C-0333
080 E0 4F C-0334
081 E0 50 C-0335
082 E0 51 C-0336
083 E0 52 C-0337
084 E0 53 C-0338
085 E0 54 C-0339
086 E0 55 C-0340
087 E0 56 C-0341
088 E0 57 C-0342
089 E0 58 C-0343
090 E0 59 C-0344
091 E0 5A C-0345
092 E0 5B C-0346
093 E0 5C C-0347
094 E0 5D C-0348
095 E0 5E C-0349
096 E0 5F C-0350
097 E0 60 C-0351
098 E0 61 C-0352
099 E0 62 C-0353
100 E0 63 C-0354
101 E0 64 C-0355
102 E0 65 C-0356
103 E0 66 C-0357
104 E0 67 C-0358
105 E0 68 C-0359
106 E0 69 C-0360
I-143
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
107 E0 6A C-0361
108 E0 6B C-0362
109 E0 6C C-0363
110 E0 6D C-0364
111 E0 6E C-0365
112 E0 6F C-0366
113 E0 70 C-0367
114 E0 71 C-0368
115 E0 72 C-0369
116 E0 73 C-0370
117 E0 74 C-0371
118 E0 75 C-0372
119 E0 76 C-0401
120 E0 77 C-0402
121 E0 78 -
122 E0 79 -
123 E0 7A C-0405
124 E0 7B C-0407
125 E0 7C C-0408
126 E0 7D C-0409
127 E0 7E C-0410
128 E0 7F C-0413
129 E0 80 C-0414
130 E0 81 C-0419
131 E0 82 C-0420
132 E0 83 C-0421
133 E0 84 C-0422
134 E0 85 C-0423
135 E0 86 C-0424
136 E0 87 C-0425
137 E0 88 C-0426
138 E0 89 C-0427
139 E0 8A C-0428
140 E0 8B C-0429
141 E0 8C C-0430
142 E0 8D C-0431
143 E0 8E C-0432
144 E0 8F C-0433
145 E0 90 C-0434
146 E0 91 C-0435
147 E0 92 C-0436
148 E0 93 C-0437
149 E0 94 C-0438
150 E0 95 C-0439
151 E0 96 C-0440
152 E0 97 C-0441
153 E0 98 C-1005
154 E0 99 C-1006
155 E0 9A C-1007
156 E0 9B C-1009
157 E0 9C C-1010
158 E0 9D C-1011
159 E0 9E C-1012
160 E0 9F C-1013
161 E0 A0 C-1014
162 E0 A1 C-1017
163 E0 A2 C-1102
I-144
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
164 E0 A3 C-1103
165 E0 A4 C-1105
166 E0 A5 C-1106
167 E0 A6 C-1109
168 E0 A7 C-1113
169 E0 A8 C-1114
170 E0 A9 C-1115
171 E0 AA C-1124
172 E0 AB C-1125
173 E0 AC C-1127
174 E0 AD C-1132
175 E0 AE C-1137
176 E0 AF C-1141
177 E0 B0 C-1144
178 E0 B1 C-1147
179 E0 B2 C-1153
180 E0 B3 C-1154
181 E0 B4 C-1155
182 E0 B5 C-1156
183 E0 B6 C-1157
184 E0 B7 C-1158
185 E0 B8 C-1159
186 E0 B9 C-1170
187 E0 BA C-1171
188 E0 BB C-1172
189 E0 BC C-1173
190 E0 BD C-1174
191 E0 BE C-1175
192 E0 BF C-1176
193 E0 C0 C-1177
194 E0 C1 C-1179
195 E0 C2 C-1180
196 E0 C3 C-1181
197 E0 C4 C-1201
198 E0 C5 C-1202
199 E0 C6 C-1203
200 E0 C7 C-1204
201 E0 C8 C-1205
202 E0 C9 C-1206
203 E0 CA C-1211
204 E0 CB C-1212
205 E0 CC C-1213
206 E0 CD C-1214
207 E0 CE C-1215
208 E0 CF C-1216
209 E0 D0 C-1221
210 E0 D1 C-1222
211 E0 D2 C-1223
212 E0 D3 C-1224
213 E0 D4 C-1225
214 E0 D5 C-1226
215 E0 D6 C-1227
216 E0 D7 C-1228
217 E0 D8 C-1229
218 E0 D9 C-1230
219 E0 DA C-1231
220 E0 DB C-1232
I-145
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
221 E0 DC C-1233
222 E0 DD C-1234
223 E0 DE C-1235
224 E0 DF C-1241
225 E0 E0 C-1242
226 E0 E1 C-1243
227 E0 E2 C-1244
228 E0 E3 C-1245
229 E0 E4 C-1246
230 E0 E5 C-1247
231 E0 E6 C-1248
232 E0 E7 C-1249
233 E0 E8 C-1250
234 E0 E9 C-1251
235 E0 EA C-1252
236 E0 EB C-1253
237 E0 EC C-1254
238 E0 ED C-1255
239 E0 EE C-1256
240 E0 EF C-1257
241 E0 F0 C-1258
242 E0 F1 C-1259
243 E0 F2 C-1260
244 E0 F3 C-1261
245 E0 F4 C-1262
246 E0 F5 C-1263
247 E0 F6 C-1264
248 E0 F7 C-1265
249 E0 F8 C-1266
250 E0 F9 C-1267
251 E0 FA C-1268
252 E0 FB C-1269
253 E0 FC C-1270
254 E0 FD C-1271
255 E0 FE C-1272
256 E0 FF C-1273
257 E1 00 C-1274
258 E1 01 C-1275
259 E1 02 -
260 E1 03 -
261 E1 04 -
262 E1 05 -
263 E1 06 -
264 E1 07 C-1281
265 E1 08 C-1282
266 E1 09 C-1290
267 E1 0A C-1291
268 E1 0B C-1292
269 E1 0C C-1293
270 E1 0D C-1294
271 E1 0E C-1295
272 E1 0F C-1296
273 E1 10 C-1297
274 E1 11 C-1298
275 E1 12 C-1299
276 E1 13 C-1301
277 E1 14 C-1302
I-146
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
278 E1 15 C-1303
279 E1 16 C-1304
280 E1 17 C-1305
281 E1 18 C-1306
282 E1 19 C-1307
283 E1 1A C-1308
284 E1 1B C-1309
285 E1 1C C-1310
286 E1 1D C-1311
287 E1 1E -
288 E1 1F -
289 E1 20 C-1330
290 E1 21 C-1331
291 E1 22 C-1332
292 E1 23 C-1333
293 E1 24 C-1334
294 E1 25 C-1341
295 E1 26 C-1342
296 E1 27 C-1351
297 E1 28 C-1352
298 E1 29 C-1353
299 E1 2A C-1354
300 E1 2B C-1355
301 E1 2C C-1356
302 E1 2D C-1357
303 E1 2E C-1358
304 E1 2F C-1359
305 E1 30 C-1360
306 E1 31 C-1361
307 E1 32 C-1364
308 E1 33 C-1402
309 E1 34 C-1403
310 E1 35 C-1404
311 E1 36 C-1406
312 E1 37 C-1407
313 E1 38 C-1408
314 E1 39 C-1411
315 E1 3A C-1412
316 E1 3B -
317 E1 3C C-1432
318 E1 3D C-1433
319 E1 3E C-1435
320 E1 3F C-1436
321 E1 40 C-1437
322 E1 41 C-1438
323 E1 42 C-1439
324 E1 43 C-1440
325 E1 44 C-1441
326 E1 45 C-1442
327 E1 46 C-1451
328 E1 47 C-1452
329 E1 48 C-1454
330 E1 49 C-1455
331 E1 4A C-1456
332 E1 4B C-1499
333 E1 4C C-1501
334 E1 4D C-1502
I-147
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
335 E1 4E C-1504
336 E1 4F C-1505
337 E1 50 C-1506
338 E1 51 C-1507
339 E1 52 C-1508
340 E1 53 C-1509
341 E1 54 C-1510
342 E1 55 C-1511
343 E1 56 C-1512
344 E1 57 C-1513
345 E1 58 C-1514
346 E1 59 C-1515
347 E1 5A C-1516
348 E1 5B C-1517
349 E1 5C C-1518
350 E1 5D C-1519
351 E1 5E C-1520
352 E1 5F C-1521
353 E1 60 C-1522
354 E1 61 C-1523
355 E1 62 C-1524
356 E1 63 C-1525
357 E1 64 C-1526
358 E1 65 C-1527
359 E1 66 C-1528
360 E1 67 C-1530
361 E1 68 C-1531
362 E1 69 C-1532
363 E1 6A C-1534
364 E1 6B C-1537
365 E1 6C C-1538
366 E1 6D C-1540
367 E1 6E C-1541
368 E1 6F C-1542
369 E1 70 C-1543
370 E1 71 C-1544
371 E1 72 C-1545
372 E1 73 C-1546
373 E1 74 C-1547
374 E1 75 C-1548
375 E1 76 C-1549
376 E1 77 C-1550
377 E1 78 C-1551
378 E1 79 C-1552
379 E1 7A C-1553
380 E1 7B C-1554
381 E1 7C C-1555
382 E1 7D C-1556
383 E1 7E C-1557
384 E1 7F C-1558
385 E1 80 C-1559
386 E1 81 C-1560
387 E1 82 C-1561
388 E1 83 C-1562
389 E1 84 C-1565
390 E1 85 C-1566
391 E1 86 C-1567
I-148
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
392 E1 87 -
393 E1 88 -
394 E1 89 -
395 E1 8A C-2001
396 E1 8B -
397 E1 8C C-2003
398 E1 8D C-2004
399 E1 8E C-2201
400 E1 8F C-2202
401 E1 90 C-2203
402 E1 91 C-2204
403 E1 92 C-2211
404 E1 93 C-2212
405 E1 94 C-2213
406 E1 95 C-2214
407 E1 96 C-2215
408 E1 97 C-2216
409 E1 98 C-2217
410 E1 99 C-2218
411 E1 9A C-2219
412 E1 9B C-2220
413 E1 9C C-2221
414 E1 9D C-2222
415 E1 9E C-2223
416 E1 9F C-2224
417 E1 A0 C-2225
418 E1 A1 C-2226
419 E1 A2 C-2227
420 E1 A3 C-2228
421 E1 A4 C-2229
422 E1 A5 C-2230
423 E1 A6 C-2231
424 E1 A7 C-2232
425 E1 A8 C-2233
426 E1 A9 C-2234
427 E1 AA C-2235
428 E1 AB C-2236
429 E1 AC C-2237
430 E1 AD C-2238
431 E1 AE C-2239
432 E1 AF C-2242
433 E1 B0 C-2243
434 E1 B1 C-2302
435 E1 B2 C-2303
436 E1 B3 C-2304
437 E1 B4 C-2306
438 E1 B5 C-2307
439 E1 B6 C-2308
440 E1 B7 C-2309
441 E1 B8 C-2401
442 E1 B9 C-2402
443 E1 BA C-2403
444 E1 BB C-2404
445 E1 BC C-2411
446 E1 BD C-2412
447 E1 BE C-2413
448 E1 BF C-2414
I-149
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
449 E1 C0 C-2421
450 E1 C1 C-2422
451 E1 C2 C-2423
452 E1 C3 C-2424
453 E1 C4 C-2431
454 E1 C5 C-2432
455 E1 C6 C-2433
456 E1 C7 C-2434
457 E1 C8 C-2441
458 E1 C9 C-2442
459 E1 CA C-2443
460 E1 CB C-2444
461 E1 CC C-2451
462 E1 CD C-2452
463 E1 CE C-2453
464 E1 CF C-2454
465 E1 D0 C-2461
466 E1 D1 C-2462
467 E1 D2 C-2463
468 E1 D3 C-2464
469 E1 D4 C-2470
470 E1 D5 C-2701
471 E1 D6 C-2702
472 E1 D7 C-2703
473 E1 D8 C-2704
474 E1 D9 C-2711
475 E1 DA C-2712
476 E1 DB C-2713
477 E1 DC C-2714
478 E1 DD C-2720
479 E1 DE C-2721
480 E1 DF C-2731
481 E1 E0 C-2732
482 E1 E1 C-2733
483 E1 E2 C-2734
484 E1 E3 C-2740
485 E1 E4 C-2741
486 E1 E5 C-2742
487 E1 E6 C-2743
488 E1 E7 C-2744
489 E1 E8 C-2751
490 E1 E9 C-2752
491 E1 EA C-2753
492 E1 EB C-2754
493 E1 EC C-2801
494 E1 ED C-2802
495 E1 EE C-2803
496 E1 EF C-2804
497 E1 F0 C-2805
498 E1 F1 C-2806
499 E1 F2 C-2807
500 E1 F3 C-2808
501 E1 F4 C-2811
502 E1 F5 C-2812
503 E1 F6 C-2813
504 E1 F7 C-2814
505 E1 F8 C-2821
I-150
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
506 E1 F9 C-2822
507 E1 FA C-2823
508 E1 FB C-2824
509 E1 FC C-2831
510 E1 FD C-2832
511 E1 FE C-2833
512 E1 FF C-2834
513 E2 00 C-2840
514 E2 01 C-2841
515 E2 02 -
516 E2 03 -
517 E2 04 C-2851
518 E2 05 C-2852
519 E2 06 C-2853
520 E2 07 -
521 E2 08 -
522 E2 09 -
523 E2 0A -
524 E2 0B -
525 E2 0C -
526 E2 0D -
527 E2 0E -
528 E2 0F -
529 E2 10 -
530 E2 11 C-3101
531 E2 12 C-3102
532 E2 13 C-3103
533 E2 14 C-3104
534 E2 15 C-3105
535 E2 16 C-3106
536 E2 17 C-3108
537 E2 18 C-3110
538 E2 19 -
539 E2 1A -
540 E2 1B C-3304
541 E2 1C C-3305
542 E2 1D C-3306
543 E2 1E C-3310
544 E2 1F C-3501
545 E2 20 C-3502
546 E2 21 C-3503
547 E2 22 C-3504
548 E2 23 C-3505
549 E2 24 C-3506
550 E2 25 C-3520
551 E2 26 C-37xx
552 E2 27 C-3801
553 E2 28 C-3802
554 E2 29 C-3901
555 E2 2A C-3902
556 E2 2B C-3903
557 E2 2C C-3904
558 E2 2D C-3905
559 E2 2E C-3906
560 E2 2F C-3907
561 E2 30 C-3908
562 E2 31 C-3909
I-151
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
563 E2 32 C-3910
564 E2 33 C-3911
565 E2 34 C-3914
566 E2 35 C-3915
567 E2 36 C-3916
568 E2 37 C-3917
569 E2 38 -
570 E2 39 C-4101
571 E2 3A C-4102
572 E2 3B C-4103
573 E2 3C C-4104
574 E2 3D -
575 E2 3E C-4302
576 E2 3F C-4501
577 E2 40 C-4502
578 E2 41 C-4503
579 E2 42 C-4504
580 E2 43 C-4511
581 E2 44 C-4512
582 E2 45 C-4513
583 E2 46 C-4514
584 E2 47 C-4520
585 E2 48 C-4521
586 E2 49 C-4522
587 E2 4A C-4523
588 E2 4B C-4531
589 E2 4C C-4532
590 E2 4D C-4533
591 E2 4E C-4534
592 E2 4F C-4541
593 E2 50 C-4542
594 E2 51 C-4543
595 E2 52 C-4544
596 E2 53 -
597 E2 54 -
598 E2 55 -
599 E2 56 -
600 E2 57 C-4601
601 E2 58 C-4602
602 E2 59 C-4603
603 E2 5A C-4604
604 E2 5B C-4611
605 E2 5C C-4612
606 E2 5D C-4613
607 E2 5E C-4614
608 E2 5F C-4621
609 E2 60 C-4622
610 E2 61 C-4623
611 E2 62 C-4624
612 E2 63 C-4631
613 E2 64 C-4632
614 E2 65 C-4633
615 E2 66 C-4641
616 E2 67 C-4642
617 E2 68 C-4643
618 E2 69 C-4644
619 E2 6A -
I-152
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
620 E2 6B -
621 E2 6C -
622 E2 6D -
623 E2 6E -
624 E2 6F -
625 E2 70 -
626 E2 71 -
627 E2 72 C-4661
628 E2 73 C-4662
629 E2 74 C-4663
630 E2 75 -
631 E2 76 -
632 E2 77 -
633 E2 78 C-4705
634 E2 79 -
635 E2 7A -
636 E2 7B C-4709
637 E2 7C C-4713
638 E2 7D C-4714
639 E2 7E C-4715
640 E2 7F C-4716
641 E2 80 C-4717
642 E2 81 C-4718
643 E2 82 C-4719
644 E2 83 C-4720
645 E2 84 C-4721
646 E2 85 C-4722
647 E2 86 C-4723
648 E2 87 C-4724
649 E2 88 C-4725
650 E2 89 -
651 E2 8A C-4840
652 E2 8B C-4850
653 E2 8C C-5001
654 E2 8D C-5002
655 E2 8E C-5003
656 E2 8F C-5004
657 E2 90 C-5005
658 E2 91 C-5006
659 E2 92 C-5007
660 E2 93 C-5010
661 E2 94 C-5012
662 E2 95 C-5013
663 E2 96 C-5014
664 E2 97 C-5015
665 E2 98 C-5016
666 E2 99 C-5017
667 E2 9A C-5018
668 E2 9B C-5019
669 E2 9C C-5020
670 E2 9D C-5021
671 E2 9E C-5022
672 E2 9F C-5023
673 E2 A0 C-5024
674 E2 A1 C-5025
675 E2 A2 C-5100
676 E2 A3 C-5101
I-153
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
677 E2 A4 C-5102
678 E2 A5 C-5103
679 E2 A6 C-5104
680 E2 A7 C-5105
681 E2 A8 C-5106
682 E2 A9 C-5107
683 E2 AA -
684 E2 AB C-5109
685 E2 AC C-5110
686 E2 AD C-5111
687 E2 AE C-5121
688 E2 AF C-5137
689 E2 B0 C-5138
690 E2 B1 C-5150
691 E2 B2 C-5401
692 E2 B3 C-5402
693 E2 B4 C-5403
694 E2 B5 C-5404
695 E2 B6 C-5405
696 E2 B7 C-6102
697 E2 B8 C-6103
698 E2 B9 C-6105
699 E2 BA -
700 E2 BB C-6702
701 E2 BC C-6703
702 E2 BD C-6704
703 E2 BE -
704 E2 BF C-6706
705 E2 C0 C-6707
706 E2 C1 C-6708
707 E2 C2 -
708 E2 C3 -
709 E2 C4 -
710 E2 C5 -
711 E2 C6 -
712 E2 C7 -
713 E2 C8 -
714 E2 C9 -
715 E2 CA -
716 E2 CB -
717 E2 CC -
718 E2 CD C-6720
719 E2 CE -
720 E2 CF C-6722
721 E2 D0 -
722 E2 D1 C-6725
723 E2 D2 C-6751
724 E2 D3 C-6752
725 E2 D4 C-6801
726 E2 D5 C-6F01
727 E2 D6 C-7001
728 E2 D7 C-8101
729 E2 D8 C-8102
730 E2 D9 C-8103
731 E2 DA C-8106
732 E2 DB C-8107
733 E2 DC C-8302
I-154
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
734 E2 DD C-8401
735 E2 DE C-9401
736 E2 DF C-9402
737 E2 E0 C-C101
738 E2 E1 C-C102
739 E2 E2 C-C104
740 E2 E3 C-C109
741 E2 E4 C-C111
742 E2 E5 C-C112
743 E2 E6 C-C113
744 E2 E7 C-C114
745 E2 E8 C-C116
746 E2 E9 C-C117
747 E2 EA C-C118
748 E2 EB C-C119
749 E2 EC C-C120
750 E2 ED C-C123
751 E2 EE C-C124
752 E2 EF C-C150
753 E2 F0 C-C151
754 E2 F1 -
755 E2 F2 C-C201
756 E2 F3 C-C211
757 E2 F4 C-C212
758 E2 F5 C-C213
759 E2 F6 C-C214
760 E2 F7 C-C215
761 E2 F8 C-C216
762 E2 F9 C-C217
763 E2 FA C-C218
764 E2 FB C-C219
765 E2 FC -
766 E2 FD -
767 E2 FE -
768 E2 FF C-D010
769 E3 00 C-D020
770 E3 01 C-D030
771 E3 02 C-D040
772 E3 03 C-D050
773 E3 04 C-D060
774 E3 05 C-D070
775 E3 06 C-D080
776 E3 07 C-D0C0
777 E3 08 C-D0D0
778 E3 09 C-D0D1
779 E3 0A C-D0E1
780 E3 0B C-D0E3
781 E3 0C C-D0E4
782 E3 0D C-D0E5
783 E3 0E C-D0E6
784 E3 0F C-D0EF
785 E3 10 C-D0F0
786 E3 11 C-D0F1
787 E3 12 C-E001
788 E3 13 C-E002
789 E3 14 C-E003
790 E3 15 C-E004
I-155
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
791 E3 16 C-E005
792 E3 17 C-E006
793 E3 18 C-E007
794 E3 19 C-E008
795 E3 1A C-E009
796 E3 1B C-E016
797 E3 1C C-E017
798 E3 1D -
799 E3 1E -
800 E3 1F -
801 E3 20 -
802 E3 21 -
803 E3 22 -
804 E3 23 -
805 E3 24 -
806 E3 25 -
807 E3 26 C-2240
808 E3 27 C-2244
809 E3 28 C-2245
810 E3 29 C-2246
811 E3 2A C-2247
812 E3 2B C-4727
813 E3 2C C-4728
814 E3 2D C-3919
815 E3 2E C-E018
816 E3 2F C-0131
817 E3 30 C-0132
818 E3 31 C-0322
819 E3 32 C-2475
820 E3 33 C-2854
821 E3 34 C-3109
822 E3 35 C-4670
823 E3 36 C-C121
824 E3 37 C-C137
825 E3 38 C-C138
826 E3 39 C-C139
827 E3 3A C-C140
828 E3 3B C-C152
829 E3 3C C-C156
830 E3 3D C-1276
831 E3 3E C-1277
832 E3 3F C-1278
833 E3 40 C-1279
834 E3 41 C-1280
835 E3 42 C-1312
836 E3 43 C-1313
837 E3 44 C-1413
838 E3 45 C-1620
839 E3 46 C-1621
840 E3 47 C-1622
841 E3 48 C-1623
842 E3 49 C-1625
843 E3 4A C-1626
844 E3 4B C-1627
845 E3 4C C-1628
846 E3 4D C-1629
847 E3 4E C-1630
I-156
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
848 E3 4F C-1632
849 E3 50 C-1633
850 E3 51 C-1480
851 E3 52 C-1018
852 E3 53 C-1409
853 E3 54 C-1443
854 E3 55 C-1457
855 E3 56 C-C126
856 E3 57 C-8001
857 E3 58 C-8002
858 E3 59 -
859 E3 5A -
860 E3 5B -
861 E3 5C -
862 E3 5D -
863 E3 5E -
864 E3 5F -
865 E3 60 -
866 E3 61 -
867 E3 62 -
868 E3 63 -
869 E3 64 -
870 E3 65 -
871 E3 66 -
872 E3 67 -
873 E3 68 -
874 E3 69 -
875 E3 6A -
876 E3 6B -
877 E3 6C -
878 E3 6D -
879 E3 6E -
880 E3 6F -
881 E3 70 -
882 E3 71 -
883 E3 72 -
884 E3 73 -
885 E3 74 -
886 E3 75 -
887 E3 76 -
888 E3 77 -
889 E3 78 -
890 E3 79 -
891 E3 7A -
892 E3 7B -
893 E3 7C -
894 E3 7D -
895 E3 7E -
896 E3 7F -
897 E3 80 -
898 E3 81 -
899 E3 82 -
900 E3 83 -
901 E3 84 -
902 E3 85 -
903 E3 86 -
904 E3 87 -
I-157
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
905 E3 88 -
906 E3 89 -
907 E3 8A -
908 E3 8B -
909 E3 8C -
910 E3 8D -
911 E3 8E -
912 E3 8F -
913 E3 90 -
914 E3 91 -
915 E3 92 -
916 E3 93 -
917 E3 94 -
918 E3 95 -
919 E3 96 -
920 E3 97 -
921 E3 98 -
922 E3 99 -
923 E3 9A -
924 E3 9B -
925 E3 9C -
926 E3 9D -
927 E3 9E -
928 E3 9F -
929 E3 A0 -
930 E3 A1 -
931 E3 A2 -
932 E3 A3 -
933 E3 A4 -
934 E3 A5 -
935 E3 A6 -
936 E3 A7 -
937 E3 A8 -
938 E3 A9 -
939 E3 AA -
940 E3 AB -
941 E3 AC -
942 E3 AD -
943 E3 AE -
944 E3 AF -
945 E3 B0 -
946 E3 B1 -
947 E3 B2 -
948 E3 B3 -
949 E3 B4 -
950 E3 B5 -
951 E3 B6 -
952 E3 B7 -
953 E3 B8 -
954 E3 B9 -
955 E3 BA -
956 E3 BB -
957 E3 BC -
958 E3 BD -
959 E3 BE -
960 E3 BF -
961 E3 C0 -
I-158
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
962 E3 C1 -
963 E3 C2 -
964 E3 C3 -
965 E3 C4 -
966 E3 C5 -
967 E3 C6 -
968 E3 C7 -
969 E3 C8 -
970 E3 C9 -
971 E3 CA -
972 E3 CB -
973 E3 CC -
974 E3 CD -
975 E3 CE -
976 E3 CF -
977 E3 D0 -
978 E3 D1 -
979 E3 D2 -
980 E3 D3 -
981 E3 D4 -
982 E3 D5 -
983 E3 D6 -
984 E3 D7 -
985 E3 D8 -
986 E3 D9 -
987 E3 DA -
988 E3 DB -
989 E3 DC -
990 E3 DD -
991 E3 DE -
992 E3 DF -
993 E3 E0 -
994 E3 E1 -
995 E3 E2 -
996 E3 E3 -
997 E3 E4 -
998 E3 E5 -
999 E3 E6 -
1000 E3 E7 -
1001 E3 E8 -
1002 E3 E9 -
1003 E3 EA -
1004 E3 EB -
1005 E3 EC -
1006 E3 ED -
1007 E3 EE -
1008 E3 EF -
1009 E3 F0 -
1010 E3 F1 -
1011 E3 F2 -
1012 E3 F3 -
1013 E3 F4 -
1014 E3 F5 -
1015 E3 F6 -
1016 E3 F7 -
1017 E3 F8 -
1018 E3 F9 -
I-159
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
1019 E3 FA -
1020 E3 FB -
1021 E3 FC -
1022 E3 FD -
1023 E3 FE -
1024 E3 FF -
4.6.11 SC Data of Time Series

For the latest 20 items of error codes, check the SC Code, Total Counter, Date, Time, Machine (00: Idling, 01: Scan, 02: Print, 03: Scan/Print).
4.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 10 items of the maintenance counter reset history appears.
• Item
• Reset Date
• Maintenance Counter
• Maintenance Limit Data
• Counter Average
• Counter Reset Count
(3) Confirmation steps of Maintenance Counter Reset

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter Reset].
3. "Maintenance Counter Reset screen"
Check the maintenance counter reset history.
4.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency for respective parts.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 50 items of the maintenance counter reset history appears
• Item
• Number
(Number of the special parts counter)
• Parts Name
• P/N
• Counter, Limit
• Replacement Count
• ORU
(The mark "*" means that the part is replaced in the ORU-M mode. )
I-160
(3) Confirmation steps of Parts History in Time Series

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [02 Parts History in Time Series].
3. "Parts History in Time Series screen"
Check the special parts counter reset history.
4.6.14 Each Paper Type Counter

Check the number of originals that are fed for each paper type and the weight.
Note
• For each type of paper that is specified in the tray setting, small size paper is 1 count for each paper exit of the single side and 2
counts of the double side, large size paper is 2 counts for the single side and 4 counts for the double side.
Number Item
1 Plain (55-61)
2 Plain (62-74)
3 Plain (75-80)
4 Plain (81-91)
5 Plain (92-105)
6 Plain (106-135)
7 Plain (136-176)
8 Plain (177-216)
9 Plain (217-256)
10 Plain (257-300)
11 Plain (301-350)
12 Fine (55-61)
13 Fine (62-74)
14 Fine (75-80)
15 Fine (81-91)
16 Fine (92-105)
17 Fine (106-135)
18 Fine (136-176)
19 Fine (177-216)
20 Fine (217-256)
21 Fine (257-300)
22 Fine (301-350)
23 Color (55-61)
24 Color (62-74)
25 Color (75-80)
26 Color (81-91)
27 Color (92-105)
28 Color (106-135)
29 Color (136-176)
30 Color (177-216)
I-161
Number Item
31 Color (217-256)
32 Color (257-300)
33 Color (301-350)
34 Coated-GL (55-61)
38 Coated-GL (92-105)
39 Coated-GL (106-135)
40 Coated-GL (136-176)
41 Coated-GL (177-216)
42 Coated-GL (217-256)
43 Coated-GL (257-300)
44 Coated-GL (301-350)
45 Coated-GO (55-61)
49 Coated-GO (92-105)
50 Coated-GO (106-135)
51 Coated-GO (136-176)
52 Coated-GO (177-216)
53 Coated-GO (217-256)
54 Coated-GO (257-300)
55 Coated-GO (301-350)
56 Coated-ML (55-61)
60 Coated-ML (92-105)
61 Coated-ML (106-135)
62 Coated-ML (136-176)
63 Coated-ML (177-216)
64 Coated-ML (217-256)
65 Coated-ML (257-300)
66 Coated-ML (301-350)
67 Coated-MO (55-61)
71 Coated-MO (92-105)
72 Coated-MO (106-135)
73 Coated-MO (136-176)
74 Coated-MO (177-216)
75 Coated-MO (217-256)
76 Coated-MO (257-300)
77 Coated-MO (301-350)
4.6.15 ORU-M Maintenance History

(1) Usage
Check the frequency of the unit replacement, then predict the timing of replacing the ORU-M target part and collect each type of information.
(2) Specifications
Item
• Information of ORU-M maintenance history:
Unit replacing Start-End date and the Start-End time, Downtime (m), Total Counter, End Status (Normal, error)
• Information of each ORU-M maintenance unit:
Parts Name, P/N, Serial Number, Life Cycle, Replacement Count, Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble, Transport
Trouble or JAM)
• Information of total ORU-M maintenance:
I-162
Maintenance Count, Replace Unit Number, Downtime Average

Maximum storable number
• The data of the latest 125 replacements of the ORU-M corresponding unit are stored.
When one of the ORU-M counters is reset, up to 125 data including the latest replacement date and the replaced unit information are
stored.
Example
When you replace 4 units at a maintenance, the data of the latest 25 maintenance can be stored.
(Maintenance date (1 record) + 4 units replaced (4 records) = 5 records
With this function, the following items can be checked.
Name of replaced unit
Part No. (P/N)
Serial Number
Life cycle
Replacement Count
Replace Reason (PM, CM (image quality), CM (machine broken))
• The down time of the latest 50 units are stored.
Measures the length of time between the time of entering the ORU-M replacement screen and the time of exiting it.
Up to 50 data (replacement time and replacement date) of each ORU-M corresponding unit are stored. The data older than that are
stored as an averaged value.
(3) ORU-M maintenance history check procedures

1. "ORU-M Maintenance History screen"
Check the ORU maintenance history.
[1] [2]
[1] Information of ORU-M total maintenance history: [2] ORU-M maintenance history information
2. To check the object unit of each maintenance, select the maintenance to display and then press [Information View].
3. "Information View screen"
Check the maintenance of each unit.
4.6.16 RFID Information

(1) RFID
The following units are provided with special IC tag memory (After here, referred to as RFID memory).
I-163
• 2nd transfer unit

• Intermediate transfer unit
• Fusing unit
Each RFID memory stores unique unit serial number, counted number for each part and so on.
When the maintenance target unit is RFID corresponding, CE replaces only the parts which require to be replaced and then write the
maintenance information into the RFID memory.
Note
• Write the data from PC with the dedicated jig. (Refer to E.1.8 Management Tool)
CE refers to the RFID memory and can recognize that the parts replacements by the customers are performed via the main body control. CE
can also check respectively the replacement history and maintenance counter of each part of the unit, and so on.
Note
• Up to 3 RFID corresponding units are connectable to a main body.
(2) RFID Information display

1. "RFID Information screen"
Select each setting item and press [Information View].
• Parts: Select the target unit.
• Unit: Select the target unit when several units are used.
The mark "▲" indicates the unit currently used.
• View Object: Select the display item.
• [Basic Information]
Unit Serial Number, Unit Counter, Replacement Count, Replacement Date, Main Body Serial Number
• [Parts Counter Info.]
Parts Name, Status (Have to replace or Not have to replace), Replacement Count, Counter
4.6.17 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter
Displays the counter of the target part.
When the target part is replaced, reset the counter of that part to manage the service history.
(1) Checking, setting and resetting procedure

Press [03 Parts Counter].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Parts Counter]
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter].
4. "Special Parts Counter menu screen"
Press the button that includes the target parts from the menu.
5. "Special Parts Counter screen"
As necessary, press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Special Parts Counter screen" pages and check the counter.
6. To reset the counter, press [▼] or [▲] to select the target item.
7. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Special Parts Counter screen".
4.6.18 Special Parts Counter

Note
• Be sure to reset the parts counter after you replace any of the following parts. Otherwise, the image failure or the jam occurs.
1. Number 003 to 008: Dust-proof filter/Rt, dust-proof filter/Rr1, dust-proof filter/Lt, dust-proof filter/Rr2, dust-proof filter/Rr3,
dust-proof filter/Rr4
2. Number 013 to 020: Developer/Y, developer/M, developer/C and developer/K
3. Number 021 to 028: Drum unit/Y, drum unit/M, drum unit/C and drum unit/K
4. Number 041 to 048: Developer/Y, developer/M, developer/C and developer/K
5. Number 061 to 062: Belt cleaning blade
6. Number 063 to 066: 1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, 1st transfer roller/K
• When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes.
Numbe CSRC Category Parts name Parts number Count conditions
r parameter
001 Z1 00 Waste Waste toner box A1RFR700 *1
Toner / The waste toner full sensor (PS48) detects the
Filter limit automatically.
002 Z1 01 Ozone filter A1RF1144 *1
I-164

r parameter
003 Z1 02 Dust-proof filter/Rt (%) A5AWR70B Counted for each color in the way according to
the print coverage or the slide distance of the
developer. The result is displayed in percentage
in comparison with the end of its parts life.
The counters number 003 to number 008 are
reset simultaneously. (When the DIPSW5-3 and
DIPSW5-6 are "0".)
Only the counter number 003 is reset. (When the
DIPSW5-3 or DIPSW5-6 is "1".)
The periodical replacement count can be
changed with DIPSW5-3 and DIPSW5-6.
004 Z1 03 Dust-proof filter/Rr1 (%) A1RFR745 Counted for each color in the way according to
DIPSW5-6 are "0".)
reset simultaneously. (When the DIPSW5-3 or
DIPSW5-6 is "1".)
005 Z1 04 Dust-proof filter/Lt (%) A1RFR744 Counted for each color in the way according to
DIPSW5-6 are "0".)
DIPSW5-6 is "1".)
DIPSW5-6 are "0".)
DIPSW5-6 is "1".)
DIPSW5-6 are "0".)
DIPSW5-6 is "1".)
DIPSW5-6 are "0".)
DIPSW5-6 is "1".)
009 Z1 08 Developing charge filter/Y A1RFR703 *1
reset simultaneously.
010 Z1 09 Developing charge filter/M A1RFR703 *1
011 Z1 0A Developing charge filter/C A1RFR703 *1
I-165

r parameter
012 Z1 0B Developing charge filter/K A1RFR703 *1
013 Z1 0C Charging Charging Corona/Y (Page) A5AWR70M *2
Corona / When this counter is reset, number 014 is also
Drum reset.
014 Z1 0D Charging Corona/Y (Time A5AWR70M Counts the charging time of the charging colona/
%) Y and shows the count in percentage with
respect to the end of its parts life.
When this counter is reset, number 013 is also
reset.
015 Z1 0E Charging Corona/M (Page) A5AWR70M *2
reset.
016 Z1 0F Charging Corona/M (Time A5AWR70M Counts the charging time of the charging colona/
%) M and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
017 Z1 10 Charging Corona/C (Page) A5AWR70M *2
reset.
018 Z1 11 Charging Corona/C (Time A5AWR70M Counts the charging time of the charging colona/
%) C and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
019 Z1 12 Charging Corona/K (Page) A5AWR70M *1
reset.
020 Z1 13 Charging Corona/K (Time A5AWR70M Counts the charging time of the charging colona/
%) K and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
021 Z1 14 Drum Unit/Y (Page) A6DY0Y1 *2
A6DYWY1 When this counter is reset, number 022 is also
reset.
022 Z1 15 Drum Unit/Y (Distance %) A6DY0Y1 Counts the travel distance of the drum/Y and the
A6DYWY1 lubricant apply brush/Y. Shows either of the
counts that is near its end of the life in
percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
reset.
023 Z1 16 Drum Unit/M (Page) A6DY0Y1 *2
reset.
024 Z1 17 Drum Unit/M (Distance %) A6DY0Y1 Counts the travel distance of the drum/M and the
A6DYWY1 lubricant apply brush/M. Shows either of the
life.
reset.
025 Z1 18 Drum Unit/C (Page) A6DY0Y1 *2
reset.
026 Z1 19 Drum Unit/C (Distance %) A6DY0Y1 Counts the travel distance of the drum/C and the
A6DYWY1 lubricant apply brush/C. Shows either of the
life.
reset.
027 Z1 1A Drum Unit/K (Page) A6DY0Y1 *1
reset.
I-166

r parameter
028 Z1 1B Drum Unit/K (Distance %) A6DY0Y1 Counts the travel distance of the drum/K and the
A6DYWY1 lubricant apply brush/K. Shows either of the
life.
reset.
029 Z1 1C - - -
030 Z1 1D - - -
031 Z1 1E 2nd transfer Scattering prevention A1RFR7N7 *1
sheet plate/1 When this counter is reset, number 140 is also
reset.
032 Z1 1F Cleaning side seal plate/Fr A1RFR7N5 *1
033 Z1 20 Cleaning side seal plate/Rr A1RFR7N6 *1
034 Z1 21 2nd transfer assist scraper A1RFR7N8 *1
assy
035 Z1 22 2nd transfer cleaning unit A5AWR703 *1
When this counter is reset, number 031, number
032, number 033, number 034, number 073,
number 074, and number 140 are also reset.
036 Z1 23 Intermediate Intermediate transfer belt A5AW5005 *1
Transfer drive roller
037 Z1 24 Nip formation roller/Up A5AW5013 *1
038 Z1 25 - - -
039 Z1 26 - - -
040 Z1 27 - - -
041 Z1 28 Developing Developer/Y (Page) A5E7700 *2
reset.
042 Z1 29 Developer/Y (Distance %) A5E7700 Counts the drive distance of the developing
roller/Y and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
043 Z1 2A Developer/M (Page) A5E7800 *2
reset.
044 Z1 2B Developer/M (Distance %) A5E7800 Counts the drive distance of the developing
roller/M and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
045 Z1 2C Developer/C (Page) A5E7900 *2
Resetting this counter also resets No.046.
046 Z1 2D Developer/C (Distance %) A5E7900 Counts the drive distance of the developing
roller/C and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
047 Z1 2E Developer/K (Page) A5E7600 *1
reset.
048 Z1 2F Developer/K (Distance %) A5E7600 Counts the drive distance of the developing
roller/K and shows the count in percentage with
049 Z1 30 Developing Unit/Y (Page) A5AWR701 *2
reset.
I-167

r parameter
050 Z1 31 Developing Unit/Y A5AWR701 Counts the drive distance of the developing
(Distance %) roller/Y and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
changed with DIPSW24-4.
051 Z1 32 Developing Unit/M (Page) A5AWR701 *2
reset.
052 Z1 33 Developing Unit/M A5AWR701 Counts the drive distance of the developing
(Distance %) roller/M and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
053 Z1 34 Developing Unit/C (Page) A5AWR701 *2
reset.
054 Z1 35 Developing Unit/C A5AWR701 Counts the drive distance of the developing
(Distance %) roller/C and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
055 Z1 36 Developing Unit/K (Page) A5AWR701 *1
reset.
056 Z1 37 Developing Unit/K A5AWR701 Counts the drive distance of the developing
(Distance %) roller/K and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
057 Z1 38 Intermediate Intermediate transfer unit A5AWR706 *1
Transfer When this counter is reset, number 036, 058 to
070, 141, 142, 189, 190 is also reset.
058 Z1 39 Intermediate transfer belt A1RF5060 *1
059 Z1 3A Transfer belt cleaning unit A5AWR702 *1
When this counter is reset, number 060, 061,
062, 189, 190 is also reset.
060 Z1 3B Toner collection sheet 65AAR756 *1
061 Z1 3C Belt Cleaning Blade(Page) A5AWR70P *1
reset.
062 Z1 3D Belt Cleaning A5AWR70P Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
Blade(Distance%) transfer belt and shows the count in percentage
with respect to the end of its parts life.
063 Z1 3E 1st transfer roller/Y A5AW5012 *2
064 Z1 3F 1st transfer roller/M A5AW5012 *2
065 Z1 40 1st transfer roller/C A5AW5012 *2
066 Z1 41 1st transfer roller/K A5AW5004 *1
067 Z1 42 Thick paper transfer A5AWR70Q *1
backup guide
068 Z1 43 2nd transfer roller/Up A1RF5004 *1
The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
distance are reset simultaneously.
069 Z1 44 Transfer belt separation 65AAR753 *1
claw
070 Z1 45 Transfer roller bearing A1RF5089 *1
071 Z1 46 2nd transfer 2nd transfer unit A5AWR70A *1
When you reset this counter, number 031 to
number 034, number 071 to number 076,
number 078 to number 080, number 136,
I-168

r parameter
number 138, number 140, and number 192 are
also reset.
072 Z1 47 2nd transfer belt A1RF5204 *1
The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
073 Z1 48 2nd transfer cleaning A5AWR733 *1
blade (Page) When the counter counts by number of pages.
The counters number 074 is reset
simultaneously.
074 Z1 49 2nd transfer cleaning A5AWR733 Multiples the running distance by factor
blade (Distance %) according to the ambient humidity and shows the
result in percentage in comparison with the end
of its part life.
The counters number 073 is reset
simultaneously.
075 Z1 4A Separation discharging A1RFR705 *1
assy The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
076 Z1 4B 2nd transfer entrance A1RFR729 *1
guide/Up
077 Z1 4C - - -
078 Z1 4D 2nd transfer 2nd transfer belt assy A5AWR704 *1
136, number 138, and number 192 are also
reset.
079 Z1 4E 2nd transfer ground plate/1 A1RFR719 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
2 counts in the duplex mode.
080 Z1 4F 2nd transfer ground plate/2 A1RFR720 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
081 Z1 50 Fusing Fusing unit A5AWR707 *1
A5AWR708 When this counter is reset, number 082 to
A5AWR709 number 095, number 097 to number 100,
number 106, number 110, number 111, and
number 114 are also reset.
082 Z1 51 Fusing inlet roller assy A5AWR70E *1
083 Z1 52 Fusing paper exit roller A5AWR726 *1
assy/Up
084 Z1 53 Fusing Belt A5AW7203 *1
085 Z1 54 Fusing steering actuator A5AWR70F *1
assy
086 Z1 55 Upper pressure roller A5AW7201 *1
087 Z1 56 Lower pressure roller A5AW7204 *1
088 Z1 57 Heating roller A5AW7202 *1
089 Z1 58 Fusing claw assy A5AWR70G *1
090 Z1 59 Heat insulating sleeve/2 A5AW7217 *1
091 Z1 5A Heat insulating sleeve/Lw A5AW7217 *1
092 Z1 5B Fusing paper exit roller/Lw A5AW7601 *1
093 Z1 5C Heat insulating sleeve/1 A5AW7449 *1
094 Z1 5D Fusing bearing/1 A5AW7450 *1
095 Z1 5E Fusing belt temperature A5AWR70T *1
sensor/Fr
096 Z1 5F - - -
097 Z1 60 Fusing Upper pressure roller A5AWR70U *1
temperature sensor
098 Z1 61 Fusing heater lamp assy/1 A5AWM31A *1
A5AWM31E
A5AWM31F
099 Z1 62 Fusing heater lamp/4 A5AWM34A *1
A5AWM34E
A5AWM34F
100 Z1 63 Fusing heater lamp assy/5 A5AWM31A *1
A5AWM31E
A5AWM31F
101 Z1 64 - - -
102 Z1 65 - - -
I-169

r parameter
103 Z1 66 Process unit Intermediate transfer A1RFR748 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
separation claw solenoid 2 counts in the duplex mode. (Only weight 55 g/
m2 to 61 g/m2 )
104 Z1 67 Sensor shutter A5AWR705 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
105 Z1 68 - - -
106 Z1 69 Fusing Fusing gear/2 A1RF8098 *1
107 Z1 6A - - -
108 Z1 6B - - -
109 Z1 6C - - -
110 Z1 6D Fusing Fusing bearing/2 A5AW7452 *1
111 Z1 6E Fusing Bearing/Lw A5AW7218 *1
112 Z1 6F Others Lower pressure roller A5AWM151 Times to change the setting to the maximum
cooling fan/Fr, /Rr PWM setting in all modes.
113 Z1 70 Lower pressure roller A5AWM151 Times to change the setting to the maximum
cooling fan/Md PWM setting in all modes.
114 Z1 71 Fusing Lower pressure roller assy A5AWR71R *1
091, and number 111 is also reset.
115 Z1 72 PFU PF1 (PF-707/708 1st A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
tandem) Horizontal PFU tray 2, PFU tray 3, PFU tray 4, PFU tray 5,
conveyance roller/1 PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
116 Z1 73 PF1 (PF-707/708 1st A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
conveyance roller bearing/ PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
1
117 Z1 74 PF1 (PF-707/708 1st A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
conveyance roller/2 PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
118 Z1 75 PF1 (PF-707/708 1st A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
conveyance roller bearing/ PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
2
119 Z1 76 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
Horizontal conveyance PFU tray 5, PFU tray 6, PFU tray 7, PFU tray 8,
roller/1 PFU tray 9.
120 Z1 77 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
roller bearing/1 PFU tray 9.
121 Z1 78 Paper Cleaning sheet assy A1RFR7G4 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
Transportati 2 counts in the duplex mode.
on
122 Z1 79 Registration cleaning A5AWR70R 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
sheet assy 2 counts in the duplex mode.
123 Z1 7A Registration roller A5AW7123 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
124 Z1 7B Torque limiter 65AA4618 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
125 Z1 7C - - -
126 Z1 7D - - -
127 Z1 7E - - -
128 Z1 7F Paper De-curler roller A1RF8605 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
Transportati (not counted in the simplex mode).
on
129 Z1 80 Paper exit driven roller A5AW8607 1 count for each paper exit.
130 Z1 81 Exit conveyance driven A1RF8950 1 count for each paper exit.
roller
131 Z1 82 Others Fusing paper separation A5AWM151 Counts each time when the fan motor (Fusing
fan/Fr, /Md, /Rr separation fan/2) is activated.
132 Z1 83 Main Power Switch A4EUM600 1 count for each activation of the image control
(the times that the CPU is started except with the
sub power SW, CSRC, SHUTOFF, WT) (Count
for the reuse management)
I-170

r parameter
133 Z1 84 Sub Power Switch A0Y5M601 1 count each time when the power supply is
deactivated while the main switch is deactivated.
(Count for the reuse management)
134 Z1 85 Front door switch 40AA8501 1 count for each time the front door opens.
135 Z1 86 Toner access door switch 12QR8601 1 count for each time the toner bottle door
opens.
136 Z1 87 2nd transfer 2nd transfer process blade A5AWR70S *1
assy
137 Z1 88 - - -
138 Z1 89 2nd transfer 2nd transfer cleaning A1RF5328 *1
brush
139 Z1 8A - - -
140 Z1 8B 2nd transfer Scattering prevention A1RF5316 *1
sheet/1 When this counter is reset, number 031 is also
reset.
141 Z1 8C Intermediate Auxiliary cleaner assy A5AWR70N *1
Transfer When this counter is reset, number 142 is also
reset.
142 Z1 8D Intermediate transfer A1RF5159 *1
scraper
143 Z1 8E PFU PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
roller/2 PFU tray 9.
144 Z1 8F PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
roller bearing/2 PFU tray 9.
145 Z1 90 PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
Horizontal conveyance PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
roller/1
146 Z1 91 PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
roller bearing/1
147 Z1 92 PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
roller/2
148 Z1 93 PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
roller bearing/2
149 Z1 94 PF1 (PF-707 or PF-708 1st A55CR702 2 counts for each exit of paper whose size in the
tandem) roller pressure sub scan direction is 350 mm or more.
release motor
150 Z1 95 PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7.
suction belt clutch/1
vertical conveyance clutch
1, vertical conveyance
clutch 2, exit clutch/1
exit clutch/2
155 Z1 9A PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7 or
vertical conveyance clutch/ PFU tray 8.
clutch/4
156 Z1 9B PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
horizontal conveyance PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
clutch/1, horizontal
conveyance clutch/2,
registration clutch
157 Z1 9C PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
pre-registration bearing PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
158 Z1 9D PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A1RG7160 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
pre-registration roller PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
I-171

r parameter
159 Z1 9E PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
loop roller/Up PFU tray 8.
160 Z1 9F PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 9.
loop roller bearing/Lw
161 Z1 A0 PF3 (PF-707 3rd tandem) A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 9.
loop roller/Lw
162 Z1 A1 PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1.
tandem) suction belt
clutch/1
clutch/2
clutch/3
tandem) vertical
conveyance clutch 1,
2, exit clutch 1
tandem) exit clutch/2
167 Z1 A6 PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
tandem) vertical PFU tray 2.
vertical conveyance clutch/
4
168 Z1 A7 PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
tandem) horizontal PFU tray 2, PFU tray 3, PFU tray 4, PFU tray 5,
conveyance clutch/1, PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
horizontal conveyance
clutch/2, registration clutch
169 Z1 A8 PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
tandem) tandem clutch/1, PFU tray 5, PFU tray 6, PFU tray 7, PFU tray 8,
tandem clutch/2, tandem PFU tray 9.
clutch/3, tandem clutch/4,
tandem clutch/5,
170 Z1 A9 PF707 (PF-708 1st A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
tandem) pre-registration PFU tray 2, PFU tray 3, PFU tray 4, PFU tray 5,
bearing PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
171 Z1 AA PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st A1RG7160 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
tandem) pre-registration PFU tray 2, PFU tray 3, PFU tray 4, PFU tray 5,
roller PFU tray 6, tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
172 Z1 AB PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 1,
tandem) loop roller/Up PFU tray 2, PFU tray 4, PFU tray 5, PFU tray 6,
tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
173 Z1 AC PF1 (PF-707, PF-708 1st A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3.
tandem) loop roller
bearing/Lw
174 Z1 AD PF1 (PF707, PF-708 1st A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3.
tandem) loop roller/Lw
175 Z1 AE PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4.
176 Z1 AF PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 5.
177 Z1 B0 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 6.
clutch 2, exit clutch/1
exit clutch/2
180 Z1 B3 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4 or
vertical conveyance clutch/ PFU tray 5.
clutch/4
I-172

r parameter
181 Z1 B4 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
horizontal conveyance PFU tray 5, PFU tray 6, PFU tray 7, PFU tray 8,
clutch/1, horizontal PFU tray 9.
registration clutch
182 Z1 B5 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7,
tandem clutch/1, tandem PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
clutch/2, tandem clutch/3,
tandem clutch/4, tandem
clutch/5
183 Z1 B6 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
pre-registration bearing PFU tray 5, PFU tray 6, PFU tray 7, PFU tray 8,
PFU tray 9.
184 Z1 B7 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A1RG7160 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
pre-registration roller PFU tray 5, PFU tray 6, PFU tray 7, PFU tray 8,
PFU tray 9.
185 Z1 B8 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4,
loop roller/Up PFU tray 5, PFU tray 7, PFU tray 8, PFU tray 9.
186 Z1 B9 PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 6.
loop roller bearing/Lw
187 Z1 BA PF2 (PF-707 2nd tandem) A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 6.
loop roller/Lw
188 Z1 BB - - -
189 Z1 BC Intermediate Transfer belt cleaning seal/ A1RF5112 *1
Transfer Fr When the counter counts by number of pages.
190 Z1 BD Transfer belt cleaning seal/ A1RF5116 *1
Rr When the counter counts by number of pages.
191 Z1 BE - - -
192 Z1 BF 2nd transfer Connecting stay assy A1RFR7N3 *1
193 Z1 C0 - - -
194 Z1 C1 - - -
195 Z1 C2 - - -
196 Z1 C3 - - -
197 Z1 C4 - - -
198 Z1 C5 - - -
199 Z1 C6 - - -
200 Z1 C7 - - -
201 Z1 C8 FD FD503 Pick-up Rubber 50BAR701 Counts the paper feed from PI upper tray.
(Up)
202 Z1 C9 FD503 Sep. Rubber (Up) 13QNR704 Counts the paper feed from PI upper tray.
203 Z1 CA FD503 Paper Feed 50BAR702 Counts the paper feed from PI upper tray.
Rubber (Up)
204 Z1 CB FD503 Pick-up Rubber 50BAR701 Counts the paper feed from PI lower tray.
(Lw)
205 Z1 CC FD503 Sep. Rubber (Lw) 13QNR704 Counts the paper feed from PI lower tray.
206 Z1 CD FD503 Paper Feed 50BAR702 Counts the paper feed from PI lower tray.
Rubber (Lw)
207 Z1 CE FD503 Punch Unit A0H0R700 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
A0H0R701
A0H0R702
208 Z1 CF FD503 Roller Solenoid 15AGR723 1 count for each paper exit in the punch or
folding mode (all size).
209 Z1 D0 FD503 2nd folding roller 15AGR761 • 1 count for each paper exit in the folding mode
solenoid (all size)
• 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode
(paper length 220 mm or larger).
210 Z1 D1 FD503 Tray Up-down 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
Motor
211 Z1 D2 - - -
212 Z1 D3 - - -
213 Z1 D4 - - -
214 Z1 D5 - - -
215 Z1 D6 LS LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
paper press solenoid/1 and the sort mode. (All Size)
I-173

r parameter
216 Z1 D7 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
rear stopper solenoid sort mode (all size).
217 Z1 D8 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
paper press solenoid/2 sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 mm or more).
218 Z1 D9 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
paper press solenoid/3 and the sort mode.
219 Z1 DA LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the stacker
stacker tray up down motor tray up down motor.
220 Z1 DB LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
paper press solenoid/1 and the sort mode. (All Size)
221 Z1 DC LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
rear stopper solenoid sort mode (all size).
222 Z1 DD LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
paper press solenoid/2 sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 mm or more).
223 Z1 DE LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
paper press solenoid/3 and the sort mode.
224 Z1 DF LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the stacker
stacker tray up down motor tray up down motor.
225 Z1 E0 RU RU516 Charging driven A8AK1030 For small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the
roller (Page) simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
during charging.
For large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the
simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode
during charging.
When you reset this counter, number 226 is also
reset.
226 Z1 E1 RU516 Charging driven A8AK1030 Counts the charging time of the charging driven
roller (Time %) roller and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
227 Z1 E2 RU516 Charging roller A8AK1031 For small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the
(Page) simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
during charging.
For large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the
simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode
during charging.
reset.
228 Z1 E3 RU516 Charging roller A8AK1031 Counts the charging time of the charging driven
(Time %) roller and shows the count in percentage with
reset.
229 Z1 E4 SD SD506 Trimmer Blade Kit A0H2R901 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
230 Z1 E5 SD506 Trimmer Board A0H2B622 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
Assy trimming mode.
231 Z1 E6 SD506 Trimmer Press A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
Motor trimming mode.
232 Z1 E7 SD506 Trimmer Blade A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
Motor trimming mode.
233 Z1 E8 SD506 Trimmer Unit A0H2A620 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
234 Z1 E9 SD506 Stapler Assy/Rt 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
mode.
235 Z1 EA SD506 Stapler Assy/Lt 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
mode.
236 Z1 EB SD506 roller release 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the folding section.
solenoid/1, roller release
solenoid/3
237 Z1 EC SD506 Solenoid 15ANR710 1 count for each paper exit to the folding section.
238 Z1 ED SD506 FNS Solenoid/2 15ANR711 1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.
239 Z1 EE SD506 Bundle Press 15AN7719 1 count for each time the bundle up and down
Stage Gear section moves up (PS45 is ON).
I-174

r parameter
240 Z1 EF FS FS532 Staple Unit A4F37350 1 count for each booklet exit in either of the 1-
staple at front or 1-staple at rear mode.
2 counts for each booklet exit completion in the
2-staple mode.
241 Z1 F0 FS532 Paddle A4F3R714 1 count for each paper exit completion to the
staple stacker.
242 Z1 F1 FS532 Idler Roller/1 A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
243 Z1 F2 FS532 Idler Roller/2 A0GY7122 1 count for each paper exit
244 Z1 F3 SD510 Staple Unit A4F47300 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in the
saddle stitching mode.
245 Z1 F4 SD510 2nd Folding Gate A0HTM200 1 count for each paper exit in the tri-folding
Solenoid mode.
246 Z1 F5 SD510 Rear Gripper 26NA8251 1 count for each paper (356 mm or more in
Solenoid length) exit completion to the staple stacker
(saddle stitching or bundle center-folding or tri-
folding)
247 Z1 F6 SD510 Paddle A4F4R70D 1 count for each paper exit completion to the
A4F4R70E staple stacker (Saddle stitching or bundle half-
A4F4R70F folding or tri-folding)
248 Z1 F7 RU RU510 Straight Gate A4FC7030 1 count for each paper reversed in RU and
exited (2 counts for the overlapped paper in RU
and exited)
249 Z1 F8 RU510 Entrance Roller/ A4FC7014 1 count for each paper exit
1,/2
250 Z1 F9 RU510 Stacker Ent./Merge A4FC7002 1 count for each paper exit
Roller
251 Z1 FA RU510 Paper Re-feed A4FC7019 1 count for each paper exit
Roller
252 Z1 FB RU510 Paper Exit Roller A4FCR904 1 count for each paper exit
253 Z1 FC RU510 Driven Roller A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
254 Z1 FD RU510 Bearing/K A00V2406 1 count for each paper exit
A4FCR905
255 Z1 FE RU510 Ent,/Exit Conv. Belt A0GE2105 1 count for each paper exit
A4FC7015
256 Z1 FF RU510 Conv./Exit Pulley A4FC7077 1 count for each paper exit
A4FC7078
257 Z7 00 RU510 Entrance/Paper A4FCR900 1 count for each paper exit
Exit Motor
258 Z7 01 RU510 Stack Switch Motor A083M100 1 count for each paper reversed in RU and
exited (2 counts for the overlapped paper in RU
and exited)
259 Z7 02 RU510 Re-feed Roller A4FC7022 1 count for each paper exit
Gear A4FC7023
260 Z7 03 RU511 Entrance A2A27206
conveyance driven roller/2 1 count for each paper exit
261 Z7 04 RU511 Entrance A1TT7002
conveyance driven roller/1 1 count for each paper exit
262 Z7 05 RU516 Charging roller A1RF5089 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode,
bearing 2 counts in the duplex mode.
263 Z7 06 FS PI502 Paper Feed Clutch/ 13QN8201 1 count for each PI upper paper feed
Up
264 Z7 07 PI502 Pick-up Roller/Up 50BAR701 1 count for each PI upper paper feed
265 Z7 08 PI502 Paper Feed Roller/ 13QNR705 1 count for each PI upper paper feed
Up
266 Z7 09 PI502 Separation Roller/ 13QNR704 1 count for each PI upper paper feed
Up
267 Z7 0A PI502 Torque Limiter/Up 13QN4073 1 count for each PI upper paper feed
268 Z7 0B PI502 Paper Feed Clutch/ 13QN8201 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
Lw
269 Z7 0C PI502 Pick-up Roller/Lw 50BAR701 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
270 Z7 0D PI502 Paper Feed Roller/ 13QNR705 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
Lw
271 Z7 0E PI502 Separation Roller/ 13QNR704 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
Lw
272 Z7 0F PI502 Torque Limiter/Lw 13QN4073 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
I-175

r parameter
273 Z7 10 - - -
274 Z7 11 - - -
275 Z7 12 - - -
276 Z7 13 - - -
277 Z7 14 - - -
278 Z7 15 - - -
279 Z7 16 - - -
280 Z7 17 FS PK522 punch unit A4JUF920 Number of punching by PK
A4JUF921
A4JUF922
281 Z7 18 - - -
282 Z7 19 - - -
283 Z7 1A - - -
284 Z7 1B - - -
285 Z7 1C - - -
286 Z7 1D - - -
287 Z7 1E - - -
288 Z7 1F ADF DF pick-up roller 9J073301 1 count for each paper passes through the ADF
289 Z7 20 DF paper feed roller A00J5636 1 count for each paper passes through the ADF
290 Z7 21 DF separation roller A1085639 1 count for each paper passes through the ADF
291 Z7 22 - - -
292 Z7 23 - - -
293 Z7 24 - - -
294 Z7 25 - - -
295 Z7 26 PB PB503 Sub Tray Paper 15ANR714 1 count for each paper exit in the PB sub tray
Exit SD
296 Z7 27 PB503 SCswitchback A0V9M101 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Release Motor section
297 Z7 28 PB503 FD Alignment 15AA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Solenoid section
298 Z7 29 PB503 SC Pressure Arm A075B746 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Solenoid section
299 Z7 2A PB503 Switchback Roller 13GQ4519 1 count for each paper exit from the PB
300 Z7 2B PB503 Pick-up Roller 55VAR750 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
mode
301 Z7 2C PB503 Paper Feed/Sep. 55VAR749 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
Roller mode
302 Z7 2D PB503 Cover Paper Pick- 56AA8201 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
up Clutch mode
303 Z7 2E PB503 Cover Paper Sep. 56AA8201 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
Clutch mode
304 Z7 2F PB503 Roller Cutter Blade A0756230 1 count for each book exit when the PB cover
Assy paper trimming is used.
305 Z7 30 PB503 Exhaust Filter/A A15X3017 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
306 Z7 31 PB503 Exhaust Filter/B A15X3018 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
307 Z7 32 PB503 Entrance gate 15ANR714 1 count for each book exit in other than PB tray
solenoid cover mode
308 Z7 33 PB503 Glue Tank Assy A15XA36A Time during which tank applying roller rotates. 1
A15XA36E count per 1 hour.
A15XA36F
309 Z7 34 PB503 Pellet Supply 27LA8051 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Cooling Fan section
310 Z7 35 PB503 One-way Clutch/A 13GQ7709 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
311 Z7 36 PB503 One-way Clutch/B 13GQ7709 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
312 Z7 37 PB503 Glue Roller Gear A0753799 Time during which tank applying roller rotates. 1
Bearing count per 8 hour.
313 Z7 38 GP GP501 Aligner Idler Roller A0N9PP3X 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
Assy mode.
I-176

r parameter
314 Z7 39 GP501 Bypass Assembly A0N9PP54 1 count for each paper exit
315 Z7 3A GP501 Roller Energy Drive A0N9PP1J 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
mode.
316 Z7 3B GP501 Belt Aligner A0N9PP2X 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
(Green) mode.
317 Z7 3C GP501 Back Gauge A0N9PP59 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
Mechanism mode.
318 Z7 3D GP502 Pull Back Pad A4F6PP00 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the GP
stacker.
319 Z7 3E GP502 Suction Cup A4F6PP03 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the GP
stacker.
320 Z7 3F GP502 Die Set Felt A4F6PP01 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the GP
stacker.
321 Z7 40 GP502 Die Set A4F6PP02 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the GP
stacker.
322 Z7 41 GP502 Book Chute Mylar A4F6PPH1 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the GP
stacker.
323 Z7 42 HM HM101 humidification A1TU5001 1 count for each paper exit
roller/Rt
324 Z7 43 HM101 humidification A1TU5002 1 count for each paper exit
roller/Lt
325 Z7 44 HM101 water feed roller A1TU5003 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
326 Z7 45 HM101 water feed filter A1TU5215 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
327 Z7 46 HM101 pump motor A1TUR704 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
328 Z7 47 - - -
329 Z7 48 - - -
330 Z7 49 SD SD513 staple unit A65U7779 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in the
fold & staple mode for 2 stapling.
331 Z7 4A SD513 Trimmer blade A729R901 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode
332 Z7 4B SD513 Trimmer board A729F624 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode
333 Z7 4C SD513 Trimmer press A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
motor trimming mode
334 Z7 4D SD513 Trimmer blade A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
motor trimming mode
335 Z7 4E SD513 Trimmer unit A729F621 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode
336 Z7 4F SD513 Reverse exit roller A65UR70M On the fold & staple/half-fold mode, 1 count for
pressure release motor each paper exit to the fold & staple section
On the bundle tri-folding mode without the
crease and the slit, 1 count for each bundle tri-
folding exit completion.
On the bundle tri-folding mode with the crease or
the slit, 1 count for each tri-folding exit
completion.
When the sub tray paper exit or the through
conveyance is performed with the crease or the
slit or the reverse inside SD-513, 1 count for
each paper exit completion.
337 Z7 50 SD513 1st folding knife A65UR70N On the fold & staple/half-fold mode, 1 count for
motor each paper exit to the fold & staple section
On the bundle tri-folding mode without the
crease and the slit, 1 count for each bundle tri-
folding exit completion.
On the bundle tri-folding mode with the crease or
the slit, 1 count for each tri-folding exit
completion.
338 Z7 51 SD513 2nd folding knife A65UR70P 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the tri-
motor folding mode.
I-177

r parameter
339 Z7 52 SD513 Booklet holding A729R704 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in the
motor fold & staple mode for 2 stapling.
340 Z7 53 SD513 Clamp motor A729R70G 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
mode/half-folding mode
341 Z7 54 SD513 Fore edge finger A729R706 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
motor mode/half-folding mode
342 Z7 55 SD513 Gripper motor A4JUM101 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
mode/half-folding mode
343 Z7 56 SD513 Fore edge stopper A729R706 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
motor mode/half-folding mode
344 Z7 57 SD513 Clincher A65U7781 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in the
345 Z7 58 SD513 Clamp hanging A65U6908 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
wire mode/half-folding mode when FD-504 has been
installed.
346 Z7 59 FD504 SQF roller motor A65VR706 2 count for each booklet exit for a booklet that
has 19 pages or less in the SQF mode
4 count for each booklet exit for a booklet that
347 Z7 5A FD504 SQF clamp motor/ A65VR705 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
Rr SQF mode.
348 Z7 5B FD504 SQF clamp motor/ A65VR705 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
Fr SQF mode.
349 Z7 5C FD504 SQF roller cleaning A65VR70A 2 count for each booklet exit for a booklet that
assy/Fr has 19 pages or less in the SQF mode
350 Z7 5D FD504 SQF roller cleaning A65VR70B 2 count for each booklet exit for a booklet that
assy/Rr has 19 pages or less in the SQF mode
351 Z7 5E TU503 Slit cutter assy/Fr A65WF701 1 count for each entrance reversal output in the
slit mode
352 Z7 5F TU503 Slit cutter assy/Rr A65WF702 1 count for each entrance reversal output in the
slit mode
353 Z7 60 TU503 Rotary cutter assy A65WF700 1 count for each entrance reversal output in the
slit mode
354 Z7 61 TU503 Registration roller A65W6500 1 count for each entrance reversal output in the
slit mode
355 Z7 62 CR101 Creaser motor A65XM103 1 count for each booklet exit during the saddle
stitching, half-folding + crease
2 count for each booklet exit during the tri-folding
+ crease
2 count for each booklet exit during the perfect
binding + back cover crease
binding + cover gutter crease
binding + back cover crease + cover gutter
crease
Counts according to the number of creases (1 to
4) for 1 sheet exit during the sub tray, through
conveyance + crease
I-178

r parameter
356 Z7 63 SD513 Alignment plate A65UN165 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
solenoid wiring mode/half-folding mode
357 Z7 64 SD513 Booklet holding A65U6290 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
wire/1 mode/half-folding mode
360 Z7 67 SD513 Finger torque A03X5656 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
limiter mode/half-folding mode
361 Z7 68 SD513 Fore edge finger 55VA7903 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
gear mode/half-folding mode
362 Z7 69 SD513 Conveyance guide A729R70S On the fold & staple/half-fold mode, 1 count for
assy/up each paper exit to the fold & staple section
*1 Count in all color modes
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
Note
• For details on the paper size you must count or the setting of the count condition, refer to I.4.6.1 Maintenance Counter.
4.6.19 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter)

Used to control the service history of each part that is not registered as a special part.
For 30 data from Number 01 up to 30, confirm and reset of the name, P/N (parts number), limit value and the print count.
• Take 1 count for each print page of all paper exits with no discrimination made by paper size.
• When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
(1) Setting and check procedure

Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Parts Counter] → [Voluntary Part Counter]
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Voluntary Part Counter screen" pages, and press [▼] or [▲] to select the data number.
5. Select either [Parts Name Setting], [P/N Setting], or [Limit Setting].
6. Enter the data that you want to configure or change.
[Parts Name]: Enter the part name. (8 digits)
[P/N]: Enter the part number. (9 digits)
[Limit]: Enter the limit value. (8 digits)
7. Press [OK] to update the data.
(2) Reset procedure

Press [04 Counter/Data]
2. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Voluntary Part Counter screen" pages, and press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to configure or
check.
5. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Voluntary Part Counter screen."
(3) Relationship between data number and CSRC parameter

Number Parts Name P/N Counter Limit Installation date
CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter
(Z4) (Z3) (G0) (H0) (H3)
001 00 00 00 00 00
002 01 01 01 01 01
003 02 02 02 02 02
I-179
004 03 03 03 03 03
005 04 04 04 04 04
006 05 05 05 05 05
007 06 06 06 06 06
008 07 07 07 07 07
009 08 08 08 08 08
010 09 09 09 09 09
011 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A
012 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B
013 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C
014 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D
015 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E
016 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F
017 10 10 10 10 10
018 11 11 11 11 11
019 12 12 12 12 12
020 13 13 13 13 13
021 14 14 14 14 14
022 15 15 15 15 15
023 16 16 16 16 16
024 17 17 17 17 17
025 18 18 18 18 18
026 19 19 19 19 19
027 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A
028 1B 1B 1B 1B 1B
029 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C
030 1D 1D 1D 1D 1D
4.6.20 Total Counter History

(1) Function
When the main body is active, the value of the total counter is backed up periodically to SDD.
(a) Specifications
• While the main body is active, the value of the total counter and the black counter is backed up to SDD once every hour.
• Backup starts one hour after the sub power switch (SW2) is activated. However, backup is not performed while the machine is switched
to Auto Shut OFF.
• The number of backup data that you can refer to is 400.
(2) Usage
When an error occurs with the NVRAM board (NVRAM) and the data is deleted, refer to the previous total counter history.
Note
• When the data of the NVRAM board (NVRAM) is deleted, you cannot return the total counter value to the previous value.
• You can use this function to refer to the previous total counter history.
(3) Procedure for backup data reference

Press [04 Counter /Data]
Press [04 Total Counter History].
3. "Total Counter History screen"
Refer to "Date" and check the latest "Total Counter" and the "Black Counter" history.
Press [Next] or [Previous] to check up to 400 histories.
4.6.21 Custom Size Counter Threshold Set

(1) OUTLINE
Select the custom size paper length threshold in the sub scan direction for I.4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/Copy/Printer).
Note
• This setting is valid when the DIPSW8-7=1.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Custom Counter Threshold Set].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Custom Counter Threshold Set]
I-180
3. "Custom Size Counter Threshold Setting screen"

Select the custom size that you want to configure.
• [Infinite1]: "Inf. 1" on the paper size counter.
Note
• The value larger than that of [Infinite4] by (0.1 mm to 487.7 mm) is assigned to "Inf.5".
• Be sure to configure the values as the following.
Infinite1<Infinite2<Infinite3<Infinite4
• Setting range: 0 to 4877
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
5. Press [Cancel] to reset the setting to default.
4.7 State Confirmation

4.7.1 I/O Check Mode
(1) OUTLINE
This mode provide self-diagnostic functions (input output check function) to check the condition of the input (checking the each signal to
sensors) and the output (checking and the adjustment of the load operation).
(2) "I/O Check Mode screen"
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[1] Input check [2] Output check

[3] I/O check code [4] Multi code
4.7.2 Input check procedures

(1) Usage
Check input condition of each signal to the sensors.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
[Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [I/O Check Mode]
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use the multi mode, press [High/Low]. *
5. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
6. The condition of the sensor (such as 000/001) appears in the message box "IN".
7. When you execute another input check, repeat step 3 to step 6.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
4.7.3 Output check procedures

(1) Usage
Load operations can be checked and adjusted (output check) using this output check.
Note
• Be sure to perform the initial operation before the output check. When the initial operation cannot be completed due to the
malfunction code, check that the part that moves by the output check and other parts do not interfere.
I-181
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
[Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [I/O Check Mode]
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use the multi mode, press [High/Low].*1
5. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
6. Press [Start].*2
The load that is specified operates.
7. Press [Stop].*2
The load that is specified completes.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other load or the signal output check.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
*2 The start key and the stop key of the hard key can be used.
4.7.4 IO check mode list

Input check Output check
Co Mul
de ti Classific Symb
Name
Display and Classific Symb
Name
Restrictive
ation ol signal source ation ol conditions
0 0 High TEM/ Temperature-humidity Display of
voltage, HUM1 sensor (machine outer humidity (%)
analog humidity)
1 signal TEM/ Temperature-humidity Display of
HUM1 sensor (machine outer temperature (°C)
humidity)
5 TEM/ Process temperature Display of
HUM2 sensor (humidity around humidity (%)
process mount)
6 TEM/ Process temperature Display of
HUM2 sensor (temperature temperature (°C)
around process mount)
7 TEM1 Registration temperature Display of
0 sensor (temperature temperature (°C)
around registration roller)
9 TEM1 Writing temperature Display of
1 sensor (the ambient temperature (°C)
temperature of the writing
unit)
1 1 High M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
voltage, CL1 bottle clutch/Y
2 analog M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
signal CL1 volatile), toner bottle
clutch/Y
4 PZS/Y Remaining toner sensor/Y • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
• 001: Toner CL2 bottle clutch/M
5 PZS/M Remaining toner sensor/M • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
• 001: Toner CL2 bottle clutch/M
6 PZS/C Remaining toner sensor/C • 000: No toner
• 001: Toner
7 PZS/K Remaining toner sensor/K • 000: No toner High M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
• 001: Toner voltage, CL3 bottle clutch/C
8 PS47 Waste toner door sensor • 000: No waste analog M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
toner box signal CL3 volatile), toner bottle
• 001: Waste clutch/C
toner box
9 PS48 Waste toner full sensor • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
10 High M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
voltage, CL4 bottle clutch/K
11 analog M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
signal CL4 volatile), toner bottle
clutch/K
12 PS48 Waste toner full sensor • 000: Other PS48 Waste toner full sensor full
than full detection
• 001: Full
I-182

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
13 M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
CL1, bottle clutch (all colors)
CL2,
CL3,
CL4
14 M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
CL1, volatile), toner bottle clutch
CL2, (all colors)
CL3,
CL4
15 High PZS/Y Remaining toner sensor/Y • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
voltage, • 001: Toner CL1 bottle clutch/Y
16 analog PZS/M Remaining toner sensor/M • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
signal • 001: Toner CL2 bottle clutch/M
17 PZS/C Remaining toner sensor/C • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
• 001: Toner CL3 bottle clutch/C
18 PZS/K Remaining toner sensor/K • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
• 001: Toner CL4 bottle clutch/K
19 SW6 Cyclone box detection • 000: No
switch cyclone box
• 001: Cyclone
box
2 0 High HVPS/ High voltage power supply/ Do not use in
voltage, 1-1 1-1 (charging/Y) the field.
1 analog HVPS/ High voltage power supply/ Do not use in
signal 1-1 1-1 (charging/M) the field.
2 HVPS/ High voltage power supply/ Do not use in
1-2 1-2 (charging/C) the field.
1-2 1-2 (charging/K) the field.
3 0 HVPS/ High voltage power supply/ Do not use in
2 2 (intermediate transfer/Y) the field.
2 2 (intermediate transfer/M) the field.
2 2 (intermediate transfer/C) the field.
2 2 (intermediate transfer/K) the field.
2 2 (intermediate transfer/ the field.
Y, /M, /C, /K)
Y, /M, /C, /K)
Y, /M, /C, /K)
(color pressure)
3 3 (charging after the field.
intermediate transfer/Y)
intermediate transfer/M)
intermediate transfer/C)
intermediate transfer/K)
I-183

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
intermediate transfer/Y)
intermediate transfer/M)
intermediate transfer/C)
intermediate transfer/K)
2 2 (intermediate transfer/Y, the field.
constant voltage)
2 2 (intermediate transfer/M, the field.
constant voltage)
2 2 (intermediate transfer/C, the field.
constant voltage)
2 2 (intermediate transfer/K, the field.
constant voltage)
Y, /M, /C, /K, constant
voltage)
2 2 (intermediate transfer/K, the field.
constant voltage) (color
pressure)
4 0 HVPS/ High voltage power supply/
4 4 (separation)
5 1 IDCS / IDC sensor/Rr output 0-255 is
Pr voltage displayed on
"Input check"
2 IDCS / IDC sensor/Fr output 0-255 is
Fr voltage displayed on
"Input check"
3 IDCS/ IDC sensor/Rr output 0-255 is
Rr voltage displayed on
"Input check"
4 IDCS/ IDC sensor/Fr output 0-255 is
Fr voltage displayed on
"Input check"
5 IDCS/ IDC sensor/Fr, /Rr
Fr, Rr
15 - IDC sensor/Fr, /Rr 0-255 is
(Sampling without lighting) displayed on
"Input check"
"Input check"
"Input check"
"Input check"
19 IDCS/ IDC sensor/Fr, /Rr 0-255 is
Fr, Rr (Perform the base line displayed on
correction while the belt is "Input check"
driving)
I-184

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
correction while the belt is "Input check"
driving)
correction while the belt "Input check"
stops)
correction while the belt "Input check"
stops)
6 0 DPS/Y Drum potential sensor/Y 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
1 DPS/ Drum potential sensor/M 0-255 is
M displayed on
"Input check"
2 DPS/C Drum potential sensor/C 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
3 DPS/K Drum potential sensor/K 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
2 2 (2nd transfer, low
voltage)
1 HVPS/ High voltage power supply/
2 2 (2nd transfer, high
voltage)
1-1 1-1 (developing/Y)
1-1 1-1 (developing/M)
1-2 1-2 (developing/C)
1-2 1-2 (developing/K)
1-1 1-1 (developing/Y)
1-1 1-1 (developing/M)
1-2 1-2 (developing/C)
1-2 1-2 (developing/K)
11 10 Paper PS5 Paper empty sensor/1 • 000: No paper
feed, (tray 1) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
11 conveya PS9 Paper empty sensor/2 • 000: No paper
nce (tray 2) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
12 PS13 Paper empty sensor/3 • 000: No paper
(tray 3) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
(tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper
(tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper
I-185

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
12 10 VR2 Remaining paper VR/1 Remaining
(tray 1) (PF 1st tandem) display (0% to
100%)
11 VR5 Remaining paper VR/2 Remaining
(tray2) (PF 1st tandem) display (0% to
100%)
(tray 3) (PF 1st tandem) display (0% to
100%)
(tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem) display (0% to
100%)
100%)
100%)
(tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem) display (0% to
100%)
100%)
100%)
14 10 VR1 CD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD(8
1) (PF 1st tandem) bit)
11 VR4 CD paper size VR/2 (tray Display of AD(8
4) (PF 2nd tandem) bit)
20 VR3 FD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD
1) (PF 1st tandem)
2) (PF 1st tandem)
3) (PF 1st tandem)
4) (PF 2nd tandem)
5) (PF 2nd tandem)
6) (PF 2nd tandem)
26 VR1 CD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD (8
7) (PF 3rd tandem) bit)
7) (PF 3rd tandem)
8) (PF 3rd tandem)
9) (PF 3rd tandem)
40 VR1 CD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD
1) (PF 1st tandem) (10 bit)
I-186

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
4) (PF 2nd tandem) (10 bit)
7) (PF 3rd tandem) (10 bit)
15 80 RFID AB3 Antenna board/3 (Fusing) • 000: No tag RFID AB3 Antenna board/3 (Fusing) Displayed on
tag • 001: Tag tag "Input check"
81 AB3 Antenna board/3 receiving Receiving AB3 Antenna board/3 (Fusing) Displayed on
strength (Fusing) strength (0 to 7) "Input check"
82 AB1 Antenna board/1 • 000: No tag AB1 Antenna board/1 Displayed on
(Intermediate transfer) • 001: Tag (Intermediate transfer) "Input check"
83 AB1 Antenna board/1 receiving Receiving AB1 Antenna board/1 Displayed on
strength (Intermediate strength (0 to 7) (Intermediate transfer) "Input check"
transfer)
84 AB2 Antenna board/2 (2nd • 000: No tag AB2 Antenna board/2 (2nd Displayed on
transfer) • 001: Tag transfer) "Input check"
85 AB2 Antenna board/2 receiving Receiving AB2 Antenna board/2 (2nd Displayed on
strength (2nd transfer) strength (0 to 7) transfer) "Input check"
98 Data Data - CSRC memory Use when you
clear clear initialization configure CSRC
17 10 Paper - Tray 1 set signal (PF 1st • 000: Not
feed, tandem) installed
conveya • 001: Installed
11 nce - Tray 2 set signal (PF 1st • 000: Not
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
12 - Tray 3 set signal (PF 1st • 000: Not
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
13 - Tray 4 set signal (PF 2nd • 000: Not
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
20 HTR4 Dehumidification heater • 000: Not
set signal (tray 1) (PF 1st installed
tandem) • 001: Installed
set signal (tray 4) (PF 2nd installed
I-187

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
26 - Tray 7 set signal (PF 3rd • 000: Not
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
tandem) installed
• 001: Installed
set signal (tray 7) (PF 3rd installed
18 1 PS87 ADU centering sensor Display top 8 bit Paper PS87 ADU centering sensor
out of 16bit feed,
3 PS40 Centering sensor (PF) Display top 8 bit conveya PS40 Centering sensor (PF)
out of 16bit nce
4 MFDT Multi feed detection board/ • 000: Normal MFDT Multi feed detection board/
B/S, / S, /R (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Multi B/S, / S, /R (PF 1st tandem)
R feed R
B/S, / S, /R (automatic • 001: Adjusting B/S, / S, /R (PF 1st tandem)
R adjustment) (PF 1st R
tandem)
B/S, / S, /R (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Multi B/S, / S, /R (PF 2nd tandem)
R feed R
B/S, / S, /R (automatic • 001: Adjusting B/S, / S, /R (automatic
R adjustment condition) (2nd R adjustment) (2nd PF)
PF)
B/S, / S, /R (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Multi B/S, / S, /R (PF 3rd tandem)
R feed R
B/S, / S, /R (automatic • 001: Adjusting B/S, / S, /R (automatic
R adjustment condition) (PF R adjustment) (PF 3rd
3rd tandem) tandem)
60 PS31 Intermediate conveyance • 000: OFF M54 Intermediate conveyance
pressure release sensor/1 • 001: ON pressure release motor/1
(Stops at the pressure
position)
(Stops at the release
position)
position)
(Stops at the release
position)
82 M54 Intermediate conveyance
pressure release motor/1
position)
I-188

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
pressure release motor/2
position)
19 10 PS14 Paper suction sensor/1 • 000: No paper
12 PS15 Paper suction sensor/2 • 000: No paper
20 1 PS14 ADU conveyance sensor/2 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
3 PS9 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper
sensor/1 • 001: Paper
6 PS1 Registration sensor/Fr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
8 PS18 Paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
9 PS15 ADU conveyance sensor/3 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
10 PS16 ADU reverse sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
12 PS17 ADU stop sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
13 PS54 De-curler sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
14 PS2 Registration sensor/Rr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
15 PS4 Paper skew sensor/Fr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
16 PS5 Paper skew sensor/Rr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
18 PS64 Fusing loop sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
19 PS61 Fusing paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
20 PS2 Paper feed sensor/1 (tray • 000: No paper Paper SD5 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (tray
1) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper feed, 1) (PF 1st tandem)
21 PS6 Paper feed sensor/2 (tray • 000: No paper conveya SD6 Shutter solenoid/Rr1 (tray
2) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper nce 1) (PF 1st tandem)
22 PS10 Paper feed sensor/3 (tray • 000: No paper SD10 Shutter solenoid/Fr2 (tray
3) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper 2) (PF 1st tandem)
23 PS2 Paper feed sensor/1 (tray • 000: No paper SD11 Shutter solenoid/Rr2 (tray
4) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper 2) (PF 1st tandem)
I-189

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
7) (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper 4) (PF 2nd tandem)
29 SD11 Shutter solenoid/Rr2 (tray
5) (PF 2nd tandem)
30 SD15 Shutter solenoid/Fr3 (tray
6) (PF 2nd tandem)
6) (PF 2nd tandem)
32 SD4 Paper leading edge shutter
solenoid/1 (tray 1) (PF 1st
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
35 SD7 Floating duct solenoid/Fr1
(tray 1) (PF 1st tandem)
38 SD8 Floating duct solenoid/Rr1
solenoid/1 (tray 4) (PF 2nd
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
(tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem)
7) (PF 3rd tandem)
7) (PF 3rd tandem)
8) (PF 3rd tandem)
8) (PF 3rd tandem)
I-190

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
9) (PF 3rd tandem)
9) (PF 3rd tandem)
solenoid/1 (tray 7) (PF 3rd
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
(tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem)
21 10 Paper PS2 Paper feed sensor/1 (tray • 000: No paper CL15 Suction belt clutch/1 (PF
feed, 1) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper 1st tandem)
11 conveya PS6 Paper feed sensor/2 (tray • 000: No paper CL16 Suction belt clutch/2 (PF
nce 2) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper 1st tandem)
12 PS10 Paper feed sensor/3 (tray • 000: No paper CL17 Suction belt clutch/3 (PF
3) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper 1st tandem)
4) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper 2nd tandem)
7) (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper 3rd tandem)
23 11 PS3 Upper limit sensor/1 (tray • 000: Other M7 Paper lift motor/1 (tray 1)
1) (PF 1st tandem) than upper (PF 1st tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
13 PS7 Upper limit sensor/2 (tray • 000: Other M8 Paper lift motor/2 (tray 2)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
4) (PF 2nd tandem) than upper (PF 2nd tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
I-191

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
7) (PF 3rd tandem) than upper (PF 3rd tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
24 0 2nd 2nd M41 2nd transfer pressure
transfer transfer release motor (continuous
rotation)
1 PS53 2nd transfer home sensor • 000: Other M41 2nd transfer pressure
than the release motor (pressure)
pressure
position
• 001: Pressure
position
than the release motor (pressure)
pressure
position
• 001: Pressure
position
than the release motor (release)
pressure
position
• 001: Pressure
position
4 M 40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
M46 2nd transfer steering
motor(belt steering control)
5 2nd PS50 2nd transfer belt abnormal • 000: Normal M 40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
transfer sensor (ON (light M46 2nd transfer steering
blocked)) motor(belt steering control)
• 001: Abnormal
(OFF
(transparent))
6 PS51 2nd transfer belt edge • 000: OFF M 40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
sensor/2 • 001: ON M46 2nd transfer steering
7 PS52 2nd transfer belt edge • 000: OFF M 40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
sensor/3 • 001: ON M46 2nd transfer steering
8 PS49 2nd transfer steering home • 000: OFF M46 2nd transfer steering motor
sensor • 001: ON (Home position search)
I-192

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
sensor • 001: ON (slants the tension roller to
the direction that the belt
moves to the front side
after home position
search. The motor stops
after it slants the tension
roller to the maximum
position.)
sensor • 001: ON (slants the tension roller to
moves to the rear side
after home position
search. The motor stops
after it slants the tension
roller to the maximum
position.)
11 M40, 2nd transfer belt motor
M46 (460 mm/s), 2nd transfer
steering motor (belt
steering control)
steering control)
steering control)
25 0 Paper PS37 Front door sensor • 000: Close Paper M58 Registration motor (230
feed, • 001: Open feed, mm/s)
conveya conveya
nce nce
1 M58 Registration motor (400
mm/s)
2 Paper PS38 Toner access door sensor • 000: Close M58 Registration motor (460
feed, • 001: Open mm/s)
3 conveya PS45 Toner supply unit open • 000: Close M58 Registration motor (Paper
nce close sensor • 001: Open feed line speed: 770 mm/
s)
4 - Fusing unit set detection • 000: Not M44, Registration motor, loop
signal installed M45, motor/Fr, /Rr, ADU
• 001: Installed M58, conveyance motor/1, /2, /3
M37, (Hard timer ON: 460 mm/
M38, s)
M39
6 M58 Registration motor (460
mm/s)
7 M58 Registration motor
(Reverse: 165 mm/s)
8 PS3 Paper leading edge sensor • 000: No paper M44, Registration motor, loop
• 001: Paper M45, motor/Fr, /Rr, ADU
M58, conveyance motor/1, /2, /3
M37, (Hard timer ON: 460 mm/s.
M38, From acceleration to
M39 deceleration.)
9 M37, ADU conveyance motor/
M38, 1, /2, /3 (Hard timer ON:
M39 460 mm/s)
10 PS1 Front door sensor (PF 1st • 000: Close
tandem) • 001: Open
11 PS1 Front door sensor (PF 2nd • 000: Close
12 PS1 Front door sensor (PF 3rd • 000: Close
I-193

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
14 Paper M44, Registration motor, loop
feed, M45, motor/Fr, /Rr, ADU
conveya M58, conveyance motor/1, /2, /3
nce M37, (Hard timer ON: 400 mm/s.
M39 deceleration.)
15 M44, Registration motor, loop
M45, motor/Fr, /Rr, ADU
M58, conveyance motor/1, /2, /3
M37, (Hard timer ON: 230 mm/s.
M39 deceleration.)
20 PS22 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Close
guide plate sensor /Rt (PF • 001: Open
1st tandem)
guide plate sensor /Lt (PF • 001: Open
1st tandem)
22 PS33 Vertical conveyance guide • 000: Close
plate sensor (PF 1st • 001: Open
tandem)
guide plate sensor /Rt (PF • 001: Open
2nd tandem)
guide plate sensor /Lt (PF • 001: Open
2nd tandem)
plate sensor (PF 2nd • 001: Open
tandem)
guide plate sensor/Rt (PF • 001: Open
3rd tandem)
guide plate sensor/Lt (PF • 001: Open
3rd tandem)
plate sensor (PF 3rd • 001: Open
tandem)
26 0 Paper M44 Loop motor/Fr (230 mm/s)
1 feed, M44 Loop motor/Fr (400 mm/s)
conveya
2 nce M44 Loop motor/Fr (460 mm/s)
3 M44 Loop motor/Fr (Paper feed
line speed: 770 mm/s)
4 M45 Loop motor/Rr (230 mm/s)
7 M45 Loop motor/Rr (Paper feed
line speed: 770 mm/s)
8 M44, Loop motor/Fr, /Rr (Loop
M45 creating operation. Stops
after a loop is created)
9 M44, Loop motor/Fr, /Rr (skew
M45 correction operation)
10 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF 1st
tandem: 985 mm/sec)
tandem: 700 mm/sec)
tandem: 985 mm/sec)
tandem: 700 mm/sec)
20 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF 2nd
tandem: 985 mm/sec)
tandem: 700 mm/sec)
I-194

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
tandem: 985 mm/sec)
tandem: 700 mm/sec)
30 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF 3rd
tandem: 985 mm/s)
tandem: 700 mm/s)
tandem: 985 mm/s)
tandem: 700 mm/s)
27 20 M34 Paper exit motor (230 mm/
s)
21 M34 Paper exit motor (400 mm/
s)
22 M34 Paper exit motor (460 mm/
s)
50 FM7, Exhaust fan/1 + /2 (PF 3rd
FM8 tandem)
51 FM9, Paper leading edge
FM10 separation fan/Fr1 + /Rr1
54 FM11, Paper feed assist fan/Fr1
FM12 + /Rr1 (tray 7) (PF 3rd
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
57 FM1, Paper suction fan/1 + /2
FM2 (tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem)
60 FM21, Dehumidifier fun/Rt1 + /Lt1
63 SD1 Tray lock solenoid/1 (tray
7) (PF 3rd tandem)
8) (PF 3rd tandem)
9) (PF 3rd tandem)
66 Paper TEMS/ Temperature sensor/5 • 0 to 255 HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
feed, 5 (tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem) • (Displays 0 (tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem)
conveya until the
nce specified
temperature is
reached)
67 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/1 (PF 0 to 255 HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
1 3rd tandem) (tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem)
I-195

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
68 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/6 • 0 to 255 HTR5 Dehumidification heater/2
6 (tray 8) (PF 3rd tandem) • (Displays 0 (tray 8) (PF 3rd tandem)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
7 (tray 9) (PF 3rd tandem) • (Displays 0 (tray 9) (PF 3rd tandem)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
75 PS4 Handle release sensor/1 • 000: ON
(tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: OFF
78 Paper FM11 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1
feed, (tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem)
79 conveya FM12 Paper feed assist fan/Rr1
nce (tray 7) (PF 3rd tandem)
80 FM15 Paper feed assist fan/Fr2
81 FM16 Paper feed assist fan/Rr2
28 1 M52 Intermediate conveyance
motor/1
motor/2
10 M2 Vertical conveyance motor
(PF 1st tandem)
11 M3 Horizontal conveyance
motor (PF 1st tandem)
12 M1 Paper feed belt motor (PF
1st tandem)
13 M4 Tandem conveyance
motor (FA-502 1st tandem)
14 M10 Roller pressure release
motor (pressure) (PF 1st
tandem)
motor (release) (PF 1st
tandem)
16 Paper PS41 Roller pressure release • 000: Release M10 Roller pressure release
feed, sensor (PF-707 1st • 001: Pressure motor (pressure) (PF 1st
conveya tandem) tandem)
nce
motor (release) (PF 1st
tandem)
20 M2 Vertical conveyance motor
(PF 2nd tandem)
21 M3 Horizontal conveyance
motor (PF 2nd tandem)
2nd tandem)
I-196

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
23 M4 Tandem conveyance
motor (FA-502 2nd
tandem)
40 Paper PS34 Tandem entrance sensor • 000: No paper CL8 Horizontal conveyance
feed, (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 1st tandem)
41 conveya PS35 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL9 Horizontal conveyance
nce sensor/1 (FA-502 1st • 001: Paper clutch/2 (PF 1st tandem)
tandem)
42 PS36 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL7 Pre-registration clutch (PF
sensor/2 (FA-502 1st • 001: Paper 1st tandem)
tandem)
43 PS37 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL10 Tandem conveyance
sensor/3 (FA-502 1st • 001: Paper clutch/1 (FA-502 1st
tandem) tandem)
tandem) tandem)
tandem) tandem)
46 PS17 Loop sensor/Lw (PF 1st • 000: No paper CL13 Tandem conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/4 (FA-502 1st
tandem)
47 PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL14 Tandem conveyance
sensor/1 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/5 (FA-502 1st
tandem)
48 PS20 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL1 Exit clutch /1 (PF 1st
sensor /2 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
49 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL2 Exit clutch /2 (PF 1st
sensor /3 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
50 PS18 Pre-registration sensor (PF • 000: No paper CL3 Vertical conveyance
1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 1st tandem)
51 PS25 Paper leading edge sensor • 000: No paper CL4 Vertical conveyance
(PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /2 (PF 1st tandem)
52 PS26 Exit sensor /1 (PF 1st • 000: No paper CL5 Vertical conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /3 (PF 1st tandem)
53 PS27 Exit sensor /2 (PF 1st • 000: No paper CL6 Vertical conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /4 (PF 1st tandem)
54 PS28 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper
sensor /1 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
58 PS32 Loop sensor /Up (PF 1st • 000: No paper
tandem) • 001: Paper
60 PS34 Tandem entrance sensor • 000: No paper Paper CL8 Horizontal conveyance
(PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper feed, clutch /1 (PF 2nd tandem)
61 PS35 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper conveya CL9 Horizontal conveyance
sensor/1 (FA-502 2nd • 001: Paper nce clutch/2 (PF 2nd tandem)
tandem)
62 PS36 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL7 Pre-registration clutch (PF
sensor/2 (FA-502 2nd • 001: Paper 2nd tandem)
tandem)
sensor/3 (FA-502 2nd • 001: Paper clutch/1 (FA-502 2nd
tandem) tandem)
tandem) tandem)
tandem) tandem)
I-197

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
66 PS17 Loop sensor/Lw (PF 2nd • 000: No paper CL13 Tandem conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/4 (FA-502 2nd
tandem)
67 PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL14 Tandem conveyance
sensor/1 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/5 (FA-502 2nd
tandem)
68 PS20 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL1 Exit clutch /1 (PF 2nd
sensor /2 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
69 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL2 Exit clutch /2 (PF 2nd
sensor /3 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
2nd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/1 (PF 2nd tandem)
(PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/2 (PF 2nd tandem)
72 PS26 Exit sensor/1 (PF 2nd • 000: No paper CL5 Vertical conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/3 (PF 2nd tandem)
73 PS27 Exit sensor/2 (PF 2nd • 000: No paper CL6 Vertical conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/4 (PF 2nd tandem)
sensor/1 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper
78 PS32 Loop sensor/Up (PF 2nd • 000: No paper
80 Paper M3 Horizontal conveyance
feed, sensor (PF 3rd tandem)
81 conveya M2 Vertical conveyance motor
nce (PF 3rd tandem)
3rd tandem)
83 Paper PS17 Loop sensor/Lw (PF 3rd • 000: No paper CL8 Horizontal conveyance
feed, tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/1 (PF 3rd tandem)
84 conveya PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL9 Horizontal conveyance
nce sensor/1 (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/2 (PF 3rd tandem)
85 PS20 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL7 Pre-registration clutch (PF
sensor/2 (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper 3rd tandem)
86 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL3 Vertical conveyance
sensor/3 (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/1 (PF 3rd tandem)
3rd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/2 (PF 3rd tandem)
(PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/3 (PF 3rd tandem)
89 PS26 Exit sensor/1 (PF 3rd • 000: No paper CL6 Vertical conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch/4 (PF 3rd tandem)
90 PS27 Exit sensor/2 (PF 3rd • 000: No paper CL1 Exit clutch/1 (PF 3rd
tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
91 PS28 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper CL2 Exit clutch/2 (PF 3rd
sensor/1 (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
sensor/2 (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Paper
95 PS32 Loop sensor/Up (PF 3rd • 000: No paper
29 3 SD4 Intermediate Separation • 000: Not Paper SD4 Intermediate Separation
Claw Solenoid installed feed, Claw Solenoid
• 001: Installed conveya
nce
I-198

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 - Process mount, set • 000: Not SD1 ADU lock solenoid
detection installed
• 001: Installed
11 FM7, Exhaust fan/1 + /2 (PF 3rd
FM8 tandem)
12 FM7, Exhaust fan /1 + /2 (PF 1st
FM8 tandem)
13 FM7, Exhaust fan /1 + /2 (PF
FM8 2nd tandem)
FM12 + /Rr1 (tray 1) (PF 1st
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
FM12 + /Rr1 (tray 4) (PF 2nd
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
FM2 (tray 1) (PF 1st tandem)
FM2 (tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem)
I-199

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1) (PF 1st tandem)
2) (PF 1st tandem)
3) (PF 1st tandem)
4) (PF 2nd tandem)
5) (PF 2nd tandem)
6) (PF 2nd tandem)
74 Paper PS4 Handle release sensor/1 • 000: ON
feed, (tray 1) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: OFF
75 conveya PS8 Handle release sensor/2 • 000: ON
nce (tray 2) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: OFF
(tray 3) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: OFF
(tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: OFF
I-200

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
80 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/5 • 0 to 255 Paper HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
5 (tray 1) (PF 1st tandem) • (Displays 0 feed, (tray 1) (PF 1st tandem)
until the conveya
specified nce
temperature is
reached)
1 1st tandem) (tray 1) (PF 1st tandem)
6 (tray 2) (PF 1st tandem) • (Displays 0 (tray 2) (PF 1st tandem)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
7 (tray 3) (PF 1st tandem) • (Displays 0 (tray 3) (PF 1st tandem)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
5 (tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem) • (Displays 0 (tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
1 2nd tandem) (tray 4) (PF 2nd tandem)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
until the
specified
temperature is
reached)
32 0 Optics Optics M21 Polygon motor/Y (C1100:
460 mm/s, 230 mm/s,
C1085: 400 mm/s)
1 M22 Polygon motor/M (C1100:
460 mm/s, 230 mm/s,
C1085: 400 mm/s)
2 M23 Polygon motor/C (C1100:
460 mm/s, 230 mm/s,
C1085: 400 mm/s)
3 M24 Polygon motor/K (C1100:
460 mm/s, 230 mm/s,
C1085: 400 mm/s)
4 M21, Polygon motor/Y, /M, /C, /
M22, K (C1100: 460 mm/s, 230
M23, mm/s, C1085: 400 mm/s)
M24
5 M21 Polygon motor/Y (C1100:
400 mm/s, C1085: 230
mm/s)
I-201

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 M22 Polygon motor/M (C1100:
400 mm/s, C1085: 230
mm/s)
7 M23 Polygon motor/C (C1100:
400 mm/s, C1085: 230
mm/s)
8 M24 Polygon motor/K (C1100:
400 mm/s, C1085: 230
mm/s)
9 M21, Polygon motor/Y, /M, /C, /
M22, K (C1100: 400 mm/s,
M23, C1085: 230 mm/s)
M24
33 0 LASD Laser drive board/Y The laser
B/Y becomes active
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor/Y (M21)
rotates at the
same time.
1 LASD Laser drive board/M The laser
B/M becomes active
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor/M (M22)
rotates at the
same time.
2 LASD Laser drive board/C The laser
B/C becomes active
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor/C (M23)
rotates at the
same time.
3 LASD Laser drive board/K The laser
B/K becomes active
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor/K (M24)
rotates at the
same time.
4 LASD Laser drive board/Y, /M, / The laser
B/Y, / C, /K becomes active
M, / by APC
C, /K operation.
The Polygon
motors/Y
(M21), /M
(M22), /C (M23)
and /K (24)
rotate at the
same time.
35 5 PS40, Skew correction home • 000: Edge not M25, Tilt correction motor/Y, / When the edge
PS41, sensor/Y, /M, /C, /K detected M26, M, /C, /K is detected from
PS42, (Light M27, the current
PS43 blocked) M28 position, it
• 001: Edge moves back to
detected the original
(exposure) position.
6 PS40 Skew correction home • 000: Edge not M25 Tilt correction motor/Y When the edge
sensor/Y detected is detected from
(Light the current
blocked) position, it
I-202

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
7 PS41 Skew correction home • 000: Edge not M26 Tilt correction motor/M When the edge
sensor/M detected is detected from
(Light the current
8 PS42 Skew correction home • 000: Edge not M27 Tilt correction motor/C When the edge
sensor/C detected is detected from
(Light the current
9 PS43 Skew correction home • 000: Edge not M28 Tilt correction motor/K When the edge
sensor/K detected is detected from
(Light the current
21 M25, Tilt correction motor/Y, / Moving to the
M26, M, /C, /K center standard
M27, position (fixed
M28 value)
Note
· If you use this
IO, the factory
initial condition
cannot be
reproduced.
· When you use
this IO, follow
"I.4.7.14
Procedure when
IO35-21 or
IO35-25 is
used". If you do
not follow the
correct
procedure, a
malfunction
code possibly
occurs.
22 M25 Tilt correction motor/Y Moving to the
center standard
position (fixed
value)
Note
· If you use this
IO, the factory
initial condition
cannot be
reproduced.
23 M26 Tilt correction motor/M Moving to the
center standard
position (fixed
value)
Note
· If you use this
IO, the factory
initial condition
cannot be
reproduced.
I-203

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
24 M27 Tilt correction motor/C Moving to the
center standard
position (fixed
value)
Note
· If you use this
IO, the factory
initial condition
cannot be
reproduced.
25 M28 Tilt correction motor/K Moving to the
center standard
position (fixed
value)
Note
· If you use this
IO, the factory
initial condition
cannot be
reproduced.
· When you use
this IO, follow
"I.4.7.14
Procedure when
IO35-21 or
IO35-25 is
used". If you do
not follow the
correct
procedure, a
malfunction
code possibly
occurs.
45 Optics PS69, Partial CD magnification • 000: Edge not M29, Partial CD magnification When the edge
PS70, correction home sensor/ detected M30, correction motor/Y, /M, / is detected from
PS71, Y, /M, /C, /K (Light M31, C, /K the current
PS72 blocked) M32 position, it
46 PS69 Partial CD magnification • 000: Edge not M29 Partial CD magnification When the edge
correction home sensor/Y detected correction motor/Y is detected from
(Light the current
correction home sensor/M detected correction motor/M is detected from
(Light the current
correction home sensor/C detected correction motor/C is detected from
(Light the current
correction home sensor/K detected correction motor/K is detected from
(Light the current
36 3 PS20 Color registration sensor/ 0-255 is
Fr displayed on
"Input check"
I-204

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
4 PS21 Color registration sensor/ 0-255 is
Md displayed on
"Input check"
5 PS22 Color registration sensor/ 0-255 is
Rr displayed on
"Input check"
37 0 - LD alarm measurement/
Y, /M, /C and /K
1 Optics - LD alarm measured value Display order:
display/Y LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
2 - LD alarm measured value Display order:
display/M LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
display/C LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
display/K LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
91 - LD1 to LD8 alarm data
clear/Y
clear/M
clear/C
clear/K
clear/Y, /M, /C, /K
41 0 Main Main M1 Drum motor/Y (230 mm/s)
1 body body M1 Drum motor/Y (400 mm/s)
2 M1 Drum motor/Y (460 mm/s)
3 M2 Drum motor/M (230 mm/s)
6 M3 Drum motor/C (230 mm/s)
9 M4 Drum motor/K (230 mm/s)
12 M9 Intermediate transfer belt
motor (230 mm/s, operates
after the initial operation
for the steering control is
finished.)
finished.)
finished.)
21 M10 Intermediate transfer
cleaning motor
I-205

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
22 Main PS86 Intermediate transfer Display of AD M9 Intermediate transfer belt
body steering sensor motor (230 mm/s, operates
finished.)
23 PS86 Intermediate transfer Display of AD M9 Intermediate transfer belt
steering sensor motor (400 mm/s, operates
finished.)
24 PS86 Intermediate transfer Display of AD M9 Intermediate transfer belt
steering sensor motor (460 mm/s, operates
finished.)
25 PS88, Drum rotate sensor/Y, /M, / • 0: Home M1, Drum motor/Y, /M, /C, /K
PS89, C, /K position is M2, (460 mm/s, Performs the
PS90, detected M3, drum phase control.)
PS91 • 1: Home M4
position is not
detected
• *Display 4
digit number
by 0 or 1. 1st
digit: Y, 2nd
digit: M, 3rd
digit: C, 4th
digit: K.
PS91 • 1: Home M4
position is not
detected
• *Display 4
digit number
by 0 or 1. 1st
digit: Y, 2nd
digit: M, 3rd
digit: C, 4th
digit: K.
PS91 • 1: Home M4
position is not
detected
• *Display 4
digit number
by 0 or 1. 1st
digit: Y, 2nd
digit: M, 3rd
digit: C, 4th
digit: K.
30 PS46 Intermediate transfer • 000: Other M33 Intermediate transfer
steering home sensor than home steering motor (home
position position search, operates
• 001: Home after the initial operation
position for the steering control is
finished.)
steering motor (forward,
operates after the initial
operation for the steering
control is finished.)
steering motor (reverse,
operates after the initial
operation for the steering
control is finished.)
I-206

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
motor (Reverse: 1/4
speed)
52 Main M59 Lubricant motor/Y (322
body mm/s) No environment
correction coefficient
53 M60 Lubricant motor/M (322
mm/s) No environment
54 M61 Lubricant motor/C (322
55 M62 Lubricant motor/K (322
56 M59 Lubricant motor/Y (230
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
mm/s) Environment
I-207

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
42 1 FM19, Intermediate transfer
FM21 cleaning cooling fan (LOW
rotation), intermediate
transfer cleaning exhaust
fan
3 FM19, Intermediate transfer
FM21 cleaning cooling fan (HIGH
rotation), intermediate
transfer cleaning exhaust
fan
4 FM30, Toner collection cooling
FM31, fan, ADU exhaust fan/1, /2
FM32
5 FM11, Deodorization fan/1, 2
FM12
6 FM18, Dew condensation
FM20 prevention fan/Fr, /Rr
7 FM38 ADU cooling fan/3
8 M27, Paper cooling fan/1, /2, /3
M28,
M29
9 FM3, Motor cooling fan/1, /2
FM4 (100% rotation)
10 Main FM19, Intermediate transfer
body FM21 cleaning cooling fan,
intermediate transfer
cleaning exhaust fan
11 FM24, Fusing exhaust fan/1, /2, /
FM25, 3
FM26
13 FM5 Inside machine cooling fan
(100% rotation)
M28,
M29
M28,
M29
M28,
M29
21 FM7 Developing charge fan/Y
22 FM8 Developing charge fan/M
23 FM9 Developing charge fan/C
24 FM10 Developing charge fan/K
FM4 (50% rotation)
28 FM57 HV cooling fan
29 FM17 Toner suction fan
30 FM30, Toner collection fan, ADU
FM31, exhaust fan/1, /2
FM32
31 FM22, Fusing thermal insulation
FM23 fan/Fr, /Rr
32 FM69 Fusing motor cooling fan
33 FM43, Lower pressure roller
FM45 cooling fan/Fr, /Rr
34 FM44 Lower pressure roller
cooling fan/Md
FM45 cooling fan/Fr, /Rr
36 FM5 Inside machine cooling fan
(50% rotation)
I-208

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
37 FM24, Fusing exhaust fan/1,
FM25, fusing exhaust fan/2,
FM26 fusing exhaust fan/3
(rotates at 50%)
FM4
40 FM13, Writing ventilation fan/1, /
FM14, 2, /3, /4
FM15,
FM16
FM14, 2, /3, /4
FM15,
FM16
FM14, 2, /3, /4
FM15,
FM16
43 FM22, Fusing thermal insulation
FM23 fan/Fr, /Rr
FM32
FM32
46 FM65, Front side inside machine
FM66 cooling fan/Rt, /Lt (50%
rotation)
rotation)
53 FM50 Fusing paper separation
fan/Md
fan/Fr
fan/Rr
63 FM58, ADU underside exhaust
FM59, fan/Fr, /Md, /Rr
FM60
FM60
FM60
rotation)
rotation)
FM45 cooling fan/Fr, /Rr (non-
volatile rotation)
69 FM44 Lower pressure roller
cooling fan/Md (non-
volatile rotation)
I-209

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
90 Main TEM/ Process temperature Display of FM5, Inside machine cooling
body HUM2 sensor temperature (°C) FM31, fan, ADU exhaust fan/1, /2,
FM32, intermediate transfer
FM30, cleaning cooling fan, toner
FM18, collection cooling fan, dew
FM20, condensation prevention
FM19, fan/Fr, /Rr, ADU cooling
FM38, fan/3, fusing thermal
FM22, insulation fan/Fr, /Rr
FM23
91 TEM/ Process temperature Display of FM5, Inside machine cooling
HUM2 sensor temperature (°C) FM31, fan, ADU exhaust fan/1, /2,
FM22, insulation fan/Fr, /Rr,
FM23, developing charge fan/Y, /
FM7, M, /C, /K, deodorization
FM8, fan/1, /2, motor cooling
FM9, fan/1, /2
FM10,
FM11,
FM12,
FM3,
FM4
FM10, fan/1, /2, fusing underside
FM11, cooling fan/Fr, /Md, /Rr
FM12,
FM3,
FM4,
FM43,
FM44,
FM45
I-210

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
FM9, fan/1, /2, fusing underside
FM10, cooling fan/Fr, /Md, /Rr,
FM11, front side inside machine
FM12, cooling fan/Rt, front side
FM3, inside machine cooling
FM4, fan/Lt, writing exhaust fan/
FM43, 1, writing exhaust fan/2,
FM44, writing exhaust fan/3,
FM45, writing exhaust fan/4, toner
M65, suction fan, fusing exhaust
M66, fan/1, fusing exhaust fan/2,
M13, fusing exhaust fan/3,
M14, paper cooling fan/1, paper
M15, cooling fan/2, paper
M16, cooling fan/3, ADU
M17, underside exhaust fan/Fr,
M24, ADU underside exhaust
M25, fan/Md, ADU underside
M26, exhaust fan/Rr, ADU
M27, cooling fan/1, ADU cooling
M28, fan/2, ADU cooling fan/3,
M29, fusing paper separation
M58, fan/Fr, fusing paper
M59, separation fan/Md, fusing
M60, paper separation fan/Rr,
M36, HV cooling fan
M37,
M38,
M49,
M50,
M51,
M57
94 FM17, Toner suction fan,
FM11, deodorization fan/1, /2
FM12
43 6 Main KCT Key counter • 000: Not
body installed
• 001: Installed
45 0 TEM1 Fusing belt temperature Display of Main L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / Temperature
sensor/Md temperature (°C) body L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 control at the
L6, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1 warm up
M48, (460 mm/s)
M51, Fusing steering motor
M63
1 TEM2 Fusing belt temperature Display of L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / Temperature
sensor/Rr temperature (°C) L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 control at the
M48, (460 mm/s)
M63
2 TEM3 Lower pressure roller Display of L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / Temperature
temperature sensor temperature (°C) L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 control at the
M48, (460 mm/s)
M49, Fusing pressure release
M51, motor (pressure)
M63 Fusing steering motor
I-211

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 TEM8 Upper pressure roller Display of L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / Temperature
temperature sensor temperature (°C) L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 control at the
M48, (460 mm/s)
M63
4 L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / Temperature
L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 control at the
M48, (460 mm/s)
M63
5 TEM6 Fusing belt temperature Display of L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / • L1, L2, L3, L4,
sensor/Fr temperature (°C) L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 L5, L6:
L6, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1 Temperature
M48, (460 mm/s) control at the
M51, Fusing steering motor warm up
M63 • M48, M51:
460 mm/s
8 L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, / Temperature
L4, L5, 4, /5, /6 control at the
L6, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1 idling
M48, (460 mm/s)
M63
11 Main TEM1 Fusing belt temperature Display of L1 Fusing heater lamp/1 Becomes active
body sensor/Md temperature (°C) with temperature
lower than a
prescribed level.
12 TEM2 Fusing belt temperature Display of L2 Fusing heater lamp/2 Becomes active
sensor/Rr temperature (°C) with temperature
lower than a
prescribed level.
sensor/Md temperature (°C) with temperature
lower than a
prescribed level.
lower than a
prescribed level.
sensor/Md temperature (°C) with temperature
lower than a
prescribed level.
lower than a
prescribed level.
47 0 M48 Fusing motor/Lw (230 mm/
s)
1 M48 Fusing motor/Lw (400 mm/
s)
2 M48 Fusing motor/Lw (460 mm/
s)
6 Main PS64 Fusing loop sensor • 000: No paper
body • 001: Paper
7 PS61 Fusing paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
8 PS60 Fusing paper exit cover • 000: Close
open close sensor • 001: Open
9 Main M48, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1
body M49, (230 mm/s)
M63 motor (pressure)
Fusing steering motor (belt
steering control)
I-212

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
10 M48, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1
M49, (400 mm/s)
steering control)
11 M48, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1
M49, (460 mm/s)
steering control)
13 L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp/1, /2, /
L4, L5, 4, /5, /6
L6, Fusing motor/Lw, /Up1
M48, (460 mm/s)
M63 Fusing steering motor (belt
steering control)
14 M49, Fusing pressure release
M63 Fusing motor/Up1 (non-
volatile rotation)
steering control)
15 M49, Fusing pressure release
M51, motor (release)
M63 Fusing motor/Up1 (non-
volatile rotation)
steering control)
16 M49 Fusing pressure release
motor (continuous rotation)
17 Main PS58 Fusing pressure release • 000: OFF M49 Fusing pressure release
body home sensor/1 • 001: ON motor (continuous rotation)
18 PS59 Fusing pressure release • 000: OFF M49 Fusing pressure release
home sensor/2 • 001: ON motor (continuous rotation)
19 PS65 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: OFF
• 001: ON
20 PS65 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: OFF Main M50 Fusing swing motor (home
• 001: ON body position search)
21 PS65 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: OFF M50 Fusing swing motor
• 001: ON (Perform swing operation
once)
• 001: ON (reverse)
• 001: ON (Perform swing operation
continuously)
25 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: PS58 M49 Fusing pressure release
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 OFF, PS59 motor (release)
OFF
• 001: PS58
ON, PS59
OFF
• 010: PS58
OFF, PS59
ON
• 011: PS58
ON, PS59 ON
I-213

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
26 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: PS58 M49 Fusing pressure release After the power
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 OFF, PS59 motor (weak pressure) becomes active
OFF and the front
• 001: PS58 door is opened
ON, PS59 and closed, the
OFF fusing pressure
• 010: PS58 release motor
OFF, PS59 operates only
ON after release
• 011: PS58 operation for
ON, PS59 ON M49 (output
check of
IO49-25 or
IO49-30) is
performed.
27 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: PS58 M49 Fusing pressure release After the power
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 OFF, PS59 motor (normal pressure) becomes active
OFF and the front
• 001: PS58 door is opened
ON, PS59 and closed, the
OFF fusing pressure
• 010: PS58 release motor
OFF, PS59 operates only
ON after release
• 011: PS58 operation for
ON, PS59 ON M49 (output
check of
IO49-25 or
IO49-30) is
performed.
29 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: PS58 M49 Fusing pressure release
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 OFF, PS59 motor (makes pressure
OFF condition unknown)
• 001: PS58
ON, PS59
OFF
• 010: PS58
OFF, PS59
ON
• 011: PS58
ON, PS59 ON
30 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: Unknown M49 Fusing pressure release After the power
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 • 001: Release motor (release) becomes active
• 002: Weak and the front
pressure door is opened
• 003: Normal and closed, the
pressure fusing pressure
release motor
operates only
after release
operation for
M49 (output
check of
IO49-25 or
IO49-30) is
performed.
31 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: Unknown M49 Fusing pressure release After the power
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 • 001: Release motor (weak pressure) becomes active
• 002: Weak and the front
pressure door is opened
• 003: Normal and closed, the
pressure fusing pressure
release motor
operates only
after release
operation for
M49 (output
check of
IO49-25 or
IO49-30) is
performed.
I-214

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
32 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: Unknown M49 Fusing pressure release
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 • 001: Release motor (normal pressure)
• 002: Weak
pressure
• 003: Normal
pressure
34 PS58, Fusing pressure release • 000: Unknown M49 Fusing pressure release
PS59 home sensor/1, /2 • 001: Release motor (makes pressure
• 002: Weak condition unknown)
pressure
• 003: Normal
pressure
35 PS65 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: Unknown M50 Fusing swing motor (home
• 001: Detecting position search)
home position
• 002: Home
position
detection is
completed
36 M48 Fusing motor/Lw current Display of AD M48 Fusing motor/Lw (230 mm/
value s)
value s)
value s)
43 M51 Fusing motor/Up1 (at
pressure)
44 M51 Fusing motor/Up1 (at
release)
45 M48, Fusing motor/Lw (230 mm/
M49, s)
M51, Fusing motor/Up1 (brake
M63 operation)
Fusing pressure release
motor
Fusing steering motor
M49, s)
M63 operation)
motor
M49, s)
M63 operation)
motor
48 Main PS95 Fusing belt steering home • 000: Other M63 Fusing belt steering motor
body sensor/1 than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
49 PS96 Fusing belt steering home • 000: Other M63 Fusing belt steering motor
sensor/2 than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
50 M63 Fusing belt steering motor
(Slants the heating roller to
moves to the front side.
The motor stops after it
slants the heating roller to
the maximum position.)
I-215

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
51 M63 Fusing belt steering motor
(Slants the heating roller to
moves to the rear side.
The motor stops after it
slants the heating roller to
the maximum position.)
52 Main PS92 Fusing belt position • 000: OFF
body sensor/1 • 001: ON
53 PS93 Fusing belt position • 000: OFF
sensor/2 • 001: ON
54 PS94 Fusing belt position • 000: OFF
sensor/3 • 001: ON
56 Main M51, Fusing motor/Up1 (non-
body M63, volatile rotation)
M64 Fusing motor/Up2 (brake
operation)
48 0 Interme PS44 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other Interme M11 1st transfer pressure
diate release home sensor than home diate release motor (Rotates
Transfer position Transfer forward continuously)
• 001: Home
position
1 PS44 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other M11 1st transfer pressure
release home sensor than home release motor (Stop at
position release position)
• 001: Home
position
position black and white mode
• 001: Home pressure position)
position
position color mode pressure
• 001: Home position)
position
release home sensor than home release motor (Home
position position search)
• 001: Home
position
5 M11 1st transfer pressure
release motor (Rotates
forward continuously)
50 0 Peculiar M5 Developing motor/Y (460
function mm/s)
1 s M5 Developing motor/Y (400
mm/s)
2 M5 Developing motor/Y (230
mm/s)
3 M6 Developing motor/M (460
mm/s)
mm/s)
mm/s)
6 M7 Developing motor/C (460
mm/s)
mm/s)
mm/s)
9 M8 Developing motor/K (460
mm/s)
I-216

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
mm/s)
mm/s)
12 Peculiar TCRS/ TCR sensor/Y output value 0 to 65535 M5 Developing motor/Y
function Y (1/1 speed) (pulse count
s value)
13 TCRS/ TCR sensor/M output 0 to 65535 M6 Developing motor/M
M value (1/1 speed) (pulse count
value)
14 TCRS/ TCR sensor/C output 0 to 65535 M7 Developing motor/C
C value (1/1 speed) (pulse count
value)
15 TCRS/ TCR sensor/K output value 0 to 65535 M8 Developing motor/K
K (1/1 speed) (pulse count
value)
16 TCRS/ TCR sensor/Y 0 to 65535 M5, Developing motor/Y, /M, /C
Y (pulse count M6,
value) M7
17 TCRS/ TCR sensor/Y 0 to 65535 M5, Developing motor/Y, /M, /
Y (pulse count M6, C, /K
value) M7,
M8
51 0 EL/Y Erase lamp/Y
1 EL/M Erase lamp/M
2 EL/C Erase lamp/C
3 EL/K Erase lamp/K
54 0 M15, Toner skew conveyance
M16 motor, Toner supply motor/
Y (high speed)
1 M15, Toner skew conveyance
Y (low speed)
Y (set value)
3 M 15, Toner skew conveyance
M (high speed)
M (low speed)
M (set value)
C (high speed)
C (low speed)
C (set value)
K (high speed)
K (low speed)
K (set value)
12 CL1 Toner bottle clutch/Y
13 CL2 Toner bottle clutch/M
14 CL3 Toner bottle clutch/C
I-217

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
15 CL4 Toner bottle clutch/K
22 M14 Toner hopper agitated
motor
23 M35 Waste toner collection
motor
24 M15 Toner skew conveyance
motor
55 0 Peculiar PS19 IDC shutter home sensor • 000: Other M36 IDC shutter motor
function than home (Operates only when a
s position home position is detected)
• 001: Home
position
3 PS19 IDC shutter home sensor • 000: Open M36 IDC shutter motor (home
• 001: Close position search)
(home
position)
• 002: Unsettled
4 PS19 IDC shutter home sensor • 000: Other M36 IDC shutter motor (home
than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
5 PS19 IDC shutter home sensor • 000: Other M36 IDC shutter motor (open
than home and close running mode)
position
• 001: Home
position
56 0 - Status indicator lamp (PAT
1 ON)
1 - Status indicator lamp (PAT
2 ON)
3 ON)
4 ON)
57 0 Peculiar - FS connection detection • 000: Not
function connected
s • 001:
Connected
2 - DF connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
3 - PF 1st tandem connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
4 - PF 2nd tandem connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
7 - PF 3rd tandem connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
58 0 TCRS/ TCR sensor/Y detection 0 to 65535
Y signal (pulse count
value)
1 TCRS/ TCR sensor/M detection 0 to 65535
M signal (pulse count
value)
2 TCRS/ TCR sensor/C detection 0 to 65535
C signal (pulse count
value)
3 TCRS/ TCR sensor/K detection 0 to 65535
K signal (pulse count
value)
I-218

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
4 - TCR set detection/Y • 000: Installed
• 001: Not
installed
5 - TCR set detection/M • 000: Installed
• 001: Not
installed
6 - TCR set detection/C • 000: Installed
• 001: Not
installed
7 - TCR set detection/K • 000: Installed
• 001: Not
installed
59 1 Paper M3 Horizontal conveyance
feed, sensor (PF 3rd tandem)
2 conveya M2 Vertical conveyance motor
nce (PF 3rd tandem)
3rd tandem)
4 CL8 Horizontal conveyance
clutch/1 (PF 3rd tandem)
5 CL9 Horizontal conveyance
6 CL7 Pre-registration clutch (PF
3rd tandem)
7 CL3 Vertical conveyance
11 CL1 Exit clutch/1 (PF 3rd
tandem)
12 CL2 Exit clutch/2 (PF 3rd
tandem)
17 Paper PS41 Roller pressure release • 000: Release M10 Roller pressure release
feed, sensor (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Pressure motor (pressure) (PF 2nd
conveya tandem)
18 nce PS41 Roller pressure release • 000: Release M10 Roller pressure release
sensor (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Pressure motor (release) (PF 2nd
tandem)
19 PS41 Roller pressure release • 000: Release M10 Roller pressure release
sensor (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Pressure motor (pressure) (PF 3rd
tandem)
20 PS41 Roller pressure release • 000: Release M10 Roller pressure release
sensor (PF 3rd tandem) • 001: Pressure motor (release) (PF 3rd
tandem)
67 0 SD-513 SD-513 PCB5 Rear console jam
indication board (direction
up towards the folding
conveyance section, jam
display LED of the sub tray
section)
1 PS211 Reverse stacker entrance • 000: Paper PCB5 Rear console jam
sensor • 001: No paper indication board (jam
display LED of the
entrance conveyance
section)
2 PS121 Clamp motor encoder • 000: PCB5 Rear console jam
sensor Transparent indication board (jam
• 001: Light display LED of the tri-
blocked folding tray section)
I-219

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 PS123 1st folding knife motor • 000: PCB6 Front console jam
encoder sensor Transparent indication board (saddle
• 001: Light stitching section, jam
blocked display LED of the booklet
movement section)
4 PS122 2nd folding knife motor • 000: PCB6 Front console jam
encoder sensor Transparent indication board (clamp
• 001: Light section, jam display LED
blocked of the booklet tray section)
5 PCB6 Front console jam
indication board (jam
display LED of direction
down towards the folding
conveyance section)
69 1 RU-511 SD1 Humidification section gate
solenoid
2 SD2 De-curler gate solenoid/1
3 SD3 De-curler gate solenoid/2
4 SD6 Reverse exit solenoid/Up
5 SD7 Reverse exit solenoid/Lw
6 RU-511 - Humidifier unit setting • 000: ON
signal (DIPSW 4) • 001: OFF
7 - Subsequent stage • 000:
connection detection Connected
• 001: Not
connected
9 - RU-511 connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
10 - Water tank full sensor • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
15 RU-511 M10 Humidification section
roller pressure motor/Lt
(home position search)
16 M10 Humidification roller Enabled after
pressure home sensor/Lt you conduct the
(Press) home position
search (69-15)
17 RU-511 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: No paper motor (400 mm/s)
18 PS2 De-curler entrance sensor • 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
• 001: No paper motor (400 mm/s)
19 PS3 Color density detection • 000: Paper M4 Paper exit motor (1000
timing sensor • 001: No paper mm/s)
20 PS4 Reverse paper exit gate • 000: Paper M5 De-curler pressure motor
previous sensor • 001: No paper (home position search)
21 PS5 De-curler pressure home • 000: Home M5 De-curler pressure motor/ Enabled after
sensor/Lw position Lw you conduct the
• 001: Other home position
than home search (69-20)
position
22 PS6 De-curler pressure home • 000: Other M6 De-curler pressure motor/
sensor/Up than home Up (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
23 M6 De-curler pressure motor/ Enabled after
Up you conduct the
home position
search (69-22)
25 FM1, Entrance paper fan/1, /2, /
FM2, 3
FM3
26 FM4, Ventilation assist fan/1, /2
FM5
I-220

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
29 FM21, Ventilation assist fan/3,
FM22 conveyance paper fan
30 RU-511 SW1 Door switch • 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board
• 001: Close
31 M3 De-curler conveyance
motor (400 mm/s)
33 RU-511 PS7 Humidification section • 000: Paper M7 Humidification section
entrance sensor • 001: No paper entrance conveyance
motor (400 mm/s)
34 PS8 Water tank empty sensor • 000: No water P1 Pump motor
• 001: Water
35 PS9 Humidification section • 000: Other M9 Humidification section
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor/Rt
sensor/Rt position (home position search)
• 001: Home
position
36 PS10 Humidification section • 000: Other M9 Humidification section Enabled after
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor/Rt you conduct the
sensor/Lt position (Press) home position
• 001: Home search (69-35)
position
37 M8 Humidification section
conveyance motor (400
mm/s)
39 PS11 Reverse, exit sensor • 000: Paper M11 Reverse exit motor Reversal
• 001: No paper (1000mm/s) direction
40 PS12 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M11 Reverse exit motor Output Direction
• 001: No paper (1000mm/s)
41 FM6, Humidification section
FM7, paper fan/1, /2, /3
FM8
44 FM9, Humidification section
FM10, paper fan/4, /5, /6
FM11
49 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit CDLE Color density LED/Y, Color
Y board/Y (LED OFF) out of 16bit DY, density LED/M, Color
CDLE density LED/C, Color
DM, density LED/K
CDLE
DC,
CDLE
DK
50 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit SD5 Shutter solenoid
M board/M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
51 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit
C board/M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
K board/K (LED OFF) out of 16bit
Y board/Y (LED ON) out of 16bit
M board/M (LED ON) out of 16bit
C board/C (CDDBC) out of 16bit
K board/K (LED ON) out of 16bit
80 RU-516 HV, High voltage unit, paper
M34 exit motor (main body)
(main
body)
70 1 FD PS1 FD entrance sensor • 000: Paper FD M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: No paper motor
2 PS4 PI exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Punch conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
3 PS5 Punch conveyance sensor • 000: Paper M3 Intermediate conveyance
I-221

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
4 PS7 Main tray folding paper full • 000: Full M4 1st folding motor (F
sensor • 001: Other rotation)
than full
5 PS8 2 holes punch home • 000: Other M4 1st folding motor (R
sensor than home rotation)
position
• 001: Home
position
6 PS9 3 holes home sensor, 4 • 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (F
holes home sensor than home rotation)
position
• 001: Home
position
7 PS10 Alignment plate home • 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (R
position
• 001: Home
position
8 PS11 Punch registration home • 000: Other M6 3rd folding motor (F
position
• 001: Home
position
9 PS12 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not M6 3rd folding motor (R
sensor installed rotation)
• 001: Installed
10 PS13 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper M7 PI conveyance motor
sensor • 001: Paper
11 PS16 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M8 Paper lift motor/Up (down)
• 001: Paper
12 PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full M8 Paper lift motor/Up (up)
• 001: Other
than full
13 PS18 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper M9 Paper lift motor/Lw (down)
14 PS20 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M9 Paper lift motor/Lw (up)
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
15 PS22 Main tray lower limit • 000: Other M17 Main tray exit motor
sensor than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
16 PS23 Main tray empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
17 PS26 Punch scraps full sensor • 000: Full
• 001: Other
than full
21 FD M10 Punch motor (3 holes)
22 FD PS2 Folding exit sensor • 000: No paper M10 Punch motor (2 holes)
• 001: Paper
23 CN90 Main tray connection • 000: M11 Tray up down motor (home
recognition (CN90 Connected position search)
connection) • 001:
Unconnected
24 PS51 1st folding conveyance • 000: Paper M12 Alignment motor (home
sensor • 001: No paper position search)
25 PS52 Folding entrance sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
26 PS53 2nd folding conveyance • 000: Paper FD M13 Punch registration motor
sensor • 001: No paper
27 PS54 3rd folding conveyance • 000: Paper M14 1st folding release motor
sensor • 001: No paper (conveyance position
move)
I-222

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
28 PS55 1st folding cam home • 000: Pressure M14 1st folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor • 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
29 PS56 2nd folding cam home • 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor
sensor • 001: Release (conveyance position
move)
30 PS57 3rd folding cam home • 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor • 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
31 PS58 S size conveyance sensor • 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor
• 001: Paper (conveyance position
move)
32 PS6 Punch registration sensor • 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor ON: Folding
• 001: Paper (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
33 FDOB Staple selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
34 FDOB Punch selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
35 FDOB Folding selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
36 FDOB Start or stop switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
37 FDOB Multi feed function select • 000: ON
switch • 001: OFF
39 PS46 Sub tray folding paper full • 000: Other
sensor than full
• 001: Full
40 PS31 PI conveyance sensor/Up • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
41 PS37 PI conveyance sensor/Lw • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
42 PS32 PI upper limit sensor/Up • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
43 PS33 PI paper empty sensor/Up • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
44 PS34 PI lift plate home sensor/ • 000: Other
Up than home
position
• 001: Home
position
45 PS35 L size sensor/Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
46 PS36 S size sensor/Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
48 PS38 PI upper limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
49 PS39 PI paper empty sensor/Lw • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
50 PS40 PI lift plate home sensor/ • 000: Other
Lw than home
position
• 001: Home
position
51 PS41 L size sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
I-223

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
52 PS42 S size sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
53 PS43 PI cover open close • 000: Open
sensor • 001: Close
54 PS44 PI paper set sensor/Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
55 PS45 PI paper set sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
61 PS47 PI max paper size sensor/ • 000: Paper FD SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
Up • 001: No paper
62 PS48 PI max paper size sensor/ • 000: Paper SD3 S size gate solenoid
Lw • 001: No paper
63 SD4 L size gate solenoid
64 FD - FD connection detection • 000: Not SD5 Roller solenoid/1
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
65 SD6 Roller solenoid/2
68 SD9 Sub tray gate solenoid
69 SD12 Paper exit solenoid
70 SD13 PI pick-up solenoid/Up
71 SD14 PI pick-up solenoid/Lw
72 SD15 Folding gate solenoid
74 SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid
75 CL1 PI registration clutch/Up
76 CL2 PI registration clutch/Lw
82 MFDB Multi feed detection board/
1 1 (CLK output)
89 FDOB FD operation board (lit all
LEDs)
90 JAMIB Jam indication board (lit all
LEDs)
71 1 SD-506 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper SD-506 M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: Paper motor
2 PS2 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper M2 Horizontal conveyance
sensor/1 • 001: Paper motor
3 PS3 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper M3 Folding entrance motor
4 PS4 Horizontal conveyance exit • 000: No paper M4 Folding conveyance motor
sensor • 001: Paper (F rotation)
5 PS5 Right angle conveyance • 000: Paper M4 Folding conveyance motor
sensor/1 • 001: No paper (R rotation)
6 PS6 Right angle conveyance • 000: Paper M6 Right angle conveyance
sensor/2 • 001: No paper motor
7 PS7 Folding sensor/1 • 000: Paper M29 Stapler motor/Rt (1 staple)
• 001: No paper
8 PS8 Folding passage sensor • 000: No paper M30 Stapler motor/Lt (1 staple)
• 001: Paper
9 PS17 Overlap home sensor • 000: Other M5 Bundle exit motor
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
10 PS18 Folding main scan • 000: Home M8 Folding sub scan
alignment home sensor/ position alignment exit motor
Fr1 • 001: Other
than home
position
I-224

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 PS49 Folding main scan • 000: Home
alignment home sensor/ position
Fr2 • 001: Other
than home
position
12 PS20 1st folding blade home • 000: Home
sensor/1 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
13 PS21 1st folding blade home • 000: Other
sensor/2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
14 PS22 2nd folding blade home • 000: Home
sensor/1 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
15 PS23 2nd folding blade home • 000: Other
sensor/2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
16 PS24 Folding exit home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS9 Tri-folding exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
18 PS10 Tri-folding paper full • 000: Full
sensor • 001: Other
than full
19 PS11 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
20 PS12 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full
• 001: Other
than full
21 PS44 Folding sensor/2 • 000: Paper SD-506 M5 Bundle exit motor (home
• 001: No paper position search)
22 PS19 Folding main scan • 000: Other
alignment home sensor/Rr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS46 Guide shaft home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 HS2, Clincher start sensors/Rt ,/ • 000: Clinch SD-506 M7 Folding main scan
HS4 Lt • 001: No clinch alignment motor/Fr (home
position search)
25 M7 Folding main scan Enabled after
alignment motor/Fr you conduct the
(alignment) home position
search (71-24)
27 M8 Folding sub scan
alignment exit motor
(home position search)
29 M9 Saddle stitching alignment
motor/Rt (home position
search)
I-225

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
30 M9 Saddle stitching alignment Enabled after
motor/Rt (inner movement) you conduct the
home position
search (71-29)
31 M10 Bundle arm motor (home
position search)
32 M10 Bundle arm motor (inner Enabled after
movement) you conduct the
home position
search (71-31)
33 SD-506 PS13 Saddle stitching paper • 000: Paper M11 Bundle clip motor (home
sensor • 001: No paper position search)
34 PS14 Bundle sensor/1 • 000: Paper M12 Bundle registration motor
• 001: No paper (home position search)
35 PS15 Bundle sensor/2 • 000: Paper M13 Overlap motor (home
• 001: No paper position search)
36 PS16 Bundle registration plate • 000: Home M14 Folding main scan
home sensor position alignment motor/Rr (home
• 001: Other position search)
than home
position
37 PS25 Stapler movement home • 000: Other M14 Folding main scan After you
sensor than home alignment motor/Rr conduct the
position (forward movement) home position
• 001: Home search (71-36)
position
38 PS26 Clincher up down home • 000: Home
sensor position
• 001: Other
than home
position
39 PS27 Saddle stitching press • 000: Other SD-506 M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
40 PS28 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor/Rt than home (staple position movement)
position
• 001: Home
position
41 PS29 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
home sensor/Lt than home motor/Lt (home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
42 PS33 Bundle clip upper limit • 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
sensor than upper motor/Lt (inner movement)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
43 PS30 Bundle clip lower limit • 000: Other M17 Bundle press movement
sensor than lower motor (home position
limit search)
• 001: Lower
limit
44 PS32 Bundle arm home sensor • 000: Other M18 1st folding blade motor
than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
45 PS31 Bundle arm rotation home • 000: Other M19 2nd folding blade motor
sensor than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-226

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
46 PS34 Bundle registration home • 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor
position
• 001: Home
position
47 PS35 Bundle press stage up • 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor When you
down home sensor than home (stapling) perform the
position output check,
• 001: Home place 2 or more
position sheets on the
clincher or
remove the
staple cartridge.
48 PS45 Bundle press stage up • 000: Other M21 Saddle stitching press
down limit sensor than upper motor (home position
limit search)
• 001: Upper
limit
49 PS37 Bundle press home sensor • 000: Home M22 Bundle arm rotation motor
position (home position search)
• 001: Other
than home
position
50 PS47 Bundle press lower limit • 000: Lower M23 Bundle press motor (home
sensor limit position search)
• 001: Other
than lower
limit
51 PS48 Scraps press home sensor • 000: Home M24 Bundle press stage up
position down motor (home
than home
position
52 PS40 Scraps box set sensor • 000: Not M25 Guide shaft motor (home
installed position search)
• 001: Installed
53 PS41 Trimmer scraps full sensor • 000: Full M31 Trimmer blade motor
• 001: Other (home position search)
than full
54 PS36 Bundle press movement • 000: Other M31 Trimmer blade motor
home sensor than home (trimming position)
position
• 001: Home
position
55 PS38 Bundle arm assist home • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor
position
• 001: Home
position
56 PS39 Bundle arm assist upper • 000: Upper M32 Trimmer press motor
limit sensor limit (upper limit search)
• 001: Other
than upper
limit
57 SW1 Staple empty switch/Rt • 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
• 001: No staple (pressing) you conduct the
home position
search (71-55)
58 SW2 Staple empty switch/Lt • 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
• 001: No staple (movement to trimmer you conduct the
board release position) home position
search (71-55)
59 HS1 Stapler home sensor/Rt • 000: Home M10 Bundle arm motor (inner
position movement)
• 001: Other
than home
position
I-227

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
60 HS3 Stapler home sensor/Lt • 000: Home M23 Bundle press motor
position (pressing)
• 001: Other
than home
position
61 PS50 Trimmer blade home • 000: Other M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor than home down motor (up)
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS51 Trimmer blade upper limit • 000: Upper M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor limit down motor (home
• 001: Other position search for the
than upper bundle registration plate)
limit
63 PS52 Trimmer press upper limit • 000: Other M26 Bundle arm assist motor
sensor than upper (home position search)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
64 PS53 Trimmer press home • 000: Other
sensor than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
65 PS42 Front door sensor/Rt • 000: Close SD-506 M33 Trimmer paddle motor
• 001: Open (forward rotation)
66 PS43 Front door sensor/Lt • 000: Close M33 Trimmer paddle motor
• 001: Open (reverse rotation)
67 PS54 Bundle sensor/4 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
68 PS55 Trimmer registration • 000: Other
sensor than
registration
position
• 001:
Registration
position
69 PS56 Folding sub scan • 000: Other
alignment home sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
70 PS57 Bundle exit sensor/2 • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
71 PS58 Bundle tray set sensor • 000: Installed SD-506 SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
• 001: Not
installed
72 PS59 Trimmer board • 000: Not SD2 Right angle conveyance
replacement sensor replace gate solenoid
• 001: replace
73 SD3 Horizontal conveyance
gate solenoid
74 SD4 Roller release solenoid/4
75 SD-506 PS61 Bundle tray paper full • 000: Other SD5 Roller release solenoid/1
sensor than full (roller press)
• 001: Full
(roller release)
77 SD-506 PS60 Folding entrance sensor • 000: Paper SD6 Roller release solenoid/2
• 001: No paper
(roller press)
(roller release)
80 SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
(lock)
I-228

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
81 SD-506 PS62 Trimmer completion • 000: Other SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
sensor than complete (release)
• 001: Complete
82 SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
(ON once)
83 SD-506 PS66 Wire slack prevention • 000: Without SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
sensor slack (ON twice)
• 001: With
slack
84 - New trimming unit • 000: SD12 Brake solenoid
• 001: Not
connected
86 CL1 Tri-folding exit clutch
87 FM1 Scraps removal fan motor
88 SD-506 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
90 SD-506 JAMIB Jam indication board (LED
/2 ON)
95 - Trimmer board solenoid Reset after
operation counter reset replace the
trimmer board
96 - Series of trimming
operation
97 M32 Trimmer press motor
(Move the trimmer board
replace position after
home position search)
98 M32, Trimmer board forced
SD11 movement (Activate SD11
after the trimmer press
motor moves to the
trimmer board replacement
position)
0 SD-513 SD-513 M49 Entrance motor
1 PS59 Entrance sensor/1 • 000: Paper M62 Paper re-feed motor
• 001: No paper
2 PS60 Entrance sensor/2 • 000: Paper M101 Reverse exit motor
• 001: No paper
3 PS1 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Paper M1 Conveyance motor
sensor/2 • 001: No paper
4 PS3 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Paper M6 Sub tray paper exit motor
5 PS5 Tri-folding tray paper exit • 000: Paper M12 Folding roller motor <Condition>
sensor • 001: No paper •Each parts: HP
<Prior
execution>
1. 71-46
2. 71-41
3. 71-42
<Remark>
M12 stops
automatically
after a specified
period of time.
6 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: Paper M54 Horizontal conveyance
7 PS12 Tri-folding conveyance • 000: Paper M65 Slitter registration roller
sensor • 001: No paper motor
8 PS22 Half folding paper exit • 000: Paper M108 Slitter motor
9 PS74 Tri-folding tray paper exit • 000: Paper M28 Paper exit motor
10 PS23 Saddle stitching stacker • 000: Paper M29 Paper exit belt motor
empty sensor • 001: No paper
I-229

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 PS94 Booklet set unit empty • 000: Paper M113, Rotary cutter motor/Fr,
sensor • 001: No paper M114 rotary cutter motor/Rr
12 SD-513 PS37 Clamp empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
13 SD-513 PS38 Gripper paper sensor • 000: Paper SD-513 FM3, Fall assist fan/Rr, fall
• 001: No paper FM4 assist fan/Fr
14 PS43 Booklet tray paper exit • 000: Paper
15 PS98 Registration sensor • 000: Paper M30, Stapler motor, clincher <Condition>
• 001: No paper SD1 solenoid (Home position •Each parts: HP
search)
16 - FD-504 connection • 000: M30, The string of the staple <Condition>
detection signal Connected SD1 operation •Each parts: HP
• 001: Not <Prior
connected execution>
1. 71-49
2. 71-59
3. 71-15
<Remark>
When you
perform the
output check,
place 2 or more
sheets on the
clincher or
remove the
staple cartridge.
17 - TU-503 connection • 000: SD7 Sub tray gate solenoid
detection signal Connected
• 001: Not
connected
18 - CR-101 connection • 000: SD4 Saddle stitching alignment
detection signal Connected plate release solenoid/Md
• 001: Not
connected
19 SD-513 PS72 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Paper SD-513 SD11 Booklet holding solenoid <Condition>
sensor /1 • 001: No paper •Each parts: HP
<Prior
execution>
1. 71-53
2. 71-70
20 SD-513 PS62 Entrance section door • 000: Open SD-513 SD14 Front console open close
sensor • 001: Close solenoid
21 PS65 Conveyance gate home • 000: Other SD12 Trimmer brake solenoid
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
22 PS66 Reverse exit gate home • 000: Other - The string of trimming <Prior
sensor than home operation execution>
position 1. 71-77
• 001: Home 2. 71-81
position
23 PS97 CD alignment plate home • 000: Other M45 Entrance gate motor
sensor/Lw than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS99 Paper re-feed roller • 000: Other M46 Reverse exit gate motor
pressure release gate than home (Home position search)
sensor position
• 001: Home
position
25 PS103 Front stopper home sensor • 000: Other M63 CD alignment motor/Lw
than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-230

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
26 PS104 CD alignment plate home • 000: Other M63 CD alignment motor/Lw
sensor/Up than home (Standby position
position movement (297 mm))
• 001: Home
position
27 PS105 Reverse exit roller • 000: Other M66 Paper re-feed roller
pressure release home than home pressure release motor
sensor position (Home position search)
• 001: Home
position
28 PS106 Slit scraps box set sensor • 000: Set M104 Leading stopper motor
• 001: Not set (Home position search)
29 PS107 Slit scraps box full sensor/ • 000: Paper M104 Front stopper motor
1 • 001: No paper (Standby position
movement (420 mm))
30 PS6 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Other M50 CD alignment motor/Up
roller pressure release than home (Home position search)
home sensor/1 position
• 001: Home
position
31 PS7 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Other M50 CD alignment motor/Up
roller pressure release than home (Standby position
home sensor/2 position movement (297 mm))
• 001: Home
position
32 PS11 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Other M50, CD alignment motor/Up,
than full M63 CD alignment motor/Lw
• 001: Full (Standby position
movement (297 mm)
simultaneous drive)
33 PS13 FD alignment belt home • 000: Home M102 Entrance roller pressure
sensor/1 position release motor (Home
than home
position
34 PS14 FD alignment belt home • 000: Home M102 Entrance roller pressure
sensor/2 position release motor (Press)
• 001: Other
than home
position
35 PS15 1st folding stopper home • 000: Other M7 Horizontal conveyance
sensor than home roller pressure release
position motor/1 (Home position
• 001: Home search)
position
36 PS16 1st folding knife home • 000: Other M8 Horizontal conveyance
sensor/1 than home roller pressure release
position motor/2 (Home position
• 001: Home search)
position
37 PS17 1st folding knife home • 000: Other M7 Horizontal conveyance
position motor/1 (Press)
• 001: Home
position
38 PS18 2nd folding knife home • 000: Other M8 Horizontal conveyance
position motor/2 (Press)
• 001: Home
position
39 PS19 2nd folding knife home • 000: Other M11 FD alignment belt motor
sensor/2 than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
40 PS20 2nd folding sensor • 000: Paper M9 1st folding stopper motor
• 001: No paper (Home position search)
I-231

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
41 PS21 Half folding conveyance • 000: Home M13 1st folding knife motor <Condition>
belt home sensor position (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
• 001: Other <Prior
than home execution>
position 1. 71-46
42 PS75 Conveyance gate home • 000: Other M14 2nd folding knife motor
sensor than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS81 Tri-folding tray paper full • 000: Other M48 Half folding conveyance <Condition>
sensor than full belt motor (Home position •Each parts: HP
• 001: Full search) <Prior
execution>
1. 71-46
44 M55 Conveyance route switch
motor (Home position
search)
45 PS89 Jam processing guide • 000: Open M59 Folding roller pressure
open close sensor/1 • 001: Close switch motor (Home
position search)
46 PS90 Jam processing guide • 000: Open M67 Folding roller guide motor <Condition>
open close sensor/2 • 001: Close (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
<Prior
execution>
1. 71-41
2. 71-43
47 PS92 Jam processing guide • 000: Open M58 Booklet holding unit <Condition>
open close sensor/3 • 001: Close movement motor (Home •Each parts: HP
position search)
48 PS127 Sub tray open close • 000: Open M58 Booklet holding unit <Condition>
sensor • 001: Close movement motor (Booklet •Each parts: HP
holding position <Prior
movement) execution>
1. 71-51
2. 71-70
49 PS129 Folding roller guide home • 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
sensor than home motor/Rr (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search)
• 001: Home
position
50 PS25 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
plate home sensor/Rr than home motor/Rr (Standby position •Each parts: HP
position movement (297 mm)) <Prior
• 001: Home execution>
position 1. 71-53
2. 71-15
3. 71-59
4. 71-49
51 PS26 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M19 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
plate home sensor/Fr than home motor/Fr (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search)
• 001: Home
position
52 PS27 Booklet holding home • 000: Other M19 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
sensor than home motor/Fr (Standby position •Each parts: HP
position move (297 mm)) <Prior
position 1. 71-54
2. 71-56
3. 71-53
4. 71-51
53 PS28 Booklet set unit position • 000: Other M17 Booklet holding motor <Condition>
sensor than home (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
position
• 001: Home
position
I-232

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
54 PS29 Booklet movement unit • 000: Other M20 Booklet set motor (Home <Condition>
position sensor/Lt than home position search) •Each parts: HP
position
• 001: Home
position
55 SD-513 PS73 Booklet movement unit • 000: Other SD-513 M20 Booklet set motor (paper <Condition>
position sensor/Rt than home standby position •Each parts: HP
position movement) <Prior
position 1. 71-59
2. 71-51
3. 71-56
4. 71-54
56 SD-513 PS47 Front console open close • 000: Open SD-513 M21 Booklet movement motor <Condition>
sensor • 001: Close (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
57 PS56 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M21 Booklet movement motor <Condition>
plate home sensor/Md than home (Clamp position movement •Each parts: HP
position (297 mm)) <Prior
position 1. 71-59
2. 71-51
3. 71-54
4. 71-56
58 PS63 Saddle stitching section • 000: Open M64 Stapler movement motor
door sensor • 001: Close (Home position search)
59 PS83 Booklet holding unit home • 000: Other M51 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
sensor than home motor/Md (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search)
• 001: Home
position
60 PS95 Stapler home sensor • 000: Other M51 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>•Eac
than home motor/Md (Standby h parts:
position position movement (297 HP<Prior
• 001: Home mm)) execution>1.
position 71-532. 71-153.
71-494. 71-515.
71-546. 71-59
61 PS125 Clamp up down position • 000: Other
sensor/Fr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS128 Clamp up down position • 000: Other M52 Fore edge finger motor
sensor/Rr than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
63 SD-513 PS101 Reverse stacker empty • 000: Paper SD-513 M52 Fore edge finger motor <Prior
sensor • 001: No paper (Press) execution>
1. 71-56
64 PS115 Slit scraps box full sensor/ • 000: Other M23 Clamp motor (Home
2 than full position search)
• 001: Full
65 SD-513 PS31 Clamp open close home • 000: Other SD-513
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
66 PS33 Lifter plate size home • 000: Other M22 Lifter plate movement <Condition>
sensor than home motor (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search) <Prior
position 1. 71-69
67 PS34 Lifter plate position sensor • 000: Other M22 Lifter plate movement <Condition>
than home motor (A3 standby position •Each parts: HP
position 1. 71-66
I-233

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
68 PS35 Fore edge stopper home • 000: Other M39 Lifter plate up down motor <Condition>
sensor than home (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
position
• 001: Home
position
69 PS36 Fore edge stopper position • 000: Fore M25, Clamp up down motor, <Condition>
sensor edge stopper M53 SQF clamp up down motor •Each parts: HP
store position (Home position search)
• 001: Fore
edge stopper
lift up position
70 PS30 Clamp up down home • 000: Other M25, Clamp up down motor, <Condition>
sensor/Rr than home M53 SQF clamp up down motor •Each parts: HP
position (Stops at the top)
• 001: Home
position
71 PS70 Clamp up down home • 000: Not M24 Fore edge stopper motor <Condition>
sensor/Fr detected (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
• 001: Detected <Prior
execution>
1. 71-69
72 PS86 Trimmer booklet holding • 000: Other M24 Fore edge stopper motor <Condition>
home sensor than home (paper standby position •Each parts: HP
position 1. 71-69
2. 71-71
73 PS44 Booklet tray paper full • 000: Other M60 Trimmer booklet holding <Condition>
sensor than full motor (Home position •Each parts: HP
• 001: Full search) <Prior
execution>
1. 71-69
74 PS124 Booklet tray section door • 000: Open M33 Trimmer board movement <Prior
sensor • 001: Close motor (the trimmer board execution>
moves 1 mm) 1. 71-77
75 PS39 Gripper open close home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
76 PS40 Gripper open close sensor • 000: Release
• 001: Pressure
77 PS41 Gripper angle sensor/1 • 000: Other M31, 1 pitch movement of the <Condition>
than booklet M32, trimmer board movement •Each parts: HP
receive M33, motor after home posiotion
position M35 search of the trimmer unit
• 001: Booklet
receive
position
78 PS42 Gripper angle sensor/2 • 000: Other M33 Trimmer board movement
than paper motor (the trimmer counter
exit position clear)
• 001: Paper
exit position
79 PS48 Trimmer scraps box set • 000: Not set M31 Trimmer blade motor <Prior
sensor • 001: Set (Home position search) execution>
1. 71-77
80 PS49 Trimmer blade home • 000: Other M31 Trimmer blade motor <Prior
sensor than home (trimmer position move) execution>
position 1. 71-77
• 001: Home
position
81 PS50 Trimmer blade upper limit • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than upper (opening upper limit execution>
limit position movement) 1. 71-82
• 001: Upper 2. 71-79
limit (Blade 3. 71-73
pressure)
I-234

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
82 PS51 Trimmer press upper limit • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than the (Home position search) execution>
opening upper 1. 71-77
limit
• 001: Opening
upper limit
83 PS52 Trimmer press home • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than home (Pressing) execution>
position 1. 71-77
• 001: Home
position
84 PS53 Trimmer board • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
replacement sensor than timing of (Movement to trimmer execution>
replacement board release position) 1. 71-82
• 001: Timing of 2. 71-79
replacement 3. 71-73
85 PS54 Trimmer completion • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than trimmer (Movement to trimmer execution>
completion board release position 1. 71-77
• 001: Trimmer after home position
completion search)
86 SD-513 PS55 Wire slack prevention • 000: Without SD-513 M30, Stapler motor (clinch <Condition>
sensor "Slack" M17 position movement), •Each parts: HP
• 001: With booklet holding motor <Prior
"Slack" (moving up position execution>
movement) 1. 71-49
2. 71-59
3. 71-58
4. 71-49
5. 71-59
6. 71-58
7. 71-15
<Remark>
When you
perform this
output check, be
sure to place 2
sheets or more
on the clincher
or remove the
staple cartridge.
87 PS93 Trimmer shutter open • 000: Close
close sensor • 001: Open
88 SD-513 PS96 Trimmer scraps box full • 000: Full SD-513 M26 Gripper motor (Home <Condition>
sensor • 001: Other position search) •Each parts: HP
than full <Prior
execution>
1. 71-94
2. 71-68
3. 71-66
4. 71-95
5. 71-69
6. 71-96
89 PS114 Slitter home sensor/Fr • 000: Other M112 Slitter movement motor/Fr
position
• 001: Home
position
90 PS108 Slitter home sensor/Rr • 000: Other M112 Slitter movement motor/Fr
than home (width 277 mm position
position movement)
• 001: Home
position
91 PS110 Slitter shutter open close • 000: Open M106, Slitter movement motor/Rr,
sensor • 001: Close M112 Slitter movement motor/Fr
(277 mm width position
movement)
92 PS204 SQF roller position sensor/ • 000: Without M106 Slitter movement motor/Rr
2 SQF roller (Home position search)
• 001: With SQF
roller
I-235

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
93 PS205 SQF clamp pressure • 000: Other M106 Slitter movement motor/Rr
release home sensor/Fr than home (277 mm width position
position movement)
• 001: Home
position
94 PS206 SQF clamp open close • 000: Other M202, SQF clamp motor/Rr, SQF <Condition>
sensor/Fr than pressure M203 clamp motor/Fr (home •Each parts: HP
• 001: Pressure position search)
95 PS201 SQF clamp pressure • 000: Other M202, SQF clamp motor/Rr, SQF <Prior
release home sensor/Rr than home M203 clamp motor/Fr (pressure) execution>
position 1. 71-94
• 001: Home 2. 71-68
position 3. 71-66
96 PS202 SQF clamp open close • 000: Other M201 SQF roller motor (Home <Condition>
sensor/Rr than pressure position search) •Each parts: HP
• 001: Pressure <Prior
execution>
1. 71-94
2. 71-68
3. 71-66
4. 71-95
5. 71-69
97 PS203 SQF roller position sensor/ • 000: Without M107 Creaser motor (Home
1 SQF roller position search)
• 001: With SQF
roller
98 PS109 Creaser home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
99 - FNS connection detection • 000:
signal Connected
• 001: Not
connected
72 1 FS-532 PS1 FNS entrance sensor • 000: Paper FS-532 M1 FNS entrance motor (1000
• 001: No paper mm/s)
2 PS5 Paper overlap sensor/3 • 000: Paper M2 FNS conveyance motor/2
• 001: No paper (1000 mm/s)
3 PS6 Staple center position • 000: Other M3 FNS conveyance motor/3
sensor than the (1000 mm/s)
center position
• 001: Center
position
4 PS7 Staple scraps box full • 000: Other M4 FNS conveyance motor/4
sensor than full (1000 mm/s) (MK-732)
• 001: Full
5 PS8 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M5 Stacker entrance motor
• 001: Paper (1000 mm/sec)
6 PS9 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Other M6 Paper exit motor (1000
than full mm/s)
• 001: Full
7 PS10 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper
8 PS11 Stack assist home sensor • 000: Other FS-532 M8 Stack assist motor (Home
than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
9 PS12 Stack alignment home • 000: Other M9 Stacker alignment motor
sensor than home (home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
10 PS13 Paper exit home sensor • 000: Other M9 Stacker alignment motor Available only
than home (A4S standby position from the home
position move) position
• 001: Home
position
I-236

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 PS14 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M9 Stacker alignment motor Available only
sensor than upper (Alignment operation) from A4S
limit position
• 001: Upper
limit
12 PS15 Paper removal sensor • 000: No paper M9 Stacker alignment motor Available only
• 001: Paper (A4S standby position after the
move) alignment
operation
13 PS16 3000 sheets sensor • 000: Other M10 Paper exit opening motor
than 3,000 (Home position move
sheets (Close))
position
• 001: 3,000
sheets
position
14 PS17 Main tray quarter position • 000: Other M10 Paper exit opening motor Available only
sensor than the (Opening big (In A4S from the home
quarter staple mode)) position
position
• 001: Quarter
position
15 PS18 Main tray middle position • 000: Other M11 Main tray up down motor
sensor than the (Home position move)
middle
position
• 001: Middle
position
16 PS19 4000 sheets sensor • 000: Other
than 4,000
sheets
position
• 001: 4,000
sheets
position
17 PS20 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other
home sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
18 PS21 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other FS-532 M12 Paper exit alignment plate
up down home sensor than home motor (Home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
19 PS22 Stapler movement home • 000: Other M12 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
sensor than home motor (Move from home from the home
position position to A4S shelter position
position
20 PS23 Main tray home sensor • 000: Other M12 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
than home motor (Move from A4S from A4S
position shelter position to alignment
• 001: Home alignment position) position
position
21 PS24 Gripper home sensor/Up • 000: Other M12 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
than home motor (Move from after the
position alignment position to A4S alignment
• 001: Home shelter position) operation
position
22 PS25 Gripper exit sensor/Lw • 000: Other M13 Paper exit alignment plate
than home up down motor (Home
position position search)
• 001: Home
position
23 PS26 Small size paper alignment • 000: Other M13 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
home sensor than home up down motor (Move from from the home
position home position to alignment position
position
I-237

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
24 PS27 Stack rear home sensor • 000: Other M14 Stapler movement motor
than home (Home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
25 PS28 Stacker empty sensor • 000: No paper M14 Stapler movement motor
• 001: Paper (move to the A4 size 1-
stapling position)
26 PS29 Stacker rear stopper home • 000: Other M15 Tray shift roller motor
position
• 001: Home
position
27 PS30 Stacker paper press home • 000: Other M16 Gripper exit motor/Up
position
• 001: Home
position
28 PS31 Conveyance gate home • 000: Other M17 Gripper exit motor/Lw
position
• 001: Home
position
29 PS32 Paper overlap sensor/1 • 000: Paper M18 Small size paper alignment
• 001: No paper motor (Home position
search)
30 PS33 Paper overlap sensor/2 • 000: Paper M19 Stacker movement motor
• 001: No paper (Home position search)
31 PS34 Roller pressure motor • 000: Other M20 Stacker rear stopper motor
home sensor than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
32 PS35 Staple scraps box set • 000: Not M21 Stacker paper press motor
sensor installed (Home position search)
• 001: Installed
33 PS36 Bypass gate home sensor • 000: Other M22 Conveyance gate motor
position
• 001: Home
position
34 PS37 Exit paper press home • 000: Other M18 Small size paper alignment Only available
sensor than home motor (moves to the after 72-29 is
position standby position of the performed.
• 001: Home paper whose length in the
position feed direction is 231 mm
or more)
35 PS38 Rewind paddle release • 000: Other M18 Small size paper alignment Restrictive
home sensor than home motor (moves to the conditions: Only
position standby position of the available after
• 001: Home paper whose length in the 72-34 is
position feed direction is 230 mm performed.
or less)
36 M25 Bypass gate motor (Home
position search)
37 FS-532 PS41 Staple empty sensor • 000: Staple M26 Exit paper press motor
• 001: No staple (Home position search)
38 PS40 Stapler home sensor • 000: Home M27 Roller pressure motor
position (Home position search)
• 001: Other
than home
position
39 PS42 Cartridge set sensor • 000: Cartridge M28 Rewind paddle release
• 001: No motor (Home position
cartridge search)
40 PS43 Stack upper section • 000: Paper
I-238

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
41 PS44 Stacker rear alignment • 000: Not
sensor detected
• 001: Detected
42 PS45 Door sensor • 000: Open FS-532 M31 Stapler motor (stapling) Available after
• 001: Close initialization
43 PS46 Main tray near empty • 000: No paper
44 FS-532 FM1 Large size paper
alignment fan
45 FS-532 - SD-510 connection • 000: Not
detection (SD-510) connected
• 001:
Connected
46 PS120 Tray exit sensor /1 • 000: No paper
(SD-510) • 001: Paper
47 PS121 Tray exit sensor/2 • 000: No paper
(SD-510) • 001: Paper
48 PS122 Tray lift up sensor • 000: Not
(SD-510) detected
• 001: Detected
49 FS-532 M120 Saddle stitching exit motor
(SD-510)
50 FS-532 PS101 Stacker empty sensor /Up • 000: No paper M101 SD entrance motor (1000
(SD-510) • 001: Paper mm/sec) (SD-510)
51 PS102 SD entrance sensor • 000: No paper M102 SD stapler motor (stapling)
(SD-510) • 001: Paper (SD-510)
52 PS103 Stapler home sensor • 000: Other M103 Stapler movement motor
(SD-510) than home (Home position search)
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
53 PS104 Staple empty sensor • 000: Staple M104 Saddle stitching alignment
(SD-510) • 001: No staple motor (Home position
search) (SD-510)
54 PS105 Stapler shift home sensor • 000: Other M105 Stopper motor (Home
(PS-510) than home position search) (SD-510)
position
• 001: Home
position
55 PS106 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other M106 Center paddle motor
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
56 PS107 Stopper home sensor • 000: Other M107 1st folding knife motor
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
57 PS108 Center paddle home • 000: Other M108 Folding roller motor
sensor (SD-510) than home (Rotate) (SD-510)
position
• 001: Home
position
58 PS114 Lower paddle home • 000: Other M109 Lower paddle motor
sensor (SD-510) than home (Home position search)
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
59 PS110 1st folding knife home • 000: Other M110 2nd folding knife motor
sensor (SD-510) than home (Home position search)
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
I-239

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
60 PS111 2nd folding knife home • 000: Other
sensor (SD-510) than home
position
• 001: Home
position
61 PS112 2nd folding sensor • 000: Not FS-532 SD101 2nd folding gate solenoid
(SD-510) detected (SD-510)
• 001: Detected
62 PS113 Folding exit sensor • 000: No paper SD102 Rear gripper solenoid
(SD-510) • 001: Paper (SD-510)
64 PS115 Stacker empty sensor /Lw • 000: No paper
(SD-510) • 001: Paper
65 FS-532 M302 Punch shift motor (Home
position search) (PK-522)
66 M302 Punch shift motor
(PK-522)
69 FS-532 PS301 Punch home sensor (for • 000: Other M301 Punch motor (Home
2/4-Hole) (PK-522) than home position search) (PK-522)
position
• 001: Home
position
70 PS307 Punch home sensor (for • 000: Other M301 Punch motor (2-hole PK 72-69 must have
3/4-Hole) (PK-522) than home punch execute) (PK-522) been performed
position in advance.
• 001: Home
position
71 PS306 Punch encoder sensor • 000: M301 Punch motor (3/4-hole PK 72-69 must have
(PK-522) Transparent punch execute) (PK-522) been performed
• 001: Light in advance.
blocked
72 PS302 Punch scraps box full • 000: Full
sensor (PK-522) • 001: Other
than full
73 PS304 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not FS-532 JAMIB Jam indicator board
sensor (PK-522) installed (Illuminate all LEDs)
• 001: Installed
74 PS303 Punch shift home sensor • 000: Other
(PK-522) than home
position
• 001: Home
position
75 PS305 Paper size sensor • 000: No paper
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
77 PS305 Paper size sensor • 000: No paper FS-532 LED1 Main tray upper limit LED
(PK-522) • 001: Paper (Illuminate LED)
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
80 - PK connection detection • 000:
(PK-522) Connected
• 001: Not
connected
81 SW1 Paper exit switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
82 PS206 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper
sensor/Lw (PI-502) • 001: Paper
83 PS201 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper FS-532 M203 Conveyance motor (667
sensor/Up (PI-502) • 001: Paper mm/sec) (PI-502)
84 PS203 Paper set sensor/Up • 000: No paper CL201 Conveyance clutch/Up
(PI-502) • 001: Paper (PI-502)
I-240

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
85 PS205 Upper limit sensor/Up • 000: Other CL202 Conveyance clutch/Lw
(upper tray) (PI-502) than upper (PI-502)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
86 PS204 Lower limit sensor/Up • 000: Other M201 Tray lift motor/Up (move
(upper tray) (PI-502) than lower down: home position
limit search) (PI-502)
• 001: Lower
limit
87 PIOB Sheet feeder manual start • 000: OFF M201 Tray lift motor/Up (Up)
clear switch (PI-502) • 001: ON (PI-502)
88 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: OFF M202 Tray lift motor/Lw (Move
punch button switch • 001: ON down: Home position
(PI-502) search) (PI-502)
89 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: OFF M202 Tray lift motor/Lw (Up)
function selection button • 001: ON (PI-502)
switch (PI-502)
90 MS20 Upper door open close • 000: Open SD201 Pick-up solenoid/Up
1 switch (PI-502) • 001: Close (PI-502)
91 PS207 Paper empty sensor/Lw • 000: No paper SD202 Pick-up solenoid/Lw
(PI-502) • 001: Paper (PI-502)
92 PS208 Large size sensor/Lw • 000: No paper CL203 Registration clutch
(PI-502) • 001: Paper (PI-502)
93 PS209 Upper limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other PIOB PI control board (illuminate
(lower tray) (PI-502) than upper all LEDs) (PI-502)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
94 PS210 Tray lower limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other
(lower tray) (PI-502) than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
95 PS202 Paper empty sensor/Up • 000: No paper
(PI-502) • 001: Paper
96 PS212 Paper set sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
97 - PK connection detection • 000: Not
(PI-502) connected
• 001:
Connected
99 - FS connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
73 1 LS (1st PS4 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper LS (1st M2 Conveyance motor
2 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
3 PS7 Conveyance sensor/1 • 000: No paper M3 Sub tray exit motor
• 001: Paper
• 001: Paper
5 PS17 Conveyance sensor/3 • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
6 PS18 Coupling exit sensor • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
7 PS3 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other M4 Grip conveyance motor
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
8 PS20 Paper empty sensor/2 • 000: No paper M4 Grip conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
9 PS13 2,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
sensor • 001: ON operation)
I-241

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
• 001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor • 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
• 001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (down)
• 001: Installed
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (up)
• 001: Installed
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release • 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor • 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch • 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
• 001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch • 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
18 RS2 JAM door switch • 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor • 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid/
• 001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid/
switch than upper 1
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit • 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor • 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home • 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid/2
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor/
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor/Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor/1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor/Rr
32 LS (1st - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
• 001:
Connected
74 1 LS (2nd PS4 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper LS (2nd M2 Conveyance motor
2 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
• 001: Paper
• 001: Paper
5 PS17 Conveyance sensor/3 • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
I-242

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 PS18 Coupling exit sensor • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
7 PS3 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other M4 Grip conveyance motor
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
8 PS20 Paper empty sensor/2 • 000: No paper M4 Grip conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
9 PS13 2,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
sensor • 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
• 001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor • 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
• 001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (down)
• 001: Installed
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (up)
• 001: Installed
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release • 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor • 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch • 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
• 001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch • 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
18 RS2 JAM door switch • 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor • 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid/
• 001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid/
switch than upper 1
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit • 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor • 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home • 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid/2
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor/
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor/Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor/1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor/Rr
I-243

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
32 LS (2nd - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
• 001:
Connected
76 1 RU-510 PS7 Gate home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
2 PS8 Stack switch home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
3 - Subsequent stage • 000:
• 001: Not
connected
7 PS5 Stacker jam sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
21 RU-510 M5 Gate motor (home position
move)
24 - M6 Stack switch motor (home
position move)
29 RU-510 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
40 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
42 PS4 CD alignment home • 000: Other RU-510 M4 CD alignment motor (home
sensor than home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS2 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M2 Paper exit motor
• 001: No paper
44 PS6 Entrance jam sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
46 PS3 FD alignment home sensor • 000: Other RU-510 M3 FD alignment motor (home
than home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
49 MS1 Interlock switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
52 RU-510 FM1, Stack assist fan /Fr, /Rr
FM2
90 JAMIB JAM indicator board (lit all
LEDs)
77 1 PB PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper PB M1 Entrance conveyance
2 PS2 SC entrance sensor • 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
3 PS3 Cover paper entrance • 000: No paper SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
4 PS4 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper SD2 Bypass gate solenoid
• 001: Paper
5 PS5 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Full SD3 Sub tray gate solenoid
• 001: Other
than full
6 SD4 Sub tray exit solenoid
7 M11 SC entrance conveyance
motor
8 PB PS12 SC switchback arm • 000: Press M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor • 001: Release conveyance motor (F
rotation)
I-244

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
9 PS13 SC switchback spring • 000: Release M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor • 001: Press conveyance motor (R
rotation)
10 PS14 SC alignment HP sensor • 000: Other M13 SC switchback release
than home motor (home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
11 PS16 SC paper detection sensor • 000: Paper M13 SC switchback release
• 001: No paper motor (High pressing
position move)
12 PS17 SC roller release sensor • 000: Release M13 SC switchback release
• 001: Press motor (Low pressing
position move)
13 PS18 Clamp entrance movement • 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor (home
HP sensor than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
14 PS19 Clamp entrance roller • 000: Release M15 SC alignment motor (A4 77-13 must have
release sensor • 001: Press standby position move) been performed
in advance.
15 PS21 Clamp alignment HP • 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor
sensor than home (alignment)
position
• 001: Home
position
16 PS22 Clamp HP sensor • 000: Other M17 SC bundle conveyance
than home motor
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS23 Clamp pressure sensor • 000: Release M18 SC roller release motor
• 001: Press (home position search)
18 PS24 Clamp rotation HP sensor • 000: Other M18 SC roller release motor
than home (movement to the pressing
position position)
• 001: Home
position
19 PS25 Clamp rotation pressure • 000: Release M19 Clamp entrance movement
sensor • 001: Press motor (home position
search)
20 PS26 Cover paper table upper • 000: Other M19 Clamp entrance movement The following
limit sensor/Fr than upper motor (movement to the adjustments
limit entrance position) must have been
• 001: Upper made in
limit advance.
1. 77-19
2. 77-29
3. 77-31
4. 77-32
21 PS27 Cover paper table upper • 000: Other M20 Clamp entrance roller
limit sensor/Rr than upper release motor (home
limit position search)
• 001: Upper
limit
22 PS28 Clamp paper sensor • 000: Paper M20 Clamp entrance roller
• 001: No paper release motor (pressing
position move)
23 PS29 Booklet thickness sensor • 000: Not SD11 FD alignment solenoid
detected
• 001: Detected
24 SD12 SC stopper solenoid
25 SD13 SC pressure arm solenoid
I-245

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
26 PB PS33 Glue tank HP sensor • 000: Other M21 Clamp alignment motor
than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
27 PS36 Pellet supply remaining • 000: Pellet M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor • 001: No pellet (A4 standby position
move)
28 PS37 Pellet supply passage • 000: Detected M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor • 001: Not (alignment)
detected
29 PS38 Pellet supply arm upper • 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (home
limit sensor than upper position search)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
30 PS39 Pellet supply arm home • 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (movement
sensor than lower to the clamp position)
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
31 M32 Glue apply roller motor • 000: Abnormal M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
• 001: Normal (home position search) been performed
in advance.
32 PS3 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
• 001: No paper (movement to the compile been performed
position) in advance.
33 PS41 Cover paper alignment HP • 000: Other SD91 Straight gate solenoid
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
34 PS42 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor/Rt than home motor (home position adjustments
position search) must have been
• 001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
35 PS43 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor/Lt than home motor (tank forward adjustments
position movement) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-51
36 PS44 Cover paper switchback • 000: Paper M31 Glue tank movement The following
sensor • 001: No paper motor (tank backward adjustments
movement) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-35
2. 77-55
3. 77-29
4. 77-34
5. 77-49
6. 77-51
37 PS45 Cover paper sensor/Rt • 000: Paper M32 Glue apply roller motor Be sure that the
• 001: No paper warm-up
completes.
38 PS46 Cover paper sensor/Lt • 000: Paper SD31 Glue tank up solenoid/1
• 001: No paper
39 PS47 Cover paper table HP • 000: Home SD32 Cover paper glue up
sensor/Fr position solenoid
• 001: Other
than home
position
I-246

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
40 PS53 Cover paper table HP • 000: Home H1 Glue tank heater
sensor/Rr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
41 PS48 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Other H2 Glue apply roller heater
HP sensor/Rt than home
position
• 001: Home
position
42 PS49 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Other
HP sensor/Lt than home
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS50 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Not PB M34 Pellet supply arm motor
encoder sensor detected (home position search)
• 001: Detected
44 PS51 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Not at M34 Pellet supply arm motor The following
position sensor the reference (movement to the supply adjustments
position position) must have been
• 001: At the made in
reference advance.
position 1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
45 PS52 Cover paper folding • 000: Release M41 Cover paper alignment 77-55 must have
pressure sensor • 001: Press motor (home position been performed
search) in advance.
46 SW41 Cutter home sensor • 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (A3 standby position adjustments
• 001: Other move) must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
47 SW42 Cutter home sensor • 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (alignment) adjustments
• 001: Other must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
5. 77-46
48 MS2 Front door switch • 000: Open M42 Booklet exit motor 77-55 must have
• 001: Close been performed
in advance.
49 PS57 Booklet door sensor • 000: Open M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
• 001: Close arm motor/Rt (home adjustments
position search) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
50 PS61 Booklet end sensor • 000: Not M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
detected arm motor/Rt (roller adjustments
• 001: Detected pressure) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
I-247

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
51 PS62 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
belt movement HP sensor than home arm motor/Lt (home adjustments
position position search) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
52 PS63 Cover paper belt home • 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
sensor than home arm motor/Lt (roller adjustments
position pressure) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-51
53 PS64 Cover paper belt lower • 000: Other M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit sensor than lower motor (F rotation) been performed
limit in advance.
• 001: Lower
limit
54 PS65 Book load limit sensor • 000: Upper M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit motor (R rotation) been performed
• 001: Other in advance.
than upper
limit
55 PS66 Booklet sensor/1 • 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down
• 001: No paper M47 motor/Fr, /Rr (home
position search)
56 PS67 Booklet sensor/2 • 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down The following
• 001: No paper M47 motor/Fr, /Rr (book spine adjustments
corner creation) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-50
6. 77-51
7. 77-52
8. 77-19
9. 77-31
10. 77-30
11. 77-32
12. 77-45
13. 77-58
14. 77-61
57 PS68 Booklet stopper HP sensor • 000: Other M48 Cover paper folding motor/ 77-55 must have
than home Rt (home position search) been performed
position in advance.
• 001: Home
position
58 PS69 Cart set sensor • 000: Not M48 Cover paper folding motor/ The following
installed Rt (movement to the open adjustments
• 001: Installed position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
59 OB/2 Booklet stock operation • 000: SW ON M48 Cover paper folding motor/ The following
board • 001: SW OFF Rt (movement to the close adjustments
position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-58
I-248

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
60 - - M49 Cover paper folding motor/ 77-55 must have
Lt (home position search) been performed
in advance.
61 SW1 Upper door switch/1 • 000: Close M49 Cover paper folding motor/ The following
• 001: Open Lt (movement to the open adjustments
position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
62 M50 Cutter motor (home 77-55 must have
position search) been performed
in advance.
63 M50 Cutter motor (cut position 77-55 must have
movement) been performed
in advance.
64 PBCB PB connection detection • 000: Not SD41 Cover paper lift solenoid The following
signal connected adjustments
• 001: must have been
Connected made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-57
65 - Cover paper tray set • 000: Installed
detection signal • 001: Not
installed
66 PB PS71 Cover paper empty sensor • 000: Paper PB
• 001: No paper
67 - power plug connection • 000: Power M61 Cover paper belt motor
detection signal detected
• 001:
68 PS74 Cover paper tray upper • 000: Other M62 Cover paper belt
limit sensor than upper movement motor (home
limit position search)
• 001: Upper
limit
69 PS75 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt 77-68 must have
sensor/1 • 001: No paper movement motor (A4 been performed
standby position move) in advance.
70 PS76 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt
sensor/2 • 001: No paper movement motor (book
stock alignment)
71 PS77 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down
sensor/3 • 001: No paper motor (home position
search: upper limit)
72 PS78 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down The following
sensor/4 • 001: No paper motor (movement to the adjustments
lower position) must have been
made in
advance.
1.77-68
2.77-69
73 PS79 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M64 Booklet movement motor
74 PS80 Waste box full sensor • 000: Full M65 Booklet stopper motor
• 001: Other (home position search)
than full
75 PS81 Waste box set sensor • 000: Not M65 Booklet stopper motor (A4 77-74 must have
installed standby position move) been performed
• 001: Installed in advance.
76 M73 Cover paper tray lift motor
77 M74 Cover paper feed motor
78 SD71 Cover paper pick up
solenoid
79 SD72 Cover paper tray solenoid
I-249

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
80 PS82 Cover paper tray knob • 000: Release M71 Cover paper tray fan/1
sensor • 001: Lock
81 TH2 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 M72 Cover paper tray fan/2
sensor/Up
82 TH3 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 CL71 Cover feed clutch
sensor /Md
83 TH4 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 CL72 Cover paper separation
sensor /Lw clutch
84 TH1 Glue apply roller 0 to 255 SD80 Front door lock solenoid
temperature sensor (locked)
85 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: Glue SD80 Front door lock solenoid
apply SW ON (released)
• 001: Glue
apply SW OFF
86 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: M80 Exhaust fan/1
Alignment SW
ON
• 001:
Alignment SW
OFF
87 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: Start SW - Multi feed clock output
ON signal
• 001: Start SW
OFF
88 MS1 Pellet supply door switch • 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board/1, /2
• 001: Close /1 (all the lights on)
JAMIB
/2
89 TH1 Glue apply roller • 000: Normal OB/1 Manual operation board
temperature sensor (high • 001: Abnormal (all the lights on)
temperature abnormality)
90 TH1 Glue apply roller • 000: Normal M4, Exhaust fan/2
temperature sensor (low- • 001: Abnormal M81 Pellet supply cooling fan
91 TH2 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor/Up (high • 001: Abnormal (lock)
92 TH2 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor/Up (low- • 001: Abnormal (release)
93 TH3 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal
sensor/Md (high • 001: Abnormal
94 TH3 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal
sensor/Md (low- • 001: Abnormal
95 TH Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal M71, Cover paper feed 77-96 must have
sensor /Lw (high • 001: Abnormal M72, operation for the been performed
temperature abnormality) M73, adjustment of the multi in advance.
M74, feed detection board
SD71,
SD72,
CL71,
CL72
96 TH Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal - All initial operation
sensor/Lw (low- • 001: Abnormal
78 01 GP-501 S1 Enter sensor • 000: No Paper GP - Entrance stepper motor
• 001: Paper
02 S2 Stepper 1 speed sensor • 000: No Paper - Exit stepper motor
• 001: Paper
03 S3 Punch module sensor • 000: No Paper - Transport motor
• 001: Paper
04 S5 Back Gauge sensor • 000: No Paper - Punch motor
• 001: Paper
05 S6 Stepper 2 speed sensor • 000: No Paper - Divert solenoid
• 001: Paper
I-250

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
06 S7 Exit sensor • 000: No Paper - Backstop solenoid
• 001: Paper
07 S8 Bypass sensor • 000: No Paper - Punch brake
• 001: Paper
08 S9 Punch flag sensor • 000 : Home - Punch clutch
position
• 001 : Punch
operation
09 - Chip tray switch • 000: Installed - Punch stepper motor
• 001: Not punch operation
installed
10 - Die set switch • 000: Installed
• 001: Not
installed
11 - Door switch • 000: Close
• 001: Open
13 S4 U-channel sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
16 - GP connection detected • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
79 1 PB PS91 Relay conveyance • 000: Paper PB M92 Relay conveyance motor
intermediate sensor • 001: No paper (1000 mm/s)
2 PS92 Relay conveyance door • 000: Open M91 Relay conveyance exit
sensor • 001: Close motor (1000 mm/s)
3 PS93 Relay conveyance • 000: Paper OB2 Booklet stock operation
entrance sensor • 001: No paper board (JAM display LED
ON)
4 PS94 Relay conveyance exit • 000: Paper M33 Pellet supply pipe motor
sensor • 001: No paper (home position search)
5 M33 Pellet supply pipe motor The following
(upper limit position move) adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-44
5. 79-05
6 PS96 Pellet supply pipe home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
7 PS95 Pellet supply pipe upper • 000: Not
limit sensor detected
• 001: Detected
65 MK-737 - Parallel communication • 000: No MK-737 - Parallel communication
signal line S0 signal Signal signal line C0 signal
• 001: Signal
66 - Parallel communication • 000: No - Parallel communication
• 001: Signal
• 001: Signal
• 001: Signal
• 001: Signal
• 001: Signal
I-251

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
• 001: Signal
• 001: Signal
80 0 ADU ADU SD3 Paper exit gate solenoid
82 0 SD2 ADU gate solenoid
83 3 ADU M37 ADU conveyance motor/1
4 M38 ADU conveyance motor/2
5 M39 ADU conveyance motor/3
84 0 M56 ADU reverse motor
(Forward: 230 mm/s)
1 M56 ADU reverse motor
(Forward: 400 mm/s)
(Forward: 460 mm/s)
(Reverse: 230 mm/s)
(Reverse: 400 mm/s)
(Reverse: 460 mm/s)
85 0 M57 ADU loop motor (Forward:
230 mm/s)
1 M57 ADU loop motor (Forward:
400 mm/s)
2 M57 ADU loop motor (Forward:
460 mm/s)
5 M57 ADU loop motor (Reverse:
230 mm/s)
400 mm/s)
460 mm/s)
10 M57 ADU loop motor (Hard
timer ON: 460 mm/s)
11 M57 ADU loop motor (Loop
creating operation. Stops
after a loop is created)
86 0 PS55 De-curler pressure • 000: Other M47 De-curler pressure
adjustment sensor than release adjustment motor
position (continuous rotation)
• 001: Release
position
1 M47 De-curler pressure
adjustment motor
(continuous rotation)
90 0 Adjustm - Finishing option Perform after
ent and adjustment data EEPROM installation
special storage PB-503, FD-503,
mode SD-506, SD-513
4 Billing
counte
r clear
91 0 Adjustm - Main body adjustment data Perform after
ent and NVRAM board storage installation
92 0 special - NVRAM board data reset Cannot adjust in
mode the field
93 0 - Finishing option Cannot adjust in
adjustment data EEPROM the field
storage (Factory initial PB-503, FD-503,
data) SD-506, SD-513
I-252

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
10 Adjustm - Scanner adjustment data Cannot adjust in
ent and EEPROM writing (PF-708) the field
special (Factory Initial Data)
94 0 mode - Adjustment value list
display
1 - Operation panel all lit
96 0 - Main body adjustment data Cannot adjust in
NVRAM board storage the field
(initial data)
97 0 - Memory board/1, /2
(MEMB/1, /2) capacity
check
98 0 - Memory board/1, /2
(MEMB/1, /2) check
6 - Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM)/Y
check
7 - Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM)/M
check
8 Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM)/C
check
9 Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM)/K
check
99 1 HDD/ Hard disk capacity (1
1, /2, / color)
3, /4
2 HDD/ Hard disk remaining
1, /2, / capacity
3, /4
3 HDD/ Hard disk bad sectors
1, /2, / check and recovery
3, /4
50 Adjustm - The non-volatile paper The paper
ent, setting initialization setting is all
special erased. The
mode machine reboots
automatically
when the
procedure
completed.
91 Adjustm - Unit counter correction Use this function
ent and (Correct 23 to 31 bit of the when an
special special parts counter abnormality
mode (number 57, 71, and 81)) occurs on the
to "0".) special parts
counter (number
57, 71, and 81)
when you
replace the unit.
When you use
the ORU-M,
modify the data
in the USB
memory by
[ORU-M Counter
Rewrite] after
you perform this
IO.
92 Adjustm File system initialization Temporary
ent and storage/HDD job
special all clear.
mode Reboots
automatically
when the
operation
completed.
I-253

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
93 WebUtilities Job history WebUtilities
data initialization. Output history all
clear Reboots
automatically
when the
operation
completed.
4.7.5 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type)
(1) Usage
When the multi feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or the PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of the special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be
detected properly.
Note
• Adjustment error occurs because of the temperature of the sensor surface. Make the adjustment at a temperature close to the
environment in which the copier is used (20 °C to 30 °C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board/1, multi feed detection board/2. (Refer to chapter II "Maintenance4.3.5 Registration section")
(Refer to G.15.3.19 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type))
3. Enter "70" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "70-00" appears on the message display area.
6. Open the FD upper door and the FD front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert a 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing
adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2 [3] (200g/m2 to 300g/m2
paper can also be used).
Note
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi feed
detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2.
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
7. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP51 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the FD activates, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short the circuit and damage it.
I-254
VR2 [1]
[2] LED1
8. In the PIDB volume (VR2), configure the power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 9.0 ± 0.1V
9. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper that you inserted in step 6.
10. Insert a 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1)
activates.
LED ON: No multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
11. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED deactivates.
12. If there is a detection error, return to step 6 to conduct the adjustment again. In step 8, adjust the power voltage to the value1.0V lower
than the previous adjustment.
13. Repeat the step 9 to step 12 until the detection error is resolved.
4.7.6 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type)
(1) Usage
When the multi feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or the PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
detected properly.
Note
• The multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2 are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper
and lower. Be sure to replace them as a pair.
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board/1, multi feed detection board/2. (Refer to chapter II "Maintenance4.3.5 Registration section")
(Refer to G.15.3.20 Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] that is placed on the multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2, and rotate the rotary switch
[2] on the PI drive board (PIDB) that is shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 6
F 7
Note
• The rotary switch5 is not used.
I-255
[1]
[2] a03uf3c027ca

7. Open the FD upper door and the FD front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert a 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing
adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2 [3] (200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
paper can also be used).
Note
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi feed
detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2.
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
8. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the FD activates, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
I-256
VR2
LED1
[1] [2] a03uf3c029ca
9. In the PIDB volume (VR2), configure the power voltage to the standard value.
10. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper that is inserted in step 4.
11. Insert a 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1)
activates.
13. If there is a detection error, return to step7 to conduct the adjustment again. In step9, configure the power voltage to the value1.0V lower
than the previous adjustment.
14. Repeat the steps 10 to 13 until the detection error is resolved.
4.7.7 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)
(1) Usage
When the cover paper multi feed detection board of PB or the PB control board (PBCB) is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
detected properly.
Note
• The multi feed detection board/S and the multi feed detection board/R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair. Be
sure to replace them as a pair.
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board/S and multi feed detection board/R. (Refer to G.21.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS)
and /R (MFDBR))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] that is placed on the cover paper multi feed detection board/S and the cover paper multi feed detection board/
R, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PBCB that is shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
I-257
[1]
[2]
564Af3c001cb
3. Insert a 1 sheet of paper (P/N 65AA-9910, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) in the cover paper tray of the PB.
(200 to 300 g/m2 paper can also be used.)
4. Select the output check code "77-96" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
5. Press the Start key.
Perform the all initializing operation.
6. After the operations, press the Stop key.
7. Select the output check code "77-95" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
The paper is fed from the cover paper tray and stops at the conveyance section.
Note
• Confirm that the paper is between the multi feed detection board/1 and the cover paper multi feed detection board/2.
9. After the operations, press the Stop key.

10. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PBCB.
- terminal: test pin Number TP24 (AGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the PB activates, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
[1]
VR4 [2] 564Af3c002cd
11. In the PBCB volume (VR4), configure the power voltage to the standard value.
12. Pull out the paper that is inserted in step 8.
13. Insert a 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PBCB (LED1)
activates.
15. If there is a detection error, return to step 3 to conduct the adjustment again. In step11, configure the power voltage to the value 1.0V
lower than the previous adjustment.
16. Repeat steps 3 to 14 until the detection error is resolved.
I-258
4.7.8 FD, SD-506, SD-513, PB adjustment data EEPROM storage

(1) Usage
The data of FD, SD-506, SD-513, and PB which is adjusted in the field are backed up to the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) of the FD control
board (FDCB), the SD control board (SDCB), the SD control board (PCB1), and the PB control board (PBCB). When you need, you can recall
the data from Installation Initial Data of Recall Standard Data (Finisher Adjustment data) in the service mode.
Note
• Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When you back up again, data is overwritten.
• When several units of FD, SD-506, SD-513, and PB are connected, the data is backed up to all EEPROM.
To back up the data of the 1 option respectively, connect only the target option to the main body.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys.
Confirm that "90-00" appears on the message display area.
4. "NOW" appears while in the back-up. When the back up completes, "FIN" appears and the current finisher adjustment data is backed up
in the EEPROM.
4.7.9 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the NVRAM board (NVRAM). When you need, select
[Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Machine Adjustment data), (Process Adjustment data) and recall it.
Note
• Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When you back up again, data is overwritten.
(2) Procedure
4. "NOW" appears during the back-up. Then when it completes, "FIN" appears and the current machine adjustment data and the process
adjustment data are backed up in the NVRAM.
4.7.10 Main image processing board line memory check

(1) Usage
When the image of a particular color is misaligned in the sub scan direction and a notable image trouble occurs, check whether there is any
abnormality on the main image processing board (IPB/M).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "98-##" (## represent the multi code number) appears in the message display area.
Multi Code 06: Main image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/Y
Multi Code 07: Main image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/M
Multi Code 08: Main image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/C
Multi Code 09: Main image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/K
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" appears, replace IPB/M.
4.7.11 Hard disk check

(1) Usage
Check the total capacity and remaining capacity of image memory area of the copier hard disk (HDD).
(2) Procedure
Note
• Perform the hard disk check while the front door is closed. When the front door is opened, the operation does not function.
Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "99-##" (## represent the multi code number) appears in the message display area.
Multi Code01: HDD image memory area capacity check
Multi Code02: HDD image memory area remaining capacity check
• Capacity check: Capacity of the HDD image memory area appears.
I-259
• Residual capacity check: Remaining capacity of the HDD image memory area appears.
4.7.12 Hard disk replacing procedure

(1) Usage
Perform the following steps when you change the hard disk for troubleshooting of an error code.
(2) Procedure
3. Press [High/Low].
The bad sectors check and the recovery of the hard disk are executed.
During the operation, "NOW" is displayed. When the check and recovery are completed, the result is displayed.
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed.
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed.
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start key to perform the bad sectors check and recovery again.
6. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch (SW1).
7. Replace the HDD. (Reference: G.3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105) or G.3.2.29 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: IC-602C))
Note
• When you replace the HDD/1, HDD/2, HDD/3 and HDD/4, be sure to replace them at the same time.
• When you replace the HDD/5, be sure to replace only the HDD/5.
8. Activate the main power switch (SW1).

Note
• Use "Start-up from power OFF" to enter the service mode. (Refer to I.4.2.1 Start method)
10. Conduct the format HDD data. (Refer to I.4.17.2 Format HDD All Data)
Note
• When the "HDD Lock Password" is enabled on the "Enhanced Security Mode" and an error occurred on the HDD, contact
the support section of the Konica Minolta.
• When the HDD data is backed up by the customer, they can be restored. For the details, refer to the user's guide.
11. Deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2).
4.7.13 Replacing procedure of the write unit

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment after you replace the write unit.
(2) Procedure
Press [05 State Confirmation] and then press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. Perform the LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear corresponding to the color of the replaced write unit.
"Output check"
• 37-91: LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear/Y
• 37-92: LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear/M
• 37-93: LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear/C
• 37-94: LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear/K
4. Perform the LD alarm measurement by 37-00 of "Output check"
37-00: LD alarm measurement
Note
• You can check the LD alarm data (laser power of the laser diode) from the "Adjustment Data List" in the "List output."
• The value appeared for "Default" on the adjustment data list is a value of when 37-00 is performed after LD alarm clear by
37-9*.
• "000" is normally displayed on the "Setting" on the adjustment data list. When you perform 37-00 in the field, the LD alarm
data measured result appears, and is overwritten each time 37-00 is performed.
• The value of the LD alarm level increases with the deterioration of the laser diode.
• Steps 1 to 3 are the procedures for the history management at replacing the write unit.
4.7.14 Procedure when IO35-21 or IO35-25 is used

(1) OUTLINE
IO35-21 or IO35-25 is possibly used in the following cases.
• Solution of the malfunction code (C-45**)
• To analyze the image trouble, the writing unit of another color is used.
Note
• When you use the IO35-21 or IO35-25, follow the correct procedure as follows.
If you do not follow the correct procedure, a position error occurs to the motor inside the writing unit and a malfunction code
possibly occurs.
• If you use the IO35-21 or IO35-25, the factory initial condition cannot be reproduced.
I-260
(2) Procedure
1. Write down the current data of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
1. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
2. "Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. screen"
Write down the value of [Current Data].
2. Change the Setting Data of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.] to "0".
Enter "0" through the numeric buttons, and then press [SET].
3. Print the test pattern of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
Note
• When the Start key is pressed, the Color Registration Adjustment (approximately 2 minutes) is performed automatically.
When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (Number 16 or number 33) is printed.
4. Perform IO35-21 or IO35-25.
1. Select [Service Mode] - [State Confirmation] - [I/O Check Mode].
Enter "35" with the numeric keys.
Press [High/Low].
Enter "21" or "25" with the numeric keys.
The targeted tilt correction motor moves to the center standard position.
5. Change the setting data of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.] to the value that was wrote down in step 1.
1. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Enter the value that was wrote down in step 1 through the numeric buttons, and then press [SET].
6. Print the test pattern of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
Note
• When the Start key is pressed, the Color Registration Adjustment (approximately 2 minutes) is performed automatically.
When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (Number 16 or number 33) is printed.
7. When the skew of the main scan direction is not within the standard value, perform the adjustment.
1. Check the skew of the main scan direction in the test pattern of step 6.
2. When the value is not within the standard, perform the adjustment. (Refer to I.4.3.16 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
4.8 ADF Adjustment

4.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.
(1) Function
Select the maximum width (A3 position) and the minimum width (B6 position) for the restriction plate positional VR (VR1).
(2) Usage
• Use this function if original sizes are detected mistakenly.
• Use this function when an original jam occurs.
• Conduct this adjustment when the restriction plate positional VR (VR1) is replaced.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 ADF Adjustment].
2. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 ADF Original Size Adj.].
3. Widen the original restriction plate [1] to the A3 position.
[1] 4. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Choose [Maximum Width], and press [start].
5. When "OK" appears as a adjustment result, the adjustment is
completed.
Note
• The adjustment results and the adjustment data of the
maximum width and the minimum width are shown in the
frame in the lower right the control panel.
I-261
6. Narrow the original restriction plate [1] to the B6 position.

[1] 7. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Choose [Minimum Width], and press [Start].
8. When "OK" appears as a adjustment result, the adjustment is
completed.
Note
• When the adjustment result is NG, the trouble of the restriction plate positional VR (VR1), the faulty of the wiring to VR1 and the
faulty of the DF control board (DFCB) is conceivable.
4.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position

(1) Function
This function executes the manual adjustment for the original stop position and the reading position of each mode of DF.
(2) Usage
Use this function when the result is "NG" on "I.4.8.3 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto".
Note
• Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted before Restart Timing(Front) and Restart Timing(Back). (Refer to I.
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment)
• Be sure the centering adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment) has been adjusted before the Centering(Front)
adjustment and the Centering(Back) adjustment. (Refer to I.4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
(a) Restart Timing (Front) and Restart Timing (Back)
Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Choose "Restart Timing(Front)" or "Restart Timing(Back)".
Press [Print Mode].
Select the original setting and the copy mode according to the item that you want to adjust, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, and
press the start key.
Note
• When you adjust "Restart Timing (Back)", turn over the adjustment chart and place it to the DF.
6. Confirm that the gap of A width of the adjustment chart and the copy sample is within the standard value.
Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
A
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -40 (image faster) to +40 (image slower)
1 step = 0.1 mm
I-262
(b) Centering (Front) and Centering (Back)

Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
Choose "Centering(Front)" or "Centering(Back)".
Press [Print Mode].
Select the original setting and the copy mode according to the item that you want to adjust, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, and
press the start key.
Note
• When you adjust "Centering (Back)", turn over the adjustment chart and place it to the DF.
6. Confirm that the gap of B width of the adjustment chart and the copy sample is within the standard value.
Setting range: -44 (to image in front) to +44 (to image in back)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.8.3 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto

(1) Function
• Conduct the auto adjustments of the original stop position and the read position in each mode of DF.
• Check the skew level.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you replace the DF.
Note
• Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted before Restart Timing(Front) and Restart Timing(Back). (Refer to I.
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment)
I-263
• Be sure the centering adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment) has been adjusted before the Centering(Front)
adjustment and the Centering(Back) adjustment. (Refer to I.4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [03 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust from [Restart Timing(Front)], [Restart Timing(Back)], [Centering(Front)], [Centering(Back)].
Note
• Conduct the adjustment to all items.
4. "ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto screen"

Place the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press [Start].
Note
• When you adjust "Restart Timing (Back)" or "Centering (Back)", turn over the adjustment chart and place it to the DF.
5. Check that the result is "OK" and press [<<Set].

Note
• The adjustment result, the position check, and the skew level are displayed in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
• The value of [Position Adj.(mm)] is reflected to the current value when [<<Set] is pressed.
6. When the adjustment result is "NG", check and correct the skew level of the original. If the errors still occur, conduct the manual
adjustment in "I.4.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position".
4.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the original loop amount at the DF registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove the paper skew and crease, or the paper jamming in the registration section.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.].
3. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Choose whichever you want to adjust from [Front] or [Back], and press [Print Mode].
Choose the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press the Start Key.
6. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Setting range: -5 (smaller) to +5 (larger)
1 step = 1 mm
4.8.5 Feed Paper Check

(1) Function
This function checks the paper feed in each paper feed mode of DF.
(2) Usage
When an original jam occurs, use this function if there is an error in the paper feed path.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Feed Paper Check].
3. "Feed Paper Check screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust from [Simplex(High Speed)], [Simplex(Mixed)], [Duplex], [AMS(Mixed)].
4. Place an original in the paper feed tray.
Note
• When you select [Simplex (Mixed)] or [AMS (Mixed)], place the mixed original according to the specifications on the paper
feed tray.
I-264
5. Press [Start] to start the operation.

Note
• Press [Start] to start the operation. Press [Start] to stop the operation when the machine is operating. Press [Start] again to
restart the operation when the machine is stopping.
• Press [Cancel] to finish the test forcibly while in the test operation.
• [Start] is not accepted unless an original is placed in the paper feed tray.
6. Feed all originals that is placed. When the all originals are fed, the paper feed test is completed.
4.8.6 Sensor Check

(1) Function
Execute the sensor check to the paper path of the original.
(2) Usage
Use this function when a paper jam of the original occurs.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Sensor Check].
3. "Sensor Check screen"
To check the screen display, operate the desired sensor using paper.
Paper: 1, No paper: 0
Sensor check list
Operation peculiarity and panel display
Symbol Panel display Parts and signal names
1 0
PS1 Feed Open&Shut Paper feed open close sensor Opened Closed
PS2 Read Open&Shut Read open close sensor Opened Closed
PS3 Registration Registration sensor Paper (light No paper
blocking) (exposure)
PS4 After separate After separate sensor Paper (exposure) No paper (light
blocking)
PS5 Paper exit Paper exit sensor Paper (exposure) No paper (light
blocking)
PS6 Read Roller Read roller sensor Pressed (light Released
PS7 Reverse roller Reverse roller sensor Pressed (light Released
SW6 ADF Open DF open close switch Opened Closed
PS8 Reverse Regist Reverse registration sensor Paper (light No paper
PS9 Before Read Before read sensor Paper (light No paper
VR1 Restriction Restriction plate positional VR Analog value
PS10 Length Sensor 1 Length sensor/1 Paper No paper
PS11 Length Sensor 2 Length sensor/2 Light blocked Transparent
PS12 Length Sensor 3 Length sensor/3 Paper No paper
PS21 Glass home position Glass cleaning home sensor Home position Other than home
position
PS14 Empty Empty sensor Paper No paper
PS16 Lift up upper limit Lift-up upper limit sensor Transparent Light blocked
PS15 Lift Up Lower Limit Lift-up lower limit sensor Light blocked Transparent
PS19 Consolidation 1 Mixed original sensor/1 Paper No paper
PS20 Original set Original set sensor Placed Unset
4.8.7 Read Position Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the read position of the original.
I-265
(2) Usage
Use this function when the result is "NG" on "I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.".
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Read Position Adj.].
3. "Read Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the original setting and the copy mode according to the item that you want to adjust, and load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF.
Then select A4 paper, and press the Start key.
5. Check if the gap between the adjustment chart and a copy is within the standard value.
A
7. "Read Position Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -89 (image faster) to +89 (image slower)
1 step = 1 mm
4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the read position of the original.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you have replaced the 1st slider, the 2nd slider, the scanner wire assy, the DF original glass, the glass movement unit,
the step sheet.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Read Position Auto Adj.].
3. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.
4. Place the DF reading chart [1] so that the triangular mark faces to the original glass side (down-pointing) and the apex of a triangle faces
to the left side (the black sheet side).
[1]
I-266
5. "Read Position Auto Adj. screen"

Press [Start].
6. Check that the result is "OK".
Note
• The adjustment result and the position check are displayed in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
7. If the adjustment result is "NG", check and correct the place position of the chart. If the errors still occur, conduct the manual adjustment in
"I.4.8.7 Read Position Adj.".
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the read magnification in the DF paper feed direction.
(2) Usage
Use this function when the result is "NG" on "I.4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment".
Note
(3) Procedure
2. "ADF Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place an "Adjustment chart" in the DF, select A4 paper, and press the Start key.
5. Check if the gap between the adjustment chart and a copy is within the standard value.
A
1 step = 0.1%
4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the read magnification in the DF paper feed direction.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you replace the DF.
Note
(3) Procedure
2. "ADF Adjustment screen"
Press [10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment].
3. "FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment screen"
Place the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press [Start].
4. Check that the result is "OK" and press [<<Set].
Note
• The adjustment result appears in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
• The value of [Magnification Adj.(%)] is reflected to the current value when [<<Set] is pressed.
5. If the adjustment result is "NG", check and correct the place position of the chart. If the errors still occur, conduct the manual adjustment in
"I.4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment".
I-267
4.8.11 Scanning Light Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the scanning light of the DF.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when you correct the difference with the original glass (placed by a hand).
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Scanning Light Adjustment].
3. "Scanning Light Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to correct from [R], [G], [B].
Note
• Be sure to conduct the adjustment for R, G, B following the same steps.
4. "Scanning Light Adjustment screen"

Enter a value and press [<<Set].
1 step = 1
4.8.12 Mixed Original Size Adj.

(1) Function
Conduct the accuracy adjustment in the driving length detection which is used in the DF mixed original copy mode.
(2) Usage
Specify the threshold of each size decision using by the detected length when you feed the standard sizes (the large size and the small size).
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [12 Mixed Original Size Adj.].
3. Place the "adjustment chart" on the DF.
4. "Mixed Original Size Adjustment screen"
Press [Start] to start the adjustment.
5. Check that the result is "OK".
Note
• The adjustment result appears in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
4.8.13 Line Detection Setting

(1) Function
If an original is placed on the DF tray when the DF cover is closed, this function detects lines (detects the dirt on the original glass in
advance). You can change each setting regarding the line detection setting.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you change the settings of the line detection.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Line Detection Setting].
3. "Line Detection Setting screen"
For the Detection Level, the Warning Display, and the Scan Prohibit Configuration., select any settings that you want and press [OK].
• Detection level: Select that perform the line detection operation or not, and the detection level.
Strict Easily detects the dirt on the glass.
Medium Standard level.
Mild Difficult to detect the dirt on the glass.
OFF Do not detect the dirt on the original glass.
• Warning Display: Select how to display the warning screen that encourage to clean the dirt on the original glass.
I-268
• Scan Prohibit Setting: Select whether the machine performs the reading with the dirt being detected.
4.8.14 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning

(1) Function
Switch whether the DF scan glass auto cleaning is conducted or not.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you change the setting of auto cleaning.
Note
• If this setting becomes active, the scan speed gets lower.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning].
3. "ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning screen"
Select [ON] or [OFF] and press [OK].

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of ADF adjustment to the factory initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [Factory Initial Data].
Note
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.

4.9 Finisher Adjustment

4.9.1 FS-532 Staple Position Adjustment (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the staple position while in stapling by FS.
The staple pitch can be adjusted when you adjust the stop position of the stapler movement motor (M14) in this setting.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position is not within the standard value by FS.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Finisher Adjustment].
2. "Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment].
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Stapler(Main) Adjustment].
4. "Staple Finisher(Main) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Position Adjustment].
5. "Staple Position Adjustment screen"
Select the Staple Mode that you want to adjust from [2 Position Pitch(120 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(140 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(165 mm)],
[Rear Diagonal], [Rear Parallel] and [Front Parallel]. Then press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. Check the Staple position "a" of the output paper in accordance with the selected Staple Mode.
• For [2 Position Pitch(120 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(140 mm)] and [2 Position Pitch(165 mm)]
Standard value: a = 120, 140, 165 ± 3 mm
I-269
• For [Rear Parallel]

• For [Rear Diagonal]

• For [Front Parallel]

a
9. "Staple Position Adjustment screen"
Range ([2 Position Pitch(120 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(140 mm)] and [2 Position Pitch(165 mm)]): -5 (narrower) to +5 (wider)
1 step = 1.0 mm
Setting range ([Rear Diagonal]: -5 (in front) to +5 (in back)

Range ([Rear Parallel], [Front Parallel]): -3 (in front) to +3 (in back)
1 step = 1.0 mm
I-270
4.9.2 FS-532 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
(1) Function
Changes the CD adjustment plate width of the staple bundle.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the stacker alignment motor (M9) to align the paper width and the alignment width.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a misalignment in the main scan direction in a bundle of paper while in stapling by FS.
(3) Procedure
2. [Finisher Adjustment menu screen]
5. Select [2 Position Pitch (120 mm)] and press [Print Mode].
6. Put the A4 size paper on the tray and press the start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the output paper in the main scan direction.
Standard value: a = ± 1.0 mm or less
8. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode] and [Return].
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
10. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [▼] or [▲], and select [All].
13. Check the alignment when the paper is stacked on the stacker and stops in the following conditions.
• CD adjustment plate: Closed
• FD alignment plate: Closed
• Rewind paddle: Descent
For the target value of the adjustment, refer to the followings.
• The interval between the paper and the CD adjustment plate: 0 mm
• The interval between the paper and the FD alignment plate: -2 mm (shorter compared to the paper length)
• The contact area between the paper and the rewind paddle: 2 mm (with the paper is pressed)
When you adjust the paper width, remove the stacked paper, and open and close the front door of the finisher to perform the initial
operation.
Note
∙ When the operation stops due to the paper lack or jam during printing, be sure to open and close the front door and perform
the initial operation.
∙ For the adjustment, be sure to conduct I.5.13.2 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.4.9.3 FS-532
FD Alignment Plate Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.), I.4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.) in order.
I-271
∙ If the size of the paper that you want to adjust exceeds 230 mm, the FD alignment plate moves to the standby position because
the paper is too long. Be careful that the paper jam possibly occurs at the paper exit section if the stacker is pulled out in this
condition.
14. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the interval between the paper and the CD alignment plate.
Setting range: -20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.3 FS-532 FD Alignment Plate Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the pushing of the FD alignment plate for the stacker while in alignment.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the small size paper alignment motor (M18) to adjust the amount of a bundle of paper which
pushed by the FD alignment part can be adjusted.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a misalignment in the sub scan direction in a bundle of paper while in stapling by FS for the paper
whose length in the sub scan direction is 230 mm or more.
(3) Procedure
Select [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment].
a
Press [03 FD Alignment Plate Adj.].
10. "FD Alignment Plate Adjustment screen"
operation.
Note
I-272
∙ For the adjustment, be sure to conduct I.4.9.2 FS-532 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.), I.5.13.3 FD Alignment
Plate Adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.) in
order.
condition.
14. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the interval between the paper and the FD adjustment plate.
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.4 FS-532 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the position of the paper exit alignment plate (front and back) while in paper exit alignment.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the paper exit alignment plate motor (M12) to adjust the alignment intervals of the paper exit
alignment plate.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven paper stack (main scanning direction) on the main tray in non-staple mode by the FS.
Note
• This adjustment is effective only for the paper more than 182 mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in the straight output,
or the paper more than 210 mm width (A4) in the shift output. This adjustment is invalid for the minimum size paper (A5S, B6S,
51/2 x 81/2S) since it does not operate the output alignment.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.].
5. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size that you want to adjust.
7. Place the paper that you want to adjust and press the Start key to output some test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
8. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
• Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
• Too narrow adjustment causes uneven paper exit in the sub scan direction.
The paper is stacked on the main tray and stops while the paper exit alignment plate is closed.
Check the alignment. For the target value of the adjustment, refer to the followings.
• The interval between the paper and the paper exit alignment plate: 0 mm
operation.
Note
9. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the position of the paper exit alignment plate.
10. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
Adjustment standard value (at the alignment operation): Paper width 0 mm to +1 mm
I-273
4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the rewind paddle descent (time) in stacking.
In this adjustment, adjust the stop position of the rewind paddle release motor (M28) to adjust the alignment intervals in the FD direction.
(2) Usage
When there is a misalignment in the FD direction, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
a
Press [05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.].
10. "Rewind Paddle Descent Adjustment screen"
operation.
Note
∙ For the adjustment, be sure to conduct I.4.9.2 FS-532 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.), I.4.9.3 FS-532 FD
Alignment Plate Adj. (Staple Fnisher (Main) Adj.), I5.13.5 Rewind Paddle Descent Adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment) in order.
condition.
14. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the rewind paddle descent.
15. "Rewind Paddle Descent Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -10 (Weak) to +10 (Strong)
1 step = 0.2 mm
4.9.6 SD-510 Fold&Staple Pitch Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stapler movement motor (M103) to adjust the Staple Pitch.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
I-274
(3) Procedure
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Staple Finisher(Fold) Adj.].
4. "Stapler(Fold) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment].
5. "Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
7. Load the paper which you want to adjust the size on the tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (Number 16).
8. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 ± 3 mm
a
b
fs503fs3011c
10. "Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Range: -300 (narrower) to +300 (wider)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• The variable range of fold&staple pitch is from 60 mm to 148.5 mm. Therefore, you cannot perform the adjustment after
which the fold&staple pitch exceeds the variable range.
11. Repeat step 6 to step 10 until the standard value can be obtained.
4.9.7 SD-510 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
(1) Function
Changes the CD adjustment plate width of the staple bundle.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the saddle stitching alignment motor (M104) to adjust the paper width and the alignment
width.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a misalignment in the main scan direction in a bundle of paper while in stapling by SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj.].
7. Load the selected size paper which you want to adjust on the tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number
33).
8. Check to see if the bundle of papers is misaligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the paper width setting is larger than the paper width)
and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve occurs when the paper width setting is smaller than the paper width).
Standard value "a": 1.0 mm or less
a
fs503fs3012c
I-275
9. When there is a misalignment or a paper curvature, press [Exit PrintMode].

Range: -50 (narrower) to +50 (wider)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.8 SD-510 Fold&Staple Staple Position (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position for the Fold & Staple by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the staple position in the FD direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position of the Fold & Staple by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Fold&Staple Staple Position].
5. "Fold&Staple Staple Position Adjustment screen"
33).
8. Check the misalignment "a" between the staple position and the fold position of the printed paper.
Standard value "a": = ± 1 mm
10. "Fold&Staple Staple Position Adjustment screen"
Range: -50 (output upper side becomes longer) to +50 (output upper side becomes shorter)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.9 SD-510 Fold&Staple Fold Position (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the Fold & Staple mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the folding position.
I-276
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold position of the Fold & Staple by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Fold&Staple Fold Position].
7. Load the paper which you want to adjust the size on the tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
8. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
a
10. "Fold&Staple Fold Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.10 SD-510 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi half fold mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the folding position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold position of the half-fold by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.].
5. "Half-Fold Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Standard value "a": = ± 2.0 mm
a
10. "Half-Fold Fold Position Adjustment screen"
I-277
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.11 SD-510 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
In the 1st Fold position adjustment, change the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the folding position.
In the 2nd fold position adjustment, change the timing that the 2nd folding knife motor (M110) starts to rotate since the 2nd folding sensor
(PS112) becomes active to adjust the folding position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
• When you adjust both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
• The position of the 1st fold is based on the leading edge of the paper and the position of the 2nd fold is based on the position of
the 1st fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step7 varies when either position of the 1st fold and the 2nd fold is changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Tri-Fold Adjustment].
5. "Tri-Fold Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment].
6. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Select the paper size that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
8. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Paper size Standard value (mm)
a ± 2.0 b ± 2.0
A4S 95.0 101.0
81/2 x 11S 89.4 95.0
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
[1] First fold [2] Double fold
Select the paper size that you want to adjust.
11. Press [Single Fold].
Setting range: -50 ( longer) to +50 (shorter)
1 step = 0.1 mm
• The dimension "a" in the step7 gets larger when the setting data is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when it is moved to
the negative side.
13. Press [Double Fold].
14. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -50 (shorter) to +50 (longer)
1 step = 0.1 mm
• The dimension "b" in the step7 gets larger when the setting data is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when it is moved to
the negative side.
I-278
4.9.12 SD-510 Double Fold Plate Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the pushing level of the 2nd folding knife on the Multi 3-Fold mode by the SD.
In this adjustment, change the time of the forward rotation of the 2nd folding knife motor (M110) to adjust the degree of how much the 2nd
folding knife motor is pushed in.
(2) Usage
Conduct the adjustment in case of the wide shift in the 2nd folded bunch on the Multi 3-Fold mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Tri-Fold Adjustment].
5. "Tri-Fold Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Double Fold Plate Adjustment].
6. "Double Fold Plate Adjustment screen"
Select the paper size that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
8. Check the wide shift in the 2nd folded bunch on the edge of the output paper.
9. Press [Exit PrintMode] in case of wide shift.
10. "Double Fold Plate Adjustment screen"
Range: -50 (shallower) to +50 (deeper)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• Push deeper in case of the wide shift.
• Push shallower when the box folding occurs in the thin paper.
• Push deeper when the overlap on the solid image shifts the 2nd folding positions of the cover, the 2nd paper and the
succeeding sheets of paper.
11. Repeat the steps 6 to 10 until the shift in the bunch is resolved.
4.9.13 SD-510 Half-Fold Strength Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the folding roller pressing time on the Fold & Staple Mode or the Multi 3-Fold Mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the low speed conveyance time of the folding roller motor (M108) to adjust the folding pressure. However, setting the
pressing time longer decrease the productivity.
(2) Usage
Lengthen the roller pressing time when you want to strengthen the book fold.
Note
• The productivity is reduced depending on the length of the roller pressing time.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Half-Fold Strength Adj.].
5. "Half-Fold Strength Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Place paper in the page quantity of the book that you want to created and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or
number 33).
7. Check the fold of the printed book, and press [Exit PrintMode] when the fold is weak.
8. "Half-Fold Strength Adjustment screen"
Range: 0 to +10 (add time)
1 step = 1 second
I-279
9. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate Fold strength is obtained.
4.9.14 PK-522 Vertical Position Adj. (CD) (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the punch shift motor (M302) to adjust the shift amount of the punch unit.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Staple Finisher(Punch) Adj.].
4. "Stapler(Punch) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Vert. Position Adj.(CD)].
5. "Punch Vert. Position Adj.(CD) screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size you want to adjust.
33).
8. Fold the output paper in half in the main scan direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the center of the
punch hole.
[1]
[2]
15knf3c002nb
[1] Center of the paper [2] Center of the punch hole
10. "Punch Vert. Position Adj.(CD) screen"
Range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.15 PK-522 Horizontal Position Adj. (FD) (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction.
In this adjustment, adjust the stop timing of the conveyance motor to adjust the punch position in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
I-280

Press [02 Horizontal Position Adj.(FD)].
5. "Punch Horiz. Position Adj.(FD) screen"
33).
8. Check the punch position "a" of the output paper in the sub scan direction.
Standard value a: 12.0 mm ± 3.0mm
a
15knf3c001nb
10. "Punch Horiz. Position Adj.(FD) screen"
Setting range: -50 ( longer) to +50 (shorter)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.16 PK-522 Registration Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
Change the registration loop amount of punching to adjust the paper skew.
In this adjustment, change the driving time of the FNS entrance motor (M1) when the paper strikes the entrance roller and a loop is formed to
adjust the loop.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch hole of the punch kit (PK) is not straight.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Registration Adjustment].
5. "Punch Registration Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Load the paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. When the trouble is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Punch Registration Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.17 PK-522 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper size sensor automatically to detect the paper edge as the standard of the punch hole properly.
(2) Usage
Adjust the sensitivity of the sensor after you replace the punch drive board (PDB) or the paper size sensor (PS305).
(3) Procedure
I-281
Press [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment].

5. "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
6. A message "Completed" appears when the adjustment is finished successfully.
4.9.18 PI-502 Tray Size Adjustment (Staple Finisher (PI) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the detection size of the PI tray.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size is not correctly detected at the cover sheet tray of the PI.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adjustment].
4. "Stapler(PI) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tray Size adjustment ].
5. "PI Tray Size Adjustment screen"
Select [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray], and press [A4] or [81/2 x 11].
6. Load A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper in the selected tray of PI and press [Start] (When you selected [81/ x 11] in step 4, load 81/ x 11 paper in
2 2
the tray).
7. A message "Completed" appears.
8. When you adjust another tray, repeat the steps 5 to 7.
9. Exit the service mode, and check if the paper size in the PI is correctly detected.
4.9.19 PI-502 PI Registration Adjustment (Staple Finisher (PI) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch registration loop at both the upper stage and lower stage of the post inserter.
(2) Usage
When a punch skew and crease occur, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adjustment].
4. "Stapler(PI) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 PI Registration Adjustment].
5. "PI Registration Adjustment screen"
Select either [PI Upper Tray] or [PI Lower Tray].
6. Load the paper which you want to adjust the size in the selected PI tray, and feed the paper in the manual mode.
7. Check the outputted paper
1 step = 1.0 mm
Note
• When there is a too much punch skew, adjust the value to the positive side.
• When there is a too much paper crease, adjust the value to the negative side.
4.9.20 FD-503 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment of punch holes for punching by FD.
(3) Procedure
2. "Finisher Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Multi Folder Adjustment].
I-282
3. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"

Press [01 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
4. "Multi Folder(Punch) Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
5. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
• Large size: Sub scan direction of the paper is more than 298 mm
• Small size: Sub scan direction of the paper is less than 297 mm
6. Load the paper which you want to adjust in the tray, configure the number of copies to 10 and press the Start key.
7. Check the diameter of the through-hole when the ejected paper is stacked.
Holes Standard value (mm)
2-Holes φ5.0 or larger
10. Enter the setting data through the numeric buttons and press [<<Set].
• [+]: Reduce equal jitters
• [-]: Reduce ragged jitters

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• When the alignment plate is wider than an appropriate position, the punch centering is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
4.9.21 FD-503 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.)
(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the position of the punch holes that FD makes in the sub scanning direction.
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
Press [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.].
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
Select [2-Hole] or [3-Hole].
Press [Print Mode].
8. Check the distance "a" from the outputted paper leading edge to the punch holes center position.
Holes Standard value "a"
(mm)
2-Holes 10.5 ± 4.0
3-Holes 9.5 ± 4
I-283
fs503fs3013c
• [+]: Move to the edge of the paper
• [-]: Move to the center of the paper
(2-Hole)
(3-Hole)

1 step = 0.1 mm
12. Repeat the steps 6 to 11 until the standard value can be obtained.
13. To configure the other punch hole or the paper size, repeat the steps 5 to 12.
4.9.22 FD-503 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper stop position when you fold the paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold position on the half fold mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
3. "Multi Folder Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.].
Press [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
5. "Half-Fold Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Standard value "a": = ± 1.5 mm
I-284
• [+]: Lengthen the top side of the output.
• [-]: Shorten the top side of the output.

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.23 FD-503 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-in mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].
5. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 139.0 142.0
B4 120.3 123.3
A4S 98.0 101.0
SRA4S 105.7 108.7
12 x 18 151.4 154.4
11 x 17 142.9 145.9
81/2 x 14 117.5 120.5
81/2 x 11S 92.1 95.1
8K 129.0 132.0
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
I-285
9. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"

• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.24 FD-503 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-out mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.].
5. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 282.0 144.0
B4 243.7 123.3
A4S 199.0 101.0
SRA4S 214.3 108.7
12 x 18 306.8 156.4
11 x 17 289.9 147.9
81/2 x 14 238.1 120.5
81/2 x 11S 187.3 95.1
8K 262.0 134.0
I-286
a [1]
[2]
a03uf3c020ca
9. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
15. To configure the other paper size, repeat the steps 5 to 14.
4.9.25 FD-503 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)
(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the double parallel mode by the FD.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.].
5. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 208.5 103.8
I-287
B4 180.5 89.8
A4S 147.0 73.0
SRA4S 158.5 78.8
12 x 18 227.1 113.1
11 x 17 214.4 106.7
81/2 x 14 176.3 87.7
81/2 x 11S 138.2 68.6
8K 193.5 96.3
b
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c021ca
9. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.26 FD-503 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the z-fold mode by the FD.
Note
(3) Procedure
I-288

Press [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].
5. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 105.5 108.5
B4 91.5 94.5
A4S 74.8 77.8
SRA4S 80.5 83.5
12 x 18 114.8 117.8
11 x 17 108.5 111.5
81/2 x 14 94.0 -
81/2 x 11S 70.4 73.4
8K 98.0 101.0
[2] a [1]
a03uf3c022ca
8 1／2×14
[1] a
a03uf3c031ca
9. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
I-289
4.9.27 FD-503 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjusts the fold position on the gate fold mode by the FD.
Note
• When you adjust the single fold, the double fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the single fold, the double fold and the
triple fold in this order.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Gate Position Adj.].
5. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the length of 2 places that are indicated with "a", "b" and "c".
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5 c ± 1.5
A3 103.5 213.0 106.5
B4 89.5 185.0 92.5
A4S 72.8 151.5 75.8
SRA4S 78.5 163.0 81.5
12 x 18 112.8 231.6 115.8
11 x 17 106.5 218.9 109.5
81/2 x 14 87.4 180.8 90.4
81/2 x 11S 68.4 142.7 71.4
8K 96.0 198.0 99.0
b
a
[1]
c [2]
[3]
a03uf3c023ca
[1] First fold [3] Triple Fold

[2] Double fold
9. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
10. Press [Fold 1].
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
12. Press [Fold 2].
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen
I-290

1 step = 0.1 mm
14. Press [Fold 3].
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.28 FD-503 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)
(1) Function
Adjust the fold registration loop amount.
(2) Usage
Adjust the paper loop amount at the FD registration roller and correct the paper skew, crease, or the paper jam at the roller.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.].
5. "Fold Registration Loop Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. When the trouble is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Fold Registration Loop Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.29 LS-506 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the main scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
I-291
When several stackers are connected, select either [Stacker No.1] or [Stacker No.2].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
• [+]: Reduce bends
• [-]: Reduce jitters

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.30 LS-506 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the lead edge stopper position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the sub scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
4. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
When several stackers are connected, select either [Stacker No.1] or [Stacker No.2].
Press [Print Mode].
• [-]: Reduce the dispersion

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.31 SD-506 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.].
I-292
3. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen"

Press [01 Staple Center Position].
4. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment between the staple center and the paper center.
a
fs503fs3300c
• [+]: Move to the back
• [-]: Move to the front

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.32 SD-506 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in saddle stitch mode by the SD.
Note
• Make sure that the folding skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment has been completed.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
a
fs503fs3012c
I-293


1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.33 SD-506 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 ± 2 mm
a
b
fs503fs3011c
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 1.0 mm
• There are restrictions of the setting range depending on the size of the paper. Minimum value is determined based on the stapler
movable range and the maximum value is determined so that the saddle stitching alignment plate and stapler do not interfere with
each other.
B5S: Setting is not possible (fixed to 91 mm)
B4: -20 mm to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm)
A4S: -14 mm to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm)
A3: -20 mm to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm)
I-294
4.9.34 SD-506 Half-fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi half fold mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [Print Mode].
a
• [+]: Lengthen the top side of the output.
• [-]: Shorten the top side of the output.

1 step = 0.1 mm
• If there is the misalignment that is given in the step 6, enter a configuration value on the positive side.
4.9.35 SD-506 Tri-fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
• The position of the single fold is based on the leading edge of the paper and the position of the double fold is based on the
position of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step 7 varies when either position of the single fold and the double fold
is changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
I-295

a b
A4S 97.5±1.5 102.0±3.0
81/2 x 11S 91.6±1.5 96.1±3.0
[2] b [1]
fs503fs3015c
Select the size of the paper that you want to adjust.
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.36 SD-506 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width while in alignment (sub scan direction).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge with the bundle paper at the folding or multi tri-folding mode by SD, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the paper of the paper size that you want to adjust. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. Check the printed pages for misalignment.
a: When the paper width setting is configured wider than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs randomly.
b: When the paper width setting is configured narrower than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs in the 1 direction.
I-296
fs503fs3302c
Setting range: -50 (narrower) to +50 (wider)
1 step = 0.1 mm

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.37 SD-506 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration position of the book for trimming.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the trimmed fore-edge or the excess trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the cover paper.
Standard value "a": 2 mm or more
Note
• Trimming distance less than 2 mm causes trimming fault.
a
fs503fs3301c
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
I-297
Sitting Range: -400 to +400

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• Since the minimum dimension (from the spine to the fore edge) after the trimming is limited to 122 mm, the setting data up
to +400 fails to be reflected depending on the size of the paper.
4.9.38 SD-506 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the shift interval and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
(2) Usage
Adjust the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.].
4. " Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"
Select the options for "01 Count Select for Move" (number of cuts that are counted until the trimmer board moves) and "02 Moving Pitch
Select" (travel distance of the trimmer board when it moves).
4.9.39 SD-513 Staple Center Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitching mode by SD-513.
By this adjustment, adjust the staple position in the main scan direction by the change of the drive amount of the saddle stitching alignment
motor/Fr (M19), the saddle stitching alignment motor/Md (M51), and the saddle stitching alignment motor/Rr (M18).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position in the main scan direction of the saddle stitching by SD-513 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure (2 position staple)

Press [04 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment].
Press [01 Staple Center Adjustment].
4. "Staple Center Position Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 2 Position Staple].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" between the staple center and the paper center.
Standard value "a": ± 3 mm
I-298
>@
[1] Direction of the paper exit on the booklet tray -
8. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Close].
Enter the setting data through the numeric buttons and press [<<Set].
Change the staple position in the main scan direction for the paper on the booklet tray.
• [+]: Move to the front
• [-]: Move to the rear
Configuration range: -20 to +20
1 step = 0.1 mm
(4) Procedure (4 position staple (front) or 4 position staple (rear))

Press [01 Staple Center Adjustment].
4. "Staple Center Position Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 4 Position Staple (Front 2)] or [03 4 Position Staple (Rear 2)].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Set paper in size that you want to adjust on the Tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the length between the edge of the paper and the staple center "a" and "b" against the paper length in the main scan direction "W".
Staple position Standard value
Front 2 position staple "a" = W / 4 ± 3 mm
Rear 2 position staple "b" = 3 x W/4 ± 3 mm
>@
Change the staple position in the main scan direction for the paper on the booklet tray.
• [+]: Move to the front
I-299
• [-]: Move to the rear

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• There are restrictions of adjustment range for each size of paper.
Paper size Adjustable range
Front center position (a) Rear center position (b)
11 x 17 -10 mm to +10 mm -3 mm to +10 mm
A3 -10 mm to +1 mm -5 mm to +10 mm
4.9.40 SD-513 Staple Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate during the alignment.
By this adjustment, match the paper width and the alignment width by the change of the drive amount of the saddle stitching alignment motor/
Md (M51), and the saddle stitching alignment motor/Rr (M18).
(2) Usage
Adjust when there is the uneven binding or the bending in a bundle of paper in saddle stitching mode by SD-513.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Staple Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a
fs503fs3012c
8. "Staple Paper Width Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Reduce the curve
• [+]: Reduce the misalignment

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.41 SD-513 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple pitch for the saddle stitching by the SD-513.
By this adjustment, adjust the staple pitch by the change of the drive amount of the saddle stitching alignment motor/Fr (M19), the saddle
stitching alignment motor/Md (M51), and the saddle stitching alignment motor/Rr (M18).
I-300
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple pitches of the saddle stitching by SD-513 are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure (2 position staple)

4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 2 Position Staple].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" between staples against the booklet length "W" in the main scan direction.
Standard value "a": W / 2 ± 3 mm or less
>@
a
W
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 1.0 mm
Note
• There are restrictions of adjustment range depending on paper size and input value of other finisher adjustments.
When the input value of "Staple Paper Width Adjustment" and "Staple Center Position" is "0", the pitch adjustable range is
as follows.
Booklet length in the main scan direction Pitch adjustable range
(W)
Less than 140 mm 0 mm to 5 mm
140 mm or more and less than 165 mm -20 mm to +15 mm
165 mm or more and less than 296 mm -20 mm to +20 mm
296 mm or more and less than 325 mm ( W / 2 - 168 mm) to +20 mm
325 mm or more ( W / 2 - 168 mm) to +10 mm
I-301
(4) Procedure (4 position staple (front) or 4 position staple (rear))

4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 4 Position Staple (Front 2)] or [03 4 Position Staple (Rear 2)].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" or "b" between staples against the paper length "W" in the main scan direction.
Staple position Standard value
Front 2 position staple "a" = W/4 ± 3 mm or less
Rear 2 position staple "b" = W/4 ± 3 mm or less
[1]
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 1.0 mm
Note
• There are restrictions of adjustment range depending on paper size.
Paper size Pitch adjustable range
Front 2 position staple Rear 2 position staple
11 x 17 -10 mm to +10 mm -10 mm to +10 mm
A3 -10 mm to 0 mm -10 mm to +10 mm
4.9.42 SD-513 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold mode by the SD-513.
In the 1st fold position adjustment, adjust the folding position by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding stopper motor (M9) and the
FD alignment belt motor (M11).
In the 2nd Fold position adjustment, adjust the folding position by the change of the timing that the 2nd folding knife motor (M14) starts to
rotate since the 2nd folding sensor (PS20) becomes active.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold positions of multi tri-fold by SD-513 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
I-302
Press [04 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].

Press [Print Mode].
6. Confirm "a" and "b" on the output paper.
Paper Size Standard value (mm)
a b
A4S 97.5±1.5 102.0±3.0
8 1 / 2 x 11S 91.6±1.5 96.1±3.0
[2] b [1]
fs503fs3015c
[1] 1st fold [2] 2nd fold
9. Press [1st Fold].
Change the length from the inside leading edge to the 1st folding.
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• The setting range of 81/ x 11S is -100 to +30.
2
11. Press [2nd Fold].

Change the length from the inside leading edge to the 2nd folding.
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.43 SD-513 Fold Skew Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the pushing amount of the FD alignment plate during the alignment of the sub scan direction.
By this adjustment, adjust the amount that the FD alignment plate pushes the bundle of paper by the change of the drive amount of the FD
alignment belt motor (M11).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge on the bundle paper at the saddle stitching, multi half fold, or multi tri-folding mode by the SD-513, conduct this
adjustment.
When there is a static electricity sticking on the bundle paper, conduct this adjustment.
Note
• Before this adjustment, be sure to conduct the fold paper width adjustment. (Refer to I.4.9.45 SD-513 Fold Paper Width
Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment))
I-303
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fold Skew Adjustment].
4. "Fold Skew Adjustment screen"
Press [Single Fold] or [Multi Fold] that you want to adjust and then press [Print Mode].
Standard value "b": 1.0 mm or less
Standard value c: 1.5 mm or less (2 sheets stapling to 15 sheets stapling)
Standard value "c": 2.0 mm or less (16 sheets stapling to 50 sheets stapling)
a
Adjust the push amount of the FD alignment plate.
• [+]: Pushing amount large
• [-]: Pushing amount small
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.44 SD-513 Half-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the saddle stitching and half-fold mode by SD-513.
By this adjustment, adjust the folding position by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding stopper motor (M9) and the FD alignment
belt motor (M11).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold position of the saddle stitching and half-fold by SD-513 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
4. "Half-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the exited paper.
Standard value "a": 3 mm or less
I-304
=?
[1] Direction of paper exit -
• [+]: Make the front side of the exited paper longer
• [+]: Make the front side of the exited paper shorter

1 step = 0.1 mm
• If there is the misalignment like the step 6, enter a setting value on the [+] side.
4.9.45 SD-513 Fold Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width during the alignment (sub scan direction).
Match the paper length and the alignment width by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding stopper motor (M9) and the FD alignment
belt motor (M11).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge on the bundle paper at the saddle stitching, multi half fold, or multi tri-folding mode by the SD-513, conduct this
adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Fold Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Standard value "b": 1.0 mm or less
Standard value c: 1.5 mm or less (2 sheets stapling to 15 sheets stapling)
Standard value "c": 2.0 mm or less (16 sheets stapling to 50 sheets stapling)
I-305
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.46 SD-513 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the trim amount on the trimmer mode.
Adjust the trim amount by the change of the drive amount of the clamp up down motor (M25) and the SQF clamp up down motor (M53) (when
FD-504 is installed).
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the fore-edge trimming or the excess trimming by the SD-513.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the exited cover paper.
Standard value a: 5 mm or more
Note
• When the trim amount is 5 mm or less, the operation error possibly occurs.
Therefore, when you configure a value less than 5 mm for the trim amount, the actual trim amount is controlled so as not to
be less than 5 mm.
a
fs503fs3301c
I-306

• [+]: Make larger
• [-]: Make smaller

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• Since the minimum dimension (from the spine to the fore edge) after the trimming is limited to 120 mm, the congiguration
value up to +400 fails to be reflected depending on the size of the paper.
4.9.47 SD-513 Parallel Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the parallel trimming by SD-513.
Adjust the parallel amount of the fore-edge trimming by the change of the drive amount of the clamp up down motor (M25) or the SQF clamp
up down motor (M53).
Note
• This adjustment is available only when FD-504 is equipped.
When you adjust the parallel trimming when the FD-504 is not installed, perform the trimming tilt adjustment (mechanical
adjustment). (Refer to I.21.8 Trimmer skew adjustment)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the fore-edge trimming is not parallel on the trim by SD-513.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Parallel Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Parallel Trimming Adjustment screen"
Select [Front] or [Rear] and press [Print Mode].
6. Check the parallel amount "a" of the fore-edge trimming.
Paper size (paper type) Stitching sheets a
A4 (J paper, KM Profi) 2 to 15 sheets 1.0 mm or less
81/2 × 11 (Hammermill Tidal MP) 16 to 30 sheets 1.5 mm or less
Other than the above 2 to 15 sheets 2.0 mm or less
8. "Parallel Trimming Adjustment screen"
I-307
Press [Front] for the change of the trimmer amount of the front side of the exited paper.
Press [Rear] for the change of the trimmer amount of the rear side of the exited paper.
• [+]: Strong trimmer amount
• [-]: Weak trimmer amount
Setting range: 0 to +30
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.48 SD-513 Trans. Entrance Paper Width (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the stop position of the entrance alignment plate.
By this adjustment, match the paper width and the alignment width by the change of the drive amount of the CD alignment motor/Up (M50) or
the CD alignment motor/Lw (M63).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the slit position has variability on the slit by TU-503.
Perform this adjustment when the crease line is tilted on the crease by CR-101.
Note
• Be sure to adjust "Plate (Bottom)" at first.
• When the crease line tilts, be sure to conduct the crease unit skew mechanical adjustment before this adjustment. (Refer to I.
22.1 Creaser unit skew adjustment)
(3) Procedure (When you adjust the variability of the slit position.)
Press [10 Trans. Entrance Paper Width].
4. "Trans Entrance Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Press [Output Setting].
6. Press [Default Set].
8. Press [2-Side Slit] and enter any value for the slitting.
10. When the slit position has variability, press [Close].
Press [Plate (Bottom)].
Adjust the alignment width under the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
Press [Plate (Top)].
Adjust the alignment width on the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
17. Repeat steps 4 to 16 until the variability of the slit position can be decreased.
(4) Procedure (When you adjust the skew of the crease line.)
Press [10 Trans. Entrance Paper Width].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Press [Default Set].
8. Press [Crease] and enter any value for the crease position.
I-308
10. Check the crease skew amount "a" - "b" of the output paper.
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 0.7 mm or less
>@
b
[1] Crease -
Press [Plate (Bottom)].
Adjust the alignment width under the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
Press [Plate (Top)].
Adjust the alignment width on the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.49 TU-503 2-Side Slitting Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the slit position on the slit by TU-503.
Adjust the slit positions of front and rear by the change of the drive amount of the slitter movement motor/Fr (M112) and the slitter movement
motor/Rr (M106).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the slit cut amount on the slit by TU-503 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [11 2-Side Slitting Adjustment].
4. "2-Side Slitting Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Press [2-Side Slit] and configure the slitting range.
• (1): Enter [10.0].
• (2): Enter [10.0].
Configuration range: 8.0 mm to +26.0 mm
7. Press [OK] twice.
9. Check the paper width "a" of the output paper.
Standard value "a": 277 mm ± 1.0 mm or less (fine weight 64 g/m2 or less)
Standard value "a": 277 mm ± 0.5 mm or less (other than the above)
I-309
>@
>@
>@
[1] Slit position [2] Direction of paper exit
Press [Front] or [Rear].
Press [Front] for the change of the trimmer amount of the front side of the exited paper.
Press [Rear] for the change of the trimmer amount of the rear side of the exited paper.
• [+]: Strong trimmer amount
• [-]: Weak trimmer amount
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.50 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Half-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the crease line position on the crease half-fold or the crease saddle stitching by SD-513 and CR-101.
Adjust the crease line position by the change of the drive amount of the reverse exit motor (M101).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the misalignment between the fold line and the crease line is not within the standard value.
Note
• Before you adjust the position of the crease line, perform the half-fold position adjustment. (Refer to I.4.9.44 SD-513 Half-Fold
Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment))
• When you change the paper weight of the paper that you use, the fold line is possibly misaligned against the crease position.
Therefore, be sure to check that the distance between the fold line and the crease position is within the standard value when
you change the paper weight.
• If the fold position and the crease position are different, the fold position is possibly pulled toward the crease position and
change.
(3) Procedure
Press [12 Crease Position Adjustment].
4. "Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Half-Fold Crease Position].
5. "Half-Fold Crease Position Adjustment screen"
To move away the crease position from the fold position, enter [20] (total 40) to each setting value of the [All] and the paper that you want
to adjust.
8. Check that the crease position is away from the fold position.
If the crease position overlaps with the fold position, enter [-20] (total -40) to the position where [20] is entered and output the test pattern.
9. Press [Close].
Return the set value to "0" or the original value.
12. Press the start key and output the test pattern (number 16) from the same tray as step 7.
13. Line up the output [1] of step 8 and the output [2] of step 12 and check the length of the following "a" and "b".
"a": The length from the leading edge to the fold position [3] of the upper surface of the exited paper
"b": The length from the leading edge to the crease groove edge [5] of the upper surface of the exited paper
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 1 mm or less
I-310
a
[1]
[3] [4]
b
[6] [5] [2]
[1] Output when the crease position is away from the fold [2] Output when "0" or the original value is entered in the
position setting value
[3] Fold position [4] Crease position
[5] Crease groove edge [6] Direction of paper exit
Change the length from the leading edge of the exited paper upper surface to the crease position.
• [+]: Lengthen
• [-]: Shorten
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.51 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Tri-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the crease line position on the crease tri-folding by SD-513 and CR-101.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the misalignment between the fold line and the crease line is not within the standard value.
Note
• Before you adjust the position of the crease line, perform the tri-fold position adjustment. (Refer to I.4.9.42 SD-513 Tri-Fold
Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment))
• When you change the paper weight of the paper that you use, the fold line is possibly misaligned against the crease position.
Therefore, be sure to check that the distance between the fold line and the crease position is within the standard value when
you change the paper weight.
• If the fold position and the crease position are different, the fold position is possibly pulled toward the crease position and
change.
(3) Procedure
4. "Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [02 Tri-Fold Crease Position].
5. "Tri-Fold Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [1st Fold].
6. To move away the crease position from the 1st fold position, enter [20] (total 40) to each setting value of [All] and the paper that you want
to adjust.
7. Press [2nd Fold].
8. To move away the crease position from the 2nd fold position, enter [20] (total 40) to each setting value of [All] and the paper that you want
to adjust.
11. Check that the crease position is away from the fold position.
If the crease position overlaps with the fold position, enter [-20] (total -40) to the position where [20] is entered and output the test pattern.
12. Press [Close].
Return the set value of [1st Fold] and [2nd Fold] to "0" or the original value.
I-311
16. Line up the output [1] of step 11 and the output [2] of step 15 and check the length of the following "a", "b", "c", and "d".
"a": The length from the inside leading edge to the 1st fold position [3]
"b": The length from the inside leading edge to the 2nd fold position [5]
"c": The length from the inside leading edge to the 1st fold crease groove edge [7]
"d": The length from the inside leading edge to the 2nd fold crease groove edge [8]
Standard value "a" - "c": ± 1 mm or less
Standard value "b" - "d": ± 1 mm or less
a b
[6]
[1]
[4] [3] [5]
[9] c d
[7]
[2]
[8]
[1] Output when the crease position is away from the fold [2] Output when "0" or the original value is entered in the
position setting value
[3] 1st folding position [4] 1st folding crease position
[5] 2nd folding position [6] 2nd folding crease position
[7] 1st fold crease groove edge [8] 2nd fold crease groove edge
[9] Direction of paper exit -
19. Press [1st Fold] or [2nd Fold].
Change the length from the inside leading edge to the crease position of the 1st folding (or the 2nd folding).
• [+]: Lengthen
• [-]: Shorten
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.52 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - PB Cover Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the crease line position on the crease perfect bind by CR-101 and PB-503.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the misalignment between the fold line on the spine and the crease line is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
4. "Crease Position Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [03 PB Cover Crease Position].
5. "PB Cover Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
I-312
7. Check the misalignment amount "a" between the fold line of the spine and the 1st crease line. Also, check the misalignment amount "b"
between the fold line of the spine and the 2nd crease line.
Standard value "a": ± 1 mm or less
Standard value "b": ± 1 mm or less
[4] [4]
[1] [3]
a
b
[2]
[1] 1st crease groove edge [2] Fold line of the spine
[3] 2nd crease groove edge [4] Crease of gutter
9. "PB Cover Crease Position Adjustment screen"
10. Press [Crease line 1] or [Crease line 2].
Change the length from the leading edge of the perfect binding cover upper surface to the crease position of the spine.
• [+]: Lengthen
• [-]: Shorten
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.53 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Strength) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the flattening strength on the square-fold by FD-504.
Adjust the flattening strength by the change of the drive amount of the lifter plate up down motor (M39).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when you want to change the form of the spine.
The change on this adjustment is applied at a constant rate for "Spine Corner Forming Strength" on the User Mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Flattening a Fold (Strength)].
4. "Flattening a Fold (Strength) Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Enter "C" through the numeric keys and enter "5".
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper (J paper or plain paper (60g/m 2 to 80 g/m 2 )) and press the start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check a corner is formed on the spine of the output booklet and there is no wrinkle [1] around the corner on both the cover and back
cover.
[1]
8. If no corner is formed or a wrinkle exists around the corner on the cover and the back cover, press [Close].
I-313
9. "Flattening a Fold (Strength) Adj. screen"

Adjust the strength for creating the flattening.
• [+]: Strengthen (Strong flattening)
• [-]: Weaken (Weak flattening)
1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat the steps 4 to 8 until an appropriate status is obtained.
4.9.54 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Frequency) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the flattening frequency on the square-fold by FD-504.
Change the drive time of the SQF roller motor (M201) and adjust the number of times that the SQF roller moves back and forth.
(2) Usage
When the booklet has a bulge, increase the frequency of the flattening.
When the spine is damaged or dirty, decrease the frequency of the flattening.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Flattening a Fold (Frequency)].
4. "Flattening a Fold (Frequency) Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the spine of the exited booklet.
7. Press [Close] when you perform the adjustment.
8. "Flattening a Fold (Frequency) Adj. screen"
• [+]: Increase the number of times of the back and forth movement of the roller
• [-]: Decrease the number of times of the back and forth movement of the roller
1 step = One back and forth movement of the SQF roller
4.9.55 FD-504 Spine Fold Line Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the folding strength of the cover on the square-fold by FD-504.
Adjust the insertion amount of the folding knife by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding knife motor (M13).
(2) Usage
Weaken the folding strength when the fold line on the center of the spine is appealing.
Note
• When you weaken the folding strength, the cover position error or the jam possibly occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Spine Fold Line Adjustment].
4. "Spine Fold Line Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the fold line of the cover of the exited booklet.
7. Press [Close] when you perform the adjustment.
8. "Spine Fold Line Adjustment screen"
Adjust the strength of the fold line on the center of the spine.
• [+]: Strengthen
• [-]: Weaken
1 step = 0.5 mm
4.9.56 SD-513 Staple Offset Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position (sub scan direction) on the saddle stitching by SD-513.
I-314
Adjust the stop position of the stapler head by the change of the drive amount of the stapler movement motor (M64).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the staple error or the misalignment of the fold line and the staple position occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Staple Offset Adjustment].
4. "Staple Offset Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment amount "a" between the fold line and the stapling position.
Standard value "a": = ± 1 mm or less
>@
8. "Staple Offset Adjustment screen"
Enter the setting data through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
Move the position of the staple against the fold line when the fore edge of the booklet on the booklet tray is up and the booklet is open.
• [+]: Right
• [-]: Left
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• The error of the staple is likely to occur when the misalignment amount between the fold line and the stapling position is
large.
4.9.57 TU-503 Registration Loop Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount before the registration roller.
Adjust the paper loop amount by the change of the drive time of the paper re-feed motor (M62).
(2) Usage
When the 2-side sitting by TU-503 is tilted, perform this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [17 Registration Loop Adjustment].
4. "Registration Loop Adjustment screen"
Select the paper type [Plain] or [Thick] that you want to adjust and then select [Print Mode].
Note
• Plain: Paper whose weight is less than 217 g/m 2
• Thick: Paper whose weight is 217 g/m 2 or more
6. Check the slit tilt amount "a-b".
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 1.0 mm or less (fine weight 64 g/m2 or less)
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 0.5 mm or less (other than the above)
I-315
=?
b
a
=?
=?
[1] Direction of paper exit [2] Slit position
Adjust the registration loop amount.
• [+]: Make loop amount larger
• [+]: Make loop amount smaller
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• When the tilt of the 2-side slitting is large, increase the loop amount.
• When the wrinkle on the leading side of the paper is large, decrease the loop amount.
4.9.58 SD-513 Staple Tip Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the push strength of the clincher on the saddle stitching by SD-513 and adjust the shape of the staple.
(2) Usage
When the staple tip is off the surface, strengthen the push amount of the clincher.
To curl the shape of the staple (direct the staple tip to inside), weaken the push amount.
Note
• The adjustment is not much effective according to the booklet thickness.
(3) Procedure
Press [18 Staple Tip Adjustment].
4. "Staple Tip Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the floating amount "a" of the staple and the bending angle "b" of the leading edge of the staple.
• When the staple length "c" is 5 mm or more
Standard value "b": 0 degrees or more (The tip of the staple is directed to the paper side.)
c
a b
• When the staple length "c" is less than 5 mm

I-316
c
a
8. "Staple Tip Adjustment screen"
The procedure varies depending on the number of papers in a booklet.
• [+]: The staple is horizontal.
• [-]: The staple is curled.
Note
• When the booklet thickness is over 4 mm, the adjustment of staple shape (push amount of the clincher) is not available.
• When the booklet length in the main scan direction is less than 182 mm, the adjustment of staple shape (push amount of the
clincher) is not available.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the condition is improved.
4.9.59 SD-513 Saddle Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the misalignment of the folding line and the rear staple in the sub scan direction on the saddle stitching by SD-513.
Adjust the home position of the booklet movement unit by the change of the stop position of the booklet movement motor (M21). Adjust the
position so that the edge line of the clincher and the edge line of the booklet movement unit match.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when misalignment occurs only for the rear stapling position against the folding line.
(3) Procedure
Press [19 Saddle Position Adjustment].
4. "Saddle Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment amount "a" between the rear staple position and the folding line.
>@
8. "Saddle Position Adjustment screen"
Move the position of the rear staple against the fold line when the fore edge of the booklet on the booklet tray is up and the booklet is
open.
• [+]: Right
• [-]: Left
1 step = 0.1 mm
I-317
4.9.60 SD-513 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the frequency of movement and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
Move the trimmer board forcibly.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the fore-edge trimming by the SD-513 occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [20 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment].
4. "Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust. Select the configuration value.
• "01 Count Select for move"
Select the number of times of the trimming before the trimmer board moves.
Configuration value (number of times): [700], [500], [300]
• "02 Moving Pitch Select"
Select the movement amount when the trimmer board moves.
Configuration value (mm): [1.0], [1.5], [2.0]
• "03 Forcibly Move"
Press "Start" and move the trimmer board for 1 pitch forcibly.
4.9.61 PB-503 Cover Trimming Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the trimming position of the right-side edge of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the trimming position on the leading edge of the right cover does not fit to the leading edge of the left cover.
Note
• In order to align the leading edges on the left cover and the right cover, perform I.4.9.62 PB-503 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect
Binder Adjustment) first and then perform the cover trimming adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Perfect Binder Adjustment].
3. "Perfect Binder Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Cover Trimming Adj.].
4. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray that you want to adjust.
6. To make test prints and carry out perfect binding, select the paper type and press the start button.
7. Check the cover of the created book if its right-side edge and the left-side edge align with each other.
[3]
[2] [1] 1050fs3357c
[1] Trimming position [3] Left cover paper

[2] Right cover paper
8. Press [Exit PrintMode] to change the trimming position of the right cover paper.
9. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
I-318

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.62 PB-503 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the length which the left side of the cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the length which the left side of the cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.].
4. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
Press [PB tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray that you want to adjust.
5. Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size of the cover paper.
Select the size of the paper from the following options.
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Custom (220 mm to 379 mm)
Note
• The paper sizes described here are the book (the inside pages) finished sizes.

8. Check that the width of the left cover paper is longer than the width of the inside pages by specified amount.
[3] [4]
[5]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3358c
[1] Body [4] Length differential

[2] Right cover paper [5] Edge of the left cover paper
[3] Left cover paper
9. To change the width of the left cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Cover Lead Edge Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Keep away the cover lead edge from the body
• [-]: Bring the cover lead edge close to the body
I-319

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.63 PB-503 Spine Corner Formimg Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the corner folding position of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the spine corner form position is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.].
4. "Spine Corner Forming Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the corner edges of the cover paper are created uniformly in the main scan direction.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs3359c
[1] Right cover paper [3] Cover paper

[2] Main scan direction [4] Left cover paper
7. When the corner edges of the cover paper are not created uniformly, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Spine Corner Forming Position Adj. screen"
Select either of [Front Adj.] or [Rear Adj.].
• [+]: Become angular
• [-]: Reduce angles

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.64 PB-503 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the start position for applying the glue to inside pages.
I-320
(2) Usage
Adjust when the start position for applying the glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Glue Start Position].
4. "Glue Start Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which start position, for applying during the forward movement or backward movement, that you want to
adjust.
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note
• [Back] does not require the adjustment.

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3360c
[1] Start position for frontward applying [3] Body

[2] Start position for backward applying
9. To adjust the start position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Start Position screen"
• [+]: Reduce
• [-]: Increase
(Ahead)
(Back)
I-321
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.65 PB-503 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position where to finish applying the glue.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the completion position for applying the glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Glue Finish Position].
4. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which finish position, for applying during the forward movement or backward movement, to be adjusted.
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3361c
[1] Finish position for backward applying [3] Body

[2] Finish position for frontward applying
9. To adjust the finish position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Finish Position screen"
• [+]: Increase
• [-]: Reduce
(Ahead)
(Back)
I-322

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.66 PB-503 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Control the temperature of the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1), the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2), the glue tank
temperature sensor/Md (TH3), and the glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) provided in the glue tank.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the applied glue does not harden or when the cover paper easily comes unglued.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Temperature Adjustment].
4. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the glue applied has dried appropriately.
7. To adjust the dryness of the glue, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Select the option where the temperature is configured.
The following options are provided.
• Glue Tank - Top
• Glue Tank - Mid
• Glue Tank - Low
• Glue apply roller
• Glue Tank - Top
Setting range: 128 °C to 136 °C
Default: 132 °C
• Glue Tank - Mid
Setting range: 140 °C to +145 °C
Default: 145 °C
• Glue Tank - Low
Default: 185 °C
• Glue apply roller
Default: 165 °C
4.9.67 PB-503 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when you align in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.].
4. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size.
I-323

All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note
5. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"

• [+]: Reduce the dispersion
• [-]: Reduce the distortion

1 step = 0.1 mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and the later book.
Change configuration value that is configured in step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
4.9.68 PB-503 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when you align in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment].
4. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note
5. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"

I-324

1 step = 0.1 mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and the later book.
Change configuration value that is configured in step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
4.9.69 PB-503 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.].
4. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray that you want to adjust.
6. To make test prints and carry out perfect binding, select the paper type and press the start button..
7. Check if the relation between the main scan position of the cover and that of the inside pages are appropriate.
8. To adjust the relation of their main-scanning positions, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.70 PB-503 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when you align in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the sub scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Clamp FD Position Adj.].
4. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
All Size
I-325
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note

7. Check if the sub scan direction of all the inside pages are properly aligned.
8. To adjust the alignment width in the sub scan direction of the inside pages, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• If the setting is too wide, pages are misplaced in the sub scan direction.
• If the setting is too narrow, mark of the FD alignment plate appears.
4.9.71 RU-510 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the position of the alignment plate operates in the main scan direction on the relay stacker (RU).
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the punch holes are misarranged in the main scan direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Relay Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Relay Stacker Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Place 10 sheets of paper that you want to adjust the size. .
Change the setting to "10" to select the punch.
Press the start button.
1. [+]: To reduce the tilts
2. [-]: To reduce the randomness
I-326
Adjustment range: -20 to +20

1 step = 0.1mm
4.9.72 RU-510 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the position of the alignment plate operates in the sub scan direction on the relay stacker (RU).
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the punch holes are misarranged in the paper path direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Relay Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Relay Stacker Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Place 10 sheets of paper that you want to adjust the size.
Change the setting to "10" to select the punch.
Press the start button.
• [+]: To reduce the tilts
• [-]: To reduce the dispersion
Adjustment range: -50 to +50

1 step = 0.1mm
4.9.73 External FNS Customize Set.

(1) Functions
Change the configuration of the 3rd Party Option (finisher).
(2) Usage
Use when you change the configuration of the 3rd party option. Refer to the 3rd Party Option manual for the configuration.
(3) Procedure
2. "Finisher Adjustment screen"
Press [07 External FNS Customize Set.].
3. "External Finisher Customize Setting screen"
I-327
Configure the following settings.

Item Value
SEF Restriction [OFF]/[ON]
Face [Face Up]/[Face Down]
Order [1 to N]/[N to 1]
Output Image Top and Bot. Direction [Head Up]/[Head Down]
Stopping Method for Tray Full [Stop Immediately]/[Stop after Set]
Output Last Page at First [OFF]/[ON]
Reserved Job Permission [OFF]/[Wait]
Continuous Job Permission [OFF]/[ON]
JAM Recovery Method [Set Recovery]/[Page Recovery]
Maximum Weight [40-49 g/m2]/[50-61 g/m2]/[62-74 g/m2]/[75-91 g/m2]/[92-135 g/m2]/[136-162 g/m2]/[163-216
g/m2]/[217-244 g/m2]/[245-300 g/m2]/[301-350 g/m2]/[None]
Minimum Weight [40-49 g/m2]/[50-61 g/m2]/[62-74 g/m2]/[75-91 g/m2]/[92-135 g/m2]/[136-162 g/m2]/[163-216
g/m2]/[217-244 g/m2]/[245-300 g/m2]/[301-350 g/m2]/[None]
Maximum CD Width 95 to 324 (1step=1.0 mm)
Minimum CD Width 95 to 324 (1step=1.0 mm)
Maximum FD Length 133 to 483 (1step=1.0 mm)
Minimum FD Length 133 to 483 (1step=1.0 mm)
Maximum Paper Bundle 1 to 2000 (1step=1sheet)
Minimum Paper Bundle 1 to 2000 (1step=1sheet)
C0 Signal Usage Setting [None]/[Active high]/[Active low]
S1 Signal Usage Setting [None]/[Active high]/[Active low]
C0 Signal Delay Setting 0 to 5000 (1step=1msec)
Delay after Cycle Up 0 to 60000 (1step=1msec)
Cycle Down after Output 0 to 10000 (1step=1msec)
Time Bet. Standard Papers 0 to 5000 (1step=1msec)
Time Bet. Special Papers 0 to 5000 (1step=1msec)
Time Bet. Standard Bundles 0 to 60000 (1step=1msec)
Time Bet. Special Bundles 0 to 60000 (1step=1msec)
Time Bet. Standard Sets 0 to 60000 (1step=1msec)
Time Bet. Special Sets 0 to 60000 (1step=1msec)
S3 Signal Monitoring Time 0 to 20000 (1step=10msec)
S4 Signal Monitoring Time 0 to 20000 (1step=10msec)

(1) Function
Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change in the finisher adjustment items by CE.
Note
• The data of the stacker adjustment (LS), the trimmer receiver adjustment (SK), and the paper edge detect sensor adjustment
(PK) are not restored.
(3) Procedure
I-328

Note
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
• Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls the adjustment values stored when the code "90-00" of the I/O check mode was
conducted.
• When the SD-513 is installed and you select the [Factory Initial Data], input the adjustment values on the label on the front
console of the SD-513 to each adjustment of [Saddle Stitcher Adjustment].
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Front console of the SD-513 [2] Label
[3] Adjustment value of the staple offset adjustment [4] Adjustment value of the fore-edge trimming
adjustment
[5] Adjustment value of the saddle position adjustment -
4.10 Firmware Version

(1) Usage
Display the firmware version of the main body and options.
Note
• Ask the administrator of this machine whether to enhance the security or not. To enhance the security, check the firmware
version and the checksum value. To rewrite the firmware, refer to J.3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW. To check the checksum
value, refer to J.2.3.1 Firmware checksum check.
• When the administrator wants to enhance the security, check that the firmware version is the version (the following three
versions) which ISO/IEC15408 certificate. When it is not, rewrite the firmware version to the certificated one.
• Image control (I1): A5AW0Y0-00I1-G00-10
• Image control (I4): A5AW0Y0-00I4-G00-10
• Controller (P1): A5AW0Y0-00P1-G00-10
• When you install the machine and upgrading the firmware version, be sure to check that the firmware version of the machine
and the identification number of the user's guide are matched. If the numbers are not matched, provide the user's guide whose
number corresponds to the firmware version of the machine to the administrator.
(2) Procedure
I-329
Press [08 Firmware Version].

2. "Firmware Version menu screen"
Press [01 Firmware Version].
3. "Indication of Firmware Version screen"
Each firmware version appears.
For the relation between the firmware and the board, refer to "J.1.3 Firmware data flow".
4.11 CS Remote Care

4.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body. The main body and the CS Remote Care center computer send and receive the
various kinds of the management data of the main body through the phone line, E-mail, or the WebDAV server.
It enables the main body to call the center computer at an anomalous occurrence. Also the center computer can inquire for the various data of
the main body regularly.
The data that CS Remote Care handles can be classified into the following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
• When the security enhanced mode is configured to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail)

Note
• Main body NIC can be used. CSRC cannot be used for the EFI controller NIC.
Be careful for the mail account and the DIPSW setting when you use the E-mail CS Remote Care and the mail remote notification
system at the same time. For details, Refer to "I.4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification
system."
• Conduct the settings of the mail address and the mail server that you use for the E-mail system of CS Remote Care beforehand.
• Press [Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [E-mail Initial Setting] to perform the setting.
Otherwise configure from [E-mail Initial Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.4.11.6 Mail initial
setting)
• When you conduct the setup again for the main body that has done the CS Remote Care setup once, conduct RAM clear for CS
Remote Care first and then setup again. (Refer to I.4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
(1) When you use E-mail (Duplex)

1. Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. (This step can be skipped when you send the initial connection mail from
the machine to the center.) After the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
For the device registration method at the center side, refer to the user's guide on the CS Remote Care center application.
2. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid
Configure [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
3. CS Remote Care memory initialization
1. Press [Service mode] → [State Confirmation] → [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press the [Access] button.
5. Press [Start] button and confirm that the output check display switches to "FIN".
4. CS Remote Care function ON
5. CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
6. Communication method selection
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
2. Enter the 7-digit serviceman ID with numeric keys and press [ID code] again.
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Center ID] and enter the center ID (5 digits).
• The serial number that is input from [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Serial Number Setting] appears on [Device ID].
3. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not.
• Defaul value (for inch area): Not Use Encryption
• Default value (except inch area) :Use Encryption
4. Press [OK].
10. Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Setting Time] to enter the year, month, day, and the time.
• Press [Set] to move the cursor among the year, month, day, hour, and minute fields.
3. Press [Time Zone] to enter the time zone.
• Press [ +/- ] to switch plus or minus of the time zone.
4. Press [OK].
11. Response Timeout Setting
1. Press [Response Timeout Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the response timeout (10 minute to 1440 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
3. Press [OK].
I-330
12. Activate and deactivate the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
13. Initial connection
Conduct the initial connection in one of the following steps.
• Initial connection from the center side
Send the initial connection mail from the center side to the mail address of the machine. The initial connection completes when the
machine receives the initial connection mail.
• Initial connection from the machine
Send the initial connection mail from the machine to the center. In this case, configure the E-mail address of the center on the [E-mail
(Duplex) Setting Menu] → [Basic Setting] → [E-mail] and press [First Call]. In case the device pre-registration at the center side is
skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status when the center receives the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
• When the CS Remote Care related window is opened while you receive the initial connection mail from the center, the
information being created is destroyed and the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
• For the method of sending the initial connection mail from the center side, refer to the user's guide on the CS Remote Care
center application.
• Mail transmission is possible only between the center and the main body that the initial connection has been established.
• After when the initial registration is done, the center mail address appears on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS
Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] → [Basic Setting] → [E-mail].
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.4.11.16 CS Remote
Care error code list)
• You can transfer the log information to the WebDAV server. Refer to I.4.11.8 Log forwarding function for the details.
(2) When you use E-mail (Simplex (from the machine to the center))
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. The pre-registration of the device at the center side can be skipped. After
the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [E-mail] and enter the mail address of the center.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Configure the regular send schedule to the center.
• Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is configured at the end of the month by [End of Month].
• Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
• Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
• To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
12. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date and time.
I-331
3. Press [OK].
13. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select the data that you want to collect.
• Basic data
• Account track data
• Machine adjustment data
• Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
15. Initial connection
1. Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] → [Basic Setting].
2. Press [First Call] to send the initial connection mail to the center.
3. Once the mail delivery completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the mail sending to the SMTP server
normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
4. The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection mail. In case the device pre-registration at the center
side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status when the center receive the initial connection mail. The initial connection
is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
4.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)
Conduct the following procedure to setup when you use the phone line modem as the CR Remote Care system.
Note
• When you conduct the setup again for the main body that has done the CS Remote Care setup once, conduct RAM clear for the
CS Remote Care first and then setup again (Refer to I.4.11.16 CS Remote Care error code list)
• Use the Data modem of ITU-T V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 compliance, AT command compliance.
(1) When you use the phone line modem

2. Modem connection
Deactivate the power of the modem, connect the main body and the modem with a modem cable, and the modem and the wall outlet with
a modular cable.
For the connection of a modular cable, refer to the instructions of the modem that you use.
Press [Modem] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
3. Press [Center Telephone Number] to enter the center phone number.
• Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
4. Press [Machine Phone Number] to enter the machine phone number.
• Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Modem initialization AT command entry
Note
• Change the initialization AT command of the modem as needed. (Normally no need to change.) )
• For the detail of the AT command, refer to the instruction of the modem used.
1. Press [AT command] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [Initial command] to enter the AT command.
I-332
3. Press [OK].
12. DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care
Note
• Normally no need to change the setting, but conduct the setting as needed according to the connection environment.
1. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Specify DIP-SW as needed. (Refer to I.4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care)
14. First call execution
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [First Call] to start the initial transmission.
• When the connection to the center completes successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.4.11.16 CS Remote Care
error code list)
• In case the device pre-registration at the center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status when the center
receives the initial call. The initial connection is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
4.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)
Conduct the following procedure to setup when you use the http communication as a CR Remote Care system.
Note
• Main body NIC can be used. CSRC cannot be used for the EFI controller NIC.
• When you conduct the setup again for the main body that has done the CS Remote Care setup once, conduct RAM clear for CS
Remote Care first and then setup again. (Refer to I.4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
• Be sure to perform the communication setting before the http proxy server is used or the authentication is required for the Web
server.
• Press [Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [http Communication Setting] to perform the setting.
Otherwise configure from [CSRC http Communication Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.
4.11.7 http communication setting)
(1) When you use http (Duplex)

Press [http] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [http (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
The serial number that is input appears.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
5. Press [OK].
10. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid.
• Defaul value (for inch area): Disable
• Default value (except inch area): Enable
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
I-333
Note
• 1* Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine is on active mode by you upload the Heart Beat file
periodically to the registered Web server. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.

1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Activate and deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
• The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
14. Deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.*2
Note
• 2* The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
(2) When you use http (Simplex (from the machine to the center))
Press [http] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [http (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
The serial number that is input appears.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
5. Press [OK].
10. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid.
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
I-334
Note
• 1* Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine is on active mode by you upload the Heart Beat file
periodically to the registered Web server. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.

1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Configure the regular send schedule to the center.
• Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is configured at the end of the month by [End of Month].
• Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
• Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
• To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
13. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date and time.
3. Press [OK].
14. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select the data that you want to collect.
• Basic data
• Account track data
• Machine adjustment data
• Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
15. Activate and deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
• The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
17. Deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.*2
Note
• 2* The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of the E-mail CS Remote Care and the Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to configure the DIPSW
setting or the mail account setting.
Mail remote
E-mail CS Remote
notification
Care using the Configurati
Case system Setting item Remark
machine NIC on value
Notification
E-mail used
system
"Use the mail remote notification
system" of the main body NIC Web ON
utility
1 ○ ○ (*2)
"Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5
1
(*1)
system" of the main body NIC Web ON
2 ○ - utility -
0
(*1)
3 - ○ system" of the main body NIC Web ON (*3) -
utility
I-335

1
(*1)
system" of the main body NIC Web OFF
4 - - utility -
1
(*1)
*1 Service mode - Software DIPSW setting: 15-5 (CS remote care function active, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account.
*3 Even when the mail remote notification system is not used, select "Yes" and conduct the mail initial setting.
4.11.6 Mail initial setting

Configure the mail address and the mail server for the machine NIC.
Note
• E-mail initial setting can be done in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. Refer to E.1.4.4 Initial setting for Web
Utilities.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [E-mail Initial Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
• [Use E-mail System]: Select [ON].
• [Time Zone]: Configure the time zone.
• [Trans(SMTP) Mail Server]: Configure the host name of the AMTP server or IP address. When you input the host name, configure the
DNS server on [Machine NIC Setting].
• [SMTP port number]: Configure the port number of the SMTP server.
• [Trans Mail Server Timeout]: Configure the timeout period (sec).
• [New-arrival Check Interval]: Configure the interval (min) for checking the new-arrivals.
• [Receive mail server]: Configure the IP address of the receiving mail server. When you input the host name, configure the DNS server
on [Machine NIC Setting].
• [Receive Mail Server Type]: Configure the type of the receive mail server (POP3/IMAP).
4. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
• [POP3/IMAP Port Number]: Configure the port number of the receive mail server.
• [Receive Mail Account]: Configure the account name.
• [Receive Mail Password]: Configure the account password.
• [E-mail Address for Machine]: Configure the E-mail address for machine NIC.
• [POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication]: Make a setting whether to use the POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication or not.
• [SSL Encryption of SMTP]: Configure whether to encrypt the SMTP communication.
• [SSL Encryption of POP (IMAP)]: Configure whether to encrypt the POP (IMAP) communication.
5. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
• [SMTP Authentication]: Select whether to use the SMTP authentication or not.
• [SMTP Authentication User ID]: Adjust the user ID of the SMTP authentication.
• [SMTP Authentication Password]: Adjust the password of the SMTP authentication.
6. Press [Test] and press [Yes] on the confirmation screen to conduct the sending and receiving test.
7. Press [OK].
4.11.7 http communication setting

Be sure to perform the following settings when the http proxy server is used or the authentication is required for the Web server.
Note
• http communication setting can be configured in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. Refer to E.1.4.4 Initial setting for
Web Utilities.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [http Communication Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
• [Enable Proxy Server]: Select whether to use the proxy server or not.
• [Proxy Server Address]: Configure the host name of the proxy server or IP address. When you input the host name, configure the DNS
server on [Machine NIC Setting].
• When the proxy server authentication is required, follow the following procedures.
(Ex.) When the proxy server name: www.example.com, user name: user and password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com."
• Proxy Server Port: Configure the port number of the proxy server.
• [Enable SSL]: Configure whether to use SLL or not.
• [Enable Authentication]: Configure whether to use the Web server authentication or not.
• [Authentication User Name]: Configure the user name of the Web Server authentication.
• [Authentication Password]: Configure the password of the Web Server authentication.
4. Press [OK].
4.11.8 Log forwarding function

The log information of this machine (such as the static state or the abnormality) can be forwarded to the WebDAV server on the scheduled time
every day (simplex: The machine to the WebDAV server).
To use the log forward function, perform the following setting.
1. Press [Service Mode] - [CS Remote Care] - [Log FW Address Setting].
2. Perform the following settings.
• [WebDAV Server IP Address]: Configure the IP address of the WebDAV server for the forwarding.
• [Store Directory]: Configure the directory of the WebDAV server.
I-336
• [Enable Proxy Server]: Configure the use of the proxy server (Default: OFF).
• [Proxy Server IP Address]: Configure the IP address of the proxy server.
• [Proxy Server Port Number]: Set the port number of the proxy server.
• [Enable SSL]: Configure whether to use of the SSL (Default: OFF).
• [Authentication]: Configure whether to use of the Web server authentication (Default: OFF).
• [User Name]: Configure the user name of the Web server authentication.
• [Password]: Configures the password of the Web server authentication.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Service Mode] - [CS Remote Care] - [Log Forwarding Time Setting].
• [Forward Log]: Press [ON] to enable the log forwarding (Default: OFF).
• [Log Forwarding Time]: Configure the time for forwarding the log.
5. Press [OK].
4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Note
• DIPSW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident,
be sure to restore the previous state.
Input procedure
2. Press [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] on [Service Mode menu] screen.
3. Press [ID Code] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the Utility menu screen.
7. Select the DIPSW number on "Software DIPSW Setting."
• Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
8. Select the DIPSW bit number.
• Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
9. Select [ON (1)] or [OFF (0)].
10. Press [Return] to return to the "Setting menu screen."
Note
• About functions of each switch, refer to .I.4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care
4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Dial mode • 0: Pulse dial 1 1 1
• 1: Tone dial
1 Modem reception • 0: Receive (Issue ATA by RING 0 0 0
delivery)
• 1: Not receive (Not issue ATA
by RING delivery)
2 Reservation • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Baud rate • 1200bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1, 0 0 0
5 1-4=1 0 0 0
• 2400bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0,
6 1-4=0 0 0 0
7 • 4800bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0, 1 1 1
1-4=1
• 9600bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1,
1-4=0
• 19200bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1,
1-4=1
• 38400bps: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0,
1-4=0
• 57600bps: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0,
1-4=1
2 0 Auto call on SC occurrence • 0: OFF 1 1 1
1 Auto call on date specification • 1: ON 1 1 1
2 Auto call on the part replacement 1 1 1
3 Auto call on the drum replacement 1 1 1
4 Auto call on the periodic maintenance (PM) 1 1 1
5 ORU-M start and finish notification • 0: Not notify 1 1 1
• 1: Notify
• 1: -
7 Automatic calling when reset fixed replacement • 0: OFF 0 0 0
parts • 1: ON
3 0 Reservation • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-337
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Auto call on the toner supply • 0: OFF 1 1 1
• 1: ON
• 1: -
3 Notification of waste toner box full • 0: OFF 1 1 1
4 Call on fusing cleaning web count over • 1: ON 1 1 1
5 Call on Toner collection filter count over 1 1 1
6 Call on fusing external heating count over 1 1 1
• 1: -
4 0 CS Remote Care communication mode • Data modem: 4-1=0, 4-0=0 0 0 0
1 • FAX (not used): 4-1=0, 4-0=1 1 1 1
• E-mail: 4-1=1, 4-0=0
• http: 4-1=1, 4-0=1
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
5 0 Modem redial interval • 1 minute: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=0, 1 1 1
1 5-0=1 1 1 1
• 2 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=1,
2 5-0=0 0 0 0
3 • 3 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=1, 0 0 0
5-0=1
• 4 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=0,
5-0=0
• 5 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=0,
5-0=1
• 6 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=1,
5-0=0
• 7 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=1,
5-0=1
• 8 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0, 5-1=0,
5-0=0
• 9 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0, 5-1=0,
5-0=1
• 10 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0,
5-1=1, 5-0=0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
6 0 Modem redial times • 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 • 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
• 11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 (6 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 0 Redial for response time out • 0: Not redial 1 1 1
• 1: Redial
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 Retransmission interval on E-mail delivery error • 0 minute: 8-3=0, 8-2=0, 8-1=0, 0 0 0
8-0=0
I-338
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 • 10 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0, 1 1 1
8-1=0, 8-0=1
2 1 1 1
• 20 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0,
3 8-1=1, 8-0=0 0 0 0
• 30 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
• 40 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
• 50 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=1
• 60 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=1, 8-0=0
• 70 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
• 80 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
• 90 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=0, 8-0=1
• 100 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=0
• 110 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
• 120 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
9 0 Retransmission times on E-mail delivery error • 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 • 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
• 11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 (6 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
• 1: -
10 0 Time zone setting • -12 to -1: 1111 0100 to 1111 0 0 0
1 1111 0 0 0
• 0: 0000 0000
2 • 1 to 12: 0000 0001 to 0001100 0 0 0
3 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
11 0 Timer 1 • 0 second to 31 seconds: 0000 0 0 0
1 RING receive → CONNECT receive 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0
• 32 seconds: 0010 0000
2 • 33 seconds to 255 seconds: 0 0 0
3 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
1 Dial calling complete → CONNECT receive 0000 to 0011 1111 0 0 0
• 64 seconds: 0100 0000
3 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
13 0 Timer 3 • 0: - 0 0 0
1 Not used • 1: - 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
I-339
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
14 0 Timer 4 • 0 to 31 (x 100 milliseconds): 0 0 0
1 Connection → Start request telegram delivery 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0
• 32 (x 100 milliseconds): 0010
2 0000 0 0 0
3 • 33 to 255 (x 100 milliseconds) : 0 0 0
4 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
(7 to 0 bit)
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
1 Waiting time for the response from other side 0000 to 0001 1101 1 1 1
• 30 seconds: 0001 1110
3 0001 1111 to 1111 1111 1 1 1
4 (7 to 0 bit) 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
16 0 Retry data, timer 6 • 0 to 254 (x 5 milliseconds): 1 1 1
1 Initialization OK → Dial request 0000 0000 to 1111 1110 1 1 1
• 255 (x 5 milliseconds): 1111
2 1111 1 1 1
3 (7 to 0 bit) 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1
6 1 1 1
7 1 1 1
17 0 Reservation • 0: - 1 1 1
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 1 1 1
3 0 0 0
4 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
18 0 Attention display • 0: OFF 1 1 1
• 1: ON
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
19 0 E-mail/http communication mode • 0: Duplex 0 0 0
• 1: Simplex
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
20 0 http Heart Beat function • 0: ON 0 0 0
• 1: OFF
I-340
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 http Heart Beat Fix send • 0: Off 1 1 1
• 1: ON
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Auto sending of the JAM history when the call • 0: OFF 1 1 1
on the frequent JAM occurrence occurs • 1: ON
6 Sending frequent paper JAM alert 1 1 1
7 Sending frequent original JAM alert 1 1 1
21 0 Threshold of sending frequent paper JAM alert • 1 times: 00000001 1 1 1
1 • 2 times: 00000010 0 0 0
• 3 times: 00000011
2 • 4 times: 00000100 1 1 1
3 • 5 times: 00000101 0 0 0
4 • 6 times: 00000110 0 0 0
• 7 times: 00000111
5 0 0 0
• 8 times: 00001000
6 • 9 times: 00001001 0 0 0
7 • 10 times: 00001010 0 0 0
• 11 times: 00001011
22 0 Threshold of sending frequent original JAM alert 1 1 1
• 12 times: 00001100
1 • 13 times: 00001101 0 0 0
2 • 14 times: 00001110 1 1 1
• 15 times: 00001111
3 0 0 0
• Other: Invalid (regarded as 5
4 times) 0 0 0
5 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
23 0 Use the USB memory of CSRA. • 0: Does not save (Saves the 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches the CSRA data in the HDD. )
destination to save the CSRA data. • 1: Saves. (Saves the CSRA
· Usage: Change to "1" in this setting for the data in the USB memory. )
option configuration of which the main body has
no HDD. It saves the CSRA data in the USB
memory instead of the HDD.
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
26 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
I-341
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
27 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
30 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
31 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
33 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
I-342
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
34 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
35 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
36 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
37 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
38 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
39 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
I-343
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4.11.11 Setup confirmation

3. Make sure that only selected item "E-Mail", "Modem", or "http" is shown on the "CS Remote Care setting screen".
4.11.12 Maintenance call

As the CE starts the maintenance, enter the ID code of CE (7-digit number with which each CE is identified, managed by a distributor.) to notify
the center the start of the maintenance. After the maintenance, pressing [Maintenance Comp] notifies the center the completion of the
maintenance.
At the start of maintenance

* During the maintenance, [Start] button blinks until the completion of the maintenance.
At the end of maintenance

3. Press [Maintenance Comp] on the "CS Remote Care setting screen."
4.11.13 Center call from administrator

If the setup of CS Remote Care is completed, the manager can call the center of CS Remote Care.
1. Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [Administrator Call] on [Utility] screen.
3. Press [Start] on [Administrator Call] screen.
• When the setup is not completed or other call is made, [Start] is grayed out and you can not make a call.
About how to call the center and send the various data of the main body on the specified date and the time, refer to the manual of the CS
Remote Care center.
4.11.14 Confirm communication log

You can output and confirm the communication log.
2. Press [List Output] on the "Service Mode menu" screen.
3. Press [Communication Log List] on the "List Output screen."
5. Press start button to output the selected list.
For details of logs, refer to .I.4.12 List Output
4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care

When you initialize the RAM for the CS Remote Care you can perform the setup again.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [RAM Clear] button on Utility screen.
7. Press [Execute] on "RAM Clear Setting" screen.
8. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
9. The RAM is cleared, and the "CS Remote Care setting screen" appears.
10. Perform the setup again if you need..
4.11.16 CS Remote Care error code list

Classificatio
Error Code Description Troubleshooting procedure
n
Connection K-0000 Connection NG (Cannot connect from the Redial.
via modem modem, timed out).
K-0001 Error code that possibly occur when a Redial and wait for re-reception.
transmission is made from the main body
to the center.
No response (After connection, no start
telegram from the center detected).
I-344
Classificatio
n
K-0002 Copying. Could not be written in the non-
volatile memory, and the line
disconnected.
K-0003 Error code that possibly occur when a Confirm the center ID.
to the center.
Center ID mismatch.
K-0004 Serial number mismatch. Confirm the serial number.
K-0005 Error code that may occur when a Redial.
to the center.
Syntax error (when you receive
undefined commands or parameters)
K-0006 Received a write order for an unwritable
item.
K-0007 Unread item error.
K-0008 Error code that possibly occur when a Redial.
to the center.
Signal reception time out after a
response detection (after the start
telegram shuttled).
K-0009 Error code that possibly occur when a
to the center.
Already registered serial number.
to the center.
Communication error occurred because
of the carrier OFF (NO CARRIER
detected in the modem).
to the center.
Dial tone (NO DIALTONE) detected in
the modem.
to the center.
Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the
modem.
to the center.
NO ANSWER detected in the modem.
K-0014 Error code that possibly occur when a Retry standard times, and redial.
to the center.
Telegram error (irregular telegram that is
received in response to the telegram you
sent).
K-0015 Serial number that is not registered in the
center (4 x 40 telegrams received).
to the center.
Errors that are not defined in K-0000 to
0015.
to the center.
Telephone number that you must call
was not registered.
to the center.
DSR deactivates or remains deactivate.
K-0101 Error on creating a message queue.
I-345
Classificatio
n
K-0102 Error on generating a task.
to the center.
Error on sending a message.
to the center.
Error on receiving a message.
to the center.
Received an error (NG) from the timer
task.
to the center.
Modem initialization NG.
to the center.
Center call evacuation buffer is full.
Cannot evacuate any more.
Connection K-0590 Because of (E-mail, http) memory
via E-mail/ shortage, unable to secure the enough
http area for sending a mail.
K-0592 (E-mail/http) Controller in operation: In the manual transmission, retry when the controller is idling. In the
unable to send a mail because the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
controller is in operation.
K-0593 Sending error: In the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after the
(E-mail) Error comes back from the mail specified time. Check if there is no fault in the network environment
server. and the network settings.
(http) Storing mail to the Web server fails.
K-0594 (E-mail/http) Machine in operation: In the manual transmission, retry when the machine is idling. In the
unable to send a mail because the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
machine is in operation.
K-0595 (E-mail/http) Controller not connected: Check the connection between the controller and the main body.
unable to send a mail because the
controller is not connected.
K-0597 (E-mail/http) No reply from controller
K-0600 (http) Fails to make the directory on Web
server
4.11.17 Troubleshooting
Check the followings when the main body does not receive the initial connection mail or does not return a response.
1. The center ID or the machine ID are not configured in the main body.
2. The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3. CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4. Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check it with a transmission test).
4.12 List Output

(1) Usage
Output various lists.
(2) Procedure
Press [10 List Output].
2. "List Output screen"
The list output mode menu includes the following items.
• Coverage data list
• Parameter List
• Font Pattern
• Communication Log List *1
I-346
• Memory Dump List

Note
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Font Pattern, Communication Log List and Memory Dump List are displayed.
• When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the Maintenance History, ORU-M Maintenance History and RFID Information List are
displayed.
• Do not use the parameter list and the memory dump list in the field because they are for development.

When outputting to the USB memory, press [Output All to USB].
4. [USB Memory Connection screen]
Connect the USB memory to the service port and press [OK].
Note
• The following data are stored; Counter List, Mode Memory List, User Management List, Use Management List, Audit Log
Report, Machine Management List, Adjustment Data List, Coverage Data List and Maintenance History.
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
• When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History and the RFID Information List.
• File Type
tab-delimited text file
• Save directory
Root directory
• File naming convention
listprint<Machine code> + <Destination code> + <Serial No.>_<YMD>_<Time>.txt
Example:
listprint505A000123456_20100107_1010.txt

To print on paper, press [Print Mode].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Press the Start key to output the selected list.
To output other lists, repeat steps 2 to 8.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and receiving history of the CS Remote Care. The start time of communications, the time
period of communications (modem only), the communication modes, the results of communications, and the senders (mail only) are printed.
The communication modes and the results of communications are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit number. For the meaning of them, refer
to the following table.
Communication mode Results of communication
0000 - Transmitted successfully
0001 Initial transmission Connection time out when
transmitting
0002 Emergency transmission -
0004 Emergency recovery transmission Received successfully
0005 - Reception failed
0008 Transmission for warning -
0010 Warning recovery transmission -
0020 Maintenance start transmission -
0040 Maintenance completion -
transmission
0080 Administrator transmission -
0100 Fixed date transmission -
0200 Response transmission -
0*** - Transmission failed
1000 Enquiry -
2000 Data rewrite -
4000 Response reception -
8000 Test mail -
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place of ***.
4.13 Test Mode

4.13.1 Running Test Mode
(1) Usage
Conduct a test while in the continuous print operation.
In this mode, the following items can be selected:
Note
• The scanner is mounted on PF-708 (Option). When PF-708 is not connected, be sure not to perform scanner related operations.
• Intermittent copy mode
After completion of the printing operation for the configured print count, the machine changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5second
before you resume the same operation.
• Paperless running mode
I-347
The printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation without the paper feed, the paper detection and the
paper jam.
In the same manner as the intermittent copy, after completion of the printing operation for the configured print count, the machine
changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5second before you resume the same operation.
• Paperless Mode
In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting the paper or the jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same
timing as the normal operation.
• Paperless endless mode
The machine operates with the print count infinitely configured automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without feeding
the paper and detecting paper or the jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
• Running Mode
The printing operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanning operation and the auto paper feed tray switching.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Press [01 Running Test Mode].
3. "Running Test Mode menu screen"
Select the mode that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
4. Press the Start button to start the running test.
5. Press the stop button to stop the running test.
4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode

(1) Usage
Output various test patterns to use them for troubleshooting.
Note
• Do not use any test pattern number that is not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Test Pattern Output Mode ].
[Service Mode] → [Test Mode] → [Test Pattern Output Mode]
3. "Test Pattern screen"
Press any of the keys [Test Pattern], [Gradation-Y], [Gradation-M], [Gradation-C] or [Gradation-K] [TestMode Lead Edge Erase]. Enter the
test pattern number that you want to output through the numeric buttons and then press [SET].
• When you select the screen, press any of [Screen1], [Screen2], [Stochastic], [Contone].
• When you specify the arbitrary density, press [SET] and proceed to step 4. In other cases, proceed to step 6.
• Configure the amount of the leading edge erase on [TestMode Lead Edge Erase].
• Applied for lead edge erase quantity of all test patterns.
• Setting range: 0 to 100
• 1 step: 1 mm
• When the value is less than the normal erasure amount (3 mm for the front side, 4 mm for the back side), there is no effect.
• The configured value is cleared to "0" when you move back from the test pattern setting screen or the sub power switch (SW2) is
deactivated.
4. "Density Setting Display screen"
Specify the coverage or the background density.
Setting Range
Coverage-Y, coverage-M, coverage-C, coverage-K (only the test pattern number 55 is enabled): 0% (low coverage) to 100% (high
coverage)
Background-Y, background-M, background-C, background-K (do not use in the field): 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker)
5. Press [Return].
7. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. To output another test pattern, press [Exit PrintMode] and repeat steps 3 to 7.
4.13.3 Test pattern number 11 Beam check

(1) [Check item 1]
• Check the solid black pattern and see if there is an uneven density in the main scan and the sub scan directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) [Check item 2]

• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading edge and the trailing edge of the test pattern in the sub
scan direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: 2nd transfer unit
I-348
(3) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
4.13.4 Test pattern number 16 Linearity evaluation pattern

(1) [Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include the main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and the leading edge timing of the
printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
(2) Test pattern

[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 8050fs1021
[1] Storage of image data
4.13.5 Test pattern number 25 registration mark position check pattern

(1) [Purpose]
On the registration mark, check the gap amount of the main scan between 4 colors, "Mag.(ALL)" (whole magnification in main scanning),
"Mag.(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning).
When a gap is 2 mm or more, check that the printer system operates normally.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1. Select [Test Pattern] and configure the density of each color Y, M, C, and K to "255".
2. Press [Print Mode] and place a sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
3. Check the gap of the registration mark between 4 colors.
I-349
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

• Writing unit
(4) Test pattern
4.13.6 Test pattern number 33 Linearity evaluation pattern

(1) [Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading edge timing of the printer
system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
(2) Test pattern

[1]
1inch 9inch
1inch
[1]
190.5mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190.5mm
190mm a0y5f3c015ca
[1] Edge of pager -
4.13.7 Test pattern number 40 Image skew check pattern (full-bleed print of test pattern number 16)
(1) [Purpose]
• The pattern is printed 1 mm over of the rear edge in the sub scan direction and the both side edges in the main scan direction. It is
effective to check the image skew.
Note
• The printable range in the main scan direction is 299 mm, therefore the 297 mm or shorter paper in the main scan direction can
be used for this Test Pattern.
I-350
(2) Test pattern
4.13.8 Test pattern number 43 Output 12 test patterns at a time

(1) [Purpose]
Outputs 12 test patterns at a time and check the image quality of each screen.
• Output pattern: Same as the number 53.
• Color graduation: 255 (Y, M, C, K) 4 sheets, 120 (Y, M, C, K, R, G, B, Process Bk) 8 sheets
Note
• When the setting of the color graduation is changed, 12 test patterns are output on this condition.
Gradation Check item Recommended checkpoints
255 If the density is light check whether the printer system Writing unit
operates normally.
120 If there are image stripes, check whether the fault is with Developing unit, cleaning unit, intermediate transfer unit,
the write system or the process system. charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
I-351
(2) Test pattern
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7] [8]
[10]
[1] Y [2] M
[3] C [4] K
[5] R [6] G
[7] B [8] Process Bk
[9] Gradation 255 [10] Gradation 120
4.13.9 Test pattern number 49 RU color sensor gamma correction (output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-
Pro)
(1) [Purpose]
• Used by "Color Density Control" in the user mode.
• A test pattern that is used for registering the paper category in "Color Density Control."
Note
This test pattern has 3 sizes.
I-352
(2) Test pattern
4.13.10 Test pattern number 51 Gradation evaluation pattern (main scan)

(1) [Check item]
• If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c002ca
4.13.11 Test pattern number 52 Gradation evaluation pattern (sub scan)

(1) [Check item]
• If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
I-353
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c003ca
4.13.12 Test pattern number 53 Overall halftone

(1) [Check item]
Check the image quality of each screen. (Number 1 can print only with Contone) )
• When the density is configured to 70 (halftone)
If there are image stripes, determine whether the fault is with the write system or the process system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, intermediate transfer unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof
glass
• When the density is configured to 0 (white)
If the image fogging occurs, check whether the printer system operates normally.
Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona and high voltage contact.
• When the density is configured to 255 (Y, M, C, K)
If the density is light, check whether the printer system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
*For the information about the setting for the density, refer to "I.4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode".
(2) Test pattern
8050fs1019
[1] When the density is configured to 70 [3] When the density is configured to 255
[2] When the density is configured to 0 -
4.13.13 Test pattern number 54 Gradation evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
About selecting screens, refer to "I.4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode".
Screen Purpose Check item
Screen 1 Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen that Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and
Screen 2 copier use, from the primary color to the secondary color. even with no tone jump.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct Printer Gamma
Stochastic Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
I-354
Contone Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen that is Make sure that the density increases in the incremental
used in the character area when the screen mentioned step from the highlight side, and the density in the
above is selected by the copier. shadow section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
(2) Test pattern

[2] [1]
a03uf3c004ca
[1] Primary color [2] Secondary color
4.13.14 Test pattern number 55 5% coverage

(1) [Purpose]
When you make the test prints continuously in order such as to check the paper feed performance, use this 5% coverage test pattern to
protect such as the developer, drums, and cleaners from the burden.
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c005ca
4.13.15 Test pattern number 58 Stripe check pattern

(1) [Usage]
• Use to locate the causes of sub-scan direction stripes which occur on the image.

1. Select [Test Pattern] and configure the density of each color M, C and K to "120".
2. Select [Screen1] for the screen.
3. Press [Print Mode] and place a sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
4. Check whether the sub-scan direction stripes occur on the area [1] or [2].

• In the case of [1]: Intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer roller/Lw
• For [2]: Drum unit
• If no lines occur on [1] or [2], Y is the cause of the lines.Print the test pattern number 53 with Y=120, 255.
Check that there are lines on the same position as the Y color test pattern which is printed at number 53 and the 4 colors test pattern.
For color stripe: Drum unit, charging corona
I-355
For white stripe: Charging corona
(4) Test pattern
[2] [1]
a03uf3c034ca
4.13.16 Test pattern number 62 Uneven density check pattern

(1) [Purpose]
• After the periodic maintenance, check the uneven density and the density difference between the right side and the left side, from each
gradation of YMCK, RBG and the process Bk.
Check uneven density with both edges [1] and [2] of Y, M, C and process Bk.

1. Enter 62 in the [Test Pattern], and then select the [Screen 1].
Note
• You need not to change the [Gradation]. Regardless of the [Gradation], the machine prints the test pattern in fixed gradation.

3. Place paper in the tray, and then print the test pattern.
Note
• You can use arbitrary size paper.
• You need not change the Set Number. Regardless of the Set Number, the machine prints 8 test pattern.

• Charging corona, write unit
I-356
(4) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c035ca
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 maximum density adjustment pattern

(1) [Purpose]
• Used when the maximum density is measured.
Note
• Before the test pattern is printed, be sure to conduct "Gamma Automatic Adjustment". (Refer to I.4.4.10 Gamma Automatic

1. "Test Pattern Screen"
Enter 69 in the test pattern.
2. Enter "255" in [Gradation-Y], [Gradation-M], [Gradation-C], [Gradation-K].
3. Select [Screen1 (Dot190)].
5. "Print Screen"
Place the standard paper on the tray and print it.
Note
• The followings are recommended for the standard paper.
• Coated (Japan): POD gloss coat 128 g/m2
• Coated (North America): MOHAWK EVERYDAY DIGITAL COATED SILK WHITE 118
• Coated (Europe): Konica Minolta Semi Gloss Reference 130 g/m2
• Plain: Mondi Color Copy 90 g/m2
I-357
(3) Test pattern
4.13.18 Test pattern number 75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL (Type1/Type2)

(1) [Purpose]
• A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user mode.
(2) Test pattern

• Type1
• Type2
I-358
4.13.19 Test pattern number 76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2)

(1) [Purpose]
• A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user mode.
(2) Test pattern

• Type1
• Type2
I-359
4.13.20 Test pattern number 77 Density correction pattern manual

(1) [Purpose]
• The test pattern which the machine outputs in the manual adjustment of the Density Balance Adjustment in the user mode
(2) Test pattern
4.13.21 Test pattern number 80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
About selecting screens, refer to "I.4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode".
Screen Purpose Check item
Screen 1 Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen that Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and
Screen 2 copier use, from the primary color to the tertiary color. even with no tone jump.
Stochastic Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment
Contone Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen that is Make sure that the density increases in the incremental
used in the character area when the copier select the step from the highlight side, and the density in the
screen mentioned above. shadow section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
I-360
(2) Test pattern
b
c
a
b
c
a03uf3c024ca
A: Primary color
B: Secondary color
C: Tertiary color
4.13.22 Test pattern number 88 Chart file output

(1) Usage
Prints a chart (TIFF image) stored in the USB media.
Note
USB media stands for the USB memory or USB HDD.
Only USB media in the FAT32 format is supported.
The service port is designed for low-power devices. When you use a high-power device such as HDD, connect the external power
source to the device.
(2) Preparation
1. Configure the service port device setting to [ON].
(3) How to use

When you use this function, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor to confirm its handling.
4.13.23 Image Line Confirmation Mode

(1) Function
At normal printing [1], the machine charges and exposes the photo conductor for developing. This means that the machine develops from the
potential difference between the latent image potential and the development bias.
At the image line confirmation mode [2], the machine develops at the status which the potential of the photo conductor is configured to 0V
(charge OFF), and gradation of writing is configured to 0 (exposure OFF). This means that the machine develops from the potential difference
between the photo conductor potential (approximately 0V) and the development bias.
I-361
[7]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[6] [6]
[9]
[1] [2]
[1] At normal print [2] Image line confirmation mode

[3] Charge potential [4] Developing bias
[5] Latent image potential [6] 0V
[7] Exposure [8] Toner
[9] Output image -
(2) Usage
Use this mode when 1-color printer type color lines or white lines appear in the sub scan direction, when you check the half tone image.
Check if the cause of the image line is due to uneven potential of the photo conductor, especially the uneven exposure. (This exposure does
not include dirt on the dust-proof glass and the writing unit replacement is supposed.)
Example: When black lines appear [1] due to the partially strong light in the sub scan direction that is produced by the wiritng unit. At the time,
image lines disappear when you print at image line confirmation mode.
I-362
[6] [7]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[1]
[1] When black lines appear [2] Charge potential

[3] Developing bias [4] Latent image potential
[5] 0V [6] Exposure (produces strong light)
[7] Exposure (produces normal light) [8] Toner
[9] Output image -
(3) Preparation
1. Confirm the normal screen and specify the color of the image lines.
2. Complete the examination on the drum unit, the developing unit, and the charging corona. Those units have no effect on the image lines.
(4) Procedure
Press [03 Image Line Confirmation Mode].
3. "Image Line Confirmation Mode screen"
Select the color of the image line.
Note
• When a color of an image line is Y, select "[Y] and [M]" and "[Y] and [C]". The density of the color Y is low. Therefore,
determination whether the image line appears is difficult when only [Y] is selected.
• When a color of an image line is M, C, or K, select [M], [C], or [K].
4. "Image Line Confirmation Mode screen"

• When you change the density: Press [Set] and go on to procedure 5.
• When you do not change the density: Go on to procedure 7.
5. "Image Line Confirmation Mode screen" (Image density level setting)
Select the color which you change the density.
• Setting Range : 0 (lighter) to +10 (darker) (default: 0)
Note
• Normally configure the density level to 0. When you raise the density level, be sure to raise 1 point at a time.
• When you raise the density level and select 2 or more colors in procedure 3, fusing jam possibly occurs.
6. Press [Return].
Select the tray, and then press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
• Be sure to use A3 or 11 x 17 paper. When small size paper is used, dirt inside the machine possibly occurs.
I-363
• Even if the determination is difficult with 1 sheet, be sure not to output more than 3 sheets. When you output many sheets,
dirt inside the machine or low toner density possibly occurs.
9. Check the output test pattern, and confirm whether image lines appear.
• When the image lines disappear: The cause of the image lines is determined as uneven exposure due to the writing unit.
• When the image lines do not disappear: The cause of the image lines is not the uneven exposure due to the writing unit. Consider the
effect of drum unit, the developing unit, and the charging corona, examination of which has been completed.
Note
• When density is low and you cannot determine the presence or absence of the image line: Press [Exit PrintMode] and repeat
procedure 5 to 9. Configure the image density darker, and confirm again.

Note
• Be sure not to deactivate power at the "PRINT MODE screen".
• When you deactivate power at the "PRINT MODE screen", error occurs with the gradation based adjustments such as the
Color Density Control, the Maximum Density Adjustment, and the Both Sides Adjustment. When error occurs, change all the
gradation of the test mode to 255.
11. Deactivate and replace the target unit.
4.14 Setting Data

4.14.1 Load from External Memory
(1) OUTLINE
Stores each setting information that is stored in the NVRAM board (NRB) from the machine to the USB memory and writes it from the USB
memory to the machine. However, the setting data cannot be edited since it is encrypted.
(a) Setting information which is able to store or write

Data items Data content
Paper setting data Tray setting
Paper Setting Register,
Paper Setting Delete
Register or delete the
custom size
Utility data Utility
Software DIPSW setting data Software DIPSW
CSRC setting data CSRC setting
Note
· The following items on the setting menu are not restored: The scan address register, the date and the time setting, the ACS
adjustment, passwords, the lock or delete the mode memory, the expert adjustment, the administrator registration, the user
authentication and the account track, the network setting, the security setting, the touch panel adjustment, the fee collection
setting, and the machine screen.
· The following items on the CSRC setting are not restored: CSRC, DIPSW, date and time setting, passwords.
(2) Preparation
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [01 Load from external memory].
Note
• If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
3. "Setting Data Scan File Selection screen"

Press [Next] or [Back] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
• When you press [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine appears.
4. "Setting Data Scan Item Selection screen"

Select the data that you want to read from [Paper Setting Data]/[Utility data]/[Software DIPSW Setting Data]/[CSRC Setting Data] and
press [Start Reading].
5. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the setting data.
I-364
Note
• Be sure not to deactivate the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
6. "Setting Data Scan Complete screen"

To read another setting data, press [Continue]. To finish the procedure, press [Exit].
Note
• When you press [Exit], the machine restarts automatically.
4.14.2 Store to External Memory

(1) Function
Store the setting data from NRB to the USB memory.
(2) Preparation
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [02 Store to External Memory].
3. "Setting Data Start to Store screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
• Be sure not to deactivate the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
4. "Setting Data Store Complete screen"

Press [OK], to return to "Setting Data (Store to external memory) screen".
(4) Folder structure of USB memory

When you store the data to the USB memory and the folder is not created, it creates the next folder automatically.
C1100
NOVRAM
(5) Error list

If the error occurs for reading from the external memory or for storing to the external memory, the error message appears. Confirm the
following contents and the causes when the error message appears.
Message Cause of occurrence
Connection of an external memory device 1) The initialization of the USB device is not completed.
cannot be recognized. 2) The USB memory is not connected to the connection port.
It cannot store to the external memory device. 3) Prohibit to write to the USB memory
4) Capacity shortage of the USB memory
5) Unable to execute the compression from the binary data to
the ZLIB compressed data.
6) Unable to encrypt AES.
It cannot read from the external memory 7) Data error on the header (2nd line)
device. 8) Checksum abnormality
9) Unable to execute the replacement from the BASE64 data
to the AES encrypt data.
10) Unable to execute the compounding of AES.
11) Unable to execute the extension from the ZLIB
compressed data to the binary data.
4.15 Log Store

4.15.1 Log Store Setting
(1) Usage
Configure the log storing method for troubleshooting.
I-365
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [01 Log Store Setting].
[Service Mode] → [Log Store] → [Log Store Setting]
3. "Log Store Setting screen"
Configure each item.
• "Store To"
Press [USB Memory] or [HDD].
Note
• To use the USB memory, the "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting - System
Setting - Service Port Device Setting".
• When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
• "Auto Log Store"

When you configure "Auto Log Store" to "ON", the log is automatically stored when SC (except for HDD related SC) occurs.
Note
• File name rule
A dat file that is encrypted is created to the Log directory. The file name is the combination of serial number, date, time,
and SC number.
Example:
A5AW021000044_log2014_0618_1740.dat
• 100 logs can be stored at the maximum. When the number exceeds 100, the old logs are overwritten with the new logs.
(Refer to I.4.15.2 Execute Log Storing)
• When "USB Memory" is selected on "Store To" and the USB memory is not connected to the service port, the log is not
stored automatically.
• The content of the dat file cannot be seen.
• "Manual Log Store"

When "Manual Log Store" is configured to "ON", you can manually store the log I.4.15.2 Execute Log Storing.
Note
· When "Manual Log Store" is configured to [ON], [Log Store] button appears on the "System Information" screen of Utility. User can
collect the log with this button.
· When the user collects the log, explain that the sub power switch (SW2) must be deactivated or activated after the user collects the
log.
4.15.2 Execute Log Storing

(1) Usage
Store the log for trouble shooting manually.
Note
• To use the USB memory, the "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting - System Setting -
Service Port Device Setting".
• When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
• 100 logs can be stored at the maximum. When the number exceeds 100, the old logs are overwritten with the new logs.
• With the file name created from the date and the time, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
• Be sure to deactivate or activate the sub power switch (SW2) after the execution of [Manual Log Store].
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [02 Execute Log Storing].
[Service Mode] → [Log Store] → [Execute Log Storing]
3. "Execute Log Storing screen"
The operation differs depending on the "Store To" setting in I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting.
When the USB memory is configured as a destination of the storage
• [Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
• [Transfer to USB Memory]: Cannot be selected.
• [Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
When HDD is configured as a destination of the storage
• [Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in HDD.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
• [Transfer to USB Memory]:
Transfers the log stored in the HDD to the route directory of the USB memory.
1. Press [Transfer to USB Memory].
• [Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the HDD.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
I-366
2. "Clear Log File screen"

Press [OK].
4.15.3 Download of the log from Web Utilities

(1) Usage
Download the log file that is saved in the built-in HDD.
(2) Procedure
1. Access Web Utilities of the main body.
3. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK".
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default: "92729272")
4. [Extension for maintenance screen]
Click [Log Download].
5. "Log download screen"
Click the link and the download the log file.
Note
• The download page is appeared only when the encryption password is "ON", the auto log store setting or the manual log store
setting is "ON", .
4.15.4 Acquire the logs for the controller via WebDAV

You can also acquire the part of the log for the control via the WebDAV.
(1) Procedure
1. Access to "http://xx.xx.xx.xx:30081/log". (xx.xx.xx.xx is the IP address of the main body)
2. Input the user name "log".
3. Input the password "sysadm".
4. 2 links are provided after you login. You can select and acquire each Log.
Acquire the linked file and send it to KMI.
• [system]: Logs for the controller
• [jdf]: Logs for the application that is related to the JDF such as the EQUIOS or the Printgroove Queue.
Note
• The following logs for the controller can be acquired from [system] or [jdf].
[system]
• ISWCopylog*.log: A log of the ISW operation of the controller.
• errTrace*.log: A log when controller handles errors.
[jdf]
• ***.jdf:: A log of the record of jobs or the like.
• ***.jmf: A log regarding the installed options or acquisition of PaperCatalog or the like.
• ***.pdf: A PDF file that is used on the JDF job.
*You do not have to acquire [ic_corrected_data.dat].
• The following files cannot be acquired via WebDAV. Acquire with the HDD or the USB memory.
• IPLog_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log
• IPErr***.log
4.16 ORU-M Setting

4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life Setting
(1) Usage
Configure the ORU-M target unit and the life.
Note
• You can not select this setting when ORU-M is not valid (The default is disabled). To enable ORU-M, configure DIPSW15-0: 1.
(2) Procedure
Press [15 ORU-M Setting].
2. "ORU-M Setting screen"
Press [01 ORU-M Item/Life Setting].
3. "ORU-M Item/Life Setting screen"
Press "▼" or "▲" to select the unit you want to configure.
To configure to the ORU-M target, press the button on the left of the unit you want to register and configure it to "Enable".
4. To change the setting, select the replacement unit.
• Setting Range
I-367
Replacement Unit Standard Life Setting Range

Intermediate transfer unit 200,000 prints *1 66% to 333%
175,000 prints *2
Developing Unit (Yellow) 2030 km *1 50% to 120%
2082 km *2
Developing Unit (Magenta) 2030 km *1 50% to 120%
2082 km *2
Developing Unit (Cyan) 2030 km *1 50% to 120%
2082 km *2
Developing Unit (Black) 2030 km *1 50% to 120%
2082 km *2
Developing Unit (Yellow) 507.5 km *1 50% to 120%
(Developer/Y *3) 520.5 km *2
Developer Unit (Magenta) 507.5 km *1 50% to 120%
(Developer/M *3) 520.5 km *2
Developer Unit (Cyan) 507.5 km *1 50% to 120%
(Developer/C *3) 520.5 km *2
Developer Unit (Black) 507.5 km *1 50% to 120%
(Developer/K *3) 520.5 km *2
2nd transfer unit 200,000 prints *1 50% to 120%
175,000 prints *2
Fusing unit 1,050,000 prints 50% to 120%
Drum Unit (Yellow) 148 km *1 80% to 113%
157 km *2
Drum Unit (Magenta) 148 km *1 80% to 113%
157 km *2
Drum Unit (Cyan) 148 km *1 80% to 113%
157 km *2
Drum Unit (Black) 148 km *1 80% to 113%
157 km *2
Charging Corona (Yellow) 50.3 hours *1 57% to 143%
63 hours *2
Charging Corona (Magenta) 50.3 hours *1 57% to 143%
63 hours *2
Charging Corona (Cyan) 50.3 hours *1 57% to 143%
63 hours *2
Charging Corona (Black) 50.3 hours *1 57% to 143%
63 hours *2
Dust-proof filter 700,000 prints 50% to 120%
Developing cooling 525,000 prints 50% to 120%
filter(Developing charge filter/Y,
developing charge filter/M,
developing charge filter/C,
developing charge filter/K *3)
Ozone filter 700,000 prints 50% to 120%
*1 C1100
*2 C1085
*3 Special parts counter name
4.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting

(1) Usage
Select whether to display the ORU-M item unit in the ORU-M mode by the life value. Adjust the threshold with percent.
The units whose life value reaches the display threshold setting are shown in the ORU-M mode when the ORU-M object unit is selected to
"Enable".
Note
(2) Procedure
I-368

Press [02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting].
3. "ORU-M Life Threshold Setting screen"
• 1 step = 1%
• Note
· Default is 0%.
4.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting

(1) Usage
Configure the password to enter the ORU-M mode.
Note
• This setting is valid when the DIPSW37-0=1.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 ORU-M Password Setting].
3. "ORU-M Password Setting screen"
Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the new password (4 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the new password (4 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and
then press [OK].
4.17 HDD Setting

4.17.1 HDD Replace Initial Setting
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when you install the formatted HDD.
(a) Number of HDD

"Number of HDD"
EFI controller 4 -
(IC-308/310)
Controller that KM - 5
manufactures (IC-602C)
Note
• After this setting is changed, be sure to switch off and on the power supply regardless of the successful completion or the
unsuccessful completion.
• After this setting is changed, non-volatile authentication-relative information is deleted.
• After this setting is changed, make sure to print and check that the machine works normally.
(2) Procedure
(a) For the EFI controller (4 HDDs)
1. Change DIPSW2-0 to 1.
4. Confirm that the protection chip/1 (CP1) is not connected.
5. Unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
6. Replace 4 HDDs. (Refer to G.3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105))
7. Plug the power plug into the power outlet.
Note

Press [16 HDD Setting].
Note
• [16 HDD Setting] is gray out until HDD becomes usable.
• When the [16 HDD Setting] is gray out for over approximately 2 minutes, change the screen to the other service setting
such as [08 Firmware Version], and select [16 HDD setting] again.
11. "HDD Setting Menu screen"

Press [01 HDD Replace Initial Setting].
12. "HDD Replace Initial Setting screen"
Press [Start] to execute the HDD replace initial setting.
Note
• Connected HDD shows the number of HDD (4 HDDs). If the value is not 4, the status is abnormal.
I-369

Confirm that the message "Completed normally" is displayed, and then press [Reboot].
14. If the message "Completed normally" does not appear, and "Error" appears, refer to the error code displayed on the touch panel to
correct the error. Repeat steps 1 to 13.
Possible factor Countermeasures
The number of connected HDD differs from the setting information Match the setting of DIPSW36-6 with the number of connected
of DIPSW36-6. HDD.
- For 4 HDDs: DIPSW36-6=0
The HDD is not connected properly to the specified port. Confirm that the HDD is connected to the specified port.
The HDD is not a specified HDD by Konica Minolta. Connect the HDD that Konica Minolta specifies.
HDD is broken. Replace the HDD.
(b) For the KM in-house production controller (5 HDDs)

6. Connect the protection chip/1 (CP1).
7. Replace 5 HDDs. (Refer toG.3.2.28 HDD unit (Option: IC-602C, UK-105), G.3.2.29 HDD/5 (HDD/5) (Option: IC-602C))
Note

Note
• The [16 HDD Setting] button is gray out until the HDD becomes usable.
• For IC-602C, when the button is gray out more than approximately 5 minutes even you repeat the transition of screens,
specify DIPSW40-7=0. After that, perform the following procedure.
1. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2).
Note
· Use "Start-up from power OFF" to enter the service mode. (Refer to I.4.2.1 Start method)
4. Perform the steps after the step 12.

Press [01 HDD Replace Initial Setting].
Press [Start] to execute the HDD replace initial setting.
Note
• Connected HDD shows the number of HDD (5 HDDs). If the value is not 5, the status is abnormal.

Note
• When DIPSW40-7=0 is specified, put it back to DIPSW40-7=1 after you reboot the machine. (Use "Start-up from power
OFF" to enter the service mode.)
15. If the message "Completed normally" does not appear, and "Error" appears, refer to the following table to correct the error. Repeat
steps 1 to 14.
Possible factor Countermeasures
The number of connected HDD differs from the setting information Match the setting of DIPSW36-6 with the number of connected
of DIPSW36-6. HDD.
The HDD is not connected properly to the specified port. Confirm that the HDD is connected to the specified port.
The HDD is not a specified HDD by Konica Minolta. Connect the HDD that Konica Minolta specifies.
HDD is broken. Replace the HDD.
4.17.2 Format HDD All Data

(1) Usage
Format HDD all data is the function that puts HDD back to a default setting. The default setting enables to activate HDD as a main body when
an abnormality occurs to HDD.
I-370
For this machine, number of HDD is changed according to the standard configuration (EFI controller) or the extended configuration (Konica
Minolta controller). Steps of the format HDD all data varies depending on the number of the connected HDD.
(a) Number of HDD

"Number of HDD"
EFI controller 4 -
(IC-308/310)
Controller that KM - 5
manufactures (IC-602C)
Note
• Format HDD all data has following 2 types depending on DIPSW setting.
• DIPSW36-7=0: Normal format (Restore the authentication-relative data after the format)
• DIPSW36-7=1: Forced format (Delete all data including authentication information)
• After the format HDD all data is conducted, be sure to deactivate and activate the power supply again regardless of the
successful completion or the unsuccessful completion.
• For the KM in-house production controller (IC-602C), the network setting is initialized after the format HDD all data is
conducted. Be sure to re-set the network setting.
• After the format HDD all data is conducted, make sure to print and check that the machine works normally.
• When you conduct the format HDD all data, confirm that nothing is connected to the USB port.
(2) Procedure
(a) For the EFI controller (4HDDs)
Note
• Change the controller DIPSW40-7 and the format HDD mode setting DIPSW36-7 as needed.
5. Confirm that the protection chip/1 (CP1) is not connected.
6. Confirm that the 4 HDDs are connected to the specified position.
Note

Note

Press [02 Format HDD All Data].
11. "Format HDD All Data screen"
Press [Start] and execute the format HDD all data.
Note
• In this screen, the following 4 items are displayed as the expanded information.
• Connected HDD: Number of the connected HDDIf the value is not 4, the status is abnormal.
• Transferred Data Vol. (GB): Capacity of the connected HDD
• Processing Time (Minute): Displays the estimated required time to format.
• Expected Finishing Time: Expected time to complete formatting the data

Note
• Put DIPSW36-7 back to "0" when you reboot the machine after the format HDD is completed in the forced format mode
(DIPSW36-7=1).
13. If the message "Completed normally" is not displayed, and "Error" appears, refer to the error code displayed in the center of the screen
to correct the error. Repeat steps 1 to 10.
(b) For the KM in-house production controller (5 HDDs)

Note
6. Confirm that the protection chip/1 (CP1) is connected.
I-371

Note

Note
• For IC-602C, when the button is gray out more than approximately 5 minutes even you repeat the transition of screens,
specify DIPSW40-7=0. After that, perform the following procedure.
Note
· Use "Start-up from power OFF" to enter the service mode. (Refer to I.4.2.1 Start method )
4. Perform the steps after the step 12.

Press [02 Format HDD All Data].
Note
• For the KM in-house production controller (IC-602C), the [02 Format HDD All Data] button is gray out until the controller is
activated completely (up to 5 minutes).

Press [Start] and execute the format HDD all data.
Note
• In this screen, the following 4 items are displayed as the expanded information.
• Connected HDD: Number of the connected HDDIf the value is not 5, the status is abnormal.
• Transferred Data Vol. (GB): Capacity of the connected HDD
• Processing Time (Minute): Displays the estimated required time to format.
• Expected Finishing Time: Expected time to complete formatting the data

Note
• Put DIPSW36-7 back to "0" when you reboot the machine after the format HDD is completed in the forced format mode
(DIPSW36-7=1).
• When DIPSW40-7=0 is specified, put it back to DIPSW40-7=1 after you reboot the machine. (Use start-up from power OFF
to enter the service mode.)
15. If the message "Completed normally" is not displayed, and "Error" appears, refer to the error code displayed in the center of the screen
to correct the error. Repeat steps 1 to 14.
(3) Error code

-1 Machine trouble MFP board (MFPB) replacement
-2 HDD-related error • Check DIPSW
• Execute in the EFI controller mode (DIPSW40-7=0).
• Check connection of HDD
• HDD replacement
-3 Controller activation • Execute in the EFI controller mode (DIPSW 40-7=0).
failure • ISW of P0 ROM
-4 SSD error or machine • ISW of P0 ROM
trouble • SSD replacement
• MFP board (MFPB) replacement
Note
· For how to get or replace the SSD, contact the service manager of Konica
Minolta.
-5 Controller activation wait • ISW of I0 ROM
-6 Authentication information Select the forced format mode (DipSW36-7=1), execute the format HDD again after the
restore error power supply becomes inactive and active.
4.17.3 Format Controller HDD Data

(1) OUTLINE
Normally, when you format the HDD, conduct [Format HDD All Data]. However, you can use this function only when you use the Konica
Minolta controller and format the controller HDD independently.
On this function, only the job data before RIP are formatted on the controller HDD. Therefore, the job data after RIP that is saved on the
remained 4 HDDs and copier data are saved.
(However, after the controller firmware is reinstalled, the job data before RIP is deleted, and is impossible to RIP again. )
I-372
Use this function only when you do not want to delete the data because you did not create the backup, for example.
(2) Procedure
Note
6. Confirm that the protection chip/2 (CP2) is connected.
Note
• Use "Start-up from power OFF" and enter the service mode. (Refer to I.4.2.1 Start method)

Note
• [16 HDD Setting] is grayed out until the HDD becomes usable.
• When the [16 HDD Setting] is gray out for more than approximately 2 minutes, change the screen to the other service setting
• For IC-602: When the button is grayed out for more than approximately 5 minutes even you repeat the transition of screens,
perform the following procedures.
1. Change DIPSW40-7 to "0".
Note
• Use "Start-up from power OFF" and enter the service mode. (Refer to I.4.2.1 Start method)

5. Proceed to step 12.

Press [03 Format controller HDD Data].
Note
• For IC-602: [03 Format controller HDD Data] is grayed out for up to 5 minutes until the controller completes to boot.
13. "Format controller HDD Data screen"

Press [Start] to format the data of the controller HDD only.
Note
• The following 4 items are displayed on this screen.
• Connected HDD: Number of connected HDDs (The status is abnormal when the number is other than "5".)
• Data Capacity (GB): Capacity of connected HDDs.
• Processing Time (Min.): Assumed required time for formatting.
• Expected Finishing Time: Expected time that the format is completed.
14. "Format controller HDD Data screen"

Note
• Put DIPSW36-7 back to 0 when you reboot the machine after the format HDD is completed in the forced format mode
(DIPSW36-7=1).
• When DIPSW40-7=0 is specified, put it back to DIPSW40-7=1 after you reboot the machine. (Use "Start-up from power OFF"
and enter the service mode.)
15. When "Error" is displayed on the touch panel, check the error code at the center of the screen (refer to I.4.17.2.(3) Error code) and repair
the error.
Then, repeat step 1 to step 14.
Note
• After the format, the network setting is initialized. Perform the settings again.
4.18 Auth. Device Setting

4.18.1 Auth. Unit Selection
(1) Usage
• Configure the authentication device fix and unfix.
• Configure this setting when you fix the authentication device (IC card authentication type).
(2) Procedure
Press [17 Authentication Device Setting].
2. "Auth. Device Setting screen"
I-373
Press [01 Auth. Unit Selection].

3. "Authentication Device Setting <Authentication Device Selection> screen"
Default is "Unfixed". Press [Authentication Device].
4. "Authentication Device Setting <Authentication Device Selection> screen"
Press [Card 1] or [Card 2].
Card 1 Use the IC Card Authentication type. (Standard)
Card 2 Use the non-contact IC Card Authentication type from third party. (Load)
• Be sure to conduct ISW of "Loadable Device Driver" before you use the Card 2.
• Be sure to deactivate or activate the main power switch (SW1), after the Card 2 is configured.
5. ""Authentication Device Setting <Authentication Device Selection> screen""
Press [OK].
4.18.2 Loadable Driver Install

(1) Function
• Install the Loadable Device Driver by the USB Memory device.
(2) Usage
• As the default, the card reader driver of AU-201/AU-201S is installed. When use a card reader other than AU-201/AU-201S, install the
dedicated Loadable Device Driver.
(3) Preparation
To the connecting port, connect the USB Memory with the drive data of the Loadable Device you use.
Note
• Be sure to connect the USB Memory while the main power switch and the sub power switch are OFF.
(4) Procedure
1. Activate the main power switch and the sub power switch.
Press [17 Auth. Device Setting].
3. "Auth. Device Setting screen"
Press [02 Loadable Driver Install].
4. "Firmware Update screen"
Press [Start] to start installing the Loadable Driver.
5. "Firmware Update screen"
A message to inform the install completion ("Download Completed") and the checksum (xxxx) appears.
6. Deactivate the main power switch and the sub power switch.
7. Remove the USB memory from the connecting port.
8. Switch on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub scan power switch (SW2).
4.19 Startup Setting

4.19.1 Package Adjustment
(1) Function
Charges developer automatically.
Conducts the following adjustments automatically in order after the automatic developer charge.
• Toner Density Sensor Initial Adjustment
• Blade Setting Mode Adjustment
• Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Not conduct)
• Gamma Adjustment
• Color Registration Adjustment
• Density Balance Adjustment(Not conduct)
(2) Usage
Use the overall adjustment when you want to perform various settings at once after the installation.
(3) Procedure
Press [18 Startup Setting].
2. "Startup Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Package Adjustment].
Charge the developer and press [Next].
4. "Package Adjustment menu screen"
Press [Start].
5. When the message "Adjustment after unit replacement is completed" appears, press [Close].
4.19.2 Setup Setting 1

(1) Function
Display the following setting buttons.
For efficient jobs, the shortcut keys are collectively displayed.
• Date/Time Setting
I-374
• Setup Date/Business Setting

• Service Center TEL/FAX
(2) Usage
Use this setting when you want to configure the settings efficiently.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Setup Setting 1].
3. "Setup Setting 1 Menu screen"
Press the button that you want to configure.
4.19.3 Setup Setting 2

(1) Function
Display the following setting buttons.
For efficient jobs, the shortcut keys are collectively displayed.
• Firmware Version
• Serial Number Setting
• Non-Image Area Erase Check
• NIC setting
(2) Usage
Use this setting when you want to configure the settings efficiently.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Setup Setting 2].
3. "Setup Setting 2 Menu screen"
Press the button that you want to configure.
I-375
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. IC-602 SERVICE MODE
5. IC-602 SERVICE MODE

5.1 IC Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments and settings. Data that is adjusted or configured with this mode is stored
in HDD.
• 01 Software DIPSW Setting
• 02 CSV File Import/Export
• 03 Font Backup
• 04 HP Tray Mapping
• 05 Controller Capture Setting
5.2 Start and exit of IC service mode

5.2.1 Method to activate the IC service mode
To access to the IC service mode, activate from the main body service mode.
You can access the main body service mode while the power becomes active and inactive.
In either way, the started main body service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
(1) Start-up from power ON

2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
3. Main body "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Controller].
4. IC "Service Mode menu screen"
IC service mode menu screen appears.
*1 Default is the [MACHINE] screen.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While you press the [Utility/Counter] button, activate the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been configured, entering the password is required to enter the main body service mode.
Press [Controller].
IC service mode menu screen appears.
5.2.2 Method to exit IC service mode

Exit methods differ according to the condition of the power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

Press [Close] and return to "Service Mode Menu Screen" of the main body.
Press Exit [SERVICE] and return to "Utility screen".
(2) When the power is OFF

Press [Close] and return to "Service Mode Menu Screen" of the main body.
Deactivate the SW2.
3. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
5.3 System Setting

5.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) OUTLINE
Configure the software DIPSW.
Note
• Do not change any switch that is not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
2. "System Setting screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
3. "Software DIPSW setting screen"
Press [▲] or [▼], or numeric buttons after you press the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On] (1) or [Off] (0) to change the selected bit number on and off.
I-376
5. "Software DIPSW setting screen"

Press [Return] to fix the change.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]

[1] DIPSW number [2] Bit number (0 to 7)
[3] Bit data: 1:On, 0:Off [4] Numeric buttons
5.3.2 IC software DIPSW list

Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 1 Process delay time when the main body front • 500ms: 2-2=0, 2-1=0 0 0 0
2 door is open. • 1 second: 2-2=0, 2-1=1 0 0 0
When you open the main body front door and • 5 seconds: 2-2=1, 2-1=0
execute such as jam cleaning, the HDD possibly • No delay: 2-2=1, 2-1=1
gets damaged due to the vibration. Therefore,
delays the band transmission from the Print data
to the engine and limits access to the HDD.
3 0 Change of the scanner compression method • 0: MMR 0 0 0
• 1: MH
4 0 IGMP protocol • 0: Use IGMP protocol 0 0 0
Configure when the IGMP protocol is not used • 1: Do not use IGMP protocol
on the environment of the customer.
1 Keep DoneJobList • 0: Keep for approximately 5 0 0 0
Configure this setting when the done job list for seconds.
MIB is required for MIB tool that the customer • 1: Keep up to 100 jobs.
has.
The done job list for MIB is deleted after 5
seconds when the default setting is not
changed.
When you change the setting data to [1], the
latest job list can be kept for maximum 100 jobs
regardless of the elapsed time.
When the number of jobs is more than 100, the
old jobs are deleted.
Note
· When you change the setting or activate
and deactivate the sub power switch, the
hold jobs are deleted.
6 0 Updating interval of the count information • 10 minutes: 6-1=0, 6-0=0 0 0 0
1 Decide an updating interval of the count • 1min: 6-1=0, 6-0=1 0 0 0
information. Affects the applications that collect • 0min: 6-1=1, 6-0=0
the count information. • 60 minutes: 6-1=1, 6-0=1
7 5 Soft memory switch, Import the controller • 0: Not support 0 0 0
DipSW, Export support • 1: Support
You can backup and restore the soft memory
switch and the controller DipSW setting as a csv
file.
From "I.5.4 CSV File Import/Export", you can
obtain and overwrite csv file.
I-377
5.4 CSV File Import/Export

5.4.1 OUTLINE
To display the language other than the 9 originally provided languages on the operation panel or the Alert E-mail, switch the language using
CSV File Import and Export.
"The 9 originally provided languages" are Japanese, English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Chinese, Taiwan, and Hangul.
5.4.2 Procedure
Perform the import and the export using the USB memory in the same way as the USB memory ISW.
(1) Import
Import the csv file that is stored in the USB memory to SSD.
1. Save the csv file into the USB memory in the following folder structure.
lang
Admin
ic602_AdminSetting_Master_***.csv (For administrator settings)
Ce
ic602_CeSetting_Master_***.csv (For service mode)
Machine
ic602_MachineSetting_Master_***.csv (For machine status settings)
Smb
ic602_SMBBrowsing_Master_***.csv (For SMB browsing)
ic602alert_Master_***.csv (For Alert E-mail)
A5AW_SW Note 2)
dipse.csv (For controller DipSw)
memsw.csv (For software memory switch)
Note) “***“ represents the languages with 3 letters as follows.

jpn㸸Japanese usa㸸English
fra㸸French ita㸸Italian
ger㸸German esp㸸Spanish
chn㸸Chinese tpe㸸Taiwanese
rok㸸Korean oth㸸Other languages*1 *1:Not exist at the initial status.
Note 2) When controller DipSW7-5 is “1“ , import and export are available.
[A5AW] represents the first 4 letters of the controller ROM version.
The contents of cells on [deisw.csv] are settings of SW No. [1-0], [1-1], [1-2]..., starting from the left.
The contents of cells on [memsw.csv] are settings of No.[1], [2], [3]..., starting from the left.
2. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body connection port [2].
[1] [2]
3. Enter the IC service mode.

Press [02 CSV File Import/Export].
5. "CSV File Import/Export screen"
Press [Import].
6. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Import Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
7. After completion of the import, disconnect the USB memory from the main body connection port once the message "Completed" appears.
(2) Export
Export the csv file from SSD to the USB memory.
I-378
[1] [2]

Press [02 CSV File Import/Export].
4. "CSV File Import/Export screen"
Press [Export].
5. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Export Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
6. After completion of the export, disconnect the USB memory from the main body connection port once the message "Completed" appears.
The csv file is saved in the [lang] folder that is created automatically.
The saved file becomes the 9 languages that are registered in the factory or the other languages that are imported beforehand.
(3) How to edit the CSV file

• An oth file is attached
Open the csv file in Excel and edit the appropriate words that are written in the file.
• To create a file when an oth file is not attached
Example) Copy "ic602_AdminSetting_Master_usa.csv" file. Change the file name to "ic602_AdminSetting_Master_oth.csv".
Open the csv file that the name was changed in Excel. Edit the words that are written in the file.
To change the other 9 files that are written in foreign languages, open the file in Excel, and edit the appropriate words.
5.5 Font Backup

5.5.1 Outline
Back up the PS font, form data that is saved in IC to the PC which is connected to the network.
5.5.2 Preparation of backup/restore

Since the FTP protocol of the network is used for backup and restore, confirm that the FTP setting of IC is configured to "Enable".
(1) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3. Press [05 Network Setting].
4. Press [01 NIC Setting ].
5. Press [05 FTP Setting].
6. Confirm that "Service Setting" is configured to "Enable".
5.5.3 Backup method

First, create the backup file in the HDD of IC. Next, download the created backup file to the PC via ftp.
(1) Procedure to create the backup file in HDD

2. IC "Service mode menu"
Press [03 Font Backup].
3. "Font Backup screen"
Press [Backup].
4. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start the backup.
5. When the backup file (file name: fontbackup) is created in the HDD of IC, the message is changed from "Backup is being executed" to
"Complete".
Note
• Do not switch off the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body until the backup is
completed.
(2) Backup procedure to PC by FTP

Example: Download the backup file to the folder "TEMP" of PC.
1. Display the command input screen with the PC that can connect to FTP.
2. Specify the directory [1] to download to.
I-379
3. Input the IP address of IC [2].

4. Input the user name "fontbackup" [3].
Note
• The user name "fontbackup" is fixed.
5. Input the password "sysadm" [4].

Note
• The password "sysadm" is fixed.
6. Input "get fontbackup" [5] to start downloading the backup file.

When the downloading completes, "Transfer complete" [6] appears.
7. Input "bye" [7] to disconnect from FTP.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1] Directory to save [2] IP address of IC

[3] User name [4] Password
[5] Downloading start [6] Downloading complete
[7] Disconnect from FTP -
5.5.4 Method to restore

Restore the backup file of the PS font, form data that is downloaded in PC into IC.
(1) Procedure
Example: Restore the backup file from PC to IC. The file is saved in the "TEMP" folder under the route directory of C drive.
2. IC "Service mode menu screen"
Press [03 Font Backup].
3. "Font Backup screen"
Press [Restore].
4. "Pop-up screen"
A configuration screen "Execute restore?" is displayed. Select [YES].
A message "Font restoration data wait" appears.
5. Display the command input screen with the PC in which the backup file is saved.
6. Input "cd c:\temp" [1] to specify the directory in which the backup file is saved.
7. Input the address [3] with the restore command option "-s" of the "lpr" command [2], and the printer name "printer" [4] and the restore file
name [5] with printer name specify command option "-p".
The message on the operation panel is changed from "Font restoration data wait" to "Font restoration is being executed".
8. When the restoring completes normally, "Completed normally" appears.
Note
• Do not deactivate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body until the restoring is
completed.
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
I-380
5.6 HP Tray Mapping

5.6.1 Outline
When you print the PCL jobs that the driver of the HP (PCL) sent, the tray mapping information in the PCL job and the tray mapping information
in the main body possibly does not match. Print and edit the tray information of the main body and eliminate the problems.
5.6.2 Procedure
Perform the import and the export using the USB memory in the same way as the USB memory ISW.
Note
• Use the USB memory that is as follows.
• The USB memory with a form (thin) that can be connected to the service port (Serial Type A), or the USB memory that is
provided with an extension cable when a direct connection is not available due to its form.
• The USB memory that has been formatted in the FAT or the FAT 32 form.
• The USB memory without U3 Platform or any security functions
(1) Import
Import the "env.ini" file that is stored on the USB flash drive to the HDD.
1. Save the "env.ini" file directly under the USB flash drive.
[1] [2]

4. "IC Service Mode menu screen"
Press [04 HP Tray Mapping].
5. "HP Tray Mapping screen"
Press [Import].
6. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Import Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
7. After completion of the import, disconnect the USB memory from the main body connection port once the message "Completed" appears.
If the import fails, check and correct the error, and repeat steps 1 to 7.
(2) Export
Export the "env.ini" file from the HDD to the USB memory.
[1] [2]

3. "IC Service Mode menu screen"
Press [04 HP Tray Mapping].
4. "HP Tray Mapping screen"
Press [Export].
5. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Export Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
6. After completion of the export, disconnect the USB memory from the main body connection port once the message "Completed" appears.
I-381
Check that the "env.ini" file is stored in the USB flash drive.
(3) How to edit the "env.ini" file

You can open "env.ini" file with the word pad. The single file contains the settings for both PCL5e, 5c (upper line) and PCLXL (lower line).
(a) Format
Input values according to the following format. Each value is called PCLID.
• HPTRAY5E=Auto select, bypass, tray1, tray2, ... tray9
• HPTRAYXL=Auto select, bypass, tray1, tray2, ... tray9
HPTRAY5E is for PCL5e, 5c. HPTRAYXL is for PCLXL.
All the settings are configured to "-1" on the default setting.
• HPTRAY5E=-1,-1,-1,-1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1
• HPTRAYXL=-1,-1,-1,-1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1
Even when the machine does not have 9 trays, input values to 9 trays.
The value "-1", the default setting, actually contains the values on the following identification number chart.
Identification number ID for PCL5e, 5c ID for PCLXL
chart TrayMap1 (HP default) TrayMap2 (KM default) TrayMap1 (HP default) TrayMap2 (KM default)
Auto select 7 - 1 -
Bypass 2 - 2 -
Tray 1 4 251 3 251
Tray 2 1 252 4 252
Tray 3 5 253 5 253
Tray4 8 254 6 254
Tray 5 - 255 - 255
Tray 6 - 240 - 240
Tray 7 - 241 - 241
Tray 8 - 242 - 242
Tray 9 - 243 - 243
The identification number is saved on the default setting. Check the identification number chart and change it as necessary.
Note
• HP already assigns the numbers on the tray 1 to tray 4 of TrayMap1. The unique values for KM are assigned as TrayMap2.
(b) Setting Range

• HPTRAY5E
: Auto select = 1 to 255, -1
: Bypass, tray 1 to 9 = 1 to 6, 8 to 255, -1
• HPTRAYXL
: Auto select = 1 to 255, -1
: Bypass, tray 1 to 9 = 2 to 255, -1
Input "-1" on the "env.ini" file for trays that you do not change the settings.
Note
• On the following cases, the error occurs and all the settings change to the initial settings.
On the default setting, all values in the "env.in" file are "-1".
(However, nothing is displayed to indicate the error such as an error message)
• When values are not entered to all of "Auto select" to "Tray 9".
• When something other than values are entered to the PCLID. (such as letters or symbols)
• When the value is not within the adjustment range of the PCLID. (such as "-10", "260")
• When the numbers of the PCLID are duplicated.
• When the auto selected PCLID (PCL5e, 5c=7, PCLXL=1) is configured to the other paper feed tray.
• When there are multiple lines of the setting for one PDL and an error occurs for the last line.
Example:
HPTRAY5E=11,22,33,44,55,66,77,88,99,111,122
HPTRAY5E=11,12 (An error occurs because the value is not entered for every tray.)
*When the setting of the last line is correct, it has the higher priority.
• Lines whose beginnings are not "HPTRAY5E" or "HPTRAYXL" are ignored. (No error occurs. )
For example: When you want to feed the PCL5e file from the tray 5.
1. Acquire the PCL job that is sent to the controller and open it with "WordPad".
2. Check the number between [&I] and [H] on the first line. (The number is [9] on this example)
The number is "9", but you can see that the tray 5 of the PCL5e is "255" on the identification number chart.
I-382
Note: The number between [&I] and [H] is the identification number and indicates the paper feed tray on the PCL file.
3. Export the "env.ini" file. Refer to the procedureI.5.6.2.(2) Export.
4. Open the "env.ini" file with "WordPad".
5. Change the number of the tray5 (seventh number from the left) from "-1" to "9" on the "env.ini" file.
Note
• When you change the number to "9", "255" is not the identification number of tray 5, so be careful.
However, when you change the number to "-1" or "255" again, "255" is the identification number of tray 5.
6. Save the "env.ini" file.

7. Import the "env.ini" file. Refer to the procedure I.5.6.2.(1) Import.
5.7 Controller Capture Setting

(1) OUTLINE
When an abnormal condition of the controller occurs, acquire the controller capture to expect the location where an error has occurred. The
USB memory is used for this acquisition. Use the USB flash drive when a defective condition can be reproduced easily. If no defective
condition recurs, acquisition of the controller log is available as an another way to recur the defective condition.For details, refer to I.4.15 Log
Store. For details, refer to "I.4.15 Log Store".
(2) Procedure for acquisition

Press [05 Controller Capture Setting].
2. [Controller Capture Setting screen]
Press [Enable] in [Capture Setting] to change the settings of the needed capture type to [Enable].
The numbers that can be obtained is 1 to 65535 each (Default: 30).
*MIO: Data that is received from the network
*PDL: Data that is analyzed with PJLParser
*TIFF: TIFF image data that is output by interpreter
*JDF: XML file which the print setting is written
3. Connect the USB flash drive to the main body connection port.
4. Press [OK].
Note
• Use the following USB memory with empty space.
• The USB flash drive with a form (thin) that can be connected to the service port (Serial Type A). Otherwise, the USB
memory that is provided with an extension cable when a direct connection is not available due to its form.
• The USB flash drive that has been formatted in the FAT or the FAT 32 form.
• The capacity is 2 GByte or more (The larger the capacity of the USB flash drive, the greater the number of the data that
can be obtained).
• The USB memory without U3 Platform or any security functions
• When you press [OK] before you connect the USB flash drive, it appears to be "Connection of a USB memory has not
been recognized" on the operation panel
5. Continue the printing until there occurs any events that you want to obtain.
6. Wait until the [DATA] lamp on the main body operation panel becomes inactive.
7. Change the settings of [Capture Setting] to [Disable] on "Controller Capture Setting screen".
I-383
8. Press [OK].
9. Disconnect the USB memory from the main body connection port and collect the USB memory.
Files that are obtained
• MIO_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_xxx.txt (MIO)
• NET_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_xxx.txt (PDL)
• TIFF_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_Jxxxx.tif (TIFF)
• JDF_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.jdf (JDF)
10. Compress the files which are copied to the PC, and send to KMI.
I-384
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 SETTING
6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING

6.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting list
Adjustment and setting item
CE/Administrator Security Setting 01 CE Authentication
02 CE Auth. Password
03 Admin. Authentication
04 Machine Manager Password
Important
• When the IC controller is initializing: The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting]
in the Utility is not available until the initialize is completed.
• The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. The Authentication are changed to [ON].
6.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
The CE/Administrator Security Setting can be configured on the "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" in the CE/Administrator
security mode.
(2) Procedure
Before you select any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the following order.
Stop → 0 → C
2. "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen"
The CE/Administrator security mode starts up and the CE/Administrator Security Setting becomes available.
Select the item that you want to configure to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
Important
• The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are configured to [ON].
6.3 CE Authentication
(1) Usage
To strengthen the security of the service mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter the service mode.
Note
To configure the security enhance the mode ON, this setting has to be "ON".
(2) Procedure
Press [01 CE Authentication].
2. "CE Authentication ON/OFF screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" appears.
4. Press [Cancel] to cancel the updating.
6.4 CE Auth. Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the service mode.
Note
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
• CE must not inform other people of the password.
• The selection of the [CE Authentication Password] key is limited to only when the CE authentication setting is configured to
[ON].
• If the wrong CE password is entered, re-entering cannot be accepted for about 5 seconds.
• The current password is not available as a new password.
• All characters being entered are displayed as "*" on the screen.
• If 8 characters or more are entered as a CE password or the administrator password, the last character is recognized as an 8th
character.
(2) Procedure
1. "The CE/Administrator Security Setting can be configured on the "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" in the CE/Administrator
security mode."
Press [02 CE Authentication Password].
2. "CE Authentication Password screen"
Press [Current Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the current password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then
press [OK].
Default is "92729272."
When you enter the wrong password, the message "Password is incorrect" appears.
I-385
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 SETTING
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and
then press [OK].
5. "CE Authentication Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" appears.
6.5 Admin. Authentication

(1) Usage
To strengthen the security of the machine manager setting of the setting menu mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to
enter the machine manager setting.
Note
To configure the security enhance the mode ON, this setting has to be "ON".
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Admin. Authentication].
2. "Admin. Authentication ON/OFF Setting screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" appears.
6.6 Administrator Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
The administrator password can also be configured in the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
Note
• When you configured or changed the administrator password, CE must ask the administrator of the customer to change the
administrator password promptly.
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
• The selection of the [Administrator Password] key is limited only when the Admin. Authentication setting is configured to [ON].
• The current password is not available as a new password.
• All characters being entered are displayed as "*" on the screen.
• If 8 characters or more are entered as a CE password or the administrator password, the last character is recognized as an 8th
character.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Administrator Password].
2. "Administrator Password screen"
3. By pressing [New Password], a keyboard screen appears. Then, enter a new password (8 characters) and press [OK]. Press [OK].
• For the administrator password, one-byte alphanumeric 8 characters (Case sensitive in the alphabet), and the following symbols (33
characters) are usable.
-^\@[]:;,./ \!"#$%&'()=~|`{+*}<>?_
Default is “00000000”.
4. Press [Input Confirmation], and a keyboard screen appears. Then, enter a new password (8 characters) again and press [OK].
5. "Administrator Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" appears.
I-386
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING
7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING

7.1 Fee Collection Setting list
Adjustment Item, Setting Item
Fee Collection Setting 01 Management Function
02 Manage OpenAPI Auth.
03 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting*
* Change DIPSW33-7 to 1 to display the setting.
7.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
Configure the various settings concerning the fee collection setting from the "Fee Collection Setting" screen.
(2) Procedure
Before you select any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the following order.
Stop → 9
2. "Fee Collection Setting screen"
Fee collection setting mode is activated. Configure the various settings concerning fee collection setting.
3. "Fee Collection Setting menu screen"
Select the item that you want to configure to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
7.3 Management Function

(1) Usage
Configure the various settings concerning management equipment of the main body.
(2) Procedure
Press [01 Management Function].
2. "Fee Collection < Management Setting > screen"
Select the options for each item of the management setting.
3. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" appears.
7.4 Manage OpenAPI Auth.

7.4.1 Restriction Code
(1) Function
• Register [Index], [Vendor] and [Application] to the restriction code.
• Maximum 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters can be registered.
• Maximum 10 codes can be registered.
(2) Usage
• This setting is a communication setting with an application which developed by other companies. Do not change this setting without using.
7.5 Billing Coefficient Setting

(1) Usage
Configure the count coefficient for each coverage and size of the billing counter.
The counting method differs depending on the customer. In order to cope with this situation, change the coefficient.
Note
When the coefficient is changed, the count value of the billing coefficient differs from the actual number of printed sheets.
(2) Function
Configure the calculation of the billing counter that appears on Web Utilities and the coefficient to display the counter.
Note
Configure DIPSW33-7=1 to display this screen.
When the coefficient setting value is changed, the total value of the Web Utilities and the billing total counter value differ because of
the following approach.
For the display on the Web Utilities, since the main body sends each counter and the calculates on Web Utilities, new coefficient is
used for the counter before you change the coefficient to calculate.
The display on the main body panel is calculated and accumulated for each output page. For this reason, when the coefficient is
changed, the changed coefficient is used only for the output after the change. (The counter before changing the coefficient is not
changed.)
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting].
I-387
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING
2. "Billing Counter Coefficient Setting screen"

Press the number of the printing coefficient or the size coefficient to select.
Coefficient
Color Mode YMCK Coverage Rate YMCK Coverage Rate Coefficient (Default)
90.0 (%) or more ---- 1.00
60.0 to 89.9 (%) ---- 1.00
Full color 40.0 to 59.9 (%) ---- 1.00
Single color 20.0 to 39.9 (%) ---- 1.00
0 to 19.9 (%) 8.0 (%) or more 1.00
0 to 7.9 (%) or more 1.00
17.5 (%) or more ---- 1.00
10.0 to 17.4 (%) ---- 1.00
Black
5.0 to 9.9 (%) ---- 1.00
0 to 4.9 (%) 1.00
Size Coefficient
Paper Size Size Coefficient (Default)
Banner 3.00
Large size 2.00
Small size 1.00
3. Enter a value with the numeric buttons.

• Setting Range
: 0.01 to 4.00
4. To configure other coefficient, repeat steps 2 to 3.
5. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" appears.
I-388
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD

8.1 Process adjustment
8.1.1 Outline
This adjustment shows the directions of each adjustment of [Process Adjustment] in the [Paper Setting] which are displayed when the
DIPSW1-0 "Process adjustment user screen display" is configured to "1." When you adjust each item, check the followings: the problem, the
type of paper and the environment where it happens frequently, and the paper weight. Then make a proper adjustment.
Separate setting can be configured for each tray by setting offset to the adjustment value configured in this setting. However be careful not to
make an excessive adjustment. Otherwise image trouble possibly occur.
8.1.2 Preset
(1) Function
(a) Outline
• The following settings are included in the Preset.
• Default
• Glossiness / Fusing Setting
• Lower
• Higher
• Unsmooth Paper Density Setting
• Evenness +1
• Evenness +2
• Evenness +3
• Evenness +4
• The Preset changes the following process adjustment at once. It changes to the appropriate setting value according to the aim and use.
• I.8.1.14 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Print)
• I.8.1.16 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Print)
• I.8.1.22 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (YMC)
• I.8.1.23 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (K)
• Because the settings can be selected according to the aim and use, user can select the setting value easily.
(b) Details of the set value

Process Default Glossiness / Fusing Setting Unsmooth Paper Density Setting
Adjustment Lower Higher Evenness +1 Evenness +2 Evenness +3 Evenness +4
Fus. T-Belt 0 -7 +10 -7 0 0 0
Cent. Temp.
(Printing)
Fus.T-Belt 0 -7 +10 -7 0 0 0
Edge Temp.
(Printing)
Density 0 (Normal) 0 (Normal) 0 (Normal) 0 (Normal) +1 +2 +3
adjustment per
tray (YMC)
Density 0 (Normal) 0 (Normal) 0 (Normal) 0 (Normal) +1 +2 +3
adjustment per
tray (K)
Note
• The process adjustment other than the above adjustment is not changed in the Preset.
(2) Usage
(a) Default
• Use this setting when you want to configure to the default value again.
(b) Lower (Glossiness / Fusing Setting)

• Use this setting to reduce toner glossiness for mat paper.
(c) Higher (Glossiness / Fusing Setting)

• Use this setting when toner glossiness is not enough against the paper.
• Use this setting when toner fixing ability is not enough.
(d) Evenness +1, Evenness +2, Evenness +3, Evenness +4 (Unsmooth Paper Density Setting)
• Use this setting to raise image density evenness.
Note
• When you use this preset table, conduct calibration after configuration. (Refer to R.2.7 Color Density Control (Manual
Adjustment), R.2.8 IC-602 Calibration, R.2.11 IC-308/IC-310 Calibration)
(3) Procedure
1. "Paper Setting screen"
Press [Preset].
I-389
2. "Preset screen"
Press the preset button that you want to use, and press [OK].
3. Press [Yes]. Press [No] when you want to cancel the operation.
8.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)

(1) Measure taken according to cause
1. Poor transfer
The poor transfer stands for a color unevenness phenomenon on the color overlay portion in image, due to the insufficient transfer electric
field.
1. Paper on which it tends to occur
• Plain paper (rough surface)
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
3. Environment in which it tends to occur
• Unidentified
• After continuous low coverage printing
4. Adjustment method
1. Adjust to the negative side
2. Adjust negatively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
5. Precaution that is related to other adjustments
• When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area possibly occurs.
8.1.4 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back)

1. Poor transfer
field.
• Plain
• Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
I-390
• Low humidity environment

• After continuous low coverage printing
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area possibly occurs.
2. Noise of white spot
• Plain
• Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
1. Adjust to the positive side
2. Adjust positively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• When too much steps are moved, the poor transfer possibly occurs. In this case, adjust it by 5 steps.
8.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
field.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To adjust entirely, conduct I.8.1.3
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front).
8.1.6 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
field.
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To adjust entirely, conduct I.8.1.4
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back).
8.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)

1. Paper trailing edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
field.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
I-391
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
2. Paper trailing edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 257 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
8.1.8 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back)

1. Paper trailing edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
field.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
2. Paper trailing edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 257 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
8.1.9 Separation AC(Front)

1. The paper wraps around the intermediate transfer belt
• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
• 64 g/m2 to 74 g/m2
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
I-392
• Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after the Separation DC adjustment is conducted.
• When you move the step amount too much, blurred or discharging noise possibly occurs.
8.1.10 Separation AC(Back)

• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 61 g/m2
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after the de-curler adjustment is conducted. Conduct this adjustment
when the problem still occurs even after the de-curler adjustment and Separation DC adjustment is conducted.
• When you move the step amount too much, blurred or discharging noise possibly occurs.
8.1.11 Separation DC(Front)

• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 61 g/m2
• Unidentified
2. Adjust negatively by 10 steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: -30 to + 30
• None
2. Transfer charge leak trails, blurred
Blurred is a problem which the toner scatters around the text area or line cross point to blurred the image.
• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 74 g/m2
Setting Range
: -30 to + 30
• None
8.1.12 Separation DC(Back)

• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 61 g/m2
• Unidentified
2. Adjust negatively by 10 steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: -30 to + 30
• None
2. Transfer charge leak trails, blurred
Blurred is a problem which the toner scatters around the text area or line cross point to blurred the image.
I-393
• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 74 g/m2
Setting Range
: -30 to + 30
• None
8.1.13 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Idle)

1. Rough gloss
A rough gloss is a problem which the entire image looks white depending on the brightness condition.
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
• High temperature and high humidity environment
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.15 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Idle) is also recommended to change at the same time.
2. Insufficient fusing
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Low temperature environment
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.15 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Idle) is also recommended to change at the same time.
8.1.14 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.16 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Print) is also recommended to change at the same time.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
I-394

• I.8.1.16 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Print) is also recommended to change at the same time.
8.1.15 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Idle)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.13 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Idle) is also recommended to change at the same time.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
2. Change to +10 step.
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.13 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Idle) is also recommended to change at the same time.
8.1.16 Fus. T-Belt Edge Temp. (Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.14 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Print) is also recommended to change at the same time.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
2. Adjust to +10 step.
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• I.8.1.14 Fus. T-Belt Center Temp. (Print) is also recommended to change at the same time.
8.1.17 L-Fus. Press Roller Center (Idle)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
I-395
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2

2. Adjust negatively by 5 steps until you obtain the proper condition.
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• None
2. Curl
1. Paper type on which it tends to occur
• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
• The high temperature and the high humidity environment
1. Adjust to the negative side.
Setting range
: - 20 to + 20
• None
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• None
8.1.18 L-Fus. Press Roller Center (Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• None
2. Curl
• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
1. Adjust to the negative side.
Setting range
: - 20 to + 20
• None
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
I-396
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: -20 to + 20
• None
8.1.19 Lead Edge Erase Quantity

1. Fusing separation error
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81 g/m2 to 135 g/m2
• The low temperature and the low humidity environment
1. Adjust to the positive side until the proper condition can be obtained. (1 step = 0.1 mm)
Setting Range
: 0 to + 200
• This adjustment deletes some leading edge of the image data to adjust the margin. Therefore, gain agreement with the user when
you adjust.
2. Image misalignment, repel of the paper leading edge
• Hard paper
2. Paper weight
• 300 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Setting range: 0 to +200
• This adjustment deletes some leading edge of the image data to adjust the margin. Therefore, gain agreement with the user when
you adjust.
8.1.20 Rear Edge Erase Quantity

1. Image misalignment, repel of the paper trailing edge
• Hard paper
2. Paper weight
• 300 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Setting Range
: 0 to + 200
• This adjustment deletes some trailing edge of the image data to adjust the margin. Therefore, gain agreement with the user when
you adjust.
8.1.21 Toner Amount Save

• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
1. Change from [OFF] (default) to [ON].
• The descriptiveness on the shadow is likely to decrease.
• The saturation of the dark and the high saturation color is likely to decrease.
I-397
8.1.22 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (YMC)

1. The image density loss on embossed paper
• Embossed
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
1. Change the setting from [0 (standard)] (default) to [+1], [+2], [+3 (maximum)] by 1 step. Adjust the setting to the step that improves
the condition.
• When you feed paper other than embossed after you change the setting, fusing separation error possibly occurs.
• Conduct this adjustment when the high density section of the color is pale. Conduct the density adjustment per tray (K) when the
high density section of the black is pale. Both adjustments can be used simultaneously.
8.1.23 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (K)

1. The image density loss on embossed paper
• Embossed
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
1. Change the setting from [0 (standard)] (default) to [+1], [+2], [+3 (maximum)] by 1 step. Adjust the setting to the step that improves
the condition.
• When you feed paper other than embossed after you change the setting, fusing separation error possibly occurs.
• Conduct this adjustment when the high density section of the black is pale. Conduct the density adjustment per tray (YMC) when
the high density section of the color is pale. Both adjustments can be used simultaneously.
8.1.24 Shorten Tray Change Time (Mixed Weight Job)

(1) Measure that is taken according to cause
1. The productivity reduction when printing the mixed job of thick paper and thin paper
• Mixed job of thick paper and thin paper
2. Paper weight
• Mixed job of thick paper and thin paper
• Unidentified
1. Change the setting of thick paper from [Standard] (Default) to [Short], [Shorter].
• For other than the mixed job of thick paper and thin paper, when [Short] or [Shorter] is selected, the productivity decreases.
8.1.25 Double Feed Detection

(1) Function
Select the operation of the main body when the machine detects the multi feed.
• [Detect] (Default): Stops the machine as a jam.
• [Not Detect]: Do not stop the machine as a jam.
(2) Usage
When you want to stop the machine as a jam, select [Detect].
When you do not want to stop the machine as a jam, select [Not Detect].
8.1.26 Mis-centering detect JAM

(1) Function
Select whether the machine stops as the jam when the machine detects the mis-centering for 4 mm or more.
(2) Usage
When you want the machine to be stopped as the jam, change the setting from [Not Detect] (Default) to [Detect].
Note
• Check that the [Utility] - [Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] - [Expert Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Print job JAM
Setting] - [Mis-centering JAM Setting] is [Detect].
Only when both [Mis-centering JAM Setting] and [Mis-centering detect JAM] is [Detect], machine stops as a jam.
I-398
8.1.27 Int. Transfer Separation

(1) Function
Switch the pressure release control of the separation claw.
• [Auto] (Default): The machine presses the separating claw for 55 g/m2 to 61 g/m2. The machine does not press the separating claw for 62
g/m2 or more.
• [ON]: The machine presses the separating claw regardless of the weight of the paper.
• [OFF]: The machine does not press the separating claw regardless of the weight of the paper.

1. A line occurs to the screen because of the damage of the intermediate transfer belt
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
1. Select [OFF].
• When you select [OFF] and print the light weighted paper, the paper possibly wraps around the intermediate transfer belt.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
1. Select [ON].
• When you select [ON], the intermediate transfer belt possibly gets damaged with the separating claw. When the belt is damaged,
a line possibly occurs on the screen.
8.1.28 Thick BK Mode

(1) Function
Switch the pressure release control of the 1st transfer roller during the monochrome mode.
• [ON]: During the monochrome mode, press the 1st transfer roller of all colors (YMCK).
• [OFF] (Default): During the monochrome mode, press the 1st transfer roller of color K.

1. Repel of the paper leading edge and the paper trailing edge, shock noise on a thick paper monochrome image
• Hard paper
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
1. Select [ON].
• When you select [ON], the life of such as the drum unit of each YMC color shortens even on monochrome mode.
8.1.29 Feed Correction

(1) Function
Switch the reverse control of the registration roller.
• [ON] (Default): During registration, the registration roller rotates backward.
• [OFF]: During registration, the registration roller stops.

1. Paper leading edge is curled
• Thick paper (hard paper)
2. Paper weight
• 200 g/m2 or more
• Unidentified
• Select [OFF].
• When you select [OFF], the performance of the skew correction possibly becomes low.
I-399
8.1.30 PFU Paper Float Timing

(1) Function
Change the paper float timing by the paper feed assist fan of the PF-707 or the PF-708, and the paper leading edge separation fan.
• [Normal]: Default timing
• [Delay]: To shorten the paper float time, delays the blowing timing when the paper feed assist fan and the paper leading edge separation
fan are floating paper.

1. Multi feed
The blowing timing of the paper feed assist fan and the paper leading edge separation fan is too fast. Therefore, the paper float time
(contact time of the floated paper) becomes longer, and multi feed occurs.
• Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper
2. Paper weight
• Thin paper
• High humidity environment
1. Change the setting to [Delay].
• The paper float has the effect that separates paper beforehand. If you change to [Delay], the ability to separate paper beforehand
is reduced. So, multi feed can be worsened when you use coated paper in the high temperature and the high humidity
environment.
8.1.31 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting

• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 135 g/m2
1. Change from current setting to the direction of [Strong].
• When you make an excessive adjustment, the fusing claw trail possibly occurs.
2. Fusing claw trail
• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 55 g/m2 to 135 g/m2
1. Change from current setting to the direction of [Weak].
• When you make an excessive adjustment, the fusing separation error possibly occurs.
8.1.32 PFU Suction Air Level Setting

(1) Function
Change the suction power of the paper suction fan on the PF-707 or the PF-708.
• [Weak]: Weaken the suction power of the paper suction fan.
• [Auto]: Return to the default suction power.
• [Strong]: Strengthen the suction power of the paper suction fan.

1. Gloss line
The gloss line in FD direction occurs at ±61 mm from the center of paper. The edge of the outer paper feed belt scratches the face of
coated paper.
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• Thick paper
• Unidentified
1. Change the suction power value to [Weak] until the proper condition can be obtained.
I-400

• If you weaken the suction power of the paper suction fan too much, the paper suction to the paper feed belt becomes insufficient.
The paper feed jam possibly occurs.
• When paper feed jam occurs after you change the suction power value to [Weak], lift up the upper limit sensor position adjustment
lever. Fix the front and rear (paper feed assist fan) air openings. (Refer to PB.2.3.3 Air control)
8.1.33 Output Paper Separation Setting

(1) Function
Changes the application setting of the direct current of RU-516.
• ON (Coated): The direct current is applied when coated paper is printed in the duplex mode. (default)
• ON (Uncoated): The direct current is applied when other than coated paper is printed in the duplex mode.
• OFF: The direct current is never applied.
• Manual: The direct current is applied regardless of the paper type or the paper feed mode.
• Offset value: Adjusts the applied current when the setting is [ON (Coated)], [ON (Uncoated)], or [Manual].

1. Electrostatic paper sticking
A phenomenon in which output papers are stuck together due to static electricity.
• Coated (paper with high surface smoothness)
2. Paper weight on which it tends to occur
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
• When the electrostatic paper sticking occurs in papers other than coated paper
: Configure to [ON (Uncoated)].
• When the electrostatic paper sticking still occurs when the [ON (Coated)] or [ON (Uncoated)] is selected
1. Select +15 step and -15 step in [Offset Value]. Then check the polarity (plus and minus) that the electrostatic paper sticking
improves.
2. Configure in every 10 steps in the polarity that the electrostatic paper sticking improves. Adjust to an appropriate value which
the phenomenon improves.
Setting Range
:-50 to +100
• When the electrostatic paper sticking becomes worse when the direct current is applied in RU-516
: Select [OFF].
• When the electrostatic paper sticking occurs when manual duplex print is performed. (Print the front side in simplex mode. Then
place the paper whose front side was printed on the paper feed tray again. Then print the back side in simplex mode.) (Manual
duplex print is not guaranteed.)
1. Configure to [Manual] when the back side is printed (the second time of the paper feed).
2. Select +15 step and -15 step in [Offset Value]. Then check the polarity (plus and minus) that the electrostatic paper sticking
improves.
3. Configure in every 10 steps in the polarity that the electrostatic paper sticking improves. Adjust to an appropriate value which
the phenomenon improves.
Setting Range
:-50 to +100
• Do not change the [Offset Value] to Max or Min suddenly. When you increase or decrease the step value too much, the electric
current deviates from the appropriate value. In that case, the electrostatic paper sticking possibly becomes worse.
• Manual duplex print is not guaranteed.
• When manual duplex print is performed, be sure to use [Manual] only when the back side is printed (the second time of the paper
feed). When [Manual] is used for the front side (the first time of the paper feed), the electrostatic paper sticking possibly becomes
worse.
8.2 Image quality/improving paper feeding adjustment

8.2.1 Transfer jitter adjustment
Describes how to adjust the transfer jitter.
(1) Occurrence position

Example: When A3 paper is fed continuously
I-401
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1] Approximately 37 mm from the leading edge of the paper [2] 106 mm to 114 mm from the leading edge of the paper
[3] Approximately 135 mm from the leading edge of the [4] Approximately 167 mm from the leading edge of the
paper paper
[5] 242 mm to 250 mm from the leading edge of the paper [6] Approximately 266 mm from the leading edge
Note
• Transfer jitter mainly occurs on paper which is 300 g/m2 or more.
• The thickness or the strength of the paper affects the jitter. Therefore, transfer jitter possibly occurs on paper which is 300 g/m2
or less.
• For [1] and [4], the occurrence position of the transfer jitter changes according to the paper size.
(2) Cause
Occurrence position of the transfer jitter Cause
[1] Approximately 37 mm 1st transfer jitter
(Occurs by the shock when the trailing edge of the preceding paper passes the 2nd
transfer section.)
[2] 106 mm to 114 mm 2nd transfer jitter
(Occurs by the shock when the leading edge of the paper touches the fusing entrance
guide.)
[3] Approximately 135 mm 1st transfer jitter
(Occurs by the shock when the leading edge of the paper enters the 2nd transfer section.)
[4] Approximately 167 mm Exposure gap
(Occurs by the shock when the trailing edge of the preceding paper passes the 2nd
transfer section.)
[5] 242 mm to 250 mm 1st transfer jitter
(Occurs by the shock when the leading edge of the paper touches the fusing entrance
guide.)
[6] Approximately 266 mm Exposure gap
(Occurs by the shock when the leading edge of the paper enters the 2nd transfer section.)
(3) Countermeasures
1. Change the screen, and adjust the value until the proper condition can be obtained.
1. Press "UTILITY"-"03 Administrator Setting"-"01 System Setting"-"05 Expert Adjustment"-"07 Quality Adjustment"-"05 Custom Screen".
2. "Custom Screen" screen
For Screen1 or Screen2, select either [Dot130], [Dot150], or [Dot175].
• Coping ability: Dot130 > Dot150 > Dot175 > Dot190 (Default)
• Image quality: Dot130 < Dot150 < Dot175 < Dot190 (Default)
Note
• It is the trade-off between the coping ability and the quality.
2. When the preceding adjustment is insufficient
1. Press "Paper Setting" on "MACHINE screen". Press "Change Set" - "Process Adj." for the tray that the transfer jitter occurs.
2. "Process Adjustment screen"
Select "ON" for "Thick BK Mode".
• When you press "ON" of "Thick BK Mode", the YMC 1st transfer rollers are pressed and the vibration to the drums is reduced,
even during the K monochrome print.
Note
• When you press "ON" of "Thick BK Mode", the life of the YMC process related parts (charging coronas, drums,
developing unit, developer, and 1st transfer rollers) are consumed, even during the K monochrome print.
• When you press "ON" of "Thick BK Mode", toner spillage can be caused. Be sure to press "OFF" frequently.
3. If the performance is not still improved when the preceding adjustment is conducted, ask the user to change the paper.
I-402
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PRESS C1100/C1...
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085

9.1 Registration unit tilt adjustment
9.1.1 Usage
When the skew (tilt) in the sub scan direction occurs, conduct this adjustment.
Adjust the installation position of the registration unit according to the skew condition.
9.1.2 Procedure
1. Print the test pattern number 16, and check the skew in the sub
A scanning direction.
Standard value A = 10.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.
[1]
[1]
I-403
4. Rotate the adjustment screw [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2] or
the arrow-marked direction [3] according to the skew condition.
Note
• When the skew condition is B, rotate the adjustment screw
• When the skew condition is C, rotate the adjustment screw
• When you rotate the adjustment screw, both skews in the
sub scan direction and the main scan direction are
adjusted.
B • When you rotate the adjustment screw for 1 mark, the skew
in the sub scan direction shifts for 0.25 mm. The skew in
the main scan direction shifts for 0.2 mm.
• To adjust the adjustment screw within ± 3 marks is
recommended.
C
[2] [3]
[1]
5. Fasten 6 screws [1], and insert the duplex section to the main body.
6. Print the test pattern number 16, and check the skew in the sub
scan direction.
When the skew amount is not within the standard value, repeat
steps 2 to 6 until the skew amount is within the standard value.
[1]
[1]
I-404
9.2 Intermediate transfer belt position adjustment

9.2.1 Usage
Adjust the position of the intermediate transfer belt when the intermediate transfer belt cannot be controlled because of too much distortion to
the front or to the rear.
The adjustment differs depending on which side the intermediate transfer belt is tilted.
Note
• Conduct this adjustment when malfunction code C-2235 occurs and the machine stops.
9.2.2 Procedure
2. Check the distance [4] and [5] from the edges of the intermediate
transfer belt [1] to the steps [2] and [3] of the belt and judge which
side the fusing belt/Lw is tilted.
Note
• The tilt direction of the intermediate transfer belt is the one
whose distance to the frames is shorter.
[2] [1] [3]
[4] [5]
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the belt rotation jig [2].
[2] [1]
4. Insert the belt rotation jig [1] to the power supply cover [2].
[1] [2]
I-405
5. When the intermediate transfer belt tilts to the front side, rotate the
[1] [2] cam [2] to the position shown on the left figure.
Note
• The rotation direction of the cam [2] has no regulation.
6. When the intermediate transfer belt tilts [1] to the rear side, rotate
[1] [2] the cam [2] to the position shown on the left figure.
Note
• The rotation direction of the cam [2] has no regulation.
7. Rotate the belt rotation jig [2] counterclockwise until the

intermediate transfer belt [1] comes to the center area.
[1] [2]
9.3 2nd transfer belt position adjustment

9.3.1 Usage
Perform this adjustment when the 2nd transfer belt steering cannot be controlled because of too much distortion to the front or to the rear.
The adjustment differs depending on which side the 2nd transfer belt is tilted.
Note
• Conduct this adjustment when malfunction code C-2225 occurs and the machine stops.
I-406
9.3.2 Procedure
3. Check the distance [4], [5] from the edges of the 2nd transfer belt
[1] to the front and rear frames of the 2nd transfer unit [2], [3].
Judge which side the 2nd transfer belt is tilted.
Note
• The tilt direction of the 2nd transfer belt is the one whose
[2] [4] [1] [5] [3] distance to the frames is shorter.
[1] 4. Change the position of the control arm [1] according to the tilt
direction of the 2nd transfer belt.
• When the tilt direction is front: Lift the control arm [2].
• When the tilt direction is rear: Lower the control arm [3].
5. Turn the gear [4] until the 2nd transfer belt moves to the center.
Note
[2] • Do not turn the gear [4] to the direction other than arrow-
marked [5].
[3]
[5]
[4]
9.4 Height adjustment

Note
• In order to perform the height adjustment, a level which is able to measure 1/100 skew is needed.
• When you move the main body, lift the adjuster foot at the maximum.
• When the floor is under the following condition, you cannot move the main body. If you move it, the adjuster foot could be broken.
• Level: 25 mm or more
• Inclination: 10 degrees or more
9.4.1 Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and PFU or options.
• Perform this adjustment after you move the main body.
I-407
9.4.2 Adjustment flow

(1) Flow
Start installation Connectable
Unconnectable (Case A)
Main body height adjustment Unconnectable (Case B)

(on installation)
Height adjustment (PFU1)
Height adjustment Height adjustment

(Main body) Check the connection (Main body)
(Heighten the main body) (Main body - PFU1) (Lower main body)
Check the adjustment Check the adjustment

of main body NO NO of main body
Is the main body Is the main body
correctly heightened? correctly lowered?
YES YES
Height adjustment (PFU1) Height adjustment (PFU1)
Check the connection Check the connection

(Main body - PFU1) (Main body - PFU1)
Height adjustment (PFU2) Height adjustment (PFU2) Height adjustment (PFU2)
Check the connection Check the connection Check the connection

(PFU1 - PFU2) (PFU1 - PFU2) (PFU1 - PFU2)
Height adjustment (PFU3) Height adjustment (PFU3) Height adjustment (PFU3)
Check the connection Check the connection Check the connection

(PFU2 - PFU3) (PFU2 - PFU3) (PFU2 - PFU3)
Completed Unable to install*1
*1: The floor is not flat and you cannot install the machine. Install the main body on the flat floor.
(2) Height adjustment (main body)

For the adjustment procedure, refer to "I.9.4.3 Procedure".
(3) Height adjustment (PFU)

For the adjustment procedure, refer to "I.11.6 Height and tilt adjustment".
(4) Check the connection conditions

Note
• Check the following connection conditions.
• Between the main body and the 1st tandem PFU
• Between the 1st tandem PFU and the 2nd tandem PFU
• Between the 2nd tandem PFU and the 3rd tandem PFU
I-408
• Each check methods are same. Show the check method of the connection condition between the main body and the 1st tandem
PFU as an example.
(a) Check point

• Check the connection section [1] of the main body and PFU.
[1]
(b) Condition A
• After PFU [1] is adjusted, the right side of PFU [1] is up.
[2] [1] • The screw hole [3] on the connection metal plate of the main
body [2] and the screw hole [4] of PFU [1] do not align. Therefore,
the main body and PFU cannot be connected.
• The right side of PFU [1] dose not have mechanism to lower, so
you cannot lower it. Therefore, you need to lift up the main body
[2].
[3][4]
I-409
(c) Condition B
• After PFU [1] is adjusted, the right side of PFU [1] is low.
[2] [1] • The screw hole [3] on the connection metal plate of the main
body [2] and the screw hole [4] of PFU [1] do not align. Therefore,
the main body and PFU cannot be connected.
• If the right side of PFU [1] is upped completely, it cannot be
upped more. Therefore, you need to lower the main body [2].
[3][4]
9.4.3 Procedure
1. Remove the front side inside machine cooling fan assy. (Refer to G.
3.2.12 DC power supply unit/2 (DCPS/2), DC power supply unit/5
(DCPS/5))
2. Remove the cover table. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Upper cover, cover table)
3. Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to F.5.9.1 Replacing the waste
toner box)
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the toner box support plate [2] in
the arrow marked direction.
[2] [1]
I-410
5. In order to lift up each adjuster foot, rotate the adjuster foot/RtRr [1]
and the adjuster foot/LtRr [2] in the counter clockwise direction.
When you rotate each adjuster foot, insert a driver into the hole [3]
of the adjuster foot.
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2] [5] [1] 6. Rotate the nut/Lw [2] of the caster/RtFr [1] and the nut/Lw [4] of the
caster/LtFr [3] counterclockwise to loosen them.
7. In order to adjust the height of the main body roughly, rotate the nut
[5] of the caster/RtFr [1] and the nut [6] of the caster/LtFr [3].
• When you lift up the main body: Rotate the nut clockwise.
• When you lower the main body: Rotate the nut
counterclockwise.
Note
• Rotate the nut [5] of the caster/RtFr [1] and the nut [6] of
the caster/LtFr [3] slightly and alternately. When you rotate
the nut on one side at a time, the nut takes a load and it
cannot be rotated.
[6] [4] [3]
I-411
8. In order to adjust the height of the main body finely, rotate the nut
[2] of the caster/RtFr [1].
Note
• The height [3] from the caster mounting plate of the caster/
RtFr to the upper surface of the nut is the standard for the
main body height.
• Adjust the height [3] according to the connection condition
of PFU. (Refer to I.9.4.2 Adjustment flow)
• Adjustable range of the height [3]: 25.5 mm< Height
[3]<35.5 mm
• Standard height [3]: Height [3] = 30.5 mm ± 0.5 mm
• When you lift up the main body: Reduce the value of
the height [3]. (rotate the nut clockwise)
[1] [2] • When you lower the main body: Increase the value of
the height [3]. (rotate the nut counterclockwise)
[3]
[1] 9. Put the level [1] in front of the machine.

Note
• Be sure to put the level on the position which is shown in
the figure. If you put the level other than the position which
is shown in the figure, you cannot measure the skew
correctly.
10. Rotate the nut [3] of the caster/LtFr [2] until the skew of the left and
the right becomes 1/100 or less.
[3] [2]
I-412
[2] [1] 11. Rotate the nut/Lw [2] of the caster/RtFr [1] and the nut/Lw [4] of the
caster/LtFr [3] clockwise to tighten them.
[4] [3]
12. Rotate the adjuster foot/RtRr [1] and the adjuster foot/LtRr [2] in the
clockwise direction until they touch ground.
[2]
[1]
I-413
13. Put the level [1] on the right side of the machine.
Note
correctly.
[1]
14. Rotate the adjuster foot/RtRr [1] and the adjuster foot/LtRr [2] until
the skew of the front and rear becomes 1/100 or less.
• When you lift up the main body: Rotate the adjuster foot
clockwise.
• When you lower the main body: Rotate the adjuster foot
counterclockwise.
Note
• Rotate the adjuster foot/RtRr [1] and the adjuster foot/LtRr
[2] [2] for the same amount.
• Rotate the adjuster foot/RtRr [1] and the adjuster foot/LtRr
[2] slightly and alternately. When you rotate the adjuster
foot on one side at a time, the adjuster foot takes a load
and it cannot be rotated.
[1]
[1] 15. Put the level [1] in front of the machine.

Note
correctly.
I-414
16. Check the skew of the left and the right.
• The skew of the left and the right are not 1/100 or less: Rotate
the adjuster foot/LtRr [1] to adjust the height of the main body
until the skew of the left and the right becomes 1/100 or less.
After that, repeat steps 13 to 16 until the skew of the left, the
right, the front, and the rear become 1/100 or less.
• When the skew of the left and the right are 1/100 or less:
Proceed to step 17.
17. Install the parts which was removed in steps 1 to 4.
[1]
I-415
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 DF-626
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-626

(1) Usage
When you reinstall the DF, conduct this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Check the clearance (at the front and back) between the upper
side of the scanner and the projection [1] of DF.
Note
• Be sure to check that there is no clearance between the
upper side of the scanner and the projection [1] of DF.
[1]
2. When there is some space, conduct the following adjustment.

3. Turn the adjustment screw/Lt [1] and adjust the height.
• Clockwise: The left side moves up.
• Counterclockwise: The left side moves down.
4. When no more adjustment can be applied, turn the adjustment
screw/Rt [2] at the same time and adjust the height.
• Clockwise: The right side moves up.
• Counterclockwise: The right side moves down.
[2] [1]
10.2 Lead skew adjustment

(1) Usage
When an image skew occurs, conduct this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Check the lead skew of the adjustment chart. The shift amount of
the adjustment chart is regarded as "X".
X X
When the gap is positive When the gap is negative
I-416
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 DF-626
[1] 2. Place the adjustment chart [1] on the original feed tray. (The arrow
comes to the upper side.)
3. In the simplex mode, copy them 5 times in a row.

4. Align all 5 samples as illustrated, and check the shift. The shift
amount of the sample is regarded as "Y".
5. Calculate the gap between the shift amount of the adjustment
chart and the sample. Gap of the shift amount = Y - X Standard
Y Y value: 0 ± 2 mm
6. When the gap is not within the standard value, conduct the
following adjustment.
When the gap is positive When the gap is negative
7. Loosen the mounting screw [1] on the hinge at the right side from
[1] the front view.
8. When the value of the gap is positive, turn the adjustment screw
[2] counterclockwise and adjust it.
Note
• When you open the DF at 90 degrees, do not turn the
adjustment screw, or the adjustment screw [2] could be
damaged.
[2] • When the adjustment plate [3] comes to the left end, do
not turn the adjustment screw any more, or the
adjustment screw [2] could be damaged.
[3]
9. When the value of the gap is negative, turn the adjustment screw
[1] clockwise and adjust it.
[2]
10. After the completion of the adjustment, be sure to tighten the
adjustment screw [2] at the right hinge.
[1]
I-417
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PF-707/708
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-707/708

11.1 Scanner motor belt adjustment
11.1.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case
• When you remove the scanner motor assy
• When you re-stretch the scanner drive wire
11.1.2 Procedure
1. Tighten the scanner motor assy [1] temporarily using 3 screws [2].
[2]
[2] [2]
[1]
2. Place the retaining screw [1] of the scanner drive gear on the right,
[1] [4] and slide the scanner motor assy [2] 3 turns to the left, and then
check that the assy returns using the force of the spring [3].
3. Tighten the scanner motor assy using 3 screws [4] and secure the
assy.
[3]
[4] [4]
[2]
11.2 Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror unit
11.2.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case
• When you re-stretch the scanner drive wire
11.2.2 Procedure
1. While the exposure unit is installed temporarily to the drive wire,
[2]
move the mirror unit [1] to the center and hit it to the rail edge [2].
[2]
[1]
I-418
2. While the mirror unit is hit the rail edge, move the temporarily
[1] installed exposure unit [1] to the position where the exposure unit
hits to the right end of the scanner frame.
3. Move the exposure unit [1] and the mirror unit [2] slowly to the
[3]
position [3] where you can insert the screws to the exposure unit.
Note
[3] • At this time, be careful not to mis-align the positions of the
temporarily installed exposure unit and the mirror unit.
4. Tighten the screws fully and secure the exposure unit [1].
[1] [2]
11.3 Paper feed pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct the paper feed pressure adjustment when the multi-feed or jam in the tray section occurs frequently. There are 3 adjustment
methods; air volume setting, solenoid control setting and the upper limit sensor position adjustment.
CAUTION
• Since the machine operates with no paper feed check window in this adjustment, be sure not to put your hand there.
(2) Preparation
• Remove the paper feed check window of the tray that you want to adjust. (Refer to G.5.3.31 Paper feed check window)
• The inside of the tray 1 cannot be checked through the paper feed check window. Place the paper that you want to check on the tray 2,
and check.
(3) Multi-feed adjustment (J-1610, J-1849, J-2049)

1. Print out with the paper on which the jam occurs to check the paper movement through the paper feed check window.
Note
• To check the paper movement inside the tray, use the light.
2. Select [Machine] tab in the user mode and change [Paper setting] and [Air blow] to [Manual].
3. Configure [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] stronger than the current setting.
4. When the multi feed does not improve even if you conduct [Lead Edge Air Level Setting], configure [Side Air Level Setting] weaker.
Note
• When you change to the paper with no jam occurs after you conduct this adjustment, be sure to return the setting of [Paper
setting] and [Air blow] to [Auto].
(4) No feed adjustment (J-1601, J-1602, J-1613, J-1801 to J-1813, J-2001 to J-2013)
1. Configure [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] weaker than the current setting.
2. When the no feed does not improve even if you conduct [Lead Edge Air Level Setting], configure [Side Air Level Setting] stronger.
3. When you cannot fix the no feed by the step 1 and the step 2, raise the paper feed sensor position adjustment lever [1]. (Refer to PB.2.3.3
Air control)
(5) Paper lead edge buckle adjustment

1. Configure [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] weaker than the current setting.
(6) Feed failed jam adjustment (J-1601, J-1602, J-1613, J-1801 to J-1813, J-2001 to J-2013)
Note
• It is regarded not as the no feed jam but as the feed failed jam in the following case; the paper is fed until its lead edge reaches
around the exit roller when you pull out the tray.
1. Configure [Side Air Level Setting] weaker than the current setting.
I-419
11.4 Centering adjustment (for each tray)

(1) Usage
This adjustment is made when the centering of the paper varies in each paper that is supplied from the trays 1, 2 and 3. This adjustment is
made only when a mis-centering that exceeds the range of the auto correction occurs.
Note
• When a mis-centering of the same kind occurs in all the paper from the trays/1 to tray/3, be sure to conduct "I.11.5 Centering
Adjustment (PF)".
(2) Procedure
1. In order to disable the auto centering correction of front side,
[3] change the DIPSW26-4 to "1".
2. Perform simplex copying or printing without an automatic
correction and check the centering of the image.
3. Pull out the tray.
4. If any paper remaining, remove it.
5. If the paper guide [1] is at the small-size position, stretch the guide.
7. Move the paper guide [1]. According to the centering you checked
[2]
in step2, adjust the center position using the marking line [3].
9. Insert the paper, and place the tray.
[1] [1]
10. Make a simplex copy or print and check that the centering is within
the standard value (+/- 2 mm).
11. When not up to the standard value, repeat the step 3 to step 10.
12. In order to enable the auto centering correction of front side,
change the DIPSW26-4 to "0".
11.5 Centering Adjustment (PF)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a mis-centering of the same kind occurs in all the fed paper from the PF trays 1, 2 and 3. This adjustment is
made only when a mis-centering that exceeds the range of the auto correction occurs.
Note
• When the off-center of the paper is different for each of the trays1 to 3, be sure to conduct "I.11.4 Centering adjustment (for
each tray)".
I-420
(2) Procedure
1. In order to disable the auto centering correction of front side,
[1] change the DIPSW26-4 to "1".
2. Make a simplex copy or a print for each of the trays 1 to 3, and
[2] check the mis-centering of the image without the automatic
adjustment made.
[3] (SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug of the main
body from the power outlet.
4. Detach the PF from the main body. (Refer to the "installation
manual")
5. Remove the screw [2] of the PF positioning bracket/FrUp [1] on the
main body side, and then loosen the screws [3], 2 each.
6. Move the PF positioning bracket/FrUp [1] back and forth, and
adjust the center position referring to the amount of the
discrepancy that is found in the step2.
8. Remove the screw [5] of the PF positioning bracket/FrLw [4] on the
main body side, and then loosen the screws [6], 2 each.
9. Move the PF positioning bracket/FrLw [4] back and forth, and
adjust the center position referring to the amount of the
discrepancy that is found in the step2.
Note
• Move the PF positioning bracket/FrUp and PF positioning
bracket/FrLw for the same amount.

11. Connect the PF to the main body.
12. Connect the power plug of the main body to the power outlet and
[6] activate the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2)
of the main body.
13. Make a simplex copy or a print for each of the trays 1 to 3 to check
[5]
the mis-centering and see if it is within the standard value (±2
mm).
14. When not up to the standard value, repeat the step 3 to step 12.
[4] 15. In order to enable the auto centering correction of front side,
change the DIPSW26-4 to "0".
11.6 Height and tilt adjustment

11.6.1 Usage
Perform this adjustment when you install PF. Adjust the relative position between the main body and the height and the tilt of PF.
11.6.2 Procedure
(1) Install PF to the main body.
Note
• Refer to the installation manual for details.
I-421
1. Insert pins [3] of the PF positioning bracket/FrLw [1] and the PF
positioning bracket/Rr [2] to the hole of the positioning plate of PF
[2] [4] to install PF to the main body.
[3]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[4]
2. Check the gap [1], [2] between the PF positioning bracket of the
main body and the positioning plate of PF.
3. When there are gaps on both [1] and [2], the installation is not
enough. Push the PF to the back [3] until the gap on [1] or [2] is
[2] filled.
[3]
[1]
I-422
(2) Height and tilt adjustment

1. Rotate the height adjustment screw [2] of the caster/FrLt [1] and
adjust the height of PF. It goes up when you rotate the screw [2] to
the right, and goes down when you rotate to the left.
Note
• This height is the standard height of the whole PF.
• Do not change this caster height after you change the
height of other casters or the adjuster feet. When you
change this caster height lastly, the frame of PF is
possibly distorted and paper skew occurs.
[1] [2]
2. Adjust the height so that the triangle mark [2] of the PF positioning
brackets/FrLw [1] comes slightly below the upper edge [3] of the
positioning plate.
[2]
[1]
[3]
I-423
3. Push PF to the back and check the gap [1], [2] between the PF
positioning plate of the main body and the positioning plate of the
PF.
4. When there is any gap, rotate the height adjustment screw [4] of
[2] the PF caster/RrLt [3] and adjust the height. It goes up when you
rotate the screw [4] to the right, and goes down when you rotate to
the left.
• When there is a gap on [1]: Raise the caster\RrLt [3].
• When there is a gap on [2]: Raise the caster\RrLt [3].
5. Check that the status adjusted on step 2 is maintained. When the
position is misaligned, repeat step 1 to step 4.
[1]
[3] [4]
6. Down the adjuster foot/Fr and the adjuster foot/Rr [1] until they
touch the floor. Insert a driver to the hole [2]. The adjuster foot
goes down when you turn the driver to the direction of the arrow
[3].
Note
• When you turn the driver to the opposite direction of the
arrow, the adjuster foot raises.
• When you move PF, be sure to raise the adjuster foot to
the top.
[3]
[2] [1]
I-424
7. Adjust the height of the adjuster foot so that the positioning plate of
[1] PF [1] comes inside of two triangle marks [2] of the PF positioning
bracket/FrUp. Align the position of screw holes [3] at a time.
Note
• After the adjuster foot touches the floor, equalize the
adjustment amount for front and rear.
[2] [3]
8. Install 4 screws [1] to fix PF to the main body.
[1]
[1]
11.7 Tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the copy image tilt or the print image tilt is found in all the fed paper from the PF trays 1, 2 and 3.
Note
• Execute the test copy and print for all trays 1 to 3 after the adjustment and check that the image skew is adjusted.
I-425
(2) Procedure
outlet.
2. Detach the PF from the main body. ("Refer to the installation
manual")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the positioning plate [2].
4. Turn over the positioning plate [2], and then reinstall the
positioning plate [2] with 2 screws [1] which have been removed in
step 3.
Note
• When you reinstall, move the positioning plate [2] to the
right and left and adjust the skew referring to the marking
line [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
I-426
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 RU-511
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-511

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Rotate the screw [1] at each of 4 positions and conduct the height
adjustment. It goes up when you rotate the screw [1] to the right,
and goes down when you rotate to the left.
Note
• Be sure to make adjustments while considerate the height
between other optional devices.
[1]
12.2 Image scratch reduction

(1) Function
Image scratch is reduced when you release the roller pressure of the transfer paper density sensor section.
(2) Usage
Use this function when the image scratch occurs in the center area of an image that is printed on the thick coated paper.
(3) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Open the front door [1] and install the color sensor release lever to
the pressure release position [2].
Note
• Pressure release position [2]
• Pressure position [3]
• When the color sensor release lever is at the pressure
release position [2], the transfer paper density sensor
cannot detect the image density precisely.
Therefore, be sure to configure "Automatic Adjustment"
of the output paper density adjustment to OFF.
I-427
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 RU-510
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-510

(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.(Refer to G.9.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Loosen the 4 nuts of the caster [1] but not to be removed.
3. Adjust the height of 4 casters of RU-510 to equalize the upper gap
and lower gap.
It goes down when you rotate the screw [1] in the arrow-marked
direction, and goes up when you rotate the screw [1] in the reverse
direction.
4. Tighten the 4 loosened nuts [1].
[1]
[1]
I-428
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 FS-532
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-532

14.1 Staple position adjustment
14.1.1 Usage
Change the setting when you change the staple position
14.1.2 Procedure
1. The parallel staple position of FS-532 [1] is adjustable between 5.5
[3] mm to 9.5 mm.
2. When you adjust the position of the parallel staple, the position of
the corner staple also changes as follows.
[2]: 6.7 mm to 9.5 mm
[3]: 12.4 mm to 15.2 mm
[1] [2]
3. Pull out the stacker unit.(Refer to "G.10.3.12 Stacker unit")

4. Remove the staple scraps box [1] to the arrow marked direction.
[1]
I-429
5. Slide the staple unit assy [1] to the front side.
[10] 6. Remove the screws [2].
7. When you tighten the screw [3], the staple unit assy [1] moves to
the direction [4]. When you loosen the screw [3], the staple unit
assy [1] moves to the direction [5].
Note
• Be careful that the stapler unit assy [1] is possible to
[4] deform if the screw [3] is turned without the screw [2] being
removed.
[5] • Insert the driver to the hole [6] when you turn the screw [3].
• When the paper is exit to [7].
When you tighten the screw [3], the distance [8] between
the trailing edge of the paper and the staple position
[1] becomes longer.
When you loosen the screw [3], the distance [9] between
the trailing edge of the paper and the staple position
becomes shorter.
8. Refer to the division [10] of the mark and move up and down the
stapler unit assy [3] and adjust the position of the parallel staple.
Marked at 1 step = 1 mm interval.
[2]
[3]
[6]
[7]
[8] [9]
14.2 Main tray horizontal adjustment

14.2.1 Purpose
When the heights of the main tray differs between the front and rear, conduct this adjustment.
14.2.2 Procedure
Note
I-430
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), block the light of the tray
[1] [5] [2] upper limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up and down operation of the
[9] main tray [1], and lower the main tray to the position where the main
tray does not interfere the removing of the output cover/Fr2 [3].
[4] (SW1) of the main body.
[8] 4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the main tray cover/Fr [5].
5. Remove 2 screws [6] and remove the paper exit cover/Fr3 [7].
[3]
[10]
[9]
[6] [7]
8. Remove 2 screws [1], remove the belt stopper [2] and adjust the
[3] [2] [1] position of the belt [3].
I-431
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 SD-510
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-510

15.1 Adjustment for Staple Clinch Failure
15.1.1 Usage
When there is a problem in clinching of the stapler.
Note
• Be careful not to let FS fall down when you remove FS from the main body and pulling out the stacker unit from FS. It possibly
cause the injury.
15.1.2 Procedure
1. Make a copy in the staple mode.
2. Check if there is any failures in clinching staples as described in the
following paragraph.
• There is the bucking [1] of the staple.
[1]
• The floating [2] of the staple is within the standard value (L = 1
mm)
• The bending height [3] of the staple is within the standard value
L
[2] (L = 0.5 mm)
L=1mm
L L=0.5mm
[3]
3. If the clinching performance is out of the above specifications, make

[4] [3] the following adjustment.
4. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.11.3.4 SD unit)
5. Remove the clincher cover. (Refer to "F.13.3.1 Replacing the
stapler unit")
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the clincher [1].
Note
• Make sure that 2 injections [3] of the clincher do not come
off from 2 slotted holes [4].
• Be careful that the staple adjustment jig [6] cannot be
inserted if the 2 screws [2] are too loose.
7. Insert the staple adjustment jig [6] between the stapler unit [5] and
the clincher [1], and adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [1].
[5] [7] [2] [1] [6] Note
• When you insert the staple adjustment jig [6], be sure to
insert it from obliquely upward as indicated by the allow
mark [7].
8. Loosen 2 screws [2] to fasten the clincher [1].

9. Pull out the staple adjustment jig [6].
15.2 1st folding skew adjustment

15.2.1 Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the skew of the 1st folding is not within the standard value.
Note
• This adjustment affects the 1st Z-fold position. Thus, be sure to perform the following adjustment in the service mode after the
adjustment has been completed.
I.4.9.8 SD-510 Fold&Staple Staple Position (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
I.4.9.9 SD-510 Fold&Staple Fold Position (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
I.4.9.10 SD-510 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj. (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
I.4.9.11 SD-510 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.)
15.2.2 Procedure
1. Half-fold a sheet of A3 paper and measure the width "a" and "b" of the paper while you keep the paper exit direction [1]. Then confirm that
the folding width "c" is within the standard value.
Standard value: a-b = c = ±1 mm or less
When the value is not within the standard value, perform the following procedure.
I-432
c b
[1]
2. Pull out the SD unit.

Note
• Be careful that the position of the rear stopper [2] could
change in the middle of the adjustment if 2 screws [1] are
loosened excessively.
4. Lift the paper exit guide [3] and place the scale or something [4] on
the rear stopper [2], and then move the rear stopper [2] so that the
marking-off line [5] and the scale [4] come to the same position.
Note
• Be sure to move the rear stopper [2] with the belt [6].
[3] [5]
[6]
[1] [2] [4]
[1][2] [4] 5. Change the tilt of the stopper [3] so that both edges of the scale [1]
and the marking-off line [2] come to the same position.
6. Use the belt [4] to move the stopper [3] to the former position.
Note
• Be sure to move the rear stopper [3] with the belt [4].
[3]

[4] 8. Move the rear stopper [2] again and confirm that both edges of the
scale [3] and the marking-off line [4] are at the same position.
9. Repeat the steps 3 to 7 so that both edges of the scale and the
marking-off line come to the same position.
[3] [1] [2] [3]
I-433
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PK-522
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-522

16.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment
16.1.1 Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper that is fed from PI is not in parallel.
16.1.2 Procedure
1. After you align the paper in the main body paper feed tray with the
A
side guide plate and the rear guide plate, use the platen copy or
Service Mode and check the tilt
2. Conduct the paper skew adjustment when too much tilt is checked.
3. As a sample for checking the tilt of the punch hole position, conduct
3 sheets of punch mode printing for each simplex mode and duplex
C mode.
4. Measure the punch hole positions on 3 sheets of printed paper and
check the tilt.
Tilt of the punch hole position (%) = (A-B)/C
B 15kjf3c001na
5. Open the front door of FS.

[1] [2] 6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit cover [2].
7. Loosen 6 adjustment screws [1] of PK.

[2] [1] [1] [3] 8. Based on the division [2] of the mark, move the punch unit [3] to the
right and left only for the tilt amount of the punch hole position.
1 division: 0.5%
9. Tighten 6 adjustment screws [1].
10. Repeat step 3 to 9 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
11. Install the punch unit cover.
16.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position adjustment

16.2.1 Usage
This adjustment is conducted when the installation location of FS-532 is changed.
16.2.2 Procedure
1. Open the front door of the FS, and remove the punch unit cover
[2] [1] [3] [4] (Refer to "I.16.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment")
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] so that the pad section [3] of the punch unit
adjustment plate [2] slightly touches the oscillating plate [4] of the
punch unit.
Note
• When you let the pad section [3] slightly touch, be sure to
adjust the position of the punch unit adjustment plate [2]
and the oscillating plate [4] so that they are parallel [5] to
each other.
[1] [5]
I-434
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PK-522
3. Check the positional relationship between the marking-off line (rear
[2] [3] [6] side) [2] of the punch unit adjustment plate [1] and the side edge of
the metal frame [3], and between the marking-off line (front side) [4]
of the punch unit adjustment plate and the projection [5].
4. Push the punch unit adjustment plate [1] in the arrow-marked
direction and move the marking-off line at both front and rear sides
by 3 divides of the scale from the position where the pad section
slightly touches. Then, tighten 2 screws [6].
Note
• When you push the adjustment plate by 3 divides of the
scale, the side edge of the metal frame [3] could go beyond
the left edge of the marking-off line (rear side) [2]. Also the
projection [5] could contact with the adjustment plate [1]. In
this case, there are a possibility of the troubles with the
[1] [5] [4] installation position of the FS and the installation method
of the PK. For this reason, be sure to check them again.
I-435
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 PI-502
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502

17.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper that is fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
1. Place 3 sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in
[1] [2]
the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half and check the tilt of the punch holes.
[1]: The front is wider
[2]: The back is wider
15jff3c004na
3. Open the front door of FS, and then loosen the screw [2] of the
guide plate [1].
4. Adjust the guide plate [1] in accordance with the misalignment of
the punch holes based on the markings [3].
The back is wider: Move to [4]
The front is wider: Move to [5]
5. Tighten the screw [2].
6. Repeat step 1 to 5 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
15jff3c005na
17.2 PK punch position centering adjustment

17.2.1 Usage
This adjustment is conducted when the punch position of the paper from the PI is misaligned in the vertical direction.
17.2.2 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Up

1. Output the test pattern Number 16, and place the paper on the
cover sheet tray/Up of the PI.
2. Process the paper in the punch mode, and check the misalignment
[1] "a" between the center of the paper [1] and the center of the punch
holes [2].
a
[2]
15knf3c002nb
3. Release the hook [1] and remove the cover of the side guide/Fr or
[1] [2] the side guide/Rr [2].
I-436
4. Loosen 2 screws [1] of the side guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr, and
[2] [1] slide the side guide in the opposite direction to the shift direction
twice as far as the misalignment "a".
Example: If the punch position is shifted 1.5 mm backward, the side
guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr must be slid 3 mm forward.
[2]: 1 division = 2 mm
5. Tighten 2 screws [1], and fix the side guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr.
Note
• Be sure not to tighten 2 screws [2] too much.
6. Place the paper on the cover sheet tray/Up, and make sure that the
side guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr is mounted parallel to the paper.
7. Process the paper in the punch mode, and repeat the steps 1 to 6
until the misalignment of the punch hole position is improved.
8. Place the A4S paper on the cover sheet tray/Up, and conduct the
"Tray Size Adjustment" ("Stapler (PI) Adjustment") in the service
mode. (Refer to I.4.9.18 PI-502 Tray Size Adjustment (Staple
Finisher (PI) Adj.))
17.2.3 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Lw

1. Output the test pattern (Number 16), and place the paper on the
cover sheet tray/Lw of the PI.
2. Process the paper in the punch mode, and check the misalignment
[1] "a" between the center of the paper [1] and the center of the punch
holes [2].
a
[2]
15knf3c002nb
3. Release the hook [1] and remove the cover of the side guide/Fr or
[1] [2] the side guide/Rr [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and dismount the side guide/Fr or the side
[1] [2] [1] guide/Rr [2].
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the side guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr [1],
[1] [2] and slide the side guide in the opposite direction to the shift
direction twice as far as the misalignment "a".
Example: If the punch position is shifted 1.5 mm backward, the side
guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr [1] must be slid 3 mm forward.
6. Tighten 2 screws [2], and fix the side guide/Fr or side guide/Rr.
Note
I-437
7. Mount the side guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr with 2 screws [1].
[1] [2] [1] Note
8. Place the paper on the cover sheet tray/Up, and make sure that the
side guide/Fr or the side guide/Rr is mounted parallel to the paper.
9. Process the paper in the punch mode, and repeat the steps 1 to 6
until the misalignment of the punch hole position is improved.
10. Place the A4S paper on the cover sheet tray/Lw, and conduct the
"Tray Size Adjustment" ("Stapler (PI) Adjustment") in the service
mode. (Refer to I.4.9.18 PI-502 Tray Size Adjustment (Staple
Finisher (PI) Adj.))
I-438
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 LS-506
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-506

18.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an uneven stack occurs.
Note
• Before you start this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) activate by hand, check to
see if the A section in the left drawing is 1.5 mm to 3 mm.
Rear end retaining

part motor (M2)
Paper exit guide plate
2. When not in the range of an adjustment, remove the spring and

loosen the fixing screw of the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6). Then
move it from side to side and make an adjustment so that the
range of the SD stroke becomes 6 ± 0.5 mm.
rOO

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an uneven stack occurs with the B4 or larger paper.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid/2 (SD7) deactivate by hand, check
to see if the A section in the left drawing is 66 ± 2 mm.
ls502to3004c
2. When not in the range of an adjustment, loosen the fixing screw of

the paper press solenoid/2 (SD7) , move it up and down and make
an adjustments.
ls502to3005c

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an uneven stack occurs.
I-439
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) deactivate by hand, check
to see if the A section in the left drawing is 50.1 ± 1 mm.
ls502fs3006c

the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8), move it up from side to side and
make an adjustments.
ls502fs3007c
18.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an uneven stack occurs with the shift paper and the non-shift paper in the sort mode.
(2) Procedure
1. With the job partition solenoid (SD2) activate by hand, check to
NG OK see if the job partition blade [1] in the left drawing does not
protrude from the metal frame [2].
[1]
[2]
ls502to3009c

the job partition solenoid (SD2), move it from side to side and
make an adjustments.
ls502fs3008c
18.5 Horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
I-440
(2) Procedure
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body and move
down the stacker tray to the bottom.
2. Open the front door and pull out the hand cart.
3. Remove the arm part [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
4. Turn the 4 screws [1] to adjust the height. It goes up when you
rotate the screw [1] to the right, and goes down when you rotate it
to the left.
Note
[3] • Adjust the height so that the height becomes proper
compared with the main body and other options.
[4]
5. After the height adjustment is completed, put the level [2] on the
left stacker arm and adjust the height again to raise the front side
of the LS-506.
[2] Note
• Adjust the height with the caster on the front side of the
LS-506.
• Adjust the height until the bubble [3] of the level [2]
overlaps the line [4] at the front side.
[1]
18.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the grip standby position on the grip belt is improper to receive the paper or when the shift unit drive
abnormality occurs.
Note
• When the shift unit drive abnormality (C-1204: 1st tandem, C-1214: 2nd tandem) occurs after you replace the LS control board
(LSCB), conduct the following adjustment.
I-441
(2) Procedure
1. Activate the power of the main body.
2. Move the grip belt by hand and stop it at the position in which the
leading edge of the grip [1] is about 4 mm from the stack exit guide
plate [2].
a: approximately 4 mm
[2]
[1] ls502fs3010c
3. Rotate VR1 [1] on the LS control board (LSCB) fully to the left.
[1] ls502fs3011c
4. Rotate VR1 [1] to the right and stop it at the position in which LED2
[2] activate from flashing.
Note
• When LED2 is rotated too much from the turn-on position
to the flashing position, repeat the procedure starting at
Step2.
5. After completion of an adjustment, deactivate and activate the

power of the main body and check if the interval "a" between the
edge of the grip and the stack exit guide plate is 8 ± 2mm.
[2] [1] ls502fs3012c
6. When the interval is not within the standard value, change the
position of the sensor mounting plate [1]. Loosen 2 screws [2] and
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
I-442
slide the sensor mounting plate to the right [3] to widen the interval
"a". Slide the plate to the left [4] to narrow the interval.
18.7 Stacker tray height adjustment

18.7.1 Purpose
• Adjust the height of the stacker tray if it is not within the standard value.
18.7.2 Procedure
1. Remove the arm part. (Refer to I.18.5 Horizontal adjustment)
[1] 2. Activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body and check
that the stacker tray has stopped at the top.
Note
• Remove paper on the stacker tray.
5. Open the front door [1] and pull out the hand cart [2].
[2]
6. Measure the distance A.
[1] • A: Distance from the guide fold [1] to tray upper surface [2]
7. Check if the distance A is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 40.5 ± 1 mm
[2]
8. Put the hand cart into the main body and close the front door.
9. Plug the power plug of the main body in the power outlet.
10. Activate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch (SW1)
of the main body.
11. Move down the stacker tray to the bottom.
[1] 14. Open the front door and pull out the hand cart.
15. Loosen 2 screws [2] on the sensor mounting plate [1].
16. Move the sensor mounting plate [1] vertically and parallel.
Note
[3] • When you move it to the upper side [3], the distance A
becomes shorter.
• When you move it to the lower side [4], the distance A
[4] becomes longer.
18. Plug the power plug of the main body in the power outlet.
[2] 19. Activate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch (SW1)
of the main body.
20. Move up the stacker tray to the top and measure the distance A.
21. Repeat the step 10 to step 19 until the distance becomes the
standard value.
Note
• Make sure to mount the arm part after the adjustment.
18.8 Stacker tray levelness adjustment

18.8.1 Purpose
• Adjust the height of the stacker tray when the stacker tray has a skew.
I-443
Note
• Be sure to complete the "Stacker Tray Height Adjustment" before this adjustment. (Refer to I.18.7 Stacker tray height adjustment)
18.8.2 Procedure
1. Remove the arm part. (Refer to I.18.5 Horizontal adjustment)
[1] 2. Activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body and check
that the stacker tray has stopped at the top.
Note
• Remove paper on the stacker tray.
5. Open the front door [1] and pull out the hand cart [2].
[2]
6. Measure the distance A and distance B.
[1] • A: Distance between the guide fold [1] and the tray upper
surface [2]
• B: Distance between the framework fold [3] and the tray upper
surface [2]
7. Check if the distance B is within the standard value.
Standard value: B = A ± 1 mm
B A
[3] [2]
8. Remove the rear cover/Up and rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.14.2.2

[2] [1] Cover)
9. Loosen the 4 screws [2] on the wire adjustment plate [1] on the rear
side.
10. Move the wire adjustment plate [1] vertically and parallel based on
[3] the mark [3].
[4] Note
• When you move it to the upper side [4], the distance B
[5] becomes shorter.
• When you move it to the lower side [5], the distance B
becomes longer.
11. Measure the distance A and distance B.

[2] 12. Repeat the step 6 to step 10 until the distance becomes the
standard value.
13. Mount the arm part, rear cover/Up, and rear cover/Lw after the
adjustment.
I-444
I-445
bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 FD-503
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503

19.1 Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment
(1) Usage
When the roller solenoid/1 (SD5), roller solenoid/2 (SD6), roller solenoid/3 (SD7), roller solenoid/4 (SD8) are changed, be sure to conduct this
adjustment.
Note
• The following adjustment steps show the steps for the roller solenoid/2 (SD6). The steps for the roller solenoid/1 (SD5), roller
solenoid/3 (SD7) and roller solenoid/4 (SD8), are the same as the steps for the roller solenoid/2.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the roller solenoid/2 (SD6) [1].
2. Measure the distance A [5] between the end face of the vertical
conveyance roller/Lt [3] and the right side (the opposite of the
paper feeding side) of the guide plate [4] when the roller solenoid/2
[1] (SD6) [1] is activated, and then tighten the screw [2] after you
adjust the distance so that it becomes the standard value.
[4] Standard value: A = 0 mm to 1.5 mm
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
A
[5]
[4] fd501fs3001c
19.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when you replace the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18).
I-446
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] on the 2nd folding roller solenoid mounting
[1] plate [1].
2. Measure the gap A which the vertical conveyance roller/Lt [4] is
out from the guide plate [5] when the 2nd folding roller solenoid
(SD18) [3] is ON.
[2] 3. Adjust the mounting position so that the gap A is within the
standard value that is shown in the following table, and then
loosen 3 screws [2].
Standard value: A = 4 mm to 5 mm
[3]
[4]
[4]
A
[5]
[4] a0h0f3c002ca
19.3 Punch centering adjustment

(1) Usage
In the paper width adjustment (refer to "I.4.9.20 FD-503 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.)"), if the horizontal position of the
punch holes cannot be adjusted within the specification, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Disconnect the connector [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove
the cord support board/A [3].
[1]
[2] fd501fs3002c
A [1] [2] B 2. With the alignment plate/Fr [1] and the alignment plate/Rr [2]
moved to the center, loosen the 2 screws [3].
3. Measure the distances A and B using a ruler and adjust the
positions of the alignment plate/Fr [1] and the alignment plate/Rr
[2] so that the distances A and B become equal, and then tighten 2
screws [3].
reverse.
[3] fd501fs3003c
I-447

(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
1. Insert the driver to the holes [2] and [3] on each of the 4 ratchet
material [1], move it back and forth and conduct the horizontal
adjustment. It goes up with the hole [2] and goes down with the
hole [3].
Note
between the main body and other optional devices.
• Be sure not to raise the height too much, otherwise the
bolt comes off. (maximum ± 5 mm)
• Be sure that the caster is contacting installation surface,
otherwise the ratchet does not work. In this case, adjust
the casters which are on the ground first to get the
casters spinning to be on the ground.
[1] [2] [3]
a0h0f3c001ca
19.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size detection of PI does not work properly.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Install the regulation plate rack A [1] and the regulation rack B [2]
so that they are aligned with the reference hole of the detection
gear [3].
[3] [2] fd501fs3008c
I-448
[3] [1] 2. Check the paper size VR [2] to ensure it is held by the 2 bosses on
the paper size VR mounting plate [1].
3. Install the paper size VR [2] so that the notch of its center hole fit
with the notch of the detection gear [3].
[2] fd501fs3009c
[1] [2] 4. Check to see if the regulation plate rack A [1], the regulation plate
rack B [2], the hole position of the detection gear [3] and the notch
position of the paper size VR [4] are in the correct position
respectively.
[3]
[4] fd501fs3010c
19.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when multi-feed or the paper jam occurs when the machine feeds the paper from the PI.
(2) Procedure
1. Slide 2 papers feed arm fixing levers [1] to inside, and insert the
[4] shafts [2] into the holes [3] in the paper feed arm to secure the
paper feed arm [4].
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
fd501fs3011c
I-449
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when SD is not in a horizontal position.
(2) Procedure
1. Insert the driver to the holes [2] and [3] on each of the 6 ratchet
material [1], move it back and forth and conduct the horizontal
adjustment. It goes up with the hole [2] and goes down with the
hole [3].
Note
between the main body and other optional devices.
• Be sure not to raise the height too much, otherwise the
bolt comes off. (maximum ± 5 mm)
• Be sure that the caster is contacting installation surface,
otherwise the ratchet does not work. In this case, adjust
the casters which are on the ground first to get the
casters spinning to be on the ground.
[1] [2] [3]
a0h2f3c001ca
20.2 Folding skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew in the center fold.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the center folding operation for 5 sheets of A3 paper or
the paper of 11 x 17 size and check their skew "a".
Standard value a = ± 1.5 mm
a 15anf3c002na
I-450
[3] [6] [2] [1] [8] 2. Open the front door/Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Slide the adjusting bracket [2] to right and left and loosen the
screw [1]. Then adjust the alignment stopper/Rr2 [3] back and
forth, and tighten the screw [1].
Note
• If the folding pattern on the paper exited to the direction of
the bundle exit tray front side [4] is [5], slide the adjusting
bracket [2] to the arrowed direction [6].
• If the folding pattern is [7], slide the adjusting bracket [2]
to the arrowed direction [8].
• When you slide the adjusting bracket [2] to 1 mm right and
left, the alignment stopper/Rr2 [3] moves 1/3 mm back and
forth.
4. Return the folding unit to the original position and repeat the steps
1 through 3 until the standard value can be obtained.
[5] [7]
[4] a0h2f3c002ca
20.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is for adjusting the misalignment of the second folding position in tri-folding.
Note
• This adjustment is to adjust the variation per each folding. Adjust the second folding position by following "I.4.9.35 SD-506 Tri-
fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)"
• Be sure that the adjusting position is vary from the number of folding sheets.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the tri-folding with A4S or 8 1/ x 11S, and check if the
2
interval "A" between the first folding and the second folding is
within the standard value.
Standard value A = 102.0 mm ± 3 mm (A4S)
Standard value A = 96.1 mm ± 3 mm (81/2 x 11S)
a0h2f3c003ca
I-451
[2] [1] 2. Open the front door/Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and move the stopper [2] in parallel back and
forth referring to the mark [3].
Note
• When you move to the front side [4], the length between
the folding gets longer.
• When you move to the back side [5], the length between
the folding gets shorter.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the standard value is obtained.
[4] [3] [5] a0h2f3c004ca
20.4 Staple position adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the misalignment between the staple position and the folding position.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the saddle stitching operation for 25 to 30 sheets of A3
paper or the paper of 11 x 17 size and check the misalignment "a"
between the staple position and the folding position.
Standard value a = ± 1 mm
When the value is not within the standard value, conduct "(2).
Adjustment Procedure/1" then "(3). Adjustment Procedure/2" in
this order.
a
15anf3c005na
(3) Adjustment Procedure/1

Note
• Be sure not to adjust over the allowable value since only the saddle stitching hold/Up is adjusted but the saddle stitching hold/
Lw is not.
• When you cannot adjust it by this simple adjustment (fine adjustment), be sure to conduct "(3). Adjustment Procedure/2".
1. Open the front door/Lt.
2. Install the M4 screw [1] that is obtained from the exterior and so on
[2]
[1] into the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold/Up
[2] with your fingers. Then tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
• Do not tighten the screw [1] too tight. Stop tightening
when it is contacted.
[4]
[5]
4. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold/Up [2] on both of the stapler/Rt and stapler/Lt for the length of
the misalignment "a".
Note
• When you rotate the screw [1] for 1 revolution the saddle
stitching hold/Up moves 0.7 mm (same width with staple).
• When the screw [1] is tightened, the staple position moves
forward. When the screw [1] is loosened, the staple
position moves backward.
5. While you push the saddle stitching hold/Up [2] to the allowed
[3] a0h2f3c005ca
direction [5] and contact it to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4].
6. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
7. Conduct a test print in procedure A, and repeat steps 2 to 6 until
the standard value is obtained.
I-452
(4) Adjustment Procedure/2

1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
2. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers and lock the clinchers [2].
[1] [2] 15anf3c006na
[10] [4] [2] [3] [1] 3. Install the M4 screw [1] that is obtained from the exterior and so on
into the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold/Up
[2] with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
4. Loosen the screws [4], [5] and [6].

5. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] for the length of the misalignment "a".
Note
• When you rotate the screw [1] for 1 revolution, the saddle
stitching hold/Up moves 0.7 mm (same width with staple).
6. While you push the mounting plate [7] to the arrow-marked

direction [9] and contacting the saddle stitching hold/Up [2] to the
[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] a0h2f3c006ca
screw [1], tighten the screws [5].
7. While you push the saddle stitching hold/Up [2] to the arrow-
marked direction [10] and contact the saddle stitching hold/Up to
the screw [1], tighten the screw [4], and then tighten the screw [6].
8. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
9. Return the saddle stitching unit, and then repeat steps 2 to 8 until
the standard value can be obtained.
20.5 Stapler position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a broken staple, a bent staple, or a defective staple occurs in stapling.
This adjustment adjusts the phase lag with the clincher at front and rear.
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] [3] [1] [2] 1. Carry out stapling operation and check that the broken staple, the
bent staple, or the defective staple does not occur. If the defective
occurs, conduct the following procedure.
2. Open the front door/Lt.
3. Install the M3 screw about 20 mm long [3] into the adjustment
screw hole [2] of the stapler mounting bracket [1] with fingers and
tighten it slightly until it is contacted to the supporting bracket [4].
Note
4. Loosen a screw [5].

5. Rotate the screw [3], move the anteroposterior position of the
stapler and adjust the phase lag with the clincher.
[5] Note
a0h2f3c007ca
• When you rotate the screw [3] for 1 revolution, the stapler
moves 0.5 mm.
6. While you push the stapler mounting bracket [1] to the back side
[6] and contact the screw [3] to the supporting bracket [4], tighten
the screw [5].
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the defective staple does not occur.

Bizhub PRESS C1100 - C1085 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub PRESS C1100 - C1085 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-626..........................................................................................PA-1

PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-707/708/HT-506.......................................................................PB-1

PC THEORY OF OPERATION FA-502..........................................................................................PC-1

PD THEORY OF OPERATION RU-516..........................................................................................PD-1

PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-511/HM-101............................................................................PE-1

PF THEORY OF OPERATION RU-510..........................................................................................PF-1

PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-532..........................................................................................PG-1

PH THEORY OF OPERATION SD-510..........................................................................................PH-1

PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-522.............................................................................................PI-1

PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502.............................................................................................PJ-1

PK THEORY OF OPERATION MK-732..........................................................................................PK-1

PL THEORY OF OPERATION LS-506............................................................................................PL-1

PM THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503.........................................................................................PM-1

PO THEORY OF OPERATION SD-513.........................................................................................PO-1

PP THEORY OF OPERATION CR-101..........................................................................................PP-1

PQ THEORY OF OPERATION TU-503..........................................................................................PQ-1

PR THEORY OF OPERATION FD-504..........................................................................................PR-1

PS THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503..........................................................................................PS-1

PT THEORY OF OPERATION MK-737..........................................................................................PT-1

PU THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501..........................................................................................PU-1

PV THEORY OF OPERATION GP-502..........................................................................................PV-1

S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE VER.1.8 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)................................S-1

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Version 1.7

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Version 1.8

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C1100/C1085 Version 2.0

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention

• Do not use any part not specified by KM.

• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

• Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.

3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

3.3.1 Power Supply

and the product and another electrical

(2) Ground Connection

(3) Power Plug and Cord

3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(2) When not Using the Product for a long time

3.3.3 After Service

(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On

(3) Safety Checkpoints

(4) Handling of Consumables

(5) Handling of Service Materials

3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

4.1 Warning indications inside the machine